Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats


1987 — 1989 University Catalog 

Available from: Titan Bookstore, Fullerton, CA 
92634 

Price: $3.54 plus sales tax. 

Add $1.50 for postage and handling if ordered by 
mail. 

University Address 

When corresponding with the university, write to the 
specific office, school or department — 

California State University, Fullerton 

Fullerton, CA 92634 

Telephone information (714) 773-2011 

Changes in Rules and Policies 

Although every effort has been made to assure the 
accuracy of the information in this catalog, students 
and others who use this catalog should note that 
laws, rules and policies change from time to time 
and that these changes may alter the information 
contained in this publication. Changes may come in 
the form of statutes enacted by the Legislature or 
rules and policies adopted by the Board of Trustees 
of The California State University, by the chancellor 
or designee of The California State University, or by 
the president or designee of the institution. Further, 
it is not possible in a publication of this size to in- 
clude all of the rules, policies and other information 
which pertain to the student, the institution, and The 
California State University. More current or com- 
plete information may be obtained from the appropri- 
ate department, school or administrative office. 

Nothing in this catalog shall be construed, operate 
as or have the effect of an abridgment or a limitation 
of any rights, powers or privileges of the Board of 
Trustees of The California State University, the 
chancellor of the California State University or the 
president of the campus. The Board of Trustees, the 
chancellor and the president are authorized by law 
to adopt, amend or repeal rules and policies which 
apply to students. This catalog does not constitute 
a contract or the terms and conditions of a contract 
between the student and the institution or The Cali- 
fornia State University. The relationship of the stu- 
dent to the institution is one governed by statute, 
rules and policy adopted by the Legislature, the 
Board of Trustees, the chancellor, the president and 
their duly authorized designees. 

Effective date: August 24, 1987 


California State 
University, Fullerton 


Accreditations and 
Associations 

Accreditation Board for Engineering and 
Technology, Inc. 

Accrediting Council on Education in Journalism and 
Mass Communications 

American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of 
Business 

American Chemical Society 
American Speech and Hearing Association 
Council of Graduate Schools in the United States 
National Association for Foreign Student Affairs 
National Association of Schools of Art and Design 
National Association of Schools of Music 
National Association of Schools of Public Affairs and 
Administration 

National Association of Schools of Theatre 
National Athletic Trainers Association 
National Council for Accreditation of Teacher 
Education 

National League of Nursing 
National University Continuing Education 
Association 

Southern California Consortium on International 
Studies 

Teacher Preparation and Licensing 
Universities Field Staff International 
Western Association of Graduate Schools 
Western Association of Schools and Colleges 


s-L-»Drary 

California State University# Fullerton 



Nondiscrimination Policy 

Sex 

The California State University does not discriminate 
on the basis of sex in the educational programs or 
activities it conducts. Title IX of the Education 
Amendments of 1972, as amended, and the adminis- 
trative regulations adopted thereunder prohibit dis- 
crimination on the basis of sex in education pro- 
grams and activities operated by California State 
University, Fullerton. Such programs and activities 
include admission of students and employment. In- 
quiries concerning the application of Title IX to pro- 
grams and activities of California State University, 
Fullerton may be referred to Rosamaria Gomez- 
Amaro, the campus officer assigned the administra- 
tive responsibility of reviewing such matters or to 
the Regional Director of the Office of Civil Rights, 
Region 9, 221 Main Street, 10th Floor, San Francis- 
co, CA 94106. 


Handicap 

The California State University does not discriminate 
on the basis of handicap and is in compliance with 
Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as 
amended, and the regulations adopted thereunder. 

More specifically. The California State University 
does not discriminate in admission or access to, or 
treatment or employment In, Its programs and activi- 
ties. Rosamaria Gomez-Amaro, Director of Affirma- 
tive Action, has been designated to coordinate the 
efforts of California State University, Fullerton to 
comply with the act and Its Implementing regula- 
tions. Inquiries concerning compliance may be ad- 
dressed to this person at California State University, 
Fullerton, Langsdorf Hall 101, Fullerton, CA 92634, 
(714) 773-3951. 


Race, Color or National Origin 

The California State University complies with the re- 
quirements of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 
and the regulations adopted thereunder. No person 
shall, on the grounds of race, color or national origin, 
be excluded from participation in, be denied the ben- 
efits of, or be otherwise subjected to discrimination 
under any program of The California State Universi- 
ty. 


This Catalog 

Within this catalog may be found general academic 
and administrative information as well as specific 
descriptions of the departments, their majors and 
the courses offered In each. The first major part con- 
tains orienting information such as the calendar, ma- 
terials on the California State University, an over- 
view of Cal State Fullerton and facts about student 
services and activities on the campus. 

The subsequent sections of the catalog are con- 
cerned with: admission, registration, records and 
regulations; academic advisement; and university 
courses. The next sections describe the depart- 
ments and the programs of study and courses they 
offer. The final part of the catalog contains a listing 
of the faculty and administration. An index may be 
found at the end to help the reader locate specific 
items. 

Because this catalog must be prepared well ahead 
of the academic year it covers, changes in some 
programs and rules occur. The class schedule and 
subsequent errata sheets are the final authority in 
regard to classes offered, instructors and revisions 
of regulations. This publication may be bought for a 
small fee from the Titan Bookstore. 

Credits 

The California State University, Fullerton, Catalog is 
prepared under the supervision of the Associate 
Vice President for Academic Programs and Dean of 
Graduate Studies, Dennis Berg. 


Editor/ Project Coordinator Gladys Fleckles 

Catalog Design Capps Design 

Cover Photographs Denise Stone 

Interior Photographs Charles Blatten 

John Blod 
Denise Stone 


Selected photographs appear through the courtesy 
of: 

Dally Titan 

Office of Alumni Affairs 
CSUF Media Center 

Associate Editors Pam Migliore 

Barbara Shoho 
Susan Garrison 

Proofreading Richard Bailey 

Curriculum Editing School Deans 

Department Chairs 
Program Coordinators 
Planning and Printing Times Mirror Press 


2 


President’s Message 


Your Interest in California State University, Fullerton 
comes at an exciting time for the university and 
those whom It serves. This is an Important period of 
growth and change-the campus Is undergoing a ma- 
jor physical transformation as part of Its ongoing ef- 
forts to improve and broaden service to students 
and the community. 

During the two years that this catalog Is in effect, we 
will have opened our first on-campus residence halls 
and be well along on completing additional class- 
rooms, laboratories and offices in the Engineering 
Center. 

Adding further to the transformation will be an on- 
campus hotel /conference center, a gerontology 
center and a sports complex featuring a multipur- 
pose stadium as well as a baseball pavillion. 

Ours is a young, vital university committed to aca- 
demic excellence and dedicated to serving the citi- 
zens of Orange County and the region. Our distin- 
guished faculty of scholars, selected from 
graduates of the best universities in the nation and 
the world, is committed first and foremost to teach- 
ing, followed by dedication to research, scholarly 
and creative activity, and service to the community. 

Our students, numbering more than 24,000, come 
from the state, the nation and the world, giving the 
university an increasingly international flavor. The 
campus is ethnically diverse and reflects the many 
different cultures of the region. 

We are proud that in the university’s relatively short 
history our curriculum has grown to Include 44 under- 
graduate majors and 41 graduate degrees, plus a 
variety of credential and certificate programs. The 
spirit of our campus Is warm and friendly, with faculty 
members actively Involved In giving each student the 
finest academic experience possible. 

We care about our students as citizens, as scholars 
and as human beings preparing to serve society. We 
hope you will join us soon to share In the challenge 
and excitement of the Cal State Fullerton experi- 
ence. 


Jewel Plummer Cobb 
President 

California State University, Fullerton 


3 



Table of Contents 


President’s Message 3 

Academic Calendars 10 

The California State University 13 

California State University, Fullerton 17 

University Advisory Board 20 

Community Minority Affairs Advisory 
Council 20 

University Administration 21 

CSUF Foundation 24 

CSUF Alumni 24 

Community Support Groups 25 

ACADEMIC SERVICES 

Academic Affairs 28 

Vice President for Academic Affairs 28 

Academic Programs 29 

Admissions and Records 29 

Analytical Studies 29 

Computer Center 29 

Extended Education 30 

Graduate Studies 30 

Faculty Affairs and Records 30 

Faculty Research 30 

Television & Media Support Services . 30 

Library 31 

Student Academic Affairs 32 

Academic Advisement Center 32 

Athletic Academic Services 32 

Center for Internships and Cooperative 
Education 33 

Educational Opportunity Program 33 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 33 
Student Academic Services 33 

Student Affirmative Action 34 

University Outreach Services 34 

Writing Assistance Center 34 

Honors Programs 35 

Dean’s Honor List 35 

General Education Honors 35 

Honors at Entrance 35 

Honors at Graduation 35 

Honor Societies 36 

President’s Opportunity Scholars 36 

President’s Scholars Program 36 


Institutes and Centers 37 

California Desert Studies Consortium 37 

Center for Economic Education 37 

Center for Governmental Studies 37 

Center for International Business 38 

Child and Infant Studies Center 38 

Field Services and Professional 
Development Center 38 

Institute for Early Childhood Education 38 
Institute for Geophysics 38 

Institute for Molecular Biology and 
Nutrition 38 

Institute for Research In Reading and 

Related Disciplines 39 

Laboratory for Phonetic Research 39 

Southern California Ocean 
Studies Consortium 39 

Sport and Movement Institute 39 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 39 

STUDENT SERVICES AND ACTIVITIES 
Student Services 42 

Vice President for Student Services 42 

Academic Appeals 42 

Adult Reentry Center 43 

Career Development Center 43 

Financial Aid Office 44 

Handicapped Student Services 44 

Health and Counseling Services 44 

Housing Services and Residential Life 44 
International Education and Exchange 45 
School Based Student Services 45 

Testing and Research 45 

Women’s Center 46 

Student Activities 47 

University Activities Center 48 

Associated Students 49 

Child Care Center 49 

University Center 50 

University Recreation Program 50 

Intercollegiate Athletics 52 

Conference Affiliations and Memberships 52 
Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 53 

Women’s Intercollegiate Athletics 54 


4 


Resources 55 

Art Gallery 55 

Dance Repertory Threatre 55 

Daily Titan 55 

Energy Consortium 56 

Fullerton Arboretum 56 

Herbarium 56 

Microcomputer Resource Center 56 

Oral History Program 56 

Orange County Now 56 

Reading Clinic 57 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 57 

Theatre Department Productions 57 

Titan Shops 57 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 58 

University Channel 58 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

School Advisement Offices 61 

Academic Advisement Center 61 

Departmental Academic Advisement 62 

Preprofessional Programs 62 

Health Professions 63 

Answers to Your Questions 64 

ADMISSIONS POLICIES 

Undergraduate Students 66 

Freshmen Requirements 66 

English Placement Test (EPT) 68 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 69 

Residency Requirements 69 

Application Procedures 72 

Admission Requirements 74 

First-Time Freshman 74 

Undergraduate Transfer Students 75 

International Students 75 

Transfer Credits 77 

REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 

Registration Information 80 

Schedule of Fees 82 

Financial Aid 85 

UNIVERSITY REGULATIONS 

Enrollment Regulations 90 

Grading Policies 91 

Grading System 91 

Administrative Grading Symbols 92 

Student Records 94 

Continuous Residency Regulations 97 


Stop-Out Policy 97 

Leave of Absence 98 

Complete Withdrawal from the University 98 
Retention, Probation and Disqualification 98 

Student Conduct 98 

Student Rights 100 

GRADUATE REGULATIONS 

Graduate Application Procedures 104 

Graduate Admissions 106 

Requirements for the Master’s Degree 107 
Graduate Enrollment Policies 110 

Graduate Academic Standards 113 

Theses and Projects 114 

Steps in the Master’s Degree 117 

ACADEMIC PROGRAMS 

Degree Programs 120 

Graduation Requirements for the 

Bachelor’s Degree 121 

General Education 124 

Teaching Credential Programs 132 

Extended Education 144 

International Programs 145 

Special Major Program 147 

Course Numbering Code 148 

Cross-Disciplinary University Programs 150 
Library Courses 150 

CURRICULA 

SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 153 

Art 155 

Music 166 

Theatre and Dance 178 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 189 

Accounting 192 

Business Administration Degrees 198 

Economics 206 

Finance 212 

International Business Program 215 

Management 218 

Management Information Systems 222 

Management Science 223 

Marketing 229 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING AND 
COMPUTER SCIENCE 233 

Computer Science 235 

Engineering 240 

Civil Engineering and Engineering 

Mechanics 244 


5 


Electrical Engineering 248 

Mechanical Engineering 254 

Master of Science in Engineering 259 

SCHOOL OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND 
COMMUNITY SERVICE 262 

Child Development Program 264 

Counseling 267 

Educational Administration 271 

Elementary and Bilingual Education 275 

Health Education, Physical Education 

and Recreation 282 

Human Services Program 291 

Military Science Program 294 

Nursing 296 

Reading 300 

Secondary Teacher Education 303 

Special Education 307 

SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL 
SCIENCES 312 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 314 

American Studies 317 

Anthropology 321 

Chicano Studies 327 

Communications 330 

Criminal Justice 337 

English/Comparative Literature 340 

Environmental Studies 348 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 350 

Geography 367 

Gerontology 372 

History 373 

Latin American Studies Program 379 

Liberal Studies Program 382 


Linguistics 384 

Pacific Rim Studies 389 

Philosophy 390 

Political Science 394 

Psychology 402 

Religious Studies 410 

Russian and East European Area 

Studies Program 415 

Social Sciences Program 416 

Sociology 418 

Speech Communication 423 

Women’s Studies 431 

SCHOOL OF NATURAL SCIENCE AND 
MATHEMATICS 432 

Biological Science 434 

Chemistry & Biochemistry 442 

Geological Sciences 450 

Mathematics 455 

Physics 462 

Science Education Program 466 

Special Programs 469 

Astronomy 469 

Earth Science 469 

Geochemistry 469 

Marine Sciences 469 

Medical Biology 470 

Meteorology 470 

Oceanography 470 

Physical Science 470 

FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION 472 

INDEX 504 

CAMPUS MAP Back Cover 


6 


Subject Contents 


Academic Advisement 61 

Academic Advisement Center 61 

Academic Affairs 28 

Academic Appeals 42 

Academic Calendars 10 

Academic Programs 119 

Academic Services 27 

Accounting 192 

Administrative Grading Symbols 92 

Admission Requirements 74 

Admissions Policies 65 

Admissions and Records 29 

Adult Reentry Center 43 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 314 

American Studies 317 

Analytical Studies 29 

Answers to Your Questions 64 

Anthropology 321 

Application Procedures 72 

Art 155 

Art Gallery 55 

Associated Students 49 

Astronomy 469 

Athletic Academic Services 32 

Biological Science 434 

Business Administration Degrees 198 

CSUF Alumni 24 

CSUF Foundation 24 

California Desert Studies Consortium 37 

Career Development Center 43 

Center for Economic Education 37 

Center for Governmental Studies 37 

Center for International Business 38 

Center for Internships and 

Cooperative Education 33 

Chemistry & Biochemistry 442 

Chicano Studies 327 

Child Care Center 49 

Child Development Program 264 

Child and Infant Studies Center 38 

Civil Engineering and Engineering 

Mechanics 244 

Communications 330 

Communicative Disorders 424 


Community Minority Affairs Advisory 

Council 20 

Community Support Groups 25 

Comparative Literature 340 

Computer Center 29 

Computer Science 235 

Conference Affiliations and Memberships 52 
Continuous Residency Regulations 97 

Counseling 267 

Course Numbering Code 148 

Criminal Justice 337 

Cross-Disciplinary University Programs 150 
Curricula 151 

Daily Titan 55 

Dance Repertory Theatre 55 

Dean’s Honor List 35 

Degree Programs 120 

Departmental Academic Advisement 62 

Earth Science 469 

Economics 206 

Educational Administration 271 

Educational Opportunity Program 33 

Electrical Engineering 248 

Elementary and Bilingual Education 275 

Energy Consortium 56 

Engineering 240 

English Placement Test (EPT) 68 

English/Comparative Literature 340 

Enrollment Regulations 90 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 69 

Environmental Studies 348 

Ethnic Studies 314 

Extended Education 144 

Faculty Affairs and Records 30 

Faculty and Administration 472 

Faculty Research 30 

Field Services and Professional 

Development Center 38 

Finance 212 

Financial Aid 85 

Financial Aid Office 44 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 350 

Freshman Requirements 66 

Fullerton Arboretum 56 

General Education 124 

General Education Honors 35 


7 


Geography , 367 

Geological Sciences 450 

German 350 

Gerontology 372 

Grading Policies 91 

Grading System 91 

Graduate Academic Standards 113 

Graduate Admissions 106 

Graduate Studies 30 

Graduate Application Procedures 104 

Graduate Enrollment Policies 110 

Graduate Regulations 103 

Graduation Requirements for the 

Bachelor’s Degree 121 

Handicapped Student Services 44 

Health Education, Physical Education 

and Recreation 282 

Health Professions 63 

Health and Counseling Services 44 

Herbarium 56 

History 373 

Honors Programs 35 

Honors Societies 36 

Honors at Entrance 35 

Honors at Graduation 35 

Housing Services and Residential Life 44 

Human Services Program 291 

Index 504 

Institute Research in Reading 

and Related Disciplines 39 

Institute for Early Childhood Education 38 

Institute for Geophysics 38 

Institute for Molecular Biology & Nutrition 38 
Institutes and Centers 37 

Intercollegiate Athletics 52 

International Business Program 215 

International Education and Exchange 45 

International Programs 145 

International Students 75 

Laboratory for Phonetic Research 39 

Latin American Studies Program 379 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 33 

Leave of Absence 98 

Liberal Studies Program 382 

Library 31 

Library Courses 150 

Linguistics 384 

Management 218 

Management Information Systems 222 

Management Science 223 


Marine Sciences 469 

Marketing 229 

Mathematics 455 

Mechanical Engineering 254 

Medical Biology 470 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 53 

Meteorology 470 

Microcomputer Resource Center 56 

Military Science Program 294 

Multiple Subject Credential and Waiver 

Program 133 

Museum Studies 160 

Music 166 

Nursing 296 

Oceanography 470 

Oral History Program 56 

Orange County Now 56 

Pacific Rim Studies 389 

Philosophy 390 

Physical Education 282 

Physical Science 470 

Physics 462 

Political Science 394 

Preprofessional Programs 62 

President’s Message 3 

President’s Opportunity Scholars Program 36 
President’s Scholars Program 36 

Psychology 402 

Public Administration 394 

Reading 300 

Reading Clinic 57 

Registration Information 80 

Registration Procedures 79 

Religious Studies 410 

Requirements for the Master’s Degree 107 
Residency Requirements 69 

Retention, Probation and Disqualification 98 
Russian and East European Area 

Studies Program 415 

Schedule of Fees 82 

School Advisement Offices 61 

School Based Student Services 45 

School of Business Administration and 

Economics 189 

School of Engineering & Computer 

Science 233 

School of Human Development and 

Community Service 262 

School of Humanities and Social 

Sciences 312 


8 


School of Natural Science & 

Mathematics 432 

School of the Arts 153 

Science Education Program 466 

Secondary Teacher Education 303 

Single Subject Credentials and 

Waiver Programs 135 

Social Sciences Program 416 

Sociology 418 

Southern California Ocean Studies 

Consortium 39 

Spanish 350 

Special Education 307 

Special Major Programs 147 

Special Programs 469 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 57 

Speech Communication 423 

Sport and Movement Institute 39 

Steps in the Master’s Degree 117 

Stop-Out Policy 97 

Student Academic Affairs 32 

Student Academic Services 33 

Student Activities 47 

Student Affirmative Action 34 

Student Conduct 98 

Student Records 94 

Student Rights 100 

Student Services . 42 

Summer Session 76 


Taxation 194 

Teacher Credential Programs 132 

Teachers of English to Speakers of Other 

Languages 354 

Television & Media Support Services 30 

Testing and Research 45 

Theatre & Dance 178 

Theatre Department Productions 57 

Theses and Projects 114 

Titan Shops 57 

Transfer Credits 77 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 39 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 58 

University Activities Center 48 

University Administration 21 

University Advisory Board 20 

University Center 50 

University Channel 58 

University Outreach Services 34 

University Recreation Programs 50 

University Regulations 89 

Vice President for Academic Affairs 28 

Vice President for Student Services 42 

Withdrawal from the University 98 

Women’s Center 46 

Women’s Intercollegiate Athletics 54 

Women’s Studies Program 431 

Writing Assistance Center 34 


9 


1987-88 Academic Calendar 


SUMMER SESSION 1987 

June 1, 

Monday Instruction begins; registration 

and classes. 

July 3, 

Friday Independence Day Observed — 

Campus closed. 

August 1, 

Saturday Initial period for filing applica- 

tions for admission to the spring 
semester 1988 begins. 

August 21, 

Friday Instruction ends. 

FALL SEMESTER 1987 

August 24, 

Monday Academic year begins; advise- 

ment, orientation and registra- 
tion begin; see class schedule 
for details. 

August 31, 


Monday Instruction begins. 

September 7, 

Monday Labor Day — Campus closed. 

September 9, 

Wednesday Admission day — Campus open. 

September 24, 

Thursday Rosh Hashanah — Campus open. 

October 3, 

Saturday Yom Kippur — Campus open. 

October 12, 

Monday Columbus Day — Campus open. 

November 1, 

Sunday Initial period for filing applica- 

tions for admission to the fail 
semester 1988 begins. 

November 1 1, 

Wednesday Veterans Day — Campus open. 

November 26-27, 


Thursday-Friday Thanksgiving recess — Campus 
closed. 

December 1 1, 


Friday Last day of classes. 

December 14, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 


December 15-18, 

Tuesday-Friday Semester examinations. 
December 19, 

Saturday Winter recess begins. 


1988 

January 4-6, 

Monday-Tuesday Winter recess ends; grade re- 
ports due. 

January 5, 

Tuesday Semester ends. 


INTERSESSION - 1988 

January 4, 

Monday Intersession begins. 

January 18, 

Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Day — 

campus closed. 

January 29, 

Friday Intersession ends. 


SPRING SEMESTER 1988 

January 21, 

Thursday Semester begins; departmental 

and faculty meetings through 
Friday, January 22. 


January 25, 
Monday 

February 1, 
Monday 
February 12, 
Friday 

February 15, 
Monday 


Advisement, orientation and reg- 
istration begin; see class sched- 
ule for details. 

Instruction begins. 

i 

Lincoln’s Birthday — Campus 
open. 


Spring recess begins. 


Instruction resumes. 


Last day of classes. 


Examination preparation day. 


Washington’s Birthday — 
Campus closed. 

March 28, 

Monday 
April 4, 

Monday 
May 20, 

Friday 
May 23, 

Monday 
May 24-27, 

Tuesday-Friday Semester examinations. 

May 28-29, 

Saturday-Sunday Commencement exercises. 

May 30, 

Monday Memorial Day — Campus closed. 

May 31-June 2, 

Tuesday-Thursday Evaluation days; grade reports 
due 

June 2, 

Thursday Semester ends. 


10 


1988-89 Academic Calendar 


SUMMER SESSION 1988 


May 31, 
Tuesday 

July 4. 
Monday 

August 1, 
Monday 

August 19, 
Friday 


Instruction begins; registration 
and classes. 

Independence Day — Campus 
closed. 

Initial period for filing applica* 
tions for admission to the spring 
semester 1989 begins. 

Instruction ends. 


FALL SEMESTER 1988 

August 22, 

Monday Academic year begins; advise- 

ment, orientation and registra- 
tion begins; see class schedule 
for details. 

August 29, 


Monday Instruction begins. 

September 5, 

Monday Labor Day — Campus closed. 

September 9, 

Friday Admission Day — Campus open. 

September 12, 

Monday Rosh Hashanah — Campus 

open. 

September 21, 

Wednesday Yom Kippur — Campus open. 

October 10, 

Monday Columbus Day — Campus open. 

November 1, 

Tuesday Initial period for filing applica- 

tions for admission to the Fall 
Semester 1989 begins. 

November 1 1, 

Friday Veterans Day — Campus open. 


November 24-25 

Thursday-Friday Thanksgiving recess — Campus 


closed. 

December 9, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

December 12, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 

December 13-16 

Tuesday-Friday Semester examinations. 
December 17, 

Saturday Winter recess begins. 


1989 

January 2-3 

Monday-Tuesday Winter recess ends; grade re- 
ports due. 

January 3, 

Tuesday Semester ends. 

INTERSESSION - 1989 

January 3, 

Tuesday Intersession begins. 

January 16, 

Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Day — 

Campus closed. 

January 27, 

Friday Intersession ends. 

SPRING SEMESTER 1989 

January 19, 

Thursday Semester begins; departmental 

and faculty meetings through 
Friday, January 20. 

January 23, 

Monday Advisement, orientation and reg- 

istration begin; see class sched- 
ule for details. 

January 30, 

Monday Instruction begins. 

February 13, 

Monday Lincoln's Birthday — Campus 

open. 

February 20, 

Monday Washington’s Birthday — 

Campus closed. 

March 20, 

Monday Spring recess begins. 

March 27, 

Monday Instruction resumes. 

May 19, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

May 22, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 


May 23-26, 

Tuesday-Friday Semester examinations. 

May 27-28, 

Saturday-Sunday Commencement exercises. 

May 29, 

Monday Memorial Day — Campus closed. 

May 30- June 1, 

Tuesday-Thursday Evaluation days; grade reports 
due. 

June 1. 

Thursday Semester ends. 


11 



12 





The California State University 


The individual California State Colleges were 
brought together as a system by the Donahoe 
Higher Education Act of 1960. In 1972 the system 
became The California State University and Col- 
leges and in 1982 the system became The California 
State University. Today, 18 of the 19 campuses 
have the title “university.” 

The oldest campus — San Jose State University — 
was founded as a Normal School in 1857 and be- 
came the first institution of public higher education 
In California. The newest campus — California State 
College. Bakersfield — began instruction in 1970. 

Responsibility for The California State University Is 
vested in the Board of Trustees, whose members 
are appointed by the governor. The trustees appoint 
the chancellor, who Is the chief executive officer of 
the system, and the presidents, who are the chief 
executive officers on the respective campuses. 

The trustees, the chancellor and the presidents de- 
velop systemwide policy, with actual implementation 
at the campus level taking place through broadly 
based consultative procedures. The Academic Sen- 
ate of The California State University, made up of 
elected representatives of the faculty from each 
campus, recommends academic policy to the Board 
of Trustees through the chancellor. 

Academic excellence has been achieved by The Cal- 
ifornia State University through a distinguished fac- 
ulty, whose primary responsibility is superior teach- 
ing. While each campus in the system has its own 
unique geographic and curricular character, all cam- 
puses. as multipurpose institutions, offer undergrad- 
uate and graduate instruction for professional and 
occupational goals as well as broad liberal educa- 
tion. All of the campuses require for graduation a ba- 
sic program of “General Education-Breadth Re- 
quirements” regardless of the type of bachelor’s 
degree or major field selected by the student. 

The California State University offers more than 
1,600 bachelor’s and master’s degree programs in 
some 200 subject areas. Nearly 600 of these pro- 
grams are offered so that students can complete all 
upper-division and graduate requirements by part- 
time late afternoon and evening study. In addition, a 
variety of teaching and school service credential 
programs are available. A limited number of doctoral 
degrees’are offered jointly with the University of Cal- 
ifornia and with private institutions in California. 

The Consortium of The California State University 
draws on the resources of the 19 campuses to offer 
regional and statewide off-campus degree, certifi- 
cate and credential programs to Individuals who find 
it difficult or impossible to attend classes on a cam- 


pus. In addition to Consortium programs, individual 
campuses also offer external degree programs. 

System enrollments total approximately 325,000 
students, who are taught by a faculty of 19,100. In 
1983-84 the system awarded over 50 percent of the 
bachelor’s degrees and 30 percent of the master’s 
degrees granted in California. More than one million 
persons have graduated from the 19 campuses 
since 1960. 

Consortium of The California 
State University 

The Consortium of The CSU — “The 1 ,000-Mile Cam- 
pus” — Is a separate, fully accredited, degree- 
granting entity of the CSU. It draws on the combined 
resources of the 19 campuses to offer external 
statewide and regional degree, certificate, and 
teaching credential programs. 

The Consortium was established in 1973 to meet the 
needs of adults who find it difficult or impossible to 
participate in regular on-campus programs. Instruc- 
tion is thus provided students in convenient places 
at convenient times. Currently, programs are offered 
in more than 100 sites throughout California. 

Full- and part-time CSU faculty, as well as qualified 
experienced practitioners, go where the students 
are, or provide opportunities for individualized study. 
Programs can be tailored to meet the specific needs 
of employees in business, Industry, education or 
government. 

Consortium programs are upper-division or graduate 
level. All courses offer residence credit leading to 
bachelor’s or master’s degrees. Credit and course 
work are transferable statewide. Programs are fi- 
nanced by student fees. 

Academic policy for The Consortium is established 
by the statewide Academic Senate of the CSU. De- 
grees or certificates are awarded by The Consor- 
tium In the name of the Board of Trustees of the CSU. 
The Consortium Is accredited by the Western Asso- 
ciation of Schools and Colleges. 

For more information contact: The Consortium of The 
California State University, 6300 State University 
Drive. Long Beach. CA 90815-4666; (213) 498- 
5690. 

The statewide Admissions and Records Office may 
be reached by dialing the following numbers: Los An- 
geles and Long Beach areas (213) 498-4119; all 
other areas in California toll free (800) 362-5717. 


The CSU 


THE CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY 



California State College, Bakersfield 

California State Polytechnic University, 

Pomona 

California State University, Northridge 
California State University, Los 
California State University, Dominguez Hills 
California State University, Long Beach 
Office of the Chancellor, Long Beach 
California State University, Fullerton 
California State University, San Bernardino 
San Diego State University 


Humboldt State University 
California State University, Chico 
Sonoma State University 
California State University, Sacramento 
San Francisco State University 
California State University, Hayward 
San Jose State University 
California State University, Stanislaus 
California State University, Fresno 

California Polytechnic State University, 
San Luis Obispo 


The CSU 



Campuses of The California State University 


California State College, Bakersfield 

9001 Stockdale Highway 

Bakersfield, CA 93311-1099 

Dr. Tomas A. Arciniega, President 
(805) 833-201 1 

California State Polytechnic University, Pomona 
3801 West Temple Avenue 

Pomona, CA 91768 

Dr. Hugh O. La Bounty, President 
(714) 869-7659 

California State University, Chico 

1st and Normal Streets 

Chico, CA 96929 

Dr. Robin S. Wilson, President 
(916) 895-6116 

California State University, Sacramento 

6000 J Street 

Sacramento, CA 95819 

Dr. Donald R. Gerth, President 
(916) 278-601 1 

California State University, Dominguez Hills 
Carson, CA 90747 

Dr. Jack Brownell, President (Acting) 

(213) 516-3300 

California State College, San Bernardino 

6500 University Parkway 

San Bernardino, CA 92407 

Dr. Anthony H. Evans, President 
(714) 887-7201 

California State University, Fresno 

Shaw and Cedar Avenues 

Fresno, CA 93740 

Dr. Harold H. Haak, President 
(209) 294-4240 

San Diego State University 

6300 Campanile Drive 

San Diego, CA 92182 

Dr. Thomas B. Day, President 
(619) 265-6000 

California State University, Fullerton 

Fullerton, CA 92634 

Dr. Jewel Plummer Cobb, President 
(714) 773-201 1 

Imperial Valley Campus 

720 Heber Avenue 

Calexico, CA 92231 
(619) 367-3721 

California State University, Hayward 

Hayward, CA 94542 

Dr. Ellis E. McCune, President 
(415) 881-3000 

San Francisco State University 

1600 Holloway Avenue 

San Francisco, CA 94132 

Dr. Chia-Wei Woo, President 
(416) 469-2141 

Humboldt State University 

Areata, CA 95521 

Dr. Alistair W. McCrone, President 
(707) 826-3011 

San Jose State University 

One Washington Square 

San Jose, CA 96192 

Dr. Gail Fullerton, President 
(408) 277-2000 

California State University, Long Beach 

1260 Bellflower Boulevard 

Long Beach, CA 90840 

Dr. Stephen Horn, President 
(213) 498-4111 

California Polytechnic State University, 

San Luis Obispo 

San Luis Obispo, CA 93407 

Dr. Warren J. Baker, President 
(805) 646-01 1 1 

California State University, Los Angeles 

5161 State University Drive 

Los Angeles, CA 90032 

Dr. James M. Rosser, President 
(213) 224-0111 

Sonoma State University 

1801 East Cotati Avenue 

Rohnert Park, CA 94928 

Dr. David W. Benson. President 
(707) 664-2880 

California State University, Northridge 

18111 Nordhoff Street 

Northridge, CA 91330 

Dr. James W. Cleary, President 
(818) 886-1200 

California State University, Stanislaus 

801 West Monte Vista Avenue 

Turlock, CA 95380 

Dr. John W. Moore, President 
(209) 667-3122 


The csu 


Trustees and Officers of The California State University 


Ex Officio Trustees 

The Honorable George Deukmejian 

Governor of California 

State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 96814 

The Honorable Leo T. McCarthy 
Lieutenant Governor of California 
State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 96814 

The Honorable Willie L. Brown, Jr. 

Speaker of the Assembly 

State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 96814 

The Honorable Bill Honig 
State Superintendent of 
Public Instruction 

721 Capitol Mall, Sacramento, CA 96814 

Dr. W. Ann Reynolds 
Chancellor of the California State 
University 
400 Golden Shore, 

Long Beach, CA 90802-4276 


Appointed Trustees 

Appointments are for a term of eight years, except for a 
student Trustee, alumni Trustee, and faculty Trustee 
whose terms are for two years. Terms expire in the year 
in parentheses. Names are listed in order of appointment 
to the Board. 

Dr. Claudia H. Hampton (1994) 

Mr. Willie J. Stennis (1991) 

Mr. Donald C. Livingston (1987) 

Ms. Celia I. Ballesteros (1987) 

Ms. Lynne Wasserman (1988) 

Mr. George M. Marcus (1989) 

Mr. Dixon R. Harwin (1990) 

Mr. Thomas J. Bernard (1989) 

Mr. Roland E. Arnall (1990) 

Dr. Robert D. Kully (1987) 

Dr. Dale B. Ride (1992) 

Mr. Tom C. Shekel (1992) 

Mr. Lee A. Grissom (1988) 

Ms. Marian Bagdasarian (1988) 

Mr. William L. Crocker (1987) 


Mrs. Marianthi Lansdale (1993) 

Mr. Dean S. Lesher (1993) 

Mr. Theodore A. Bruinsma (1991) 

Dr. John E. Kashlwabara (1994) 

Correspondence with Trustees should be sent; 

c/o Trustees Secretariat 

The California State University 

400 Golden Shore, Suite 322 

Long Beach, California 90802-4276 


Officers of the Trustees 

Governor George Deukmejian 
President 

Dr. Dale B. Ride 
Chair 

Mr. Thomas J. Bernard 
Vice Chair 

Chancellor W. Ann Reynolds 
Secretary-T reasurer 


Office of the Chancellor 

The California State 

University 

400 Golden Shore 

Long Beach, CA 90802-4276, 

(213) 690-5506 

Dr. W. Ann Reynolds 
Chancellor 

Dr. William E. Vandament 
Provost and Vice Chancellor, 
Academic Affairs 

Dr. Herbert L. Carter 
Vice Chancellor, 

Administration 

Mr. D. Dale Hanner 
Vice Chancellor, 

Business Affairs 

Dr. Caesar J. Naples 
Vice Chancellor, 

Faculty and Staff Relations 

Mr. Mayer Chapman 
Vice Chancellor and 
General Counsel 


The eSU 


California State 
University, Fullerton 

Governance 

Governance on the campus at California State 
University, Fullerton is the responsibility of the 
president and her administrative staff. Working 
closely with the president are a number of faculty 
and student groups which initiate, review, and/or 
recommend for approval, various university pro- 
grams, policies, and procedures. Although the 
president is vested with the final authority for all 
university activities, maximum faculty and staff part- 
icipation in campus decision-making and gover- 
nance has become traditional. Students also are 
actively involved, with student representatives being 
included on almost all university, school, and depart- 
mental committees and policy-making bodies. 

Advisory Board 

The California State University, Fullerton Advisory 
Board consists of community leaders interested in 
the development and welfare of the university. The 
board advises the president on a number of matters, 
particularly those affecting university and communi- 
ty relations. Members are appointed by the 
president for terms of four years. 

Philosophy and Objectives 

Institutions of higher learning disseminate and ad- 
vance knowledge. The philosophy which guides an 
institution can limit or promote the successful 
achievement of these objectives. Therefore, from its 
inception. Cal State Fullerton has consciously en- 
deavored, through Its educational program, to en- 
hance the fullest possible development of those it 
serves. For both professors and students this en- 
tails a commitment to high standards of scholarship, 
to a comprehensive rather than a narrow approach 
in major areas of study, and to a concern with re- 
search and other creative activity. 

The university is committed to provide students with 
the intellectual skills necessary for their continued 
personal and professional development, as well as 
an awareness of human achievement. General edu- 
cation forms one segment of a student’s program of 
study. The other two major segments are courses 
taken in the major field of concentration, and 
courses taken as electives. Specifically, the general 
education program has as Its objectives the devel- 
opment In each student of: 


CSUF 


• The skills of reading, writing, computing and 
thinking. 

• An understanding of the development of West- 
ern civilization. 

• An awareness of the content, approaches, and 
methods of the various disciplines and of the in- 
terrelationships of those disciplines. 

• An understanding of cultural diversity within our 
own society and of the cultures of other socie- 
ties. 

• An appreciation of aesthetics through practice 
or criticism of the arts. 

To achieve these objectives the faculty of California 
State University, Fullerton has established a general 
education program described under “Graduation 
Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree.” 


Retrospect and Prospect 

In 1957 Cal State Fullerton became the 12th State 
College in California to be authorized by the Legisla- 
ture. The following year a site was designated in 
northeast Fullerton. It was purchased in 1959, when 
Dr. William B. Langsdorf was appointed as founding 
president, the first staff was selected and plans for 
opening the new college were made. Orange County 
State College started classes for 452 full-and/or 
part-time students in September, 1959, using leased 
quarters for its administrative offices on the Fuller- 
ton Union High School campus and for Its class- 
rooms at Fullerton’s Sunny Hills High School. In the 
fall of 1960, the college opened classes on its own 
campus, where it occupied 12 temporary buildings. 
The name changed to Orange State College In July, 
1962, to California State College at Fullerton In July, 
1964, to California State College, Fullerton in July, 
1968 and to California State University, Fullerton in 
June, 1972. The first permanent building, the six- 
story Letters and Science Building (now known as 
McCarthy Hall), was occupied in 1963. 

Today, there are many dramatic evidences of addi- 
tional, rapid growth. Sixteen buildings or building 
clusters have been completed, and enrollment has 
climbed to over 24,000. Since 1963 the curriculum 
has expanded to include lower division work and 
many graduate programs. 

The Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960 estab- 
lished the California State Colleges as a system un- 
der an independent Board of Trustees, redefined the 
functions of the State Colleges, and related them to 
both the community colleges and the University of 
California system. Cal State Fullerton was the first 
of the State Colleges to submit and secure approval 
for a five-year master curricular plan and one of the 
first three to secure approval of a master building 
plan. It also was able to think In terms of its ultimate 
enrollment objectives from the beginning. 

On May 26, 1971, Dr. L. Donald Shields, who had 
served as acting president for seven months, was 


appointed the second president of Cal State Fuller- 
ton. Dr. Miles D. McCarthy became acting president 
in January, 1981, and Dr. Jewel Plummer Cobb took 
office October 1, 1981. 

Environment of the University 

Fullerton, a city of more than 100,000 inhabitants, is 
located in northern Orange County, about 30 miles 
southeast of central Los Angeles. It Is part of a new 
Southern California population center and within 
easy freeway access of all the diverse natural and 
cultural attractions of this region. 

Orange County, with an area of 782 square miles, is 
the 48th in size of California’s 58 counties, but it is 
third largest county in population (2.1 million). Or- 
ange County has experienced during the last three 
decades almost unprecedented growth as communi- 
ties continue to occupy the diminishing expanses of 
open land. 

Today, there co-exists an interesting mixture of the 
old and new economic and life styles in Orange 
County. Underneath the soil, archeologists and bull- 
dozers uncover traces of the hunting and gathering 
Indian bands which flourished at least as early as 
4,000 years ago in what wasabenignand bountiful re- 
gion. More visible traces remain of the Spanish and 
Mexican periods and cultures: Mission San Juan 
Capistrano, which began the agricultural tradition in 
Orange County, and subsequent adobes from the 
great land grants and ranches that followed. Addi- 
tionally, both customs and many names persist from 
this period, and so does some ranching. The archi- 
tectural and other evidences of the subsequent pio- 
neer period are still quite visible: farmsteads, old 
buildings from the new towns that then were estab- 
lished In the late 1800’s, mining operations, and 
traces of early resort and other types of promotional 
activities. For about 100 years, farming was the 
main economic activity with products such as 
grapes, walnuts, vegetables, and oranges, replacing 
the older wheat and cattle ranches. Today, agricul- 
ture still is very important. Orange County ranks high 
among California’s counties In mineral production 
with its oil, natural gas, sand and gravel, and clay 
mining and processing activities. 

The extensive development of the 42 miles of 
beaches in Orange County and the development of 
such attractions as Disneyland, Knott’s Berry Farm, 
the Laguna Festival of Arts and Pageant of the Mas- 
ters, the Anaheim Stadium and Convention Center 
and the Orange County Performing Arts Center con- 
tinue to make tourism an increasingly important ac- 
tivity. So does the Mediterranean-type climate, with 
rainfall averaging 14 inches per year, and generally 
mild days (either freezing or 100- degree tempera- 
tures uncommon) with frequent morning fogs during 
the summer. Both downtown Los Angeles and the 
Pacific Ocean can be reached by car in half an hour, 
and mountain and desert recreation areas are as 
close as an hour’s drive from the campus. 


CSUF 


The Campus and Its Buildings 

Once part of a vast orange grove, Cal State Fuller- 
ton’s attractively landscaped campus now consists 
of 225 acres bounded on the south by Nutwood Ave- 
nue, on the west by State College Boulevard, on the 
north by Yorba Linda Boulevard and on the east by 
the Orange Freeway. 

The portion of Orange County immediately surround- 
ing the campus is predominantly suburban; it in- 
cludes housing tracts, apartment complexes, shop- 
ping centers, space-age industrial firms and still- 
remaining orange groves and undeveloped hills and 
fields. 

Other educational institutions also are part of the im- 
mediate environment. The Southern California Col- 
lege of Optometry, with its four modernistic build- 
ings, opened in the spring of 1973. It is just north of 
Cal State Fullerton. To Cal State’s immediate south 
is Pacific Christian College, a liberal arts school 
with a Bible emphasis, where students started 
classes In the fall of 1973. The Western State Uni- 
versity College of Law, California’s largest law 
school, occupied Its new campus to the Immediate 
west of Cal State in January, 1976. 

The Cal State Fullerton campus itself has a high 
density urban layout of buildings and facilities devel- 
oped to serve a predominantly commuting public. 
The university’s modern buildings were planned so 
that no student should need more than 10 minutes 
to go from one class to another. The campus is sur- 
rounded with landscaped parking facilities. 

The first permanent building, the Letters and Sci- 
ence Building, was occupied In 1963. This imposing 
structure, master planned to serve ultimately as a fa- 
cility for undergraduate and graduate science in- 
struction and research, has been used to house oth- 
er programs until they could warrant new facilities of 
their own. This building is now called Miles D. 
McCarthy Hall. 

Since 1963, growth has been rapid. The Performing 
Arts Center was completed In 1964, the Physical Ed- 
ucation Building in 1965, the Library Building in 
1966, the Commons in 1967, the Humanitles-Social 
Sciences Building and Visual Arts Center In 1969, 
William B. Langsdorf Hall (Administration-Business 
Administration) and the Engineering Building in 1971, 
the Student Health Center in 1974, the Education- 
Classroom Building and University Center in 1976, 
an addition to the Visual Arts Center in 1979, and the 
Gerontology Center and a student housing complex 
In 1988. An addition to the Engineering complex 
should be completed In 1989 as well as a $6.7 mil- 
lion Sports Complex seating approximately 12,000. 
A 200-room Marriott Hotel Conference Center will 
also be available in 1988. Langsdorf Hall and the En- 
gineering Building reflect a commitment to programs 
with high community involvement. In addition to the 
many undergraduate students who study and learn 
in these buildings, many professional engineers and 
local businessmen also use these very advanced fa- 
cilities to continue their education. 

In the northeast corner of the campus is the Fullerton 
Arboretum, which was dedicated in the fall of 1979 
in a joint venture with the city of Fullerton. It includes 
a 15-acre contoured botanical garden, a three-acre 
organic garden and a two-acre experimental plot. 


The ecologically arranged flora depicts habitats 
from the desert to the tropics. The Fullerton Arbore- 
tum also includes Heritage House, a 19th-century re- 
stored dwelling. Heritage House serves as a cultural 
museum for North Orange County as well as an Arbo- 
retum office. 

The ample freeway and surface street accommoda- 
tions that approach the main entrance to the univer- 
sity’s modern campus also provide comparatively 
easy access to the great and diverse learning re- 
sources available in Southern California: many other 
colleges and universities; museums, libraries, art 
galleries; zoos; and the wide variety of economic, 
governmental, social, and cultural activities and ex- 
periments that may be found in this dynamic and 
complex region of California and the United States. 

Information concerning the Instructional, laboratory 
and other physical plant facilities which relate to the 
academic program may be obtained from the Office 
of Facility Planning and Operations. 

Students of the University 

Much of the distinctive character and learning atmo- 
sphere of any campus comes from the nature and vi- 
tality of its students. Diversity, the synthesis of aca- 
demic with work and family interests, strong 
achievement records, and relative maturity are 
some of the predominant characteristics of the stu- 
dent body at Cal State Fullerton. 

The university is a commuter institution, with Its first 
on-campus residence under construction starting 
September, 1986, and scheduled to open in 1988. 
Nearly half of the students work 20 or more hours 
per week, and yet 65 percent of all students take 12 
or more hours of coursework each semester. The 
majority of students live in North Orange County, but 
10 percent of the new students in Fall, 1986 came 
from other states (8 percent) or other countries (2 
percent). In addition, 30 percent of the new students 
in Fall, 1986 came from California high schools, and 
the remaining 60 percent came from California com- 
munity colleges (34 percent), other Cal State cam- 
puses (19 percent), or other California universities 
and colleges (8 percent). 

The student body is 9 percent first-time freshmen, 
20 percent other lower division, 54 percent upper di- 
vision, and 17 percent graduate levels. Fifty-four 
percent of all students are women. The median age 
of all students Is 23; undergraduates have a median 
age of 22, while graduate students have a median 
age of 29. The majority of students take advantage 
of course offerings during the day and at night. In or- 
der to create a workable schedule for their multiple 
responsibilities. 

Many students already have clearly defined inter- 
ests In a major field of study. Only 9 percent of all 
students have not yet declared a major, and are in 
the process of exploring different fields of knowl- 
edge. Upon completion of degree requirements, 
most graduates secure full-time employment (ap- 
proximately 60 percent), while approximately 10 
percent go on to an advanced degree program. 


CSUF 


The Faculty 

Central to the effectiveness of any institution of 
higher learning is the quality and dedication of its in- 
dividual faculty members to teaching and scholar- 
ship. 

In the fall of 1986 there were 772 full-time faculty 
and administrators and 641 part-time faculty mem- 
bers teaching on the campus. Almost all the full-time 
faculty had some previous college or university 
teaching experience before coming to Fullerton. 
Faculty members also have a wide variety of experi- 
ences and creative activities. A very high percent of 
the full-time faculty have earned their doctoral de- 
grees, and these have come from more than 100 ma- 
jor colleges and universities. 

Criteria for selection to the faculty include mastery 
of knowledge in an academic specialty, demonstrat- 
ed skill and experience in teaching, and continuing 
interest in scholarly study and research. Retention 
and promotion criteria Include service to the univer- 
sity and community. 

Information concerning the faculty and other person- 
nel may be obtained from the Office of Faculty Af- 
fairs and Records. 

University Advisory Board 
Members 


H. William Bridgford, Chair 

Chairman of the Board & CEO 

Bridgford Foods Corp Anaheim 

Evelyn E. Bauman, Vice Chair Fullerton 

Robert F. Beaver 

President, William-Brent Co., Inc. Los Angeles 
W. Benton Boone, M.D. 

Ophthalmologist Inglewood 

Manuel R. Caldera 

President, The Caldera Co Los Angeles 

Gareth Chang 

President, 

McDonnell Douglas China, Inc Hong Kong 

Don Karcher 

President, 

Carl Karcher Enterprises, Inc Anaheim 

Frederick T. Mason 

Attorney at Law Santa Ana 

William J. McGarvey, Jr. 

Chairman of the Board, 

McGarvey-Clark Realty, Inc Fullerton 

Dr. Arnold Miller 

President, 

Electronics Division, Xerox Corp. El Segundo 
John Rau 

President, David Industries Costa Mesa 

Ruth Schermitzler Brea 

Richard J. Stegemeler 

President, Unocal Los Angeles 

James D. Woods 

President and Chairman of the Board, 

Baker Oil Tools Orange 


Community Minority Affairs 
Advisory Council 

Barbara Brotherton 

Librarian, Santiago Library System Orange 

Anthony Espinoza 

Account Executive Whittier 

Jo Caines 

Director of Community 

Relations KOCE-TV Huntington Beach 

James D. Carrington 

Pastor, Friendship Baptist Church Fullerton 

Vy Trac Do 

Bilingual Educator El Toro 

Jerry Folsom 

American Indian Consultant Anaheim 

Manuel B. Frias 

Director of Staff Analysis & 

Human Resource Programs 

Coast Community College Costa Mesa 

Marne Glass 

Attorney-at-Law Cypress 

John Hobgood 

Businessman Santa Ana 

Russell Kennedy 

Director, Orange County 

Human Relations Commission Santa Ana 

Won Kim 

President, Korean Association of 
Orange County Garden Grove 

Joe Montes 

Health Services Consultant Santa Ana 

Robert Nava 

Orange County Human Relations 
Commission Santa Ana 

Albert Perales 

Educator Fullerton 

James O. Perez 

Judge, Orange County 

Superior Court Santa Ana 

Chieu Minh Pham 

Computer Programmer Orange 

W. J. Thom 

President, Anaheim Office Furniture 

& Supply, Inc Anaheim 

Mary White 

Educator/Consultant Anaheim 

Joshua White 

Developer/lnsurance Planner Anaheim 

Joe Wilson 

Research Coordinator, 

Capistrano Unified School 

District San Juan Capistrano 


CSUF 


University Administration 


President 

Staff Assistant 
Executive Assistant 
Director of Affirmative Action 
Administrative Assistant 
Director of Athletics 

Associate Athletic Director 
Athletics Business Manager 
Vice President for Academic Affairs 
Staff Assistant 

Associate Vice President, Academic Affairs 

Administrative Assistant, Faculty Affairs and Records 
Associate Vice President, Academic Programs 

Assistant Vice President/Graduate International Programs 
Director of Graduate Studies 
Athletic Academic Coordinator 
Associate Vice President, Research and External Programs 
Director of Administration 
Community (and In-House) Programs Director 
Director of Certificate Programs 
Director of Program Management 
University Librarian 

Assistant to the University Librarian 
Collection Development Officer 
Chair, Public Services 
Chair, Technical Services 
Director of Admissions and Records 

Assistant to the Director of Admissions and Records 
Associate Director of Admissions 
University Articulation Officer 
Registrar 

Assistant Registrar 


Jewel Plummer Cobb 
Norma Morris 
Thomas G. Coley 
Rosamaria Gomez-Amaro 
F. Caroline Cosgrove 
Edward Carroll 
Leanne Grotke 
Steve DiTolla 
Jack W. Coleman 
Marlys K. RIetman 
Michael H. Clapp 
Kay Adams-Hernandez 
Dennis F. Berg 
Linda Andersen-Fiala (acting) 
Gladys Fleckles 
Alison Cone 
Patrick A. Wegner 
James T. Mavity 
Betty Robertson 
Ruth Truman 
Judy Strong 
Robert Emry (Acting) 
E. Sue Boeltl 
Patricia L. Bril 
Joyce Wilder-Jones 
Jan ZIendich 
James C. Blackburn 
Francis M. Casey 
Mildred Scott 
William Gowler 
Carole Jones 
Lynette Housty 


Director of Academic Advisement Judith V. Ramirez 

Assistant to the Director Frances Vose 

Director of Analytical Studies Dolores Hope Vura 

Associate Director of Analytical Studies Robert Fecarotta 

Assistant Systems Analyst Mary WIse-Aguilar 

Director, Faculty Research and Development Mark Shapiro (Acting) 

Coordinator, Contracts and Grants Elizabeth Gewin 

Coordinator of Health Professions Miles D. McCarthy 

Director, Information Services and Computer Center Gene H. Dippel 

Manager, Administrative Applications Bobbe Webber 

Manager, User Services Dick Bednar 

Instructional Computing Coordinator Michelle Perlman-Moore 

Manager, Operations * Charles Sowers 

Director, Center for Internships and Cooperative Education Carolyn Kubiak (acting) 

Radiation Safety Officer John Elliott 

Director, Student Academic Services and University Outreach Silas M. Abrego 

Associate Director, Student Academic Services and University Outreach Jeremiah W. Moore 

Coordinator, Student Academic Services Stephanie Ortiz 

Coordinator, Learning Assistance Resource Center Ina Katz 

Coordinator, University Outreach Services and Relations with Schools and Colleges Valerie Bordeaux 
Director of Television and Media Support Center Ernest B. Gourdine 

Media Consultant William Shultz 

Distribution and Maintenance Supervisor Michael Dufour 

Vice President for Administration Sal D. RInella 

Associate Vice President for Administration, Central Services Ginny L. Scheel (acting) 

Campus & U.S. Mall Service Manager Spergeon R. Taylor 

Central Services Officer Joan E. Donovan 

Manager, Storage /Shipping & Receiving /Machine Repair/Moving Services James E. Silvey 

Property Accounting Michael A. Antus 

Purchasing Services Supervisor LeRoy Page 


CSUF 


Associate Vice President, Facility Planning & Construction 
Director, Design & Construction Services 
Draft Technician 
Energy Coordinator 
Facility Planner 

Insurance & Facility Use Officer 
Director of Budget Planning & Administration 
Administrative Program Specialist 
Director, Financial Operations & Business Services Systems 
Administrative Program Specialist 
Manager, Business Services Systems 
Manager, Financial Operations 
Accounts Payable Supervisor 
Cashier Supervisor 
Financial Operations Supervisor 
Loans & Grants Manager 
NDSL Collection Supervisor 

Director, Personnel Services & Staff Employee Relations 
Associate Director /Employee Relations Manager 
Employee Benefits 
Personnel Transactions 

Service Center Manager for Student Services/ Academic Affairs 
Service Center Manager for Administrative Affairs 
Training & Development 
Unemployment Insurance 
Workers’ Compensation Coordinator 
Director, Physical Plant & Public Safety 
Maintenance Planning & Repair Manager 
Maintenance Services Manager 
Public Safety Manager 
Environmental Health & Safety Officer 
Foundation Executive Director 
Controller 

Grants Administrator 
Titan Bookstore & Titan Shops Director 
Dining Services Director 
Vice President for Student Services 

Associate Vice President for Student Services 
Assistant Vice President for Student Services 
Administrator for Associated Students 
Coordinator, Academic Appeals 
Director, Career Development Center 
Director, Financial Aid 
Director, Handicapped Student Services 
Director, Housing Services and Residence Life 
Director, International Education and Exchange 
Director, Student Health and Counseling Service 
Director, Testing and Research 
Director, University Activities Center 
Director, Women’s Center 

Vice President for University Relations and Development 

Associate Vice President for University Relations and Development 

Director of Alumni Affairs 

Director of Development Information Systems 

Director of Public Affairs 

Director of Public Information 
Assistant Director of Athletics for Development 


James B. Sharp 
Glenn M. Lemon 
Philo F. Rohrbough 
James J. Corbett 
Vicki L. Romero 
Martin E. Carbone 
Sherri L. Anderson 
Charles R. Umlauf 
Carlos Navarrete 
Ronald G. Lamb 
Bradley W. Wells 
Shakll Ahmad 
Frances D. Wrable 
Charme G. Paul 
Kathle S. Ip 
Ruby C. Chang 
Roberta J. Morris 
David J. Losco 
Emily E. Gilbert 
Marilyn O. White 
Lucy E. Houghton 
Anne M. Megll 
Ronald Cataraha 
Marianne R. Kreter 
Dorothy A. Edwards 
Donna B. Burg 
William D. Huffman 
Charles D. Stevens 
Walter L. Nowacki 
Daniel A. Byrnes 
Thomas J. Whitfield 
Ann Marie Gallant 
George A. Pardon 
Kim E. Dunlap 
James F. Sando 
Lee G. Reavis 
T. Roger Nudd 
Charles W. Buck 
William J. Reeves 
William G. Pollock 
Raymond Navarro 
Roberta F. Browning 
Allison G. Jones 
Paul K. Miller 
Roy Williams 
Robert Ericksen 
Harley Estrin 
John Gillis 
Loydene Pritchard 
. _ Vera Eckles 
Anthony Macias 
Marion Sneed 
Sue Lasswell 
Karen Brown 
Jerry J. Keating 
Judy M. Mandel 
Robert Arkeilpane 


SCHOOLS, DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS 
School of the Arts 

Art Department 
Music Department 
Theatre Department 

School of Business Administration and Economics 


Jerry Samuelson, Dean 
Frank E. Cummings, III, Associate Dean 

Alvin Ching 
David O. Thorsen 
Joseph A. Arnold, Jr 

Thomas L. Brown, Dean 
Kenneth Goldin, Associate Dean 
Paul Hugstad, Associate Dean 


CSUF 


Accounting Department 
Economics Department 
Finance Department 
Management Department 
Management Information Systems 
Management Science Department 
Marketing Department 

School of Engineering and Computer Science 

Civil Engineering Department 
Computer Science Department 
Electrical Engineering Department 
Mechanical Engineering Department 

School of Human Development and Community Service 
Assistant to the Dean 

Elementary and Bilingual Education Department 


Trini U. Melcher 
Jane Hall 
John Emery 
Thomas W. Johnson 
Dorothy Heide, Coordinator 
Zvi Drezner 
Irene Lange 

John C. Bilello, Dean 
Floyd Thomas, Associate Dean, (acting) 
DIndial Ramsamooj 
Nick Mousouris 
Mohinder Grewal 
Timothy Lancey 

Eula Stovall, Dean (acting) 
Michael Parker, Associate Dean 
Laela E. Handy 
Shirley Hill 
Betty Jean Barnes, Coordinator 
Patricia Hannigan 
K. Jack Preble 
Anne Marie Bird (acting) 
Vera Robinson 
Norma Inabinette 
Nancy Reckinger 
Dennis Tierney, Coordinator 
Calvin Nelson 
Judith Ramirez, Coordinator 
Gerald Corey, Coordinator 
Major Kenneth Sadeckas, Coordinator 
Ronald G. Andris, Director 

Don A. Schweitzer, Dean 
Chris Cozby, Associate Dean 
Elaine Hutchison 
Carl E. Jackson 
Allan Axelrad 
Jacob Pandlan 
Isaac Cardenas 
Edgar P. Trotter, III 
Garrett W. Capune 
Thomas P. Klammer 
Jacqueline Kiraithe 
Robert Young 
James F. Woodward 
Alan S. Kaye 
Gloria D. Rock 
Alan Saltzstein 
Patricia Worden 
Daniel A. Brown (pro tern) 
Rae R. Newton 
Joyce M. Flocken 
Stewart Long, Coordinator 
Rosalie Gilford, Coordinator 
James Dietz, Coordinator 
Ronald Clapper, Coordinator 
Robert Feldman, Coordinator 
Sheldon Maram, Coordinator 
Betty Safford, Coordinator 

A. James Diefenderfer, Dean 
Margaret Woyski, Associate Dean, Academic Affairs 
John Olmsted, Associate Dean, Administrative Affairs 

Steven N. Murray 
Robert Belloli 
John A. Ryan 
James O. Friel 
Dorothy Woolum 
Gaylen R. Carlson, Coordinator 


Counseling Department 
Educational Administration Department 
Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation Department 
Nursing Department 
Reading Department 
Secondary Education Department 

Special Education Department 
Child Development Program 
Human Services Program 
Military Science Program 
University Recreation Program 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

Administrative Assistant 
Afro-Ethnic Studies Department 
American Studies Department 
Anthropology Department 
Chicano Studies Department 
Communications Department 
Criminal Justice Department 
English and Comparative Literature Department 
Foreign Languages and Literatures Department 
Geography Department 
History Department 
Linguistics Department 
Philosophy Department 
Political Science Department 
Psychology Department 
Religious Studies Department 
Sociology Department 
Speech Communication Department 
Environmental Studies Program 
Gerontology Program 
Latin American Studies Program 
Liberal Studies Program 

Russian and East European Area Studies Program 
M.A. in Social Sciences Program 
Women’s Studies Program 

School of Natural Science and Mathematics 


Biological Science Department 
Chemistry and Biochemistry Department 
Geological Sciences Department 
Mathematics Department 
Physics Department 
Science Education Program 


CSUF 


California State University, 
Fullerton Foundation 

The California State University, Fullerton Foundation 
was established and incorporated as a not-for-profit 
corporation In October 1969. The Foundation is an 
auxiliary organization of the university. The Founda- 
tion was established to provide essential student, 
faculty and staff services which cannot be provided 
from state appropriations; to supplement the pro- 
gram and activities of the university In appropriate 
ways; and to assist otherwise the university in fulfill- 
ing its purposes and in serving the people of the 
State of California — especially those of the area in 
which the university is located. 

Some of the activities in which the Foundation as- 
sists the university are developing and administering 
research and educational grants and contracts; con- 
ducting bookstore, food service and vending opera- 
tions on campus; accumulating and managing en- 
dowment and student scholarship funds; and 
administering various educationally related func- 
tions and special programs and the Tucker Wildlife 
Sanctuary. 

The Foundation’s overall policies are administered 
by a Board of Directors composed of members of 
the university faculty, administration and students as 
well as community leaders. 

Board of Directors 

Jewel Plummer Cobb, President* 

Sal D. RInella, Vice President* 

Hilton Dalessi, Secretary^ 

David L. Palmer, Treasurer# 

Rudolph C. Baldoni# 

Thomas W. Bean** 

Clare Carlson# 

Edward Carpenter# 

Jack W. Coleman* 

Gary Del Flum# 

A. James Diefenderfer* 

Julian. F. S. Foster** 

Richard Houston** 

T. Roger Nudd* 

Steven O’Learyt 
Robert Ostengaard# 

Walter J. Pray# 

Ray Spencert 
James P. Stickels** 



These five students were first to graduate from Cal 
State Fullerton (then known as Orange County State 
College). They are (left to right): Ryland C. Gibbs, 
Margaret E. Opsahl, Faye Z. Corwin, Shirley L. 
Saydman and Joseph E. Stephens. 

CSUF Alumni 

Five students were first to graduate from Cal State 
Fullerton, becoming the Class of 1960. Since then, 
over 70,000 graduates have passed through the uni- 
versity. 

CSUF alumni have a vested interest In their universi- 
ty. They have been part of its past, belong to Its 
present and are working for its future. Representing 
those alumni and many affiliates, the Conference of 
CSUF Alumni consists of the: 

Executive Council ( 1 f -member governing body) 

School of the Arts Alumni Council 

School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics Alumni Council 

School of Engineering and Computer Science 
Alumni Council 

School of Human Development and Community 
Service Alumni Council 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 
Alumni Council 

School of Natural Science and Mathematics 
Alumni Council 

Chartered departmental, special interest and 
regional clubs and other alumni groups and 
affiliates 


Ira Untermant 

Administrative Officer 

Ann M arie Gallant, Executive Director 

* Administrator “Faculty fStudent #Community Member 


CSUF 


Inaugurated in November, 1983, the organization 
serves to advance the university’s interests through 
alumni talents, services, energies and financial 
assistance to nurture and enhance the academic set- 
ting in such a way that students will benefit directly. 
The group promotes alumni involvement on campus 
and honors outstanding student, faculty, staff, com- 
munity and alumni achievement. 

Anyone graduating from CSUF with a bachelor’s de- 
gree, master’s degree or a credential Is a regular 
member of the organization. Regular members enjoy 
tangible benefits such as the quarterly publication 
(Titan News), library privileges, insurance program, 
various events and discounts. There are also asso- 
ciate, affiliate, honorary and community membership 
categories. 

Call the Alumni Affairs Office for further information. 


Community Support Groups 

California State University, Fullerton has estab- 
lished close relationships with the community. There 
are 1 1 community support groups with approximate- 
ly 8,000 members who are Involved in the life of the 
university and who support the university in ways 
that are unique to their particular organization. Each 
group determines for Itself membership criteria, an- 
nual membership fees, and its primary goal for uni- 
versity assistance. Further information about com- 
munity support groups may be obtained from the 
Office of University Relations and Development lo- 
cated in Langsdorf Hall 806 at (714) 773-2108. 

Art Alliance 

The Art Alliance provides support programs for the 
Art Department and Gallery through scholarships for 
art students: endowment funds; financial support for 
Main Art Gallery exhibitions and catalogs; and the 
administration of a docent program. 



Inaugurated in November 1983, the Conference of CSUF Alumni commemorated its beginning with this group 
shot of celebrants: alumni, students, faculty, staff, administrators and special friends. 


CSUF 


Continuing Learning Experience 

Continuing Learning Experience is an organization of 
retired and semi-retired men and women who wish 
to pursue continuous learning in a high-level educa- 
tional environment. CLE’s programs are designed to 
serve special interest groups and/or respond to 
special academic needs in the community. Members 
of CLE were active in raising funds for a Gerontology 
Center on campus. 

Friends of the State University 

The Friends of the State University is a group that 
reaches out to assist Cal State Fullerton. Its mem- 
bers include community leaders, community organi- 
zations and businesses, university faculty members 
and Interested individuals. The Friends serves as a 
channel of communications from the community to 
the leaders of the university and from the university 
back to the community. Members provide through 
their membership contributions financial support for 
a variety of activities for which other funds are un- 
available such as scholarships, faculty research 
and special equipment. The Friends also honors out- 
standing professors and students who distinguish 
themselves through service to the community. 

Friends of the Arboretum 

Besides contributing annually to the Fullerton Arbo- 
retum operating budget, the Friends augments and 
assists the Arboretum program through a wide vari- 
ety of volunteer functions. The purpose of the Arbo- 
retum is threefold: to create a quiet, esthetic retreat 
in the midst of a rapidly growing urban area; to pro- 
vide the university and surrounding communities with 
a resource for environmental and historical educa- 
tion; and to encourage research and experimenta- 
tion in horticulture, plant ecology, and the conserva- 
tion of natural resources. 

Music Associates 

The Music Associates supports the programs, facul- 
ty and students of the Music Department through 
memberships and fund-raising events. 

Parents’ Association 

The Parents’ Association Is designed to respond to 
the needs and interests of the parents of California 
State University, Fullerton students. The organiza- 
tion sponsors a broad spectrum of activities and ed- 
ucational programs as well as contributing financial- 
ly to unmet university needs. 


Patrons of the Library 

The Patrons of the Library is an organization of com- 
munity leaders, concerned citizens, former students, 
faculty and staff who generate financial support to 
sustain the margin of excellence of the university Li- 
brary. It is a group that is unique among the 19 cam- 
puses of The California State University In the quali- 
ty of its support of library holdings and facilities. 

President’s Associates 

The President’s Associates Is an organization of 
dedicated community leaders who are committed to 
the support of quality higher education. Membership 
contributions enable the university to Initiate and 
sustain quality cultural and educational programs of 
both breadth and depth designed to benefit stu- 
dents, faculty and members of the communities 
served by the university. 

Reading Educators’ Guild 

The Reading Educators’ Guild Is composed of those 
who have graduated from California State Universi- 
ty, Fullerton with a Master of Science in Education, 
Reading. The Guild sponsors credit courses and 
non-credit workshops, has a close working relation- 
ship with the Institute for Reading, and promotes re- 
search dealing with ail aspects of reading. 

Titan Athletic Foundation 

The Titan Athletic Foundation is a nonprofit organi- 
zation that exists solely to aid the athletic program 
at California State University, Fullerton. The Founda- 
tion is composed of individuals who have a genuine 
Interest In athletics, the university, and the communi- 
ty and support athletics by providing funds for schol- 
arships that ensure an effective recruiting program. 

Tucker Wildlife Society 

The Tucker Wildlife Society is made up of community 
members who donate time and financial support to 
the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary in order to provide ed- 
ucation programs to Orange County youngsters. 
Help Is also provided to support the wildlife rehabili- 
tation programs. In addition, the Society’s board of 
directors acts as an advisory panel to the sanctu- 
ary’s operation. More than 6600 volunteer hours are 
provided to the sanctuary each year to help in 
reaching out to the community and in carrying out a 
naturalist training program. 


CSUF 


Academic Services 



27 




Academic 

Affairs 


California State University, Fullerton provides a di- 
versity of educational opportunities to satisfy the 
broad range of backgrounds and interests of its stu- 
dents. The academic programs available include 44 
bachelor’s degrees, 41 master’s degrees, 41 mi- 
nors, 6 certificates and 15 teaching credential pro- 
grams. Approximately 3,000 courses have been de- 
veloped to provide learning from introductory to 
highly specialized, in-depth and advanced work in a 
wide variety and growing number of fields of study. 

Certain traditions have developed with the academ- 
ic programs at Fullerton. One is that of relative bal- 
ance In strength of the programs In the physical sci- 
ences, the social sciences, the humanities and the 
fine arts. Another is that of academic excellence In 
the various specializations offered by the university 
and the comparative freedom given to departments 
and professional schools to develop programs for 
their majors. Through the general education pro- 
gram of the university, students are prepared in ba- 
sic subjects and gain experience in a variety of care- 
fully selected disciplines. 

Vice President for Academic 
Affairs 

McCarthy Hall 133 
(714) 773-2614 

The Vice President for Academic Affairs Is responsi- 
ble for the leadership and coordination of all campus 
academic matters. The Vice President is the chief 
academic officer for the campus and Is directly In- 
volved in the areas of curriculum, faculty personnel 
processes and budget and resource allocation as 
they pertain to instruction and academic support. 

The academic Vice President works closely with the 
President, the academic associate vice presidents, 
deans, and program directors regarding all instruc- 
tionally related planning and operational matters. 
Related responsibilities Include: (1) Instructional re- 
source administration relating to staffing, operating 
expenses and equipment; (2) assuring that ail facul- 
ty and staff personnel actions reinforce and comple- 
ment the qualitative objectives of the university 
while meeting its strong commitment to the princi- 
ples and spirit of affirmative action; (3) academic 
support services such as the library, admissions and 
records. Extended Education, Information Services 
and Computer Center, and student EOP and Affirma- 
tive Action programs. As chief academic officer, the 
Vice President reviews and recommends to the 
President on all faculty and tenure considerations as 
well as other academic personnel actions as re- 
quired by university policy. 



Academic Affairs 


Information concerning the academic programs of 
Cal State Fullerton may be obtained from the Office 
of the Vice President for Academic Affairs. This In- 
formation may include: 

1. The current degree programs and other educa- 
tional and training programs; 

2. The instructional, laboratory, and other physical 
plant facilities which relate to the academic pro- 
gram; 

3. The faculty and other Instructional personnel; 

4. Data regarding student retention at Cal State Ful- 
lerton and. if available, the number and percent- 
age of students completing the program in which 
the student Is enrolled or has expressed interest; 
and 

5. The names of associations, agencies or govern- 
mental bodies which accredit, approve, or license 
the Institution and its programs, and the proce- 
dures under which any current or prospective stu- 
dent may obtain or review upon request a copy of 
the documents describing the institution’s accred- 
itation. approval or licensing. 

Academic Programs 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-3602 

The Office of Academic Programs coordinates the 
development of educational programs; provides an 
all-university perspective on educational activities 
at the campus; and stimulates academic Innova- 
tions. 

The Associate Vice President, Academic Programs 
Is responsible for administering university policies 
and regulations dealing with undergraduate and 
graduate curricula; preparation and publication of 
the university catalog; and serves as liaison officer 
to the Western Association of Schools and Colleges 
(WASC) and other accrediting agencies. 

Particular responsibilities include leadership with 
the Curriculum Committee, General Education Com- 
mittee, Graduate Education Committee, International 
Education Committee and other groups and individu- 
als concerned with changing and Improving the edu- 
cational programs of this institution. Responsibilities 
relating to the Chancellor’s Office include regular re- 
view and updating of the Academic Master Plan; co- 
ordination of program performance review; and staff 
reports for the Chancellor’s Office relating to aca- 
demic planning. 

Admissions and Records 

Langsdorf Hall Lobby 
(714) 773-2300 

The Office of Admissions and Records Is responsi- 
ble for the administration of the admission, registra- 
tion, records, and services to undergraduate and 
graduate students in the regular sessions of Califor- 
nia State University, Fullerton. These programs and 
services provide preadmission guidance to pro- 


spective students and current Information about the 
university’s curricula and requirements to school 
and college counselors; admit and readmit students 
within enrollment categories and priorities; evaluate 
the applicability of undergraduate transfer credit to- 
ward all-university requirements of the curriculum; 
provide liaison in the identification and resolution of 
articulation problems of transfer students; register 
student programs of study. Including enrollment into 
classes; maintain academic records; administer ac- 
ademic probation and disqualification policies; pro- 
vide enrollment certifications on student request, in- 
cluding transcripts of academic records, to the 
Veterans Administration and for other purposes; cer- 
tify the completion of degree and credential require- 
ments; receive petitions for exceptions to academic 
regulations; and provide information about these 
programs and services. 

Analytical Studies 

McCarthy Hall 136 
(714) 773-2121 

The Office of Analytical Studies conducts and coor- 
dinates special studies and projects as may be re- 
quired by campus administrators and faculty for 
planning and analysis. Enrollment trends, faculty, de- 
mography, recruitment and retention studies, and re- 
source allocation and utilization analyses are among 
the area of Importance for campus policy makers 
and managers. The Director also provides for the 
development of and/or response to surveys and 
questionnaires as requested by the President and 
Vice President for Academic Affairs. 

Among the institutional data with which the Office of 
Analytical Studies Is concerned are student demog- 
raphy, student progress, enrollment, curriculum and 
scheduling, space and facilities utilization, testing, 
workload, regional demography, affirmative action, 
budget and program performance review. 

The Office of Analytical Studies produces and pub- 
lishes regular campus reports such as the Statisti- 
cal Handbook and Department Profiles, as well as 
relevant reports required by the Chancellor’s Office 
and other agencies. 

Computer Center 

McCarthy Hall 38 
(714) 773-3921 

The Computer Center is located in the basement of 
McCarthy Hall. The campus has two separate main- 
frame computers: a CDC Cyber 730-2 with 150 ter- 
minal capacity for student time-sharing applications 
and a CDC Cyber 830-2 which supports all on-line 
administrative data processing for the University. 
Also available for Instructional support are three 
PRIME 9750 computers, one DEC PDP 11/44 UNIX 
computer, and one DEC PDP 1 1 /70. Instructional us- 
ers have access to such software applications as 
SPSS-X, SAS, SPICE. BMD, and STRUDL. and a vari- 
ety of other discipline-specific programming tools. 

Students have access to these central computing 
resources from over 350 micro-computers and term!- 


Academic Affairs 


nals connected to the campus data communications 
network. Open-access satellite labs are located in 
each building, allowing students convenient comput- 
er-related services. Computer workshops are con- 
ducted to train and assist students in the proper use 
of computing equipment. 

Extended Education 

Building T 14 
(714) 773-2611 

The Office of Extended Education is responsible for 
all university program and course offerings not sup- 
ported by state appropriations. These include sum- 
mer and intersession, extension courses, adjunct 
enrollment, travel study programs, contract courses 
and certificate programs. In contrast to resident pro- 
grams which require matriculation and a degree ob- 
jective, most Extended Education programs allow 
any adult and selected high school student to partic- 
ipate. The primary objective of Extended Education 
is to augment the regular university offerings and to 
provide further educational opportunities for all who 
wish to gain new knowledge and skills or to enhance 
those already acquired. Courses are taught by regu- 
lar university faculty, visiting faculty and practicing 
professionals. All are specialists In their fields. Ad- 
ditional Information concerning the Extended Educa- 
tion programs may be found in the Academic Pro- 
grams section of this catalog. 

Graduate Studies 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-2618 

The staff of the Office of Graduate Studies assists 
students in answering questions about admission, 
academic policies and procedures, graduate pro- 
grams. financial assistance, student services, and 
other matters of concern to applicants or graduate 
students. The office is also responsible for perform- 
ing an evaluation of student programs at classifica- 
tion and completion of requirements for authorizing 
award of degree. 

The Assistant Vice President for Graduate and Inter- 
national Programs is the appropriate university au- 
thority for coordinating and administering all matters 
related to graduate degree curricula. This position 
is guided by the policy recommendations of the 
Graduate Education Committee. 

Faculty Affairs and Records 

McCarthy Hall 142 
(714) 773-2125 

The Office of Faculty Affairs and Records is the offi- 
cial repository for documents and correspondence 
concerning full-time teaching and administrative fac- 
ulty. It has responsibility for retaining documentation 
pertaining to employment, reappointment, tenure, 
promotion, leaves of absence, grievances, disciplin- 
ary actions and separations. 


Faculty Research 

McCarthy Hall 1 12 
(714) 773-2106 

The Office of Faculty Research and Development 
provides assistance to faculty and staff in their ef- 
forts to obtain funding for research and other cre- 
ative activities. The office offers pre-proposal con- 
sultation, information about funding opportunities 
and assistance with budgets, technical design, typ- 
ing and editing of proposals. It also publicizes and 
administers intramural research grants. A small li- 
brary is maintained in LH 1 12 to aid faculty In identi- 
fying grant resources, federal /private announce- 
ments and agency /foundation grant profiles. 

Television & Media Support 
Services 

Library 80 
(714) 773-2621 

The Television and Media Support Center, located 
on the Lower Level of the Library building, includes 
audiovisual equipment and media distribution, mate- 
rials design and production and instructional televi- 
sion services. 

Audiovisual services for the faculty Include the use 
of audiovisual equipment and materials, and film 
rental. Conventional classroom AV equipment — 
motion picture, slide, opaque, and overhead trans- 
parency projectors, audio and video tape recorders, 
and phonographs — are provided. Special purpose 
equipment and accessories are available. The Film 
Library Intercampus Consortium (FLIC), a mutual use 
agreement, allows Fullerton faculty to borrow films 
from other CSU campuses In the Los Angeles area. 
(Students may borrow equipment with faculty ap- 
proval.) 

Design and production Services for faculty include 
assistance in selecting appropriate media for spe- 
cific course objectives, and the production of media 
not otherwise obtainable. Graphics of all sorts ren- 
dered as overhead transparencies, easel or wall 
posters, or camera ready copy are available. Photo- 
graphic slides and prints and motion picture produc- 
tion are provided. Audiotapes are produced, edited, 
and duplicated, on reel or cassette, for classroom 
use. Modules incorporating several media (e.g. 
sound /slide) will be designed and packaged in con- 
sultation with requesting faculty. 

Personnel of the Center consult with faculty In the 
analysis of media needs and advise In the procure- 
ment or production of materials appropriate for in- 
structional goals and objectives. 

Television services include the production of instruc- 
tional and informational modules for closed circuit 
distribution on campus or presentation within the 
classroom or distribution by means of CATV. Vid- 
eotaping can take place in studio facilities, in the 
classroom, or at appropriate locations on or off the 
campus. 


Academic Affairs 


Television and Media Support Center staff operate 
the system which provides university access pro- 
gramming to the CATV companies in Fullerton, Pla- 
centia, Anaheim, and Villa Park. While the CSUF 
Communications Department and the Theatre De- 
partment contribute to the cable schedule. Instruc- 
tional programming and operations management are 
provided by the Television and Media Support Cen- 
ter. 

Interactive Televised Instruction is the latest addi- 
tion to the Center’s responsibilities. ITI employs a 
television broadcast technology known as Instruc- 
tional Television Fixed Service. An associated audio 
teleconferencing system permits Interaction by stu- 
dents at remote viewing locations with faculty in stu- 
dio on campus. Students who, for various reasons, 
find it difficult to meet classes on campus can “at- 
tend” and participate in regular university courses 
by means of ITI. 

The University Library 

Library 1 14 
(714) 773-2714 

Chief among the learning resources on the campus 
is the University Library. The six-story building locat- 
ed In the heart of the campus houses a collection of 
well over half a million books and bound periodicals, 
as well as one and a half million other items including 
maps, microforms, documents (local, regional, state 
and federal) and non-print materials such as kits, 
phonorecords, audiotapes and filmstrips selected 
through the joint efforts of faculty and librarians to 
support the graduate and undergraduate programs 
of the university. In addition to the general collec- 
tions. supplemental collections designed to support 
the curriculum and instructlonally-related research 
have been created and developed. 

As part of the curriculum, the Library offers courses 
in bibliographic research; tours and lectures on spe- 
cialized materials are given at the request of the fac- 
ulty; and Introductory tours of the services and mate- 
rials are offered at the beginning of each semester. 
In addition to formal Instruction in bibliographic re- 
search, the library faculty provide subject- 
specialized research and reference services. 


Materials for required and recommended course- 
related reading are made available through the Re- 
serve Book Room for limited loan periods. For the 
user’s convenience, several photocopiers and mi- 
croform reader /printers are available. Other spe- 
cialized facilities include the music listening rooms, 
group study rooms, and a microform reading area. 

Access to published materials is enhanced through 
the Computerized Information Retrieval Service 
(CIRS) on-line reference In conjunction with the Ref- 
erence Section of the Library. Over 200 different 
databases are accessible for curricular and re- 
search needs. Details on the fees for this service 
are provided in a guide available at the Information 
Desk and at the Reference Desk. 

The student Identification card issued by the univer- 
sity must be validated each semester at the library 
circulation counter to permit its use as a library card 
for checking out books. The loss or theft of the stu- 
dent ID, as well as any changes of address, must be 
reported immediately to the library circulation count- 
er. Library users are responsible for the return of all 
materials charged out on their ID card; early report- 
ing of a lost ID will reduce the risk of misuse of your 
card. If there is a need to be absent from the immedi- 
ate area for more than two weeks, all library materi- 
als should be returned. Guides to all library circula- 
tion services and fees are available at the 
Information desk. 

In addition to the many resources available on cam- 
pus, mutual use agreements make accessible to stu- 
dents and faculty the library collections of the other 
18 libraries of The California State University sys- 
tem, of The University of California campuses near- 
by (Irvine and Riverside), and of neighboring institu- 
tions such as Fullerton College. Interlibrary 
borrowing arrangements with major university and 
research libraries throughout the country expand 
further the research potential for the CSUF commu- 
nity. 

Throughout the academic years 1986-87 and 1987- 
88, the Library will be undergoing extensive expan- 
sion and renovation. General information will be 
available at the information desk on the first floor. In- 
formation desk personnel will provide directional as- 
sistance as well as a variety of descriptive materials 
and guides to the building and the collections. 


Academic Affairs 


Student Academic Affairs 


Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities 112 
(714) 773-3605 

The Academic Advisement Center provides informa- 
tion and guidance In the choice of an undergraduate 
major, a school of interest, or selection of elective 
and general education courses. It is the administra- 
tive center for undergraduate students who have not 
declared a major or school of interest. Refer to the 
Academic Advisement section for additional infor- 
mation. 

Student Academic Services 
and University Outreach 

Library (lower level) 18 
(714) 773-2484 

The primary responsibility of Student Academic Ser- 
vices and University Outreach is the recruitment and 
retention of students at California State University, 
Fullerton. Inherent to this mission Is the strict atten- 
tion that must be given to increasing the number and 
graduation rates of underrepresented students. 
Moreover, the unit is assigned much of the responsi- 
bility for coordinating institutional efforts in providing 
educational opportunity for all students. 

The Student Academic Services and University Out- 
reach Office develops and coordinates a compre- 
hensive program of outreach services and activities 
which assist to make the university more visible, at- 
tractive, and accessible to all potential students. A 
number of programs have been consolidated under 
this office. These are described on the following 
pages. 

Athletic Academic Services 

Physical Education 130B 
(714) 773-3057 

As an integral part of the CSUF student advising sys- 
tem, the Athletic Academic Coordinator’s office pro- 
vides advisement for student-athletes; provides re- 
ferrals to campus academic support units; and 
conducts programs which are designed to assist 
student-athletes in meeting their academic goals. 



student Academic Affairs 


W j 



Center for Internships and 
Cooperative Education 

Langsdorf Hall 210 
(714) 773-2171 

The Center for Internships and Cooperative Educa- 
tion was established to formally integrate a stu- 
dent’s academic experience and practical work ex- 
perience with cooperating employers. The Center is 
the focal point and coordinating office for the initia- 
tion, development and expansion of cooperative ed- 
ucation. The Internships and Cooperative Education 
Program offers students an opportunity to expand 
their knowledge and skills In a "real work" situation 
which better prepares them to select a career and 
successfully enter the job market. Through academ- 
ic study and practical experience, students enhance 
their academic knowledge, personal development 
and professional preparation. 

An internship or co-op experience is offered as a 
credit course by the academic department and is un- 
der the guidance of a faculty coordinator. Some in- 
ternships are salaried and consequently assist stu- 
dents to finance their educational expenses. 

Educational Opportunity 
Programs 

Library (lower level) 18 
(714) 773-2484 

The Educational Opportunity Program (EOP) is pri- 
marily a "Special Admissions" program available to 
legal residents of the State of California. EOP Is de- 
signed to provide information regarding admission, 
financial assistance, and supportive services to pro- 
spective undergraduate students who have potential 
to perform satisfactorily at the university level, but 
who might be prevented from doing so because of 
economic, educational and environmental disadvan- 
tages. 

EOP gives each of the students individual attention. 
It uses knowledge of the students’ distinctive pat- 
terns of social behavior, learning styles, motiva- 
tions, and aspirations to assist them In realizing their 
full potentials. 

The services offered by the Educational Opportunity 
Program Include: advisement, tutoring, and retention 
services. These services ensure a progressive rate 
of student achievement. 

Advisement Services 

The EOP advisement component, (See Student Aca- 
demic Services), is one key to the effectiveness of 
the EOP. Peer mentors, working under the direction 
of professional staff, serve as important liaisons be- 
tween each EOP student and the university as a 
whole. Assistance and guidance are provided to 
help the student resolve academic, social, financial 
and personal problems. The EOP component of the 
Academic Services Center also serves as a referral 
point to direct students to the appropriate support 


services, e.g. Financial Aid, Learning Assistance 
Resource Center, and Health Center. 

Learning Assistance Resource 
Center (LARC) 

Library (lower level) 38 
(714) 773-2388 

The Learning Assistance Resource Center (LARC), 
located on the lower level of the Library, offers a 
wide range of services for students who want to Im- 
prove their academic skills. LARC services include: 

1. Strategies for Learning classes to help students 
learn appropriate study skills while taking general 
education courses (e.g., history, political science, 
biological science and chemistry). 

2. General classes to help students improve their 
academic capabilities in the areas of study skills, 
language arts and writing. Special sections of 
these classes for ESL students are available. 

3. Test preparation classes to help students pre- 
pare for the Entry Level Mathematics Examina- 
tion, the Examination In Writing Proficiency, the 
California Basic Educational Skills Test and the 
Graduate Record Exam. 

4. The Learning Laboratory which contains self-help 
programs that students can use independently to 
learn new skills or to review old skills. 

5. Workshops to help students improve their test- 
taking skills, reduce test-taking anxiety, and deal 
with stress related to test-taking. 

Student Academic Services 

Humanities 1 13 

( 714 ) 773-2288 

An important component of the Educational Equity 
Programs (Student Affirmative Action and the Edu- 
cational Opportunity Program) is Student Academic 
Services. These support services are designed to 
facilitate student adjustment, academic achieve- 
ment and persistence at CSUF. Through individual 
advisement and guidance, workshops, social activi- 
ties and a mentor program, students are encouraged 
toward their educational goals. The center also pro- 
vides referrals to other appropriate services and Is 
an Important liaison between each individual student 
and various university offices. 

The university mentor program is an Integral part of 
Student Academic Services. Because meaningful in- 
teractions with university personnel enhance stu- 
dents’ academic and other campus experiences, the 
mentor program Involves faculty, staff, and adminis- 
trators as academic mentors to provide information, 
assistance and support to ethnic minority and other 
students. Mentors serve as role models and provide 
encouragement to the students with whom they 
work. 


student Academic Affairs 


Student Affirmative Action 

Library (lower level) 22 
(714) 773-2086 

CORE (Comprehensive Outreach, Retention and Ed- 
ucational Enhancement) Student Affirmative Action 
(SAA) is part of The California State University’s 
systemwide Student Affirmative Action plan which 
was mandated by the California Legislature in 1984 
under Assembly Concurrent Resolution No. 161. The 
intent of this resolution was to address the underre- 
presentation of ethnic minority, women and economi- 
cally disadvantaged students enrolled in California 
postsecondary institutions. 

At Fullerton, the SAA program focuses on ethnic mi- 
nority students from underrepresented groups who 
are academically qualified to meet the system’s reg- 
ular admission requirements. The program’s major 
activities fall into three components: outreach, re- 
tention, and educational enhancement. 

Outreach Services 

In cooperation with the university’s outreach office 
(see University Outreach Services), the outreach 
component coordinates services and activities to in- 
crease the enrollment of regularly admissable ethnic 
minority students from underrepresented groups to 
Cal State Fullerton. 

High School and community college students seek- 
ing admission to the university are provided informa- 
tion on Fullerton admissions’ procedures, academic 
programs and student support services. Students 
are also provided individual advisement and assis- 
tance with application processes and information on 
financial aid and scholarships. Parents of prospec- 
tive students are also invited to participate in out- 
reach activities including a parent support group and 
information workshops which familiarize them with 
various segments of the university and promote their 
Involvement in the college experience of their off- 
springs. 

The SAA Early Outreach Program works with ethnic 
minority students from local junior high schools to 
assist in preparing them to enroll successfully and 
excel academically In college. 

Retention Services 

Students enrolled at Cal State Fullerton can partici- 
pate in SAA retention services and programs (See 
Student Academic Services) which assist them to 
make a successful transition to the university, main- 
tain a good academic standing, explore career alter- 
natives and graduate with a chosen degree. These 
include academic support services, personal and 
career development activities and social and cultur- 
al experiences. 

Educational Enhancement 

Recognizing that students are more likely to suc- 
ceed in an environment where they are treated with 
sensitivity and understanding, the SAA educational 
enhancement component works with faculty, staff 
and administrators to create a sensitive and sup- 


portive environment for minority and underrepresent- 
ed students. 

University Outreach Services 

Library (lower level) 22 

( 714 ) 773-2086 

The University Outreach Service Office develops 
and coordinates a comprehensive program of out- 
reach services and activities which assist to make 
the university more visible, attractive and accessi- 
ble to all potential students. An overall goal of the 
office is to increase the enrollment of students at Cal 
State Fullerton with a special emphasis on students 
from underrepresented ethnic minority groups. 

To accomplish this goal, outreach staff make pre- 
sentations to high school and community college 
students, parents and counselors regarding Fuller- 
ton admissions procedures (including admission to 
the Educational Opportunity Program (EOP) and Stu- 
dent Affirmative Action (SAA), academic programs 
and student support services). Students are also 
provided individual advisement and assistance with 
application processes and financial aid procedures. 

Special activities including campus tours, financial 
aid workshops for parents and conferences for high 
school and community college counselors are also 
sponsored by the office. 

In keeping with the university’s commitment to in- 
crease the representation of ethnic minority and 
underrepresented students at Fullerton, special ef- 
forts are made to incorporate the unique needs of 
students in the development and implementation of 
these all outreach efforts. 

Writing Assistance Center 

Humanities 51 1 
(714) 773-3650 

The Writing Assistance Center provides tutorial as- 
sistance primarily for students who are enrolled in 
English 099, 101, 106, 201 and 301 classes; howev- 
er, tutors will assist students who seek help in writ- 
ing papers for other English classes, especially stu- 
dents who need to improve their knowledge of 
writing and language skills in order to complete their 
university requirements. The tutors provide individu- 
alized instruction adjusted to the learning pace of 
the student. They attempt to help the student meet 
both the demands of academic writing and the stan- 
dards of clear, concise prose. 

The staff is trained to work with students who are 
preparing papers for a course or who need help in 
interpreting the Instructor’s comments on a complet- 
ed paper. They do not proofread nor do they edit pa- 
pers; rather they offer constructive suggestions de- 
signed to help the student master the techniques of 
proofreading and editing. The tutor’s goal is to in- 
crease the student’s competency, not to improve 
any given paper. If a student needs intensive work 
on grammar, the tutor will provide one-to-one tutor- 
ing and will introduce the student to a variety of 
study materials, including written exercises and 
computer programs. 


student Academic Affairs 


Honors Programs 



Dean’s Honor List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publi- 
cation each semester of a list of undergraduate stu- 
dents whose grade-point averages for the previous 
term were 3.5 or better. Students are notified in writ- 
ing when they have earned this distinction. Eligibility 
is based on a minimum of 12 units of graded course 
work. 

General Education Honors 

The General Education Honors Program offers stu- 
dents many of the benefits of education at a small 
college in the midst of the rich resources of a large 
university. Courses in the General Education Honors 
Program provide challenging learning experiences in 
smaller classes, individualized attention from pro- 
fessors, and closer interaction with other students. 

The program also gives students the opportunity to 
earn recognition for distinguished academic perfor- 
mance in general education courses. Students who 
successfully complete the requirements for honors 
in general education will have a notation placed on 
their transcripts, and will be awarded a certificate of 
honors upon graduation. 

In order to graduate with honors in general educa- 
tion, a student must: complete the university’s gen- 
eral education requirements; complete 30 units of 
general education honors courses; maintain a 
grade-point average of 3.25 in all general education 
honors classes. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshman 
and transfer students who have demonstrated out- 
standing achievement in past academic work. For 
first-time freshmen with no previous college units 
earned, a grade point of 3.5 on a four-point scale 
must be earned in the course work considered for 
admission to the university. Students who have com- 
pleted fewer than 56 transferable semester units of 
credit must meet the grade-point average criteria for 
first-time freshmen and must also have earned a 3.5 
grade-point average on all college work attempted. 
Students who have completed 56 or more transfer- 
able semester units are eligible if a grade-point av- 
erage of 3.5 is earned in all college work completed. 

Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation for baccalaureate recipients 
are based on overall performance and have been 
defined by the Faculty Council in three classifica- 
tions: 

With honors GPA 3.50-3.74 

With high honors GPA 3.75-3.89 

With highest honors GPA 3.90-4.00 


Honors Programs 


Honor Societies 

Chapters of seven honor societies have been char- 
tered at California State University, Fullerton to ac- 
cord recognition to students who demonstrate supe- 
rior scholarship and leadership in special academic 
fields. 

Beta Alpha Psi — Encourages and gives recognition 
to scholastic and professional excellence in the 
field of accounting. 

Golden Key National Honor Society — Promotes 
and recognizes scholastic excellence among juniors 
and seniors at CSUF. 

Mu Phi Epsilon — Promotes high standards in edu- 
cation and performance in the professional world of 
music. 

Phi Alpha Theta — Serves as a vehicle of recogni- 
tion for outstanding students in the field of history 
who are honored at an annual function. 

Phi Delta Gamma — Promotes the highest profes- 
sional ideals among women of the graduate schools. 

Phi Kappa Phi — Provides an honor society dedicat- 
ed to the unity and democracy of education and 
open to honor students from all departments of 
American universities and colleges. 

PsI Chi — Advances and maintains scholarship in 
the science of psychology. 

President’s Opportunity 
Scholars Program 

California State University. Fullerton established the 
President’s Opportunity Scholars Program as a 
means of recognizing the academic and extracurric- 
ular excellence of a select group of students. Its 
special focus is outstanding students from the cur- 
rent year of high school graduates who are also 
members of minority groups which are underrepre- 
sented In higher education — primarily black and His- 
panic students. Scholars receive $500 per year for 
four years while maintaining eligibility in the pro- 
gram. 

To be eligible for consideration, an applicant must: 

• Be a legal resident of California. 

• Have a grade-point average of at least 3.2 in all 
academic subjects for the 10th, 11th and first 
half of the 12th grades. 

• Earn a Scholastic Aptitude Test total score of 
900 or higher, or an American College Test 
composite score of 20 or higher. 


• Graduate from high school In the class year pre- 
ceding the fall semester for which applying. 
Document significant contributions to school 
and community activities during the high 
school years. 

• Verify outstanding individual achievement. 

• File for admission to Cal State Fullerton before 
applying for a President’s Opportunity Scholars 
award. 

• Submit a completed President’s Opportunity 
Scholars application form and arrange for the 
Secondary School Report and Description and 
Evaluation of Student forms to be submitted by 
the high school principal or a counselor and by 
a faculty member. 


President’s Scholars Program 

California State University, Fullerton established the 
President’s Scholars Program as a means of recog- 
nizing the academic and extracurricular excellence 
of a select group of students. Funded by the Presi- 
dent’s Associates, the program began In 1979 with 
the first 10 President’s Scholars. Each year 10 addi- 
tional President’s Scholars are selected with the po- 
tential eligibility of all chosen individuals extending 
for a total of four years. President’s Scholars re- 
ceive $600 a year. 

To be eligible for consideration, an applicant must: 

• Be a legal resident of California. 

• Present a grade-point average of at least 3.5 in 
all academic subjects for the 10th, 11th and 
first half of the 12th grades. 

• Earn a Scholastic Aptitude Test total score of 
1050 or higher, or an American College Test 
composite score of 24 or higher. 

• Graduate from high school. 

• Verify outstanding individual achievement. 

• Document significant contributions to school 
and community activities during the high school 
years. 

• File for admission to Cal State Fullerton before 
applying for a President’s Scholars award. 
Submit a completed President’s Scholars 
application form and arrange for the Secondary 
School Report and Description and Evaluation 
of Student forms to be submitted by the high 
school principal or a counselor and by a faculty 
member. 

Application forms for both Scholars’ Programs are 
available by telephoning (714) 773-2361 or by writ- 
ing the Office of Relations with Schools and Col- 
leges. President’s Scholars Program, California 
State University, Fullerton, CA 92634. 


Honors Programs 


Institutes and Centers 



California Desert Studies 
Consortium 

McCarthy Hall 236B 
(714) 773-2428 

The California Desert Studies Consortium consists 
of seven California State University campuses in- 
cluding Dominguez Hills, Fullerton, Long Beach, Los 
Angeles, Northridge, Pomona, and San Bernardino. 
The primary objectives of this consortium are to pro- 
mote and provide physical and academic support for 
undergraduate educational programs in a variety of 
disciplines and to better understand and manage the 
physical and biological aspects of desert environ- 
ments. The newly developed CSU Desert Studies 
Center provides living and laboratory space for over 
100 undergraduates at Soda Springs in the Mojave 
Desert, a location central to all high desert study ar- 
eas. 

Center for Economic Education 

Langsdorf Hall 315 
(714) 773-2248 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many 
such centers at colleges and universities in the Unit- 
ed States working with the National Joint Council on 
Economics Education and the Economic Literacy 
Council of California to expand economic under- 
standing. Center programs include services to 
schools and colleges, individual educators, and the 
community; research and professional training: and 
operation of an economic education Information cen- 
ter. The center is located In the School of Business 
Administration and Economics. 

Center for Governmental 
Studies 

Education Classroom 424 
(714) 773-3521 

The Center for Governmental Studies supports re- 
search, training and publication which assist govern- 
mental, professional and civic groups. It is housed 
In the Political Science Department and draws upon 
departmental, community and alumni expertise. The 
Institute publishes monographs and books, spon- 
sors training programs, and supports theoretical and 
applied research which are of Interest to public poli- 
cy makers. Institute funds also assist in supporting 
the teaching mission of the Department. 



Institutes and Centers 


Center for International 
Business 

Langsdorf Hall 626 
(714) 773-2223 

The need for an international dimension to business 
education is underscored by the importance of inter- 
national business operations to domestic firms and 
the development of multinational firms and agencies. 
Equally important is a growing awareness of the di- 
versity among the world’s cultures and economies, 
and an understanding of an unavoidable interdepen- 
dence between nations. The International Business 
Center has undertaken to meet these challenges In 
the International area by developing international 
business programs with the School of Business Ad- 
ministration and Economics. 

Child and Infant Study Centers 

Humanities 519 
(714) 773-3589 

The Child and Infant Study Centers in the Depart- 
ment of Psychology support the research and in- 
structional activities of faculty and students in devel- 
opmental psychology. Unique opportunities are 
provided to students In both research training and 
applied developmental psychology. Programmatic 
research conducted at the centers Include: (1) longi- 
tudinal assessment of the relationships between 
home environment, mental development and school 
readiness; (2) experimental analysis of perceptual 
and cognitive abilities; (3) life-span changes in mem- 
ory and information processing; (4) learning disabili- 
ties In children and adults; (5) memory strategy in- 
struction across the life-span; (6) development of 
cerebral hemisphere specialization; and (7) parent- 
child computer learning activities. 

Field Services and Professional 
Development Center 

Education Classroom 321 
(714) 773-2166 

The Field Services and Professional Development 
Center operates through partnership of the Office of 
Extended Education and the School of Human Devel- 
opment and Community Service. Its major function Is 
to sponsor and facilitate outreach activities in the 
form of credit and non-credit extended education 
courses as well as workshops and inservice pro- 
grams for schools and professional organizations. 

Working in partnership with schools, institutions, 
and community agencies, the Center can provide 
consultation to help solve existing problems and as- 
sist In developing educational programs which meet 
organizational needs. Services offered by the Cen- 
ter include (1) creating new educational programs to 
meet current needs, (2) providing qualified consul- 
tants on a variety of educational, professional and 


human services Issues, (3) assisting school districts 
In developing programs and services that meet leg- 
islative requirements, (4) providing credit and non- 
credit courses, meetings and workshops at conve- 
nient locations, (5) co-sponsoring conferences with 
institutions and agencies, and (6) assisting with ap- 
plications for state and federal grants related to ed- 
ucational and human service programs. 

Institute for Early Childhood 
Education 

Education Classroom 379 
(714) 773-3411 

The Institute for Early Childhood Education (1) fos- 
ters and encourages communication of ideas and in- 
formation among its membership for mutual profes- 
sional development; (2) encourages its members to 
engage in research and writing related to the prob- 
lems of early childhood education; (3) encourages 
students and teachers to adopt an approach of In- 
quiry to solve their professional concerns relating to 
the education of young children; and (4) seeks ways 
of Improving the Individual teaching performance of 
Its membership through communication with others 
at all levels of instruction. 

Institute of Geophysics 

McCarthy Hall 263 
(714) 773-3882 

The Institute of Geophysics Is an interdisciplinary or- 
ganization currently comprised of faculty members 
from the Departments of Geological Sciences and 
Physics. It was established to foster the communi- 
cation of ideas and information; encourage interdis- 
ciplinary research; and improve instruction in geo- 
physics. Membership is open to all faculty members 
who are interested in all aspects of geophysics. 

Institute for Molecular Biology 
and Nutrition 

McCarthy Hall 580 
(714) 773-3624 

The purposes of the institute are: (1) to foster and 
encourage communication of ideas and Information 
among its membership for mutual professional im- 
provement; (2) to encourage students to adopt affili- 
ation with the membership and to adopt an interdis- 
ciplinary understanding of their particular areas of 
emphasis; (3) to foster an active research program 
on the part of the membership on problems best ap- 
proached by the integration of chemistry, physics 
and biology; and (4) to seek ways of improving the 
Individual teaching performance of Its membership 
through interdisciplinary communication at all levels 
of instruction. 

The Institute sponsors a series of special seminars 
devoted to topics in the molecular biological sci- 


Institutes and Centers 


ences, featuring speakers from its own personnel 
and from other campuses. 

Institute for Research in 
Reading and Related 
Disciplines 

Education Classroom 544 
(714) 773-3015 

The Institute for Research in Reading and Related 
Disciplines was formed to (1) foster and encourage 
communication of ideas and information about read- 
ing research among its members, the profession and 
the community; (2) foster reading research and cre- 
ative activities on the part of the membership; (3) 
seek ways of improving the professional skills of Its 
membership through interdisciplinary communica- 
tion; and (4) encourage students in research and 
creative activities under the guidance of its mem- 
bers. 

The Institute determines a yearly research goal and 
selects its panel of advisers to aid in the develop- 
ment of these goals by contributing resources or 
professional expertise. The institute holds regular 
business meetings and faculty development ses- 
sions and publishes the FORUM, a newsletter circu- 
lated to teachers and administrators within Orange 
County. 

Laboratory of Phonetic 
Research 

Education Classroom 630D 
(714) 773-2526 
(714) 773-2441 

The Laboratory of Phonetic Research is a research 
and training facility in the Department of Linguistics. 
It is equipped with electromechanical facilities for 
the acoustical, psychoacoustical, and physiological 
study of human speech. Its objectives are twofold: 

Instruction. To provide teaching, training and ex- 
perience to assist the language handicapped. 
Research. To provide advanced students and fac- 
ulty with facilities for research on language 
function and dysfunction. 

Southern California Ocean 
Studies Consortium 

McCarthy Hall 282 
(714) 773-3614 

The Southern California Ocean Studies Consortium, 
which consists of six State University campuses 
(Dominguez Hills, Fullerton, Long Beach, Los Ange- 
les, Northridge, Pomona), participates in training 
managers and scientists and in educating the gener- 
al public by coordinating and facilitating marine edu- 
cational and research activities. It provides facilities 


for introducing students to the marine environment or 
for intensive participation by students pursuing pro- 
fessional programs. The major facility Is the R. V. 
Nautilus (50-foot vessel) which Is used by classes 
and research programs In biology, geology and 
ocean engineering. In addition the Consortium 
serves as an educational and research liaison be- 
tween regions, states and nations. 

Sport and Movement Institute 

Physical Education 134 
(714) 773-3316 

The purpose of the Sport and Movement Institute is 
to promote an atmosphere congenial to research, 
creative activity, and services concerned with hu- 
man movement and Its related phenomena. Specifi- 
cally, the organization endeavors to: (1) provide ser- 
vices of evaluation, consultation and advisement; (2) 
foster and encourage the generation and communi- 
cation of ideas and information; (3) interpret and fa- 
cilitate the practical application of research find- 
ings; (4) provide opportunities for individuals and 
community groups to participate in activities of the 
Institute such as clinics, workshops, seminars, etc.; 
(5) promote and support research and other schol- 
arly activities on the part of the membership. 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 

McCarthy Hall 533F 
(714) 649-2760 
(714) 773-3451 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a non- 
profit California State University, Fullerton Founda- 
tion agency. Located on Modjeska Canyon Road in 
the Santa Ana Mountains, the sanctuary provides for 
a program of continuing educational service to the 
community; a research center for biological field 
studies; a facility for teacher education in nature In- 
terpretation and conservation education; and a cen- 
ter for training students planning to enter Into the 
public service field of nature interpretation. 



Institutes and Centers 


V 


V'. 

;■ ■),«;. ' ^ 

- /• ■ ■ .r , iv •^'’ * V’ ^ 

' ;• 'i ^ . f-- 

'•'?*, ■ -r; ■ //r-'; • 

■V ■ . ■ ■■ ' ' ’ ( 

■ • n V- ■ . ,_■ . '‘ It c 

..■ \,,,f • .' ^ - •• ' • 

-:•; • ■;■• . . •-.■?5 '■■ ■ - - -V/K- 

'■•' ■ . ■ ..;v; 

■ '. s^f^^t)•" 

;. .;i ; 

^ . . ■ . , .; ; 

■, > • ■... 

■■ -. V' • 




ivi ■ ■ 

os::l.QS)^ I'i 

" <i v> i f i I C 0 3 1 ^ • 


-> A d -nc Q * O r. ,-. |! 4- u *:*■ B 


trMiprrio' n onn ? 'o rOv- 

O) ‘.I-**? ••■ pM' > , ‘ ' •*• '■'- ' f' 

C ':-■- .V* '. ■ -r' V ''■ 

c :. .• V*^,. . ■-, 




.IvrC^r 




, ,^. .s,, 




(V’ . ^ 

.• ^C^' --s 




It ...W’ 

, I ■ 




■ :■* JtL’iv' 


., ; ■ .. , -y .:.;.UT:'; ■■’>' 

; fi-i' ■' S;:‘ 


■• V« ; -■.- 



-,, ' t ■ a -I 

jj.; »\ j'.i-5y'i' * ii. ; •■■: "•' 






;'>?•'• • 


; : •• 


'h ■ 


iT' - i '''■• '■ ?' ' ■ ‘ ' £' ' ’ ^ 

i'es •:••:■- 

' ' ' ?*> ' ■'* S =. ‘ 

' 'a-'.-'. .,• ,./.'"^’ ’■>*■• ii^v> ‘ ^ ■*‘--vfc.- y*. 

•. ■• . - ♦ ■ •• % •;■■ 


OHt:^ '. 

' lLif>>o v 






'■ -'C. • ^ 

1 >- , . 'tV' •. ' . 








Student Services 
and Activities 



41 


Student Services 


While classroom activity is devoted to the academic 
development of the learner, Student Services offers 
programs which support the academic program and 
simultaneously provide students with services and 
opportunities for personal growth. Some Student 
Services programs such as housing and financial aid 
emphasize their service and educationally suppor- 
tive roles; others, like counseling, accentuate their 
developmental aspects. The opportunities offered 
by the university’s Student Services program vary 
from the traditional social activities to lectures and 
concerts funded through the Associated Students. 
Developmental activities Include the exploration of 
personal and vocational life styles and leadership 
and training. 

Student Services are comprised of Academic Ap- 
peals, the Adult Reentry Center, the Career Devel- 
opment Center, Financial Aid, Handicapped Student 
Services, Health and Counseling Service, Housing 
Services and Residence Life, International Educa- 
tion and Exchange, Testing and Research, Universi- 
ty Activities Center, University Center (Student 
Union), and Women’s Center. 

Vice President for Student 
Services 

Langsdorf Hall 810 
(714) 773-3221 

The efforts of all of the Student Services are coordi- 
nated and supervised by the vice president for stu- 
dent services. The vice president is responsible for 
the quality of student life on the campus and works 
with faculty, administration and students to improve 
the campus environment. The vice president Is as- 
sisted by an associate vice president and an assis- 
tant vice president. This office Is also charged with 
administering the university’s academic appeals 
procedure and the student disciplinary codes. 

Academic Appeals 

UC2-43 

(714) 773-3211 

Students who have grade disputes are encouraged 
to make every effort to resolve the issue informally 
by meeting with the Instructor and department chair. 
Students who feel they have been unsuccessful at 
resolving the issue informally, should contact the 
coordinator of academic appeals, who will work to 
resolve the dispute Informally and provide informa- 
tion and clarification about university policies. 
Students are encouraged to contact the coordinator 
if they have questions about the academic appeals 
process. 



student Services 




Adult Reentry Center 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773-3889 

The Adult Reentry Center (ARC) serves adults who, 
after a break in their education, are considering be- 
ginning or continuing their college education. The 
center provides support and guidance for currently 
enrolled reentry students and others whose needs 
differ from those of the traditional university student. 

ARC offers a variety of programs which include peer 
counseling, workshops, support groups and refer- 
rals to staff and faculty. The center's counselors and 
programs can help students and perspective 
students to clarify their goals and determine If a 
university education is the appropriate method for 
attaining those goals. The center also provides in- 
formation and assistance with university application 
and registration procedures as well as personal, ac- 
ademic and career counseling. Special programs, 
groups, workshops, films and discussions which 
focus on the special needs of reentry students are 
presented each semester. 

Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall 208 
(714) 773-3121 

The Career Development Center is structured to 
meet the wide range of students’ career needs and 
to help explore, develop and realize career plans. 
The center has designed many programs and ser- 
vices tailored to fit career exploration, planning and 
employment needs. 

The center can help with career planning and re- 
search or provide job search skills and employment 
opportunities. Because the career planning process 
Involves many variables, the CDC draws upon both 
on and off campus resources. Counselors work 
closely with employers and on task forces with 
faculty to develop career programs relevant to edu- 
cational experiences. Whether a student is just be- 
ginning career research or is ready to look for a job, 
the CDC has counselors and programs that will help 
define and achieve career goals. 

COUNSELING — CDC professionals can help to 
identify interests, skills and values and their rela- 
tionship to career opportunities through counseling 
and vocational testing. In addition to career issues, 
CDC counselors are trained to assist with personal 
problems that may be Interfering with progress. An 
individual, confidential appointment can help clarify 
concerns and develop a plan of action. 

SEMINARS AND WORKSHOPS — Group sessions 
examine topics such as career planning, resume 
writing, job search techniques, interview skills and 
other career related subjects throughout the semes- 
ter. Many of these seminars are designed for 
specific academic areas. In addition, workshops in 
personal development and life skills are offered in 
the center. See the CDC Calendar published every 
semester for current information. 

CAREER RESOURCE LIBRARY — The center has an 
extensive collection of career search, occupational 


and labor market Information to help with career re- 
search. The library includes books, pamphlets, bro- 
chures, as well as audio and video tapes. 

PART-TIME EMPLOYMENT— The center has list- 
ings of part-time, summer and temporary employ- 
ment which are received each day from local em- 
ployers. 

CAREER EMPLOYMENT — Counseling, employment 
listings and recorded job information are available to 
students and graduates seeking full-time career op- 
portunities. The jobs are found in government agen- 
cies, business, industry, manufacturing and service 
industries. 

ON CAMPUS RECRUITMENT— Several hundred 
employers send recruiters to the CDC each fall and 
spring to recruit graduating seniors, graduate stu- 
dents and alumni. 

EDUCATIONAL PLACEMENT — The center pro- 
vides complete services for candidates seeking em- 
ployment in educational institutions including: place- 
ment counseling, placement file service, position 
listings and a published bulletin of administrative 
openings. 

MINORITY SERVICES — The CDC Is aware of the 
career needs of minority students; counselors work 
closely with employers, clubs and professional or- 
ganizations to provide services and opportunities 
that will help meet these needs. 

SIGI+ (pronounced “SIggy”) is a computer-based 
System of Interactive Guidance and Information that 
will help make career decisions. The program will 
help examine values, explore career options and 
master decision-making strategies. 

CAREER CLASS — Career Exploration and Life 
Planning (Counseling 262) is a three unit course de- 
signed to facilitate career and educational decision 
making. Specific objectives of the class include In- 
creasing awareness of self, the world of work, rela- 
tionships between college majors and occupations, 
and job search skills. See the current Class 
Schedule for further information. 

ALUMNI CAREER BANK — The Alumni Career Bank 
is composed of more than 500 CSUF alumni who 
have volunteered to share their work experiences 
with students. Over 100 career areas and nearly 
every major and program are represented in the 
bank. 

WALK-IN COUNSELOR — Throughout the day a 
CDC counselor is available to help define career 
needs and suggest appropriate CDC services. De- 
signed to answer short questions and provide infor- 
mation. 

The services of the Career Development Center are 
available without cost to currently enrolled students. 
Services are also available to alumni without charge 
for six months following graduation. After that peri- 
od, alumni will be charged a nominal fee for certain 
services. 

The university will furnish, upon request, information 
concerning the subsequent employment of gradu- 
ates from programs or courses of study which have 
the purpose of preparing students for a particular 


student Services 


ticular career field. This information includes data 
concerning average starting salary and the percen- 
tage of previously enrolled students who obtained 
employment. The information provided may include 
data collected from either graduates of the campus 
or graduates of all campuses in The California State 
University system. Copies of the published informa- 
tion may be requested from the director of the cen- 
ter. 

Financial Aid 

McCarthy Halt 63 
(714) 773-3125 

The purpose of the Financial Aid Office Is to provide 
financial assistance to eligible students. The office 
administers the following student financial assist- 
ance programs: 

California Loans to Assist Students (CLAS) 
National Direct Student Loan 
Guaranteed Student Loan (GSL) 

Pell Grant 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant 
Bureau of Indian Affairs Grant 
State University Grant Program 
Educational Opportunity Program Grant 
College Work-Study Program Grant 
Cal Grant A (State Scholarship) 

Cal Grant B (College Opportunity Grant) 
Graduate Fellowship 
Private Scholarship 
Emergency Loan Fund 

For further information concerning financial aid pro- 
grams available at the university see the Registra- 
tion Procedures section of this catalog or call the 
Financial Aid Office. 

Handicapped Student Services 

Library 1 13 
(714) 773-3117 

Handicapped Student Services provides assistance 
and offers special services to all handicapped/ 
disabled students. The purpose of this program Is to 
make all of the university’s educational, cultural, so- 
cial and physical facilities and programs available to 
students with orthopedic and/or perceptual han- 
dicaps/disabilities. The program serves as a cen- 
tralized source of information and provides students 
with individual attention. The professional and sup- 
port staff are experienced with the particular needs 
of the handicapped/disabled. 

The program works In close cooperation with other 
university departments in order to provide a full 
range of services. These services include class- 
room support services (readers, notetakers, tutors, 
interpreters for the hearing impaired, alternative 
testing) counseling, handicapped parking, applica- 
tion assistance and priority registration, academic 
advisement, career counseling and job-placement, 
housing and transportation, health services for 
acute illness and advocacy. 

The program also coordinates and provides diag- 
nostic assessment, counseling, advisement, advo- 


cacy and supportive services for students with 
learning disabilities. 

The program needs and encourages involvement 
and input from the students it serves in order to 
maintain a responsive and quality program. 

Information regarding special facilities and services 
available to handicapped students may be obtained 
from the Office of Handicapped Student Services. 

Health and Counseling Service 

Student Health Center 
(714) 773-2800 

The Student Health and Counseling Service is 
equipped to care for a wide range of medical prob- 
lems. 

The Health and Counseling Service Is staffed by 
doctors, nurses, laboratory and X-ray technologists, 
pharmacists and a physical therapist. Most of the 
doctors are primary care physicians. The staff also 
includes gynecologists, an orthopedist, a dermatol- 
ogist. an allergist and a podiatrist. The center has 
a pharmacy (not for outside prescriptions), a labora- 
tory, an X-ray service, physical therapy, and birth 
control and nutritional counseling. Students who en- 
counter emotional or personal problems can come to 
the Counseling and Mental Health Department 
where psychological counselors and psychiatrists 
are available for consultation and treatment when 
needed. 

All medical records are confidential; no information 
will be released without the patient’s written permis- 
sion except in the rare case of a court subpoena. 

The cost of care provided by the Health and Coun- 
seling Service, except for a few specific fees, has 
been paid through student fees and by the State of 
California. Every registered student is eligible for 
care. The Health and Counseling Service cannot, 
however, meet all medical needs. Students are 
urged to obtain health insurance if they do not al- 
ready have adequate private insurance. A good, 
inexpensive policy is offered through the Associ- 
ated Students, Inc. 

Housing Services and 
Residence Life 

Library 142 
(714) 773-2168 

The University will schedule for occupancy, during 
spring semester 1988, 390 Student Residence Hall 
apartment suites. This will be the first phase of a 
two-phase construction program that will eventually 
house up to 800 students on campus. The suites will 
house six students in a comfortable, fully furnished 
spacious setting. 

Amenities will include basketball and volleyball 
courts, outdoor picnic areas and barbecue grills, as 
well as billiards and ping-pong. As a special feature, 
each room will be wired for access to the Universi- 
ty’s main frame computer. A quiet study lounge, 
weight room, multi-purpose rooms, computer and 


student Services 


typing rooms, as well as washing and drying ma- 
chines will also be available. Contact the campus 
Housing Office for further information. 

The Housing Office is also ready to assist students 
in their search for off-campus housing. The office 
provides information on privately owned and operat- 
ed off-campus residence halls as well as constantly 
updated listings of vacancies In local apartment 
complexes. Bulletin boards are available outside of 
the housing complex for the posting of cards by 
students seeking roommates or accommodations. 
Other bulletin boards highlight rooms for rent in 
private homes and room offerings In exchange for 
light duties. 

Additional housing Information available to students 
includes a model rental agreement, information on 
tenant rights and responsibilities, landlord /tenant 
mediation, and community housing agency referrals. 

International Education and 
Exchange 

McCarthy Hall 79 
(714) 773-2787 

California State University. Fullerton is a community 
of people from many nations and cultures. The Office 
of International Education and Exchange is dedi- 
cated to promoting the exchange of knowledge and 
experience within the multicultural campus commu- 
nity and with the world at large. The office provides 
information and assistance for ail international 
students attending CSUF and for U.S. students plan- 
ning to study abroad. 

International Students 

Several hundred students from nearly 60 countries 
study at CSUF as International students, and the 
staff of the Office of International Education and Ex- 
change endeavors to provide them with a home 
away from home. The office provides visa eligibility 
documents, pre-arrival information, and orientation 
to newly admitted students. The door is always open 
for students to meet with an adviser to discuss aca- 
demic concerns, cultural adjustment. Immigration 
matters or just to chat. 

Campus activities such as international dinners and 
discussions occur throughout the year. The office 
coordinates programs In the Fullerton community, 
such as the Friendship Families hospitality program. 

Study, Work and Travel Abroad 

A year or semester overseas can provide an invalu- 
able educational experience. Cultural awareness, 
language skills and an in-depth knowledge of one’s 
field from an international perspective are but a few 
of the many benefits of studying abroad. A well 
planned program offers career advantages with the 
increasingly multinational and multicultural organiza- 
tions and communities of southern California. 

The California State University International Pro- 
grams is an academic year program with 26 centers 
in 16 countries. International Programs participants 
remain enrolled at CSUF, earn residential credit, and 


pay only home campus fees. All personal expenses 
are the student’s responsibility. 

Information on the International Programs as well as 
a general library on study, work, and travel abroad 
are available in the International Education Office. 

Immigrant and Refugee Students 

Students who have recently Immigrated to the Unit- 
ed States are served with various kinds of specia- 
lized assistance including orientation programs, 
student handbooks, and personal advising. Universi- 
ty courses as well as informal conversation pro- 
grams are available for students who wish to im- 
prove their English language skills. International Ed- 
ucation and Exchange advisors work closely with 
student organizations to develop new programs to 
meet students’ changing needs. 

The goal of Immigrant and refugee student programs 
is to aid new American students as they develop a 
support network in order to achieve personal and 
academic success. 

School Based Student 
Services 

The school based student services program was 
developed to broaden services to students in the 
academic schools and to increase interaction be- 
tween students, faculty and student services. An as- 
sistant dean who specializes in student services is 
available in most of the schools. The responsibilities 
of the assistant deans may include, but are not limit- 
ed to, counseling students with personal and aca- 
demic questions, assisting student and alumni 
groups in achieving their goals, referring students 
and faculty to specific campus resources, and work- 
ing with orientation and academic advisement pro- 
grams. 

Contact the assistant dean in your school for infor- 
mation about a number of projects and programs 
which may be of interest to you. 

Testing and Research 

Langsdorf Hall 206 
(714) 773-3838 

The Testing Center provides a variety of testing and 
research services to the university. 

The center supports the counseling services availa- 
ble through the Career Development Center and the 
Student Health and Counseling Service by adminis- 
tering a variety of psychological tests designed to 
help students gain a better understanding of them- 
selves and of their goals and Interests. These tests 
are administered on an individual basis in response 
to counselor referrals. 

The center conducts ongoing research and evalua- 
tion of university testing programs and consults with 
members of the university community regarding the 
design and conduct of testing-related studies and 
survey research. The center also designs and con- 
ducts surveys of student needs, attitudes, and other 
characteristics. 


Student Services 


45 


National group testing programs related to under- 
graduate and graduate school admissions and tea- 
cher certification are also coordinated by the cen- 
ter. Information on the following tests is available in 
the center: 


American College Test (ACT) 

Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) 

Graduate Record Examination (GRE) 

Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) 
Law School Admission Test (LSAT) 

Medical College Admission Test (MCAT) 

National Teacher Examination (NTE) 

California Basic Educational Skills Test (CBEST) 
Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) 
Miller Analogies Test (MAT) 


The center also administers other group tests relat- 
ed to CSUF degree requirements. Information on 
these tests Is available In the center: 


English Placement Test (EPT) 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) 

English Equivalency Examination (EEE) 
Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 
Accounting Qualifying Exam (AQE) 


Women’s Center 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773-3928 

A place for^ students — young and old, women and 
men — a place to get help with any problem you may 
have — a place to study, relax and make new 
friends — that’s what the Women’s Center Is ail 
about! In short, an excellent center for students to 
receive support, information and resources to help 
them explore the many options available to them. 

Programs and services Include individual counsel- 
ing, speakers, films, skill-building workshops, 
growth-oriented support groups, resource Informa- 
tion and referrals. 

The Women’s Center is closely involved with the mi- 
nor in Women’s Studies. The center houses a Wom- 
en’s Studies Library of over 800 books and files with 
excellent research materials. A listing of film and 
tape titles round out the collection. The center also 
gathers and maintains information on local women’s 
events, news and networks. 

Although the Women’s Center maintains its original 
purpose of fostering greater awareness of women’s 
issues and concerns, it is open to a// interested stu- 
dents. The center’s hours are from 8 a.m. to 6 p.m. 
Monday through Friday. 



student Services 



Student Activities 




Opportunities to teach and to learn are not limited to 
the classroom at California State University, Fuller- 
ton. Students taking full advantage of the many edu- 
cational opportunities find themselves attending lec- 
tures, concerts and seminars offered as part of a 
well-developed co-curriculum on campus. Students 
not only attend events, but they participate in the 
planning and implementation of a full slate of activi- 
ties held throughout the year. Through their par- 
ticipation, students experiment with new interests 
and broaden their experience with existing inter- 
ests. Many clubs and organizations exist in the aca- 
demic disciplines which encourage close contact 
between students and faculty. 

Leadership Opportunities 

Workshops and training programs are available to 
teach and encourage students who may want to 
learn or refine leadership skills. Practical applica- 
tion of these skills is available through the approxi- 
mately 200 campus clubs and organizations. Aca- 
demic and professional organizations are either 
closely affiliated with academic areas at Cal State 
Fullerton or have national professional recognition. 
These groups offer students a chance to Identify 
with faculty and community members who have 
similar career interests. 

Councils and task forces are formed by representa- 
tives of other officially recognized organizations. 
These groups often have a specific purpose or are 
formed to solve a particular problem. 

Cultural organizations seek to present ethnic, minor- 
ity and cultural programs for the Cal State Fullerton 
campus. Many opportunities are created for the de- 
velopment of leadership and programming skills in 
this area because of the diversity of the cultures 
represented on campus. 

Groups representing specific academic depart- 
ments on campus provide opportunities for students 
to meet and Interact with classmates and faculty 
outside the classroom atmosphere. 

Greek letter fraternities and sororities with national 
affiliation also exist at Cal State Fullerton. With a 
choice from twelve fraternities and eight sororities. 
Cal State Fullerton students can usually find a group 
with which they want to affiliate. Rush information is 
available at the University Activities Center. 

Many religious organizations have been formed at 
Cal State Fullerton with representation from a wide 
variety of religious persuasions. Groups which are 
predominantly political In nature and those whose 
goal is service to others also enjoy student support. 

Club sports, recreation and leisure groups In a varie- 
ty of recreational programs are very active on cam- 
pus. Some are competitive as teams and others of- 
fer students a chance to develop individual skills 
which can be used as lifetime leisure activities. 


student Activities 



University Activities Center 

University Center 2-43 
(714) 773-3211 

From New Student Orientation through commence- 
ment the University Activities Center serves as a 
resource for students seeking to develop their man- 
agement, leadership and organizational skills. New 
Student Orientation is coordinated by the center and 
held each semester during the week prior to the 
beginning of classes. Since orientation Is staffed by 
students, this program is an excellent way for new 
students to take advantage of training resources 
and become Involved with the university. 

Opportunities for Involvement in the center’s pro- 
grams are open to all students according to their 
interests, abilities and time. Staff members at the 
Activities Center advise many student organizations 
and are available as resources in the formation of 
new groups and strengthening existing groups. 
Workshops on team building, organizational behav- 
ior, leadership styles, group dynamics and program- 
ming aids are available by contacting the office. 

AS Productions 

University Center M-17 
(714) 773-3501 

Entertainment possibilities are endless with Associ- 
ated Students Productions at CSUF. ASP consists 
of six committees composed of student volunteers 
whose common interest is to keep the campus alive 
with quality entertainment and educational presenta- 
tions. 

Any student can apply to be a program director or 
assistant director. Candidates for these posts are 
appointed by the ASI president and are approved by 
the board of directors. Their responsibilities include 
planning and implementing programs, managing bud- 
gets, and training committee members. 

Committee members are student volunteers who at- 
tend regular meetings, help in program selection and 
work at the actual events. Joining a committee Is a 
great way to have fun while learning leadership, 
communication and organization skills, as well as 
making a lot of new friends. 

Students can join an AS Productions committee any- 
time during the year by contacting the ASP office. 

AS Productions coordinates the film series, lecture 
series and concert series committees. The film ser- 
ies presents a variety of contemporary, classic and 
foreign movies to students at a cost lower than that 
charged by most commercial theaters. The speaker 
series provides the campus with prominent spea- 
kers who create a forum for issues and topics that 
are of importance to the campus and to the commu- 
nity. Noontime and major concerts provide a show- 
case of original music ranging from classical to rock. 
Major concerts are usually held indoors while all 
noontime concerts are performed at the Sound- 
stage. 


Pub entertainment features bands from local night- 
clubs in the afternoon as well as evening concerts 
in the University Center Pub. 

Special Events offers unique and memorable events 
such as fairs, theatre groups and other special en- 
tertainment. 

University Center programming is the events arm of 
the University Center Board, the governing body of 
the University Center. This committee brings special 
events to the University Center in order to promote 
the use of the building’s facilities. 

Camp Titan 

Camp Titan is a service opportunity for students who 
enjoy the special feeling that comes from sharing 
their time with children. 

CSUF students devote one week of their time each 
June to be friends and counselors to 80 to 100 chil- 
dren attending Camp Titan, which Is accredited by 
the American Camp Association. 

The children range in age from 7 to 12 years and are 
selected on a referral basis from community service 
agencies. Because all of the children are under- 
privileged. they attend camp at no cost to their fami- 
lies. 

Students enjoy a special time of helping these chil- 
dren develop positive attitudes about themselves. 
The week is as much fun for the counselors as it Is 
for the children. 

Students who are interested in a week of hiking, 
fishing, sitting around a campfire, swimming and 
spending time with children, can obtain further infor- 
mation about Camp Titan from the University Activi- 
ties Center. 

Departmental Association Council 

The Departmental Association Council (DAC) is the 
organization formed by the Associated Students to 
represent the academic associations at CSUF. DAC 
is composed of student delegates who represent all 
of the academic student organizations within each 
department. By being a member of his or her own 
departmental student organization the student is a 
part of the DAC. 

The DAC provides funding for programs originated 
by member organizations. Student departmental or- 
ganizations can use DAC funds to provide speakers, 
films and presentations that enhance the classroom 
experience. 

Individual students can receive funds for use in con- 
ducting research. All CSUF students are eligible to 
apply for such funds. 

The DAC provides a forum for discussion of student 
ideas and concerns. All students are welcome to 
attend council meetings. 

For more information on how to get involved in the 
DAC, contact the University Activities Center. 

Multicultural Council 

The Multicultural Council is composed of the student 
cultural clubs and organizations at CSUF. It provides 


student Activities 


funds to student groups that represent ethnic pro- 
grams and for educational programs that have cul- 
tural bases. For more information about the Multicul- 
tural Council contact the University Activities Cen- 
ter. 

Student Publications 

CSUFax is a biweekly newsletter that contains 
current news about campus events. It is a calendar 
of the programs and activities of CSUF clubs and 
organizations. Items for publication may be given to 
the Fax editor in the University Center. CSUFax is 
available in distribution boxes throughout campus. 

Associated Students 

University Center 2-7 
(714) 773-3295 

The Associated Students, Inc. is a campus involve- 
ment connection at California State University, Ful- 
lerton. ASI offers a variety of learning experiences 
through its government, programs and services. 
Many campus special events are the product of 
student efforts to bring students new educational 
opportunities, to teach them about the campus, and 
to provide them a friendly, social atmosphere at 
CSUF. 

ASI is a non-profit corporation supported by the ac- 
tivity fee students pay through registration each 
semester. By paying this fee, students are automati- 
cally a member of the Associated Students, Inc. The 
purpose of the corporation is to provide academic 
and co-curricular programs and services for 
students. When students are involved in ASI they are 
a part of an energetic, productive group, learning 
valuable organization and communication skills that 
can augment their personal and professional growth. 

ASI Government 

The ASI government controls the actions of the cor- 
poration; it is a powerful, active organization that 
has use for students' talents and skills. To apply for 
a position or find out more about student govern- 
ment, visit the ASI government office in the Universi- 
ty Center. 

ASI President and Vice President 

The ASI president and vice president are chosen 
through student elections each spring and manage 
the corporation and its employees and volunteers. 
These officers represent students' needs and inter- 
ests to CSUF’s faculty and administration and to the 
surrounding community. They also participate in 
several committees. Along with the executive staff, 
the president and vice president submit recommen- 
dations to the ASI Board of Directors on the corpora- 
tion’s annual budget of more than $4.1 million. 

ASI Executive Staff 

The executive staff works with the president and 
vice president to direct the programs and operation 
of the corporation. All executive staff members are 
appointed by the ASI president. Students may apply 
for these positions In the ASI government office. 


The ASI controller is the chief financial officer who 
coordinates the budget process. The chief-of-staff 
recruits students for presidential appointments and 
implements special projects. The director of legisla- 
tive affairs Is the CSUF representative to the Califor- 
nia State Student Association. This statewide or- 
ganization influences decisions about education, fee 
schedules and related topics. The public relations 
director is responsible for marketing the corporation 
and communicating with the campus community. 
Student volunteers are assigned specific duties ac- 
cording to the needs of the corporation. 

ASI Board of Directors 

The ASI Board of Directors is composed of three 
directors from each school who are elected to serve 
one-year terms. The ASI president, vice president, 
controller and administrator, one faculty council re- 
presentative and one appointee of the university 
president also sit on the board. Directors also sit on 
various board subcommittees and other university 
committees. 

These directors represent the student body and 
work with the executive staff to implement programs 
that fulfill students’ academic and co-curricular 
needs. They deal with issues regarding the business 
and affairs of the corporation, including approving 
budgets and appointments, authorizing business 
contracts, and issuing policy statements for admin- 
istrative purposes. 

The weekly meetings of the ASI board are held in the 
Legislative Chambers in the University Center. All 
students are welcome to attend. Board seats are 
open to all students. Election applications are avail- 
able at the midpoint of each semester in the ASI 
government office in University Center. 

ASI Judicial Commission 

The ASI judicial commission decides cases for the 
Associated Students, Inc. The five justices, who 
serve staggered two-year terms, make decisions 
according to the ASI bylaws. Any student can bring 
a case to the ASI judicial commission. 

Child Care Center 

Buildings 200 and 400 
(714) 773-2961 

The Child Care Center Is sponsored and funded by 
Associated Students, Inc. For a nominal fee, chil- 
dren aged 3 months through 5 years whose parents 
are CSUF students, staff or faculty can benefit from 
the services of the center. Trained preschool tea- 
chers offer a comprehensive curriculum which cov- 
ers learning skills in several areas of education. 

Legal Information and Referral 

(714) 870-5757 

The Associated Students contracts with the College 
Legal Clinic, a Fullerton-based corporation, to 
provide information on legal procedures and initial 
consultation on all types of legal matters. If desired, 
students are referred to Orange County attorneys for 
reduced fee services. A 24-hour hot line is main- 
tained by the College Legal Clinic. 


student Activities 


University Center 

The University Center is located on the northwest 
corner of campus and provides areas for recreation, 
relaxation and study. Each semester a portion of 
student fees helps support the services available 
there. 

University Center Governing Board 

The University Center Governing Board establishes 
operating policies for the University Center. Board 
members include students, faculty, an alumni repre- 
sentative, administrative representatives and an ap- 
pointee of the university president. Additionally, the 
board also evaluates the programs and services of 
the University Center as well as space allocation 
and budgetary matters. 

Board members are involved in several committees. 
Among them are the Food Services Committee, 
Policy Committee, Interior Design Committee and 
the Future Directions Committee. Any student may 
apply for a board position. 

Main Information Desk 

The main Information counter of the University Cen- 
ter has the answer to most questions. It’s the place 
to purchase OCTD bus passes and ticket books; 
tickets for some campus events; receive vending 
machine refunds; retrieve lost belongings from "lost 
and found"; and obtain general campus Information. 
In addition, student clubs or organizations can place 
announcements of coming events on the building’s 
three video screens by filling out the appropriate 
request form. The nearby ride share board contains 
the names and phone numbers of people seeking 
carpool companions for long-distance trips. 

The reservation office located behind the informa- 
tion desk provides meeting /event facilities and 
related services in the UC for student groups, facul- 
ty/staff groups, and for the surrounding community. 
While specific room rental rates vary, some facilities 
are frequently available at no charge to CSUF char- 
tered student organizations. 

Center Gallery 

The Center Gallery offers displays of student, 
graduate and faculty artwork. Exhibits usually fea- 
ture the work of a single artist and are shown for 
three weeks. All exhibits are chosen by a student art 
gallery coordinator. 

Leisure Adventure Center 

The Leisure Adventure Center offers low-cost work- 
shops and outings to students, staff and the commu- 
nity. The center has presented a variety of work- 
shops in everything from stained glass to photo- 
graphy. Outings have taken participants to the Los 
Angeles garment district, Solvang, whale watching 
and the Huntington Library. 

Photo enthusiasts may use the Leisure Adventure 
Center photography lab. Students and community 
members can pay on a dally fee basis or purchase 
a semester membership which includes unlimited 
use of chemicals, equipment and a locker. Art sup- 


plies are also available for students who are working 
on personal or class projects. 

Within the Leisure Adventure Center is the Frame 
Shop, where students can purchase fine art posters, 
laser design artwork, frames and mattes. The shop 
offers low-cost custom framing and matting by a 
professional framer. 

The Leisure Adventure Center is located on the 
lower level of the UC. 

Music Listening Room 

The Music Listening Room has a living room atmo- 
sphere, with soft chairs, bean bag chairs, bright 
lights for reading, and a counter full of magazines. 
The Music Listening Room has a wide selection of 
the latest releases of rock, jazz, classical and coun- 
try-western music. There also are headsets to listen 
to one of the many albums that are on cassette 
tapes. 

Pub and Snack Bar 

The Pub’s congenial atmosphere offers a place to 
relax where you can enjoy soft drinks, beer and 
wine, sandwiches, pizza, baked potatoes and other 
foods. Major sporting events are shown on the Pub’s 
big-screen television, and music is played continu- 
ously. The Pub is located on the University Center’s 
lower level. The Snack Bar Is located on the main 
level of the University Center and specializes in a 
variety of fast foods. 

Soundstage 

The CSUF Soundstage was built by the Associated 
Students, Inc. in conjunction with the University Cen- 
ter. The Soundstage, located at the south end of the 
University Center, is used for noontime concerts, 
theatre productions and other live entertainment. 

Student Typing Center 

Aside from the study lounges, the Student Typing 
Center is the most popular room in the University 
Center during finals week. By paying a minimum fee 
at the UC Information counter, students may rent an 
IBM Selectric typewriter to do their papers. 

UC Recreation Area 

It’s mostly fun ‘n’ games on the lower level of the UC. 
The recreation area offers a place for diversions 
that include a lounge with a large screen television, 
a billiard room, table tennis, video and pinball 
games, a counter for renting lockers, small table 
games and the Titan Bowl. The CSUF community is 
invited to participate in the various bowling leagues 
and tournaments sponsored each semester. 

UC Theatre 

The University Center Theatre is available to clubs 
and organizations for meetings, conference lectures 
and other presentations. It can be reserved through 
the reservation office at the Information counter. 

University Recreation Program 

Believing that recreation and leisure pursuits are an 
integral part of one’s total educational experience 


student Activities 


and achievement, the Office of University Recrea- 
tion strives to provide all students an opportunity to 
use their leisure time wisely in order to attain the 
highest degree of physical reward and mental relax- 
ation. 

The benefits of the recreation program are numer- 
ous, and it has been proven time and again, that 
those who maintain good health and physical fit- 
ness. perform better in all aspects of life. These 
programs are free to all students. 

Informal Leisure Recreation 

An intensive program of unstructured recreational 
activities are available to all CSUF students. By pre- 
senting a validated, photo ID card, students can par- 
ticipate in the supervised use of numerous facilities 
including the racquetball and tennis courts, swim- 
ming complex, gymnasium and weightroom. These 
facilities are open seven days a week. 

Intramural Sports 

The Intramural Sports program Is designed for the 
student who does not have the skill or time to devote 


to intercollegiant athletics. This low competitive pro- 
gram offers 59 separately structured sporting 
events. Activities such as flag football, ultimate fris- 
bee, inner tube water polo, horseshoes, bowling and 
volleyball are scheduled at various times and days 
to accommodate individual schedules. 

Club Sports 

The Club Sports program is for Individuals or organ- 
izations with similar athletic or recreational Interests 
who wish to compete against other clubs and col- 
leges. Present clubs include rugby, aikido, karate, 
kung-fu, archery, ice hockey, bowling, skiing, soc- 
cer, volleyball, team handball, wrestling and fencing. 

Student Family Memberships 

Current CSUF students who are married may pur- 
chase a recreation membership for their spouse and 
children (21 years and younger, living at home). Un- 
married students living at home may purchase a re- 
creation membership for their parents and siblings 
(21 years and younger, living at home). 



Student Activities 


Intercollegiate Athletics 


Physical Education 160 

(714) 773-2677 

Director of Athletics: Ed Carroll 

Associate Directors: Steve DiTolla, Leanne Grotke 

Academic Adviser: Alison Cone 

Coaches 

Baseball 
Augie Garrido 

Basketball 

George McQuarn (Men) 

Maryalyee Jeremiah (Women) 

Cross Country 
Jim Stuart 

Fencing 

Heizaburo Okawa 

Football 
Eugene Murphy 

Golf 

Scott Flynn (Men) 

Gymnastics 
Dick Wolfe (Men) 

Lynn Rogers (Women) 

Soccer 
Al Mistri 

Softball 
Judi Garman 

Tennis 

Mike Muscare (Men) 

Brad Allen (Women) 

Volleyball 
Fran Cummings 

Wrestling 
Dan Lewis 

Water Polo 
John Kolias 


Conference Affiliations and Memberships 

National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA) — 
Men and Women 

Pacific Coast Athletic Association (PCAA) — Men 
and Women 



Intercollegiate Athletics 


The rise of academic prestige at California State 
University, Fullerton has grown alongside the devel- 
opment of one of the nation’s premier athletic de- 
partments. The inter collegiate athletic department 
provides student-athletes the opportunity to com- 
pete against the country’s finest competition as well 
as providing a top-notch education. In an effort to en- 
sure academic development, the university provides 
counseling systems designed specifically for stu- 
dent-athletes. Those services include academic ad- 
visement, guidance counseling and dally study halls. 

CSUF has also made a commitment to provide facili- 
ties that enable fans and athletes alike to enjoy first- 
rate competition. The long-awaited Youth Sports 
Complex will give Fullerton fans a much-needed 
home football stadium. The complex will provide a 
10,000-seat football stadium plus upgraded base- 
ball facilities that will seat over 2,000. Already com- 
pleted are two lit softball diamonds and a lighted 
soccer field that enable fans to enjoy the universi- 
ty’s many night events. Titan Gymnasium already en- 
joys tremendous popularity among the local commu- 
nity with over 4,000 fans attending home basketball 
(men and women’s), gymnastics (men and women’s) 
and women’s volleyball. An outdoor swimming com- 
plex. racquetball courts, weighttraining facilities, a 
high-level gymnastics practice facility plus facilities 
for wrestling and fencing make the Fullerton athletic 
complex a step above. 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 

Baseball 

Few NCAA Division I baseball programs have en- 
joyed the degree of success that the Titans have 
had over the past decade and a half. During that 
time, the Titans won 1 1 conference championships, 
four regional championships and two national cham- 
pionships. Major League stars Tim Wallach (Montre- 
al Expos), Jeff Robinson (San Francisco Giants) and 
1984 Olympian Bob Caffrey have developed at Ful- 
lerton. Year in and year out the Titans compete 
against the nation’s finest programs and always 
come out winners. 

Basketball 

The development of Fullerton basketball has been 
one of college sports’ finest Cinderella stories. Al- 
ways in contention for the PCAA Championship, the 
program has produced half a dozen professional 
prospects. 1984 Olympic Team point guard Leon 
Wood is one of many fine athletes who has helped 
develop the Titans into a team that will continue to 
grow. The university’s commitment to basketball en- 
sures that success in the years to come. 

Cross Country 

Men’s cross country is making positive strides. The 
program competes in the very competitive PCAA 
conference which is perennially in the spotlight for 
national attention. The campus and outlying commu- 
nity offer a beautiful setting which enable the sport 
to set new standards among local and national uni- 
versities. 


Football 

If one were going to single out a particular NCAA 
team that has made the greatest turnaround, the 
CSUF football team might fall into that bracket. In 
Gene Murphy’s six years, he has taken a perennially 
hard luck team and turned it into a nationally ranked 
power. The year 1983 saw the Titans gain their first 
of back-to-back PCAA championships and a trip to 
the California Bowl. With the coming of a new on- 
campus football stadium. Titan football gains the ad- 
ditional exposure that will make them a power for 
many years to come. 

Golf 

One of the campus’ many developmental programs. 
Titan golf will definitely make an impact on the local 
and national scene. The foundation of the program 
lies with the many outstanding golfers that live In the 
Orange County area. With the bevy of local talent. 
Titan golf will be a success story to watch in the fu- 
ture. 

Soccer 

Soccer is another of Fullerton’s many sports where 
strong coaching has turned the program into a West 
Coast power. Al Mistri developed one of Southern 
California’s finest soccer programs at Damien High 
School in Claremont before taking over at Fullerton. 
Through hard work and support from a summer soc- 
cer camp. Coach Mistri has turned Titan soccer Into 
one of the NCAA’s most competitive squads. Soc- 
cer, like all Titans men’s sports, competes In the 
PCAA along with Fresno State, Nevada-Las Vegas, 
UC Santa Barbara — all nationally ranked teams. 

Fencing 

One of the West Coast’s few Division I fencing pro- 
grams gives prospective athletes a chance to train 
in a traditional, unique sport. The team has enjoyed 
a great deal of success over the past few years 
competing against local universities in all areas of 
the sport including sabre and foil. 

Tennis 

Tennis has been a consistently popular and suc- 
cessful program In the Fullerton area and that makes 
Titan tennis a force to be reckoned with in the years 
to come. The surplus of outstanding local and re- 
gional talent make the climb that much easier and 
will enable Titan fans to look forward to some fine 
competition. 

Water Polo 

Playing In the nation’s most difficult conference 
(PCAA) has yet to prevent water polo from being a 
nationally-ranked program and offers an athlete an 
opportunity to play against the best. The Titans play 
and practice in a beautiful on-campus pool against 
competition that is always in contention for the 
NCAA championship. With a commitment to water 
polo from the NCAA, Fullerton’s program is sure to 
enjoy continued success. 


Intercollegiate Athletics 


Wrestling 

Another sport that few West Coast schools support 
is prospering in Orange County as CSUF proves that 
hard work and strong coaching can bring success. 
Prospective athletes will find an atmosphere that Is 
unparalled among California universities. Top-notch 
competition and an All-American environment are 
two reasons why Fullerton wrestling Is so success- 
ful. 

Gymnastics 

Fullerton gymnastics have always been one of the 
NCAA’s great success stories. Head Coach Dick 
Wolfe has won three NCAA championships and 
countless conference titles in making the Titan team 
one of the nation’s premier units. Numerous All- 
Americans have competed under Coach Wolfe In- 
cluding Nissen Award candidate Ron Howard. In- 
novative gymnastics have always been the course 
of the program as several internationally recognized 
tricks were devised under Coach Wolfe including the 
now famous Thomas Flair performed by U.S. Olym- 
pian Kurt Thomas. 

Women’s Intercollegiate 
Athletics 

Basketball 

The rise in popularity of women’s basketball has its 
foundations tied to the success of Fullerton women’s 
basketball teams. Under former Coach Billie Moore, 
the Titans won one of the very first national champi- 
onships given out in the sport and recent teams have 
continued to be competitive on a regional basis. Two 
of women’s basketball’s greatest names have risen 
from Fullerton including 1976 Olympian Nancy Dun- 
kle and All-American Robin Holmes. 

Gymnastics 

The consistent efforts of Lynn Rogers’ women’s 
gymnastics squad have made them a top-five nation- 
al power for 12 consecutive years. No other school 
in the nation has produced more All-Americans or 
finished in the top three for more years than the 
Titans. Potential scholar-athletes receive an oppor- 
tunity to compete and win year round. 


Softball 

The sport of softball continues to set new standards 
of excellence on the local and national level. Always 
a contender for the NCAA title, the Titans captured 
their first championship in 1986. Coach Judi Gar- 
man’s teaching has brought the university countless 
All-Americans including former Broderick Award win- 
ner Kathy Van Wyk. A newly finished on-campus 
facility now enables an even greater audience to 
enjoy one of the nation’s most successful teams 
face off against other national powers. The Titans 
compete In the PCAA against such national powers 
as Fresno State, UOP, Santa Barbara, Long Beach 
and several others. 


Cross Country 

The re birth of a spring track schedule has been a 
boon to cross country as athletes in the distance 
races can now train on a competitive level year- 
round. An outstanding setting plus the addition of 
some outstanding athletes make success a very 
strong likelihood In the years to come. 


Tennis 

One of the university’s many programs on the rise, 
Fullerton can take advantage of the beautiful climate 
of Orange County to attract the nation’s top athletes 
to Fullerton. The redevelopment of the tennis facili- 
ties In the future make Titan tennis a program that 
is bound to remain competitive in the PCAA. 


Volleyball 

Despite playing in one of collegiate volleyball’s most 
competitive conferences. Titan volleyball has prov- 
en to be a program on the rise. The obvious attrac- 
tion of playing against NCAA Championship con- 
tenders UCLA, use and Stanford and in the nation’s 
strongest conference in the PCAA have positioned 
Titan volleyball as a program on the rise. The acqui- 
sition of future athletes, plus the development of 
budding stars will create an environment that will be 
hard to beat in the upcoming years. 



Intercollegiate Athletics 


Resources 



Art Gallery 

Since 1963 the Art Gallery at California State Univer- 
sity, Fullerton has brought to the campus carefully 
developed art exhibitions that instruct, inspire and 
challenge the student to the visual arts. Exhibitions 
of national interest and of museum caliber are pre- 
sented to the entire student body, faculty and to the 
community. These act not only as an educational 
tool but also create interaction between various de- 
partmental disciplines and between the campus and 
the community. In 1970 the Art Gallery was housed 
in Its current permanent location within the Visual 
Arts Center. In the following years, the gallery has 
earned national visibility for its program in Museum 
Studies and Exhibition Design In which museum pre- 
professionals may obtain both conceptual and prac- 
tical experience. 

Dance Repertory Theatre 

The Dance Repertory Theatre was formed in 1981 
as a culminating experience for selected students 
graduating from the Department of Theatre and 
Dance. It offers recent graduating students in dance 
an opportunity to perform with a professionally ori- 
ented company, preparing them for their careers In 
dance. Dance Repertory Theatre also permits the 
university’s distinguished dance faculty to continue 
their professional commitment through public perfor- 
mance. Dance Repertory Theatre members are 
carefully chosen, based upon their training in ballet 
and modern dance, to tour a repertory of established 
and original choreography. The company has toured 
extensively in southern California. 

Daily Titan 

Cal State Fullerton’s Daily Titan is one of the largest 
college newspapers in California. In recent years, it 
has become one of the most critically successful, as 
well. 

The Titan earned first place among all college dai- 
lies In the state in 1985 competition sponsored by 
the California Intercollegiate Press Association. 

The Titan is published every Tuesday through Friday 
throughout the academic year. It is produced, writ- 
ten and edited entirely by Cal State Fullerton stu- 
dents. All its photographic content is the work of 
CSUF students. 

The Daily Titan has a daily readership of more than 
19,000. It is distributed at more than 40 locations on 
campus, as well as in newsracks near the University. 

Work on the Daily Titan provides intensive experi- 
ence in newswriting, copy editing, page layout and 
the myriad other functions necessary to produce a 
modern daily newspaper. 


Resources 




Energy Consortium 

The Statewide Energy Consortium was founded in 
1975 to help Californians understand and cope with 
emerging energy situations. The ways in which this 
has been done include: 1) providing teacher training 
in energy education for hundreds of teachers 
throughout the state, 2) developing a very success- 
ful program by which faculty from all 19 state univer- 
sity campuses provide technical assistance In ener- 
gy to both the public and private sectors, and 3) 
conducting major state and national conferences on 
various energy themes. 


Fullerton Arboretum 

The Fullerton Arboretum is a 26-acre botanical gar- 
den — a living museum of plants — located at the 
northeast corner of the campus. It contains local 
historical artifacts In the Heritage House museum 
and horticultural collections that attract visitors from 
the University and the surrounding communities. The 
Arboretum is an island of serenity in an increasingly 
urban/metropolitan environment. 

The Arboretum offers countless opportunities to 
study local history and culture. Heritage House Is 
the restored residence and medical office of Dr. 
George C. Clark, an Orange County pioneer 
physician. The Clark home was built In 1894 and 
exemplifies the Eastlake Victorian style of architec- 
ture. The house Is listed in the National Register of 
Historic Places and the Inventory of California His- 
toric Sites. It is also an Orange County Historic Site. 
It Is open to the public on Sundays from 2 to 4 p.m., 
at which time trained docents discuss the period 
furnishings and memorabilia. Several student 
projects and studies have used this facility. 

The Arboretum grounds contain a recirculating wa- 
terfall, pond and stream system that is a focal point 
for migratory waterfowl and human visitors. Many 
plants are grown in groups according to their mois- 
ture requirements. Others form special collections 
such as conifers, palms and rare fruits. Special plant 
displays assist visitors In their selection of plant 
materials for urban landscaping. 

The CSUF Associated Students (AS) helped to Ini- 
tiate the Fullerton Arboretum by contributing 
$10,000 in 1971. Since then, the AS have contrib- 
uted support monies each year to hire students to 
help in the maintenance and operation of the Arbore- 
tum. 

The Friends of the Fullerton Arboretum, the commu- 
nity support group, also supplies operating monies, 
manages the gift and garden shop, propagates 
plants for plant sales and provides countless hours 
of volunteer effort in behalf of the Arboretum. 

The Fullerton Arboretum is open 8 a m. to 4:46 p.m., 
seven days a week. The Arboretum is closed on 
major holidays and the week between the Christmas 
and New Year holiday. 


Herbarium 

The Faye A. MacFadden Herbarium is named after 
Faye A. MacFadden, who sold her extensive collec- 
tion of plants to the university just prior to her death 
in 1964. The collection now includes over 25,000 
vascular plants, about 12,000 bryophytes and nearly 
800 lichen specimens. The plants are used as a 
research and teaching tool. The bryophyte collec- 
tion Is reported to be the largest In the Southwest. 

Microcomputer Resource 
Center 

The School of Human Development and Community 
Service has a Microcomputer Resource Center to 
serve its students, faculty and staff. This center has 
15 microcomputers and 2 printers with telecommun- 
ication capabilities. The various departments and 
programs within the school hold many classes in the 
center to teach numerous applications and uses of 
computers. The classes also use specific programs 
to teach and practice concepts related to the con- 
tent of the subjects. In addition, classes use the 
center to observe specific demonstrations related 
to their disciplines. The center has also been used 
for faculty and staff in-service programs. During the 
summer children from the community attend classes 
on computing. 

Oral History Program 

The Oral History Program offers students a source 
of Information, courses and work experience. The 
program has conducted over 2,000 interviews on the 
history of Orange County and other areas of the 
western United States. Either transcriptions or 
tapes are available for any student to use as they 
would use any library materials, at the Oral History 
Archive. 

Most of these Interviews were done by students in 
the several classes offered at the Oral History Pro- 
gram. The program also maintains a student staff 
through internships, work study or grant-supported 
positions. These staff receive experience in word- 
processing. editing, book production and organiza- 
tional administration. They are credited with author- 
ship or assistance on publications, and several 
alumni of the program now hold Important profes- 
sional positions. 

Orange County Now 

Orange County Now is a 30-minute weekly radio pub- 
lic affairs program produced by students In the 
Radio-TV-Fllm sequence of the Department of Com- 
munications and broadcast on Saturdays and Sun- 
days by several Orange County stations. The pro- 
gram is in the news magazine format and students 
In the broadcast news class, as well as volunteers, 
record interviews with newsmakers in Orange Coun- 
ty and then edit, write and produce segments that 
are Integrated into the weekly program by a volun- 
teer staff of writers, producer and on-air talent. 


Resources 


Orange County Now has won first place in the Cali- 
fornia Intercollegiate Press Association in the News 
Magazine category and segments of the program 
have won CIPA awards in news and sports catego- 
ries. 

Reading Clinic 

The Reading Clinic serves three major purposes. 
First, it provides a controlled, supervised setting for 
the training of reading specialists and classroom 
teachers who wish to improve their skills in working 
with learning disabled and reading disabled stu- 
dents. 

Secondly, the clinic serves as a community service 
providing very low cost, high quality instruction in 
reading that is not available elsewhere in Orange 
County. The clinic works closely with the Southern 
California College of Optometry in order to provide 
broader services. 

The third purpose of the clinic is to provide parent 
education to community members whose children 
have reading disabilities. The clinic provides parent 
inservice sessions, a hot line for phone information, 
and a monthly newsletter of information, tips and 
examples of student work. The clinic is proud of Its 
16 year service to the university and community. 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 

The Speech and Hearing Clinic (SHC) Is an integral 
part of the curricular programs of the university lead- 
ing to a B.A. and M.A. Degree in Communicative Dis- 
orders. Since 1961 the Department of Speech Com- 
munication has provided speech, language and 
hearing services to the community In conjuction with 
its training program for professional speech pathol- 
ogists. The original clinic held the distinction of be- 
ing the first Institution in California to receive regis- 
tration under Interim Standards for both speech 
pathology and audiology by the Professional Ser- 
vices Board of the American Board of Examiners in 
Speech Pathology and Audiology (ABESPA). which 
is the accreditation board of the American Speech- 
Language-Hearing Association (ASHA). The gradu- 
ate program in Communicative Disorders holds the 
distinction of being one of only two academic pro- 
grams In California to maintain continuous accredita- 
tion by the Educational Training Board of ABESPA 
since September 1969. 

The clinic is composed of a Speech Pathology Unit, 
an Audiology Unit and a Communicative Disorders 
Research Laboratory with special emphasis given 
to voice disorders. The clinic offers the services of 
a resident professional Speech Pathologist who 
holds the Certificate of Clinical Competence (CCC- 
SP), faculty supervisors who are clinically certified 
and. in addition, hold doctoral degrees in the field, 
and student clinicians who have met strictly pres- 
cribed standards for admission to clinical practicum. 
Referrals to the clinic come from a variety of 
sources including: physicians, teachers, rehabilita- 
tive centers, private speech pathologists and 
audiologists, and self-referrals. Services available 
at the clinic include; diagnostic evaluations, ther- 


apeutic Intervention, audiometric testing, rehabilita- 
tive audiology Including hearing aid evaluations, 
screening tests for students seeking state creden- 
tials, and family counseling relative to problems as- 
sociated with communicative disorders. 

Theatre and Dance Department 
Productions 

CSUF students receive reduced ticket rates to all 
Theatre and Dance Department productions. Each 
year, six plays and two dance concerts are 
produced on main stage along with theatre for chil- 
dren, touring plays, master’s thesis productions, 
playwright workshops and original one-acts. CSUF 
plays have been selected eight times during the last 
nine years to be produced at the American College 
Theatre Festivals, selected out of over 50 produc- 
tion entries. In 1983, Its production of The Bulldog 
and the Searwas selected from over 500 production 
entries to be produced at the National American Col- 
lege Theatre Festival at the John F. Kennedy Center 
in Washington, D.C. 


Titan Shops 

Titan Shops Is a subsidiary of the California State 
University, Fullerton Foundation and is the organiza- 
tion that Is responsible for the administration of the 
Titan Bookstore, Food Services and the vending for 
the university. Titan Shops policy is set by the CSUF 
Foundation Board of Directors. Titan Shops Is ad- 
ministered by the Titan Shops manager. 

Titan Bookstore 

The Titan Bookstore Is located on the ground floor 
of the Commons Building directly east of the Univer- 
sity Center and west of the Library. Its primary func- 
tion Is to service the textbook and school supply 
requirements of the students of the university. In 
addition to these Items, however, the Titan Book- 
store carries an extensive stock of office supplies, 
greeting cards and clothing items, a trade book de- 
partment which encompasses 15,000 reference and 
general interest books, a photocopy center and a 
gift department with an ever changing selection of 
items. Finally, the Titan Bookstore Is engaged in the 
sale of personal computers at significant price 
reductions to encourage the use of computers and 
development of computer literacy at the university. 

Food Service 

Titan Shops is responsible for the operation of Food 
Services on the University campus. Primary Food 
Service facilities are on the second floor of the Com- 
mons (the main cafeteria), on the University Center 
ground floor (the UC Snack Bar) and at the south- 
east corner of the campus (McTitan’s and Salad 
Daze). In addition to these primary facilities there is 
a Pub serving food, beer and wine on the basement 
level of the University Center. Catering for the 
university is the responsibility of Food Services. 


Resources 


Vending 

Vending machines are located at several areas on 
the campus to service the needs of the university. 
Product selection is monitored by the University 
Food Service Committee. 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 

The Undergraduate Reading Lab /Professional Li- 
brary is an essential element In the Reading Program 
for both graduate and undergraduate students. It 
serves as a resource for materials and equipment by 
which undergraduate students can improve their 
reading skills and complete additional class assign- 
ments. The lab also functions as a liaison between 
faculty and students, as a diagnostic lab for required 
or additional assessment of student skills, and as a 
professional resource for graduate students and 
faculty. 

The lab has also offered services to special 
students from the Handicapped Center, Women’s 
Center and the Counseling Center. In addition, the 


development of a professional library and the recent 
donation of material from the Reading Educators 
Guild aids graduate students in their research and 
course work. Finally, a goal of this lab is to develop 
a base of software materials for both classroom and 
individual student use. 


University Channel 

As part of two local cable television agreements 
with the cities of Fullerton and Anaheim, the universi- 
ty received from the Group W and Storer Cable Com- 
panies complete color television production equip- 
ment to use in the television curriculum and to 
provide programming for dedicated channels on 
each of those cable systems. In January 1981, 
regular production of programs about Cal State Ful- 
lerton and Orange County In general was begun. 
Students in senior level communications courses, 
conceive, write and produce a wide variety of video- 
taped interview and discussion programs as well as 
special live coverage of sports and special events 
over University Channel 33. 



Resources 


Academic 

Advisement 



59 


Academic Advisement 


Academic Advisement Policy 

The CSUF Academic Policy (UPS 300.002) states 
that: 


— the responsibility for ensuring advisement 
rests with each school dean; 

— every matriculated student shall enroll in one 
of the five schools; and 

— all students shall confer with an academic 
adviser on a regular basis. 

Choosing General Education 
Courses and Electives 

In keeping with the liberal arts tradition, the universi- 
ty requires its graduates to have sampled a variety 
of disciplines as part of their general education. The 
broad categories of general education courses are 
presented in the catalog section on “Graduation 
Requirements for the Bachelor's Degree.” 

All students are strongly encouraged to consult with 
faculty members or the Academic Advisement Cen- 
ter about choice of general education and elective 
courses. 

Advisement in the Major 

Students who have declared a major should consult 
their departmental adviser on a regular basis for 
academic advice. 

Advisement for Students Who 
Have Not Selected a Major 

Students who have not declared a major should con- 
sult one of the school advisement offices listed be- 
low or the Academic Advisement Center to discuss 
their academic goals. 



Academic Advisement 


School Advisement Offices 

Students who have declared a school of interest or 
who wish to explore the majors offered by a specific 
school should contact the appropriate school ad- 
visement office: 

School of the Arts Office of the Dean 

Visual Arts 199 
(714) 773-3266 


School of Business 
Administration 
and Economics 

School of Engineering 
and Computer Science 


School of Human 
Development and 
Community Service 


Business Advising Center 
Langsdorf Hall 700 
(714) 773-2211 

Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Engineering 100G 
(714) 773-3014 

Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Education Classroom 325 
(711) 773-2166 


School of Humanities Office of Student 

and Social Sciences Academic Affairs 

McCarthy Hall 103 
(714) 773-2024 

School of Natural Office of 

Science and Mathematics Academic Affairs 

McCarthy Hall 166 
(714) 773-2638 


Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities 112 

( 714 ) 773-3606 

The Academic Advisement Center provides 
guidance Information In the choice of an under- 
graduate major and selection of elective and general 
education courses. It is the administrative center for 
undeclared undergraduate majors. All problems en- 
countered by the undeclared major, which normally 
require the assistance of a department chair, are 
handled by the director of the Academic Advisement 
Center. 

For choosing general education courses and help In 
choosing an undergraduate major, students should 
seek the advice of the director or of an adviser in the 
Academic Advisement Center. 

No appointment is necessary to engage the assist- 
ance of an adviser about various aspects of the 
academic life at the university. For more specific 
information about the office, the student should con- 
sult the class schedule. 

Undeclared Majors 

Lower division students who are uncertain about 
their primary educational or vocational goals may 
enroll as undeclared majors. However, they must 
select a school which reflects their general Interests 
and consult the office of the school dean for 


academic advisement. During their freshman and 
sophomore years, such students should explore 
their Interests and potential by enrolling in a set 
of courses recommended by a school adviser. 

Choosing an 
Undergraduate Major 

Every student should choose a major by the begin- 
ning of the junior year so that he or she may com- 
plete major requirements In an orderly way. Most 
major requirements allow students the freedom to 
take a number of courses in fields other than in the 
major. 

To help students, the University has available a num- 
ber of useful resources: the academic Information 
sessions conducted in May and November; the infor- 
mation about majors available from the Academic 
Advisement Center; a variety of counseling and test- 
ing services provided by the Career Development 
Center; and the department and school offices for 
information and advice on particular fields, depart- 
mental brochures and manuals describing their pro- 
grams of study and later work opportunities. There 
are student organizations with disciplinary and 
professional interests and the Career Development 
Center has information on vocations and work op- 
portunities which may help in the selection of a 
major. 

The task of selecting a major (and often a minor or 
other complementary specialization) becomes one 
of crystallizing ideas on the basis of experiences in 
specific courses, discussions with other students, 
faculty, the staff of the Academic Advisement Cen- 
ter, etc. The option of taking a limited number of 
courses on a Credit /No Credit basis often will be 
helpful in exploring new interests. 

Students must plan freshman or sophomore pro- 
grams which will permit their entering or taking ad- 
vanced courses In fields they may want to be their 
majors. They should check such major requirements 
as mathematics, chemistry and foreign language 
which must be taken before the junior year or per- 
haps even begun during the freshman year. Students 
anticipating graduate or professional study should 
exercise special care in planning undergraduate 
programs, and they should seek faculty counseling 
in the fields concerned. Advance examination of the 
possibilities of graduate or professional study will 
be helpful to students who have clear educational 
and vocational objectives. 

Those whose goals and objectives have not yet 
crystallized will have opportunities to take courses 
in various fields and make up their minds during their 
lower division work. They should, however, take full 
advantage of the opportunities that exist on and out- 
side the campus to learn more about available fields 
of study and occupational fields. 

Planning a Major Program 

When students have selected a major field, they 
should study all the requirements which are 


Academic Advisement 


specified in this catalog under their chosen degree 
program. Then they should make a tentative semes- 
ter by semester plan for completing the require- 
ments, with regard for prerequisites. They should 
discuss this plan with their major advisers. 

In addition to courses in the major department, relat- 
ed courses in other fields and supporting courses in 
basic skills may be required. These should be in- 
cluded in the tentative semester by semester plan. 

Some departments require placement tests prior to 
admission to classes. The time and place for such 
tests are given in the class schedule. Students 
should purchase a copy of the class schedule at the 
Titan Bookstore well before registration for classes 
begins. 

Change of Major, Degree or 
Credential Objective 

To change major, degree, or credential objective, 
obtain the required form in the Office of Admissions 
and Records or the Academic Advisement Center. 
Such a change Is not official until the form has been 
signed and filed In the Registrar’s Office. 

Departmental 
Academic Advisement 

Each department follows the advisement system 
which It finds the most appropriate for Its majors. 

It is the responsibility of the student to obtain the 
assistance of a faculty adviser. 

The adviser is a resource person who can provide 
information and suggestions and who can assist the 
student to find the most desirable ways to meet the 
requirements for graduation and for the major or cre- 
dential. The final choice of courses and the respon- 
sibility for the program lies with the student. Under- 
graduate students who have not yet decided upon a 
major (undeclared majors) or who are not seeking a 
degree will be advised In the Academic Advisement 
Center. 

Academic program advisers are able to offer better 
advice if students provide lists of courses they have 
taken and their own copies of transcripts from col- 
leges previously attended (if students are new to Cal 
State Fullerton). 

Undergraduate advisement coordinators are ap- 
pointed by each department (for the School of Busi- 
ness Administration and Economics see below) in 
order to facilitate communication between students 
and faculty. They coordinate advisement in each de- 
partment and act as resource persons for the 
students and the faculty of the department in all 
matters of advisement. 

The School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics provides advisement in the advisement center of 
the school. 

Graduate students will be assigned a major adviser 
in their fields of specialization, except in education 


where all will have a professional adviser from the 
School of Human Development and Community Ser- 
vice. Those students seeking a credential for teach- 
ing in secondary schools will be assigned both a 
professional and a major adviser. 

Preprofessional 

Programs 

The academic programs of the university provide 
appropriate preparation for graduate work in a varie- 
ty of fields. Students who have made tentative deci- 
sions about institutions in which they may wish to 
pursue graduate work should consult the catalogs of 
those graduate schools as they plan their under- 
graduate programs. Students planning to undertake 
graduate work should supplement their under- 
graduate programs by anticipating requirements at 
major graduate schools. 

The university offers a number of professional pro- 
grams through the master’s degree. These Include 
programs in the fine arts, business administration, 
communications, education, engineering, health ed- 
ucation and physical education and recreation, pub- 
lic administration, and speech pathology-audiology. 
Students interested in preparing for professional ca- 
reers in these areas, either here or in other educa- 
tional institutions, are encouraged to seek assist- 
ance and guidance from our faculty members in 
these fields. 

Prelegal Preparation 

It is recommended that prospective law students 
prepare themselves in such fields as English, Ameri- 
can history, economics, political science (par- 
ticularly the history and development of English and 
American political institutions) and such under- 
graduate courses as judicial process, administrative 
law, constitutional law and international law, philo- 
sophy (particularly ethics and logic), business 
administration, anthropology, psychology and 
sociology. 

A distribution of course sequences among the social 
sciences, the natural sciences and the humanities is 
desirable. Students with interest in becoming 
lawyers should contact the Prelaw Society. Some 
faculty members in the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics and Departments of American 
Studies, History and Political Science, also can 
provide advice and assistance. 

Pretheological 

Students who might be interested In pursuing ca- 
reers In counseling, social work, the teaching of reli- 
gion, and the ministry and associated fields should 
take some courses In religion, psychology, anthro- 
pology, sociology, philosophy, education, communi- 
cations, history, English, speech communication and 
a foreign language. Students desiring assistance 
and counseling regarding advanced work or profes- 
sional careers may seek help from the faculty in the 
Department of Religious Studies. 


Academic Advisement 


Social Welfare 

Students who plan to seek employment in social 
work or social welfare should prepare themselves in 
the fields of human services, psychology (particular- 
ly child and adolescent psychology), sociology, an- 
thropology, political science, economics and re- 
search methods in social science. 

Students who intend to enter a professional school 
following undergraduate training should learn about 
the specific prerequisites for admission to the 
graduate school of their choice. Ordinarily a major 
in one of the social sciences, and some additional 
work in at least several other social sciences, are 
recommended. Students with interests in pursuing 
careers in the fields of social welfare should contact 
the Department of Sociology or the Human Services 
Program for advice and assistance. 

Health Professions 

Langsdorf Hall 203 

( 714 ) 773-3980 

All health professions programs are seeking the 
best qualified applicants with a good command of 
communication skills, rigorous basic science 
preparation and as broad a general education base 
as possible. 

The Health Professions Committee assists students 
to prepare the best academic programs consistent 


with their former educational experience. Interests 
and professional objectives. 

Student Responsibility 

All new students, both first-time freshmen and trans- 
fer students, interested in preparing to enter one of 
the following health professions, or related health 
professions, should register with the secretary of 
the committee, In the Health Professions Office. 
These health professions are medicine, osteopathic 
medicine, podlatric medicine, veterinary medicine, 
chiropractic, clinical pharmacy, clinical phar- 
macology, dentistry, optometry. 

The related health professions include anatomist, 
dental hygienist, histologist, medical technologist, 
nutritionist, occupational therapist, orthotist- 
prosthetist, pharmacologist, physical therapist, 
pharmacist, physiologist, public health. 


Health Professions Committee 

The committee assists the student to (a) gain some 
“preceptorshlp" experience with a practicing 
professional in the area appropriate to the field of 
interest; (b) select a list of professional schools to 
which there is a likelihood of admission; (c) prepare 
professional school applications; (d) prepare for an 
admissions interview. 

The committee prepares recommendation letters for 
approved applicants. 



Academic Advisement 



Answers To Your Questions 


TOPIC 

WHERE TO GO 

LOCATION 

TELEPHONE 

Academic Appeals 

Academic Appeals Office 

McCarthy Hall-78 

773-3836 

Add or Drop of Class 

Address Change 

See Class Schedule 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdort Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

773-2300 

Admissions/Applications 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Advisement: 

Undeclared Major 

Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities- 1 1 2 

773-3606 

Declared Majors 

Athletics Tickets/Passport 

Major Department 

University Center 

Lobby 

773-2468 

Counseling: 

Physical Education Department 

Physical Education- 1 22 

773-2783 

Personal 

Counseling Service-Health Center 

Health Center 

773-2800 

Vocational 

Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-3121 

Degree Application/Diploma Orders 

Graduation Unit 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10A 

773-2300 

Degree Evaluation. Undergraduate 

Graduation Unit 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10A 

773-2300 

Disqualification/Reinstatement 

Admissions Counselor 

Langsdorf Hall- 107 

773-2370 

Educational Opportunities Program 

Student Academic Services 

Humanities 113 

773-2288 

Emergency Messages 

Vice President for Student Services 

Langsdorf Hall-810 

773-3221 

Enrollment Verification: 

Duplicate I D. Card or Fee Receipt 

Cashier 

Langsdorf Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Letter Request 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Extension Class Information 

Extended Education Office 

Temporary- 14 

773-2611 

Evaluations/General Education 

Evaluations Unit 

Langsdorf Hall-1 108 

773-2300 

Financial Aid 

Financial Aid Office 

McCarthy Hall-63 

773-3125 

Foreign Student: 

Advisement 

Permits to Register 

Major Department 

International Education Office 

McCarthy Hall-79 

773-2787 

Graduate Studies 

Graduate Studies Office 

McCarthy Hall- 129 

773-2618 

Graduation Requirements 

Graduation Unit 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10A 

773-2300 

Handicapped Student Services 

Library 

Library- 1 13 

773-3117 

Health Insurance 

University Center 

U.C. Lobby 

773-2468 

Housing and Transportation 

Housing Office 

Library 142 

773-2168 

Internships and Cooperative Ed. 

Internship Office 

Langsdorf Hall-210 

773-2171 

Learning Assistance 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 

Library 38 

773-3488 

Mentor Program 

Student Academic Services Office 

Humanities- 1 1 3 

773-2288 

Name Change 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Organizations & Clubs 

University Center 

U.C. 2-43 

773-3211 

Parking: 

Fees 

Cashier 

Langsford Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Information 

Department of Public Safety 

Temporary- 1200 

773-2515 

Handicapped 

Library 

Library- 1 13 

773-3117 

Readmission 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdort Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Records (Student) 

Records Office 

Langsdorf Hall- 110 

773-2300 

Registration Fees 

Cashier 

Langsdorf Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Residency 

Evaluations Unit 

Langsdordd Hall-1 10 

773-2300 

Scholarships 

Financial Aid Office 

McCarthy Hall-63 

773-3125 

Student Affirmative Action 

Student Academic Services Office 

Humanities- 1 13 

773-2288 

Summer Sessions. Information 

Extended Education Office 

Temporary- 14 

773-2611 

Test Information 

Testing Center 

Langsdorf Hall-206 

773-3838 

Transcripts 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Tutoring 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 

Library-38 

773-3488 

Veterans Certification 

Veterans Affairs Office 

Langsdorf Hall- HOC 

773-2300 

Women’s Center 

Women’s Center 

McCarthy Hall-33 

773-3928 


Academic Advisement 


Admissions Policies 



65 



Undergraduate Students 


Freshman Requirements 

You will qualify for regular admission as a first-time 
freshman if you 

1. are a high school graduate, 

2. have completed with grades of C or better at least 
four years of college preparatory English and at 
least two years of college preparatory mathema- 
tics, and 

3. have a qualifiable eligibility index (see Eligibility 
Index Table next page) 

Eligibility Index 

The eligibility index is the combination of your high 
school grade point average and your score on either 
the American College Test (ACT) or the Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT). For this purpose we compute 
your grade point average on your final three years 
of high school studies, excluding physical education 
and military science, and use bonus points for cer- 
tain honors courses. (See “High School Honors 
Courses” in this section of the catalog.) CSUF may 
offer you early, provisional admission based on your 
work completed through the junior year of high 
school and planned for your senior year. 

You can calculate the index by multiplying your 
grade point average by 800 and adding your total 
score on the SAT. Or, if you took the ACT, multiply 
your grade point average by 200 and add ten time 
the composite score from the ACT. If you are a Cali- 
fornia high school graduate (or a legal resident of 
California for tuition purposes), you need a minimum 
index of 2994 using the SAT or 722 using the ACT; 
the table on the next page shows the combinations 
of test scores and averages required. 

If you neither graduated from a California high 
school nor are a legal resident of California for tui- 
tion purposes, you need a minimum index of 3402 
(SAT) or 826 (ACT). 

Applicants with grade-point averages above 3.10 
(3.60 for nonresidents) are exempt from the test 
requirement. 

Eligibility Index Alternative — As an alternative to 
calculating an eligibility index, California resi- 
dents (or graduates of California high schools) 
may use the table on the next page to determine 
their eligibility. 

You may estimate your eligibility for regular admis- 
sion as a first-time freshman by your responses to 
items 24 and 30 of part A of the application form. 
You will qualify for regular admission to programs 
not impacted (see “Impacted Programs” in the Ap- 
plication Procedure section of this catalog) when 
the university verifies that you have a qualifiable eli- 
gibility index and that you will have completed at 
least 8 semesters of college preparatory English 



Admissions Policies 


Eligibility Index Table for California High School Graduates or Residents of California 


A.C.T. S.A.T. 
G.P.A. Score Score 

ilt>ov« 3.10 qualifiM with any score 


3.10 

11 

520 

3.09 

11 

530 

3.08 

11 

530 

3.07 

11 

540 

3.06 

11 

550 

3.05 

12 

560 

3.04 

12 

570 

3.03 

12 

570 

3.02 

12 

580 

3.01 

12 

590 

3.00 

13 

600 

2.99 

13 

610 

2.98 

13 

610 

2.97 

13 

620 

296 

13 

630 

2.95 

14 

640 

294 

14 

650 

2.93 

14 

650 

292 

14 

660 

2.91 

14 

670 

2.90 

15 

680 

289 

15 

690 



A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

2.88 

15 

690 

2.87 

15 

700 

2.86 

15 

710 

2.85 

16 

720 

2.84 

16 

730 

2.83 

16 

730 

2.82 

16 

740 

2.81 

16 

750 

2.80 

17 

760 

2.79 

17 

770 

2.78 

17 

770 

2.77 

17 

780 

2.76 

17 

790 

2.75 

18 

800 

2.74 

18 

810 

2.73 

18 

810 

2.72 

18 

820 

2.71 

18 

830 

2.70 

19 

840 

2.69 

19 

850 

2.68 

19 

850 

2.67 

19 

860 

2.66 

19 

870 



A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

2.65 

20 

880 

2.64 

20 

890 

2.63 

20 

890 

2.62 

20 

900 

2.61 

20 

910 

2.60 

21 

920 

2.59 

21 

930 

2.58 

21 

930 

2.57 

21 

940 

2.56 

21 

950 

2.55 

22 

960 

2.54 

22 

970 

2.53 

22 

970 

2.52 

22 

980 

2.51 

22 

990 

2.50 

23 

1000 

2.49 

23 

1010 

2.48 

23 

1010 

2.47 

23 

1020 

2.46 

23 

1030 

2.45 

24 

1040 

2.44 

24 

1050 

2.43 

24 

1050 



A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

2.42 

24 

1060 

2.41 

24 

1070 

2.40 

25 

1080 

2.39 

25 

1090 

2.38 

25 

1090 

2.37 

25 

1100 

2.36 

25 

1110 

2.35 

26 

1120 

2.34 

26 

1130 

2.33 

26 

1130 

2.32 

26 

1140 

2.31 

26 

1150 

2.30 

27 

1160 

2.29 

27 

1170 

2.28 

27 

1170 

2.27 

27 

1180 

2.26 

27 

1190 

2.25 

28 

1200 

2.24 

28 

1210 

2.23 

28 

1210 

2.22 

28 

1220 

2.21 

28 

1230 

2.20 

29 

1240 


G.P.A. 

A.C.T. 

Score 

S.A.T. 

Score 

2.19 

29 

1250 

2.18 

29 

1250 

2.17 

29 

1260 

2.16 

29 

1270 

2.15 

30 

1280 

2.14 

30 

1290 

2.13 

30 

1290 

2.12 

30 

1300 

2.11 

30 

1310 

2.10 

31 

1320 

2.09 

31 

1330 

2.08 

31 

1330 

2.07 

31 

1340 

2.06 

31 

1350 

2.05 

32 

1360 

2.04 

32 

1370 

2.03 

32 

1370 

2.02 

32 

1380 

2.01 

32 

1390 

2.00 

33 

1400 


Betow 2.00 does not quali.y for 
regular admission 


and at least 4 semesters of college preparatory 
mathematics. You may still qualify for regular admis- 
sion on condition, if you are missing no more than 
two semesters of the required courses In English 
and mathematics. Please consult a counselor if you 
have any questions. 

Transfer Requirements 

You will qualify for admission as a transfer student 
if you have a grade point average of 2.0 (C) or better 
in ail transferable units attempted, are in good 
standing at the last college or university attended, 
and meet the following standard; 

(a) were eligible as a freshman, or 

(b) were eligible as a freshman except for the 
college preparatory subjects in English and 
mathematics and have completed appropri- 
ate college courses in the missing subjects, 
or 

(c) have completed at least 56 transferable 
semester (84 quarter) units and have com- 
pleted appropriate college courses to make 
up any missing subjects In college prepara- 
tory English and mathematics. (Nonresidents 
must have a 2.4 grade point average or bet- 
ter.) 

Fall 1988 Admission Requirements 

Effective with Fall 1988 terms and thereafter, first- 
time freshman applicants shall be required to in- 
clude the following comprehensive pattern of colle- 
giate preparatory subjects in their studies: 

English, 4 years (presently required). 


Mathematics, 3 years (2 years presently 
required): algebra, geometry, and intermediate 
algebra. 

U.S. History or U.S. History and government, 1 
year 

Science, 1 year with laboratory: biology, chem- 
istry, physics, or other acceptable laboratory 
science. 

Foreign language, 2 years in the same language 
(subject to waiver for applicants demonstrating 
equivalent competence). 

Visual and performing arts. 1 year. art. dance, 
drama /theatre, or music. Acceptable courses 
will combine theory and practice and meet the 
State Board of Education’s Model Curriculum 
Standards, Grades Nine Through Twelve: Visual 
and Performing Arts. 

Electives, 3 years: courses selected from Eng- 
lish, advanced mathematics, social science, 
history, laboratory science, foreign language, 
visual and performing arts, and agriculture. 

Other admission criteria, in addition to the prepara- 
tory subjects, include graduation from high school 
(or equivalent) and a qualifiable Eligibility index as 
defined. 

To phase in the 1988 standards for admission, Cali- 
fornia State University will provide for the condition- 
al admission of applicants otherwise admissible but 
who are missing a limited number of the required 
subjects. 


Admissions Policies 


"Conditional admission" is an alternative means to 
establish eligibility for admission. Applicants other- 
wise eligible for regular admission, but missing a 
limited number of the preparatory subjects, will be 
regularly admitted on condition that they make up 
the missing subjects early in their baccalaureate 
studies. Students will not be denied admission dur- 
ing the phase-in period simply because they lack a 
limited part of the required pattern. 

Under the plan, the minimum number of subjects to 
be completed each year will be: 

Fall 1988: at least 10 of the required 15 units 
Fall 1989: at least 12 of the required 16 units 
Fall 1990 and Fall 1991: at least 14 of the 
required 15 units 

In each of these years, applicants will be expected 
to include at least 6 of the 7 units required in English 
and mathematics. 

By Fall 1992, the CSU will expect all freshman ap- 
plicants to have completed all required subjects. 

High School Honors Courses 

Grades in up to eight semester courses, taken in the 
last two years of high school, that are designated 
honors in approved subjects receive additional 
points in grade point average calculations. Each unit 
of A in approved courses will receive a total of 5 
points; B. 4 points; C. 3 points; D 1 point; and none 
for F grades. 

Health Screening 

All new and readmitted students, born after January 
1, 1967, will be notified of the requirement to present 
proof of measles and rubella immunizations. This is 
notan admissions requirement, but shall be required 
of students by the beginning of their second term of 
enrollment in CSU. Proof of measles and rubella im- 
munizations shall also be required for certain groups 
of enrolled students who have increased exposure 
to these diseases. 

Measles and Rubella Immunizations 

The campus shall notify certain students, born after 
January 1, 1957, of the CSU requirement to present 
proof of measles and rubella immunizations by the 
beginning of the next term of enrollment. At the be- 
ginning of the next term of enrollment, those so no- 
tified who have not presented acceptable proof of 
the Immunizations shall be notified further of the 
need to comply before receiving registration mater- 
ials to enroll for the succeeding term. 

Persons subject to these health screening provi- 
sions include: 

New students enrolling fall 1986 and later; 

Readmitted students reenrolling fall 1986 and 
later; 

Students who reside In campus residence halls; 
(Campuses that do not operate residence halls 
may delete this reference) 

Students who obtained their primary and secon- 
dary schooling outside the United States; 


Students enrolled In dietetics, medical tech- 
nology, nursing, physical therapy, and any prac- 
tlcum, student teaching, or field work involving 
preschool-age children, school-age children, or 
taking place in a hospital or health care setting. 
(Campuses may modify the list of types of study 
in this reference as appropriate to their cur- 
ricula.) 

The Student Health Center shall provide immuniza- 
tions without cost to those students unable to obtain 
acceptable proof of immunizations. 

Test Scores 

Freshman and transfer applicants who have fewer 
than 56 semester or 84 quarter units of transferable 
college work must submit scores, unless exempt, 
from either the Scholastic Aptitude Test of the Col- 
lege Board (SAT) or the American College Test Pro- 
gram (ACT). You may obtain registration forms and 
the dates for either test from school or college coun- 
selors, from a campus Testing Office or by writing to: 

The College Board (SAT) American (College Testi^ng 

Program (ACT) 

Registration Unit, Box 592 Registration Unit, P.O. Box 168 
Princeton, New Jersey 08541 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 


TOEFL Requirement 

All undergraduate applicants, regardless of citizen- 
ship, whose preparatory education was principally 
in a language other than English, must demonstrate 
competence in English. Those who have not attend- 
ed schools for at least three years at the secondary 
level or above where English is the principal lan- 
guage of instruction must earn a minimum score of 
500 on the Test of English as a Foreign Language 
(TOEFL). Individual campuses may require a higher 
score. 

Placement Test Requirements 

English Placement Test (EPT) 

The English Placement Test (EPT) is required of all 
entering California State University undergraduate 
students who are not otherwise exempt. Exemptions 
are granted only for those students who present 
proof of having met one of the following criteria: 

• a score of 3, 4 or 5 on either the Language and 
Composition or the Composition and Literature 
examination of the College Board Advanced 
Placement Program 

• a satisfactory score on the CSU English Equiva- 
lency Examination 

• a score of 510 or above on the Verbal section of 
the College Board Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT- 
Verbal) 

• a score of 23 or above on the ACT English Usage 
Test 


Admissions Policies 


• a score of 600 or above on the College Board 
Achievement Test in English Composition with es- 
say 

• completion of an acceptable college course In 
English composition of four quarter or three 
semester units with a grade of C or better 

The EPT is offered only to admitted students and has 
no effect on admission decisions. Effective with the 
1986/87 academic year, all nonexempt students 
subject to the 1985/87 or subsequent catalogs, in- 
cluding those enrolling with 66 or more transferable 
semester units, are required to take the EPT. 

California State University, Fullerton (CSUF) has es- 
tablished the following policy regarding compliance 
with this regulation: 

Effective fall 1986, each new and continuing under- 
graduate student who has not taken the EPT and 
who is not otherwise exempt must take the test prior 
to the beginning of their next semester of enrollment 
at CSUF. Students who fail to comply with this policy 
shall be placed on administrative academic proba- 
tion in their next semester of enrollment at Fullerton. 
Students on probation for this reason who do not 
take the EPT prior to the beginning of their third 
semester of enrollment at CSUF will be administra- 
tively disqualified from enrolling until they take the 
EPT. 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 

The Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) test Is required 
of all California State University undergraduate 
students who were admitted for fall 1983 or after 
under the 1983/84 or later campus catalog and who 
are not otherwise exempt. Exemptions are granted 
only for those students who present proof of having 
met one of the following criteria: 

• a score of 3 or above on the College Board Ad- 
vanced Placement Mathematics examination (AB 
or BC) 

• a score of 630 or above on the Mathematics sec- 
tion of the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT-Math) 

• a score of 23 or above on the ACT Mathematics 
Test 

• a score of 620 or above on the College Board 
Math Achievement Test, Level 1 

• a score of 540 or above on the College Board 
Math Achievement Test, Level 2 

• completion of a college course that satisfies the 
General Education-Breadth Requirement In Quan- 
titative Reasoning, provided it is at the level of In- 
termediate algebra or above with a grade of C or 
better. 

The ELM test is offered only to admitted students 
and has no effect on admission decisions, but it must 
be taken and passed before the student can enroll 
in any course that satisfies the Mathematical Con- 
cepts and Quantitative Reasoning portion of the 
General Education-Breadth requirements. 

California State University, Fullerton (CSUF) estab- 
lished the following policy regarding compliance 
with this regulation: 


A. REQUIREMENT TO TAKE THE ELM TEST 

Effective fall 1986, each new and continuing under- 
graduate student who has not taken the ELM test 
and who is not otherwise exempt must take the test 
prior to the beginning of their next semester of en- 
rollment at CSUF. Students who fail to comply shall 
be placed on administrative academic probation In 
their next semester of enrollment at Fullerton. 
Students on probation for this reason who do not 
take the test prior to the beginning of the third 
semester of enrollment at CSUF will be administra- 
tively disqualified from enrolling until such time as 
they take the ELM test. 


B. STUDENTS WHO HAVE TAKEN BUT NOT 
PASSED THE ELM TEST 

Students who have taken but failed to pass the ELM 
test must participate In a program designed to as- 
sist them In learning the skills needed to pass the 
test (such as the Intensive Learning Experience). 
The program may be one offered at CSUF or an 
appropriate program on another campus. For contin- 
uing students, participation must begin in the fall 
1986 semester. Effective fall 1986, new and return- 
ing students must participate in an approved pro- 
gram In their first semester of enrollment after the 
receipt of the test results. Learning Assistance Re- 
source Center is responsible for monitoring compli- 
ance with this provision and for certifying the appro- 
priateness of the course in which the student wishes 
to participate. 

Participation in a program to prepare for the ELM 
test must be continued until the test is passed. At 
least one attempt to pass the test must be made 
each semester. Students who fail to comply with this 
requirement shall be placed on administrative aca- 
demic probation. Students on probation for this rea- 
son must pass the ELM test before the beginning of 
the next semester or they will be administratively 
disqualified from enrolling until they obtain a passing 
score. 

C. ELM AND CREDIT UNIT LIMITATIONS 

Students not otherwise exempt and who have not 
passed the ELM test will be placed on administrative 
academic probation the first semester after they 
complete 61 or more semester units of credit. Such 
students must pass the ELM test before the begin- 
ning of the next semester or they will be administra- 
tively disqualified. 


Residency Requirements 

The campus admissions office determines the resi- 
dence status of all new and returning students for 
nonresident tuition purposes. Responses to the Ap- 
plication for Admission and. If necessary, other evi- 
dence furnished by the student are used In making 
this determination. A student who falls to submit ad- 
equate information to establish a right to classifica- 
tion as a California resident will be classified as a 
nonresident. 


Admissions Policies 


The following statement of the rules regarding resi- 
dency determination for nonresident tuition pur- 
poses is not a complete discussion of the law, but 
a summary of the principal rules and their excep- 
tions. The law governing residence determination for 
tuition purposes by The California State University 
is found in Education Code Sections 68000-68090, 
68121, 68123, 68124, 89705-89707.5, and 90408 
and in Title 5 of the California Administrative Code. 
Sections 41900-41912. A copy of the statutes and 
regulations is available for inspection in the campus 
admissions office. 

Legal residence may be established by an adult who 
is physically present In the state and who, at the 
same time, intends to make California his or her 
permanent home. Steps must be taken at least one 
year prior to the residence determination date to 
show an intent to make California the permanent 
home with concurrent relinquishment of the prior 
legal residence. The steps necessary to show Cali- 
fornia residency intent will vary from case to case. 
Included among the steps may be registering to vote 
and voting in elections in California; filing resident 
California state income tax forms on total income; 
ownership of residential property or continuous oc- 
cupancy or renting of an apartment on a lease basis 
where one’s permanent belongings are kept; main- 
taining active resident memberships in California 
professional or social organizations; maintaining 
California vehicle plates and operator’s license; 
maintaining active savings and checking accounts in 
California banks; maintaining permanent military ad- 
dress and home of record in California if one is in the 
military service. 

The student who is within the state for educational 
purposes only does not gain the status of resident 
regardless of the length of the student’s stay In Cali- 
fornia. 

In general, the unmarried minor (a person under 18 
years of age) derives legal residence from the par- 
ent with whom the minor maintains or last maintained 
his or her place of abode. The residence of a minor 
cannot be changed by the minor or the minor’s guar- 
dian, so long as the minor’s parents are living. 

A married person may establish his or her residence 
independent of his or her spouse. 

An alien may establish his or her residence, unless 
precluded by the Immigration and Nationality Act 
from establishing domicile in the United States. An 
unmarried minor alien derives his or her residence 
from the parent with whom the minor maintains or 
last maintained his or her place of abode. 

Nonresident students seeking reclassification are 
required by law to complete a supplemental ques- 
tionnaire concerning financial independence. 

The general rule is that a student must have been a 
California resident for at least one year immediately 
preceding the residence determination date in order 
to qualify as a “resident student’’ for tuition purpos- 
es. A residence determination date is set for each 
academic term. 

At the Fullerton campus, the residence determina- 
tion date for the fall term is September 20, and for 
the spring term is January 25. 


Questions regarding residence determination dates 
should be directed to the campus admissions office 
which can give you the residence determination date 
for the term for which you are registering. 

There are exceptions from nonresident tuition, in- 
cluding; 

1. Persons below the age of 19 whose parents were 
residents of California but who left the state while 
the student, who remained, was still a minor. 
When the minor reaches age 18, the exception 
continues for one year to enable the student to 
qualify as a resident student. 

2. Minors who have been present in California with 
the Intent of acquiring residence for more than a 
year before the residence determination date, and 
entirely self-supporting for that period of time. 

3. Minors below the age of 19 who have lived with 
and been under the continuous direct care and 
control of an adult, not a parent, for the two years 
immediately preceding the residence determina- 
tion date. Such adult must have been a California 
resident for the most recent year. 

4. Dependent children and spouses of persons in 
active military service stationed in California on 
the residence determination date. This exception 
applies only for the minimum time required for the 
student to obtain California residence and main- 
tain that residence for a year. The exception, once 
attained. Is not affected by retirement or transfer 
of the military person outside the state. 

5. Military personnel in active service stationed in 
California on the residence determination date for 
purposes other than education at state-supported 
institutions of higher education. This exception 
applies only for the minimum time required for the 
student to obtain California residence and main- 
tain that residence for a year. 

6. Certain credentialed, full-time employees of Cali- 
fornia school districts. 

7. Full-time State University employees and their 
children and spouses: State employees assigned 
to work outside the State and their children and 
spouses. This exception applies only for the min- 
imum time required for the student to obtain Cali- 
fornia residence and maintain that residence for 
one year. 

8. Certain exchange students. 

9. Children of deceased public law enforcement or 
fire suppression employees, who were California 
residents, and who were killed in the course of law 
enforcement or fire suppression duties. 

Any student, following a final campus decision on his 
or her residence classification, only may make writ- 
ten appeal within 120 calendar days of notification 
of the final decision on campus of the classification 
to: 

The California State University 

Office of General Counsel 

400 Golden Shore 

Long Beach, California 90802-4275 


Admissions Policies 


The Office of General Counsel may make a decision 
on the issue, or it may send the matter back to the 
campus for further review. Students classified incor- 
rectly as residents or incorrectly granted an excep- 
tion from nonresident tuition are subject to reclassifi- 
cation as nonresidents and payment of nonresident 
tuition in arrears. If incorrect classification results 
from false or concealed facts, the student Is subject 
to discipline pursuant to Section 41301 of Title 5 of 
the California Administrative Code. Resident stu- 
dents who become nonresidents, and nonresident 
students qualifying for exceptions whose basis for 


so qualifying changes, must immediately notify the 
admissions office. Applications for a change in clas- 
sification with respect to a previous term are not ac- 
cepted. 

The student is cautioned that this summation of rules 
regarding residency determination is by no means a 
complete explanation of their meaning. The student 
should also note that changes may have been made 
in the rate of nonresident tuition, in the statutes, and 
in the regulations between the time this catalog Is 
published and the relevant residence determination 
date. 



Admissions Policies 


Application Procedures 


Applications may be obtained from the admissions 
office at any of the campuses of The California State 
University or at any California high school or commu- 
nity college. Requirements for admission to Califor- 
nia State University, Fullerton are In accordance 
with Title 5, Chapter 1 , Sub-chapter 3, of the Califor- 
nia Administrative Code. A student unsure of these 
requirements should consult a high school or com- 
munity college counselor or the admissions office at 
California State University, Fullerton. 

The CSU advises prospective students that they 
must supply complete and accurate information on 
the application for admission, residence questions 
and financial aid forms. Further, applicants must 
submit authentic and official transcripts of all previ- 
ous academic work attempted. Failure to file com- 
plete, accurate and authentic application docu- 
ments may result in denial of admission, cancellation 
of academic credit, suspension or expulsion (Sec- 
tion 41301, Article 1.1, Title 6 , California Administra- 
tive Code). 

Prospective students, applying for part-time or full- 
time programs of study, in day or evening classes, 
must file a complete application as described in the 
admissions booklet. The $36 nonrefundable applica- 
tion fee should be in the form of a check or money 
order payable to The California State University. The 
application fee may not be transferred or used to ap- 
ply to another term. Applicants need file only at their 
campus of first choice. An alternative choice cam- 
pus and major may be indicated on the application. 
Applicants should list as an alternative campus only 
that campus of The California State University that 
they would be able to attend. Generally, an alterna- 
tive major will be considered at the first choice cam- 
pus before an application Is redirected to an alterna- 
tive choice campus. Applicants will be considered 
automatically at the alternative choice campus only 
if the first choice campus is unable to accommodate 
them. 

How to Apply for Admission 

1. Submit a completed application for admission 
within the announced filing period accompanied 
by the required application fee to: 

Office of Admissions and Records 
California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634 

2. When asked to do so, request required transcripts 
of record of all previous scholastic work from 
each school or college attended. The transcripts 
required at CSUF are: 

— for undergraduate applicants with fewer than 
56 transferable semester units: 

(a) the high school transcript, and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university 
attended. 


— for undergraduates with 56 or more transfer- 
able semester units: 

(a) a transcript from each college or university 
attended. 

— for graduates: 

(a) applicants for unclassified postbaccalaure- 
ate standing with no degree or credential ob- 
jective must submit a transcript from the col- 
lege or university where the baccalaureate 
was earned. Further, one transcript from oth- 
er institutions attended is required as neces- 
sary so that the university has a complete re- 
cord of the last 60 semester units attempted 
prior to enrollment at Fullerton. 

(b) applicants for a master’s degree or teaching 
credential, or both, must submit two copies of 
the transcript from each college or university 
attended. 

Note: In addition, all students should have a person- 
al set of college transcripts for advising purposes. 
All transcripts must be received directly from the is- 
suing institutions and become official records of the 
university; such transcripts therefore cannot be re- 
turned or reissued. Foreign language transcripts 
must be accompanied by certified English transla- 
tions. 

3. All undergraduate students who have completed 
fewer than 56 semester or 84 quarter units of 
transferable work are required to submit scores 
from either one of two national testing programs 
before eligibility for admission to the university 
can be determined. This requirement does not af- 
fect undergraduate students who have previously 
attended CSUF and who have submitted ACT or 
SAT scores at the time of their first admission. 
Registration forms and test dates for either test 
may be obtained from school or college coun- 
selors, from the address below, or from campus 
testing offices. For either test, submit the regis- 
tration form and fee at least one month prior to the 
test date. 


ACT Address 

American College Testing Program, Inc. 
Registration Unit, P.O. Box 168 
Iowa City, Iowa 52240 
SAT Address 

College Entrance Examination Board 
P.O. Box 692 

Princeton, New Jersey 08541 

Applicants to classified graduate curricula must sub- 
mit the scores of any qualifying examinations re- 
quired in their prospective programs of study. 


Admissions Policies 


Impacted Programs 

The CSU designates programs to be impacted when 
more applications are received in the first month of 
the fall and spring filing periods than the spaces 
available. Some programs are impacted at every 
campus where they are offered: others are impacted 
at some campuses but not all. You must meet sup- 
plementary admissions criteria if applying to an im- 
pacted program. 

The CSU will announce before the opening of the fall 
filing period which programs are designated impact- 
ed for the academic year. That announcement will be 
published in the CSU School and College Review, 
distributed to high school and college counselors. 
We will also give information about the supplementa- 
ry criteria to program applicants. 

You must file your application for admission to an im- 
pacted program during the first month of the filing 
period. Further, if you wish to be considered in im- 
pacted programs at two or more campuses, you 
must file an application to each. Nonresident appli- 
cants are rarely admitted to impacted programs. 

Supplementary Admission Criteria: Each campus 
with impacted programs uses supplementary admis- 
sion criteria in screening applicants. Supplementary 
criteria may include ranking on the freshman eligibili- 
ty index, the overall transfer grade point average, 
and a combination of campus-developed criteria. If 
you are required to submit scores on either the SAT 
or ACT, you should take the tests no later than De- 
cember If applying for fall admission. The supple- 
mentary admission criteria used by the individual 
campuses to screen applicants appear periodically 
in the CSU School and College Review and are sent 
by the campuses to all applicants seeking admis- 
sion to an impacted program. 

Unlike unaccommodated applicants to locally im- 
pacted programs, who may be redirected to another 
campus In the same major, unaccommodated appli- 
cants to systemwide Impacted programs may not be 
redirected in the same major, but may choose an al- 
ternative major either at the first choice campus or 
another campus. 

At the time of the preparation of this catalog, the un- 
dergraduate major In electrical/ electronic engi- 


neering at Fullerton was declared Impacted as de- 
fined in this section. 

Application Filing Periods 

Term Filing Period Begins Filing Period Duration 
Fall Previous November Until application 

Spring Previous August categories are filled 


Application Acknowledgment 

Applicants who can be accommodated will receive 
letters acknowledging their application. The letters 
are not statements of admission but are commit- 
ments by Cal State Fullerton to admit the applicants 
who establish their eligibility for admission. The ac- 
knowledgment letters direct applicants to arrange to 
have appropriate records forwarded promptly to the 
admissions office. Applicants will normally receive 
their acknowledgments within two weeks of the re- 
ceipt of their applications. 

Acknowledgement letters may not be transferred to 
another term or to other campuses. 

Hardship Petitions 

Fullerton has established procedures to consider 
qualified applicants who would be faced with an ex- 
treme hardship if not admitted. Prospective hard- 
ship petitioners should write to the director of ad- 
missions and records regarding specific policies 
governing hardship admission. 

Records Retention 

The university retains the admissions materials for 
those who apply, but who for whatever reason do not 
enroll for two years. For those who do enroll the uni- 
versity will retain the materials in student folders, in- 
cluding transcripts of the record of work completed 
elsewhere, for five years beyond the date of last at- 
tendance. 

Records of academic performance at California 
State University, Fullerton, including individual stu- 
dent records, faculty grade lists, and graduation 
lists are kept permanently. 


Admissions Policies 


Admission Requirements 


Admission Requirements for 
First-Time Freshman 

High School Graduates 

You will qualify for regular admission as a first-time 
freshman if you 

1. are a high school graduate 

2. have a qualifiable eligibility Index (see previous 
chart), and 

3. have completed with grades of C or better at least 
four years of college preparatory English and at 
least two years of college preparatory mathemat- 
ics. 

Subject Requirements 

The California State University requires that all un- 
dergraduate applicants for admission complete with 
a C or better four years of college preparatory study 
in English and two years of college preparatory 
mathematics, or their equivalent. California second- 
ary school courses that meet the subject require- 
ments are listed in "Courses to Meet Requirements 
for Admission to the University of California," pub- 
lished for, and available at each high school. 

English: Regular English courses in the 9th and 10th 
grades that integrate reading and writing will be con- 
sidered college preparatory. English courses In the 
1 1th and 12th grades will be considered college pre- 
paratory if (1) they include writing instruction and 
evaluation, and require substantial amounts of writ- 
ing of extensive, structured papers, expressive and 
analytical, demanding a high level of thinking skills; 
and (2) they are integrated with challenging, In- 
depth reading of significant literature. 

Courses in speech, drama, or journalism will be con- 
sidered college preparatory If they meet the criteria 
for 11th and 12th grade courses. Two consecutive 
semesters of advanced English as a Second Lan- 
guage may be substituted for two semesters of col- 
lege preparatory English. Remedial reading and writ- 
ing courses at any level will not be accepted nor will 
courses In beginning or intermediate English as a 
Second Language. 

Mathematics: College preparatory courses In math- 
ematics include algebra, geometry, trigonometry, 
calculus and mathematical analysis. Most students 
will have taken at least algebra and geometry or two 
years of algebra. Business or technical mathemat- 
ics, arithmetic or prealgebra are not considered col- 
lege preparatory. 

Making Up Missing Preparatory Subjects: Under- 
graduate applicants may make up the required 
courses in college preparatory English and mathe- 
matics after high school by completing with a C or 


better college courses that meet the college prepa- 
ratory criteria. Normally, college courses applicable 
to the CSU general education requirements in writ- 
ten communication in English and in mathematics, in 
addition to any required prerequisites to such 
courses, satisfy the subject requirements. Please 
consult with any CSU admissions office for further In- 
formation about alternative ways to satisfy the sub- 
ject requirements. 

Provisional Admission 

Beginning with fall term 1987, campuses may provi- 
sionally admit first-time freshman applicants based 
on their academic performance through the junior 
year of high school. California State University, Ful- 
lerton will monitor the senior year of study of those 
provisionally admitted to ensure that those so admit- 
ted complete their senior year of studies satisfacto- 
rily, including the required college preparatory sub- 
jects, and graduate from high school. 

Non-High School Graduates 

Applicants over 18 years of age, but who have not 
graduated from high school, will be considered for 
admission as first-time freshman only when prepara- 
tion In all other ways is such that the university be- 
lieves promise of academic success is equivalent to 
that of eligible California high school graduates. 

High School Students 

Students still enrolled In high school will be consid- 
ered for enrollment in certain special programs if 
recommended by the principal and the appropriate 
campus department chair and if preparation is equiv- 
alent to that required of eligible California high 
school graduates. Such admission is only for a given 
program and does not constitute the right to contin- 
ued enrollment. 

Adult Students 

As an alternative to regular admission criteria, an 
applicant who is twenty-five years of age or older 
may be considered for admission as an adult student 
if he or she meets the following basic conditions: 

1. Possesses a high school diploma (or has es- 
tablished equivalence through either the Tests 
of General Educational Development (GED) or 
the California High School Proficiency Examina- 
tion). 

2. Has not been enrolled in college as a full-time 
student for more than one term during the past 
five years. Part-time enrollment is permissible. 

3. If there has been any college attendance in the 
past five years, has earned a C average or bet- 
ter. 

Consideration will be based upon a judgement as to 
whether the applicant is likely to succeed as a regu- 


Admissions Policies 


larly admitted freshman or transfer and will Include 
an assessment of basic skills in the English lan- 
guage and mathematical computation. 

Admission Requirements for 
Undergraduate Transfer 
Students 

You will qualify for admission as a transfer student 
if you have a grade point average of 2.0 (C) or better 
in all transferable units attempted, are in good 
standing at the last college or university attended, 
and meet the following standard: 

(a) were eligible as a freshman, or 

(b) were eligible as a freshman except for the 
college preparatory subjects in English and 
mathematics and have completed appropri- 
ate college courses in the missing subjects 
or 

(c) have completed at least 56 transferable se- 
mester (84 quarter) units and have completed 
appropriate courses to make up any missing 
subjects in college preparatory English and 
mathematics. (Nonresidents must have a 2.4 
grade-point average or better.) 

For these requirements, transferable courses are 
those designated for that purpose by the college or 
university offering the courses. 

Undergraduate applicants may make up the required 
courses in college preparatory English and mathe- 
matics after school by completing with a C or better 
college courses that meet the college preparatory 
criteria. Normally, college courses applicable to the 
CSU general education requirements in written com- 
munication in English and in mathematics, in addition 
to any required prerequisites to such courses, satis- 
fy the subject requirements. Please consult with the 
admissions office for further information about alter- 
native ways to satisfy the subject requirements. 

Admission Requirements for 
International Students 

The university is pleased to accept applications 
from international students. Freshman applicants 
applying directly from overseas should have out- 
standing academic qualifications and meet TOEFL 
score requirements. Applicants who are graduates 
of foreign secondary schools must have preparation 
equivalent to that required of eligible California high 
school graduates. The university will carefully re- 
view the previous record of all such applicants and 
only those with promise of academic success equiv- 
alent to that of eligible California high school gradu- 
ates will be admitted. Undergraduate transfers, who 
have completed a two-year program In an accredit- 
ed institution of higher education, with a good aca- 
demic record and satisfactory TOEFL scores, shall 
receive priority for admission. 

Postbaccalaureate applicants who have completed 
a bachelor's degree or its equivalent, with a strong 
academic record, and satisfactory TOEFL scores 


from an accredited Institution may be considered for 
admission as graduate students. 

The university has established guidelines to insure 
the timely processing of all applications and to en- 
able admitted applicants to make arrangements to 
reach the U.S. and the campus prior to orientation 
and registration. Early application is strongly ad- 
vised due to strong demand for programs. Newly ad- 
mitted students are required to take an English 
Placement Examination prior to enrollment In class- 
es (mid-August for fall semester and mid-January for 
spring semester). 

Applications may be submitted from the following 
dates until spaces are filled: 

For Fall Semester 
November 1 of preceding year 
For Spring Semester 
August 1 of preceding year 

All international student applicants must declare a 
major field of study when the application Is filed. 
Campus programs of study which receive more ap- 
plications than spaces are available, have been de- 
clared impacted, and are not open to nonresidents, 
foreign or domestic. 

All applicants whose native language is other than 
English are required to present scores for the Test 
of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) before 
they can be admitted to the university. Undergradu- 
ate applicants must achieve a score of 500; gradu- 
ate applicants a score of 550. Adequate perfor- 
mance on the TOEFL Is mandatory for admission. 

Applicants should obtain the TOEFL Bulletin of Infor- 
mation and registration forms well in advance. Cop- 
ies of this bulletin and registration forms are often 
available at American embassies and consulates, 
offices of the United States Information Service. 
United States educational commissions and founda- 
tions abroad, bi-national centers, and several pri- 
vate organizations. Those who cannot obtain locally 
a TOEFL Bulletin of Information should write to: Test 
of English as a Foreign Language, Box 899, Prince- 
ton, New Jersey, USA, 08541. 

International student applicants must include a 
statement of financial support accompanied by a 
bank statement from their sponsor. Students spon- 
sored by an international organization or home gov- 
ernment agency must include a letter of scholarship 
support specifying this university and the students 
proposed degree and program of study. For an inter- 
national student studying in 1986-87 the cost for 
nonresident tuition and fees was $4919 based upon 
15 units of course work each semester with living ex- 
penses estimated at $8,250, totalling $13,169 (sub- 
ject to change). Financial support documents must 
reflect availability of this amount. 

Transcripts of all educational documents in lan- 
guages other than English must be accompanied by 
translation into English certified by independent 
agencies. All academic records must be received di- 
rectly from the issuing institutions and become offi- 
cial records of the university. 


Admissions Policies 


International student applicants who are admitted by 
the university will be Issued form 1-20 which is used 
to obtain an F-1 student visa from a U.S. Embassy 
or Consulate overseas. Students transferring from a 
U.S. institution will use form I-20 to apply for transfer 
authorization through the Immigration and Natural- 
ization Service. Arrival, orientation and registration 
information from the Office of International Educa- 
tion and Exchange will accompany the admission 
materials mailed to new students. 

Admission Requirements for 
Postbaccalaureate and 
Graduate Students 

See admissions information in the “Graduate Regu- 
lations" section of this catalog. 


Cancellation of Admission 

A student admitted to the university for a given se- 
mester but who does not register in the specified se- 
mester will have the admission canceled. The stu- 
dent must file a new application form when again 
seeking admission and must follow the complete ap- 
plication procedure and meet the current admission 
requirements. 

Admission Requirements for 
Summer Session Students 

Although the quality of the program and most of the 
course offerings are the same as in the regular ses- 
sion, the university does not require an advance ap- 
plication or transcripts from students registering for 
credit courses In the summer session. Students nor- 
mally must be high school graduates, however, and 
are expected to have satisfied the prerequisites for 
the courses in which they register. In addition, stu- 
dents are expected to file a request to register In the 
summer session. Admission to summer session 
does not grant admission to the regular session. 


Readmission of Former 
Students 

A student previously enrolled in the university, plan- 
ning to return after an absence of more than one se- 
mester, must file a new application for admission. A 
student absent for one semester, and who enrolls 
elsewhere in the Interim, must also file an applica- 
tion for readmission. Unless a leave of absence was 
granted, catalog requirements at the time of read- 
mission will apply. Please see the “Stop-Out Policy" 
section in the regulations subchapter of this catalog 
for further information on applications for readmls- 
slon. 

Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the university in good standing will 
be readmitted provided any academic work attempt- 
ed elsewhere since the last attendance does not 
change his or her scholastic status. Transcripts of 
the record of any work attempted In the interim are 
required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of the last enroll- 
ment will be readmitted on probation provided he or 
she is otherwise eligible. The student must furnish 
transcripts of any college work taken during the ab- 
sence. 

Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

The readmission of a previously disqualified student 
is by special action only. Ordinarily the university will 
consider an application for reinstatement only after 
the student has remained absent for a minimum of 
one year following disqualification and has fulfilled 
all recommended conditions. In every instance, re- 
admission is based on evidence, including tran- 
scripts of study completed elsewhere after disquali- 
fication, that In the judgment of the university 
warrants such action. If readmitted, the student Is 
placed on scholastic probation. 


Admissions Policies 


Transfer Credits 


Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

The Office of Admissions and Records will evaluate 
previous college work In relation to the requirements 
of Fullerton. All degree candidates will be Issued a 
credit summary during the first semester of atten- 
dance which serves as a basis for determining re- 
maining requirements for the student’s specific ob- 
jectives. The admissions office will convert quarter 
units of credit transferred to the university to semes- 
ter units by multiplying quarter-unit totals by two- 
thirds. 

Once Issued to a student, the evaluation remains 
valid as long as the student enrolls at the date speci- 
fied, pursues the objective specified, and remains in 
continuous attendance. The student will not be held 
to additional graduation requirements unless such 
requirements become mandatory as a result of 
changes in the California Administrative Code or the 
California Education Code. If the student does not 
remain in continuous attendance and has not applied 
for and been granted a formal leave of absence, the 
evaluation issued upon readmission will specify the 
remaining requirements for the student’s objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student 
should notify the Office of Admissions and Records 
immediately of a change in the objective specified 
in the evaluation. While the evaluation for a student 
remains valid, the student is held responsible for 
complying with all changes in regulations and proce- 
dures which may appear in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited Institutions, 
other than course work identified by such institutions 
as remedial or in other ways as being nontransfer- 
able, will be accepted toward the satisfaction of 
baccalaureate degree and credential requirements 
at the university within limitations of residence re- 
quirements and community college transfer maxi- 
mums. 

Transfer of Credit From a 
Community College 

Upper division credit is not allowed for courses tak- 
en in a community college. Credential credit is not 
allowed for courses in professional education taken 
in a community college. This does not invalidate 
credit for preprofessional courses taken at a com- 
munity college, such as introduction to education, 
art or design, arithmetic, or music for classroom 
teachers. After a student has completed 70 units of 
college credit at a community college, no further 
community college units may be accepted for unit 
credit. 


Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses 
in the advanced placement program of the College 
Entrance Examination Board (defined as receiving a 
score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted credit for each 
advanced placement course toward graduation, ad- 
vanced placement In the university’s sequence of 
courses and credit for curriculum requirements. 

Cal State Fullerton grants credit toward its under- 
graduate degrees for successful completion of ex- 
aminations of the Advanced Placement Program of 
the College Board. Students who present scores of 
three or better will be granted no more than six se- 
mester units of college credit. 


Advanced Placement 

Equivalent 

Semester 

Course 

Course: CSUF 

Units 

American History 

History 180 

3 

Art History 

Art 201A,B 

3-6* 

Studio Art 

Art 103 or 104 

Art 107A or 107B 


Biology 

Bio Sci 101 

3 

Chemistry 

Chemistry 

120A,B 

6** 

English 

English 101 



English 1 12 

3*** 

European History 

History 1 10B 

3 

French 

French 101, 102 

10 

German 

German 101, 102 

10 

Latin 4 

Latin 101 

3 

Latin 5 

Latin 101, 102 

6 

Math A & B 

Math 150A 

4 

Math B & C 

Math 160A.B 

8 

Physics 

Physics 21 1 A,B 


Spanish 

Spanish 101, 102 

10 


'Consult the Department of Art for applicability of advanced placement ex- 
amination credit. 

"To complete the requirement for Chemistry 120A.B, the student must 
successfully complete four units of Chemistry 120A and 120B laborato- 
ry at Cal State Fullerton. 

•"Must have a score of 4 or better. 

•"•To complete the requirement for Physics 211A,B the student must 
successfully complete two units of Physics 21 1 A and 21 IB laboratory 
at CSUF. 


Credit for Extension and 
Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspon- 
dence and extension courses which may be allowed 
toward the bachelor’s degree Is 24 units, if other- 
wise applicable. 


Admissions Policies 


Credit for Noncollegiate 
Instruction 

Cal State Fullerton grants undergraduate degree 
credit for successful completion of non collegiate in- 
struction, either military or civilian, appropriate to 
the baccalaureate, that has been recommended by 
the Commission on Educational Credit and Creden- 
tials of the American Council on Education. The num- 
ber of units allowed are those recommended In the 
Guide to the Evaluation of Educational Experience in 
the Armed Services and the National Guide to Edu- 
cational Credit for Training Programs. Students who 
have at least one year of active military service may 
be granted six or twelve units of undergraduate 
credit. 

College Level Examination 
Program 

The university shall accept three semester units of 
credit for each of the following College Level Exami- 
nation Program (CLEP) examinations, subject to 
achievement of the scores indicated, provided the 
examination was not taken previously within one cal- 
endar year and that degree credit has not been 
granted for previous course work at the equivalent 
or at a more advanced level than for the examination 
in question. 

Examination Passing score 

Mathematics General Exam 60* 

College Algebra-Trigonometry 49 

Introductory Calculus and Analytic Geometry 48 
Statistics 49 

General Chemistry 48 

*On both parts of examination. 

Fullerton may grant additional credit and advanced 
standing based upon CLEP examination results us- 
ing as minimum standards; 

General Examinations 

1. That the student achieve a score at or above the 
50th percentile, college sophomore norms. 


2. That no unit credit be granted for any test in the 
general examinations, but that up to six units of 
general education requirements be waived for 
each test completed with the appropriate score. 

Subject Examinations 

1. That the student submit a score at or above the 
50th percentile of those In the norm group who 
earned a mark of C or better. 

2. That equivalency to Fullerton courses be deter- 
mined by the appropriate academic department in 
conjunction with the Office of Admissions and Re- 
cords. 

3. That university credit shall have not been previ- 
ously earned in the courses in question. 

In no case will credit so awarded count toward resi- 
dence credit. 

English Equivalency 
Examination 

Students passing the California State University 
English Equivalency Examination shall be awarded 
six semester units of credit (English 101 and 200 — 
GE categories A.1. & C.4.) provided credit has not 
been granted previously at the equivalent or more 
advanced levels. Further, those who pass this op- 
tional examination are exempt from the requirement 
to take the English Placement Test. 


Science / Mathematics 
Equivalency Examinations 

Students may receive credit by examination in gen- 
eral mathematics, calculus-analytic geometry, sta- 
tistics. chemistry, biology, and calculus by passing 
California State University-approved examinations. 
Each test offers those who pass three semester 
units of credit, provided credit has not previously 
been granted at the equivalent or at more advanced 
levels. 


Admissions Policies 


Registration 

Procedures 



79 



Registration Information 


Orientation 

Various opportunities are provided for new students 
to obtain information relating to academic programs, 
student services and activities, and other aspects of 
university life. Information about specific programs 
is published separately. 

Registration 

Class Schedule: A complete listing of courses of 
fered will be found In the class schedule published 
prior to the start of each semester. This publication, 
which may be purchased in the Titan Bookstore, 
also states detailed information pertaining to the se- 
mester including class enrollment and fee payment 
procedures. 

It is important that students familiarize themselves 
not only with the academic policies stated In this 
catalog but also with the requirements and proce- 
dures In the class schedule as both are used In the 
selection of classes for the semester. 

Registration: Registration Is made up of two 
steps — class enrollment and fee payment, and may 
be accomplished through early registration by mail, 
walk-through registration during the month preced- 
ing the first day of Instruction, or through late regis- 
tration during the first three weeks of Instruction. 
Most students should find early registration by mall 
advantageous. 

At registration, every student Is required to file a 
study program with the Office of Admissions and Re- 
cords. The filing of a program by the student and Its 
acceptance by the university obligates the student 
to perform the designated work to the best of his or 
her ability. It is emphasized that registration does 
not become official until all fees have been paid. 

Computerized Records System 

The student records system, including the registra- 
tion process, uses the computer. It is a fact of life 
in a large institution such as Cal State Fullerton that 
use of the computer is essential. Thus, there are re- 
quirements for data cards, code numbers, student 
file numbers and for meeting precise criteria for re- 
cording data, which introduce impersonal elements 
in the student records system. Despite these condi- 
tions, every effort is made to provide courteous, effi- 
cient and personalized service to students and the 
entire university community. To assist in providing 



Registration Procedures 




this service, students are urged to be careful and ac- 
curate in preparing forms, especially the study pro- 
gram registration form and change of program 
forms. Accurate preparation of information will as- 
sure each student of error-free records. 

Controlled Entry Classes 

In general, all courses listed in the semester class 
schedule shall be available to all matriculated stu- 
dents except for appropriate academic restrictions 
as stated in the schedule and the catalog. These re- 
strictions, including special qualifications and other 
academic limitations, on class entry shall be pub- 
lished in the class schedule as appropriate foot- 
notes to the designated class or class section and 
shall be consistent with the catalog. 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be 
announced in the class schedule. Late registrants 
will find themselves handicapped in arranging their 
programs and must pay a $26 late registration fee 
in addition to regular fees. 

Changes in Program After 
Registration 

Each student is responsible for the program of 
courses listed at registration. Changes may be 
made thereafter only by filing a change of program 
form in the Office of Admissions and Records follow- 
ing procedures announced in the class schedule. 

Students may add classes to their programs of 
study during the first three weeks of instruction. 
They may drop classes through the first two weeks. 
After the 11th day of instruction the university ex- 
pects students to complete all courses in which they 
are enrolled. If after the 1 1th day students must with- 
draw, they are subject to the withdrawal policy con- 
tained in the “University Regulations” section of this 
catalog. In all instances, dropped classes must be 
reported to the Office of Admissions and Records; 
students not attending class are not dropped auto- 
matically. 

Concurrent Enrollment 

A student enrolled at the university may enroll con- 
currently for additional courses at another institution 
outside the CSU system without advance written ap- 
proval from the student’s academic adviser or the 
Office of Admissions and Records. Students are re- 
minded that the study load in the proposed com- 
bined program of study may not exceed the maxi- 
mum number of units authorized at this university. 


Enrollment at Other CSU 
Campuses 

Fullerton students may enroll at other campuses of 
The California State University either while concur- 
rently enrolled at Cal State Fullerton or as visitors. 
There are certain eligibility requirements and enroll- 
ment conditions that must be met, including comple- 
tion of at least one semester at Cal State Fullerton 
and being in good academic standing. Information 
and application forms may be obtained from the Of- 
fice of Admissions and Records. 


Visitor Enrollment 

Students enrolled at other campuses of The Califor- 
nia State University may enroll at Cal State Fullerton 
while concurrently enrolled at their home campus or 
as visitors. Information about eligibility require- 
ments, enrollment conditions and application forms 
are available from the Office of Admissions and Re- 
cords at the home campus. 


Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll In classes as 
an auditor. The student must meet the regular univer- 
sity admission requirements and must pay the same 
fees as other students. See the description of Audit 
In the “University Regulations” section of this cata- 
log under “Administrative Symbols.” 


Handicapped Students 

Students physically handicapped who require assis- 
tance should consult the Handicapped Student Ser- 
vices Center prior to the announced semester regis- 
tration period so that special arrangements can be 
made. 


Veterans 

California State University, Fullerton is approved by 
the Bureau of School Approvals, State Department 
of Education, to offer programs to veterans seeking 
benefits under state and federal legislation. All stu- 
dents seeking veterans’ benefits must have a de- 
gree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well In ad- 
vance of the semester in which the veteran plans to 
use these benefits to have the authorization at the 
time of registration. 


Registration Procedures 


Schedule of Fees, 
1987-88 


Tuition is not charged to legal residents of Califor- 
nia. The 1987-88 and 1988-89 schedule of fees will 
be published in the class schedules for those years. 
The following are the fees and nonresident tuition 
assessed at the time of preparing this catalog. 

Application fee (nonrefundable) 

Payable by check or money order at time 


application is made $36 

All Students (Per Semester Fees) 

State University fee 

0 to 6 units $183 

7 or more units 315 

Facilities fee 3 

Associated Students fee 20 

University Union fee 49 

Instructionally-related activity fee 10 


Nonresident and Foreign Visa Students 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees 

charged all students) 

Per unit $147 

Summer Session 

Course fee per unit see current bulletin 

Associated Students fee $3 

University Union fee 6 

Extension Fees 

Per unit see current bulletin 

Other Fees or Charges 

University I.D. card $3 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees 
listed above) 26 

Check returned from bank for any cause .10 

Transcript fee 4 

Graduation and diploma fee 16 

Failure to meet an administrative time limit 10 

Miscellaneous course fee A few courses 

require fees for registration 

Consult current class schedule for further informa- 
tion. 

Auditors pay the same fees as others. 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of The 
California State University without advance notice. 



Registration Procedures 



Alan Pattee Scholarships 

Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire 
suppression employees, who were California resi- 
dents and who were killed In the course of law en- 
forcement or fire suppression duties, are not 
charged fees or tuition of any kind at any California 
State University campus, according to the Alan Pat- 
tee Scholarship Act, Education Code Section 
68121. Students qualifying for these benefits are 
known as Alan Pattee scholars. For further Informa- 
tion contact the Admissions /Registrar’s Office, 
which determines eligibility. 


Waiver of Fees 

Section 32320 of the California Education Code pro- 
vides for the waiver of certain fees other than non- 
resident tuition, for certain veterans’ dependents. 
Those who meet one or more of the following criteria 
should present to the university registrar a certifi- 
cate of eligibility obtained from the Division of Edu- 
cational Assistance, California Department of Veter- 
ans Affairs, on or before the date of registration. 

A. Children of veterans who have service-connected 
disabilities and whose annual income not including 
governmental compensation for such service- 
connected disability does not exceed $6,000. 

B. Children of veterans killed in action or because of 
a service-connected disability, where the annual 
Income of such children. Including the value of any 
support received from parents and the annual in- 
come of surviving parents, does not exceed $6, 
000. No limitations on age or length of residency. 

Refund of Fees 

Details concerning the fees which may be refunded, 
and the circumstances under which fees may be re- 
funded, and the appropriate procedure to be fol- 
lowed In seeking refunds may be obtained by con- 
sulting Section 41803 (parking fees), 41913 
(nonresident tuition), and 41802 (all other fees) of 
Title 5, California Administrative Code. In all cases 
it is important to act quickly in applying for a refund. 

Information concerning the policy and appropriate 
procedure to be followed In seeking a refund may be 
obtained from the Office of the Registrar. 

Parking Fees 

Semester pass (nonreserved spaces): 


Regular and limited students 

(4-wheeled vehicle) $33.76 

Regular and limited students 

(2-wheeled vehicle) 8.46 

Coin operated gate per exit 76 

Summer session (4-wheeled vehicle) 22.60 

Summer session (2-wheeled vehicle) 6.66 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents 
living at home or making other housing arrange- 
ments will vary widely. It Is estimated that, including 
a $4,700 yearly allowance for room and board, and 
$400 for books and supplies, the total cost will ap- 
proximate $7,600 for an unmarried person. Nonresi- 
dent students must also allow for nonresident tuition 
In addition to those fees listed above. 

Student Services Fee 

The student services fee provides financing for the 
following student services not covered by state 
funding. 

Social and Cultural Development Activities. Pro- 
vides for the coordination of various student activ- 
ities, student organizations, student government 
and cultural programs. 

2. Counseling. Includes the cost of counselors’ sal- 
aries and clerical support, plus operating ex- 
penses and equipment. 

3. Testing. Covers the cost of test officers, psy- 
chometrlsts, clerical support, operating expenses 
and equipment. 

4. Placement. Provides career information to stu- 
dents and faculty for academic program planning 
and employment information to graduates and stu- 
dents. 

5. Financial Aids Administration. Includes the cost 
of the counseling and business services provided 
in connection with the financial aid programs. 

6. Health Services. Provides health services to stu- 
dents and covers the cost of salaries of medical 
officers and nurses and related clerical and tech- 
nical personnel, as well as operating expenses 
and equipment. 

7. Housing. Supports personnel who provide hous- 
ing information and monitor housing services 
available to students. 

8. Student Services Administration. Covers 60 per- 
cent of the cost of the office of the vice president 
for student services, which has responsibility for 
the overall administration of student services. 

Associated Students Fee 

The law governing The California State University 
provides that a student body fee may be established 
by student referendum with the approval of two- 
thirds of those students voting. The Associated Stu- 
dents fee was established at California State Uni- 
versity, Fullerton by student referendum in Decem- 
ber 1969. The same fee can be abolished by a 


Registration Procedures 


similar two-thirds approval of students voting on a 
referendum called for by a petition signed by ten per- 
cent of the regularly enrolled students (Education 
Code, Section 89300). The level of the fee is set by 
the Chancellor who may approve a fee increase only 
following a referendum approved by a majority of the 
students. The Associated Students fee supports a 
variety of cultural and recreational programs, child 
care centers and special student support programs. 

Average Annual Costs and 
Sources of Funds Per Full-Time 
Equivalent Student 

The 19 campuses and the Chancellor’s Office of The 
California State University are financed primarily 
through funding provided by the taxpayers of Califor- 
nia. The total State appropriation to the CSU for 
1986-87, including capital outlay and employee 
compensation increases, is $1,600,409,000. The to- 
tal cost of education for CSU, however, is $1,649, 
146,316 which provides support for a projected 247, 
866 full-time equivalent (FTE)* students. 

The total cost of education In the CSU is defined as 
the expenditures for current operations, including 


payments made to the students in the form of finan- 
cial aid, and all fully reimbursed programs contained 
in State appropriations, but excluding capital outlay 
appropriations. The average cost of education is de- 
termined by dividing the total cost by the total FTES. 
The average cost is further differentiated into three 
categories: State support (the State appropriation, 
excluding capital outlay). Student Fee support, and 
support from other sources (including Federal 
funds). 

Thus, excluding costs which relate to capital outlay 
(i.e., building amortization), the average cost of edu- 
cation per FTE student Is $6,664. Of this amount, the 
average student fee support per FTE is $872. The 
calculation for this latter amount includes the 
amount paid by nonresident students. 

Averages do not fit all students alike or even any 
specific student. To arrive at an average figure that 
Is meaningful, the costs outlined above exclude 
“user fees” for living expenses, housing and parking 
as well as costs for extension and summer session 
work. Computations are based on full-time equiva- 
lent students, not individuals, and costs are prorated 
by system totals, not by campus. The average costs 
for a full-time equivalent student in the system are 
shown In the following chart: 


Source of Funds and Average Costs for 1986/87 CSU Budget 
(Projected Enrollment: 247,855 FTE) 


Total Cost of Education 

— State appropriation 

—Student Fee support 

— Support from other sources 


Amount 

A verage 

Cost Per 
Student (FTE) 

Percentage 

$1,649, 146, 316** 

$6,664 

100.0 

1,389,847,000** 

* 6,607 

84.3 

216,047,708 

872**** 

13.1 

43,261,607 

176 

2.6 


• For budgetary purposes, full-time equivalent (FTE) translates total head count into total academic student load equivalent to 15 units per term. Some stu- 

dents enroll for more than 15 units; some students enroll for fewer than 15 units. 

•*The total cost of education does not include the amount related to lottery and the capital investment of the CSU. The estimated replacement cost of all 
the system’s permanent facilities and equipment on the 19 campuses is currently valued at $5.3 billion, excluding the cost of land. 

•“‘This figure does not include the capital outlay appropriation of $1 10,562,000. 

• • "The average costs paid by a student include the State University Fee. Student Services Fee. Application Fee. Catalog Fee and nonresident tuition. Indi 

vidual students may pay less than $072 depending on whether they are part-time, full-time, resident or nonresident students. 


Registration Procedures 


Financial Aid 


Eligibility Requirements 

The following eligibility requirements apply to all fi- 
nancial aid programs except emergency loans and 
scholarships. 

In order to be eligible for financial assistance, appli- 
cants must demonstrate financial need. Financial 
need Is the difference between the reasonable and 
approved costs incurred by a student at CSUF and 
all of the resources available to the student, includ- 
ing contributions from parents, student (and spouse, 
if applicable), and any other aid the student may be 
eligible to receive. 

In addition to demonstrating financial need, all appli- 
cants must: 

1. be a national of the United States or be in the Unit- 
ed States for other than a temporary purpose and 
intend to become a permanent resident thereof, or 
be a permanent resident of the Trust Territory of 
the Pacific Islands (Holders of student visas are 
not eligible for aid); 

2. be accepted for enrollment as at least a half-time 
student, or In the case of a student already attend- 
ing the university, be enrolled and In good stand- 
ing as at least a half-time student; 

3. maintain satisfactory academic progress in the 
course of study according to the standards and 
practices of the university; 

4. not be In default on any loan made from a student 
loan fund and not owe a refund on grants previous- 
ly received for attendance at any college or uni- 
versity. 

6. submit a completed Student Aid Application for 
California (SAAC) or an Application for Federal 
Student Aid If the student wants only a Pell Grant, 
and all documentation requested by the Financial 
Aid Office; and 

6. be registered for the Draft with the Selective Ser- 
vice or certify that he /she is not required to regis- 
ter. 

Application Periods 

The deadlines listed below are approximate and are 
subject to annual changes. Consult with the Finan- 
cial Aid Office for current dates. 

Emergency Loans: Emergency loans are available 
from the first day of classes until 30 days before the 
end of the semester. (See director of financial aid for 
exceptions.) 

Scholarships: Applications for scholarships are due 
in the Financial Aid Office by mid-March. Students 
should contact the Financial Aid Office for an appli- 
cation in mid-February. 


Registration Procedures 


Bureau of Indian Affairs Grants: Consult with the BIA 
for exact dates. The application deadline is usually 
in mid-June. 

GSL and CLAS Loans: Apply after June 1 for the fall 
semester and academic year, and after November 
1 for the spring semester. 

Cal Grants and Graduate Fellowships: First-time ap- 
plicants must complete and mall the Student Aid Ap- 
plication for California (SAAC) and the SAAC Sup- 
plement form by February 1 1 for the following 
academic year. 

Pell Grant only (no other aid desired): Apply by May 
1 of the academic year for which aid is desired. 

All Other Aid — Priority is given to SAAC applications 
mailed between January 1 and March 1 for the next 
academic year. 

Rights and Responsibilities of 
Students Receiving Aid 

Rights: All students are entitled to and are guaran- 
teed fair and equitable treatment in the awarding of 
financial aid. In addition, there shall be no discrimi- 
nation of any kind. Appeals procedures exist for any- 
one who feels that a violation has occurred; consult 
with the director of financial aid for details. 

All students have the right to receive full and open 
information about various financial aid programs and 
the status of their eligibility. In addition, they have 
the right to know the selection and review process- 
es used in awarding financial aid. 

All students have the right to know the costs of at- 
tending the Institution, the refund policies in case of 
withdrawal from the university, the academic pro- 
grams offered by the university, the faculty and 
physical facilities of the institution, and data regard 
ing student retention at the university. 

Responsibilities: All financial aid recipients agree to 
carry and complete a specific number of units each 
semester, report graduation or withdrawal from the 
university and to notify the Financial Aid Office of 
any changes in their financial or marital status, or 
unit load. 

Recipients of financial aid must use the funds only 
to meet education costs. Any other use of the funds 
is prohibited by law. 

Students who are receiving financial aid must main- 
tain satisfactory academic progress. See the sec- 
tion below for details. 

Satisfactory Academic 
Progress Standards 

The Higher Education Act, as amended, requires 
that a student maintain satisfactory academic prog- 
ress in the course of study (s)he is pursuing accord- 
ing to standards and practices set by each college 
and university. 


Students should be aware that these standards 
must be the same or stricter than the standards for 
a student enrolled in California State University, Ful- 
lerton in the same academic program who is not re- 
ceiving assistance under a Title IV program. 

Qualitative Standards (Measurement by 
Grades) 

All students. Including financial aid recipients, must 
maintain scholastic academic progress as outlined 
in the California State University, Fullerton catalog. 

Quantitative Standard (Measurement by 
Units Attempted, not Completed) 

Maximum Time Frame 

Each student is expected to complete his/her edu- 
cational objective, degree, or certificate according 
to the following schedule: 

Required for Degree 

Undergraduate: 

124 units (B.A.) 

124-134 depending 
upon major (B.S.) 

135 (B.S. Engrg) 

132 (B.M..B.F.A.) 

Postbaccalaureate: 

Depends upon dept. 

Graduate: 

30 or more depending 
upon program 

A student who cannot complete his/her objective 
within the maximum attempted units outlined above 
according to his/her degree standing will nof be eli- 
gible for any financial aid from any federal or state 
source. 

Successful Completion Requirement 

In order to maintain Satisfactory Academic Prog- 
ress, each student may attempt up to the maximum 
“units attempted ” as outlined above. At the end of 
each academic year, each student must have cumu- 
latively earned at least 80% of all units attempted 
(not completed) through that academic year regard- 
less of the student’s enrollment status (1 /2-time, 3/ 
4-tlme, or full-time). Continuing students who apply 
for financial aid for the first time must also have com- 
pleted at least 80% of all units attempted at Califor- 
nia State University, Fullerton in order to qualify for 
financial aid. 

Semester Grade Review 

Even though California State University, Fullerton 
will measure Satisfactory Academic Progress ac- 
cording to the number of units successfully complet- 
ed at the end of each academic year, federal finan- 
cial aid program regulations require each college 
and university to determine that a student is main- 
taining Satisfactory Academic Progress each pay- 
ment period and each time it certifies a Guaranteed 
Student Loan or California Loan to Assist Students. 
To meet this requirement, a student will have been 
certified as having made Satisfactory Academic 
Progress for payment purposes at the end of the fall 


Max. Attempted Units 


155 

155-168 depending 
upon major 
169 
165 


Dept. Req. - 80% 


38 


Registration Procedures 


semester if the student meets the “qualitative stan- 
dards” as outlined above. 

Determination of Units Completed 

The following grades will be counted in determining 
units successfully completed: A, B, C, D, CR (credit). 

SP (Satisfactory Progress) and RD (Report De- 
layed) will be temporarily considered as units com- 
pleted provided these designations are replaced 
with an acceptable final grade within one calendar 
year from the beginning date of the semester. If the 
final SP grade is not posted within one year, the stu- 
dent must submit a written appeal to the Financial 
Aid Office. If a Report is Delayed beyond one year, 
the student must submit to the Financial Aid Office 
a statement from the faculty member explaining the 
cause for the extended delay. 

The following grades will count as units attempted 
but will not count as units completed: F, NC (No 
Credit), W (Withdrawal), AU (Audit), I (Incomplete), 
U (Unofficial Withdrawal). 

If a grade is changed after the official posting for a 
semester, it is the student’s responsibility to bring 
verification of the change to the Financial Aid Office. 

Repeated Courses: A repeated course in which the 
student initially received a D or F will not count as 
units attempted or completed since an improved 
grade will only result in a grade change and not addi- 
tional unit credit. A repeated course in which a stu- 
dent withdrew or received an unauthorized incom- 
plete will count as units attempted and completed. 

Remedial Courses will be considered as units com- 
pleted for purposes of reviewing a student’s Satis- 
factory Academic Progress only when the university 
or department requires a student to take a remedial 
course(s) as part of his/her program whether or not 
the student receives unit credit towards graduation. 

Failure to Maintain Satisfactory Academic 
Progress 

A student who fails to maintain the qualitative or 
quantitative measurement standards will be defined 
as having failed to maintain Satisfactory Academic 
Progress and will be ineligible to receive any federal 
or state financial aid. 

Reinstatement of Financial Aid Eligibility 

Once a student raises his/her completion rate to 
80% or more. (s)he may apply for reinstatement of 
financial aid eligibility. 

Appeal 

Students who fail to meet the Satisfactory Academic 
Progress standards and who are disqualified from fi- 
nancial aid eligibility may appeal their disqualifica- 
tion to the Director of Financial Aid by completing 
and submitting a written appeal within 10 days of re- 
ceipt of the “Notification of Financial Aid Disqualifi- 
cation.” No appeal will be approved unless the miti- 
gating circumstance is unique and compelling, e.g., 
documented injury which prevented the student from 
attending classes, parental or spousal death, ex- 
tended illness, etc. 


The “Financial Aid Petition” is available in the Finan- 
cial Aid Office. The Director of Financial Aid will re- 
ply to the student’s appeal In writing within 10 days 
of its receipt in the Financial Aid Office. 

Eligibility for Multiple Degrees 

Students will be eligible to receive financial aid to- 
wards the completion of their first bachelor’s degree 
and towards their first graduate degree. Funding for 
a second bachelor’s or master’s degree will not be 
provided. 

Refund Policy 

As stated in the appropriate CSUF Class Schedule, 
a student may be entitled to a refund of fees If he/ 
she withdraws from the University or drops units. If 
a student received financial aid. fee refunds will be 
credited partially or completely to various financial 
aid accounts according to the formulas below: 

Since financial aid is awarded to help meet educa- 
tional costs, financial aid is considered to be used 
first for direct educational costs (fees). Therefore, 
if a student withdraws and is scheduled to receive 
a refund of fees, all or part of this refund will be used 
to reimburse the financial aid program(s) from which 
the student received funds. 

If a student received financial aid in excess of direct 
fees, a repayment of additional financial aid funds 
may be required. 

I. Refund to be returned to Title IV programs: 

A = Amount of fee refunded 

B = Total Title IV aid (excluding CWS) for 
semester Total aid awarded (excluding 
CWS) for semester. 

A X B == Amount of refund to Title IV 

II. Distribution order of Title IV portion of refund 
among Title IV programs: 

1. NDSL (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

2. SEOG(not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

3. PELL (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

4. GSL (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 
6. CLAS (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

III. When the GSL Is the only Title IV aid received 
(excluding CWS) the following distribution for- 
mula will be used. 

Refund to GSL = Amount of GSL Estimated 
cost of attendance for 
loan period 

IV. Any remaining refund amount not credited to 
Title IV programs as per the above formulas 
will be distributed as follows: 

1. EOPG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

2. SUG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

3. Student (remaining amount of refund) 


Registration Procedures 


Repayment Policy 

Since financial aid is awarded to help meet educa- 
tional costs, financial aid is considered to be used 
first for direct educational costs (fees). Therefore, 
If a student withdraws and Is scheduled to receive 
a refund of fees, all or part of this refund will be used 
to reimburse the financial aid program(s) from which 
the student received funds. 

If a student received financial aid in excess of direct 
fees, a repayment of additional financial aid funds 
may be required. 

Students who receive financial aid and later termi- 
nate their enrollment by dropping out or by withdraw- 
ing and who received cash disbursements of Title IV 
financial aid for payment of their non-institutlonal 
costs require institutional review to determine if 
there has been an overpayment, and therefore, if a 
repayment is required. Repayment designates the 
amount that a student must repay of the funds he/ 
she received In cash that could not have reasonably 
been spent for non-institutional costs during the por- 
tion of the term that the student was enrolled. 

Total Title IV funds disbursed in cash to the student 
minus GSL, CLAS, CWS minus non-lnstitutional 
costs paid by the student from the disbursement for 
the portion of the payment period during which the 
student was enrolled (room, board, books, supplies, 
transportation, miscellaneous expenses) = 
overpayment. 

Overpayment X Total amount of Title IV (minus 
CWS, GSL, CLAS) -f Total amount 
of aid (minus CWS, GSL, CLAS) = 
Title IV Repayment 

Order of distribution for repayment: NDSL, SEOG 
then Pell. 



Registration Procedures 


University 

Regulations 

Each student is responsible for meeting the require- 
ments printed in the university catalog and all pub- 
lished regulations of the university. 

The university establishes certain academic 
policies and requirements which must be met before 
a degree is granted. These include major and unit 
requirements and prerequisites. While advisers, di- 
rectors, deans and faculty will provide a student with 
information and advice, responsibility for meeting 
these requirements rests with the student. Since 
failure to satisfy these requirements may result In 
the degree being withheld, it is important for each 
student to become thoroughly acquainted with all 
regulations. The catalog and the semester class 
schedule, available in the Titan Bookstore, are the 
best sources of information on current policy and 
regulations. 

The student also has the responsibility for securing 
the consent of the instructor before enrolling in a 
course with prerequisites that the student has not 
completed. 

To ensure receipt of timely information and accurate 
grade reports from the university, each student must 
keep the Office of Admissions and Records Informed 
of changes in personal data, including changes In 
name, address and program of study. Each student 
is mailed a student data verification each semester 
during the third week of classes to ensure the accu- 
racy of demographic and official enrollment data for 
that term; enrollment corrections must be reported 
to the registrar by the 20th day of classes, using the 
Change of Program form. Other corrections should 
be reported on the form and returned to the Office 
of Admissions and Records. 



89 


Enrollment Regulations 


Unit of Credit 

Each semester unit represents three hours of univer- 
sity work per week for one semester. Courses are 
of three types: 

( 1 ) Lecture — one hour in class plus two hours of 
study. 

(2) Activity — two hours of class plus one hour of 
study. 

(3) Laboratory — three hours In class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these 
types. All required courses carry unit credit. 


Classification in the University 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29 
semester units of work are classified as freshmen, 
30-59 semester units as sophomores. 60-89 semes- 
ter units as juniors, and 90 or more as seniors. 

Maximum Number of Units 

Undergraduate students’ requests to enroll for more 
than 19 units must be approved by the student’s ad- 
visor and the department chair of the major. If such 
requests are denied, appeals may be made to the 
appropriate school dean. (Undeclared majors must 
receive the approval of the director of academic ad- 
visement.) The minimum full-time program is 12 units. 


A student whose academic record justifies a study 
list in excess of the normal may request to be al- 
lowed to enroll for extra units. Request forms may be 
obtained from the Office of Admissions and Re- 
cords. In general, only students with superior aca- 
demic records are allowed to enroll for more than 
the maximum. In addition, the need to enroll for the 
extra study must be established. Factors such as 
time spent in employment or commuting, the nature 
of the academic program, extracurricular activities 
and the student’s health should be considered in 
planning a study program. Students who are em- 
ployed or have outside responsibilities are advised 
to reduce their program of study. 


The minimum and maximum units of a full-time pro- 
gram of study for graduate students are defined in 
the “Graduate Regulations’’ section of this catalog. 


Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primari- 
ly for graduate students. Undergraduate students 
may be permitted to enroll in a graduate level course 
if: 

a. they have reached senior status (completed a 
minimum of 90 semester units) 

b. have the academic preparation and prerequisites 
required for entry into the course 

c. gain the consent of the instructor. 

Students wishing to use 500-level coursework taken 
during their undergraduate degree toward a mas- 
ter’s degree should read the section on Postgradu- 
ate Credit. 

Class Attendance 

While class attendance is not recorded officially by 
the university, regular attendance in class Is often 
essential to success in a course. The policy on class 
attendance Is within the discretion of the individual 
faculty member and shall be announced by the facul- 
ty member at the first class meeting of the semester. 

Initial Class Meeting 

It Is especially important that students attend the 
first meeting of a class. Students absent from the 
first meeting and who fail to notify the instructor or 
departmental office no later than 24 hours after the 
class meeting may be denied admission to the 
class. Instructors may deny admission to absentees 
to admit persons on waiting lists. 

Instructor-Initiated Drops 

A student who registers for a class and whose name 
appears on the first-day-of-class list should attend 
all class meetings in the first week. If the student is 
absent without notifying the Instructor or defSartmen- 
tal office within 24 hours after any meeting missed 
during that week, the student may then be dropped 
administratively from the class by the instructor; 
however, ultimately it is the student’s responsibility 
to ensure that he /she has been dropped from the 
class and if not, to follow the appropriate proce- 
dures for withdrawing from the class. An instructor 
may also administratively drop a student who does 
not meet prerequisites for the course. These admin- 
istrative withdrawals shall be without penalty and 
must be filed by the instructor with the registrar no 
later than the 1 1th day of instruction. 


University Regulations 


Grading Policies 



Grading System 

Every student of the university will have all course 
work evaluated and reported by the faculty using 
letter grades or administrative symbols. 

The university uses a combination of traditional and 
nontraditional grading options as follows: 

Traditional 

Option 1. Letter grades, defined as: 

A — outstanding performance 
B — above average performance 
C — average performance 
D — below average performance, though 
passing 
F — failure 

Nontraditional 

Option 2. OR (Credit) for satisfactory (equivalent to 
C or better In undergraduate courses; B or better in 
graduate courses) and NC (No Credit) for less than 
satisfactory work. 

When, because of circumstances, a student does 
not complete a particular course, or withdraws, cer- 
tain administrative symbols may be assigned by the 
faculty. Grades and symbols are listed in the chart 
on the following page together with grade-point val- 
ues. The chart also illustrates the academic book- 
keeping involved for all grades and symbols used. 

Selection of Grading Option 

Selection of a grading option, with certain excep- 
tions, is the responsibility of the student. Graduate 
students must use Option 1 for courses that are on 
study plans leading to master's degrees. Under- 
graduates must use Option 1 for major, minor and 
general education requirements. 

Exceptions are those courses designated by the 
faculty to be graded solely on an Option 2 basis. 

These courses will be so designated in the class 
schedule (and shall not be changed by the faculty 
after publication of the class schedule) for each 
semester and may be included in major, core or spe- 
cial program requirements. 

Students shall inform the registrar up to the end of 
the third week of classes regarding the selection of 
grading options in designated courses. If a student 
does not do so. Option 1 will be used. 

The faculty shall grade all students using the tradi- 
tional A, B, C, D or F grades except in Credit/No 
Credit courses, and the registrar shall make the 
necessary changes from A, B, C, D or F, converting 
A. B, C to Credit, and D and F to No Credit in under- 
graduate courses and A, B to Credit, and C, D and 
F to No Credit in graduate courses. In those courses 
offered only on a Credit /No Credit basis, the instruc- 


University Regulations 


tor shall assign grades of CR or NC or appropriate 
administrative symbols. 

Nontraditional Grade Option 

A nontraditional grading option is available to under 
graduate students, nonobjective graduate students 
and to classified graduate students for courses not 
included in the approved study plan. Any student 
attempting a course using the nontraditional grading 
option must meet the prerequisites for that course. 
Each student shall be permitted to select courses in 
subjects outside of the major, minor and general 
education requirements for enrollment on a Credit/ 
No Credit basis (grading Option 2). The phrase 
“major requirements” shall be taken to include core 
plus concentration (or option) requirements in de- 
partments using such terms, and professional 
course requirements in teacher education curricula. 
A student in any one term may take one course under 
Option 2. In addition, he or she may enroll in a 
required course offered only under Option 2; how 
ever, a maximum of 36 units of Credit /No Credit 
courses. Including those transferred from other insti- 
tutions, may be counted toward the baccalaureate. 

Under Option 2 the term “Credit” signifies that the 
student’s academic performance was such that he 
or she was awarded full credit in undergraduate 
courses with a quality level of achievement equiva- 
lent to a C grade or better. In all graduate level and 
professional education courses Cred/f signifies aca 
demic performance equivalent to B or A grades. No 
Credit signifies that the student attempted the 
course but that the performance did not warrant 
credit toward the objective. 


Grade or 



Grade 


Symbol 

Units 

Units 

Point 

Full 

Option 1 Attempted 

Earned 

Value 

Credit 

A 

Yes 

Yes 

4 

Yes 

B 

Yes 

Yes 

3 

Yes 

C 

Yes 

Yes 

2 

Yes 

D 

Yes 

Yes 

1 

No 

F 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

Option 2 





CR 


Yes 

None 

Yes 

NC 

* 

No 

None 

No 

Administrative Symbols 





1 (Incomplete 





authorized) 

t 

No 



U (Unauthorized 





incomplete) 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

W (Withdrawal) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

WF (Withdrawal) 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

AU (Audit) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

SP (Satisfactory 





progress) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

RD (Report delayed) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

TOTALS 

Used 

Counted 

Used 



In 

in 

Toward 



GPA 

Objective 

GPA 



'Credit /No Credit course units are not included in GPA computations, 
tit not completed within one semester the I will be changed to an F (or NC). 


Ordinarily, a student shall be limited to one nonmajor 
course per term using this option, exclusive of 
courses offered only on a Credit /No Credit basis. 

When an undergraduate student changes his or her 
major field of study to one where he or she has 
completed courses with CR grades, such lower divi- 
sion courses shall be included in major require- 
ments. Upper division courses may be included at 
the option of the department upon petition by the 
student. 


ADVISORY CAUTION: Undergraduate students 
who plan to pursue graduate or professional 
studies later are advised to be selective in opt- 
ing for courses on a credit /no credit basis. As 
a general rule (advisory only), course work that 
is preparatory or prerequisite to advanced 
specialized study should be completed and 
evaluated on a letter grade basis and not Cred- 
it /No Credit. 


Administrative Symbols 

Incomplete Authorized (!) 

The symbol I signifies that a portion of required 
course work has not been completed and evaluated 
in the prescribed time period owing to unforeseen 
but fully justified reasons and that there Is still a 
possibility of earning credit. It is the responsibility of 
the student to bring pertinent information to the in- 
structor and to reach agreement on the means by 
which the remaining course requirements will be sa- 
tisfied. A final grade is assigned when the work 
agreed upon has been completed and evaluated. 

An Incomplete must be made up during the semester 
immediately following the end of the term in which it 
was assigned. This limitation prevails whether or not 
the student maintains continuous enrollment. Failure 
to complete the assigned work will result in an In- 
complete being changed to an F or an NC. 

A grade of Incomplete may be given only when, in the 
opinion of the Instructor, a student cannot complete 
a course during the semester of enrollment for rea- 
sons beyond the student’s control. Such reasons 
are assumed to include: illness of the student or of 
members of the student’s immediate family, extraor- 
dinary financial problems, loss of outside position 
and other exigencies. In assigning a grade of I, the 
instructor shall file with the department for future 
reference and student access a Statement of 
Requirements for Completion of Course Work. The 
requirements shall not include retaking the course. 
The Instructor will also designate a time limit (up to 
one semester) for completing requirements. Upon 
request, a copy of the document will be furnished to 
the student. The student should review this state- 
ment at the earliest opportunity. 

The statement of requirements will include an indica- 
tion of the quality of the student’s work to date. This 
not only provides an interim evaluation for the 


University Regulations 


student but assists the department chair in assign- 
ing a final grade in those instances where the in- 
structor is no longer available. 

When the specific requirements are completed, the 
instructor will report a change of grade. The respon- 
sibility for changing the incomplete grade rests with 
the instructor. 

Withdrawal (W, WF) 

Students may withdraw from class during the first 1 1 
days of Instruction without record of enrollment. Af- 
ter the first 1 1 days of classes, students should 
complete all courses in which they are enrolled. 

The university authorizes withdrawal after the 1 1th 
day of instruction and prior to the last three weeks 
of Instruction only with the approval of the Instructor 
and the department chair or school dean. All 
requests for permission to withdraw and all ap- 
provals shall be made in writing on the Change of 
Program form and shall be filed at the Office of Ad- 
missions and Records by students or their proxies. 

The student withdrawing from class after the 20th 
day of instruction shall receive a grading symbol of 
W or WF. The symbol W signifies that the student 
dropped the course after the 20th day of instruction 
and that the quality of performance at the time of 
withdrawal was C or better. The symbol WFsignifies 
that the student dropped the course after the 20th 
day of Instruction and that the quality of performance 
at the time of withdrawal was below average. W’s 
are not counted in grade-point average calculations; 
WF’s are counted In the same way as F grades. 
When signing the Change of Program form, the in- 
structor shall indicate to the student whether W or 
WF will be given. 

Students may not withdraw during the final three 
weeks of instruction except in cases, appropriately 
documented, such as accident or serious Illness, 
where the assignment of an Incomplete is not prac- 
ticable. Ordinarily, withdrawals of this nature will in- 
volve withdrawal from all classes except that Credit 
or Incomplete Authorized (I) may be assigned for 
courses in which students have completed sufficient 
work to permit an evaluation to be made. Petitions 
for permission to withdraw from all classes under 
these circumstances, with authorizations as de- 
scribed above, shall be submitted with Change of 
Program forms by the students (or their proxies) to 
the registrar. 

Unauthorized Incomplete (U) 

The symbol U indicates that an enrolled student did 
not withdraw from the course but failed to complete 
course requirements. It Is used when, in the opinion 
of the instructor, completed assignments or course 
activities or both were insufficient to make normal 
evaluation of academic performance possible. For 
purposes of grade-point average computations this 
symbol is equivalent to an F. 

A student may petition for a retroactive withdrawal 
provided the student can document both the serious 


and compelling reason or circumstances that 
required the withdrawal and the date of such with- 
drawal. Such a petition must be filed within 30 days 
after the first class day of the following semester. 

Petitions for retroactive withdrawal may be submit- 
ted for withdrawal in individual courses. 


ADVISORY NOTE: Students who unofficially 
withdraw and who are receiving financial aid or 
benefits which are dependent on completion of 
specified course units are advised that they 
may have such benefits suspended and may be 
subject to repayment of allowances received 
after date of unofficial withdrawal. 


Audit (AU) 

The symbol AU is used by the registrar In those 
instances where a student has enrolled in a course 
either for Information or other purposes not related 
to the student’s formal academic objective. Enroll- 
ment as an auditor is subject to the permission of the 
instructor, provided that enrollment in any course as 
an auditor shall be permitted only after students oth- 
erwise eligible to enroll in the course on a credit 
basis have had an opportunity to do so. Auditors are 
subject to the same fees as credit students and 
regular class attendance is expected. Once enrolled 
as an auditor, a student may not change to credit 
status unless such a change is requested prior to 
the last day to add classes. A student who is en- 
rolled for credit may not change to audit after the 
third week of Instruction. An auditor Is not permitted 
to take examinations in the course; therefore, there 
is no basis for evaluation nor a formal grade report. 

Satisfactory Progress (SP) 

The SP symbol is used in connection with thesis, 
project or similar courses that extend beyond one 
academic term. It Indicates that work is in progress, 
and has been evaluated and found to be satisfactory 
to date, but that assignment of a final grade must 
await completion of additional course work. Cumula- 
tive enrollment in units attempted may not exceed 
the total number applicable to the student’s educa- 
tional objective. Work is to be completed within a 
stipulated period which may not exceed one year 
except for graduate degree theses or projects for 
which the time may be longer, but may not exceed 
the overall limit for completion of all master’s degree 
requirements. Any extension of time must receive 
prior authorization by the dean of the school (or the 
dean’s designee) in which the course is offered. 

Report Delayed (RD) 

The RD symbol is used where a delay in the report- 
ing of a final grade is due to circumstances beyond 
the control of the student. The symbol is assigned 
by the registrar and will be replaced as soon as 
possible. An RD shall not be included in calculation 
of a grade-point average. 


University Regulations 



Student Records 

Grade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned in classes is 
sent to each student at the end of each semester. 
Many students also leave self-addressed post cards 
for Instructors of specific courses to send them ear- 
lier reports. 

Class Grade-Point Averages 

Beginning with the fall semester 1978, information is 
included on student grade reports and permanent 
academic records that is Intended to depict the level 
of achievement of students In relation to other 
students In a particular class. The Information is dis- 
played In parentheses before each course grade. 
The first set of figures indicates the number of 
students officially completing the course and the 
second set is the class grade-point average. In mak- 
ing the computations, marks of W, I, CR, NC, and SP 
are excluded. This same information is displayed for 
summer session classes, but not for extension or 
intersession classes sponsored by the Office of Ex- 
tended Education. 

Examinations 

Final examinations, if required by the instructor, will 
be given at times scheduled by the university. Once 
established, the final examination schedule may not 
be changed unless approved by the dean of the 
school. No makeup final examination will be given 
except for reason of illness or other verified emer- 
gencies. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit toward the bacca- 
laureate and to meet curriculum requirements in cer- 
tain designated courses by the satisfactory comple- 
tion of challenge examinations in the courses. The 
examinations are to be comprehensive and adminis- 
tered by the sponsoring departments. Well in ad- 
vance of the semester In which a challenge examin- 
ation Is to be administered, the student, using the 
appropriate university form, will secure written ap- 
proval of his or her major advisor and the chair of the 
department in which the course is offered. In gener- 
al, prior work or academic experience will be 
required. 

Courses to be offered as challenge examinations 
will be determined by the academic departments. 
Matriculated students may either enroll In these 
courses during registration or add them during the 
first three weeks of the semester. The examination 
must be administered not later than the end of the 
third week of instruction. 

Upon successful completion of the examination, the 
instructor will report the grade of CR. Students who 
fail the challenge examination may elect to continue 
the course for credit or may officially withdraw from 
the course through the normal class withdrawal 
procedure. The challenge examination for any 
course may be administered only once. 


A maximum of 30 credits can be earned by challenge 
examination. Including those earned by advanced 
placement. Credit by examination may not be used 
to fulfill the minimum residence requirements. 

Grade-Point Averages 

The numerical grade-point values in the grading 
system chart are intended to give an exact determi- 
nation of a student’s scholastic standing. To com- 
pute the grade-point average for course work at Ful- 
lerton. the grade-point value of each grade, with the 
exception noted in the “Repetition of Courses” sec- 
tion. is multiplied first by the unit value of each 
course to obtain a total of all grade points earned. 
The total Is then divided by the total units attempted 
in all courses in which grades of A, B, C, D, F, U and 
WF were received. The resulting figure is the grade- 
point average. 

Repetition of Courses 

Undergraduate students may repeat courses at Cali- 
fornia State University, Fullerton for which D or fail- 
ing grades were earned either at Cal State Fullerton 
or at other institutions; in repeating such courses, 
the traditional grading system shall be used. In com- 
puting the grade-point average of a student who 
repeats courses In which he or she received D or 
failing grades, only the most recently earned grades 
and grade points shall be used for the first 16 units 
repeated. Nevertheless, the original grade on the 
academic record shall not be changed or eradi- 
cated. 

In exercising this option, an undergraduate student 
must repeat the course at Cal State Fullerton and 
may request application of this policy when a course 
has been repeated. This should be accomplished 
using the appropriate form. Immediately following 
the term in which the course has been completed, 
so that the student’s grade-point average can be 
revised. In the absence of student requests, courses 
successfully repeated are routinely credited by the 
Office of Admissions and Records during degree 
requirement reviews at the time of graduation. 

This policy may also be applied to courses In which 
U or WF grades were assigned, as a means of 
eliminating such marks from grade-point average 
computations. 

In the case of any repetition beyond the 16-unit limit 
or in courses for which a C or better grade was 
awarded, both grades are considered in computing 
grade-point averages. Successful repetition of a 
course originally passed carries no additional unit 
credit toward a degree or credential except for cer- 
tain courses such as independent study, practicum, 
or other courses specified In this catalog as “may 
be repeated for credit.” 

Students transferring from other colleges where 
courses were taken and repeated may be eligible for 
consideration under this policy. In general, the policy 
of the college where the course was repeated shall 
be followed; however, units for the courses taken 
and repeated at the transfer institution are included 
in the 16-unit limitation. 


University Regulations 


Grade Changes 

The university recognizes the long-standing prerog- 
atives of faculty to set standards of performance 
and to apply them to Individual students. The univer- 
sity will seek to correct injustices to students but at 
the same time believes that the instructor’s judg- 
ment at the time the original grade is assigned is 
better than a later reconsideration of an Individual 
case. Equity to all students Is of fundamental con- 
cern. The following policies apply to changes of 
grades except for changes of Incomplete Authorized 
and Unauthorized Incomplete symbols. 

I.ln general, all course grades are final when filed 
by the instructor in the end-of-term course grade 
report. Each student is notified by mail of the 
grades earned during the term, and these grades 
become a part of the official record. 

2. A change of grade may occur only in cases of 
clerical error, administrative error, or where the 
Instructor reevaluates the original course assign- 
ments of a student and discovers an error In the 
original evaluation. A clerical error is an error 
made by the instructor or an assistant in calculat- 
ing or recording the grade. A change of grade 
shall not occur as a consequence of the accept- 
ance of additional work or reexamination beyond 
the specified course requirements. 

3. A request for a change of grade shall be initiated 
by the student affected and shall be directed to 
the instructor within 60 calendar days of the first 
day of classes of the regular semester following 
the award of the original grade. If the instructor 
determines that there is a valid basis for the 
change, a Change of Grade form shall be used to 
notify the Office of Admissions and Records. 
These forms are available In department offices. 
If the Instructor determines that there is not a 
valid basis for the change, and denies the 
student’s request, the instructor’s decision is fin- 
al. The student may file a petition with the Aca- 
demic Appeals Board on the basis of capricious 
or prejudicial treatment by the instructor. 

4. The Change of Grade form completed and signed 
by the instructor, noting the basis for the change, 
shall not be accepted by the registrar unless ap- 
proved separately by the department chair and 
school dean. 

5. If a request for change of grade is initiated after 
60 calendar days into the following semester. It 
will be approved only in extraordinary circum- 
stances. An explanation of such circumstances 
must accompany the request and must be ap- 
proved separately by the instructor, department 
chair, and the dean before acceptance by the 
registrar. 

Academic Dishonesty 

Academic dishonesty (usually cheating or plagiar- 
ism) almost always involves an attempt by a student 
to show possession of a level of knowledge or skill 
which he or she does not possess. 


Cheating is defined as the act of obtaining or at- 
tempting to obtain credit for work by the use of any 
dishonest, deceptive or fraudulent means. Examples 
of cheating Include, but are not limited to: using 
notes or aids or the help of other students on tests 
and examinations in ways other than those express- 
ly permitted by the instructor, plagiarism as defined 
below and tampering with the grading procedures. 

Plagiarism is defined as the act of taking the 
specific substance of another and offering it as 
one’s own without giving credit to the source. When 
sources are used, acknowledgment of the original 
author or source must be made following standard 
scholarly practice. 

The Initial responsibility for detecting and dealing 
with academic dishonesty lies with the Instructor 
concerned. An instructor who believes that an act of 
academic dishonesty has occurred Is obligated to 
discuss the matter with the student involved. The 
instructor should possess reasonable evidence, 
such as documents or personal observation. How- 
ever, if circumstances prevent consultation with the 
student, the Instructor may take whatever action, 
subject to student appeal, the instructor deems ap- 
propriate. 

An instructor who is convinced by the evidence that 
a student is guilty of academic dishonesty shall: 

1. Assign an appropriate academic penalty. This 
may range from an oral reprimand to an F in the 
course. To the extent that the faculty member 
considers the academic dishonesty to manifest 
the student’s lack of scholarship and to reflect on 
the student’s academic performance and aca- 
demic integrity In a course, the student’s grade 
should be adversely affected. Suggested guide- 
lines for appropriate actions are an oral reprimand 
in cases where there is reasonable doubt that 
the student knew that his or her action constituted 
academic dishonesty; an F on the particular 
paper, project or examination where the act of 
dishonesty was unpremeditated, or where there 
were significant mitigating circumstances, or an F 
in the course where the dishonesty was premedi- 
tated or planned. 

2. Report to the student involved, to the department 
chair, and to the vice president for student ser- 
vices the alleged incident of academic dishones- 
ty, including relevant documentation, and make 
recommendations for action that he or she deems 
appropriate. 

The vice president for student services shall main- 
tain an academic dishonesty file of all cases of aca- 
demic dishonesty with the appropriate documenta- 
tion. Students shall be informed when their names 
are inserted into the file and provided with copies of 
any appeals or disciplinary procedures in which they 
may become involved. The vice president for student 
services or his or her designees may initiate discipli- 
nary proceedings under Title 5, California Adminis- 
trative Code, Section 41301, and Chancellor’s 
Executive Order 148; when two or more incidents 
Involving the same student occur, he or she shall do 
so. Opportunities for appeal regarding sanctions re- 


University Regulations 


suiting from disciplinary proceedings are provided 
by Executive Order 148. 

A student may appeal any action taken on a charge 
of academic dishonesty under the University Policy 
Statement 300.030, “Academic Appeals.” If the 
Academic Appeals Board decides that a student 
is innocent of academic dishonesty, then no entry 
shall be made in the academic dishonesty file. 

If the Academic Appeals Board decides either that 
a student is innocent of academic dishonesty, or 
that a faculty member has acted arbitrarily or capri- 
ciously towards a student, it shall instruct the faculty 
member to meet with his or her department chair 
and, if appropriate, the dean of the school for the 
purpose of reassessing the student’s performance. 
If the faculty member refuses to do so, the matter 
shall be referred to an ad hoc committee, to be 
established by the department, which shall have ul- 
timate authority to act in the case. 

Academic Renewal 

Under certain circumstances, the university may dis- 
regard up to two semesters or three quarters of 
previous undergraduate course work taken at any 
college or university from all considerations associ- 
ated with requirements for the baccalaureate. These 
circumstances are: 

1. that the student has requested the action formally 
and has presented evidence that work completed 
in the terms under consideration is substandard 
and not representative of present scholastic abili- 
ty and level of performance; and 

2. that the level of performance represented by the 
terms under consideration was due to extenuating 
circumstances; and 

3. that there Is every evidence that the student 
would find it necessary to complete additional 
terms to qualify for the baccalaureate if the 
request were not approved. 


Final determination that one or more terms shall be 
disregarded in the determination of eligibility for 
graduation shall be based upon a careful review of 
evidence by the Review Committee for Academic 
Renewal and shall be made only when: 

1. five years have elapsed since the most recent 
work to be disregarded was completed; and 

2. the student has completed at Fullerton, since the 
most recent work to be disregarded was com- 
pleted, 15 semester units with at least a 3.0 
grade-point average, or 30 semester units with at 
least a 2.5 GPA, or 45 semester units with at least 
a 2.0 GPA. Work completed at another institution 
cannot be used to satisfy this requirement. 

When such action is taken, the student’s permanent 
academic record shall be annotated so that it is 
readily evident to all users of the record that no work 
taken during the disregarded terms, even if satisfac- 
tory, may apply toward bacalaureate requirements. 
All work must remain legible on the record ensuring 
a true and complete academic history. 

This policy is not Intended to merely allow students 
a means by which they may improve their overall 
grade-point averages. 

Transcripts 

Official transcripts of courses taken at the university 
are issued only with the written permission of the 
student concerned. Partial transcripts are not is- 
sued. A fee of $4 for each transcript must be 
received before the transcript can be released. 

Normally, transcripts are available within three 
working days, except at the end of the semester 
when the student should allow about 10 days after 
the last day of the semester. 

Transcripts from other institutions, which have been 
presented for admission or evaluation, become a 
part of the student’s permanent academic file and 
are not returned or copied for distribution. Students 
desiring transcripts covering work attempted else- 
where should request them from the institutions con- 
cerned. 


University Regulations 


Continuous Residency 

Regulations 



Good Standing 

Good standing indicates that a student is eligible to 
continue and is free from financial obligation to the 
university. A student under academic disqualifica- 
tion, disciplinary suspension or disciplinary expul- 
sion Is not eligible to receive a statement of good 
standing on transcripts issued by the university or on 
other documents. 

Choice of Requirements 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in 
regular sessions and continuing in the same curricu- 
lum at any campus of the California community col- 
leges or in any combination of California community 
colleges and campuses of The California State 
University may, for purposes of meeting graduation 
requirements, elect to meet the graduation require- 
ments of such campuses from which he or she will 
graduate In effect either at the time of entering the 
curriculum or at the time of graduation therefrom, 
except that substitutions for discontinued courses 
may be authorized or required by the proper univer- 
sity authorities. 

Stop-Out Policy 

With certain exceptions, undergraduate students 
and postbaccalaureate unclassified students may 
be absent for one semester and maintain their con- 
tinuing student status. This includes election of cur- 
riculum requirements for graduation and eligibility to 
register for the next semester. The exceptions are 
as follows: 

Disqualified Students — Students who are disqual- 
ified at the end of a semester and have not been 
reinstated will not receive registration mater- 
ials; they must apply for readmission, and if ad- 
mitted, may be subject to new curriculum 
requirements. 

Foreign-Visa Students — Students with foreign vi- 
sas are required to maintain continuous enroll- 
ment. The stop-out policy is not applicable. 

Students absent for more than one semester, as well 
as those who attend another institution while absent 
for any period, must apply for readmission should 
they wish to return to Fullerton. In some cases, how- 
ever, election of catalog requirements will not be 
jeopardized for certain students. Students should 
consult an evaluator in the Office of Admissions & 
Records. 


University Regulations 



A 



Leave of Absence 

An undergraduate student may petition for a leave of 
absence and, if approved, may upon return continue 
under the curriculum requirements that applied to 
the enrollment prior to the absence. A leave of ab- 
sence may be granted for a maximum of one year. 
Illness is the only routinely approved reason for a 
leave of absence. Students should realize that an 
approved leave of absence does not reserve a place 
for them in the university; they must reapply. The 
leave of absence policy for conditionally classified 
and classified graduate students is defined in the 
“Graduate Regulations” section of this catalog. 


Withdrawal from the University 

A student who wishes to withdraw from the universi- 
ty during a semester must complete a Change of 
Program form and obtain the required approvals. 
See the section on refund of fees for possible 
refunds. No student may withdraw after the date 
shown on the university calendar as the last day of 
instruction. Complete withdrawal from the university 
Is accomplished by following the procedures for 
dropping classes. 

Retention, Probation and 
Disqualification 

For purposes of determining a student’s ability to 
remain in the university both quality of performance 
and progress towards the educational objective will 
be considered. 


Academic Probation 

An undergraduate student shall be placed on aca- 
demic probation if in any semester the cumulative 
grade-point average or the grade-point average at 
Fullerton falls below 2.0 (grade of C on a four-point 
scale). The student shall be advised of probation 
status promptly and, except in unusual instances, 
before the start of the next consecutive enrollment 
period. 

An undergraduate student shall be removed from 
academic probation and restored to clear standing 
upon achieving a cumulative grade-point average of 
2.0 in all academic work attempted. In all such work 
attempted at Fullerton, and is making satisfactory 
progress towards his or her educational objective. 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclas- 
sified or undeclared status but not second baccalau- 
reate degree students) shall be subject to academic 
probation if after completing 12 or more units his or 
her postbaccalaureate cumulative grade-point aver- 
age for units attempted at California State Universi- 
ty, Fullerton falls below a 2.50 average. The GPA will 
determine whether a student is subject to probation 
only after the student has completed 12 semester 
units. 


A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree 
program in either conditionally classified or classi- 
fied standing shall be subject to academic probation 
if he or she fails to maintain a cumulative grade-point 
average of at least 3.0 (grade of B on a four-point 
scale) in all units attempted. 

Academic Disqualification 

An undergraduate student on academic probation 
shall be subject to academic disqualification if: 

1 . as a lower-division student (fewer than 60 semes- 
ter units of college work completed) he or she 
falls 15 or more grade points below a 2.0 average 
on all college units attempted or in all units at- 
tempted at this institution; or 

2. as a junior (60 to 89 1 /2 semester units of college 
work completed) he or she falls nine or more 
grade points below a 2.0 average on all college 
units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution; or 

3. as a senior (90 or more semester units of college 
work completed) he or she falls six or more grade 
points below a 2.0 average on all college units 
attempted or in all units attempted at this institu- 
tion. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree 
program shall be subject to disqualification If while 
on probation sufficient grade points are not 
achieved to remove probationary status. Disqualifi- 
cation may be either from further registration in a 
particular program or from further enrollment in the 
university, as determined by appropriate campus au- 
thority. 

A postbaccalaureate student who is on probation 
shall be subject to disqualification if he or she fails 
to earn at least a 2.50 grade-point average each 
term after the completion of 12 units at California 
State University, Fullerton in postbaccalaureate sta- 
tus. Disqualification may be either from further regis- 
tration as a postbaccalaureate, credential or certifi- 
cate program student or from enrollment at Califor- 
nia State University, Fullerton, as determined by the 
vice president for academic affairs or designee. 

Student Conduct 

The university properly assumes that all students 
are In attendance to secure a sound education and 
that they will conduct themselves as mature citizens 
of the campus community. Compliance with all regu- 
lations of the university is therefore expected. If, 
however, on any occasion a student or an organiza- 
tion is alleged to have compromised accepted uni- 
versity standards, appropriate judiciary procedures 
shall be Initiated through the established university 
process. Every effort will be made to encourage and 
support the development of self-discipline and con- 
trol by students and student organizations. The vice 
president for student services, aided by members of 
the faculty, Is responsible to the president of the uni- 
versity for the behavior of students in their relation- 
ships to the university. The president In turn is re- 
sponsible to the chancellor and the trustees of The 


University Regulations 


California State University and Colleges, who them- 
selves are governed by specific laws of the State of 
California. 

Students have the right to appeal certain disciplin- 
ary actions taken by appropriate university authori- 
ties. Regulations governing original hearings and ap- 
peal rights and procedures have been carefully 
detailed to provide maximum protection to both the 
individual charged and the university community. 

If the issue cannot be resolved Informally, students 
should consult with the coordinator of academic ap- 
peals. 

Inappropriate conduct by students or by applicants 
for admission is subject to discipline as provided in 
Sections 41301 through 41304 of Title 5, California 
Administrative Code. These sections follow. 

Article 1. 1, Title 5, California 
Administrative Code. 

41301. Expulsion, Suspension and Probation of 
Students. Following procedures consonant with due 
process established pursuant to Section 41304, any 
student of a campus may be expelled, suspended, 
placed on probation or given a lesser sanction for 
one or more of the following causes which must be 
campus-related: 

(a) Cheating or plagiarism in connection with an 
academic program at a campus. 

(b) Forgery, alteration or misuse of campus docu- 
ments, records, or identification of knowingly 
furnishing false information to a campus. 

(c) Misrepresentation of oneself or of an organiza- 
tion to be an agent of a campus. 

(d) Obstruction or disruption, on or off campus 
property, of the campus educational process, 
administrative process, or other campus func- 
tion. 

(e) Physical abuse on or off campus property of the 
person or property of any member of the cam- 
pus community or of members of his or her fami- 
ly or the threat of such physical abuse. 

(f) Theft of, or non-accidental damage to, campus 
property, or property in the possession of, or 
owned by, a member of the campus community. 

(g) Unauthorized entry into, unauthorized use of, or 
misuse of campus property. 

(h) On campus property, the sale or knowing poss- 
ession of dangerous drugs, restricted danger- 
ous drugs, or narcotics as those terms are used 
in California statutes, except when lawfully 
prescribed pursuant to medical or dental care, 
or when lawfully permitted for the purpose of 
research, instruction or analysis. 

(i) Knowing possession or use of explosives, dan- 
gerous chemicals or deadly weapons on cam- 
pus property or at a campus function without 
prior authorization of the campus president. 

(i) Engaging in lewd, indecent, or obscene behav- 
ior on campus property or at a campus function. 


(k) Abusive behavior directed toward, or hazing of, 
a member of the campus community. 

(l) Violation of any order of a campus president, 
notice of which had been given prior to such 
violation and during the academic term in which 
the violation occurs, either by publication in the 
campus newspaper, or by posting on an official 
bulletin board designated for this purpose, and 
which order is not inconsistent with any of the 
other provisions of this Section. 

(m) Soliciting or assisting another to do any act 
which would subject a student to expulsion, su- 
spension or probation pursuant to this Section. 

(n) For purposes of this Article, the following terms 
are defined; 

(1) The term “member of the campus communi- 
ty” is defined as meaning California State 
University trustees, academic, non-academic 
and administrative personnel, students, and 
other persons while such other persons are 
on campus property or at a campus function. 

(2) The term “campus property” includes: 

(A) Real or personal property In the posses- 
sion of, or under the control of, the Board 
of Trustees of The California State Univer- 
sity, and 

(B) All campus feeding, retail, or residence 
facilities whether operated by a campusor 
by a campus auxiliary organization. 

(3) The term “deadly weapons” includes any 
instrument or weapon of the kind commonly 
known as a blackjack, sling shot, billy, sand 
club, sandbag, metal knuckles, any dirk, dag- 
ger, switchbladeknife, pistol, revolver, or any 
other firearm, any knife having a blade longer 
than five Inches, any razor with anunguarded 
blade, and any metal pipe or bar used or in- 
tended to be used as a club. 

(4) The term “behavior” includes conduct and 
expression. 

(5) The term “hazing” means any method of ini- 
tiation into a student organization or any pas- 
time or amusement engaged In with regardto 
such an organization whichcauses, or Is like- 
ly to cause, bodily danger, or physical or 
emotional harm, to any member of the cam- 
pus community: but the term “hazing” does 
not include customary athletic events or 
other similar contests or competitions. 

(o) This Section is not adopted pursuant to Educa- 
tion Code Section 89031. 

(p) Notwithstanding any amendment or repeal pur- 
suant to the resolution by which any provision 
of this Article is amended, all acts and omis- 
sions occurring prior to that effective date shall 
be subject to the provisions of this Article as in 
effect immediately prior to such effective date. 

41302. Disposition of Fees: Campus Emergen- 
cy; Interim Suspension. The President of the cam- 
pus may place on probation, suspend, or expel a 
student for one or more of the causes enumerated 
In Section 41301. No fees or tuition paid by or for 
such student for the semester, quarter, or summer 
session in which he or she is suspended or expelled 


University Regulations 


shall be refunded. If the student is readmitted before 
the close of the semester, quarter, or summer ses- 
sion in which he or she is suspended, no additional 
tuition or fees shall be required of the student on 
account of the suspension. 

During periods of campus emergency, as deter- 
mined by the President of the individual campus, the 
President may, after consultation with the Chancel- 
lor, place Into Immediate effect any emergency 
regulations, procedures, and other measures 
deemed necessary or appropriate to meet the emer- 
gency, safeguard persons and property, and main- 
tain educational activities. 

The President may Immediately impose an Interim 
suspension in all cases in which there Is reasonable 
cause to believe that such an Immediate suspension 
Is required in order to protect lives or property and 
to insure the maintenance of order. A student so 
placed on interim suspension shall be given prompt 
notice of charges and the opportunity for a hearing 
within 10 days of the imposition of Interim suspen- 
sion. During the period of Interim suspension, the 
student shall not, without prior written permission of 
the President or designated representative, enter 
any campus of the California State University other 
than to attend the hearing. Violation of any condition 
of interim suspension shall be grounds for expulsion. 

41303. Conduct by Applicants for Admission. 
Notwithstanding any provision in this Chapter 1 to 
the contrary, admission or readmisslon may be 
qualified or denied to any person who, while not 
enrolled as a student, commits acts which, were he 
enrolled as a student, would be the basis for discipli- 
nary proceedings pursuant to Sections 41301 or 
41302. Admission or readmisslon may be qualified 
or denied to any person who, while a student, com- 
mits acts which are subject to disciplinary action 
pursuant to Section 41301 or Section 41302. 
Qualified admission or denial of admission in such 
cases shall be determined under procedures 
adopted pursuant to Section 41304. 

41304. Student Disciplinary Procedures for The 
California State University. The Chancellor shall 
prescribe, and may from time to time revise, a code 
of student disciplinary procedures for The California 
State University. Subject to other applicable law, 
this code shall provide for determinations of fact and 
sanctions to be applied for conduct which is a 
ground for discipline under Sections 41301 or 
41302, and for qualified admission or denial of ad- 
mission under Section 41303; the authority of the 
campus president in such matters; conduct-related 
determinations on financial aid eligibility and termin- 
ation; alternative kinds of proceedings, including 
proceedings conducted by a hearing officer; time 
limitations; notice; conduct of hearings, including 
provisions governing evidence, a record, and 
review; and such other related matters as may be 
appropriate. The chancellor shall report to the board 
his actions taken under this section. 

Debts Owed to the University 

Should a student or former student fail to pay a debt 
owed to the university, the university may “withhold 


permission to register, to use facilities for which a 
fee is authorized to be charged, to receive services, 
materials, food or merchandise or any combination 
of the above from any person owing a debt” until the 
debt Is paid (see Title 5, California Administrative 
Code, Sections 42380 and 42381). For example, the 
institution may withhold such a service as furnishing 
copies of a student’s transcript. If a student believes 
that he or she does not owe all or part of an unpaid 
obligation, the student should consult the business 
office. The business office, or another office to 
which the student may be referred, will review the 
pertinent Information, Including information the 
student may wish to present, and will advise the 
student of Its conclusions with respect to the debt. 


Student Rights 


Right of Petition 

Students may petition for review of certain university 
academic regulations when unusual circumstances 
exist. It should be noted, however, that academic 
regulations when they are contained in Title 5, Cali- 
fornia Administrative Code, are not subject to peti- 
tion. 

Petition forms are available in the Office of Admis- 
sions and Records and must first be reviewed and 
signed by appropriate officers before being 
reviewed by the university petitions committee. This 
committee will take action on the petition and the 
student will be notified of the decision. Results of the 
action will be placed in the student’s folder in the 
Office of Admissions and Records. 

The petitions committee members shall consist of 
the associate dean of each school, or designee, a 
professional staff member appointed by the director 
of admissions and records, and the assistant regis- 
trar, who will serve as the secretary. 


Right of Noncompliance 

Certain university activities either within or outside 
of the classroom may involve varying degrees of risk 
to the participants. It is university policy that the 
instructor directing such activities fully divulge to all 
potential participants the specific nature of such 
risks and obtain from them their expressed or im- 
plied consent prior to undertaking activities. 

The student who at any time comes to believe that 
the risks, whether physical or psychological, are 
excessive has the responsibility to withdraw from 
participation at the time and to inquire of the Instruc- 
tor if there are alternative means of fulfilling the 
requirements without penalty. If there is none, the 
student may petition for withdrawal from the course 
without penalty or appeal for an appropriate 
modification of the activity. The appeal may be 
made either to the chair of the department con- 
cerned, or to the chair of the Committee on Activities 
Involving Human Subjects, or both. 


100 


University Regulations 


Right of Academic Appeal 

The right of due process, appeal and peer judgment 
is established by the Student Bill of Rights and Re- 
sponsibilities for students who feel they have been 
treated capriciously or with prejudice by faculty or 
administrators. Students should make every effort to 
resolve the issue informally by consulting the in- 
dividual concerned, and if necessary the department 
chair and dean of the school. 

Students who still believe the problem has not been 
resolved should consult with the coordinator of aca- 
demic appeals. Upon the student’s request, the co- 
ordinator will convene the Academic Appeals Board 
to hear the student’s complaint. Students must ini- 
tiate the appeals process within one month after 
they could reasonably be expected to be aware of 
the action in question. 

Copies of the governing documents are available in 
the Academic Appeals Office. 

Privacy Rights of Students 

The federal Family Educational Rights and Privacy 
Act of 1974 (20 U.S.C. 1232g) and regulations 
adopted thereunder (46 C.F.R. 99). set out require- 
ments designed to protect the privacy of parents 
and students concerning education records main- 
tained by the institution. Specifically, the statute and 
regulations govern access to records maintained by 
the university, and the release of such records. In 
brief, the law provides that the university must 
provide students access to official records directly 
related to them and an opportunity for a hearing to 
challenge such records on the grounds that they are 
inaccurate, misleading or otherwise inappropriate; 
the right to a hearing under the law does not include 
any right to challenge the appropriateness of a 
grade as determined by the instructor. The law gen- 
erally requires that written consent of the student be 
received before releasing personally identifiable 
data about the student from records to other than a 
specified list of exceptions. The institution has 
adopted a set of policies and procedures concern- 
ing implementation of the Act and the regulations on 
the campus. Copies of these policies and proce- 
dures may be obtained from the Vice President for 
Student Services. Among the types of information in- 
cluded in the campus statement of policies and pro- 
cedures is: (1) the types of student records and the 
information contained therein; (2) the official respon- 
sible for the maintenance of each type of record; (3) 
the location of access lists which indicate persons 
requesting or receiving Information from the record; 
(4) policies for reviewing and expunging records; (5) 
the access rights of students; (6) the procedures for 


challenging the content of student records; (7) the 
cost which will be charged for reproducing copies of 
records, and (8) the right of the student to file a com- 
plaint with the Department of Education. An office 
and review board have been established by the De- 
partment to investigate and adjudicate violations 
and complaints. The office designated for this pur- 
pose is: The Family Educational Rights and Privacy 
Act Office (FERPA), U.S. Department of Health, Edu- 
cation and Welfare, 330 C Street, Room 4511, 
Washington, D.C. 20202. 

The campus is authorized under the act to release 
directory information concerning students. Directory 
information may include the student’s name, ad- 
dress. telephone listing, date and place of birth, ma- 
jor field of study, participation In officially recog- 
nized activities and sports, weight and height of 
members of athletic teams, dates of attendance, de- 
grees and awards received, and the most recent 
previous educational agency or Institution attended 
by the student. Directory information is subject to re- 
lease by the university at any time unless it has re- 
ceived prior written objection from the student spec- 
ifying information that the student requests not be 
released. Written objections should be sent to the 
Vice President for Student Services. Further details 
are published each semester in the class schedule. 

The campus is authorized to provide access to stu- 
dent records to campus officials and employees 
who have legitimate educational interests In such 
access. These persons are those who have respon- 
sibilities in connection with the university’s academ- 
ic, administrative or service functions and who have 
reason for using student records connected with uni- 
versity or other related academic responsibilities. 


Use of Social Security Number 

Applicants are requested, but not required, to in- 
clude their social security number in designated 
places on applications for admission pursuant to the 
authority contained in Title 5, California Administra- 
tive Code, Section 41201. The social security num- 
ber is used on many campuses as a means of Iden- 
tifying records pertaining to the student as well as 
identifying the student for purposes of financial aid 
eligibility and disbursement and the repayment of 
financial aid and other debts payable to the institu- 
tion. At Fullerton, student records are identified by 
a university-assigned student file number, not the 
social security number, though the latter is used in 
financial aids administration and in student payroll 
records. 


University Regulations 


1' ' ^1. V '■'' ^:', ' ■ ''■.' ' ■- '-j • ■ . 

. '■ . ,i: •‘.■ 

. .s,; .'Oji 

\;) / -Tn ly. vV-'. . . ^*- ^hfc, ' 

'■ ' *' r't '-'-vru ^ .i 

;.^. ' ■ .. ' w-s; >V 

;. . •■ , • ^ ^ '♦nT ^ 

t; ;. '-‘ jc^ '♦. f 'T: '. ,, ■'>->u- -V i 

: ' . n- ' ‘- .-t 

V -'Clj ,n ,:; t'- ■■•^- ""■ *■ 'fci*' • ^f;r 

' •;: ■'f^V ' : . ■' ‘ 





: is^^A'.oirr?^b 6 -!»A lo MigiH-- 

n^ti ^wja 0 ;V:Vlf 4 i?f^t-^n V ^ff- ' ■ t 

‘ ‘ ■ ' V'v 

n: 'fil ’^r\iT*};;-*"'i, ' ;>;rfCji*- ' ;v '■' 

.V' 

; 1 . '■ ^fv^i ^d ^Htc- C?r 1 v. 

:, .:. . ■: ,. ^ : ‘>v'0?'‘-\- 

• : ^ c . ir ; = 

• ', - i'V '• 

' _ - -. • i.v .-.'^.VU/V /■}'• ■ ■■ 

..•: 1;,;0 ..CliiW .■•^■*'^'10 '■ x.,'tO'- :• X'f't .:J:f>»t 

'c ’ ; ^Vo o: bS*')‘.QX',? M:: y ■ i-^rtot ...r ^?i^K’C• y-:'t 

.. i. •■ -.. .. •' .y-y^i^o n* odt 


. a::-' -. • .,•■ • ' ; : i* ■ ; 

,' •-’* ! ^ , ■' ' . ‘..i'/ ■ » ' ' ' ■' .?(' 

.oaa ' :• ; ■ •■-. a., - yf V, .•.; . ^-vT 

-'i’u, ■■*■' f '■■..: ! ■:;■!.■■' ’Mu' .‘r^y ' - ."f ■ ),,; i V 

•. vai: ')n{ >■■ ^ JC r 

-:;■ ..civ^no,, v - tC . 

.i:;i.< '«;■ :, ;i)i' .' -■ 

.>■»:> *dr'.> ' >■> 

‘ r' .U'|’ 

uru : to- ■ ad ■ ' '::riff0 vb 
.d*dii' d.>h^q^.-iVd ■ : ’'-diiwb 


:'n ■■^<' *'' ■ i f> 

v-i a ■ ■ : a; - '’^ .a ! '*i UO ^ 

r •»• V • 'V'-'.a';; 

u>r' , ^'- ^ i iti 

>Wa ■• 'V' ^ a '•>;-? ;■' " ■ ' ■ 

' a. s:'' •■' i 'VJ*' . ;i‘f'-‘.>’^ ' ' ' ■ ' - . {.‘ ^ A 

. V, v- ^ ' p.’ • " ' ' *’ V P ^ '■ ' d .- 

a.*.ci'jOv :;^ ;ii ^ ^'' 

..-: :; ^:• ■d *! ; • d ifi . . .. ’a.. ..lb tr:.a V ' 

... ' ; , • ■]' ' ;. >c - ^‘o :■' .Ida * 

. . < .rf' > 

a .,: ,^ ■: • : -^r, ;;;. ':a , ( e;.. *' 

••/..Vi".. ' ■ b ■i’dp-'-: ;■ /'■■■ ■ -r. -nn:bb ■ '^ ■ . ^ ■ 

(1^. V 7; .1 ?ie .) y.n: x ;f ((V- ;ad'sir<'u^I^ ac!‘<^ bb.‘..v a, 

, ' ’^' ,< 5 b'o. '■ 


t> 


vr ' v-:: c'^-n^^:'dc^c>Ov: n- . • ■:,'i:.; ijr.. a' i--vQO 
w 'r , ;A oiau-b, aA 

ai., BtfigiR vnEvi-i^l 

■ r^v*-b L -ix .. . a-'. • wURt 

■ ,i> <: •; ; ■: .:J^F-U ..i;.\rji ^ay$oA 

■V.. ’•;,, ■-■> -OdbV-i^^aaj.a^-nof.bb'^'.iOun;- 

r V ^ . 1 t . .. V •; • : ■ V ' ^ ► r r o f r-' ^ ^ ^ #» t rti^'n 

f" 7 ? ' vb -- bt ■ aa'^bK-a-TkLa.aO' ‘ a*C * yrv.a 

y ... • ,. , a' . .rb . ' :b'br|b .nodt-iit^rii urj r aifi^ 



•a ^ b '' .a ■ »■ * T. ' ji^, :>^ b,t,t-p' 

■ ■ ;■ :nr, ; , . .• a _ v!;b ^ 

" .a,..*. •' ■'■ . ..a-’ - ■ ■ ■ X . ’ . ■ y •:•' 

b '■ •’ . bb-a ■:'• c^v-' — ■ . , - :ff: b'. a->: 

- ;'.' OOib'.i •;, •'■V ^ ^ t. a :r a ■ • - i .-a 

- ■; -b a^' •■ r ■.-• • • , .'oiji ■ q ' ;• ' :-; 

'■•■ .: i- • . \i^r: U' ■,, . j ai 

■ ■.'■ •. 'a* . : ^iO. >9' vVv'.-, a .a..- , 

• ;a‘ '-a . ..^•- V acV id ' ::*:, a:. ■■ 

a • *0' ■?“ .4, '■ a ■ ‘i -'a ' a-- ; ' .bi^bd. 

bi-i ba,.-. ^bb„.da ,:j r- ■ 1 '.arr.; : : .ria 

.-'.■ t‘ ■ • b- •• .b '■ *' a < ; . . ^ 

- :•■ . ad^ , ,.>4 ' a-.j)--^;-r av aob bi^V. 

•. : d) a. • b. b#?tiJCj,grT^lyqi > 

; ■• *-rrf ;/ i«r. ab 'lTOyJ&P0’ a a 

'■ ■ : T . "■ a. qr "> ' 

: . ‘d I. , ^ ^oi ^ 

,r 'y?dc,cb 1 ga • * v>-- 

‘ : ■ ■■■ •.. ' .. : ■; a'} 

^ • •■ • a , '. -yr.iC 

’ . • , ' » ; ' A fhtJ 


\ 


~^ ■■' be 



W i €• ‘ 


Graduate 

Regulations 



The regulations contained herein are in addition to 
other policies and procedures applying to both un- 
dergraduates and graduates which may be found in 
the preceding section of this catalog and the class 
schedule. Also, Individual schools, divisions and de- 
partments may have established particular rules 
governing programs offered. 

Since all policies and procedures are subject to 
change, by appropriate authority, students should 
consult class schedules and other official announce- 
ments for possible revision of policies and proce- 
dures stated herein. 


103 


Graduate Applications 


All applicants for any type of postbaccalaureate or 
graduate standing (e.g., master’s degree appli- 
cants, those seeking credentials, and those inter- 
ested in taking courses for personal or professional 
growth) must file a complete application within the 
appropriate filing period. Second baccalaureate de- 
gree candidates should apply as postbaccalaureate 
students with an undergraduate degree objective. A 
complete application for postbaccalaureate or grad- 
uate standing includes all of the forms and fees de- 
scribed In the application booklet, including the 
supplementary graduate admissions application. 
Applicants who completed undergraduate degree 
requirements and graduated the preceding term are 
also required to complete and submit an application 
and the nonrefundable application fee. In the event 
that an applicant wishes to be assured of initial con- 
sideration by more than one campus, it Is necessary 
to submit a separate application (including fee) to 
each. 

Applications may be obtained from the Office of Ad- 
missions and Records or the Graduate Studies Of- 
fice of any California State University campus. In- 
structions for completing the application forms are 
included in the material supplied. Since some pro- 
grams require the completion of an additional form 
as part of the application process, students should 
inquire concerning this possibility at the office of the 
academic unit offering the particular program. 

Transcripts 

When an applicant for graduate standing, with a 
master’s degree objective, a credential-only objec- 
tive, or a master’s degree and credential objective, 
receives the application acknowledgement, re- 
quests should be submitted to allot the institutions 
of higher learning In which previously registered, re- 
questing that two official transcripts from each Insti- 
tution be sent to the university Admissions and Re- 
cords office. 

One copy of each transcript will be forwarded to the 
academic unit offering the degree or credential pro- 
gram specified by the student as the objective; and 
the other offical transcript will be retained for use by 
both the Admissions and Records Office and the 
Graduate Studies Office. 

Students who receive their baccalaureate degree at 
Cal State Fullerton and continuing graduate students 
who change their declared objective subsequent to 
admission must obtain whatever additional tran- 
scripts are needed to provide two complete sets of 
transcripts, but do not need to request Cal State Ful- 
lerton transcripts. 



104 


Graduate Regulations 


Postbaccalaureate applicants with no degree or 
credential objective must submit a transcript from 
the college or university where the baccalaureate 
was earned. Further, one transcript from other insti- 
tutions attended is required as necessary so that 
Cal State Fullerton has a complete record of the last 
60 semester units attempted prior to enrollment at 
Fullerton. 

All transcripts must be received directly from the is- 
suing institutions and become official records of the 
university; such transcripts therefore cannot be re- 
turned or reissued. Transcripts which include course 
work from other than the issuing institution are not 
sufficient evidence of course work taken elsewhere. 
Foreign language transcripts must be accompanied 
by certified English translations. 

Tests 

The Graduate Record Examination (GRE), or another 
test, may be required for conditionally classified ad- 
mission, or subsequently for the granting of classi- 
fied standing. Test requirements vary from depart- 
ment to department. Students should refer to 
master’s degree requirements outlined by each de- 
partment in the “Curricula” section of this catalog. 
Applications and information on test dates for na- 
tionally administered tests (e.g. GRE, GMAT) are 
available in the testing center or Graduate Studies 
Office. 

TOEFL Requirement 

All graduate and postbaccalaureate applicants, re- 
gardless of citizenship, whose preparatory educa- 
tion was principally in a language other than English 
must demonstrate competence In English. Those 
who do not possess a bachelor’s degree from a 
postsecondary Institution where English is the prin- 
cipal language of instruction must receive a minimum 


score of 550 on the Test of English as a Foreign Lan- 
guage (TOEFL). 

International Students 

See procedures outlined In the International student 
portion of the “Admissions Policies” section of this 
catalog. 

Second Master’s Degree or 
Concentration 

Students may wish to pursue a second master’s de- 
gree or concentration. Approval for admission to 
graduate standing in the second degree program or 
concentration may be given only after the first de- 
gree has been awarded. Units used for the first de- 
gree or concentration may not be applied to the sec- 
ond. Students who have completed a master’s 
degree at Cal State Fullerton in one concentration 
and wish to complete another will not be awarded a 
second degree. 

Nonaccredited Schools 

An applicant who is a graduate of a nonaccredited 
school must apply for admission as an undergradu- 
ate to complete requirements for a bachelor’s de- 
gree from this Institution. However, once admitted, 
a student in this category who gives evidence of un- 
usual promise and superior background may petition 
for graduate standing as conditionally classified. If 
the petition is granted, the student may then pro- 
ceed in the graduate program. If the petition Is de- 
nied, the student may be requested to complete a 
specified number of undergraduate units In order to 
establish equivalency to the bachelor’s degree or to 
complete requirements for a bachelor’s degree at 
CSUF. For further Information, contact the Graduate 
Studies Office. 


Graduate Regulations 


Graduate Admissions 


Following completion of application procedures and 
subsequent review of the student’s eligibility by the 
Admissions Office and appropriate academic unit, 
the student will be notified by the Admissions Office 
concerning admission. Only a written notice from the 
Admissions Office is valid proof of admission. Aca- 
demic advisement prior to admission is tentative and 
cannot be construed as granting official admission 
to a program or establishing requirements for the de- 
gree. 

Students may apply for a degree objective, a cre- 
dential or certificate objective, or no program objec- 
tive. Four admission categories are defined in terms 
of these academic objectives. 


Postbaccalaureate Standing: 
Unclassified 

To qualify for admission with no degree objective, 
students must (1) hold an acceptable bachelor’s de- 
gree from a regionally accredited institution or have 
equivalent preparation as determined by the appro- 
priate campus authority; (2) have a grade point aver- 
age of at least 2.6 (A = 4.0) in the last 60 semester 
(90 quarter) units; and (3) have been in good stand- 
ing at the last college attended. In unusual circum- 
stances, exceptions may be made to these criteria. 

Admission with postbaccalaureate-unclassified 
standing does not constitute admission to graduate 
degree or credential programs. If a student wishes 
to change academic objective after admission, an 
application for change of objective must be filed in 
the Admissions Office. 


Postbaccalaureate Standing: 
Classified 

To qualify for admission with a credential or certifi- 
cate objective, students must (1) meet the require- 
ments for postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing 
and (2) satisfy any additional professional, person- 
al, scholastic, and other standards, including quali- 
fying examinations. Refer to specific credential re- 
quirements under the departmental section of this 
catalog. 


Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

To qualify for admission with a graduate degree ob- 
jective, students must (1) meet the admission re- 
quirements for postbaccalaureate-unclassified 
standing and (2) meet any additional requirements 
of the particular program including a favorable rec- 
ommendation from the academic unit. 

An applicant who has deficiencies in prerequisite 
preparation or in grade-point average may be con- 
sidered for admission in conditionally classified 
standing with the approval and recommendation of 
the appropriate campus authority. A student admit- 
ted in conditionally classified standing may subse- 
quently be granted classified standing In an autho- 
rized graduate degree curriculum if professional, 
personal, scholastic, or other standards including 
qualifying examinations are met. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

Determination of the student’s prerequisites and as- 
signment of courses, units, and grade points re- 
quired to remove deficiencies is made by the aca- 
demic unit. For specific information on prerequisites 
to classified standing, consult departmental pro- 
gram requirements. 

Classified standing is normally granted when all pre- 
requisites have been satisfactorily completed, the 
official study plan formulated, and the recommenda- 
tion made by the appropriate graduate adviser and 
committee to the Dean of Graduate Studies who 
gives final approval. An eligible student may be 
granted classified standing prior to the first registra- 
tion or during the first semester of registration. 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken 
at this institution prior to classified standing will be 
applied to a master’s degree study plan. Any ac- 
ceptable transfer work is excluded from the nine 
units permitted. 

It is the student’s responsibility to initiate the re- 
quest for classified standing in the appropriate aca- 
demic unit by making an appointment with the gradu- 
ate adviser. The student will be sent a copy of the 
approved study plan by the Graduate Studies Office. 
Copies will be filed In the academic unit, university 
records, and the Graduate Studies Office. A student 
is not officially classified until an approved study 
plan is on file in the Graduate Studies Office. 


Graduate Regulations 


Requirements for the 
Master’s Degree 


To be granted the master’s degree, a student must 
have been classified, advanced to candidacy, and 
completed a satisfactory pattern of study in an ap- 
proved field. Requirements which apply to all pro- 
grams follow. For specific requirements of particular 
programs, see the program descriptions in the de- 
partmental section of this catalog. 

Each student’s program for a master’s degree (in- 
cluding eligibility, classified standing, candidacy, 
and award of the degree) must be approved by the 
graduate program adviser, the graduate committee, 
and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 




University Writing Requirement 

Students working toward a master’s degree are re- 
quired to demonstrate writing ability commensurate 
with the baccalaureate degree. This requirement 
should be met within the first nine units of graduate 
work by successfully completing one of the follow- 
ing: 

1. An upper-division writing requirement at any CSU 
campus. 

2. An upper-division course at another university 
equivalent to a course which meets the Cal State 
Fullerton requirement. Such equivalence must be 
certified by the department or program responsi- 
ble for the student’s academic work. 

3. Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Profi- 
ciency. 

4. An upper-division or graduate-level course that Is 
certified as meeting the writing requirement and is 
approved by the department or program responsi- 
ble for the student’s academic work. The grade 
received must be a C or better. 

Any student who has not met the requirement within 
the first nine units of graduate work shall be required 
to enroll in a certified course at the earliest opportu- 
nity. 

Departments and programs may, at their discretion 
and with approval of the Graduate Education Com- 
mittee. establish additional writing requirements for 
their graduate students. For further Information, stu- 
dents should consult their program adviser or the 
Graduate Studies Office. 


Graduate Regulations 


Study Plan 

General requirements for the master’s degree study 
plan include: 

1. A minimum of 30 approved semester units, or 
more, as determined by the particular program. 

2. A minimum of 21 semester units In residence 
(transfer and Cal State Fullerton extension or in- 
tersession course work are not considered to 
be In residence). 

3. A unit of course work taken at a college or uni- 
versity on the quarter system will be considered 
as equivalent to two-thirds of a unit when such 
course work is considered acceptable as trans- 
fer work. See additional requirements for trans- 
fer credit under ‘‘Graduate Enrollment Poli- 
cies.” 

4. Upper-division and graduate-level courses 
only (note limitation on 300-level courses In 
course numbering code description). 

5. Not less than one-half of the total units in gradu- 
ate (500-level) courses. 

6. Not more than six semester units for a thesis, 
if a thesis is required. 

7. A maximum of six units of independent study 
(exceptions subject to approval by the appro- 
priate school dean). 

8. No courses taken to satisfy prerequisite re- 
quirements included in the minimum of 30 units. 

9. None of the following: correspondence courses, 
credit by examination, or similar. 

10. No courses with nontraditional grades (e.g., 
CR, S, P). 

1 1 . A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 (B) in all 
courses attempted to satisfy requirements for 
the degree. 

12. All courses completed within five years of the 
date of award of the degree or satisfactorily 
validated. 

13. All courses taken after the baccalaureate (or 
postbaccalaureate credit granted) and not 
credited toward another degree. 

14. A final evaluation, which may be a thesis, a 
project, a comprehensive examination, or any 
combination of these. 

The approved study plan is valid as long as the stu- 
dent maintains continuous enrollment in regular se- 
mesters at the university; otherwise it is necessary 
to reapply and meet any changed or additional re- 
quirements approved In the Interim. 

Election of Curriculum 

A student remaining In continuous attendance in reg- 
ular semesters and continuing In the same curricu- 
lum may elect to meet the degree requirements In ef- 
fect either at the time of entering the curriculum or 
at the time of completion of degree requirements, 
except that substitution for discontinued courses 
may be approved by the graduate program adviser. 

Advisers and Committees 

University policy provides that each student’s pro- 
gram for the master’s degree shall be under the 
guidance of an adviser and committee. In some ar- 


eas a graduate program adviser has been designat- 
ed to give overall supervision for the graduate pro- 
gram. In others, the graduate program adviser also 
serves as the individual student’s adviser. The stu- 
dent’s adviser Is usually a member of the committee. 
The committee is responsible for all major recom- 
mendations to the Dean of Graduate Studies regard- 
ing the student’s achievement of classified standing, 
advancement to candidacy, and completion of the 
master’s degree. 

It Is the responsibility of the student to arrange 
appointments for advisement and other information 
in the office of the academic unit offering the degree 
program. As a minimum, the student should obtain 
advisement (1) either prior to or during the first se- 
mester of attendance, (2) when requesting classi- 
fied standing, and (3) when applying for a graduation 
check prior to the final semester. 

It is advisable for the student to maintain a personal 
file of transcripts and other evidences of grades and 
achievements, and to carry these whenever seeking 
advisement. 

Advancement to Candidacy 

A student who has been granted classified standing 
is normally advanced to candidacy after a request 
is filed for graduation by the student and an affirma- 
tive recommendation made by the graduate program 
adviser. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 (B) 
for all study plan course work is required; other 
scholastic, professional and personal standards, 
the passing of examinations, and other qualifica- 
tions, may be prescribed. Only those students who 
continue to demonstrate a satisfactory level of 
scholastic competence and fitness, as determined 
by the appropriate authorities, shall be eligible to 
continue in graduate programs. 

Completion of Requirements 
and Award of Degree 

The degree is awarded upon the satisfactory com- 
pletion of all general state and university require- 
ments, the specific requirements for the particular 
program, the recommendation of the appropriate 
graduate adviser and committee (advancement to 
candidacy), and the approval of the faculty and the 
Dean of Graduate Studies. It is highly recommended 
that all work for the degree, except final course ex- 
aminations, be submitted by the last day of classes. 
In order to assure granting of the degree by the end 
of the semester or session. 

If a thesis is required, it must be deposited in the 
Titan Bookstore in accordance with the instruction 
shown under ‘‘Theses and Projects,” no later than 
the last day of final examinations for the semester 
or session in which the degree is to be awarded. 

It Is the student’s responsibility to file an application 
for a graduation check and pay the graduation and 
diploma fee priorXo the beginning of the final semes- 
ter. Forms are available at the Admissions and Re- 
cords information counter, the Graduate Studies Of- 
fice, and the Records Office graduation unit. 


Graduate Regulations 


The application for graduation initiates review of 
degree requirements and formal approval by the 
faculty as well as serving as a diploma order. The 
last date to file the application is listed in the 
academic calendar of the class schedule for each 
regular semester. Candidates for August graduation 
must file their requests prior to registration for the 
spring semester. 

Students who fail to complete requirements as 
planned must update the application for a graduation 
check and do so by the appropriate deadline. An ad- 
ditional fee may be required. 

Since Cal State Fullerton is on the semester basis, 
master’s degree programs are ordinarily completed 
in January and June. A student who wishes to com- 
plete requirements during the summer must obtain 
written approval prior to summer term on a form 
available in the Graduate Studies Office. The ap- 
proved form must be returned to Graduate Studies 
during the spring semester. 

The effective date of graduation will be the last day 
of the specific term in which requirements are com- 
pleted. 

Commencement ceremonies are held only at the end 
of the spring semester. Students completing require- 
ments at the end of the fall and spring semesters 
and during the following summer may participate in 
those ceremonies. Information concerning com- 
mencement activities is sent to students by the Reg- 
istrar during the final semester. Arrangements for 
cap, gown and hood rental are made in the Titan 
Bookstore. 

Time Limit for Completion 

All requirements for the master’s degree, including 
all course work on the student’s study plan, should 
normally be completed within five years. This time 
limit commences with the semester of the earliest 
course used on the student’s study plan and con- 
sists of a total of ten (10) consecutive semesters. 
When individual circumstances warrant, this time 
limit may be extended for up to two years (four addi- 
tional consecutive semesters). 

Extension of the five year time limit may berequested 
by filing a petition with the Graduate Studies Of- 
fice. The petition must contain a full explanation of 


the circumstances which prevented completion of 
the degree requirements within the normal five-year 
limit and must be approved (signed) by the graduate 
program adviser, the chair of the appropriate gradu- 
ate committee and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 
Approvals for extension must be obtained prior to 
the expiration of the five-year limit. 

Outdated course work (course work older than the 
student’s approved time limit; i.e., normally five 
years but with approval may be a maximum of seven 
years) must be repeated. A maximum of nine (9) 
units of course work may be exempt from this policy 
if it can be validated. Copies of the “Petition for Vali- 
dating Outdated Coursework’’ may be obtained from 
the Graduate Studies Office. Validation is allowed at 
the discretion of the graduate program adviser, the 
academic unit offering the subject course and the 
Dean of Graduate Studies. Validation must be ac- 
complished by passing a written comprehensive test 
of the materials covered by the course being validat- 
ed or by some equivalent method with prior approval 
of both the graduate program adviser and the Dean 
of Graduate Studies. Any outdated course work 
which cannot be validated either because of a denial 
of the petition or because it is in excess of the nine 
units allowed for validation, must be repeated or up- 
dated through the use of additional study plan 
course work. If course work Is repeated or additional 
course work is required to update, the units and 
grades will be added to the study plan. 


Changes in Study Plan 

If a classified graduate student wishes to make a 
change in the approved study plan, a request should 
be made to the appropriate graduate program advis- 
er. Requests must be made prior to registration for 
any course work to be substituted or added. No 
course may be removed from the study plan after a 
student has taken it. Forms which may be used to 
file a request are available in the Graduate Studies 
Office. 

Changes in study plan may also be warranted by out- 
dated coursework or grade-point average (see 
“Time Limit for Completion” and “Grade-point Aver- 
age Standards”). 


Graduate Regulations 


Graduate Enrollment Policies 


Consult previous sections of this catalog and the 
class schedule for other information and regulations 
relating to registration and enrollment. 

Residence Requirement 

A student is considered to be in residence when reg- 
istered during regular semesters at this university. 
Of the minimum of 30 semester units of approved 
course work required for the master’s degree, not 
less than 21 shall be completed In residence at this 
institution. Approved units earned In summer ses- 
sions may be substituted for regular semester unit 
requirements on a unit for unit basis. Extension or in- 
tersession course work may not be used to fulfill the 
minimum residence requirement. 

Continuous Enrollment 

A graduate student with a graduate degree objective 
should maintain continuous enrollment during regular 
semesters (summer sessions and extension exclud- 
ed) until award of the degree. This policy Is de- 
signed to eliminate the need for readmission to the 
university, provide opportunity for continuous use of 
facilities, Including the Library, and assure the de- 
velopment of an integrated program, adequately su- 
pervised, and effectively terminated within the time 
limitations allowed by regulations. 

Unless granted an approved leave of absence, a 
graduate student who falls to register each semes- 
ter has discontinued enrollment in the graduate de- 
gree program. If the student wishes to resume 
studies. It will be necessary to reapply for admission 
to the university and to the degree program and 
meet any changed or additional requirements ap- 
proved in the interim. 

Students who may have completed all course work, 
but who may not have satisfactorily completed a 
comprehensive examination or other requirement, 
are expected to maintain continuous enrollment until 
award of the degree. 

A graduate student who finds it impossible to attend 
during a certain semester and is not eligible for a 
leave of absence, must register In Graduate Studies 
700. Registration in this course is restricted to con- 
ditionally classified or classified graduate students. 
It carries no unit credit and does not require class 
attendance. Registration In this course in each se- 
mester when no other course work is taken will be 
necessary until award of the degree. 

Similarly, Credential Studies 701 is available for stu- 
dents with a credential-only objective who find it im- 
possible to enroll in course work and are not eligible 
for a leave of absence. 



110 


Graduate Regulations 


Leave of Absence 

A leave of absence permits a student to continue un- 
der the curriculum requirements which applied prior 
to the absence and may be granted for a maximum 
of one year. Conditionally classified and classified 
students in good standing who have completed at 
least six units of residence course work toward the 
degree may qualify for a leave of absence. A “Re- 
quest for Leave of Absence” form is available at the 
Admissions and Records information counter or In 
the Graduate Studies Office. 

Any one of the following circumstances may be 
grounds for requesting a leave of absence: 

1. Illness or disability (permanent or temporary) or 
similar personal exigencies including pregnancy 
which make it impossible or inadvisable for a stu- 
dent to register for classes. 

2. Activities which enhance a student’s professional 
career objectives. 

3. Active duty in the armed forces of the United 
States. 

4. Other reasons at the discretion of the Dean of 
Graduate Studies. 

After review by the Graduate Studies Office, the ac- 
ademic unit (where applicable), and the Registrar’s 
Office, a response is mailed to the student. 

A first-time leave of absence of one semester only 
will normally be granted upon request for students 
who qualify and will not require an application for re- 
admission to the university. Registration materials 
for the semester following the leave will be sent to 
the student. 

Students requesting a subsequent leave or a leave 
longer than one semester are required to provide ap- 
propriate documentation (e.g., doctor’s recommen- 
dation, verification of employment). Such requests 
must also be endorsed by the program adviser. A 
leave granted for more than one semester does not 
reserve a place for the student at this university. An 
application for admission must be filed In order to be 
readmitted and permitted to enroll when the leave 
terminates. 

Study Load 

Graduate students must carry a study load of 12 
units of course work a semester or nine units of 
which six are in 500-level courses for full-time enroll- 
ment certification by the university. A normal full- 
time load in summer session Is one and one-third 
units per week of instruction. The maximum study 
load for students working toward a master’s degree 
is 12 units per semester; in exceptional cases, how- 
ever, a student may take more with the approval of 
the graduate program adviser. 

Enrollment in Extended 
Education Programs 

In addition to Its regular academic programs, the uni- 
versity offers a number of courses through its ex- 


tended education program. These include the sum- 
mer session, the extension program and adjunct en- 
rollment (a program permitting those who are not for- 
mally enrolled to take regular university courses). 

The applicability of credit earned through courses 
taken in any of the programs sponsored by the Of- 
fice of Extended Education is subject to approval by 
the graduate program adviser and Dean of Graduate 
Studies. 

Summer Sess/ons.ApproprIate courses taken during 
the summer session may be applied to a graduate 
degree program, providing the courses are ap- 
proved in advance. 

Extension: No more than nine units of credit earned 
in the university extension program (including inter- 
session course work) may be applied to a graduate 
degree. Consultation with a graduate adviser before 
taking an extension course Is strongly recommend- 
ed. 

It should be noted that enrollment In summer session 
or extension courses does not constitute admission 
to the university or enrollment as a continuing stu- 
dent in the university. Any student desiring a mas- 
ter’s degree must be admitted to a regular semester 
(fall or spring). 

Enrollment in 500-Level 
Courses by Seniors 

Undergraduate students may enroll in graduate level 
courses (500 level) if they: 

a. have reached senior status (i.e., completed a 
minimum of 90 semester units) 

b. have the academic preparation and prerequisites 
required for entry into the course 

c. gain the consent of the instructor. 

Students wishing to use 500-level course work taken 
during their undergraduate degree toward a mas- 
ter’s degree should read the following section on 
Postgraduate Credit. 

Postgraduate Credit 

A graduate student may petition for a maximum of 
nine units of postgraduate credit for course work (ei- 
ther 400 or 500 level) taken during the undergradu- 
ate degree if: 

a. the course work was not used to meet any of the 
university’s requirements for the baccalaureate 
degree (including major, minor or concentration) 

b. the course work was taken during the final two se- 
mesters prior to the student’s graduation 

c. approved by the registrar of the appropriate uni- 
versity. 

Petition forms are available at the Admissions and 
Records information counter. If approved, appropri- 
ate notations will be entered on the student’s perma- 
nent record. 

The use of postgraduate course work on a student’s 
graduate study plan is governed by the general 


Graduate Regulations 




regulations for all graduate degrees and must 
be approved by the program adviser, the 
appropriate graduate committee and the Dean 
of Graduate Studies. 

Transfer Credit Policy 

Graduate students may be able to use a limited 
amount of transfer course work In meeting the re- 
quirements for a master’s degree. The use of trans- 
fer course work on a student’s study plan is subject 
to the following provisions: 

1.The course work being transferred must: 

a. have been taken at an accredited college or 
university. 

b. be acceptable for credit toward a graduate de- 
gree at the institution where the course work 
was taken. 

c. have been completed with a grade of B or 
better. 

d. not have been used in meeting the requirements 
for another earned degree (either graduate or 
undergraduate). 

e. have been completed within the student’s five- 
year time period which Is required for comple- 
tion of the requirements for the master’s 
degree at CSUF. 


2. An absolute minimum of 21 semester units toward 
any master’s degree at CSUF must be in resi- 
dence units. For master’s degrees requiring more 
than 42 semester units, a minimum of half of the 
units used on the student’s study plan must be in 
residence units. Residence units include regular 
courses and extension courses offered as special 
sessions. Other extension course work or adjunct 
enrollment course work is treated like transfer 
work. 

3. Use of transfer work on a student’s study plan is 
subject to all other policies concerning study plan 
course work; e.g., fifty percent must be graduate 
level work, no correspondence course work, no 
credit by examination, no courses with nontradi- 
tional grades. 

4. In all cases, the use of transfer course work on a 
student’s study plan Is subject to the acceptance 
and approval of the academic unit’s graduate ad- 
viser and the Dean of Graduate Studies. Course 
work taken at another institution after admission 
to CSUF as a graduate student is rarely accepted 
for credit toward a master’s degree and can only 
be accepted if the student has received prior ap- 
proval of both the graduate adviser and the Dean 
of Graduate Studies. 

6. Total approved transfer units and grade points will 
be entered on the CSUF transcript at graduation. 



112 


Graduate Regulations 



Graduate Academic Standards 


Graduate study deals with more complex ideas and 
demands more sophisticated techniques, searching 
analysis, and creative thinking than undergraduate 
study. The research required is extensive in both pri- 
mary and secondary sources and the quality of writ- 
ing expected is high. The student is advised to con- 
sider these factors when deciding upon the amount 
of course work to be undertaken during any one se- 
mester. 


Grade-Point Average Standards 

Prerequisites: The grade-point average required for 
prerequisites prior to classified standing varies ac- 
cording to the particular program. See requirements 
in departmental sections of this catalog. 


Study Plan: Grade-point averages are calculated by 
dividing grade points earned by units attempted. The 
30 or more semester units of approved study plan 
course work. Including transfer work, required for 
the degree must be completed with a 3.0 (B) mini- 
mum grade-point average. If a student approaches 
the completion of the degree requirements with less 
than a 3.0 average, a request may be made for a 
change in the study plan to add no more than six 
units of course work In order to achieve at least a 
3.0. Requests for course work to be added to the 
study plan must be approved by the graduate pro- 
gram adviser and Dean of Graduate Studies prior to 
registration (see “Changes In Study Plan”). If the 
grade-point average at any time falls below such a 
level that it cannot be raised to a 3.0 within the pre- 
scribed limits of course work, this has the effect of 
withdrawing the student from the master’s degree 
program. 


f permission is given to repeat a course, and the 
ourse is successfully repeated, both grades are 
onsidered in computing grade-point averages, 
‘owever, successful repetition of a course originally 
assed carries no additional unit credit toward a de- 
ree. 


University: A graduate degree student is expected 
o earn a 3.0 average in all postbaccalaureate 
ourse work taken at this university. Exception to 
his rule may be granted only if courses for which 
rades are not to be computed in the GPA have nev- 
r been part of the student’s study plan for the de- 
ree, and if it is evident that they are inapplicable 
nd inappropriate to the degree program. 


Academic Probation and 
Disqualification 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree 
program in either conditionally classified or classi- 
fied graduate standing is subject to academic pro- 
bation if a cumulative grade-point average of at least 
3.0 (grade of B on a four-point scale) Is not main- 
tained. 

If sufficient grade points to remove probationary sta- 
tus are not earned while on probation, the student is 
subject to disqualification. Disqualification will pre- 
vent further registration in a particular program or 
further enrollment in the university, as determined by 
appropriate campus authority. 

A graduate student may also be placed on probation 
or may be disqualified for unsatisfactory scholastic 
progress regardless of cumulative grade-point aver- 
age. Such actions may be due to repeated withdraw- 
al, failure to progress toward an educational objec- 
tive, and non-compliance with an academic 
requirement. 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclassi- 
fied, or undeclared status) shall be subject to aca- 
demic probation if after completing 12 or more units, 
the cumulative grade-point average falls below a 2.6 
average. A postbaccalaureate student on probation 
shall be subject to disqualification if at least a 2.50 
grade-point average Is not earned each term after 
the completion of 12 units in postbaccalaureate sta- 
tus. Disqualification may be either from further regis- 
tration toward a postbaccalaureate credential or 
certificate program, or from further enrollment In the 
university as determined by the appropriate campus 
authority. 

Declassification 

Graduate students in classified graduate standing 
shall be declassified upon the recommendation of 
the appropriate academic unit, with a change to 
postbaccalaureate standing, unclassified, when one 
or more of the following conditions exist: 

1. The student’s request for declassification has 
been recommended for approval by the graduate 
committee. 

2. The student fails to maintain the grade-point aver- 
age required in the master’s degree program. 

3. The student has failed to demonstrate a satisfac- 
tory level of scholastic competence and fitness. 

4. The student fails to complete the degree within 
the prescribed time limit. 

A recommendation for declassification is sent to the 
Graduate Studies Office by the graduate program 
adviser for the particular degree. 


Graduate Regulations 


Theses and Projects 


Definition 

A thesis is defined as the written product of a sys- 
tematic study of a significant problem. It identifies 
the problem, states the major assumptions, explains 
the significance of the undertaking, sets forth the 
sources for and methods of gathering information, 
analyzes the data, and offers a conclusion or recom- 
mendation. The finished product evidences originali- 
ty, critical and independent thinking, appropriate or- 
ganization and format, and thorough documentation. 
Normally, an oral defense of the thesis is required. 

A project is a significant undertaking appropriate to 
the fine and applied arts or to professional fields. It 
also evidences originality and independent thinking, 
appropriate form and organization, and a rationale. 
It is described and summarized in a written abstract 
that includes the project’s significance, objectives, 
methodology and a conclusion or recommendation. 
An oral defense of the project may be required. 

Annual Thesis Award 

An award of $300 along with an engraved plaque will 
be given each year to the student whose thesis rep- 
resents the highest standard of scholarly accom- 
plishment as determined by a panel of judges cho- 
sen from emeriti professors. Interested students 
should contact the Graduate Studies Office or their 
program adviser for further information on eligibility 
and deadlines. Finalists from each school may also 
be recommended for Honorable Mention by the judg- 
es: these will receive a certificate of Honorable 
Mention and a cash award. 

General Regulations 

Of the minimum of 30 semester units of approved 
course work required for the master’s degree, no 
more than six are allowed for a thesis. 

When a thesis is required, the Library is to be provid- 
ed with the approved original copy, or a fully accept- 
able duplicated copy, in the approved binding, and 
an acceptable microfilm of it. An abstract accompa- 
nies the thesis and will normally be published in the 
University Microfilms International journal. Masters 
Abstracts. Copies are thereby made available for 
order by Interested scholars. 

When a project is required, it will be filed with the ac- 
ademic unit offering the degree program. Some re- 
cord of the project, or the project itself, is preserved 
In the academic unit and, when appropriate, in the 
Library. When the appropriate authority recom- 
mends, a project or its written record may be treated 
as a thesis. 



114 


Graduate Regulations 


Although a minimum of three faculty members super- 
vise and approve the thesis, it is possible for a quali- 
fied person who is not a regular university faculty 
member to serve as a visiting examiner and join in 
the approval of the written record. This person 
serves as the fourth member of the committee. 

Title to theses (and projects when treated as the- 
ses, as above) passes to the university upon their 
acceptance by the evaluating faculty. 

Variations from procedures and regulations should 
be referred to the Office of Graduate Studies for ap- 
proval. 

Format Guidelines and Style 
Manuals 

All-university format guidelines are included in a the- 
sis manual which has been developed to assist the 
student in preparation of a thesis or a project which 
is to be treated as a thesis. Copies are available in 
the Office of Graduate Studies. It is the student’s re- 
sponsibility to make certain that the requirements 
are met. The student is strongly advised to become 
familiar with the instructions in the manual. Theses 
from the library or departmental offices should not 
be used as examples of correct format. 

The academic unit, through the student’s adviser 
and/or committee. Is responsible for the academic 
content and English usage in the thesis and for the 
student’s correct use of forms of documentation and 
bibliography. In addition to the university format 
guidelines, each academic unit may select a supple- 
mentary style manual to be followed in matters of 
documentation and bibliography. Students should 
consult their academic program adviser or thesis 
committee chair concerning the style manual used. 

If the supplementary style manual presents regula- 
tions which conflict with the all-university format 
guidelines published in the thesis manual, the univer- 
sity regulations take precedence. 

Some graduate programs require style manuals or 
guides designed for journal articles. Although these 
are helpful for abbreviations, tables, figures and 
footnoting, as well as other purposes, students 
should be aware of the difference between a thesis 
and an article and make appropriate adaptations, 
approved by the graduate program adviser. 

If the academic unit does not recommend a specific 
style manual, the student should refer to A Manual 
for Writers of Term Papers, Theses, and Disserta- 
tions (Fourth Edition) by Kate L. Turabian. 

Thesis Typists 

The student makes all necessary arrangements for 
the typing of the thesis. A list of thesis typists is 
available in the Office of Graduate Studies. The uni- 
versity Career Development Center also maintains a 
listing of students and others who have indicated 
their availability for typing assignments. An experi- 
enced typist is strongly advised, although the uni- 


versity does not endorse or recommend individual 
typists. 

Deadlines 

Adequate time should be allowed for typing, reading 
and approval by the adviser, the committee mem- 
bers, and the university thesis reader. 

It Is recommended that the academic area sponsor- 
ing the degree program require that the final version 
of the thesis be submitted for approval at least six 
weeks prior to the last day of classes of the appro- 
priate semester. The deadline for submission to the 
university thesis reader is fwo weeks prior to the last 
day of classes. For summer completion, the student 
should check with the academic unit and the Office 
of Graduate Studies for appropriate deadlines. The 
Office of Graduate Studies must receive notification 
from the Titan Bookstore by the last day of final ex- 
aminations for the appropriate semester or session 
that the thesis has been deposited there and the 
fees paid. Ample time should be allowed for any spe- 
cial arrangements, such as duplication of the thesis 
by the Titan Bookstore or elsewhere, prior to the 
deadline. 

Final Procedures 

1. Approval Signatures: When the final draft is com- 
pleted, the student obtains signatures on the 
approval page of all of the members of the com- 
mittee. The title /approval page may be photo- 
copied onto the correct paper stock; however, 
the signatures must be original. Photocopied 
signatures are not acceptable for binding or mi- 
crofilming. The signatures must be in black ink. 
If there Is a disagreement within the committee 
concerning the acceptability of the thesis, the 
approving signatures of a majority of the com- 
mittee will be sufficient. Nonavailability of one 
member of the committee is not an adequate 
reason for acceptance of signatures by less 
than the full committee. No changes or addi- 
tions will be allowed after the final signatures 
have been obtained. The student should ar- 
range for at least three original title pages to be 
signed by the committee members. (Two origi- 
nals are submitted to the bookstore with the 
thesis or project; one may be the student’s per- 
sonal copy or be used for the departmental 
copy.) 

2. University Thesis Reader: The thesis is ready for 
review by the university thesis reader after the 
faculty have signed off and the thesis has been 
typed in its final form. One unbound copy of the 
thesis including the original approval page is 
taken to the Office of Graduate Studies for re- 
view by the thesis reader for conformity to all- 
university format guidelines. The copy submit- 
ted to the Graduate Studies Office may be a 
photocopy provided it is copied on the correct 
paper stock. The student, graduate program 
adviser, and thesis committee chair will be noti- 
fied of any revisions or corrections which need 
to be made. Final approval on format is given by 


Graduate Regulations 


the Office of Graduate Studies on the “Thesis 
Approval Form.” 

3. Binding and Microfilming: The student takes the 
approved copy of the thesis, two signed title 
and approval pages, and the signed Thesis Ap- 
proval Form to the Titan Bookstore and pays 
the appropriate fees. The bookstore arranges 
for the binding of the thesis by a local bindery 
and other services by University Microfilms In- 
ternational. Once submitted and receipted, the 
thesis may not be withdrawn by the student from 
the Titan Bookstore. The Titan Bookstore sends 
the approved original or duplicated copy (in- 
cluding the original signed approval page) to 
University Microfilms International for filming 
and publication of the abstract, and upon its re- 
turn sends it to the bindery. 

An agreement is normally completed for UMI to 
publish the abstract in Masters Abstracts, pre- 
pare a negative microfilm, and sell microfilm or 
xerographic copies to interested scholars. The 


university will accept alternative methods of mi- 
crofilming, duplication of printed copies and 
binding, subject to the specifications on file in 
the Graduate Studies Office. Arrangements for 
copyrighting are also possible. If desired, 
through UMI. 

4. Notification for Award of the Degree: The grade for 
the thesis is reported in the usual manner to the 
office of the registrar by the appropriate facul- 
ty. The Titan Bookstore notifies the Office of 
Graduate Studies that the approved thesis has 
been deposited, the fees paid, and the agree- 
ment for microfilming and publication of the ab- 
stract completed by the student. 

5. Depositing of Thesis in Library: When the thesis 
is returned by the bindery, the bound copy Is de- 
posited for circulation In the library. One set of 
the slides or separately mounted illustrative 
material is housed with the bound copy. The 
second set is placed in the university archives 
with the microfilm copy. 



116 


Graduate Regulations 


Steps in the Master’s Degree 


There may be additional steps for individual stu- 
dents in particular programs; for these, consult the 
program description and the academic unit (school, 
department or program) offering the degree pro- 
gram. 

* Action initiated by student (as indicated below) 

1. Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally 
Classified 

• Apply for admission 

• Declare objective(s), using precise codes on 
the application form 

• Receive application acknowledgement from the 
Admissions Office 

• Request two sets of official transcripts of all 
previous college-level course work attempted 
to be sent to Admissions Office 

• Take tests, if required by program, and order 
test scores sent to Cal State Fullerton, desig- 
nating appropriate academic unit on the test 
registration form 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advise- 
ment 

• Provide appropriate academic unit with any 
other supporting statements or materials, as 
required 

Recommendation for admission made by academ- 
ic unit to Admissions Office 

Receive notification of admission from Admis- 
sions Office 

2. Graduate Standing: Classified 

• Complete any course prerequisites and/or re- 
move deficiencies 

• Apply for classified standing in the academic 
area offering the particular program prior to 
completion of nine units of study plan course 
work 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advise- 
ment, including development of official study 
plan 

• Provide appropriate academic unit with any oth- 
er supporting statements or materials, as 
shown in program descriptions in this catalog 

• Take tests if required by program, and order 
test scores sent to Cal State Fullerton, desig- 
nating appropriate academic unit on the test 
registration form 

Recommendation made by academic unit to the 
Dean of Graduate Studies 

Receive notification of classified standing being 
granted from Graduate Studies when the study 


plan is sent, showing approval by the Dean of 
Graduate Studies. 

• If not received within a reasonable length of 
time, call the academic unit sponsoring the de- 
gree or Graduate Studies. 

3. Completion of Requirements 

• Apply for a graduation check and advance- 
ment to candidacy prior to the beginning of 
the finai semester and no iater than the dead- 
line initiating university review and formal 
approval by faculty. The form is available at 
the Admissions and Records information desk, 
the Graduation Unit and the Graduate Studies 
Office. A graduation and diploma fee must be 
paid when filing request with the university 
cashier. 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advise- 
ment 

• Complete written and/or oral examination, if re- 
quired 

• (Complete thesis or project, if applicable 

• Obtain approval of committee 

• Obtain approval of university thesis reader 
(thesis only) 

• Deposit approved copy of thesis and make ar- 
rangements for binding, microfilming and publi- 
cation of the abstract in the Titan Bookstore by 
the applicable deadline 

Final, approved study plan, with recommenda- 
tion, sent by appropriate academic unit to Dean 
of Graduate Studies 

Preliminary approval, pending adequate grades, 
and completion of any other requirements, 
granted by Dean of Graduate Studies. 

• Complete all general and specific requirements, 
other than final course examinations, by the last 
day of classes, in order to assure granting of 
the degree by the end of the semester 

Final verification of completion of requirements 
sent by the Graduate Studies Office to the reg- 
istrar 

Receive notification of award of degree from 
registrar approximately six weeks after the end 
of the semester 

4. Commencement 

• Make appropriate arrangements for cap, gown 
and hood rental In Titan Bookstore 

Commencement information sent by the Regis- 
trar’s Office 


Graduate Regulations 


. .• 


’■i 1^-' V. 


■ -■! 

. “ ■ ..A} • • . 

' -■< ''': 


P 



Ml 



< J >ifV' V '. . i*' •■ . •:, 

■ ■■•■ < ^al) :i. !';>t 

h-s<r)ftX^ ^ /' ■’ ^ 

■q-i -ii. t£r.$ 

>; Vi.i t/ ♦ :, > > ^ . J;. ■ .1 1 c > '^ ; - 

I . ' - ... , ^ . 

a ! . ' ^■' ‘ -iOT :5 V: V£>; A' ,, 

V, ^ • 

■ . - Ar'i 'rd ic-' . 

■ * ^ ' 5 ' ^;-'.A''V;ji''. ■ ;.'^,! 

■ • {' ' •■ • ■ . vv- t>. A 

•> ■' . i ' AO'' 1 ' . J: ■ •■" V,0 

' ' '■■ :;‘vv 

t A > 

' I ^:'^^t-f OuaP! : T; ^ 


j | '^ ”'{r 



.. ;c hK,b> 'X- ■ A-'' ;♦{* :3fiOiJibb& o<'.^ .'• •• "'’OdT 

on;, IHN i ^. .> .:jv . 'b'iO^ ^ :*n:>b 

:bcr'.> b :oiLi .;.rtotr;Cje . n- 

n o .U';'i <4 jc.b v cAb 

-... . • ' --XaO 

;^v^■ i 4 fT' ;■ jy /;;-*T(rA ’ 

••<lU^04 OiOAO .*» -V)" ‘ '. tX * V ■ * A . ''lA,. A / . t 

>e!A '.> K'. ') 

r-, . vr-.._',-ntxe. « 

•;^' _ -i- . - .,4 O. ;•-: - ■' ‘ 

,v -.V..,..’ iOi; >l^v45. :ili 

rbf? ‘.- , •-■-•:• t^n. •. . 

O- 

•’•. V -n'-, ,. ,it.-' 0 ; ^V'i? On t. A ^ ^ 9 ^ 

■'O, n.:#’ : ■■ - A •,^o!''",:i c. r,i'. •',; 

bb n. . jTTjbA !- > A ' 

■ ' • - .. ■ -^-' in . . • , 0 ... ^ 

. ' V-. ;ao' C;p:ki:; ^ .n;A. 

' , ■ " ' •’’‘■■•.^ '■ ■'* ■ nb 

.. ';n;in ;, 0 n ,v « 

•■■ ^■' ^ ni- ' 

V-"' . 3 ' •. x 

■■ ' n ' lyj .'"' " .-' 

-■ ■ ■ v,, ;•■ - r- .... ,. • ■:• . -.. ..;.T-, 

_ '., ■■ 'nfe-V *i-, ; 

y- iy. '• .'•ri..^ii;i^*'‘^r’ r -iyi-^-ev W 

'■■:■ '■ -r ■ ■ ' Jtb’ 

‘ ' ■' ■ ‘ p’ 


fc*. ' ■ ,.. ■ <• 








Academic Programs 



119 


Degree Programs 


California State University, Fullerton offers the fol- 
lowing baccalaureate degree programs which are 
described on the pages listed: 


B.A. American Studies 318 

B.A. Anthropology 322 

B.A. Art 166 

B.F.A. Art 166 

B.A. Biological Science 436 

B.A. Business Administration 198 

B.A. Chemistry 443 

B.S. Chemistry 443 

B.S. Child Development 266 

B.A. Communications 331 

B.A. Communicative Disorders 424 

B.A. Comparative Literature 341 

B.S. Computer Science 236 

B.A. Criminal Justice 338 

B.A. Economics 206 

B.S. Engineering 240 

B.A. English 341 

B.A. Ethnic Studies (with option in Afro-Ethnic 
studies and Chicano studies) 316 

B.A. French 361 

B.A. Geography 368 

B.S. Geology 461 

B.A. German 361 

B.A. History 374 

B.S. Human Services 292 

B.A. International Business with a concentration in 
French, German or Spanish 216 

B.A. Latin American Studies 380 

B.A. Liberal Studies 383 

B.A. Linguistics 386 

B.A. Mathematics 466 

B.A. Music 166 

B.M. Music 166 

B.S. Nursing 297 

B.A. Philosophy 391 

B.S. Physical Education 283 

B.S. Physics 463 

B.A. Political Science (Including concentration in 

public administration) 396 

B.A. Psychology 403 

B.A. Religious Studies 411 

B.A. Russian & East European Area Studies 416 

B.A. Sociology 419 

B.A. Spanish 361 

B.A. Special Major 147 

B.A. Speech Communication 424 

B.A. Theatre Arts 178 


The following master’s degree programs are of- 
fered: 


M.S. Accountancy 192 

M.A. American Studies 318 

M.A. Anthropology 322 

M.A. Art 166 

M.F.A. Art 166 

M.A. Biology 436 

M.B.A. Business Administration 198 

M.S. Chemistry 423 

M.A. Communications 331 

M.A. Communicative Disorders 424 

M.A. Comparative Literature 341 

M.S. Computer Science 236 

M.S. Counseling 268 

M.A. Economics 206 


M.S. Education (with concentrations in bilingual/ 
bicultural education [Spanish-English], elementary 
curriculum and instruction, reading, educational 
administration, special education and teaching 


English to speakers of other languages) 263 

M.S. Engineering 269 

M.A. English 341 

M.S. Environmental Studies 349 

M.A. French 361 

M.A. Geography 368 

M.A. German 361 

M.A. Hlstoi^ 374 

M.A. Linguistics 386 

M.S. Management Science 223 

M.A. Mathematics 466 

M.A. Music 166 

M.M. Music 166 

M.S. Physical Education 283 

M.A. Political Science 396 

M.A. Psychology 403 

M.S. Psychology(Cllnlcal/ Community) 403 

M.P.A. Public Administration 396 

M.A.T. Science 467 

M.A. Social Sciences 417 

M.A. Sociology 419 

M.A. Spanish (including emphasis in bilingual 

studies 361 

M.A. Special Major 147 

M.A. Speech Communication 424 

M.S. Taxation 192 

M.A. Theatre Arts 178 

M.F.A. Theatre Arts (with concentrations in Acting, 
Directing, and Technical Theatre and 
Design ^js 


Degree Programs 


Graduation Requirements 
for the Bachelor’s Degree 



Unit Requirements 

A. Total Unit Requirements 

The minimum number of semester units necessary 
for a bachelor’s degree, exclusive of remedial 
courses (i.e. course numbered 0-99) is as follows: 

1. For the Bachelor of Arts degree 124 

2. For the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree 132 

3. For the Bachelor of Science degree 124-132 

4. For the Bachelor of Nursing degree 128 

5. For the Bachelor of Science in Engineering 

degree 135 

6. For the Bachelor of Music degree 132 

B. Upper-Division Requirement 

A minimum of 40 semester units of upper division 
coursework is required for any CSUF bachelor’s de- 
gree. Courses offering upper division credit are 
those numbered at the 300- and 400-levels. 

All units from upper division courses are applicable 
to the upper division units requirement, including 
units from courses in the major, the minor, and gen- 
eral education. 

C. special Unit Totals 

The maximum number of special semester units ac- 


cepted for a bachelor’s degree is as follows: 

1. Transferable units from community or junior 

colleges 70 

2. Transferable units from a four-year university 

or college or from a combination of two and 
four-year institutions 94 

3. From credit by examination 30 

4. From extension & correspondence courses 24 

5. From credit /no credit courses 36 

6. From Reading Skills courses numbered at 

the 100- and 200-levels 4 

7. From Internship courses 6 

8. From Independent Study courses 9 


Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 


Residence Requirement 

A minimum of thirty (30) semester units must be 
earned in courses taken at California State Universi- 
ty. Fullerton. Twenty-four (24) of these units must be 
earned in upper division courses. At least twelve 
(12) upper division semester units In the major must 
be taken at this institution. Courses taken In exten- 
sion (except for summer session and Intersession 
courses offered as part of the special sessions pro- 
gram) and units earned through credit by examina- 
tion may not be used to fulfill these requirements. 

Grade Point Average 
Requirements 

Three grade point averages, each 2.0 or higher, are 
required for graduation: 

A. An average based on all units attempted, Includ- 
ing those attempted at other institutions. 

B. An average based on all units attempted at CSUF. 

C. An average based on all units attempted In the 
major. 

Distribution of Requirements 

A. General Education 

A minimum of 61 semester units are needed to com- 
plete CSUF’s general education requirements. See 
the “General Education" section of this catalog. 

B. Major 

The unit requirements in a major varies substantially 
from major to major. Some majors require as little as 
36 semester units while others require as much as 
106 units. Refer to the Department listings for the 
specific requirements of any particular major. 

C. Upper-Division Baccalaureate Writing 
Requirement 

The university requires that every person completing 
bachelor’s degrees under 1980-81 and later catalog 
requirements, demonstrate writing ability accept- 
able for graduation. The upper-division writing re- 
quirement has two parts; students must satisfy 
each: 

Upper-division course requirement: Each major re- 
quires that students pass a specially designated 
upper-division course or courses of at least three 
semester units. Examination requirement: The uni- 
versity faculty requires that each student pass the 
University Examination in Writing Proficiency 
(EWP), which has been designed to measure writ- 
ing ability. 

Courses. The University Board on Writing Proficien- 
cy must certify the course or courses that each ma- 
jor department designates to fulfill the requirement. 
Departments and programs may specify either a sin- 
gle course of at least three units which involves in- 


tensive instruction in writing, or two or more courses 
(a total of at least six units) in which students are re- 
quired to write one or more lengthy papers, or sever- 
al shorter ones, which Involve the organization and 
expression of complex ideas. In these courses stu- 
dents will be given careful and timely evaluations of 
their writing and suggestions for improvement. An 
assessment of writing competence will be included 
in determining the final course grade. 

Students must pass these courses with a grade of 
C or better. A list of courses designated for each 
major will appear in the class schedule each semes- 
ter. 

Examination. After completing 60 units toward the 
baccalaureate, students must take the University 
Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP). The EWP 
consists of two parts, a machine-scored test of 
Standard Written English, and a 90-minute essay 
which is evaluated by faculty readers. Students who 
fail the examination may retake It until they pass it. 
A limited number of students who have failed the 
EWP two or more times may enroll in English 199, In- 
tensive Writing Review. Credit in English 199 will be 
equivalent to passing the examination. This course 
will not count toward graduation requirements, nor 
will it satisfy the upper division writing course re- 
quirement described above. Information about regis- 
tration for the EWP and testing dates is published in 
the class schedule each semester. 

Petitions. In certain cases, students may petition the 
University Board on Writing Proficiency for exemp- 
tion from or modification of the requirement. 

1. Transfer students and candidates for a second 
baccalaureate may be certified as meeting the re- 
quirement after they have submitted to the Board 
acceptable evidence of having completed the 
equivalent to CSUF’s upper division requirement. 

2. Students may petition for substitution of an alter- 
native to the EWP when exceptional circum- 
stances. e g. a clinically Identified learning dis- 
ability. make the examination inappropriate. 
Petitions must include documentation of the spe- 
cial circumstances and propose specific alterna- 
tive means of demonstrating writing proficiency. 

D. Minors 

A minor is not required for the baccalaureate, how- 
ever, students may elect to complete one or more 
minors from those available and have that noted on 
their records. A minor consists of an academic pro- 
gram specified by the academic departments in the 
catalog. In completing the requirements for a minor, 
a minimum of twelve (12) units, of which at least six 
(6) must be upper division, must be distinct and dif- 
ferent from the units used to complete the require- 
ments of the major. Any units above this minimum re- 
quirement which can be used to satisfy both the 
requirements for the minor and for the major may be 
double counted. General education courses, how- 
ever, may be used to meet minor requirements. 

E. Electives 

After fulfilling the requirements in general education, 
and a specific major (and possibly a minor), each 


Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 


student is free to choose the rest of the courses 
needed to complete the semester units required for 
graduation. Different majors vary considerably In 
both the number of units they require In their own and 
related fields. They also vary considerably in the 
amount of latitude or choice they permit in selecting 
courses to satisfy the major requirement. The gener- 
al education requirement encourages freedom of ch- 
oice within the natural sciences, social sciences, 
arts and humanities, and basic subjects. Students at 
the university use their electives to broaden their 
general education, deepen some aspect of their 
specialties, pursue work In related fields, and satisfy 
curiosities and enthusiasms for particular subjects 
or areas of interest. 

Advisement on general education and electives is 
provided by the Academic Advisement Center. 

F. Multiple Majors and Second Baccalaureate 
Degrees 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate It is 
possible for a student to complete the requirements 
for more than one major within a degree program 
when the additional major is within the degree of the 
first major. At least 24 units. Including 12 at the up- 
per-division level, in each bachelor of arts major, or 
36 units, including 18 at the upper-division level. In 
each bachelor of science major, must be applied ex- 
clusively to the respective major and may not be 
used to meet requirements In other majors or In gen- 
eral education. The student shall declare the addi- 
tional major with the appropriate department not lat- 
er than the beginning of the student’s final year of 
study. The completion of additional majors will be 
noted at the time of graduation by appropriate en- 
tries on the academic record and in the commence- 
ment program. 

It is also possible for a student to complete a major 
In one degree program and an additional major from 
a different program, provided the minimum units de- 
scribed in the preceding paragraph are applied ex- 
clusively to the respective major and are not used 
in other majors or in general education. In this in- 
stance, the student has the option of which degree 
he or she will receive with the major appropriate to 
that degree. The completion of the additional major 
will be noted on the student’s academic record. The 
university does not award two degrees to the individ- 
ual who completes multiple majors in a four-year de- 
gree program. 

Second baccalaureate degrees: 

First degree completed elsewhere, second at Fuller- 
ton. Students seeking a bachelor’s degree from Ful- 
lerton after having received a baccalaureate from 
another institution may qualify for graduation with 
the approval and recommendation of the faculty 
upon completion of the following: 

(1) General Education requirements: Students hold- 
ing a baccalaureate degree from an accredited in- 
stitution will be held to (a) the breadth require- 
ments of Executive Order 338, i.e. 12 units In each 
of the areas of arts and humanities, social sci- 
ences, and math and science, (b) the statutory re- 
quirements and (c) the English Writing Proficiency 


requirements. Students will not be held to specific 
CSUF categories or courses. 

(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 

Two baccalaureates from Fullerton. With the ap- 
proval and recommendation of the faculty, a student 
may qualify for a second baccalaureate under the 
following circumstances: 

(1) The second field of study Is offered in a different 
degree (e.g., B.A. to B.S.) 

(2) At least 30 units, including 24 upper-division units 
and 12 in the major, are earned in residence after 
the conferral of the first degree 

(3) all requirements of the major are fulfilled 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs 
may not apply to graduate degrees or credential 
programs. 

Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation must file an application 
for a graduation requirements check during registra- 
tion week for the semester prior to the semester In 
which the student expects to graduate. The gradua- 
tion and diploma fee is required when the application 
Is filed. Application forms are available at the Admis- 
sions and Records information counter and in the 
graduation unit. 

Candidates for the baccalaureate should refer to the 
semester class schedule for application filing dates. 
A senior should have completed at least 100 units 
(Including the current work In progress) and a sub- 
stantial portion of the major requirements before re- 
questing a graduation check. If the candidate does 
not complete the requirements In the semester indi- 
cated. a change of graduation date must be filed in 
the Office of Admissions and Records. 

Faculty Approval and 
Recommendation 

Under provisions of the Academic Senate, the Office 
of Admissions and Records publishes a list of de- 
gree candidates twice a year: in the fall and In the 
spring (for both spring and summer graduates). After 
review and approval by the faculty, and upon verifi- 
cation of the completion of requirements, diplomas 
are issued with the last day of the respective term 
as the official date of graduation. 

Annual commencement exercises are held at the 
end of the spring semester for those who completed 
degree requirements mid-year and for those com- 
pleting degree requirements in the spring semester 
or summer session. The president of the university, 
with the authority of the Board of Trustees, confers 
all degrees, subject to the completion of remaining 
requirements. 

Note: Students completing bachelor degree require- 
ments who wish to continue their studies at the uni- 
versity for postbaccalaureate or graduate degree 
objectives must apply for admission declaring their 
new objective. 


Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 


General Education 


General Education Objectives 

The general education-breadth requirements are de- 
signed so that, taken with the major-depth program 
and electives presented by each baccalaureate 
candidate, they will assure that graduates have 
made noteworthy progress toward becoming truly 
educated persons. Particularly, the purpose of 
these requirements is to provide means whereby 
graduates: 

A. will have achieved the ability to think clearly and 
logically, to find and critically examine informa- 
tion, to communicate orally and in writing, and to 
perform quantitative functions; 

B. will have acquired appreciable knowledge about 
their own bodies and minds, about how human so- 
ciety has developed and how It now functions, 
about the physical world in which they live, about 
the other forms of life with which they share that 
world, and about the cultural endeavors and lega- 
cies of their civilization; 

C. will have come to an understanding and apprecia- 
tion of the principles, methodologies, value sys- 
tems. and thought processes employed in human 
inquiries. 

General Education 
Requirements 

All students beginning studies fall 1987 or later must 
complete a minimum of 61 semester units of general 
education courses selected In accordance with the 
pattern designated on the following pages. General 
education courses must be selected from an ap- 
proved list. Students should refer to the latest uni- 
versity Schedule of Classes for the most up-to-date 
list of approved classes. 

Students must complete at least nine units of upper- 
division general education course work taken after 
the student has achieved junior standing. At least 


nine units of general education must be earned in 
residence at California State University, Fullerton. 

Courses offered by the department of the student’s 
major may not be used to fulfill the unit requirement 
of categories III through IV, except in those cases 
where the same course is required both In the major 
and in general education and no alternative from any 
other department is available. Also, no more than 
nine units from any single department may be used 
in meeting the requirements of general education. 

At least three (3) semester units of Cultural Diversity 
course work must be taken from among the aster- 
isked courses In Section IV.A.1. or IV. A. 2. At least 
one laboratory course must be taken from among the 
asterisked courses in Sections III.A.I., III. A. 2., or III. 
A.3. 

Among the following list of requirements a few 
courses appear in more than one category. These 
courses may only be used to fulfill the requirements 
of one, and not both, of the categories within which 
they appear. 

A score of T 145 or higher on the English Placement 
Test (EPT), or completion of English 99 with a grade 
of C or better, is a prerequisite for enrollment in 
courses in category I.A.2. Written Communication, 
for all students except those with an exemption. 

A score of 38 or higher on the Entry Level Mathemat- 
ics (ELM) examination Is a prerequisite for enroll- 
ment in courses In Category II. A. 4. Mathematics for 
all students except those with an exemption. 

Certification Policy 

Under provisions of Executive Orders 338 and 342, 
accredited colleges and universities may certify the 
completion of part of the 48-61 units required In gen- 
eral education. Within the policy of the Board of 
Trustees, Cal State Fullerton will accept such certifi- 
cation of general education up to a maximum of 39 
semester units, but may accept no more in general 
education than the number of units required In each 
area and no more than 30 units In areas in which the 
student has not been certified. 


General Education 


CSUF GENERAL EDUCATION CATEGORIES AND 
COMMUNITY COLLEGE EQUIVALENT CATEGORIES 


Community College 
Category 

I. Basic Subjects (9 units minimum) 

NOTE: Grade of C or better required In each section of category I. 

A. Oral Communication (3 units minimum) A-1 

B. Written Communication (3 units minimum) (Prerequisite: EPT) A-2 

C. Critical Thinking (3 units minimum) A-3 

D. Reading none 

ii. Historical and Cultural Foundations (12 units minimum) 

A. The Development of Civilization (6 units minimum) 

1. Western Civilization to the Renaissance C-6 

2. Western Civilization since the Renaissance D-6 

B. American History, Institutions and Values (6 units minimum) 

1. American History (3 units minimum) D-6/F-1 

2. Government (3 units minimum) F-2 

III. Disciplinary Core Courses (21 units minimum) 

A. Mathematics and Natural Science (12 units minimum)* 

1. Physical Science (3 units minimum) B-1 

2. Biological Science (3 units minimum) B-2 

3. Alternatives in the Natural Sciences none 

* At least one laboratory course B-3 

4. Mathematics (3 units minimum) (Prerequisite: ELM) B-4 

NOTE: Grade of C or better required in section III. A. 4. 

B. Arts and Humanities (6 units minimum) 

1. Introduction to the Arts (3 units minimum) C-1 

2. Introduction to the Humanities (3 units minimum) C-2 thru C-4 

C. Social Sciences (3 units minimum) 

1. introduction to the Social Sciences (3 units minimum) D-1 thru D-4 

IV. Implications, Explorations and Life-Long Learning (9 units minimum) 

A. Implications and Explorations (6 units minimum)** 

1. Implications/Explorations/Participatory Experience 

in the Arts and Humanities (3 units minimum) C-1 thru C-6 

2. Implications /Explorations in the Social Sciences (3 units minimum) D-1 thru D-5 

**At least one asterisked Cultural Diversity course C-7/D-7 

B. Life-Long Learning (3 units minimum) E 


General Education 


I. BASIC SUBJECTS (9 units minimum) 

NOTE; A grade of “C” or better is required in sec- 
tions I.A., I.B., and I.C. and III.B.4. 

A. Oral Communication (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are designed to impart skills in 
the use of human symbolic interaction, focusing on 
effective speaking. Choose from; 

Chicano Studies 102 Communication Skills (3) 
Speech Comm 100 Introduction to Human Commu- 
nication (3) 

Speech Comm 102 Public Speaking (3) 

Theatre 1 10 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

B. Written Communication (3 units minimum) 

The course in this area is designed to Impart skills 
in organizing, analyzing, and expressing thoughts 
and concepts In standard written English. Students 
must pass the English Placement Test prior to enroll- 
ing In the course. 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 

C. Critical Thinking (3 units minimum) 

Courses In this area are designed to develop skills 
in critical thinking. Including the ability to distinguish 
fact from judgment and belief from knowledge, to 
reason inductively and deductively, and to under- 
stand the formal and informal fallacies of language 
and thought. Choose from; 

English 103 Critical Reasoning and Writing (3) 
Philosophy 200 Argument and Reasoning (3) 
Philosophy 210 Logic (3) 

Psychology 110 Reasoning and Problem 
Solving (3) 

Speech Comm 235 Essentials of Argumentation 
and Debate (3) 

D. Reading Communication 

The course In this area is designed to impart skills 
in the use of human symbolic interaction, focusing on 
effective reading. 

Reading 201 Academic Reading: Analysis & Strat- 
egies (3) 

II. HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL FOUNDATIONS 
(12 units minimum) 

A. The Development of Civilization (6 units 
minimum) 

Courses in this area give a holistic view of the devel- 
opment of society--lts values, traditions, and institu- 
tions. 

History 1 10A Western Civ. to the 16th Century (3) 
AND 

History 110B Western Civilization Since the 16th 
Century (3) 

B. American History, Institutions and Values (6 
units minimum) 

Courses in these sections meet Title 5, section 
40404, requirements by providing “comprehensive 
study of American history and American government 
including the historical development of American In- 


stitutions and ideals, the Constitution of the United 
States and the operation of representative demo- 
cratic government under the Constitution, and the 
process of state and local government.” 

1. American History (3 units minimum) 

Choose from; 

Afro-Ethnic 190 Surv. of Am. Hist, v/ith Emphasis 
on Ethnic Minorities (3) 

Chicano Studies 190 Surv. of Am. Hist, with Em- 
phasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 

American Studies 201 Introduction to American 
Studies (3) 

History 170A United States to 1877 (3) 

History 170B United States Since 1877 (3) 

History 180 Survey of American History (3) 

History 190 Surv. of Am. Hist, with Emphasis on 
Ethnic Minorities (3) 

NOTE: Students who take History 170A must also 
take History 170B and vice versa. 

2. Government (3 units minimum) 

Political Science 100 American Government (3) 

A/OTE; Transfer students from outside the State of 
California who have ALREADY completed a 
basic course in American Government may 
substitute Political Science 300 Contempo- 
rary Issues in California Government and Poli- 
tics (3) for Political Science 100. 

III. DISCIPLINARY CORE COURSES (21 units 
minimum) 

A. Mathematics and Natural Sciences (12 units) 

At least one laboratory course must be taken in III. 
A.I., III. A. 2., or III. A. 3. Approved laboratory courses 
are indicated with an asterisk (*). 

1. Physical Science (3 units minimum) 

Courses In this area provide the content and meth- 
odology that form the bases for studies In the physi- 
cal sciences. Choose from; 

Chemistry 100 Survey of Chemistry (3) 

Chemistry 100L* Survey of Chemistry Lab (1) 
Chemistry 115* Introductory General 
Chemistry (4) 

Chemistry 120A* General Chemistry (5) 
Geological Sci 101 Physical Geology (3) 
Geological Sci 101L* Physical Geology Lab (1) 
Physics 123 Perspectives of Man’s Physical Uni- 
verse (3) 

Physics 123L* Perspectives of Man’s Physical 
Universe Lab (1) 

Physics 21 1 A Elementary Physics (3) 

Physics 21 1AL* Elementary Physics Lab (1) 
Physics 225A Fundamental Physics: 

Mechanics (3) 

Physics 225AL* Fundamental Physics: Lab (1) 

2. Biological Science (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area provide the content and meth- 
odology that form the bases for studies in the biolog- 
ical sciences. 


General Education 


Biological Sci 101 Elements of Biology (3) 
Biological Sci 101L* Elements of Biology (1) 
Biological Sci 141 Principles of Botany (2) 
Biological Sci 141L* Principles of Botany Lab (2) 
Biological Sci 161 Principles of Zoology (2) 
Biological Sci 161L* Principles of Zoology Lab(2) 

3. Alternatives in Natural Sciences and 
Mathematics 


Courses in this area are topical and thematic spe- 
cialized inquiries into the contributions of the sci- 
ences and mathematics. These courses have a sub- 
stantial scientific and/or mathematical content. In 
addition, they are either introductory to the major 
subdisciplines or they relate science and/or mathe- 
matics to significant social problems or other relat- 
ed disciplines. At least one lab course is required. 


Anthropology 101 
thropology (3) 
Anthropology 375 
Biological Sci 102 
Biology (3) 
Biological Sci 305 
Development (3) 
Biological Sci 306 
Biological Sci 313 
Biological Sci 314 
Biological Sci 317 


Introduction to Biological An- 

Sclence In Archaeology (3) 
Issues in Environmental 

Human Heredity & 


Biology of Aging (3) 

Human Genetics (3) 

Human Issues in Genetics (1) 
Wildlife Conservation: Current 
Issues and Future Directions (1) 

Biological Sci 319 Marine Biology (3) 

Biological Sci 319L* Marine Biology Lab (1) 
Biological Sci 323 Biol, of Sexually Transmitted 
Diseases (STD) (1) 

Biological Sci 352 Plants and Life (3) 

Biological Sci 353 Principles of Horticulture (2) 
Biological Sci 353L* Principles of Horticulture 
Lab (1) 

Biological Sci 360 Biology Of Human Sexuality (1) 
Biological Sci 367 Insects & The Human 
Ecosystem (3) 

Chemistry 1 1 1 Nutrition & Drugs (3) 

Computer Sci 381 Knowledge Engineering (3) 
Geography 110 Principles of Physical 
Geography (3) 

Geography 120 Environment and Change (3) 
Geological Sci 120 Introduction to Earth 
Science (3) 

Geological Sci 120L* Earth Science Lab (1) 
Geological Sci 140 Earth’s Atmosphere (3) 

Earth History (4) 

Topics in California Related 


Geological Sci 201 
Geological Sci 310 
Geology (1-3) 
Geological Sci 333 
Geological Sci 335 
Geological Sci 340 
Geological Sci 376 
History 230 
History 430 


Present (3) 


Oceanography (3) 
General Hydrology (3) 
General Meterology (3) 
Applied Geology (3) 
Ascent of Man (3) 

Hist, of Sci.: Copernicus to the 


Philosophy 303 Introduction to Philosophy of Sci- 
ence (3) 

Philosophy 384 Philosophy of the Physical Sci- 
ences (3) 

Philosophy 386 Philosophy of Biology (3) 
Physical Sci 100 Man and His Physical Environ- 
ment (4) 

Physics 100 
Physics 105 
ence (1) 

Physics 107 
ciety (1) 

Physics 200 
Physics 384 
Sciences (3) 

Sociology 303 
Sciences (3) 

Speech Comm 303 
tion (3) 

4. Mathematics (3 units minimum) 


Man and His Physical Environment (4) 
Fads & Fallacies in the Name of Sci- 

Nuclear Energy and Its Impact on So- 

Introduction to Astronomy (4) 
Philosophy of the Physical 

Statistics for the Social 


Biology of Human Communica- 


Courses in this area are designed to provide a basis 
for understanding mathematical concepts and meth- 
odologies and their applications. A grade of "C" or 
better is required in this section. Students must pass 
the Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) test before tak- 
ing any course in this section. Choose from: 


Management Sci 361 Prob. & Stat. Methods in 
Bus. & Econ. (4) 

Mathematics 100 Precalculus Mathematics (4) 

Mathematics 110 Mathematics for Liberal Arts 
Students (3) 

Mathematics 120 Intro to Probability & Statistics 
(3) 

Mathematics 130 A Short Course In Calculus (4) 

Mathematics 135 Business Calculus (3) 

Mathematics 150A Analytic Geometry and Calcu- 
lus (4) 

Mathematics 338 Stat. Applied to Natural Sci- 
ences (3) 

Mathematics 368 First Course In Symbolic 
Logic (3) 

Philosophy 368 First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

B. Arts and Humanities (6 units minimum) 

1. Introduction to the Arts (3 units minimum) 


Courses In this area are designed to motivate stu- 
dents to cultivate and refine their affective, cognitive 
and physical faculties through studying great works 
of the human imagination. Choose from: 


Art 101 Introduction to Art (3) 

Art 201A,B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

Art 31 1 Foundations of Modern Art (3) 

Art 3 1 2 Art of the 20th Century- 1 900 to Present (3) 
Dance 101 Introduction to Dance (3) 

Music 100 Introduction to Music (3) 

Music 101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 
Theatre 100 Introduction to the Theatre (3) 
Theatre 175 History of Western Theatre (3) 


General Education 


2. Introduction to the Humanities (3 units 
minimum) 

Courses in this area introduce students to reflective 
inquiry into the values and subjective responses of 
civilization in its language, philosophy, and litera- 
ture. 

Anthropology 100 Non-Western Cultures & the 
West. Tradition (3) 

Comparative Lit 110 Literature of the Western 
World from Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 
Comparative Lit 111 Literature of the Western 
World from the Renaissance through the 19th 
Century (3) 

World Literature to 1650 (3) 
World Literature from 1650 


African Literature (3) 
Masters of Russian Literature 


Comparative Lit 324 
Comparative Lit 325 
(3) 

Comparative Lit 352 
Comparative Lit 373 
(3) 

English 1 10 Literature of the Western World from 
Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 

English 1 1 1 Literature of the Western World from 
Renaissance through the 19th Century (3) 
English 200 Introduction to Literature (3) 

English 31 1 Masters of British Literature to 1760 
(3) 

English 312 Masters of British Literature from 
1760 (3) 

English 321 American Literature to Whitman (3) 
English 322 American Literature from Twain to the 


Lan- 


Moderns (3) 
Foreign Lang 

101 

Fundamental 

Foreign 

guages (3-5) 
Foreign Lang 

102 

Fundamental 

Foreign 

guages (3-5) 





Lan- 


Foreign Lang 203 Intermediate Foreign Languages 
(3-5) 

Foreign Lang 204 Intermediate Foreign Languages 
(3-5) 

Chinese 101 Fundamental Chinese (5) 

French 230 Intermediate Diction and Phonetics (2) 
French 240 Intermediate Conversation and Comp. 
( 2 ) 

German 100A-K Personalized Inst, in Fund. Ger- 
man (3-10) 

German 213 Intermediate Reading (2) 

German 214 Intermediate Reading (2) 

Greek 299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Italian 299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Latin 299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Spanish 103 Intensive Review of Fundamental 


Spanish (5) 
Spanish 201 
Spanish 213 
Spanish 214 
Linguistics 106 
Linguistics 301 
Philosophy 100 
Philosophy 1 10 
Religions (3) 


Spanish for Hispanics (3) 
Intermediate Conversation (2) 
Intermediate Composition (2) 
Language and Linguistics (3) 
Sanskrit (3) 

Introduction to Philosophy (3) 
Comp. Study of the World’s Great 


The Western Tradition: Philoso- 


History of Philosophy: Greek Phi- 


Philosophy 115A The Western Tradition: Philoso- 
phy (3) 

Philosophy 115B 
phy (3) 

Philosophy 290 
losophy (3) 

Philosophy 300 History of Philosophy: Rationalism 
& Empiricism (3) 

Philosophy 310 Ethics (3) 

Religious Studies 101 Fundamental Hebrew-A (4) 
Religious Studies 102 Fundamental Hebrew-B (4) 
Religious Studies 1 10 Comp. Study of the World’s 
Great Religions (3) 

Religious Studies 200 
(3) 

Religious Studies 210 
Religious Studies 301 


Introduction to Christianity 

Intro, to Judaism 
Sanskrit (3) 


C. Social Sciences (3 units minimum) 


1. Introduction to the Social Sciences (3 units 
minimum) 

Courses in this area provide an introduction to the 
conceptual and methodological aspects of the so- 
cial sciences to human, social, political, and eco- 
nomic institutions and behavior in their contempo- 
rary and historical settings. 


Introduction to Cultural Anthro- 


American Studies 101 Intro, to American Culture 
Studies (3) 

Anthropology 102 
pology (3) 

Anthropology 327 Origins of Civilization (3) 
Economics 100 The Economic Environment (3) 

Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Principles of Economics (3) 

World Habitats (3) 

Introduction to the Study of Poli- 


Economics 201 
Economics 210 
Geography 100 
Political Sci 200 
tics (3) 

Psychology 101 
Sociology 101 


Introductory Psychology (3) 
Introduction to Sociology (3) 


IV. IMPLICATIONS, EXPLORATIONS AND LIFE- 
LONG LEARNING (9 units minimum) 


A. Implications and Explorations in the Arts and 
Humanities (6 units minimum) 

At least one asterisked (*) course in IV. A. 1., or IV. 
A. 2. must be taken. Asterisked courses fulfill the cul- 
tural diversity requirement. Cultural diversity 
courses are designed to enhance understanding of 
cultural differences within or between western and/ 
or non-western societies. 


1. Implications, Explorations and Participatory 
Experience in the Arts and Humanities (3 
units minimum) 

Courses in this area deepen the appreciation of the 
content of III.B.1. and III.B.2. Choose from: 


Afro-Ethnic 314 Pan-African Dance and 
Movement (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 320 Black American Intellectual 
Thought (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 352 African Literature (3) 


General Education 


Afro-Ethnic 403 Oral History of Ethnic 
America (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 410 Afro-American Literature (3) 
Afro-Ethnic 437 American Indian Religions and Phi- 
losophy (3) 

Afro-Ethnic 460 Afro-American Music 
Appreciation (3)* 

Anthropology 104 Traditional Cultures of the 
World (3)* 

Anthropology 305 Anthropology of Religion (3)* 
Anthropology 306 Comp. Aesthetics and Symbol- 
ism (3)* 

Art 100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Art 103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 106A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Art 107A,B Beginning Drawing & Painting (3,3) 

Art 205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Art 216A Beginning Sculpture (3) 

Art 326A Ceramic Sculpture (3) 

Art 338A Creative Photography (3) 

Art 364A Stained Glass (3) 

Chicano Studies 302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3)* 
Chicano Studies 304 Music of Mexico* 

Chicano Studies 316 The Chicano Music Experi- 
ence (3)* 

Chicano Studies 336 Main Trends in Spanlsh- 
Amer. Lit. (3) 

Chicano Studies 337 Contemporary Chicano Liter- 
ature (3) 

Chicano Studies 430 The Evolution of Mexican Lit. 
(3) 

Chicano Studies 433 Mexican Literature Since 
1940 (3) 

Chicano Studies 440 Mexican Intellectual Thought 
(3)* 

Comparative Lit 312 Bible as Literature (3) 
Comparative Lit 315 Classical Mythology In World 
Lit. (3) 

Comparative Lit 374 Soviet Literature (3) 
Comparative Lit 424 Chinese Literature (3)* 
Comparative Lit 426 Japanese Literature (3)* 
Dance 1 12 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

Dance 122A Beginning Modern Dance (2) 

Dance 126 Dance Improvisation (2) 

Dance 132 Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

Dance 301 Dance and Cultural Diversity (3)* 
English 105 Introduction to Creative Writing (3) 
English 204 Intermediate Creative Writing (3) 
English 320 Literature of the American Indians (3)* 
English 352 African Literature (3) 

English 353 Cultural Pluralism in Amer. Lit. (3)* 
English 354 Linguistics & Literature (3) 

French 315 Origins of Modern France (3)* 

French 375 Introduction to Literature (3) 

German 315 Introduction to German 
Civilization (3)* 

German 375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 
Japanese 315 Introduction to Japanese Civiliza- 
tion (3)* 

Japanese 316 Modern Japan (3)* 


Portuguese 320 Intro to Luso-Brazilian Culture and 
Civilization (3)* 

Spanish 315 Intro to Spanish Civilization (3)* 
Spanish 316 Intro to Spanish-American 
Civilization (3)* 

Spanish 375 Intro to Literary Forms (3) 

History 465A History of India (3)* 

History 483 American Religious History (3) 

Library 200 Elements of Bibliographic Investiga- 
tion (3) 

Linguistics 354 Linguistics and Literature (3) 

Music 183 Voice Class for Non-majors (1) 

Music 184A Plano Class for Non-majors (1) 

Music 184B Plano Class for Non-majors (1) 

Music 301 Techniques of Song Writing (3) 

Music 302 History of Jazz (3)* 

Music 303 Ethnic Music (3)* 

Music 304 Music of Mexico (3)* 

Music 352 Symphonic Music in Western /Eastern 
Cultures (3) 

Music 361A Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Music 361B University Choir (1) 

Music 361C University Concert Band (1) 

Music 361E University Singers (1) 

Music 361F University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Music 361W Women’s Choir (1) 

Music 362L Lab Band (1) 

Philosophy 312 Business & Professional Ethics (3) 
Philosophy 314 Medical Ethics (3) 

Philosophy 323 Existentialism (3) 

Philosophy 350 Oriental Philosophy (3)* 

Political Sci 340 Political Philosophy (3) 

Religious Studies 250 The Religion of Islam (3)* 
Religious Studies 270 Intro to the Oriental Reli- 
gions (3)* 

Religious Studies 345A Hist. & Dev. of Christian 
Thought: The Beginning to 1274 (3) 

Religious Studies 345B Hist. & Dev. of Christian 
Thought; 1275 to the Present (3) 

Rel^lous Studies 346A Hist. & Dev. of Jewish 
Thought: Biblical Origins to Maimonides (3) 
Religious Studies 346B Hist. & Dev. of Jewish 
Thought: 1204 to the Present (3) 

Religious Studies 347A Hist. & Dev. of Hinduism to 
1200 (3)* 

Religious Studies 347B Hist. & Dev. of Hinduism 
from 1200 (3)* 

Religious Studies 350 Major Christian Traditions 
(3) 

Theatre 163 Beginning Acting (3) 

Theatre 206A Mime and Pantomime (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare 
(3) 

Theatre 410A Oral Interpretation of Prose Lit. (3) 
Theatre 410B Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 
Theatre 4 IOC Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 
Theatre 411 Oral Interpretation of Children’s Lit. 
(3) 

Theatre 414 Readers Theatre (3) 


General Education 


2. Implications and Explorations in the Social 
Sciences (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are topical and thematic, spe- 
cialized inquiries into the contributions of the social 
sciences to the understanding of human behavior, 
both within and across traditional disciplines. 
Choose from: 

Afro-Ethnic 101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3)* 
Afro-Ethnic 107 Introduction to Afro-American 
Studies (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 220 The Indian in American History 
(3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 245 A Study of Black Political Develop- 
ment to 1900 (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 280 Afro-American History (3)* 
Afro-Ethnic 301 Afro-American Culture (3)* 
Afro-Ethnic 309 The Black Family (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 310 Black Women in America (3)* 
Afro-Ethnic 31 1 Intracultural Socialization Patterns 
(3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 312 American Indian Women (3)* 
Afro-Ethnic 317 Black Politics (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 331 Tribalism and Reservation Life 
(3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 335 History of Racism (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 346 The African Experience (3)* 
Afro-Ethnic 422 Psychology of the Afro-American 
(3)* 

American Studies 300 Introduction to Amer. Popu- 
lar Culture (3) 

American Studies 301 The American Character 
(3)* 

American Studies 345 The American Dream (3) 
American Studies 386A American Social History, 
1750-1860 (3) 

American Studies 386B American Social History, 
1865-1930 (3) 

American Studies 4 1 1 The White Ethnic in America 
(3)* 

American Studies 450 Women in American Society 
(3)* 

Anthropology 103 Introduction to Archaeology (3) 
Anthropology 300 Language and Culture (3) 
Anthropology 302 Culture and Personality: Psy- 
chological Anthropology (3) 

Anthropology 321 The American Indian (3)* 
Anthropology 325 Peoples of South America (3)* 
Anthropology 327 Origins of Civilizations (3) 
Anthropology 328 Peoples of Africa (3)* 
Anthropology 340 Peoples of Asia (3)* 
Anthropology 345 Peoples of the Mid. East & No. 
Africa (3)* 

Anthropology 347 Peoples of the Pacific (3)* 
Anthropology 360 Contemporary American Culture 
( 3 )* 

Anthropology 450 Culture and Education (3) 

Child Dev 312 Human Growth and Development (3) 
Chicano Studies 106 Introduction to Chicano 
Studies (3)* 

Chicano Studies 220 Mexican Heritage (3)* 
Chicano Studies 305 The Chicano Family (3)* 


Chicano Studies 403 Cult. Diffs. in Mexico & the 
Southwest (3)* 

Chicano Studies 406 La Chicana (3)* 

Chicano Studies 431 The Chicano Child (3)* 
Chicano Studies 432 The Chicano Adolescent (3)* 
Chicano Studies 445 History of the Chicano (3)* 
Chicano Studies 450 The Chicano and Contempo- 
rary Issues (3)* 

Chicano Studies 453 Mexico Since 1906 (3)* 
Chicano Studies 460 The Chicano and Politics 
(3)* 

Communications 233 Mass Communication In 
Modern Society (3) 

Counseling 380 Theories and Techniques of Coun- 
seling (3) 

Criminal Justice 300 Introduction to Criminal Jus- 
tice (3) 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
Economics 330 Comparative Economic Systems 
(3) 

Economics 331 The Soviet Economy (3) 
Economics 332 Economic Problems of Asia (3) 
Economics 333 Econ. Dev.: Analysis & Case 
Studies (3) 

Economics 334 Econ. Prob. of Latin Amer. & the 
Caribbean (3) 

Economics 350 American Economic History (3) 
Economics 361 Urban Economics (3) 

Economics 362 Environmental and Resource Eco- 
nomics (3) 

Geography 160 Culture and Environment (3) 
Geography 170 The City (3) 

Geography 332 United States and Canada (3)* 
Geography 333 Latin America (3)* 

Geography 344 Africa (3)* 

Geography 350 Conservation & Ecology In Ameri- 
ca (3) 

History 270 Women in American History (3)* 
History 350 History of Latin Amer. Civilization (3)* 
History 360 Modern Asia: Nationalism & Revolu- 
tionary Change (3)* 

History 370 American Sex Reformers (3) 

History 386A American Social History, 1750-1860 
(3) 

History 386B American Social History, 1865-1930 
(3) 

History 452 20th Century Brazil (3)* 

History 455 Latin American Since 1945 (3)* 
Human Services 311 Intracultural Socialization 
Patterns (3) 

Human Services 380 Theories and Techniques of 
Counseling (3) 

Linguistics 108 Linguistics and Minority Dialects 
( 3 )* 

Linguistics 369 Language, Sex Roles and the 
Brain (3) 

Linguistics 412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Philosophy 302 Introduction to Women’s Studies 
(3)* 


General Education 


Philosophy 34 1 Assumptions of Psychotherapy (3) 
Philosophy 385 Philosophy of Social Sciences (3) 


Physical Educ 381 Human Movement in Cultural 
Perspective (3) 

Political Sci 300 Contemporary Issues in Calif. 

Government & Politics (3) 

Political Sci 309 Introduction to Metropolitan Poli- 
tics (3) 

Political Sci 310 American Political Behavior (3) 
Political Sci 315 American Political Process (3) 
Political Sci 317 Black Politics (3)* 

Political Sci 320 Politics, Policy and Administra- 
tion (3) 

Political Sci 330 Comparative Political Analysis 
(3) 


Political Sci 350 
Political Sci 352 
Political Sci 375 
Political Sci 445 


World Politics (3) 

American Foreign Policy (3) 
Public Law (3) 

Political Learning & Socialization 


(3) 

Political Sci 460 
Psychology 312 
Behavior (3) 
Psychology 31 1 
Psychology 331 
Psychology 341 
Psychology 350 
Psychology 351 
Psychology 361 
Psychology 362 
Sociology 133 
Sociology 361 
Sociology 37 1 
Sociology 407 
(3) 

Sociology 431 
Sociology 436 
Sociology 450 
Sociology 451 
Sociology 455 
Sociology 456 
Sociology 465 
Social Science 385 
(3) 

Speech Comm 320 
(3)* 


The Chicano & Politics (3)* 

The Psych, of Human Sexual 

Educational Psychology (3) 
Psychology of Personality (3) 
Abnormal Psychology (3) 
Environmental Psychology (3) 
Social Psychology (3) 
Developmental Psychology (3) 
Psychology of Aging (3) 
Introduction to Gerontology (3) 
Population Problems (3) 

Urban Sociology (3) 

Women in Contemporary Society 

Minority Group Relations (3)* 
Social Stratification (3)* 

Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 
Sociology of the Family (3) 
Medical Sociology (3) 

Mental Illness (3) 

Law and Society (3) 

Philosophy of Social Sciences 

Inter Cultural Communication 


B. Life-Long Learning (3 units minimum) 

Courses In this section facilitate understanding of 
the human being as an integrated physiological, so- 
cial. and psychological organism. They may also in- 
tegrate major areas of earlier portions of the general 
education program (Sections II. through IV. A. 2.). 
Choose from: 


American Studies 450 
(3) 

Anthropology 415 
Anthropology 417 
Anthropology 432 
spective (3) 
Biological Sci 306 
Biological Sci 314 
Biological Sci 360 
Chemistry 1 1 1 
Child Dev 312 


Women in American Society 


Culture & Nutrition (3) 

Life Quests (3) 

Women in Cross-Cultural 


Per- 


Biology of Aging (3) 

Human Issues in Genetics (1) 
Biology of Human Sexuality (1) 
Nutrition & Drugs (3) 

Human Growth and Development (3) 


The Chicano Family (3) 
Images of Women in Lltera- 


Chlcano Studies 305 
Comparative Lit 355 
ture (3) 

English 355 Images of Women In Literature (3) 
English 356 The Literature of Aging (3) 
Geography 357 Social Geography.: Perception & 
Behavior (3) 

Health Education 101 Personal Health (3) 

Health Education 301 Promotion of Optimal Health 
(3) 


Human Services 300 Character and Conflict (3) 
Music 350 Music In Our Society (3) 

Nursing 301 Promotion of Optimal Health (3) 
Philosophy 120 Philosophy of the Person (3) 
Philosophy 312 Business & Professional Ethics (3) 
Philosophy 324 Existential Group (3) 

Physical Education 350 Physical Activity & Life- 
long Well-being (3) 

Psychology 312 The Psych, of Human Sexual Be- 
havior (3) 

Psychology 361 Developmental Psychology (3) 
Psychology 362 Psychology of Aging (3) 
Sociology 341 Social Interaction (3) 

Sociology 350 Social Relationships and Emotions 
(3) 

Sociology 451 Sociology of the Family (3) 
Sociology 460 Death and Dying (3) 

Speech Comm 345 Communications and Aging (3) 


General Education 


Teaching Credential 
Programs 


California State University, Fullerton offers a full 
range of State-approved credential programs lead- 
ing to careers In education. From its earliest days to 
the present, this has been one of the chief missions 
of the university. Pursuing a teaching credential In 
California Is a complicated matter because of the 
number of specific requirements that must be met. 
Credential requirements are established by the Leg- 
islature and enforced by the Commission on Teacher 
Credentlaling (CTC). This commission also reviews 
and approves all credential preparation programs, 
such as those at the university. An academic major 
in education is not permitted in California, thus stu- 
dents seeking teaching credentials must do so in 
conjunction with, or after the completion of, a bacca- 
laureate degree program in an academic area out- 
side of education. CSUF offers programs leading to 
basic teaching credentials, specialist credentials, 
and services credentials. The specialist and ser- 
vices credentials, described briefly below, are more 
advanced programs designed to be taken In con- 
junction with graduate study. 

In this section of the catalog information Is pres- 
ented regarding: 

A. Basic Credential Programs 

B. The Multiple Subject Credential and Waiver 
Program 

C. The Single Subject Credentials and Waiver 
Programs 

D. Supplementary Authorizations for the Basic 
Teaching Credentials 

E. Specialist and Services Credentials 

A. Basic Credential Programs 

In California there are two basic teaching creden- 
tials, the Multiple Subjects Credential and the Single 
Subject Credential. The Multiple Subjects Credential 
authorizes a person to teach in a classroom where 
many different subjects are taught by a single indi- 
vidual, such as in elementary schools. The Single 
Subject Credential authorizes a teacher to teach In 
a classroom where only one subject is taught, such 
as a classroom in departmentalized high schools 
and some junior high schools. Thus the person inter- 
ested in elementary school teaching should pursue 
the program designed for the Multiple Subjects Cre- 
dential. and the person interested in teaching a spe- 
cific subject at the junior high or high school level 



Teaching Credential Programs 


should pursue the program for the Single Subject 
Credential. 

In California a person can earn first a preliminary an6 
then a clear basic teaching credential. The require- 
ments for the clear credential are built on those for 
the preliminary credential. The preliminary creden- 
tial is the level that authorizes beginning teaching. 

Minimum Requirements for a Preiiminary Muitipie 
or Single Subject Credential 

Although it Is possible to complete the minimum re- 
quirements for a preliminary basic teaching creden- 
tial in four years, it generally takes a good student 
with accurate academic advising about four and a 
half years full time to complete all the requirements 
for a preliminary basic teaching credential and a 
baccalaureate degree. The minimum requirements 
for a preliminary basic credential include: 

1. A baccalaureate degree in a field other than pro- 
fessional education from a regionally accredited 
college or university. 

2. An approved program of professional preparation, 
including supervised student teaching. This two 
semester program is taken during the fourth and/ 
or fifth year of study. Cal State Fullerton offers 
State approved professional preparation pro- 
grams through the School of Human Development 
and Community Service. Further information about 
these programs. Including admission and prereq- 
uisite requirements, is provided in this catalog un- 
der the Department of Elementary and Bilingual 
Education, and the Secondary Teacher Education 
Program. 

3. Passage of the California Basic Education Skills 
Test (CBEST), a test of reading, writing, critical 
thinking and mathematics skills. CSUF is one of 
the State-approved testing centers for this exami- 
nation as well as for other examinations used in 
the teacher credentialing process. 

4. Demonstration of subject matter knowledge ap- 
propriate to the specific credential being autho- 
rized. This can be achieved either by passing a 
State-approved subject matter examination or by 
completing a State-approved examination Waiver 
Program. Cal State Fullerton offers Waiver Pro- 
grams for the Multiple Subjects subject matter ex- 
amination and for 14 Single Subject examination 
areas. These programs are described In more de- 
tail below. 

5. Satisfactory completion of at least two semester 
units of work on the provisions and principles of 
the U.S. Constitution or passage of an examina- 
tion on this area. 

6. Demonstration of a knowledge of the various 
methods of teaching reading. 

To help ensure that all credential requirements are 
met with a minimum of difficulty, it is essential that 


people seek sound academic advising as soon as 
possible. The Office of Admissions to Teacher Edu- 
cation, located In Education Classroom 207, pro- 
vides information on waiver program advising and 
specific credential requirements, details on proce- 
dures for admission to the professional program in 
teacher preparation, information on preprofessional 
prerequisites, and advice on a number of other im- 
portant matters of concern to students interested In 
the possibility of becoming a teacher. Students are 
encouraged to seek the information offered by this 
Office at their earliest convenience. 

B. The Multiple Subject 
Credential and Waiver Program 

In California Professional Teacher Preparation is a 
two-semester program taken during the fourth and/ 
or fifth year of college; there is no major in educa- 
tion. Since students will be devoting their first three 
years of work to completing general education, ma- 
jor and waiver program requirements, it is essential 
that students consider their selection of an academ- 
ic major carefully. Most persons Interested In earn- 
ing a Multiple Subjects Credential at CSUF select 
child development, liberal studies or human services 
as an academic major. Persons interested in work- 
ing as bilingual teachers by earning a Muitipie Sub- 
jects Credential with a Bilingual Emphasis, might 
consider majoring in a foreign language. Majors in 
the social sciences, humanities or natural sciences 
can also be excellent backgrounds for careers In el- 
ementary school teaching. According to California 
law, any major (other than education) can be select- 
ed. 

Transfer students and students interested In qualify- 
ing for a CSUF waiver program should seek a tran- 
script evaluation from the Credential Preparation 
Center, Education Classroom 207. 

A person seeking a Multiple Subjects Credential will 
also be required to demonstrate a broad general 
knowledge of the arts, humanities, social sciences, 
mathematics, language arts, and natural sciences. 
There are two ways to demonstrate that knowledge: 
one is by passing a State-approved examination, the 
other is by completing the CSUF State-approved 
Multiple Subjects Waiver Program. 

A student evaluated under an earlier waiver program 
retains the option of being evaluated under subse- 
quent waiver programs. 

All students transferring to CSUF who are certified 
to have satisfied all or part of the campus general 
education program shall be considered to have sat- 
isfied the parallel requirement(s) in the waiver pro- 
gram. 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Multiple Subjects Waiver 

1. English (18 units) 

Composition: (6 units) 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3)* 

Any course approved by the University Writing 
Board as meeting the upper-division writing require- 
ment (3)** 

Grammar: Any of the following (3 units) 

English 303 The Structure of Modern English (3) 
Reading 201 Academic Reading (3) 

Reading 202 Vocabulary Comprehension (3) 

Literature: Any of the following (3 units)* 


English 1 10 Literature of the Western World from 
Ancient Through Medieval (3)* 

English 1 1 1 Literature of the Western World 
Renaissance through 19th Century (3) 

English 200 Introduction to Literature (3)* 

English 311 Masters of British Literature to 
1760 (3)* 

English 312 
English 321 
English 322 


Masters of British Lit from 1760 (3)* 
American Literature to Whitman (3)* 
American Literature from Twain to 


Moderns (3)* 


Speech: Any one of the following: (3 units)* 

Speech Comm 100 Introduction to Human Commu- 
nications (3)* 

Speech Comm 102 Public Speaking (3)* 

Theatre 1 10 Introduction to Oral 
Interpretation (3)* 

Theatre 41 1 Oral Interpretation of Children’s 
Literature (3)* 


Critical Thinking (3 units)* 

Completion of the "Critical Thinking" requirement of 
the campus general education program (3)* 

2. Mathematics and Science (24 units) 

Math 303A, B Fundamental Concepts of Elementary 
Mathematics (6) 

Completion of 12 units of course work selected from 
the "Mathematics and Natural Science" section of 
the campus general education program. 

Two (6 units) from the following: 

Science Ed 310 Physical Science Concepts (3) 
Science Ed 453 Life Science Concepts (3) 

Any 3 units from general education and/or upper- 
division courses in biology, chemistry, geological 
sciences, and/or physics (other than the units used 
above) 

3. Social Science (24 units) 

Government (3 units) 

Completion of the "Government" requirement of the 
campus general education program (3)* 


American /U S. History (3 units) 

Completion of the "American History" section of the 
campus general education program (3)* 

Completion of 3 units of coursework from "Introduc- 
tion to Social Sciences" section of the General Edu- 
cation Program (3) 

Child 390 Middle Childhood (3) t 
Three of the following: (9 units) 

Sociology 450 Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 
Sociology 451 Sociology of the Family (3) 
Sociology 453 Child in American Society (3) 

Amer Studies 420 Childhood and Family in 
American Culture (3) 

Child 312 Human Growth and Development (3)* 
Child 385 Infancy and Early Childhood (3) 

Child 386 Adolescence (3) 

Hum Ser 380 Theories & Techniques of 
Counseling (3) 

Psychology 31 1 Educational Psychology (3) 
Psychology 361 Developmental Psychology (3)* 
Geography 330 California Landscape (3) 
Anthropology 450 Culture and Education (3) 

One of the courses approved for "Cultural Diversity" 
requirement of the CSUF general education 
program (3) 

4. Humanities/Fine Arts (18 units) 

At least nine units selected from the following: 

Art 380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Dance 471 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 
Theater 402A Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 
Theat 403A Theatre for Children (3) 

Physical Ed 372 Movement and the Child (3) 
English 433 Children’s Literature (3) 

English 434 Literature for Junior and Senior High 
School (3) 

Physical Ed 142 Children’s Games (1) 

Completion of '*Arts and Humanities" requirement of 
the campus general education program (up to 9 
units) * 

The above waiver program has been designed for 
maximal compatibility with the campus general edu- 
cation program. Nevertheless, good academic ad- 
vising and careful course selection each semester 
are essential if a person Is to complete major re- 
quirements, waiver requirements and general educa- 
tion requirements with the least amount of difflcul- 
ty.# 

* Course work that can also be used to satisfy CSUF undergraduate gener 
al education baccalaureate requirements. 

** Course work that can also be used to satisfy the CSUF upper-division 
writing requirement. 

tCourse work that is a required prerequisite to admission to the Profes- 
sional Education Basic Credential Program. 

^Nine units of upper-division course work satisfying general education re- 
quirements must be taken no earlier than the first semester of the junior 
year 


Teaching Credential Programs 


C. Single Subject Credentials 
and Waiver Programs 

Although a person seeking a Single Subject Creden- 
tial may complete any academic major, most people 
decide to complete the degree major closest to the 
subject field In which they wish to be authorized to 
teach. CSUF offers a Single Subject Credential pro- 
gram in each of the following 14 State-authorized 
subject fields: 

Art 

Business Education 

English (English, Speech, Theater) 

French 

German 

Government (Political Science) 

History 

Life Science (Biology) 

Mathematics 

Music 

Physical Education 

Physical Sciences (Chemistry, Geology and Phys- 
ics) 

Social Sciences (Anthropology, American 
Studies, Economics, Geography, Chicano 
Studies, History, Afro-Ethnic Studies, Psycholo- 
gy and Sociology) 

Spanish 

To demonstrate subject matter competence a per- 
son must either pass the appropriate State- 
approved examination, or complete a State- 
approved waiver program. These waiver programs 
generally coincide sufficiently with the degree major 
to make It possible to complete major requirements 
and waiver requirements using many of the same 
courses. But degree programs and waiver programs 
serve different purposes; taking one is not a guaran- 
tee that you will have satisfied the requirements of 
the other. Good advising and careful planning are 
crucial. Transfer students seeking a CSUF waiver 
should seek a transcript evaluation from the Creden- 
tial Preparation Center, Education Classroom 207. 
The CSUF waiver programs for each of the Single 
Subject fields listed above are presented below: 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: ART 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (36 units) 

Art 103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 106A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Art 107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (6) 

Art 117 Life Drawing (3) 

Art 201A,B Art and Civilization (6) 

Art 205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Art 207A Drawing and Painting (3) 

Art 310A Watercolor (3) 

Art 3 1 2 Art of the 20th Century 1 900 to Present (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 

Students select one of the following areas of empha- 
sis 

Drawing, Painting and General Art 


Art 207B Drawing and Painting (3) 

Art 347 PrIntmakIng-EtchIng (3) 

Art 307A,B Advanced Drawing and Painting (6) 

Art 317 Life Studies: Draw, Paint and Sculpting (3) 

Crafts and Ceramics 

Art 206B Beginning Crafts: Wood (3) 

Art 305A Advanced Crafts (3) 

Art 306A,B Advanced Ceramics (6) 

Art 316A Jewelry (3) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: BUSINESS EDUCATION 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (30-33 units) 

(All students must meet the following core require- 
ments. In addition, each student must meet the re- 
quirements of one of the four specializations which 
are: accounting, marketing, economics, and office 
administration.) 

Demonstration of Typewriting Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: (1) five-minute timed writing; 
minimum score 40 words gross per minute with five 
errors maximum, and (2) demonstration of problem- 
solving ability: Setting up a business letter, tabula- 
tion problem and rough-draft material from unar- 
ranged copy and In mailable/ usable form and (3) 
passing a written exam covering correct form and 
style (including punctuation, syllabication, and gram- 
mar) applicable to typewriting skill.) 

Demonstration of Office Machines Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: (1) Demonstration of ability to 
produce a complex business letter, containing tabu- 
lation, on a microcomputer or wordprocessor, in 
mailable form, and (2) ability to add columns of fig- 
ures on a 10-key calculating machine using the 
touch system.) 

Students pursuing a single subject waiver must take 
all of the following: (15 units) 

Econ 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3)** 
Econ 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3)** 
Accounting 201A,B Elementary Accounting (6) 
Management 246 Business Law (3) 

One of the following: (3 units) 

Manag Sci 263 Intro to Information Systems and 
Micro-Computer Applications (2) and 
Manag Sci 264 Intro to Computer Programming (2) 
or 

Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information 
Systems and Computer Programming (3) or 
Computer Sci 112 Introduction to Computer 
Programming (3) 

All of the following: (9 units) 

Business Admin 301 Business Writing (3) 

Finance 310 Personal Financial Management (3) 
Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

And one area of specialization: (3-6 units) 
Accounting Specialization* 

Accounting 301A,B Intermediate Accounting (6) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Marketing Specialization* 

Marketing 362 Principles of Retailing (3) 
Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Economics Specialization* 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Office Administration Specialization* 
Demonstration of Shorthand Proficiency 
(Proficiency Exam: Ability to take dictation at a mini- 
mum of 80 words per minute for three minutes and 
transcribe the material into mailable/usable form.) 

Management 339 Managing Business Operations 
and Organizations (3) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 

Students must take 16 units selected from the fol- 
lowing: 

Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Accounting 308 Concepts Fed Income Tax (3) 
Accounting 401 Advanced Accounting (3) 
Economics 310 Intermed Microecon (3)*** 
Economics 320 Intermed Macroecon (3)*** 
Management 344 Intro to Systems Concepts (3) 
Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 
Marketing 352 Principles of Retailing (3)*** 
Philosophy 312 Bus /Professional Ethics (3) 
Mathematics 136 Business Calculus (3) 

Computer Scl 223F Workshop in Fortran-77 (2) 
Manage Sci 270 File Concepts and Cobal 
Programming (3) 

Management 339 Managing Bus Oper/Org (3)*** 
Manage Sci 361 Probability and Statistical 
Methods in Business and Economics (4) 


*The concentrations for the business administration major in accounting, 
economics and marketing require a total of 18-20 units of in-depth 
course work in those areas. 

* *Economics 210 Principles of Economics (5) may be substituted for Econ 
201 and 202. Students who have already completed Econ 100 and 200 
may substitute this combination for Econ 201 and 202. 

** ‘These courses may nof fulfill a portion of the breadth and perspective 
requirements if they are used to meet part of the core (specialization) 
requirements. 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: ENGLISH (ENGLISH, 
THEATER. SPEECH) 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 

Taught (30 units) 

Composition 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 

One of the following: 

English 301 Advanced College Writing (3) 

Theatre 477B Senior Sem in Critical Techniques (3) 

Speech Comm 300 Intro to Research in Speech 
Communications (3) 

Linguistics 

English 303 Structure of Modern English (3) 


One of the following: 

Linguistics 106 Linguistics Minority Dialects (3) 
English 306 English Language in America (3) 
English 490 History of English Language (3) 

Literature 


All of the following: 


English 300 Analysis of Literary Forms (3) 
English 31 1 Masters of British Literature to and 


1760 (3) 

English 312 Masters of British Lit from 1760 (3) 
English 321 American Lit to Whitman (3) 

English 322 American Lit from Twain to the 
Moderns (3) 

English 334 Shakespeare (3) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 

Students may select one of the following areas of 
emphasis: 


Theatre: All of the following: 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 Acting (3) 

Theatre 276A Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 370A Directing (3) 

Theatre 402B Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

English Literature: Fifteen semester units of adviser- 
approved literature courses. 

Public Speaking: Five courses from the following: 


Speech Comm 102 
Speech Comm 138 
Speech Comm 200 
Speech Comm 324 
Speech Comm 332 
Influence (3) 
Speech Comm 334 


Public Speaking (3) 

Forensics (3) 

Human Communication (3) 
Small GroupCommunIcation (3) 
Processes of Social 

Persuasive Speaking (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: FRENCH 


Upper-Division Requirements in Subjects 
Commonly Taught (30 units) 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 300 French Conversation (3) 

French 317 Advanced Composition and 
Grammar (3) 

French 318 Advanced Composition and 
Grammar (3) 

Culture (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 316 Origins of Modern France (3) 

French 325 Contemporary French Civilization (3) 
French 407 French Film (3) 

Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 
French 386 Translation (3) 

French 466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 
French 500 Stylistics (3) 

Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 375 Introduction to Literature (3) 

French 415 French Classicism (3) 

French 425 French Romanticism (3) 

French 475ABCD Senior Seminar (3) 

French 485 French Literature (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Electives: Six upper-division units of electives se- 
lected from courses listed above in consultation with 
an adviser based on candidate’s background, inter- 
est and teaching plans. 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: GERMAN 


Upper-Division Requirement in Subjects 
Commonly Taught (30 units) 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 300 German Conversation (3) 

German 317 Advanced Conversation and 
Composition (3) 

German 401 Advanced Conversation and 
Vocabulary (3) 

Culture (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 
German 325 Current Trends in Culture of German- 
Speaking Peoples (3) 

German 482 German Film (3) 


Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 399 German Phonetics (3) 

German 466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 
German 500 Advanced Structure and Style (3) 


Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 


German 375 
German 430 
Baroque (3) 
German 440 
Culture (3) 
German 450 
Culture (3) 
German 460 
Culture (3) 
German 485 


Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 
German Literature and Culture to the 

18th Century German Literature and 

19th Century German Literature and 

20th Century German Literature and 

Seminar in German Literature (3) 


Electives: Six upper-division units of electives se- 
lected from courses listed above in consultation with 
an advisor based on candidate’s background, inter- 
est and teaching plans. 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: GOVERNMENT 


Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (30 Semester Units) 


Poise 100 American Government (3) 

Poise 300 Contemporary Issues in California 
Government and Politics (3) 

Poise 309 Intro to Metropolitan Politics (3) 
Poise 310 American Political Behavior (3) 
Poise 315 American Political Process (3) 
Poise 320 Politics, Policy & Administration (3) 
Poise 330 Comparative Political Analysis (3) 
Poise 340 Political Philosophy (3) 

Poise 350 World Politics (3) 

Poise 375 Public Law (3) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements 
(15 Semester Units) 


L/.S. Government (6 units) 

Two courses from the following: 

Poise 31 1 Research Proseminar in American 
Political Behavior (3) 


Poise 347 Political Theory and Political 
Practice (3) 

Poise 407 Quantitative Methods in Political 
Science (3) 

Poise 410 Political Parties (3) 

Poise 413 Pressure Groups and Public Opinions (3) 
Poise 414 The Legislative Process (3) 

Poise 415 Power and Participation in America (3) 
Poise 416 The American Presidency (3) 

Poise 445 Political Learning & Socialization (3) 
Chic 460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

Afro 335 History of Racism (3) 


Law (3 units) 

One of the following: 

Chic 360 Chicanes and the Law (3) 

Poise 376 Research Proseminar In Public Law (3) 
Poise 470 Judicial Process (3) 

Poise 473 Introduction to Constitutional Law (3) 
Poise 474 Seminar in Constitutional Law: Civil 
Rights and Civil Liberties (3) 

Poise 475 Administrative Law (3) 


Comparative Systems /International Politics (3 
units) 


One of the following: 

Poise 335 Comparative Political Change (3) 

Poise 351 Research Proseminar in International 
Politics (3) 

Poise 425 Comparative Public Administration (3) 
Poise 430 Government Politics of a selected 
Nation-State (3) 

Poise 431 Government and Politics of a Selected 
Area (3) 

Poise 446 Corruption, Ethics and Public Policy (3) 
Poise 452 Foreign Policy of a Selected Country or 
Group of Countries (3) 

Poise 455 Comparative Analysis of Foreign 
Politics (3) 


Public Administration (3 units) 
One of the following: 


Poise 321 Research Proseminar in Politics, Policy 
and Administration (3) 

Poise 421 Public Finance Administration (3) 

Poise 422 Public Personnel Administration (3) 
Poise 423 Regional Planning and Development (3) 
Poise 424 Urban Planning and Development (3) 
Poise 425 Comparative Public Administration (3) 
Poise 426 Collective Bargaining in the Public 
Sector (3) 

Poise 427 Current Issues in Urban & Metropolitan 
Policy (3) 

Poise 429 Public Personnel Training (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER; HISTORY 


Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (30-33 units) 

All of the following: 

History 1 10A Western Civilization to the 16th 

Century (3) 

History 110B Western Civilization Since the 16th 
Century (3) 

History 383 History of California (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


History 426 Rise of Modern Europe (3) 

History 429 Europe since 1914 (3) 

North America and U.S.; take one from the following: 

History 180 Survey of American History (3) 
History 170A,B United States History (6) 

Amer Studies 201 Intro to American Studies (3) 

Latin America: take one from the following: 

History 350 History of Latin American 
Civilization (3) 

History 453 Modern Mexico (3) 

Asia: take one of the following — (3 to 6 units) 


History 360 Modern Asia (3) 

History 462A,B History of China (6) 

History 463A,B History of Japan (6) 

History 464A,B History of Southeast Asia (6) 
History 465A,B History of India (6) 


Africa and the Middle East: take one pair — (6 units) 

History 466A,B History of Islamic Civilizations (6) 
History 467 Middle East In the 19th Century (3) 
and History 468 Middle East in the 20th 
Century (3) 

History 458 Southern Africa in the 20th Century (3) 
and Afro 346 The African Experience (3) 


Breadth and Depth Requirements (15 units) 

Historical Methodology: (at least 3 units) 

History 300A Historical Thinking (3) 

Amer Studies 350 Seminar In Theory and Method 
of American Studies (3) 

History 490 Senior Research Seminar (3) 

Amer Studies 401 Proseminar in American 
Studies (3) 

U.S. and North American History: (at least 6 units) 


History /Amer Studies 386A American Social 
History 1750-1860 (3) 

History /Amer Studies 386B American Social 
History 1860-1930 (3) 

Amer Studies 301 The American Character (3) 
Amer Studies 345 The American Dream (3) 

Amer Studies 395 American West In Symbol and 
Myth (3) 


Amer Studies 416 So. California Culture: A Study 
of American Regionalism (3) 

American Studies 450 Women In U.S. History (3) 
Chicano 453 Modern Mexico (3) 

History 380 Canada, 1534-1967 
History 350 History of Latin American Civilization 
(3) — If not used to satisfy core requirements 
History 453 Modern Mexico (3) 

History 470 American Colonial Civilization (3) 
History 471 United States from Colony to 
Nation (3) 

History 472 Jeffersonian Themes in American 
Society, 1800-1861 (3) 

History 473 Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 (3) 
History 474 The United States 1876-1914 (3) 
History 475 America Comes of Age, 1914-1945(3) 
History 476 United States Since 1945 (3) 

History 479 The Urbanization of American Life (3) 
History 485 U.S. Foreign Relations (3) 

History 486 United States Cultural History (3) 


History 487 Hist of American Parties and 
Politics (3) 

Western Civilization and Modern Europe: (at least 6 
units) 


History 341 Tudor-Stuart England (3) 

History 342 Modern England and Great Britain (3) 
History 401 European Intellectual History from 
1500 to the Present (3) 

History 415A Classical Greece (3) 

History 415B Hellenistic Civilization (3) 

History 417A Roman Republic (3) 

History 417B Roman Empire (3) 

History 425A The Renaissance (3) 

History 425B The Reformation (3) 

History 432 Modern Germany from 18th Century(3) 
History 434A Russia to 1890 (3) 

History 434B The Russian Revolutions and the So- 
viet Regime (3) 

History 437 East Europe (3) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: LIFE SCIENCE 


Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (31 units) 


All of the following: 


Biological Sci 141 
Biological Sci 14 1L 
Biological Sci 161 
Biological Sci 161L 
Biological Sci 302 
Biological Sci 302L 
Biological Sci 312 
Biological Sci 315 
Biological Sci 316 


Principles of Botany (2) 
Principles of Botany Lab (2) 
Principles of Zoology (2) 
Principles of Zoology Lab (2) 
General Microbiology (2) 
General Microbiology Lab (2) 
Genetics (3) 

Cell and Molecular Biology (3) 
Principles of Ecology (3) 


One of the following: 

Biological Sci 315L Cell and Molecular Biol Lab (2) 
Biological Sci 316L Principles of Ecology Lab (2) 

One of the following: 


Biological Sci 362 
Biological Sci 410 
Biological Sci 468 
Physiology (4) 
Biological Sci 444 


Mammalian Physiology (4) 
Cell Physiology (4) 
Comparative Animal 

Plant Physiology (4) 


One of the following: 


Biological Sci 419 Marine Ecology (3) and 
Biological Sci 419L Marine Ecology Lab (1) 
Biological Sci 446 Phycology (4) 

Biological Sci 461 Invertebrate Zoology (4) 
Biological Sci 475 Ichthyology (4) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (27>30 
units) 


Chemistry 120A,B General Chemistry (10) 
Physics 211A,B and211AL,BL Elementary 
Physics (8) 

One of the following: 

Chemistry 301A,B Organic Chemistry (6) and 
Chemistry 302 Organic Chemistry Lab (2), or 
Chemistry 303 Survey of Organic Chemistry (5) 

One of the following: 

Math 130A A Short course in Calculus (4) 

Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: MATHEMATICS 
Unit Requirement (34 units) 

Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (8) 
Math 250A,B Intermediate Calculus (8) 

Math 335 Mathematical Probability (3) 

Math 380 History of Mathematics (3) 

Math 401 Algebra and Probability for the 
Secondary Teacher (3) 

Math 402 Logic and Geometry for the Secondary 
Teacher (3) 

One of the following: 

Math 435 Mathematical Statistics (3) 

Math 438 Introduction to Stochastic Processes (3) 

One of the following: 

Computer Scl 112 Introduction to Computer 
Programming (3) 

Comp Scl 121 Programming Concepts (3) 
Engineering 205 Digital Computation (3) 

Closely Related Subjects Requirement (15) 

Mathematics 302 Modern Algebra (3) 
Mathematics 307 Applied Linear Algebra (3) 

One of the following: 

Computer Scl 131 Data Structures Concepts (3) 
Computer Scl 231 File Systems Concepts (3) 

Two of the following courses: 


or Music 468A Vocal Pedagogy (2) 

Music 381 Survey of Recreational Instruments (1) 
and Music 435 Music in the Modern Classroom(3) 

One of the following: (2 or 3 units) 


Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 
Music 354 Survey of Public School Choral Music 
Materials (2) 

Music 444 Survey of Marching Band Materials (2) 
Take at least five of the following: (5 units) 

Music 361 A Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Music 36 IB University Choir (1) 

Music 36 1C University Concert Band (1) 

Music 36 ID Opera Theatre (1) 

Music 36 IE University Singers (1) 

Music 361F University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Music 361M Men’s Choir (1) 

Music 361W Women’s Choir (1) 

One of the following: (2 units) 


Music 39 IB Choral Conducting (2) 

Music 392A Instrumental Conducting (2) 

Performance Requirement: 

Perform at level sufficient to be admitted to Music 
371 on principal Instrument (0-4) 

Piano Proficiency Requirement: 


Math 360A Advanced Calculus (3) 

Math 370 Mathematical Model Building (3) 
Philosophy 368 First Course In Symbolic Logic (3) 
Philosophy 369 Second Course in Symbolic 
Logic (3) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: MUSIC 


Completion of Music 282B or satisfactory passage 
of piano proficiency examination (0-4) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Core Requirements in, or directly related to, 
Subjects Commonly Taught (30 units) 


Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (30 units) 

Music IIIA.B Diatonic Harmony (6) 

Music 21 1 Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Music 251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 
Music_281B,P,S.W Orchestral Instruments (1) 
Music 319 Form and Analysis (3) 

Music 351 A History and Literature of Music (Greek 
through Renaissance) (3) 

Music 35 IB History and Literature of Music 
(Baroque and Classics) (3) 

Music 35 1C History and Literature of Music 
(Romantic to Present) (3) 

Music 391A Choral Conducting (2) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15+ 
units) 

One of the following: (2 units) 

Music 320A 20th Century Techniques (2) 

Music 320B 20th Century Techniques (2) 

One of the following: (4 units) 

Music 323A Orchestration (2) 

and Music 324 Scoring for the Band (2) 

Music 453A or 453B Choral Literature and 
Interpretation (2) 
and one of: 

Music 457A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 
or Music 457B Song Literature and 
Interpretation (2) 


All of the following: (15 units) 


Physical Ed 300 
Physical Ed 349 
Physical Ed 352 
Physical Ed 364 
Physical Ed 37 1 


Principles of Movement (3) 
Measurement and Evaluation (3) 
Physiology of Exercise (3) 

Motor Development (3) 

Prin of Human Motor Learning (3) 


Analysis of Sports: (4 units) 


Physical Ed 303 
Physical Ed 304 
Physical Ed 305 
Physical Ed 306 
Physical Ed 308 
Physical Ed 309 
Physical Ed 312 
Physical Ed 316 
Physical Ed 319 


Field Events (2) 

Swimming (2) 

Golf (2) 

Gymnastics (2) 

Soccer (2) 

Badminton /Racquetball (2) 
Tennis (2) 

Volleyball (2) 

Softball (2) 


Techniques 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 


of Coaching: (2 units ) 
328 Gymnastics (2) 
330 Softball (2) 

332 Tennis (2) 

334 Baseball (2) 

335 Football (2) 

337 Basketball (2) 

338 Volleyball (2) 


Activities (9 units: at least one course in each of the 
five commonly taught areas; at least six of the nine 
units at the intermediate, advanced or Intercolle- 
giate level) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Dance 


Dance 101 
Dance 1 12 
Dance 212 
Dance 312 
Dance 122A 
Dance 222 
Dance 323A 
Dance 132 
Dance 232 
Dance 332 
Dance 142 
Dance 242 


Introduction to Dance (3) 
Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 
Intermediate Ballet (2) 
Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 
Beginning Modern Dance (2) 
Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 
Dance Composition (3) 
Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 
Intermediate Jazz Dance (3) 
Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 
Beginning Tap Dance (2) 
Intermediate Tap Dance (2) 


Basic Movement 


Physical Ed 100 Physical Conditioning (1) 
Physical Ed 101 Athletic Conditioning (1) 
Physical Ed 102A Beginning Jogging (1) 
Physical Ed 102B Intermediate/ Advanced 
Jogging (1) 

Physical Ed 104 Horseback Riding (1) 

Physical Ed 105 Cycling (1) 

Physical Ed 108 Roller Skating (1) 

Physical Ed 125 Rock Climbing (1) 

Physical Ed 144 Exercise Weight Control (1) 
Physical Ed 146 Body Building (1) 

Physical Ed 151A Beginning Aikido (1) 

Physical Ed 151B Intermediate Aikido (1) 
Physical Ed 152A Beginning Karate (1) 
Physical Ed 152B Intermediate Karate (1) 
Physical Ed 154 Self-Defense (1) 

Physical Ed 246A Basic Hatha Yoga (2) 
Physical Ed 246B Intermediate Hatha Yoga (2) 

Sports and Games 


Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 
Physical Ed 


117A Beginning Bowling (1) 

117B Intermediate Bowling (1) 

117C Advanced Bowling (1) 

118A Beginning Archery (1) 

118B Intermediate Archery (1) 

1 18C Advanced Archery (1) 

1 19A Beginning Golf (1) 

1 19B Intermediate Golf (1) 

1 19C Advanced Golf (1) 

130A Beginning Badminton (1) 

130B Intermediate Badminton (1) 
131A Beginning Tennis (1) 

131B Advanced/Beginning Tennis (1) 
131C Intermediate Tennis (1) 

131D Advanced Tennis (1) 

132A Beginning Racquetball (1) 

132B Intermediate Racquetball (1) 
132C Advanced Racquetball (1) 

133 Handball (1) 

142 Children’s Games (1) 

147 Olympic Power Lifting (1) 

150A Beginning Wrestling (1) 

150B Intermediate Wrestling (1) 

155A Beginning Fencing (1) 

155B Intermediate Fencing (1) 

160 Baseball (1) 

161A Beginning Slow Pitch (1) 

16 IB Intermediate Slow Pitch (1) 

162 Fast Pitch Softball (1) 


Physical Ed 164A 
Physical Ed 164B 
Physical Ed 164C 
Physical Ed 165A 
Physical Ed 165B 
Physical Ed 166 
Physical Ed 167A 
Physical Ed 167B 
Physical Ed 167C 
Physical Ed 1 7 1 
Physical Ed 172 
Physical Ed 174 
Physical Ed 175 
Physical Ed 176 
Physical Ed 177 
Physical Ed 178 
Physical Ed 179 
Physical Ed 180 
Physical Ed 184 
Physical Ed 185 
Physical Ed 186 

Aquatics 

Physical Ed 1 10A 
Physical Ed 1 10B 
Physical Ed 1 1OC 
Physical Ed 1 1 1 
Physical Ed 1 12 
Physical Ed 1 14 
Physical Ed 1 16 
Physical Ed 122A 
Physical Ed 122B 
Physical Ed 173 
Physical Ed 210 
Physical Ed 214 
Physical Ed 343 

Gymnastics 

Physical Ed 120A 
Physical Ed 120B 
Physical Ed 120C 
Physical Ed 170 
Physical Ed 306 


Beginning Volleyball (1) 
Intermediate Volleyball (1) 
Advanced Volleyball (1) 
Beginning Soccer (1) 
Intermediate Soccer (1) 

Team Handball (1) 

Beginning Basketball (1) 
Intermediate Basketball (1) 
Advanced Basketball (1) 
Intercollegiate Golf (2) 
Intercollegiate Cross Country (2) 
Intercollegiate Track-Field (2) 
Intercollegiate Tennis (2) 
Intercollegiate Wrestling (2) 
Intercollegiate Fencing (2) 
Intercollegiate Basketball (2) 
Intercollegiate Baseball (2) 
Intercollegiate Soccer (2) 
Intercollegiate Football (2) 
Intercollegiate Volleyball (2) 
Intercollegiate Softball (2) 


Beginning Swimming (1) 
Intermediate Swimming (1) 
Advanced Swimming (1) 

Life Saving (1) 

Water Polo (1) 

Skin Diving (1) 

Springboard Diving (1) 
Beginning Sailing (1) 
Intermediate Sailing (1) 
Intercollegiate Water Polo (2) 
Water Safety Instructor (2) 
Basic Scuba (2) 

Intermediate Scuba (2) 


Beginning Gymnastics (1) 
Intermediate Gymnastics (1) 
Advanced Gymnastics (1) 
Intercollegiate Gymnastics (2) 
Gymnastics (2) 


Depth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


One of the following courses: 


Physical Ed 380 History of Physical Education (3) 
Physical Ed 382 Philosophical Perspectives (3) 


One of the following courses: 

Physical Ed 381 Human Movement in Cultural 
Perspective (3) 

Physical Ed 384 Sport Sociology (3) 

Three of the following courses: 


Physical Ed 340 
ments (3) 
Physical Ed 363 
Atypical (3) 
Physical Ed 365 
Injuries (3) 
Physical Ed 372 
Physical Ed 373 
Physical Ed 383 


Contemporary Movement Envlron- 

Developmental Adaptations of the 

Prevention and Care of Athletic 

Movement and the Child (3) 
Movement Concepts (3) 

Sport Psychology (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (39-42 units) 

Chemistry 120 A,B General Chemistry (10) 

One of the following: (5-8 units) 

Chemistry 301A,B Organic Chemistry (6) 

and Chemistry 302 Organic Chemistry Lab (2), 
or 

Chemistry 303 Survey of Organic Chemistry (5) 

All of the following: (24 units) 

Physics 226A Fundamental Physics: Mechanics 
(3) 

Physics 225B Fundamental Physics: Electricity 
and Magnetism (3) 

Physics 225C Fundamental Physics: Modern 
Physics (3) 

Physics 225AL,BL.CL Fundamental Physics Lab 

( 1 . 1 . 1 ) 

Geological Sci 101 Physical Geology (3) 
Geological Sci 101L Physical Geology Lab (1) 
Geological Sci 201 Earth History (4) 

Physics 350 General Astronomy (4) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (19 units) 
Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (8) 
One of the following: 

Geological Sci 340 General Meteorology (3) 
Chemistry 361 A Intro to Physical Chemistry (3) 
Chemistry 371 A Physical Chemistry (3) 

Physics 310 Thermodynamics, Kinetic Theory, and 
Statistical Physics (3) 

Two of the following: 

Biological Sci 101 (and 101L) Elements of Biology 
and Lab (4) 

Biological Sci 141 (and 141L) Principles of Botany 
and Lab (4) 

Biological Sci 161 (and 16 1L) Principles of 
Zoology and Lab (4) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: SOCIAL SCIENCES 
Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (33-36 units) 

One of the following courses: (3-6 units) 

History 180 Survey of American History (3) 

Amer Studies 201 Intro to American Studies (3) 
History 170A,B United States History (6) 

All of the following: (24 units) 

Three units of History of California orCalifornia 
Government (3) 

Six units of American Government (6) 

Three units In Economics (3) 

History 110A Western Civilization to 16th 
Century (3) 

History 110B Western Civilization Since the 16th 
Century (3) 

Anthropology 100 Non-Western cultures and the 
Western Tradition (3) 

Geography 100 World Geography (3) 

One of the following: (3 units) 

Hum Ser/ Afro 31 1 Intracultural Social Patterns (3) 
Chicano 445 History of the Chicano (3) 


One of the following: (3 units) 

Amer Studies 301 The American Character (3) 
Amer Studies 450 Women in American Society (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (18 units) 
One of the following courses: 

Geography 330 California Landscape (3) 
Geography 332 United States and Canada (3) 

All of the following: 

Three units of Sociology 
Three units of Political Science 
Three units of Psychology 

Six units from any combination of the following: 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 

American Studies 

Anthropology 

Chicano Studies 

Economics 

Geography 

History 

Political Science 

Psychology 

Sociology 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: SPANISH 

Upper-Division Requirement in Subjects Com- 
monly Taught (30 units) 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 

Spanish 300 Spanish Conversation (3) 

Spanish 317 Advanced Conversation and 
Composition (3) 

Spanish 400 Spanish for Advanced Students (3) 
Culture (Select 6 units from the following) 

Spanish 315 Intro to Spanish Civilization (3) 
Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish-American 
Civilization (3) 

Spanish 415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 
Spanish 416 Contemporary Spanish-American 
Culture (3) 

Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish 
Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 467 Dialectology (3) 

Spanish 468 Spanish-English Contrastive Analysis 
(3) 

Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 

Spanish 375 introduction to Literary Forms (3) 
Spanish 430 Spanish Lit to Neociassicism (3) 
Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature (3) 
Spanish 461 Spanish Literature since Neo- 
classicism (3) 

Spanish 475 Topics In Spanish Peninsula 
Literature (3) 

Spanish 485 Topics in Spanish American 
Literature (3) 

Electives: Six upper-division units of electives se- 
lected from courses listed above in consultation with 
an adviser based on candidate’s background, inter- 
est and teaching plans. 


Teaching Credential Programs 


D. Supplementary 
Authorizations for the Basic 
Teaching Credentials 

It is possible to expand the subject matter authoriza- 
tion a teaching credential Initially carries to other 
subject fields. The State recognizes several subject 
areas that can be added to a Multiple Subjects Cre- 
dential; thereby qualifying person to teach in depart- 
mentalized junior high classrooms (grades 6-9). 
CSUF offers 14 Supplementary Authorizations for 
the Multiple Subject Credential in: 

Art 

French 

Health Science 

Music 

Spanish 

Business 

General Science 

Life Science 

Physical Education 

Social Science 

English 

German 

Mathematics 

Physical Science 

Supplementary Authorizations for the Single Subject 
Credential permit a person who holds a credential in 
one broad subject field to be also authorized to 
teach in another more specific subject area, one 
that might be quite different from the field of broader 
authorization. CSUF offers 37 supplementary autho- 
rizations for the single Subject Credential In: 

Accounting /Computer Literacy 
Animal Science (Zoology) 

Anthropology 

Biology 

Ceramics 

Chemistry 

Comparative Political Systems /International Re- 
lations 

Composition /Critical Thinking 
Computer Concepts and Applications 
Crafts (Arts) 

Dance 

Drama 

Drug Use and Abuse 
Earth Science (Geology) 

Economics 

Economic and Consumer Education 

Electronics 

Family Health 

Geography 

Graphic Arts 

Instrumental Music 

Jewelry 

Journalism 

Literature 

Marketing and Distribution 
Painting and Drawing 
Personal Health 
Photography 
Physics 


Plant Science 
Psychology 
Sociology 
Speech 

U.S. Government /Civics 
U.S. History /California History 
Vocal Music 
World History 

Also, to permit the holder of a single subjects cre- 
dential to teach certain subjects In grades 9 and be- 
low, CSUF offers eight supplementary authoriza- 
tions in: 

General Science 
Introductory English 
Introductory French 
Introductory German 
Introductory Health Sciences 
Introductory Mathematics 
Introductory Social Science 
Introductory Spanish 

Contact the Credential Preparation Center, Educa- 
tion Classroom 207, for details concerning course 
requirements for specific supplementary authoriza- 
tions. 

E. Specialist and Services 
Credentials 

CSUF offers several State approved programs lead- 
ing to more specialized credentials. Most of these 
programs build on the teaching experience that 
holders of a basic credential have achieved. Often 
these specialist or services credentials are oriented 
toward postbaccalaureate course work and coin- 
cide with Masters degree programs. Further infor- 
mation about specific requirements for each can be 
obtained under the appropriate departmental listing 
in this catalogue. 

CSUF offers the following Specialist Credential 
programs: 

t. Gifted, to teach in classrooms designed for the 
special needs of gifted and talented students. See 
Department of Special Education, School of Hu- 
man Development and Community Service. 

2. Learning Handicapped, to teach the learning 
handicapped including the behaviorally disor- 
dered and educationally retarded. See Depart- 
ment of Special Education. School of Human De- 
velopment and Community Service. 

3. Reading Specialist, to teach reading to students 
of diversified grade and ability levels and to assist 
all teachers in being better reading teachers. See 
Department of Reading. School of Human Devel- 
opment and Community Service. 

4. Resource Specialist {CerWUcate of Competency), 
to serve as a resource specialist in programs 
serving special education students, their parents 
and their regular teachers. See Department of 
Special Education, School of Human Development 
and Community Service. 

5. Severely Handicapped, to teach the severely- 
multiply-handicapped, severely emotionally dis- 


Teaching Credential Programs 


turbed and autistic. See Department of Special Edu- 
cation, School of Human Development and Com- 
munity Service. 


services credential structure. See Department of 
Educational Administration, School of Human De- 
velopment and Community Service. 


In addition CSUF is currently seeking approval for a 
newly authorized credential. Language Development 
Specialist, to teach limited or non-English proficient 
students. See Department of Foreign Language and 
Literature, School of Humanities and Social Sci- 
ence. 

CSUF offers the following Services Credential 
programs: 

Administrative Internship, a field based internship 
program leading to a preliminary level administra- 
tive services credential. See Department of Edu- 
cational Administration, School of Human Devel- 
opment and Community Service. 

2. Administrative Services (Preliminary Level), the 
first step of the new two-step administrative ser- 
vices credential structure, authorizing service as 
a school site administrator, principal or other ad- 
ministrative officer of a school district. See De- 
partment of Educational Administration, School of 
Human Development and Community Service. 

3. Administrative Services (Professional Level), the 
second step of the new two-step administrative 


4. Clinical Rehabilitation (Language, Speech and 
Hearing), to provide services to students with ex- 
ceptional needs and/or neurophysical disorders 
in language, speech, and hearing. See Depart- 
ment of Speech Communication, School of Hu- 
manities and Social Sciences. 

5. Clinical Rehabilitation (Special Class Authoriza- 
tion), to provide services to students with severe 
disorders of language. See Department of Speech 
Communication, School of Humanities and Social 
Sciences. 

6. Pupil Personnel Services, to provide counseling 
and testing services to students. See Department 
of Counseling, School of Human Development and 
Community Services. 

7. School Psychology, to provide counseling and 
school psychologist services to students. See 
Department of Counseling, School of Human De- 
velopment and Community Service. 



Teaching Credential Programs 


Extended Education 


Building T 14 
(714) 773-2611 

Extension Programs 

The Extension program is designed for those who 
are unable to take university work in residence but 
who wish to pursue university-level study for various 
purposes, such as resuming an interrupted or incom- 
plete education, augmenting professional or voca- 
tional abilities, or enhancing personal growth and 
fulfillment. 

Extension offerings Include regularly established 
university courses as well as non-credit seminars 
and conferences, special weekend programs and 
travel study programs. Workshops and courses de- 
signed to meet the needs of particular groups and 
agencies may be initiated at various times during the 
year. Any adult may enroll in an extension course 
provided the prerequisites of the course are met. An 
Individual does not have to be enrolled in the univer- 
sity in order to take extension courses. 

The maximum amount of extension credit which will 
be accepted toward a baccalaureate degree is 24 
semester units. Nine semester units of extension 
credit may be applied toward a master’s degree with 
appropriate approval. Extension credit may not be 
used to fulfill the minimum residence requirement for 
graduation. 

Extension courses are offered during fall, spring, 
summer session and intersession. 

Adjunct Enrollment 

Many of the regular university courses offered to en- 
rolled students are also open on a space-available 
basis to extension students through Adjunct Enroll- 
ment. Matriculated students may not enroll through 
this program. Contact the Office of Extended Educa- 
tion for further information. 

Summer Session 

The summer session program is designed for regu- 
larly enrolled students, either at California State Uni- 
versity, Fullerton or another university, who wish to 
accelerate progress toward a degree or credential; 
prospective students who wish to begin course work 
while admission to the university is In process; and 
members of the community who wish to enroll in a 


course or courses for professional advancement or 
personal enrichment. Summer session offerings con- 
sist of regular university courses and apply toward 
residence and graduation requirements. Students 
must satisfy all prerequisites for the course or 
courses in which they intend to register. The summer 
session curriculum consists of lower-division 
through graduate-level courses. 

The summer session bulletin is available In March 
and may be obtained by writing or calling the Office 
of Extended Education. The bulletin contains course 
descriptions, special offerings, registration form and 
instructions. Registration may be completed by mail 
at specified times. Summer enrollment does not con- 
stitute admission to the university. 

Intersession 

Intersession is open to everyone — continuing and 
prospective students, community residents and visi- 
tors. Scheduled during January, the one-, two- and 
three-unit courses are primarily designed to meet 
the needs of students who wish to accelerate their 
academic progress. 

The intersession offers extension courses as well as 
courses which earn resident credit and range from 
both lower- and upper-division credit courses to 
graduate-level offerings. 

Certificate Programs 

Certificate programs are designed for those who 
want formal recognition for completing a structured 
and rigorous course of study in a specific field, but 
who may not be Interested In pursuing a university 
degree program. Certificates are awarded when 
participants complete the course requirements. The 
Office of Extended Education offers certificate pro- 
grams in the following areas: 

Production and Inventory Management 
Gerontology 

Community Programs 

The Office of Extended Education sponsors various 
community educational outreach programs including 
the Continuing Learning Experience (CLE) program 
for retired and semi-retired persons. For a list of cur- 
rent activities contact the CLE office. 


Extended Education 


International Programs 


The California State University (CSU) International 
Programs offers students the opportunity to contin- 
ue their studies overseas for a full academic year 
while they remain enrolled at their home CSU cam- 
pus. The International Programs’ primary purposes 
are to enable selected students to gain a firsthand 
understanding of other areas of the world and to ad- 
vance their knowledge and skills within specific aca- 
demic disciplines in pursuit of established degree 
objectives. 

A wide variety of academic majors may be accom- 
modated by the 34 foreign universities cooperating 
with the International Programs in 16 countries 
around the globe. The affiliated institutions are: the 
University of Queensland (Australia); the University 
of Sao Paulo (Brazil); the Universities of the Prov- 
ince of Quebec (Canada); the University of Copen- 
hagen (through Denmark’s International Student 
Committee’s Study Division); the University of Pro- 
vence (France); the Universities of Heidelberg and 
Tubingen (Germany); the Hebrew University of Jeru- 
salem (Israel); the University of Florence (Italy); 
Waseda University (Japan); the Ibero Americana 
University (Mexico); Massey University and Lincoln 
University College (New Zealand); the Catholic Uni- 
versity of Lima (Peru); National Chengchi University 
(Republic of China /Taiwan); the Universities of Gra- 
nada and Madrid (Spain); the University of Uppsala 
(Sweden); Bradford and Bristol Universities and 
Kingston Polytechnic (the United Kingdom). Informa- 
tion on academic course offerings available at these 
locations is in the international Programs Bulletin 
which may be obtained from the International Pro- 
grams representative on campus 

Eligibility for application is limited to those students 
who will have upper-division or graduate standing at 
a CSU campus by the time of departure, who pos- 
sess a cumulative grade-point average of 2.75 or 3. 
00, depending on the program, for ail college level 
work completed at the time of application, and who 
will have completed required language or other pre- 
paratory study where applicable. Selection is com- 
petitive and is based on home campus recommenda- 
tions and the applicant’s academic record. Final 
selection is made by the Office of International Pro- 
grams in consultation with a statewide faculty selec- 
tion committee. 

The International Programs supports all tuition and 
administrative costs overseas for each of its partici- 
pants to the same extent that such funds would be 
expended to support similar costs in California. Stu- 
dents assume responsibility for all personal costs, 
such as transportation, room and board, and living 
expenses, as well as for home campus fees. Be- 
cause they remain enrolled at their home CSU cam- 
pus while studying overseas. International Programs 
students earn full resident credit for all academic 
work completed while abroad and remain eligible to 


receive any form of financial aid (other than work- 
study) for which they can Individually qualify. 

Information and application materials may be ob- 
tained from the Office of International Education and 
Exchange or by writing to The California State Uni- 
versity, International Programs, 400 Golden Shore, 
Long Beach, California 90802-4275. Applications 
for the 1988-89 academic year overseas must be 
submitted by February 1, 1988. 

International Exchange 
Programs 

California State University, Fullerton has direct insti- 
tutional exchange programs with universities 
throughout the world. Such agreements allow for the 
exchange of faculty and students for purposes of 
teaching, study, research and for the promotion of 
cultural understanding and interaction. 

Current programs link California State University, 
Fullerton with Fudan University. Shanghai; North- 
west University, Xi’an, People’s Republic of China; 
nine campuses of the University of Paris, France; 
and three campuses of the Autonomous University 
of Baja California. 

CSUF students pay home campus fees plus their liv- 
ing, transportation and related expenses. They must 
maintain home campus full-time enrollment status in 
the exchange program. They thereby may qualify for 
any financial aid for which they normally would be el- 
igible. Credit received while studying abroad is sub- 
ject to CSUF departmental approval for determina- 
tion of equivalency. 

Information and application forms are available in 
the Office of Academic Programs, McCarthy Hall- 
129, and in the Office of International Education and 
Exchange, McCarthy Hall-79. 

American Language Program 

California State University, Fullerton welcomes in- 
ternational students who wish to perfect their En- 
glish language skills. The American Language Pro- 
gram (ALP) course of study provides intensive 
practice in listening, speaking, reading, writing and 
study skills while promoting an understanding of U.S. 
culture and society. Classes are small, so students 
will receive individual attention which will help them 
achieve rapid fluency in English. 

All entering ALP students must take a placement 
test. On the basis of the test results, students are 
placed in one of six academic levels. At the begin- 
ning and intermediate levels, students attend multi- 
skills classes for 24 hours per week. Additional 
hours are required for homework and practice In the 
Language Laboratory. Advanced level students are 
in a semi-intensive program. In addition to multi-skills 


International Programs 


classes, they may take specialized classes such as 
English for Business, English for Science and Tech- 
nology, or Test of English as a Foreign Language 
(TOEFL) preparation. 

No university credit is given for ALP classes; howev- 
er, qualified advanced students may take one or two 
classes for university credit through Extended Edu- 
cation with the consent of the program director. Stu- 
dents should expect regular homework assignments 
in all their classes. For further information, contact 
the Director of the American Language Program 
(714) 773-2909. 

AIESEC 

AIESEC, the French acronym for International Asso- 
ciation of Students in Business and Economics, is an 
International student organization which works In co- 
operation with local corporations to bring business 
trainees from all parts of the world to Orange County 
and, therefore, earns credits for placement of CSUF 
students in the 61 other participating countries. Stu- 
dents can be engaged for periods from six weeks to 
eighteen months and gain Invaluable business expe- 
riences in another culture. For further information 
call (714) 773-2266. 

International Study Courses 

Cal State Fullerton students under The California 
State University International Study Programs regis- 


ter concurrently at Cal State Fullerton and at the 
host Institution abroad, with credits assigned to the 
student which are equivalent to courses offered at 
Cal State Fullerton. Undergraduate students who 
discover appropriate study opportunities at the host 
Institution but no equivalent course at Cal State Ful- 
lerton may use Independent Study 499 and Interna- 
tional Study 292 or 492. Graduate students may use 
Independent Graduate Research 699 and Interna- 
tional Study 592. 

292 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-6 lower-division 
units) 

Open to students enrolled In California State 
University International Programs. Study un- 
dertaken In a university abroad under the aus- 

pices of The California State University. 

492 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 upper-division 
units) 

Open to students enrolled In California State 
University International Programs. Study un- 

dertaken in a university abroad under the aus- 
pices of The California State University. 

592 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 graduate units) 
Open to students enrolled In California State 
University International Programs. Study un- 

dertaken In a university abroad under the aus- 
pices of The California State University. 



International Programs 



Special Major Program 


From the total curriculum of the university, students 
may wish to plan a specially designed program of 
study that does not duplicate significantly any exist- 
ing major or concentration. The special major pro- 
vides opportunities for selected students to pursue 
individualized programs of study leading to a degree 
when legitimate academic and professional goals 
can be satisfied by a judicious selection of courses 
from two or more fields, and when these aims cannot 
be satisfied by the authorized standard degree ma- 
jors or double majors that are available on the cam- 
pus (e.g., liberal studies, social sciences). This ma- 
jor, designed for exceptional cases of individual 
students only, provides an opportunity to develop 
concentration or specializations outside the frame- 
work of existing majors. (It is not intended as a 
means of bypassing normal graduation requirements 
or as a means by which students may graduate who 
fail to complete the degree major in which they are 
enrolled.) 

B.A. Special Major 

Students desiring to work for a bachelor’s degree 
with a special major should consult with the Office 
of Academic Advisement. 

1. Entrance to the special major program is normally 
at the beginning of the junior year (60 units remain- 
ing for graduation). 

2. The minimum requirement for the major is 48 units. 
A minimum of 36 upper-division units must be in- 
cluded in the major. 

3. Although students may include on their study 
plans course work in progress and a maximum of 
12 units of course work completed prior to the 
time of filing, approval of these courses in not au- 
tomatic. 

4. No more than six units of 499 (Independent Study) 
and/or internship course work may be included In 
the major. 

5. Neither lower- nor upper-division courses applied 
to general education breadth requirements will be 
applicable toward the major. 

6. At least three units of appropriate course work In 
methodology shall be included in the student’s 
study plan. Where appropriate this requirement 
may be waived by the University Curriculum Com- 
mittee. 

7. All courses In the major must be taken under 


Grade Option 1. A GPA of 3.0 in the major is re- 
quired for graduation. 

8. Prior to taking any substitute course work a peti- 
tion for change of the study plan must be ap- 
proved by the student’s adviser and the University 
Curriculum Committee. 

9. A senior thesis shall be written by the student in 
this program during the semester preceding grad- 
uation. This thesis should show scholarly evi- 
dence of the merit In the student’s choice of an In- 
terdisciplinary program. This paper shall be 
written under the direction of the student’s special 
major adviser and approved by the faculty desig- 
nated by the departments represented on the stu- 
dent’s study plan. 

M.A. Special Major 

A graduate student desiring to work for a master’s 

degree with a special major should consult with the 

Office of Graduate Affairs and fill out an initial re- 
quest form available at that office. 

1. Entrance to the special major program requires a 
grade-point average (GPA) of 3.0 in the under- 
graduate major and a GPA of 3.0 in the last 60 
units of course work. 

2. The minimum requirement of units in the special 
major program is 30 units of which at least half 
must be graduate courses (500 level). 

3. Although students may include on their proposed 
study plan course work in progress or completed 
prior to the time of filing, approval of these 
courses is not automatic. No more than nine units 
of course work taken prior to classified standing 
can be approved on the program. 

4. The program may contain no more than six units 
of Independent Study, Project or Thesis. 

6. All courses on the study plan must be taken under 
Grade Option 1. A GPA of 3.0 is required on all 
work on the study plan. 

6. Prior to taking any substitute course work, a peti- 
tion for change of the study plan must be ap- 
proved by the student’s graduate adviser and 
graduate committee. 

7. A Thesis or Project shall be required for the com- 
pletion of the program. The completed Thesis will 
be filed with the Library; whereas the Project shall 
be filed with the Office of Graduate Affairs. 


Special Major Program 


Curricula Information 


Course Descriptions 

Course descriptions briefly describe the content or 
subject matter to be covered and provide additional 
Information on units of credit, the level of Instruction 
(see course numbering code), prerequisites and the 
type of course (lecture, laboratory, activity, seminar 
and individually supervised work). 

Course Numbering Code 

The first number in each course designation Is In- 
tended to indicate the level of complexity of the 
course. In addition, the first number also is a rough 
index of the student’s year of study at the university. 
The following are guidelines for course numbering. 

001-099 Developmental or remedial level course 
work Is pre-college in nature. It may not be 
counted toward a degree objective. 

100-199 First year or freshman level course work is 
Introductory In nature. Such courses may 
provide the fundamental or essential ele- 
ments or qualities Important to a specific 
discipline. Emphasis in many first year 
courses may be on the development of pre- 
liminary skills. These courses are usually 
designed without prerequisites and may be 
characterized as emphasizing breadth 
rather than depth of instruction. 

200-299 Second year or sophomore level course 
work may include preliminary history or sur- 
vey-type courses or intermediate skill de- 
velopment. Although there is no clear dis- 
tinction made between lower division 
courses listed at the 100 or 200 level, 
there is an inherent assumption that stu- 
dents In the second year of study have ac- 
quired preliminary skills appropriate to uni- 
versity level work. 

300-399 Third year or junior level course work is 
likely to emphasize specialization for ma- 
jors In their disciplines. Work at this level 
Is expected to be more challenging than 
lower division work. Usually, specific pre- 
requisites are used to indicate the neces- 
sary competencies required for study at 
this level. The “core” courses of many dis- 
ciplines are offered at this level and pro- 
vide the prerequisites necessary to senior 
level study. Many disciplines use 300 level 
courses to focus on areas of speciality 
or emphasis within the disciplines. 
These courses do not give graduate credit 
unless included on an approved graduate 
study plan for a specific graduate student. 



S. 


Curricula Information 



400-499 Fourth year or senior level course work is 
intended to provide depth of understanding 
or special focus appropriate to majors and 
generally requires prerequisite work. The 
student is expected to be able to theorize 
and/or practice at a professional level of 
competence. Students enrolled in 400 level 
course work are assumed to have ad- 
vanced skills in writing proficiency. 
Courses at the 400 level are sufficiently so- 
phisticated for inclusion on graduate study 
plans. 

500-599 Fifth year university study is for graduate 
students who are enrolled in advanced de- 
gree programs. The courses of study are 
advanced and specialized in nature and re- 
quire substantial undergraduate prepara- 
tion. Independent initiative is expected in 
the theoretical, practical, critical, and ana- 
lytical exploration of specialized topics. An 
essential feature of graduate study is the 
facilitation of independent decision-making, 
invention of theoretical constructs, applica- 
tion of research processes, and the deve- 
lopment of original creations. 

700-701 Course numbers for grr.duate and postbac- 
calaureate students (including those seek- 
ing a credential) to maintain continuous en- 
rollment during a particular semester, and 
who are not enrolled In regular courses. 
These numbers do not represent courses 
and do not therefore grant credit. 

900-999 Courses are specifically designed for pro- 
fessional groups seeking vocational Im- 
provement or career advancement. Credit 
for these courses does not apply to under- 
graduate or graduate degrees or creden- 
tials at the university. 

An honors course shall use the letter H. A laboratory 
course which accompanies another course should 
use the letter L. 

A controlled entry course is one which has enroll- 
ment requirements In addition to any prerequisite 
courses. Additional requirements include prior ap- 
proval of the instructor, special academic advise- 
ment. a qualifying exam, a placement test, an audi- 
tion. a teaching credential, or similar special 
qualifications. 


Special Course Numbers 

For uniformity, certain types of courses have been 
listed by all departments and schools with the same 
numbers: 499 and 599 are used respectively for un- 
dergraduate and graduate “independent study”; 
196 or 496 for “student-to-student tutorials”; 597 
for a graduate “project”; and 598 for a graduate 
“thesis.” 


Explanation of Course 
Notations 

Certain notations are uniformly used in the course 

descriptions in this catalog. 

1. The figure In parentheses following the course ti- 
tle indicates the number of semester units for the 
course. Courses offered for varying units are Indi- 
cated as (1-3) or (3-6). 

2. A course listing such as Afro-Ethnic Studies 108 
(3) (Same as Linguistics 108) indicates that a stu- 
dent taking the course may choose to count It in 
either of those two disciplines. 

3. A notation such as (Formerly 433) following the 
course title and the number of units indicates the 
same course previously was numbered 433. 


Student-to-Student Tutorials 

The “student-to-student tutorial” provides a formal 
way to encourage students to learn through teach- 
ing. It also provides tutoring to all students who need 
and want tutorial assistance. 

In those departments which choose to offer such 
courses, the courses are numbered 196 or 496 and 
carry one to three units of credit. The prerequisites 
include a grade-point average of at least 3.0 and/or 
consent of the Instructor. The tutor and his/her tutee 
ortutees will work in mutually advantageous ways by 
allowing all involved to delve more carefully and 
thoroughly into the materials presented in this spe- 
cific course. One to three students may be tutored 
by the tutor unless the instructor decides that spe- 
cial circumstances warrant increasing the usual 
maximum of three tutees. Three hours of work per 
week are expected for each semester unit of credit, 
and this work may Include, apart from contact hours 
with tutees. such other activities as: tutorial prepa- 
rations; consulting with instructors; reporting, analy- 
sis and evaluation of the tutorial experiences; and 
participation in an all-university orientation and eval- 
uation program for tutors. A maximum of three units 
may be taken each semester. No more than three 
units of any combination of tutorial courses (196 or 
496) may count toward an undergraduate degree 
program. The course must be taken as an elective 
and not counted toward general education, major or 
minor requirements. The course can be taken on a 
credit /no credit basis by the tutor. Requests for tu- 
tors must be initiated by tutees and can be initiated 
up until the official university census date. Tutors 
electing to respond to such requests will receive 
credits at the end of the semester and can register 
in the course until the official university census date. 
Both tutors and tutees must submit written reports, 
analyses and evaluations of their shared tutorial ex- 
perience to the instructor, and both must participate 
In an all-university orientation program as well as in 
any conference or critique that the instructor of the 
course may require. 

Further information can be obtained from the depart- 
ment In which the student Is interested In a “student- 
to-student tutorial.” 


Curricula Information 


Independent Study 

Under the independent study program, the student 
may pursue topics or problems of special interest 
beyond the scope of a regular course under the su- 
pervision of a faculty adviser. The work is of a re- 
search or creative nature, and normally culminates 
in a paper, project, comprehensive examination, or 
performance. Before registering, the student must 
get his topic approved by the instructor who will be 
supervising independent study and by the depart- 
ment chair. 

A student may take no more than six units of inde- 
pendent study at the undergraduate level (299 and 
499 numbered courses) in a given semester. No 
more than nine units of independent study may be 
applied toward completion of the baccalaureate de- 
gree. A graduate student may apply no more than six 
units of independent study (499 or 599 numbered 
courses) toward completion of master’s degree, un- 
less written approval is obtained from the appropri- 
ate school dean. 

Cross-Disciplinary University 
Programs 

A joint degree program is an endeavor involving two 
or more existing academic departments which need 
not be within the same school. Such programs are 
administered by program councils composed of rep- 
resentatives elected by participating departments. 
The joint degree programs are housed in administra- 
tion units as follows: 

School of Human Development and Community 
Service 

Child Development, B.S. 

Human Services, B.S. 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

Environmental Studies, M.S. 

Latin American Studies. B.A. 


Liberal Studies. B.A. 

Russian and East European Area Studies, B.A. 
Social Sciences, M.A. 

The degree descriptions are located within the ap- 
propriate school section of this catalog. 


Bilingual /Cross-Cultural 
Studies 

Students may pursue a course of study with a bilin- 
gual/cross-cultural emphasis. 

Complete course listings and details are available 
from the Department of Foreign Languages and Lit- 
eratures. the Department of Chicano Studies. Divi- 
sion of Teacher Education and Educational Opportu- 
nity Program advisers. 


Library Courses 

201 Introduction to Library Resources (1) 

A practical introduction to library materials and 
methods enabling undergraduate students to lo- 
cate information for course-related, as well as 
independent study and research. 

200 Elements of Bibliographic Investigation (3) 

A survey of important information sources in 
various subject fields and the application of re- 
search methods which will enable students to 
become effective library users. Particular atten- 
tion is given to the assembling of material for 
term papers and reports, including the prepara- 
tion of bibliographies. 

302 Library Research Methods for Specific Majors (1) 

Library research methodology and introduction 
to library resources in special subject areas 
such as business, education and science. 


Curricula Information 


Curricula 



151 




School of the Arts 


Dean: Jerry Samuelson 
Associate Dean: Frank Cummings III 

The learning opportunities within the School of the 
Arts are based on a commitment to artistic and aca- 
demic excellence. We provide an environment which 
encourages individual achievement for performers, 
artists and scholars. 

Within the broader university liberal arts environ- 
ment, the School of the Arts offers intensive pro- 
grams in Art, Music, Theatre and Dance. We are also 
committed to the enhancement of artistic awareness 
of all students. 

We extend a warm welcome to you and we promise 
that with your perseverance, we will do everything 
possible to further your goals and objectives in 
whatever field of art you choose. 

Academic Advisement is available through the de- 
partments. Faculty advisors are available to assist 
students with career decisions and degree require- 
ments. 

Several scholarships are available to students in the 
School of the Arts. Inquiries should be made to the 
respective department offices. 



153 


Programs Offered 
Art, Bachelor of Arts 

Art History 

Studio 

Teaching 

Art, Bachelor of Fine Arts 

Drawing and Painting 

Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Ceramics 

Graphic Design 

Illustration 

Environmental Design 
Creative Photography 

Minor in Art 


Music, Bachelor of Music 
Commercial Music 
Composition 
Instrumental 
Keyboard 
Voice 

Accompanying 
Minor in Music 
Music, Master of Arts 

Music History and Literature 
Music Education 

Music, Master of Music 

Performance 

Theory-Composition 

Theatre Arts, Bachelor of Arts 


Art, Master of Arts 

Drawing and Painting 
Sculpture 

Crafts (Including Ceramics, Glass. Fibers, 
Wood, Jewelry /Metalsmithing). 

Design (including Environmental Design, 

Graphic Design, Illustration. Exhibition Design, 
Creative Photography). 

Art History 

Art, Master of Fine Arts 

Drawing. Painting and Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Ceramics 

Crafts 

Design 

Creative Photography 
Certificate in Museum Studies 
Music, Bachelor of Arts 

Liberal Arts 

Music Education 

Music History and Theory 


History and Theory 

Production / Performance 

Playwriting 

Oral Interpretation 

Acting 

Television 

Directing 

Technical Production /Design 
Dance 

Musical Theatre 
Teaching 

Theatre Arts, Master of Arts 

Acting and Directing 

Dramatic Literature and Criticism 

Oral Interpretation 

Playwriting 

Television 

Technical Theatre 

Theatre for Children 

Theatre History 

Theatre Arts, Master of Fine Arts 

Technical Theatre and Design 

Acting 

Directing 



School of the Arts 



Department of Art 


Department Chair: Alvin Ching 
Department Office: Visual Arts 102 

Programs Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in Art 

Art History 

Studio 

Teaching 

Bachelor of Fine Arts in Art 

Drawing and Painting 

Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Ceramics 

Graphic Design 

Illustration 

Environmental Design 
Creative Photography 

Minor in Art 
Master of Arts in Art 

Drawing and Painting 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Design 

Art History 

Master of Fine Arts in Art 

Drawing, Painting, and Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Ceramics 

Crafts 

Design 

Creative Photography 
Certificate in Museum Studies 

Faculty 

Robert Caddes, Ruth Capelle, John Carter, 

Alvin Ching, Eileen Cowin, Frank Cummings III. 

Darryl Curran, Robert Ewing, Dextra Frankel, 
Maurice Gray, Raymond Hein, Thomas Holste, 
Dorian Hunter, George James, Jimmie Jenkins, 
Lawrence Johnson, G. Ray Kerciu, 

Donald Lagerberg, Clinton MacKenzie, 

Robert Partin, Theodore Phillips, Albert Porter, 

Leo Robinson, Jerry Rothman, Jerry Samuelson, 

V. Joachim Smith, Jon Stokesbary, Vincent Suez 


Art 


INTRODUCTION 

The Department of Art offers programs which in- 
clude the scholarly fields of art history, theory, anal- 
ysis and criticism; the studio fields of drawing and 
painting, printmaking, sculpture, crafts (including fi- 
bers, jewelry, wood and metal), ceramics (Including 
glass), graphic design, illustration, environmental 
design, exhibition design, and creative photogra- 
phy; and the single subject teaching field of art edu- 
cation. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART 

The curricular plans have been developed to meet 
the Individual needs and Interests of students work- 
ing for the bachelor of arts with a major In art. 

The general objectives of the B.A. degree program 
are to provide a comprehensive learning environ- 
ment which contributes technically and conceptually 
to the development of the art scholar, the creative 
artist and the art teacher. More specifically, the B.A. 
degree program provides opportunities for students 
to: (1) develop a knowledge and understanding of 
fundamental visual experience and concepts basic 
to many forms and fields of art; (2) develop a critical 
appreciation of historical and contemporary art 
forms as they relate to individual and social needs 
and values; (3) express creatively one’s personal 
experience and thought with skill and clarity In visual 
terms; and (4) to develop those understandings and 
skills necessary to pursue graduate studies in visual 
arts, or to teach art in the schools. 

Plan I provides for an emphasis in the area of art his- 
tory, theory, and appreciation and is particularly rec- 
ommended for those students who wish to pursue 
graduate studies in art history or museology. 

Plan II is a liberal curricula that provides a broad ed- 
ucation in the visual arts to students seeking an indi- 
vidualized. flexible course of study with open-ended 
goals. 

Plan III Is for students who wish to meet the require- 
ments for single subject instruction (Ryan Act) for 
teaching art in grades K-12. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the 
major, students must meet the other university re- 
quirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students 
following Plan III must also meet specific require- 
ments for the desired teaching credential. 

All art majors must take Art 300, Writing in the Visual 
Arts, and pass the university’s Examination in Writ- 
ing Proficiency (EWP) after achieving junior standing 
(60 units). Testing dates for the EWP are available 
from the Testing Center or the Academic Advise- 
ment Center. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major 
in art, students must have a 2.0 or better grade-point 
average In all courses required for the degree. No 
credit toward the major will be allowed for specific 
major courses in which a grade of D Is obtained. 

Plan I: Art History 

Preparation for the major (lower division — 21 units) 


Art 201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

Lower division studio courses 6 


Approved electives in art, American studies, 
anthropology, foreign languages, history. 


literature, music, philosophy or theatre 9 

The major (upper division — 33 units) 

Upper-division art history selected from the 
following nine courses: 21 


301 Ancient Art 

302 Medieval Art 

311 Foundations of Modern Art 

312 Art of the 20th Century 

431 Renaissance Art 

432 Baroque and Rococo Art 
460B Pre-Columbian Art 

461 A American Art: Colonial- 1900 
46 IB American Art: 20th Century 


481 Seminar in Art History 3 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

Approved upper-division electives 6 

Total 64 

Plan II: Studio 

Preparation for the major (lower division — 27 units) 

103 Two Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 17 Life Drawing 3 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

Lower-division art electives 6 

The major (upper division — 27 units) 

Upper-division art history and appreciation 6 
Upper-division studio area emphasis 12 

Upper-division art electives 6 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

Total 54 


* Emphases may include; drawing and painting, printmaking, sculpture, 
crafts, ceramics, graphic design, illustration, environmental design, 
creative photography, exhibition design. 

Plan III: Teaching 

Single Subject Instruction— Ryan Act 
(Qualifies for Teaching Art in Grades K-12) 

Preparation for the major (lower division — 30 units) 


103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

106A Beginning Ceramics 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 17 Life Drawing 3 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

205A Beginning Crafts 3 

207A Drawing /Painting 3 

Major requirements (upper division-24 units) 

Select Drawing /Painting or Crafts: 

Drawing and Painting: 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

307A,B Drawing and Painting 6 

310A Watercolor 3 

31 7A Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 3 

347A Printmaking-Etching 3 

312 Art of the 20th Century 3 

441 A Media Exploration for Teaching Art 3 


156 


Crafts: 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

305A Advanced Crafts 3 

306A.B Advanced Ceramics 6 

310A Watercolor 3 

315A Jewelry 3 

312 Art of the 20th Century 3 

441 A Media Exploration for Teaching Art 3 

Professional Preparation (24-27 units) 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary 
School 3 

Education course work 9-12 

Student teaching (one semester full time) 12 
Program Requirements: 


1. Be advised by a faculty adviser in art education 
assigned by the art department chair. 

2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in the catalog 
within the School of Human Development and 
Community Service for the Ryan Act curriculum. 

3. Meet the requirements listed under Plan III. 

4. Complete the major requirements prior to enrolling 
In the teacher education program. 

5. Be admitted to teacher education through the 
School of Human Development and Community 
Service prior to enrollment in Art Ed 442, profes- 
sional education courses and student teaching. 

6. Be accepted for teacher education and student 
teaching based on candidate quotas, portfolio re- 
view, and evidence of success in completed uni- 
versity course work. 

7. Be recommended by the faculty adviser in art edu- 
cation. 

8. Complete Secondary Education 310 and Child De- 
velopment 386 or equivalents. 

9. Pass C-BEST exam prior to admission to Teacher 
Education. 

10. Have a G.P.A. of 2.89 overall, 3.0 in major. 
Credential Information 

Upon completion of the above program and the 
bachelor of arts degree, the student is eligible for a 
partial credential, which meets state requirements 
for teaching art in grades K-12. Within the specified 
period of time from the beginning of a teaching as- 
signment, 30 units of course work must be complet- 
ed at an accredited college or university to qualify 
for a clear credential. Credentials are issued from 
the institution where this requirement has been com- 
pleted. 

Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all 
students intending to teach In the elementary 
schools in multiple subject classrooms. 

Art 380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 
Theatre 402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 
BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS IN ART 

The Bachelor of Fine Arts degree is a professional 
program providing directed studies in nine studio 
concentrations within the visual arts. The program is 


designed for students seeking in-depth preparation 
for specialized goals selected from the following ar- 
eas: drawing and painting: printmaking: sculpture: 
crafts: ceramics: graphic design: illustration: envi- 
ronmental design: or creative photography. 

Admission Requirements 

All entering students must apply to the B.A. (Bache- 
lor of Arts) in Art program for their first semester of 
residence. After completing a minimum of 13 lower- 
division preparation units with a 3.0 minimum grade- 
point average, students may contact the Art Depart- 
ment to change their objective to the B.F.A. in Art 
program. 

Students who transfer from community colleges or 
other universities must also apply to the B.A. in Art 
program. They may change their objective to the B. 
F A. in Art program during the first semester after an 
evaluation and approval of studio courses taken at 
the other institutions has been completed. 

All students must achieve a 3.0 grade-point average 
in studio courses. 

Bachelor of Fine Arts Requirements 

The Bachelor of Fine Arts degree program requires 
a minimum of 70 units In art, with 28 lower-division 
units of preparation and 42 upper-division units, in- 
cluding 24 units in an area of concentration, nine 
units of art history, three units of writing in art, and 
six units of art electives. In addition to the minimum 
70 unit requirement for the B.F.A. degree, students 
must meet the other university requirements for a 
bachelor's degree (see the university Catalog and 
Class Schedule). 

To qualify for a baccalaureate with a major In art, 
students must have a 2.0 or better grade-point aver- 
age in all courses required for the degree. No credit 
toward the major will be allowed for art courses in 
which a grade of D is obtained. 


Drawing and Painting Units 

Preparation (lower division-26 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 17 Life Drawing 4 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

207A,B Drawing and Painting 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) 

307A,B Drawing and Painting 6 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 
487B Special Studies, Life Drawing 3 

487A Special Studies, Painting 3 

Upper division drawing and painting options 
from 487A,BS and/or C 6 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

Upper division art history 9 

Upper-division art electives 6 

Printmaking 

Preparation (lower division-26 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A, B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 
1 17 Life Drawing 4 


157 


201A, B Art and Civilization 
207A Drawing and Painting 
247 Beginning Printmaking 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) 

307A Drawing and Painting 

31 7A, B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 

338A Creative Photography 

347A, B Printmaking-Etching, Lithography 

487D Special Studies, Printmaking 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 

Upper-division art history 

Upper-division art electives 

Sculpture 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 

107A, B Beginning Drawing and Painting 

117 Life Drawing 

201A, B Art and Civilization 

216A, B Beginning Sculpture 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) 

316A, B Sculpture 

317A, B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 
326A Ceramic Sculpture 
336A Techniques and Theories, Cast 
Sculpture 

486A Special Studies, Sculpture 
300 Writing In the Visual Arts* 
Upper-division art history 
Upper-division art electives 

Crafts 

Preparation (lower division-26 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 
107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 
1 1 7 Life Drawing 

123B Descriptive Drawing 
201A,B Art and Civilization 
205A,B Beginning Crafts 

Concentration (upper division-42 units) 

305A,B Advanced Crafts 
Select 9 units from: 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics 
315A,B Jewelry 
325A,B Metalsmithing 
330 Fibers and Papers 
355A,B Fibers, Fabric Printing & Dyeing 
364A,B Stained Glass 
365A.B Weaving 
485B Special Studies, Crafts 
498 Internship in Art 
300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 
Upper-division art history 
Upper-division art electives 

Ceramics 

Preparation (lower division-28 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 
106A,B Beginning Ceramics 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 

117 Life Drawing 

201A,B Art and Civilization 


Concentration (upper division-42 units) 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics 
317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 
326A,B Ceramic Sculpture 
or 424A,B Glass Forming 
484A or 484B Special Studies 
300 Writing In the Visual Arts* 
Upper-division art history 
Upper-division art electives 

Graphic Design 

Preparation (lower division-26 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 
107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 
117 Life Drawing 

201A,B Art and Civilization 

223A,B Lettering, Typography & Rendering 

Concentration (upper division-42 units) 

323A,B Graphic Design 
338A Creative Photography 
363A,B Illustration 

483A Special Studies, Graphic Design 
498 Internship 

300 Writing In the Visual Arts* 
Upper-division art history 
Upper-division art electives 

Illustration 

Preparation (lower division-28 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 
107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 
117 Life Drawing 

123A Descriptive Drawing 

201A,B Art and Civilization 

223A Lettering, Typography & Rendering 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) 

317A.B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 
323A Graphic Design 
363A,B Illustration 

483C Special Studies, Design & Comp 
498 Internship 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 
Upper-division art history 
Upper-division art electives 

Environmental Design 

Preparation (lower division-26 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 
107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 
117 Life Drawing 

123B Descriptive Drawing 

201A,B Art and Civilization 

213A,B Beginning Environmental Design 

Concentration (upper division-42 units) 

313A,B Environmental Design 
333A,B Environmental Design 
453A Exhibition Design 
483B Special Studies. Environ Design 
498 Internship in Art 
300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 
Upper-division art history 
Upper-division art electives 


6 

3 

3 

3 

6 

3 

6 

6 

3 

9 

6 

3 

3 

6 

4 

6 

6 

6 

6 

3 

3 

6 

3 

9 

6 

3 

3 

6 

1 

3 

6 

6 

6 

9 

6 

3 

3 

9 

6 

3 

3 

6 

6 

4 

6 


158 


(0(0 (DCDCOOCO COCOCD^CDCO (OCOCOCDCOCOOCD COCO(D^CO(OCO (OC0CDCDC0C0(3)(O COCOCO’-COCDCD CDCDCOCDCOCO^^^O 


Creative Photography 
Preparation (lower division-28 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 4 

123A Descriptive Drawing 3 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

247 Beginning Printmaking 3 

Concentration (upper division-42 units) 

31 7A Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 3 
338A,B Creative Photography 6 

339A Photo Illustration 3 

438A,B Creative Color Photography 6 

489 Special Studies, Creative Photo 6 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

Upper-division art history 9 

Upper-division art electives 6 


'Students must also take and pass the Examination in Writing Proficiency 
(EWP) 

The following additional list of courses would be 
strongly recommended for any student who wishes 
to expand his/her knowledge in any or all of the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 106A, 107A, 201A,B, 

310A.B, 330, 380, 441A,B 

Dance 101,112, 122, 132, 142, 323A,B, 422 
Music 111A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281P,B,S,W, 283, 381 

Theatre 100, 206A,B, 263, 276A, 277, 370A,B, 
402A,B, 403A,B 

MINOR IN ART 

A minimum of 24 units is required for a minor in art 
of which a minimum of 10 units must be in upper divi- 
sion courses. Included in the program must be a ba- 
sic course in each of the following areas: (1) art his- 
tory, theory, analysis and criticism; (2) design; (3) 
drawing and painting; and (4) crafts. Those students 
planning to qualify for a standard teaching credential 
with specialization in elementary or secondary 
teaching and art for a minor must obtain approval 
from the Art Department for the courses selected to 
meet the upper division requirements for a minor in 
art. 


master of ARTS IN ART 

The program of studies leading to this degree pro- 
vides a balance of study and practice for those who 
wish a stronger educational and experiential basis 
for a professional career in the visual arts, or who 
wish advanced study In preparation for further grad- 
uate work in the field. This graduate program is for 
students who are seriously committed, responsible, 
and experienced and have concentrated within a 
specific area of art. The program offers the following 
areas of concentration: (1) drawing and painting (in- 
cluding printmaking); (2) sculpture; (3) crafts (in- 
cluding ceramics, wood, glass, fibers, jewelry/ 
metalsmithing); (4) design (including environmental 
design, graphic design. Illustration, exhibition design, 
or creative photography); and (5) art history. 


Admission Requirements 

1 . Conditionally classified standing requires: 

A. A baccalaureate degree from an accredited 
institution. 

B. GPA minimum of 2.5 In the last 60 semester 
units attempted. 

C. Special requirements: 

(1) Studio program: satisfactory review of 
preliminary portfolio by a faculty member In 
the area of studio concentration. 

(2) Art history program: satisfactory prelimi- 
nary interview by a faculty member in art his- 
tory. 

2. Classified standing requires: 

A. An approved undergraduate major In art or24 
units of approved upper division art Including 
at least 12 units in the area of concentration 
completed with grades of B or better. 

B. Portfolio review — before any units may apply 
to the approved study program for the de- 
gree, the student must arrange an area facul- 
ty committee evaluation of the student’s 
background. Including a statement of purpose 
by the student and review of creative work; 
or, for art history applicants, submission of 
assigned research papers. Portfolio review 
dates are usually in April for the following fall 
semester, and In November for the following 
spring semester of each year. Arrangements 
may be made through the Art Depart- 
ment office to meet these deadlines prior to 
admission. 

C. Art history program: reading knowledge of a 
foreign language required before advance- 
ment to candidacy. 

D. Development of an approved study plan. 
Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate 
study approved by the student’s graduate commit- 
tee of which 15 must be 500-level courses. The 30 
units are distributed as follows: 

Units 

1. Core courses In art history, philosophy, 

analysis and criticism 9 

A. Studio program: 

Art 500A, Graduate Seminar in Major 
Field (3 units) 

Art history program: 

Art 5 1 1 , Seminar on the Content and Method 
of Art History (3 units) (ADMISSION WITH 
CLASSIFIED STANDING ONLY) 

B. Studio Program: 

Art 500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field 
(3units) 

Art history program: 

Art 512, Seminar on Selected Topics in Art 
History (3 units) (ADMISSION WITH 
CLASSIFIED STANDING ONLY) 

C. Art 481 Seminar in Art History 

(3 units), or substitute of a 400 - level 
course in art history, theory, analysis or 
criticism on the recommendation of the 
major adviser. 

2. 500-and/or 400-level courses in the area of 

concentration selected from one of the 

following (minimum of six units at 500 level) 12 


159 


A. Drawing and painting (including 
printmaking) 

B. Sculpture 

C. Crafts (including ceramics, glass, 
fibers, wood, jewelry/metalsmithing) 

D. Design (including environmental 
design, graphic design, illustration, 
exhibition design, or creative 
photography) 

E. Art history 

3. Additional course work in the area of 

concentration or approved electives 3 or 6 

4. Art 697, Project (for studio); or Art 598, 

Thesis (for art history) 3 or 6 

Total 30 

The M.A. study plan must be completed with a B av- 
erage, and all courses in the area of concentration 
be completed with grades of B or better. Every grad- 
uate student is required to demonstrate writing abili- 
ty commensurate with the baccalaureate degree. 
Please refer to the section on Graduate Regulations 
for further clarification. The Department of Art re- 
quires the studio candidate for the Master of Arts in 
Art to exhibit the project in one of the department’s 
graduate galleries prior to graduation. The art histo- 
ry candidate is required to submit a written thesis 
based on a specific topic of research. 

For further information consult the graduate program 
adviser. 

MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN ART 

The Master of Fine Arts is a rigorous studio program 
for students with advanced proficiency and focus 
who are committed to becoming professional artists. 
The M.F.A. program provides in-depth study within 
a 60-unit approved study plan in the following areas 
of concentration: (1) design (including graphic de- 
sign, Illustration, environmental design, and exhibi- 
tion design); (2) ceramics (including glass); (3) 
crafts (including fibers, jewelry/metalsmithing, and 
woodworking /furniture); (4) sculpture; (5) drawing, 
painting, and printmaking; and (6) creative photogra- 
phy. 

Admission Requirements 

An applicant may apply to the university in one of 
three categories: 

1 . Postbaccalaureate Unclassified (no degree ob- 
jective or major declared). This is for students 
who hold a bachelor’s degree and wish to take ad- 
ditional course work to fulfill prerequisites or pre- 
pare for the comprehensive review. To qualify for 
admission an applicant must hold a baccalaureate 
degree from an accredited Institution, have at- 
tained a GPA of at least 2.5 In the last 60 units at- 
tempted and have been in good standing at the 
last college attended. Admission withpostbacca- 
laureate unclassified standing does not consti- 
tute admission to the art graduate program or 
graduate degree curricula. 

2. Conditionally Classified (objective declared in 
art). An applicant who is admitted with condition- 
ally classified standing may enroll in graduate 
courses with the exception of ART 500 A,B. Ad- 


mission requirements are the same as for post- 
baccalaureate unclassified standing. In addition, 
the department requires all applicants to under- 
take the comprehensive portfolio review and be 
recommended for conditionally classified stand- 
ing by the faculty portfolio review committee. 

3. Classified (approved study plan for the M.F.A. de- 
gree). Admission requirements are the same as 
for postbaccalaureate unclassified, with the addi- 
tion of the following requirements: 

a. An approved undergraduate major in art or 24 
units of approved upper-division art Including 
a minimum of 18 units of upper-division study 
in the area of concentration completed with 
a grade-point average of 3.0 or better. 

b. Comprehensive Portfolio Review. Before any 
units may apply to the approved study plan 
for the degree, students must receive a satis- 
factory faculty committee evaluation of their 
creative work, their ability to verbalize about 
their work and their academic background. 
The comprehensive portfolio review is held 
semi-annually, in the fall and spring. Exact 
dates are announced each semester. A de- 
tailed description of the portfolio review may 
be obtained from the art department graduate 
secretary. 

c. Development, with the student’s graduate 
committee, of an approved study plan. 

Study Plan 

The M.F.A. degree program requires 60 units of 
graduate study approved by the student’s graduate 
committee and the dean of graduate studies. The 
study plan must be completed with a grade-point av- 
erage of 3.0 or better. The courses in the concentra- 
tion must be completed with a grade of ”B” or bet- 
ter. The 60 unit study plan is distributed as follows: 


Areas Units 

Theory, criticism: Art 500A, 600B 6 

History 9 

Area of concentration 24 

Electives in art 12 

Independent study: research 3 

Project 6 

Total 60 


Master of Fine Arts Project 

The M.F.A. project exhibition constitutes a profes- 
sional one-person art exhibit which Is installed in 
one of the department’s graduate galleries and an- 
nounced for public view by the student as the final 
phase of the M.F.A. program requirements. 

The Department of Art Is nationally accredited at the 
highest level of quality and professionalism (Division 
I) by the National Association of Schools of Art and 
Design. For further details on the comprehensive 
portfolio review, communicate with the graduate co- 
ordinator or graduate secretary in the art depart- 
ment, Visual Arts 102 [(714/773-3471). 

CERTIFICATE IN MUSEUM STUDIES 

Courses leading to the certificate are designed to 
educate students in museum practices in prepara- 
tion for entry Into the museum profession. The curric- 


160 


ulum includes instruction in the historical develop- 
ment and philosophical basis of collections, 
exhibitions and their design, and curatorship. A mu- 
seum Internship is required. The certificate in muse- 
um studies may be undertaken as a self-contained 
program or may be taken in conjunction with the 
Master of Arts in Art degree or the Master of Fine 
Arts in Art degree or, by special permission, with 
other graduate degrees in the university. (For an 
M.A. or M.F.A. In Art degree with an exhibition de- 
sign emphasis see M.A. and M.F.A. emphases under 
the design concentration.) 

Prerequisites 

1. B.A. in Art or other major by special permission 

2. Specific course prerequisites: 

A. 12 units in upper-division art history 

B. 6 units in graphic design and exhibition design 

C. 3 units of advanced writing (Communications 
435, Editorial and Critical Writing; or Communi- 
cations 362, Public Relations Writing; or English 
301, Advanced College Writing) 

D. 3 units of beginning accounting 

Study Plan 

The certificate program requires 24 units. The 24 
units are distributed as follows: 


Units 

1. Art 463 Museum Studies 3 

2. Art 481 Seminar in Art History 3 

3. Art 464 Museum Conservation 3 

4. Art 483D Exhibition Design 3 

5. Art 498 internship In Art 3 

6. Art 501 Curatorship 3 

7. Art 503D Exhibition Design _6 

Total 24 


For further information, consult the Department of 
Art. 


Art Courses 

100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Use of a variety of art materials, processes and concepts. 
Field trips required. Not open to art majors for credit except 
by permission of Art Department. (6 hours activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) 

Historical and contemporary art forms of painting, sculpture, 
architecture and design. Field trips required. Not open to art 
majors for credit except by permission of Art Department. 

103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts and elements of two-dimensional visual 
organization. (6 hours activity) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts and elements of three-dimensional visu- 
al organization. (6 hours activity) 

106A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Form as related to ceramic materials, tools, processes. Kiln 
loading and firing, hand building, wheel throwing and raku. 
(9 hours laboratory) 

106B Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A. Form as related to ceramics. 
Glaze batching and its application, and the presentation of 
ceramic technique. (9 hours laboratory) 


107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

The traditional and contemporary use of drawing and paint- 
ing materials integrated with visual experiences and con- 
cepts. 107A emphasizes drawing; 1078 emphasizes paint- 
ing. (6 hours activity) 

1 17 Life Drawing (1) 

The live model. May be repeated to a maximum of 4 units. 
(3 hours activity for each unit) 

123A,B Descriptive Drawing (3,3) 

Traditional and contemporary drawing techniques and theo- 
ries. 123A, representation of nature forms; 1238, manmade 
and mechanical forms including linear perspective. (6 hours 
activity) 

201A,B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

The Ideas, forms and styles of the visual arts as they devel- 
oped in various cultures from prehistoric time to the present. 

205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Traditional and contemporary concepts and processes with 
emphasis on design principles In the development of esthet- 
ic forms based on function. (9 hours laboratory) 

205B Beginning Crafts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 205A. Art 104 may be taken 
concurrently. The development of esthetic forms based on 
function, with emphasis on design principles and the cre- 
ative use of hand tools and power equipment. (9 hours labo- 
ratory) 

207A,B Drawing and Painting (Experimental Methods and 
Materials) (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 117, 107A,B or equivalents. Traditional 
and contemporary methods and materials. (6 hours activity) 

213A Beginning Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisites; Art 103 and 104. Design methodology and 
communication skills In the environmental design field. (6 
hours activity) 

213B Interior Space Planning and Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104; 213A or consent of instructor. 
The planning and organization of residential and commercial 
interior space. (6 hours activity) 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 104, sculpture: The creative use of wood 
and metal, power equipment and hand tools. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 

223A,B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. The history, design and use of letter 
forms; techniques for rough and comprehensive layouts; the 
use of hand-lettered forms and handset type. (6 hours activity) 

247 Beginning Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B. Printmaking forms; litho, etching, 
woodcut and serigraphy. (9 hours laboratory) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts (3) 

Principles, practices and objectives of writing in the visual 
arts. Includes descriptive, analytical and expressive es- 
says; project and grant proposals; artist’s statements; re- 
sumes; and professional correspondence. Satisfies the 
classroom portion of the upper-division writing requirements 
for art majors. 


161 


301 Ancient Art (3) 

The developments in art from the Paleolithic to late antiquity. 

302 Medieval Art (3) 

The developments In art from the late antiquity through the 
Gothic. 

303 Architectural and Interior Rendering (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 123B or consent of instructor. Rendering of 
architectural, interior and landscape environments, utilizing 
mechanical perspective and contemporary design drawing 
delineation techniques. Mixed media. (6 hour activity) 

305A,B Advanced Crafts (3,3) 

Prerequisites: 205A and 205B. Advanced concepts and pro- 
cesses in the development of esthetic forms based on func- 
tion, emphasizing individual growth and personal expres- 
sion. (9 hours laboratory) 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103, 104 and 106A,B. Forms and the cre- 
ative use of ceramic concepts and materials; design, form- 
ing, glazing and firing. (9 hours laboratory) 

307A,B Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 117, 207A,B or equivalents. The 
concepts, materials and activities of drawing and painting, 
emphasizing individual growth, plan and craft. (6 hours activ- 
ity) 

310A,B Watercolor (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B or equivalents. An exploration of 
watercolor media related to varied subject matter and de- 
sign applications. Includes field trip activity. Provides skills 
and concepts useful for school art programs. (6 hours activi- 
ty) 

311 Foundations of Modern Art (3) (Formerly 411) 
Prerequisite: upper division standing. Painting and sculpture 
of the realism, impressionism, post-impressionism periods. 

312 Art of the 20th Century- 1900 to Present (3) 

(Formerly 412) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Fundamentals of mod- 
ern painting, graphics and architecture. 

313A Environmental Design: Unit Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 213. Environmental design 
projects and the study of unit concepts. (6 hours activity) 

313B Environmental Design: Systems Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 313A. Environmental design projects and 
systems concepts. (6 hours activity) 

315A,B Jewelry (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 306A. Art 305A may be taken 
concurrently. Design and creation of jewelry. (9 hours lab) 

316A,B Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 216A. Sculptural materials and 
processes. (9 hours laboratory) 

317 Life Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: three units lower division life drawing. Draw- 
ing. painting and sculpture from the live model. (9 hours lab) 

317A Drawing and Painting 
317B Drawing and Painting 
317C Sculpting 


318A Drawing and Painting the Head and Hands (3) 

(Formerly 318) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B and Art 117. Specialized prob- 
lems in construction and anatomy of the human head and 
hands, and their principal use in drawing, painting and illus- 
tration. (9 hours laboratory) 

318B Portraiture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A, 107B, 3 units of Art 117. Compre- 
hensive problems in composition, concept, content and exe- 
cution of portraits. 

320 History of Architecture Before the Modern Era (3) 

A study of selected monuments from Stonehenge through 
the late Baroque. Interrelationship between patronage, 
style, function, structural principles and technological devel- 
opments. 

323A,B Graphic Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 223A. Development and projec- 
tion of ideas in relation to the technical, esthetic and psy- 
chological aspects of advertising art. (6 hours activity) 

324 Beginning Glass Forming (3) (Formerly 226) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or consent of Instructor. Hot 
glass laboratory equipment and techniques. Handling hot 
glass. (9 hours laboratory) 

326A,B Ceramic Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 1 17 or consent of instructor. De- 
velopment of ceramic technology into individual sculptural 
forms and techniques. (9 hours laboratory) 

330 Fibers and Papers (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104, or consent of instructor. The 
use of fibers and papers as an art form. (9 hours laboratory) 

333A Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 313B. Materials and structural concepts as 
design determinants. (6 hours activity) 

333B Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 333A. Change and growth as design deter- 
minants; experimental design concepts and methods. (6 
hours activity) 

336A,B Casting Techniques and Theories of Cast Sculpture 
(3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 316A. Waxing, molding and metal casting 
techniques. Aluminum and bronze and the lost wax process. 
(9 hours laboratory) 

338A Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or its equivalent. The photographic me- 
dia in personal expression. Historical attitudes and process- 
es; new materials and contemporary esthetic trends. Field 
trips required. (9 hours laboratory) 

338B Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. The photographic medium in person- 
al expression. Historical and new processes. Field trips re- 
quired. (9 hours laboratory) 

339A Photo-Illustration (3) (Formerly 339) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 338. The use of specialized pho- 
tographic techniques such as lighting, camera position, col- 
or and motion for solutions to illustration problems of narra- 
tion, visual description, juxtaposition and imagery. (9 hours 
laboratory) 


162 


339B Photo Illustration (3) 

Prerequisites: 338A and 339A. or consent of instructor. Con- 
cepts and attitudes in the field of photo illustration. Illustra- 
tion problems using narrative, visual description, juxtaposi- 
tion and imagery. 

347A Printmaking— Etching (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 117, and 247. Concept develop- 
ment, exploration and materials involved in printmaking tech- 
niques. Includes etching, aquatint. (9 hours laboratory) 

347B Printmaking— Lithography (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,p, 117, and 247. Concept develop- 
ment, exploration and materials involved in lithography. 
(9 hours laboratory) 

348 Artists’ Books (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or 247, or consent of instructor. 
Personal vision and concepts applied to the book form as 
art; the history and aesthetics of artists' books. 

353 Environmental Design Practice (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 213, 313 and 333, or consent of instructor. 
Environmental design practice, including research tech- 
niques, project administration, specification writing, estimat- 
ing, forms and documents, evaluation techniques and ethics. 
Areas of emphasis: interior design, architecture, landscape 
architecture. 

355A,B Fibers: Fabric Printing and Dyeing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or B or consent of instructor. 
Design concepts and printing and dyeing processes as ap- 
plied to fabrics. (9 hours laboratory) 

363A,B Illustration (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A,B and 117. Story, book, maga- 
zine, and film illustration. (6 hours activity) 

364A,B Stained Glass (3,3) 

Leaded and stained glass; individual exploration, growth, 
planning and craftsmanship. (6 hours activity) 

365A,B Fibers: Weaving (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or 205A,B or consent of in- 
structor. The use of the loom and weaving processes to de- 
sign and create fiber and fabric art forms. (9 hours laborato- 
ry) 

371 History and Theory of Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A and B. The chronology of design In 
relation to the philosophical and theoretical ideologies 
which have, along with related socio-political and economic 
conditions, influenced its implementation and development. 

373 Methods in Exhibit Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 123B. Exhibition Design: spatial 
concepts, modular systems, traffic patterns and object visu- 
al criteria. Drawings, working and finished models, and ma- 
terial specifications. 

375 Professional Practices in the Arts (3) 

Practices unique to the visual arts, including an overview of 
changing concepts In the art market, traditional roles in cul- 
tural context, portfolio development, strategies for protect- 
ing ideas and avoiding abuses, and long term professional 
development. 

380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Art concepts, materials and processes as they relate to 
child development. (6 hours activity) 


413 History of Contemporary Art (3) 

Prerequisites: 312 and 46 IB or consent of instructor. A his- 
torical perspective of contemporary art beginning with major 
developments in Europe and the United States in the 1950’s. 
Emphasis on new materials, new exhibition methods, and In 
particular the major conceptual issues raised by individual 
artists and groups. 

420 History of Modern Architecture (3) 

Development of modern architecture. The interrelationship 
among architecture, technology and society, from the Indus- 
trial and political revolutions of the 18th century to the pres- 
ent. Exploration of national differences and various ap- 
proaches to city planning. 

424A,B Glass Forming (3,3) (Formerly 426A,B) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 324 or consent of instructor. The 
chemistry, handling and manipulation of glass and its tools 
and equipment for the ceramic artist. (9 hours laboratory) 

431 Renaissance Art (3) 

Painting, sculpture and architecture of the Renaissance 
period. Lectures, discussion and field trips. 

432 Baroque and Rococo Art (3) 

Painting, sculpture and architecture of the Baroque and Ro- 
coco period. Lectures, discussion and field trips. 

438A,B Creative Color Photography (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 338A,B. Concepts and techniques in cre- 
ative color photography. Historical attitudes and contempo- 
rary trends. Personal involvement with the medium. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

441A,B Media Exploration for Teaching Art (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B, 205A or consent of in- 
structor. Exploring the art media used in secondary school 
art programs today. Materials for secondary art curriculum. 
Two and three dimensional media in subject matter applica- 
tions. (6 hours activity) 

443 Studio Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 223A,B and 323A,B. Admission by inter- 
view and portfolio review. Studio production of graphics for 
the School of the Arts, including printed mailers, posters, 
booklets, catalogs, advertisements. Students experience 
designer/client relationships and translate concepts into 
production. (9 hours activity) 

453A,B Exhibition Design (3,3) 

Technical and esthetic experience in problem-solving exhi- 
bition design concepts, evaluation and design analysis. The 
production of exhibitions in the University Art Gallery, their 
selection, design, installation, lighting and supportive inter- 
pretive material. (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

460B Pre-Columbian Art (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201A.B or consent of instructor. An intro- 
duction to the art and architecture of Meso and South Ameri- 
ca from the early formative stage to the Spanish Conquest. 
Emphasis on esthetic achievement with varying contexts of 
Pre-Columbia culture. 

461A American Art: Colonial Period to 1900 (3) 

The historical development of painting and sculpture in 
America from the Colonial Period until 1900. The role of the 
visual arts in helping to define, reflect and challenge Ameri- 
can values and institutions. 


4r(1 63 


46 IB American Art: 20th Century (3) 

Painting and sculpture in America during the 20th century. 
The role of the visual arts in helping to define, reflect and 
challenge American values and institutions. 

463 Museum Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 453A, six units of art history or anthropol- 
ogy, and consent of instructor. Museums, their structure, 
function and operation. Museum governance, ethics, grant 
proposal preparation, conservation and educational pro- 
gramming. 

464 Museum Conservation (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 463. The examination of the preservation 
of objects; the history, role and principles of conservation 
within a museum context. Three combined sessions at Con- 
servation Center, LACMA; Huntington Library; J. Paul Getty 
Museum; and Museum of Cultural History, UCLA. 

470 History and Esthetics of Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: 201 A, B. Photography from ancient optical ob- 
servations through 19th-century invention to 20th-century 
acceptance as an art form. Esthetic movement and influen- 
tial innovators. Lectures, slides and class discussion. 

481 Seminar in Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and evaluation in 
one area of art history and appreciation. May be repeated 
up to a maximum of 6 units. 

483 Special Studies in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units, but 
no more than 3 units in any one area in a single semester. 
483A Graphic Design (6 hours activity) 

483B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

483C Illustrations (6 hours activity) 

483D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

483E Computer Assisted Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 313A or Art 323A or Art 363A and consent 
of instructor. Theory and practice of design using the com- 
puter. Students will explore the numerous applications of the 
computer through lecture demonstration, studio /laboratory 
experience, guest speakers and field trips. May be repeated 
twice for credit. 

484A Special Studies in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in ceram- 
ics. Maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units in any 
one area In a single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

484B Special Studies in Glass (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in glass. 
Maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units in any one 
area in a single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in design- 
nated area or consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units, but 
no more than three units in any one area in a single semes- 
ter. (9 hours laboratory) 

485A Jewelry 

485B General Crafts 

485C Metalsmithing 

485D Fibers— Weaving 

485E Fibers— Fabric Printing and Dyeing 

485F Fibers and Fabrics 


486 Special Studies in Sculpture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 316A,B and consent of instructor. Maxi- 
mum of 12 units but no more than three units in a single se- 
mester. (9 hours laboratory) 

486A Modeling and Fabrication 
486B Casting 

487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting and 
Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisites: a minimum of six upper-division units In draw- 
ing and painting, and consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 
units, but no more than three units in any one area in a single 
semester. 

487A Painting (6 hours activity) 

487B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

487C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

487D Printmaking (9 hours laboratory) 

489 Special Studies in Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A,B. Photography as personal expres- 
sion. Maximum of 12 units but no more than three units in a 
single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

490 Professional Seminar (3) 

Guest speakers from professions in the visual arts. A lec- 
ture/discussion seminar relevant to current issues and con- 
cepts in making and experiencing art. Topics will differ each 
semester. For the senior and graduate art major. May be re- 
peated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

498 Internship in Art (3) 

Work in a specific art field in business or industry. Must have 
senior standing. 

499 Independent Research (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in art with consent of depart- 
ment chair and written consent of instructor. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. 

500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: classified standing. Problems and issues in art. 
Intellectual clarification and verbal articulation of individual 
intent as an artist. Oral and written material in support of the 
master’s project, (with 500B meets graduate level writing 
requirement) 

500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 500A. Directed research in the area of ma- 
jor emphasis. Oral and written material on historical back- 
grounds and developments in art as they relate to individual 
intent as an artist (stated in Art 500A) and in support of the 
master's project, (with 5CX)A meets graduate level writing 
requirement) 

501 Curatorship (3) 

Prerequisites: B.A. in art. anthropology or other major by 
special permission, and Art 481 and 463. The curator col- 
lects. cares for and studies objects. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects listed below. Maximum 
of 12 units in each area, but no more than three units in any 
one area in a single semester. 

503A Graphic Design (6 hours activity) 

503B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

503C Illustrations (6 hours activity) 

503D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 


164 


504A,B Graduate Problems in Ceramics (3,3) (Formerly 504) 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects in ceramics. Maximum 
of 12 units in each area but no more than three units in a sin- 
gle semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects listed below. Maximum 
of 12 units In each area but no more than three units In a sin- 
gle semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

505A Jewelry 
5056 General Crafts 

505D Fibers— Weaving, Fibers and Fabrics 

506A,B Graduate Problems in Sculpture (3,3) (Formerly 506) 
Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects in sculpture. Maximum 
of 12 units in each area but no more than three units in a sin- 
gle semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

507 Graduate Problems in Drawing, Painting and 
Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper-division drawing and painting. 
Planning, development and evaluation of individual projects 
listed below. Maximum of 12 units in each area but no more 
than three units in a single semester. 

507A Painting (6 hours activity) 

507B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

507C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

507D Printmaking (9 hours laboratory) 

508A,B Graduate Problems in Creative Photography (3,3) 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects in photography. Maxi- 
mum of 12 units in each area, but no more than three units 
in a single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

511 Seminar on the Content & Method of Art History (3) 
Prerequisite: Art 481. Methods of research, bibliography, 
and theories and philosophies of art historical scholarship. 
May be repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

512 Seminar on Selected Topics in Art History (3) 
Prerequisite: appropriate upper-division Art course ap- 
proved by instructor and Art 511 or consent of Instructor. 
Analysis and evaluation of specific historical significance in- 
cluding cultural, social and economic circumstances. May 
be repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 


597 Project (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of Instructor and 
recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. Art 
500B may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of 
instructor. Development and presentation of a creative proj- 
ect in the concentration beyond regularly offered course- 
work. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 51 1, 512, written consent of instructor and 
recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students In art with consent of department 
chair and written consent of instructor. May be repeated for 
credit. 


Art Education Courses 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, 
methods and practices for teaching art in secondary 
schools. Required before student teaching of majors In art 
for the single subject teaching credential. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) (Formerly 449A) 
For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act creden- 
tial. See description and prerequisites under Division of 
Teacher Education. Offered every fall semester. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) (Formerly 449A) 
For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act creden- 
tial. See description and prerequisites under Division of 
Teacher Education. Concurrent enrollment in Art Education 
449S required. Offered every spring semester. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) (Formerly 449B) 
Seminar for student teachers In art. The practical aspects 
of art instruction in secondary schools. Concurrent enroll- 
ment in Art Education 4491 required. Offered every spring 
semester. 


165 


Department of Music 


Department Chair: David Thorsen 
Vice Chair: Carole Harrison 
Department Office: Performing Arts 262 

Programs Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in Music 

Liberal Arts 

Music Education 

Music History and Theory 

Bachelor of Music 

Commercial Music 

Composition 

Instrumental 

Keyboard 

Voice 

Accompanying 
Minor in Music 
Master of Arts in Music 

Music History and Literature 
Music Education 

Master of Music 

Performance 

Theory-Composition 

Single Subject (Secondary) Credential 
Faculty 

Charles Baker, Martha Baker, David Berfield, 
Andrew Charlton, M’lou Dietzer, Rita Fuszek, 
Kathleen Gjerdingen, Su Harmon, Carole Harrison, 
Nors Josephson, Burton Karson, Leo Kreter, 
Michael Kurkjian, Dimitrie Leivici, Gary Maas, 

Todd Miller, Benton Minor, Gordon Paine, Jane Paul, 
Lloyd Rodgers, Preston Stedman, Robert Stewart, 
David Thorsen, Laurance Timm, Rodger Vaughan, 
Edmund Williams, Mary Mark Zeyen 

INTRODUCTION 

Music is one of the most rewarding of all human en- 
deavors, and the faculty and students In the Depart- 
ment of Music share a deep love for their art and a 
common desire to achieve excellence In it. The de- 
partment offers a wide spectrum of degree pro- 
grams and options with an overall emphasis In the 
area of performance. The curriculum provides basic 
preparation for careers in music or further graduate 
study, and is designed to provide a balanced educa- 
tion in the many facets of musical experience. Artist- 
teachers offer instruction in all areas of perfor- 
mance, while practicing composers and theorists 
teach courses In theory, and active musicologists 
provide instruction in history and literature. It is the 
goal of the department to develop each student’s 
musical and intellectual potential to the highest level 
of individual capability. The Department of Music is 


166 Music 


fully accredited by the National Association of 
Schools of Music, in addition to the overall university 
accreditation by the Western Association of 
Schools and Colleges. 

Credential Information 

The Department of Music offers course work leading 
to a CSUF Waiver Program in Music for the Ryan Sin- 
gle Subject Teaching Credential. For details, con- 
tact the Admission to Teacher Education Office and 
the coordinator of music education. 

The Department of Music offers supplementary au- 
thorizations for the Ryan Single Subject Teaching 
Credential in Instrumental Music and in Vocal Music. 
A supplementary authorization In music is offered for 
the Ryan Multiple Subject Teaching Credential. For 
details contact the Office of Admission to Teacher 
Education. 

Advisement 

All music majors are required to obtain advisement 
each semester. Area coordinators serve as the ad- 
visers, and students are assigned according to area 
of concentration. 

Requirements of the Music Department 

1. AII entering music majors must register In the 
Bachelor of Arts degree program for at least the 
first semester of residence. Students may 
change the degree objective to the Bachelor of 
Music upon completion of at least one semester 
of course work at the university, successful 
completion of an audition for the program, and 
recommendation of the coordinator in the ap- 
propriate area of concentration. Enrollment In 
the Bachelor of Music program is limited. 

2. Upon entering the university as a new music ma- 
jor or upon officially changing to a major in mu- 
sic. each student will present an audition in the 
appropriate principal performance area (instru- 
ment or voice) and a placement audition for 
class piano. 

3. All students must pass proficiency examina- 
tions in traditional harmony (sight-singing, dic- 
tation, keyboard and paperwork) and piano be- 
fore being approved for graduation. Transfer 
students will fulfill the theory requirement by 
passing the entrance examination in theory; 
first-time students and transfers with insuffi- 
cient preparation at entrance will normally take 
the examination In Music 211. The piano- 
proficiency requirement may be met by comple- 
tion of Music 282B with a passing grade. 
Students whose principal performance area is 
piano satisfy the piano proficiency requirement 
upon reaching 300 level in performance. 

4. Each music major must declare a single princi- 
pal performance area, which must be approved 
by the coordinator of that area upon completion 
of the entrance audition. In order to be approved 
for graduation, each student must achieve at 
least the 300 level of proficiency in the principal 
performance area. B.A. Liberal Arts-optlon stu- 
dents who elect project option 2 (Music 497: 
Project) need reach only the 200 level. 

5. Each music major is required to present one or 
more recitals or a project appropriate to the de- 


gree program before being approved for gradu- 
ation. The project option Is available only in the 
Liberal Arts and Music History and Theory op- 
tions of the Bachelor of Arts degree. Recitals at 
the 300 level of performance are designated 
Music 398; recitals at the 400 level of perfor- 
mance are designated Music 498. See the sec- 
tions below on the Liberal Arts and Music His- 
tory and Theory options for recital /project 
information applicable to those degrees. 

6. Undergraduate music majors are required to 
participate in a major performance ensemble 
(Music 361) and complete it with a passing 
grade each semester of residence as follows: 

a. Students who declare wind or percussion as 
the principal performance area must register 
for band (or orchestra, if designated by the 
instrumental area coordinator); students who 
declare a string instrument as principal per- 
formance area must register for orchestra; 
students who declare voice as the principal 
performance area must register for chorus. 
(Bachelor of Music students in voice who 
have reached the 400 level may elect to sub- 
stitute 361D, Opera Theatre.) A student 
whose principal performance area is key- 
board or classical guitar must register for one 
of the above major performance ensembles, 
according to the student’s qualifications 
and subject to audition. 

b. A music major admitted into the Bachelor of 
Music program whose senior recital instru- 
ment is keyboard or classical guitar and who 
has participated in a major performance en- 
semble for at least five semesters (a minimum 
of two semesters at Cal State Fullerton) may 
thereafter substitute chamber music and/or 
small performance ensembles (Mu 363, 386) 
to satisfy the departmental major perfor- 
mance ensemble (Mu 361) requirement. 

c. The educational purpose of the requirement 
that all music majors participate in an appro- 
priate major performance ensemble during 
eaph semester of residence is to permit each 
student to experience the highest level of en- 
semble music-making commensurate with the 
student’s skill. To this end, the band/ 
orchestra and choir programs at Cal State 
Fullerton are of the traditional graded struc- 
ture. University Singers (36 IE), Wind Ensem- 
ble (36 IF) and Symphony Orchestra (361 A) 
are for the most advanced students; 
University Choir (36 IB), Concert Band 
(361C) and Women’s Choir (361W) are for 
students of less skill or experience. Place- 
ment in bands, orchestra and choirs will be 
based on student ability as determined by the 
directors of those ensembles. Music majors 
will be assigned to the ensemble for which 
they are best qualified. A student does not 
have the option of satisfying the requirements 
for participation in a major performance en- 
semble by enrolling in an ensemble intended 
for those of less ability or experience. 

7. Applied-music study In the principal perfor- 
mance area is required as stipulated under the 


Music 


requirements for each degree program. The fol- 
lowing conditions apply: 

a. If a student pursuing the Bachelor of Arts de- 
gree (Music History and Theory) or the Bach- 
elor of Music degree (Composition) reaches 
the 300 level in the principal performance 
area before the required units in applied mu- 
sic are completed, Music Department elec- 
tives may be substituted for the remaining ap- 
plied music units. 

b. In addition to the four units of applied music 
required in the principal performance area. 
Bachelor of Music students in the Composi- 
tion option must complete six units of applied 
composition (including the 498 recital) after 
taking Music 422A. The 498 recital will con- 
sist of a presentation of the student’s own 
compositions. 

c. Students pursuing the Bachelor of Music de- 
gree in any option except composition must 
achieve the 300 level In performance before 
giving the 398 recital and 400 level in perfor- 
mance before giving the 498 recital. Specific 
Information on jury-level criteria is available 
from the Music Department office. 

d. In order to receive state-funded lessons in 
applied music, an undergraduate student 
(with the exception of a student who is within 
six units of completing all degree require- 
ments) must be currently enrolled for a mini- 
mum of six units of music classes (including 
applied music), at least two units of which 
must be in an academic area of music (any 
course other than performing ensembles and 
applied music). In addition, the student must 
earn a passing grade in all music courses, 
must be making satisfactory progress 
toward a degree, and must be currently en- 
rolled in the appropriate major performance 
ensemble, as stipulated in section 6 above. 
If the student fails to complete with a passing 
grade either the required six units of music 
classes or the major performance ensemble, 
state-funded lessons will be withheld in the 
subsequent semester. Students are eligible 
for a maximum of three semesters of state- 
funded lessons at a given level of perfor- 
mance. 

e. Students in the B.A. program are eligible for 
a maximum of eight units of state-funded ap- 
plied music (398 and 497 Included). B.M. stu- 
dents are eligible for a maximum of 14 units 
(398 and 498 included.) Regardless of wheth- 
er or not the student has reached the above 
maxima, eligibility for state-funded lessons 
ceases upon completion of the final recital or 
project appropriate to the degree plan. Stu- 
dents who have completed the final recital or 
project and still have further units of 
applied music required under their degree 
plan will thereafter substitute electives in mu- 
sic. 

8. Senior transfer students entering Cal State Ful- 
lerton with a major in music, or graduate stu- 
dents in music entering to satisfy the legal waiv- 
er for teaching credentials, are expected to 
complete a minimum of one semester of upper- 


division course work in music with a GPA of at 
least 3.0 before they may be approved for ad- 
mittance to teacher education. Required 
courses and competencies must be satisfied 
before the faculty committee will consider 
endorsing the student’s acceptance Into the 
credential program. 

9. A music major must maintain a 2.5 GPA in music 
course work at the university in order to be ap- 
proved for graduation. 

10. All requests for exceptions to departmental or 
curricular requirements must be directed by pe- 
tition to the department chair. 

MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses 
that lead to baccalaureate and graduate degrees in 
teaching and the professions. The baccalaureate 
degree may be earned in either of two degree pro- 
grams (Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Music). 
Within these programs, a student will pursue an em- 
phasis In liberal arts, music history and theory, mu- 
sic education, performance, composition or accom- 
panying. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The Bachelor of Arts In Music shall consist of no few- 
er than 60 units of music, of which at least 29 shall 
be upper division (300 level and above). All Bachelor 
of Arts students must complete the basic require- 
ments listed immediately below and must select and 
complete the requirements listed in one of three op- 
tions: Liberal Arts. Music History and Theory or Mu- 
sic Education. 

Core Requirements 

Units 

Music theory (Music 1 1 1A.B; 21 1; 319A; 320A 


or B) 14 

Music history and literature (Music 261; 

351A.B,C) 12 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 4 

Major performance ensemble 

(Music 361A.B,C,E.F,W) _4 

Total 34 

Liberal Arts Option 


This option allows a student to take an academic 
major in music without being involved in a program 
of professional preparation. The degree emphasis is 
historically the oldest such study plan in music in 
higher education and represents a liberal-arts re- 
sponse to the highly professional program of the 
Bachelor of Music degree. 

Units 


Core requirements for BA degree 34 

Additional upper-division units in music 
Music theory (Music 316 or 318, 323A or 422A) 4 
Conducting (Music 391 A or 392A) 2 

Senior project (Music 398 or 497) 1 

Music literature (Music 463A or 460) 2 

Electives (minimum of 6 upper division; no more 
than 2 units of Music 171-471) 7 

Total 50 


Music 


Senior Project 

Two options are available to the student, each with 
a different focus and prerequisite: 

Option 1 (Music 398: Recital): Prerequisite is 
achievement of 300 level in the area of principal per- 
formance one semester before the semester in 
which the student plans to present the recital. The 
student will present a brief recital in a regular recital 
time or in the appropriate workshop (at faculty dis- 
cretion). 

Option 2 (Music 497: Project): Prerequisite is 
achievement of 200 level two semesters before the 
semester In which the student plans to present the 
project. The student will prepare a special project in 
the senior year which will culminate in a lecture, lec- 
ture-recital or other form of public presentation. To 
the greatest extent possible, this project should be 
an independent investigation into an area of special 
Interest and should involve minimal faculty guidance. 
The public presentation will be evaluated by a facul- 
ty committee, as is the case with senior recitals, and 
must be approved by that committee prior to gradua- 
tion. 

In the case of both options, the recital or project will 
be included when calculating the student’s quota of 
state-funded private lessons. 

Music History and Theory Option 

This option Is designed as a balanced program in 
music history and theory and provides suitable prep- 
aration for advanced degrees in theory, literature or 
musicology. It also provides basic preparation for 
advanced study in other fields, such as musical 
acoustics, music therapy, ethnomusicology, library 
science in music, and music in industry and recre- 
ation. 

Students seeking the option in Music History and 
Theory must submit a paper to the music history or 
theory coordinator not later than the beginning of 
their junior year. Acceptance into the degree pro- 
gram is contingent on the submission of a satisfacto- 
ry paper. 

Allied requirements for the Music History and Theory 
Option: 

1. Twenty units In a secondary academic area (not 
music, but related to the student’s project or use- 
ful to prepare the student for future graduate work 
in music). The choice of a secondary academic 
area must be approved In writing by the coordina- 
tor of music history and theory. Suggested areas: 
art, English, theatre, history, physics (acoustics), 
anthropology, languages or computer science. 

2. Foreign language proficiency, preferably German, 
to be satisfied by one of the following: 

a. Four years of study at the secondary school le- 
vel, 

b. Passing an examination given by the Depart- 
ment of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing with a passing grade the second 
semester of the beginning university sequence 
of a foreign language. 


Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Music theory (Music 316, 319B or C) 4 

Conducting or composition (Music 391A or 2392A or 
422A) 2 

Project-proposal preparation (Music 499) 1 

Music history or theory project (Music 497) 1 

Electives in music (conducting, history 

and/or theory) 8 

Total 50 


Music Education Option 

Piano Pedagogy Emphasis: 

The emphasis in piano pedagogy is designed to pro- 
vide in-depth preparation for individual and group pi- 
ano instruction and will not lead to teaching in the 
California public schools. 

Units 


Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts 34 

Keyboard Ensemble (363K) 1 

Applied Plano (37 1) 1 

Conducting (391 or 392) 2 

Recital (398) 1 

Piano Literature and Interpretation (454A, B) 4 

Piano Pedagogy (467A,B,C)* 6 

Electives (372, 373, 385, 386 recommended by 
advisement) 1 

Total 50 


• Co-enrollment in Observation and Practice Teaching (Music 465 and 466) 
strongly advised 

Instrumental, Vocal-Choral, General Music 
Emphases: 

The emphases In instrumental, vocal-choral and 
general music are designed to provide in-depth 
preparation for teaching in the California public 
schools under the provisions of the Teacher Prepa- 
ration and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). 


Instrumental Emphasis: 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral instruments (Music 281B,P,S and W) 4 
Music theory (Music 323A and 320A, 320B, 

323B or 324) 4 

Conducting (Music 392A,B) 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives 3 

Total 50 

Vocal-Choral Emphasis: 

Core requirement for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Diction for Singers (Music 390) 1 

Orchestral Instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Conducting (Music 391A,B) 4 

Literature and interpretation (Music 453A or B 
and 457A or B or 468A) 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives 2 

Total 50 

General Music Emphasis: 

Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts 34 

Music and Child Development (Music 333) 3 

Conducting (Music 391A,B) 4 

Orchestral Instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Music in the Modern Classroom (Music 435) 3 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives in music 1 

Total 50 


Music 


Credential Information 

Students desiring a California teaching credential in 
music must complete the following courses prior to 
enrolling in the professional education program as 
required by the Department of Secondary Education. 

Units 

Instrumental Emphasis: 

Music Education 342, 3991, Music 391 A, 444, 
and Music 281C,T,X 10 

Choral-Vocal Emphasis: 

Music Education 342, Music 354, Music Education 
399V, Music 392A, 36 ID 9 

General Music Emphasis: 

Music 381, Music Education 342, 399V, 441, 436 11 

Students who wish to earn a teaching credential in 
addition to a Bachelor of Arts with a music education 
option must complete the following: 

Units 

Music Education 442 (3) Music Education 449E 


(3) and professional education courses 
Secondary Education 440F and 440S 12 

Music Education 4491 (Student teaching) and 

MusicEducation 449S 12 

Total 24 


Prior to admission to teacher education, the student 
must reach 300 level In the principal performance 
area and pass functional examinations in keyboard 
and voice. The functional examination requirements 
may also be met by completing Music 282B (piano) 
and Music 283 (voice) with minimum grade of B. 

BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

This degree program is designed to provide training 
for the highly gifted students who show promise and 
capability of becoming professional performers and 
composers. 

The degree consists of 132 semester units. A mini- 
mum of 70 semester units in music are required, at 
least 32 of which must be upper division. 

Core Requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Units 


Music Theory (Music 1 1 1A,B: 21 1: 319A: 

320A or 320B*) 14 

Music History and Literature (Music 261; 

361A,B,C) 12 

Principal Performance Area (Applied Music) 6 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Recital (Music 498) 1 

Total 37 

‘Music 320A and 320B required in Concentration in Composition 

Composition Concentration 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316; 318; 319B or 319C; 

323A; 422 A) 12 

Conducting (Music 391 A or 392A) 2 

Applied composition 5 

Electives in music 14 

Total 70 


Instrumental Concentration 


Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 323A, 422A) 6 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Conducting (Music 392A,B) 4 

Chamber music (Music 362 and 363) 6 

Electives in music 10 

Total 70 

Keyboard Concentration 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 320A or B, 319A, 

422A) 4 

Music literature (Music 454A,B) 4 

Conducting (Music 391 A or 392A) 2 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Chamber music (Music 362 or 363) 3 

Accompanying (Music 386) 1 

Pedagogy (Music 467A,B,C) 6 

Harpsichord or Organ class (Music 372 or 373) 1 

Electives in music 5 

Total 70 

Voice Concentration 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 422A) 4 

Music literature (Music 456; 457A,B) 7 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Opera Theatre (Music 36 ID) 2 

Diction (Music 390A,B,C) 3 

Conducting (Music 391 A) 2 

Pedagogy (Music 468A,B) 4 

Electives in music 4 

Total 70 


Allied requirement for voice concentration 

Proficiency In two foreign languages (French, Ger- 
man, Italian), each to be satisfied by one of the fol- 
lowing: 

a. Four years study of foreign language at the sec- 
ondary school level, or 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department 
of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing the second semester of the beginning 
university sequence of a foreign language. 

Accompanying Concentration 


Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 318, 422A) 6 

Music literature (Music 455, 457A) 5 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 5 

Chamber music (Music 363) 2 

Harpsichord class (Music 372) 1 

Organ class (Music 373) 1 

Sight reading (Music 385) 2 

Accompanying (Music 386) 2 

Conducting (Music 391 A) 2 

Diction (Music 390A,B,C) 3 

Recitals (Music 398, 498) 2 

Electives In music 2 

Total 70 


Music 


Commercial Music Concentration: Instrumental 


Emphasis 

Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music Theory (Music 312A,B) 4 

History of American Commercial Music 
(Music 366) 3 

Principal Performance Area (Applied Music) 6 

Improvisation (Music 265A,B) 3 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Recital (398) 1 

Lab Band or Stage Band (Music 362L or 362S) 4 

Electives in Music 8 

Total 70 

Commercial Music Concentration: Composition- 
Arranging Emphasis 

Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music Theory (Music 312A,B; Music 314A,B; 

Music 323A) 10 

History of American Commercial Music 

(Music 356) 3 

Applied Composition/ Arranging 5 

Improvisation (Music 266A) 1 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Lab Band or Stage Band (Music 362L or 362S) 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives in Music 5 

Total 70 

MINOR IN MUSIC 


The minor in music may be used by persons whose 
majors are in other fields. A maximum of 14 lower- 
division units may be included in work counted to- 
ward the music minor. The minor requires a minimum 
preparation of 20 units. 

Composite of Lower Division and Upper Division 

Units 

Theory of music (selected from Music 101; 

1 1 1 A.B; 2 1 1 ; or any 300- or 400-level theory 
classes for which the student is qualified) 6 
Music history and literature (Music 100; 251; 350 
or 361A.B,C; or courses at the 400- or 500- 
level for which the student is qualified) 5-6 
Applied techniques (selected from Music 
183, 184A.B; 281B,P,S,W; 283 or any course 
in ensemble, conducting, piano, voice or 
orchestral instruments at the 300- or 400- 


level for which the student is qualified 8-9 

Total 20 


MASTER OF MUSIC AND 
MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

Two graduate degrees in music are offered in the 
Department of Music: the Master of Music and the 
Master of Arts. Each degree seeks to serve a spe- 
cial group of graduate students. For those who in- 
tend to pursue advanced degrees beyond the mas- 
ter’s level, the Master of Music normally leads to the 
D.M.A. degree, and the Master of Arts to the Ph D. 
or the Ed.D. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally 
Classified 

All applicants admitted into the music program enter 
initially in conditionally classified graduate standing. 
University- requirements include: a baccalaureate 


from an accredited institution; a grade-point average 
of at least 2.6 In the last 60 semester units attempt- 
ed; and good standing at the last college attended. 
In addition, each applicant must present a satisfac- 
tory entrance audition and submit an acceptable 
written essay in the area of specialization. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A graduate student may apply for classified gradu- 
ate standing only upon attainment of the following 
prerequisites: (a) completion of all requirements for 
conditionally classified standing as described 
above; (b) a major in music (or the equivalent of a 
major; i.e., 29 upper-division units in music) with a 
minimum grade-point average of 3.0 in the major; 
and (c) satisfactory completion of Music 500, Intro- 
duction to Graduate Study in Music. One objective 
of Music 500 is the selection of a Departmental Advi- 
sory Committee which aids in the preparation of a 
study plan listing all courses required for completion 
of the degree. This study plan must receive the ap- 
proval of the student’s advisory committee, the Mu- 
sic Department graduate program adviser and the 
dean of graduate studies. Opportunity is given the 
student to remove deficiencies by taking certain pre- 
scribed courses, but such courses cannot be ap- 
plied to the master’s degree program. 

Special Graduation Requirements 

Written comprehensive examinations in music histo- 
ry and music theory are required of ail students fol- 
lowing achievement of classified graduate standing. 
In addition, for Option 1 in music history and litera- 
ture only, for the Master of Arts, the student must 
demonstrate reading ability in at least one foreign 
language, preferably German or French. 

MASTER OF MUSIC 

The Master of Music provides an avenue of graduate 
study for the highly creative composer or for the su- 
perior performer in a program tailored to each stu- 
dent’s demonstrated talent and to each student’s 
professional development. Applicants must have 
completed either a Bachelor of Music degree in per- 
formance or composition or show evidence of equiv- 
alent rigorous training. For the entrance audition, 
applicants in performance must demonstrate 
proficiency equivalent to the 400 level, that level ex- 
pected of a performance major in the Bachelor of 
Music program at the time of the senior recital, while 
composition applicants must submit a portfolio of 
scores for examination by the composition faculty. 
For admission to the programs in choral or instru 
mental conducting, applicants must show evidence 
of substantial conducting course work at the under- 
graduate level plus practical experience. Further, to 
audition for entrance into the program, each choral 
applicant must demonstrate conducting proficiency 
with a mixed chorus and each Instrumental applicant 
must demonstrate conducting proficiency with a 
band or orchestra. Under exceptional circum- 
stances, a tape may be substituted for the live audi- 
tion. 

Study Plan 

The Master of Music degree program requires a 
minimum of 30 units of graduate study in music, at 


Music 


least half of which must be in 500-level courses. Mu- 
sic 500, Introduction to Graduate Study in Music, 
must be taken within the first nine units. At least one 
recital is required, in addition to a corollary written 
project. Under certain circumstances, and with de- 
partmental approval, a thesis may be substituted for 
the recital and written project. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The Master of Arts provides advanced studies in 
breadth as well as in an area of specialization, either 
music education or music history and literature. The 
degree is for teachers and supervisors of music and 
for college teaching careers in music history or mu- 
sic education. For the entrance audition in history 
and literature, applicants must submit an example of 
a previously-written research paper on a musical 
subject, while applicants to the program in music ed- 
ucation must submit a 30-minute tape demonstrating 
their teaching technique in a classroom situation. 

Study Plan 

The Master of Arts degree program requires a mini- 
mum of 30 units of graduate study, no more than nine 
of which may be outside the field of music and at 
least half of which must be in 500-level courses in 
the major. 

Two options are offered In this degree program. Op- 
tion I In history and literature requires reading ability 
in a foreign language, preferably German or French, 
prior to advancement to candidacy, a thesis and at 
least six units of study in a non-music field which is 
supportive of the major. Option II in music education 
requires either a thesis or a project, depending upon 
the nature of the student’s graduate research. Ten 
semester units are common to both options (Music 
500, 3 units. Music 36 1 -363, 2 units; Music 37 1 -57 1 , 
2 units; and Music 551-556, 3 units). Music 500, In- 
troduction to Graduate Study in Music, must be In- 
cluded within the first nine units taken as a graduate 
student under both options. 

For further details or advisement, consult the De- 
partment of Music. 


Music Courses 

100 Introduction to Music (3) 

Musical enjoyment and understanding through a general sur- 
vey of musical literature representative of styles and perfor- 
mance media. Music will be related to other arts through lec- 
tures, recordings and concerts. For non-music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Basic theory and practical applications to improve music 
performance and listening skills. Includes sightsinging and 
relationship to keyboard and simple melodic instruments. 
For non-music majors. 

103 History of Rock (3) 

Rock music around the world; its origins and the develop- 
ment of national styles. Emphasis on listening. For non- 
music majors. 

111A,B Diatonic Harmony (3,3) 

Diatonic harmony and musicianship. Includes scales and in- 


tervals, triads and their inversions, harmonizations, non- 
harmonic tones, modulation and dominant seventh chords. 
Includes sightsinging, dictation and keyboard harmoniza- 
tions. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

171, 271, 371, 471 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual study with ap- 
proved instructor. Emphasis on technique and repertoire. 
Music majors must register for a minimum of one unit per se- 
mester. Performance majors approved by jury recommenda- 
tion should register for two units per semester. Jury exami- 
nation required. May be repeated for credit. 

182 Piano Class for Music Majors (2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance in- 
strument is not piano. (3 hours activity) 

183 Voice Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary techniques in singing for the non- 
music major. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

184A Piano Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary piano techniques for the non- 
music major. (2 hours activity) 

184B Piano Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 184A or consent of instructor. Continua- 
tion of 184A. 

196 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or higher grade-point average and/or 
consent of instructor and simultaneous enrollment in the 
course or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equiv- 
alent. Consult "University Curricula" in this catalog for more 
complete course description. 

211 Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 1 1 1B. Continuation of Music 1 1 1A.B; the 
chromatic practice of the 19th century. Secondary domi- 
nants; ninth, eleventh and thirteenth chords; sequence, and 
chromatically altered chords. Includes sightsinging, melodic 
and harmonic dictation, and keyboard practice. Required of 
all music majors. (2 hours lecture. 2 hours activity) 

251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

Literature of music in Western civilization. Open to minors 
and qualified students by consent of instructor. Students 
should be able to read music as a part of the analysis of 
form, design and style. Required of majors. (3 hours lecture) 

265A Jazz Improvisation I (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 1 1 1 A.B, ability on a standard jazz instru- 
ment or consent of instructor. Application of scales and their 
relationship to chords, includes modes, jazz rythmic phras- 
ing, blues progressions, and cycle of dominant seventh 
chords. Basic jazz keyboard drills and ear training involved. 

265B Jazz Improvisation II (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 265A and 21 1. or consent of instructor. 
Continuation of modal patterns and jazz rhythms for improvi- 
sation. Explores melodic construction in improvisation. Em- 
phasis on playing ll-V-l progressions in major and minor 
keys. Includes jazz keyboard drills and ear training. 

281B,C,P,S,T,W,X Orchestral Instruments (1,1, 1,1, 1,1,1) 
Techniques and materials for teaching orchestral instru- 
ments. Required for music education emphasis. Instrumental 
majors required to fulfill competency requirements for Instru- 
ments listed in each course description except that of their 
major performance Instrument. May be repeated for credit. 
(3 hours activity) 


Music 


281B Brass Instruments (1) 

Trumpet and French Horn. 

281C Brass instruments (1) 

Trombone, Baritone and Tuba. 

281P Percussion Instruments (1) 

Snare drum and mallet-played instruments with related work 
on other standard percussion instruments. 

281S String Instruments (1) 

Violin and Viola. 

281T String Instruments (1) 

Cello and String Bass. 

281W Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Flute, Clarinet and Saxophone. 

281X Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Oboe and Bassoon. 

282A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (2,2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance field 
is not piano. A— Prerequisite: Music 182 or placement by in- 
structor. B— Prerequisite: Music 282A or placement by in- 
structor. Meets minimum piano proficiency requirements for 
degree. (3 hours activity) 

283 Voice Class for Instrumentalists (1) 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Recommended for 
credential candidates. Not required for voice majors. (2 
hours activity) 

301 Techniques of Song Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 101 or consent of instructor. Melody 
writing and setting of text to music. Includes consideration 
of metric values of text, music and chord progressions. For 
non-music majors. 

302 History of Jazz (3) (Formerly 102) 

Prerequisite. Upper division standing. Historical study of 
jazz music in America; chronological development and sty- 
listic evolution with consideration of peripheral trends. Em- 
phasis on listening. For non-music majors. 

303 Ethnic Music (3) (Formerly 203) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. Survey of mu- 
sic from Asia. Africa. Australia. Oceania, and indigenous In^ 
dian music from North and South America. Emphasis on mu- 
sical styles and forms, and religious and ritualistic functions 
of music in various cultural frameworks. 

304 Music of Mexico (3) (Formerly 204) 

Survey of the art, folk and traditional music of Mexico from 
pre-Cortesian aboriginal music to 20th-century style, includ- 
ing neo-Hispanic, folk (corrico, etc.), mestizo, mariachi, na- 
tionalistic, jazz and modern art music. Interrelationship be- 
tween traditional (folk) and serious (art) music; effects of 
Mexico’s history on its music. 

312A,B Commercial Arranging (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Harmonic practices in commercial 
music; stage band and jazz writing techniques. (May be re- 
peated once for credit.) 

314A Special Projects in Commercial Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 312B or consent of instructor. Three- 
and four-part voice accompaniment; planning and executing 
the multi-chorus small group arrangement. 

314B Special Projects in Commercial Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 314A or consent of instructor. Introduc- 
tion to harmonic substitutions; planning and executing ar- 
rangements for larger groups of instruments. 


316 16th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 21 1 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth- 
century counterpoint in two, three and four parts, covering 
motet, canon, double counterpoint. 

318 18th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 316 or consent of instructor. Eighteenth- 
century counterpoint in two, three and four parts, covering 
invention, canon, double and triple counterpoint and fugue. 

319A,B Form and Analysis (3,2,2) 

Prerequisite: Music 21 1 or consent of instructor. A— Analy- 
sis of structural elements of music such as motive phrase 
and period: binary, tenary, rondo, sonato allegro and larger 
musical forms in representative musical works. Required of 
all music majors. B— Continuation of A; larger musical 
works. C“Continuation of A and B; literature of the 20th 
century. 

320A,B 20th-Century Techniques (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Compositional practices of the 
20th century; emphasis on written examples in the various 
styles. Includes sightsinging, keyboard practice and dicta- 
tion. A— Compositional techniques from 1890 to 1945. B— 
Compositional techniques since 1945, to include the synthe- 
sis of sound. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

323A Orchestration (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 391 A, 320 or consent of Instructor. Writ- 
ing and analysis of orchestral music. 

324 Scoring for the Band (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 323A or consent of instructor. Devices, 
techniques and skills required to produce complete tran- 
scriptions for the contemporary public school wind band. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 101 or equivalent or successful comple- 
tion of proficiency test. The relationship of music to child 
growth and development for the child from 5 to 12. Survey 
of age-appropriate music materials. 

350 Music in Our Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or consent of instructor. Music in its 
relationship to general culture. A sociological approach; mu- 
sical criticism and journalism, concert life, audience psy- 
chology and the political/religious/business aspects of the 
American musical scene. 

351A History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 211 and 251 or consent of instructor. A 
study of the history and literature of music from early Greek 
beginnings through the Renaissance area. 

35 IB History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A. A study of the history and litera- 
ture of music of the Baroque and Classic eras. Fulfills the 
course requirement of the university upper division bacca- 
laureate writing requirement for music majors. 

351C History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 35 IB. A study of the history and litera- 
ture of music from the Romantic era to the present. 

352 Symphonic Music in Western and Eastern Cultures (3) 
Prerequisite: Music 100 or 101 or consent of instructor. Sur- 
vey of symphonic music in Western and Eastern cultures 
from Baroque through Modern periods. 

354 Survey of Public School Choral Music Materials (2) 
Prerequisite: Music 391 A. Examination and analysis of cho- 
ral repertoire suitable for junior and senior high choruses. 


Music 


355 Film Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 100 and an ability to read music or Mu- 
sic 101. An historical survey of motion picture musical 
scores. Analysis, listening and examination of motion picture 
scores. 

356 History of American Commercial Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 251, 312A, 319A and consent of in- 
structor. A study of American commercial music In the 20th 
century: jazz, popular, rock, theatre, dance, film, and televi- 
sion; will include stylistic, formal, and harmonic analysis of 
selected works. 

361A-W Major Performance Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of standard and contemporary music 
literature. Public concerts on campus and In the community 
each semester: participation Is required. A concert tour may 
be Included by some groups. (More than 3 hours major pro- 
duction) May be repeated for credit. 

361 A Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: audition or consent of instructor. 

36 IB University Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. 

36 1C University Concert Band (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

36 ID Opera Theatre (1) 

Roles and representative excerpts from standard and con- 
temporary operas and the musical, dramatic and language 
techniques of the musical theatre. Performance of operatic 
excerpts and complete operas. Also open to non-vocal ma- 
jors. 

36 IE University Singers (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced voice students or those accepted by 
audition. 

361F University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced wind and percussion students ac- 
cepted by audition. 

361W Women’s Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Performance of choral 
literature. 

362B Varsity Band (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. The Varsity Band pro- 
vides music for Titan football and basketball games, and 
other related activities. May be repeated for credit. 

362D Percussion Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Study and performance 
of music written for the Percussion Ensemble. May be re- 
peated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

362E Brass Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Study and performance 
of music written for large brass choir/ensemble. May be re- 
peated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

362L Lab Band (1) (Formerly 362A) 

Open by audition or consent of instructor. Public perfor- 
mances on campus and in the community. May be repeated 
for credit. 

362M Horn Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance 
of music written for French Horn Ensemble with emphasis on 
the solution of various problems relating to multiple horn lit- 
erature. 

362P Choral Laboratory p) 

Open by audition or with consent of Instructor. Performance 
of choral literature for small vocal ensembles using student 
conductors. May be repeated for credit. 


362R Chamber Orchestra (1) (Formerly 362H) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance 
of representative chamber orchestra literature. Open to uni- 
versity students and qualified adults In the community. May 
be repeated for credit. 

362S Stage Band (1) 

Prerequisite: Open by audition and consent of instructor. 
(For those who do not qualify by audition for 362L.) Jazz and 
jazz-rock ensemble; public performance each semester. 
Open to non-music majors by audition. May be repeated for 
credit. 

362X Beginning Opera Techniques (1) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of voice faculty. Arias for the 
beginning opera student, and fundamentals of stage move- 
ment. May be repeated for credit. 

362Z Advanced Opera Techniques (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Aria preparation, role 
study and character analysis. Musical style of contrasting 
arias; orchestral techniques; language and transliterations 
of libretti. May be repeated for credit. 

363B-W Chamber Music Ensembles (1) 

Open to all qualified wind, string or keyboard students. En- 
sembles will study, read and perform representative cham- 
ber literature of all periods. May be repeated for credit. (2 
hours activity) 

363B Brass 
363G Guitar 
363K Keyboard 
363$ Strings 
363W Woodwind 

365C Composition Workshop (1) 

Weekly workshop presentation by student composers, fac- 
ulty and guests. May be repeated for credit. 

3651 Instrumental Workshop (1) 

Application of Instrumental technique to performance prac- 
tices through lecture, demonstrations, master classes and 
ancillary recitals. Recommended for Instrumental major 
each semester. May be repeated for credit. 

365K Keyboard Workshop (1) 

Weekly workshop performances by students, faculty and 
guests. Recommended for keyboard major each semester. 
May be repeated for credit. 

365V Vocal Workshop (1) 

Application of vocal technique to performance practices 
through lecture— demonstration, master classes and ancil- 
lary recitals. Recommended for vocal major each semester. 
May be repeated for credit. 

372 Harpsichord Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level In piano or organ or consent of 
instructor. The harpsichord as an instrument, the application 
of baroque stylistic characteristics, and training in the rudi- 
ments of continue playing in ensemble with voices and in- 
struments. (2 hours activity) 

373 Organ Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or consent of Instructor. 
The organ as an instrument, the playing techniques, and rep- 
ertoire. The differences between piano and organ tech- 
niques. (2 hours activity) 


Music 


381 Survey of Recreational Instruments (1) 

Recreational instrument practices and a survey of materials. 
Emphasis on recorder and guitar. (2 hours activity) 

385 Functional Skills for Keyboard Majors (2) 

Development of the ability to sight-read, harmonize, trans- 
pose and improvise. (4 hours activity) 

386 Piano Accompanying (1) 

Prerequisite: by audition only. Piano accompaniments for in- 
strumentalists, vocalists and ensembles. Participation in re- 
hearsals, recitals and concerts required. May be repeated 
for credit. (2 hours activity) 

390A,B,C Diction for Singers (1,1,1) 

Prerequisite; sophomore standing or consent of instructor. 
Proper singing diction; may not be considered a substitute 
for formal language study. Examples from standard vocal lit- 
erature explained through the use of the International Pho- 
netic Alphabet. A— Italian. B— German. C— French. 

391A,B Choral Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: one semester of voice class or consent of in- 
structor. A— Principles, techniques and methods of con- 
ducting choral groups. Required of all music education ma- 
jors. (4 hours activity) B— Continuation of 391 A including 
laboratory work with class and vocal ensembles, using stan- 
dard choral repertoire. (4 hours activity) 

392A,B Instrumental Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: two courses from 281B,P,S,W or consent of in- 
structor. A— Principles, techniques and methods of con- 
ducting orchestral and band groups. Required of all music 
education majors. (4 hours activity) B— Continuation of 
391 A, including laboratory experience in conducting instru- 
mental groups, using standard instrumental literature. (4 
hours activity) 

396 Internship: Professional Experience (1-3) 

Fieldwork in music under supervision of resident faculty and 
professionals in the field. Requires minimum six hours field- 
work per week for each unit credit. May be repeated for 
credit to a maximum of six units. Open to all music students 
by consent of instructor. 

398 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 300-jury level in the principal performance 
area and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Enrollment In 
Music 365C,I,K or V. Preparation and presentation of repre- 
sentative works In the principal performance area. In the se- 
mester of recital presentation, Music 398 will substitute for 
one unit of 371. 

411 Theory Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Completion of all lower division theory re- 
quirements, and at least senior standing or equivalent. A sur- 
vey of the theoretical basis of music from 1500 to the pres- 
ent through analysis, readings and discussion. 

422A Composition (2) 

Prerequisites; Music 316, 319A and 320A or B or consent of 
instructor. A— Ear-training analysis of smaller forms, simple 
composition of two- and three-part song form styles. B— 
Analysis and writing of more complex musical forms. 

424 Practicum: Electronic Music Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 320B. 471 level in applied music com- 
position and consent of instructor. Individual and group in- 
struction in electronic music composition. May be repeated 
for credit. (3 hours laboratory) 


433 Music in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite; ability to read and perform simple songs and 
games for young children. Songs, games, creative activities 
and materials suitable for young children in nursery school 
and early childhood education (approximately 3-6 years). 
Teaching-learning strategies. Field work is conducted In a 
neighboring public school. 

435 Music in the Modern Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of 
20th-century materials and techniques of recordings for cre- 
ative movement to music, and of choral materials and tech- 
niques appropriate for the elementary school choir. 

444 Survey of Marching Bands (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Techniques, materials, 
administration for marching band. Charting for field shows 
and parade activities. 

450 History of Musical Style (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 351A,B,C, or equivalent, or consent of 
instructor. An intensive investigation of the principal musical 
styles in Western music from Ancient Greece to the present, 
with an analytical /philosophical examination of reasons for 
stylistic changes. 

453A,B Choral Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

A— Prerequisites: Music 391A or equivalent and 351A,B. 
Choral literature from Medieval, Renaissance and Baroque 
eras analyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate perfor- 
mance practices. B— Prerequisites: Music391A or equivalent 
and35lC. Continuation of A with examples from the Classic, 
Romantic and Contemporary eras. 

454A,B Piano Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Music 351A.B and junior level piano standing, 
or consent of instructor. Performance of representative 
styles and schools of piano literature; solo and ensemble 
repertoire. A— contrapuntal forms, sonatas and variations. 
B— Character pieces, fantasies, suites and etudes. 

455 Instrumental Chamber Literature and Interpretation (3) 
Open to all music majors, or to non-majors by consent of in- 
structor. The class will be grouped Into ensembles for dem- 
onstration purposes. The stylistic differences required in 
performing works of all periods. 

456 Opera Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A,B,C or consent of instructor. All 
periods and nationalities, including stylistic and historical 
connotations. 

457A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 319A, 390B or consent of Instructor. 
Study and performance of German Lieder with representa- 
tive examples of periods and styles. 

457B Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite; Music 390C or consent of instructor. Study and 
performance of French art songs with representative exam- 
ples of periods and styles. 

458 Church Music; History, Literature and Methods (2) 

Prerequisites: Music 351A.B or consent of Instructor. A sur- 
vey of the role of music in the worship traditions of the Chris- 
tian Church; methods for implementation and maintenance 
of a successful church music program. 


Music 


459 Guitar Literature, Interpretation and Pedagogy (3) 
Prerequisite: 300-jury level in guitar or consent of instructor. 
The literature available to guitarists. Works for lute, vihuela 
and baroque guitar and the compositions and transcriptions 
for the modern guitar. Materials and methods essential for 
the guitar instructor. 

460 Interpretation of Early Music (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in principal performance area. 
The stylistic interpretations of vocal and instrumental litera- 
ture from the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries. For the senior 
or graduate student majoring in performance. (May be re- 
peated twice for credit.) 

465 Observation in Applied Piano (1) 

Prerequisite: piano major, sophomore standing. Observation 
of specialists in private music teaching, teaching tech- 
niques. materials, development of student and preparation 
for beginners, adult beginners, Intermediate and early ad- 
vanced students under the specialist in these areas. Re- 
quires written reports of activity in these areas. Coenroll- 
ment in Music 467A or 467C required. 

466 Pedagogy Internship (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 465 and 467A. Coenrollment in Music 
467B required. Supervised internship in private piano teach- 
ing. 

467A,B,C Piano Pedagogy (2,2,2) 

Prerequisite: junior piano standing or consent of instructor. 
Fundamentals of piano pedagogy for individual and group in- 
struction. A— Materials and methods for beginning and ele- 
mentary students. Coenrollment in Music 465 recommended. 
B— Materials and methods of intermediate and early ad- 
vanced students. Physiology and psychology for studio 
teachers. Coenrollment in Music 466 recommended. C— 
Prerequisite: 467A or consent of instructor. Observation and 
practice teaching while learning organizational procedures, 
teaching techniques and course literature for class piano. 

468A,B Vocal Pedagogy (2,2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. A— 
Fundamentals of vocal pedagogy for studio and public 
school teaching; physiology and acoustics as they apply to 
singing. B— Application of the fundamentals discussed in 
A. Seminar discussions and actual studio teaching. The di- 
agnosis and cure of specific vocal problems. 

485 Score Reading (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 282B and 391A.B. or 392A.B. Tech- 
niques for preparing scores (choral and instrumental) at the 
keyboard. Intended primarily for conductors and composers. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or more grade-point average and/or 
consent of instructor and simultaneous enrollment in the 
course or previous enrollment In a similar course or its equiv- 
alent. Consult “Student-to-Student Tutorials" in this catalog 
for more complete course description. 

497 Senior Project (1) 

Independent investigation of an area of special interest in 
music culminating in a public performance, lecture, lecture- 
recital or other suitable demonstration. 

498 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 400-jury level in the principal performance 
area (400-jury level in composition for composition majors) 
and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Coenrollment in Mu- 
sic 365C,I,K or V. Preparation and presentation of represen- 


tative works in the principal performance area. In the semes- 
ter of recital presentation. Music 498 will substitute for one 
unit of Music 471. 

499 Independent Study n*3) 

A special topic In music selected in consultation with and su- 
pervised by the instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (3) 

Required of all graduate music majors. Basic bibliography, 
literature, and research techniques and materials useful in 
graduate music study. 

552 Seminar in Music of the Renaissance (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. The forms, styles, and 
development characteristics of music between 1450 and 
1600. Analysis of works by representative composers and 
theoretical writers. 

553 Seminar in Music of the Baroque Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A. B or consent of Instructor. Musical 
forms, styles, and performance practices of the baroque pe- 
riod. Analysis of representative works. 

554 Seminar in Music of the Classic Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A. B or consent of instructor. The his- 
tory and literature of music from approximately 1750 to 
1825. Analysis of representative works. 

555 Seminar in Music of the Romantic Period (3) 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The structure and devel- 
opment of music in the 19th century. Analysis of representa- 
tive works. 

556 Seminar in 20th-Century Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A.B.C or consent of instructor. De- 
velopments in the music of western Europe and the western 
hemisphere since 1890. Contemporary music and its struc- 
ture. 

558 Collegium Musicum (2) 

Prerequisite, consent of Instructor. Advanced studies In the 
performance of rare and old music, which may include nota- 
tion. transcription, arranging, research, and performance. 
May be repeated for credit. 

567 Seminar in Piano Pedagogy (3) 

Graduate level study of the advanced learning theories, mu- 
sical issues, and pedagogical methods involved in teaching 
piano through lectures, discussions and student presenta- 
tions. Practice teaching required. 

569 Seminar in Piano Concerti (3) 

Advanced study of piano concerti with performance and 
analysis by class members and lectures by the Instructor. 
Requirements can be met by performance and/or analysis. 

570 Seminar in Piano Literature (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 500 or consent of instructor. Advanced 
study of piano literature, with performances and analyses by 
class members and lectures by the instructor. Requirements 
can be met by performance and/or analysis. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. 

571 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite, jury recommendation, individual instruction 
with approved Instructor. Emphasis on performance tech- 
niques and repertoire. Required of all graduate students 
whose terminal project is the graduate recital. May be re- 
peated for credit. 


Music 


591 Seminar in Advanced Choral Conducting and Interpreta- 
tion (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 39 IB, conducting experience or consent 
of instructor. Choral conducting techniques. Lab work with 
student groups and concert conducting. May be repeated for 
credit when offered with different course content. 

592 Seminar in Advanced Instrumental Conducting and Inter- 
pretation (2) 

Prerequisites: Music 392B, keyboard facility for score read- 
ing and consent of instructor. Conducting techniques. Inter- 
pretive problems of each period covered in lectures. May be 
repeated for credit. 

597 Project (3) 

Systematic study and report of a significant undertaking in 
the area of musical composition, musical performance, or 
other related creative activity. A written critical evaluation 
of the work or activity will be required. 

598 Thesis (3) 

individual investigations of specific problems in the area of 
concentration by candidates for the M.A. degree. 

599 independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music and consent of in- 
structor. Research and study projects in areas of specializa- 
tion beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written 
reports required. 


Music Education Courses 

299 Clinical Practice in Instrumental/Choral Techniques (1) 
Clinical practice and field applications of instrumental/ 
choral techniques classes, as in public and private schools. 
Coenrollment in Music 39 IB or 392B recommended. (3 hours 
weekly to be arranged In nearby school) 

342 Practicum in School Materials and Techniques (3) 

Corequisite: Music Education 3991 or 399V. For the music 
education major. Experience in the use of musical materials, 
conducting, organization and management. Observation and 
application of rehearsal and classroom techniques. 

3991 Clinical Practice in Instrumental Conducting (1) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 299. Clinical practice and 
field applications of concepts, materials and procedures as 
applied to field situations, as in public and private schools. 
Co-enrollment in Music Education 342. 

399V Clinical Practice in Choral Conducting (1) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 299. Clinical practice and 
field applications of concepts, materials and procedures as 


applied to field situations, as in public and private schools. 
Co-enrollment in Music Education 342. 

436 Orff Techniques for Children (3) 

Methods and techniques influenced by Carl Orff in teaching 
music for children. Rhythmic speech, song and movement. 
(2 hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 

441 Teaching General Music in Secondary Schools (3) 
Prerequisite: admission to teacher education, senior stand- 
ing or consent of instructor. Objectives, methods and materi- 
als for teaching general music or allied art-humanities class- 
es in secondary schools, including their relationship to 
specialized instrumental and choral programs. Practical 
problems and field work are included. 

442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public 
Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. History, prin- 
ciples of public education, grades K-12, with emphasis on 
music. Philosophy, methods, materials and procedures for 
organizing and teaching music in elementary and secondary 
schools. Must take concurrently with Ed-TE 440F and 440S. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

Must be taken concurrently with Music Education 442. For 
candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. 
See description and prerequisite under Division of Teacher 
Education. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act creden- 
tial. See description and prerequisite under Division of 
Teacher Education. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

Must be taken concurrently with Music Education 4491. For 
candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. 
See description and prerequisites under Division of Teacher 
Education. 

501 Contemporary Music Education (3) 

Recent innovations and overview of the history, philosophy 
and methodology of the art of teaching music. Trends and 
applications of educational theory in relation to the teaching 
of music. Required for M.A. in Music Education. 

542 Advanced Choral Techniques and Materials (2) 

Open to music education majors with teaching experience. 
Study of techniques and materials needed for successful 
junior high and secondary choral music programs. 


Music 


Department of Theatre and Dance 

Department Chair: Joseph Arnold 
Department Office: Performing Arts 157 
Production Office: Performing Arts 126 


Programs Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in Theatre Arts 
Dance 

History and Theory 
Production / Performance 
Teaching 

Master of Arts in Theatre Arts 

Dramatic Literature and Criticism 

Oral Interpretation 

Playwriting 

Television 

Theatre for Children 
Theatre History 

Master of Fine Arts in Theatre Arts 

Acting 

Directing 

Technical Theatre and Design 
Secondary Teaching Credential 

Faculty 

Barbara Arms. Joseph Arnold. Bob Christianson. 
Don Finn. John Fisher. Susan Hallman. 

Donald Henry. Dean Hess. Lawrence Jasper. 

Robin Johnson. Gretchen Kanne. Gladys Kares. 
Alvin Keller. Araminta Little. Alex MacKenzie. 
William Meyer. Sallie Mitchell. S. Todd Muffatti. 
Jerry Pickering. Jose Quintero 
(Distinguished Visiting Professor). 

Deborah Slate. Ron Wood. James Young. 

Allen Zeltzer 

INTRODUCTION 

The Department of Theatre and Dance undergrad- 
uate and graduate programs include the fields of act- 
ing. dance, directing, musical theatre, oral Interpre- 
tation, playwriting, technical production and design, 
television, theatre for children, theatre history and 
theory. Specifically, the course work and theatrical 
production activities are arranged to provide oppor- 
tunities for students (1) to develop an appreciation 
for theatre arts; (2) to become aware, as audience 
or participants, of the shaping force of theatre arts 
in society; (3) to improve the knowledge and skills 
necessary for work In the theatrical arts as a profes- 
sion; (4) to pursue graduate studies; and (5) to pre- 
pare for teaching theatre. 


Theatre and Dance 


Public performance is at the center of the depart- 
ment’s programs. Therefore, continuing stage, 
dance and television production activities are es- 
sential for all students at California State University, 
Fullerton, Including the undergraduate and graduate 
theoretical student as well as the undergraduate 
pre-professional and graduate conservatory stu- 
dent. In conjunction with on-campus dance produc- 
tions the Department of Theatre and Dance offers 
dancers and choreographers additional experience 
in its adjunct company: Dance Repertory Theatre. 
The company is made up of carefully selected Cali- 
fornia State University, Fullerton graduates and ad- 
vanced students, chosen on the basis of demon- 
strated excellence In their work at the University. 
Dance Repertory Theatre presents lecture/ 
demonstrations and performs locally, as well as 
scheduled tours throughout the year. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

The concentration In History and Theory is for those 
who wish to study theatre as a cultural contribution 
or who wish to pursue graduate degrees in theatre 
with emphasis in theatre history and theory. It Is 
strongly recommended that students electing this 
plan support the major with approved electives from 
art, music, foreign languages, literature, philosophy 
or speech. 

The concentration In Production /Performance Is de- 
signed to develop competency for pursuing the the- 
atrical arts as a profession, or for pursuing graduate 
degrees in theatre with an emphasis in an area of 
concentration other than history of the theatre. Ar- 
eas of emphasis are: acting, directing, musical the- 
atre, oral Interpretation, playwriting, technical the- 
atre and television. 

The concentration In Dance is designed to develop 
competency for pursuing dance as a profession or 
for pursuing a graduate degree in dance. 

The concentration In Teaching meets the require- 
ments of the teaching credential with specialization 
in secondary teaching. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the 
major, students must meet the other university re- 
quirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students 
pursuing a concentration In Teaching must meet all 
specific requirements for the desired teaching cre- 
dential. See description of secondary school teach- 
ing credential program under Department of Second- 
ary Education. In addition. Plan III students should 
see the department’s secondary education adviser 
regarding course sequence required for the single 
subject waiver. Those students who plan to work on 
the M.A. degree as well as the credential should see 
the chair of the Department of Theatre and Dance. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major 
in theatre, students must have a C or better in all the- 
atre courses required for the degree. In addition to 
course requirements, ail theatre and dance majors 
will enroll for two units of Theatre 478B each semes- 
ter of residency up to a maximum of eight semes- 
ters. Students who wish to transfer, for credit In the 
major, courses equivalent to Theatre 200, 276A,B, 
277, 284 and 286 must pass a transfer equivalency 


examination in the specific courses. These examina- 
tions are administered at the beginning of each se- 
mester. Contact the Department office for the times 
at which the examinations will be administered. 

Theatre 200, or its equivalent, is a prerequisite for 
all upper-division theatre courses with the exception 
of Theatre 478A,B. Transfer students may take The- 
atre 200 concurrently with their first semester of up- 
per-division courses. Prior to entering their junior 
year, or upon transferring to Cal State Fullerton, all 
students electing an Acting emphasis under the Pro- 
duction/Performance concentration or the concen- 
tration In Dance will be evaluated and advised as to 
potential for advancement in the emphasis or con- 
centration. 

Theatre History and Theory Concentration 
Lower Division: (15 units required) 

Theatre 1 10 Introduction to Oral 
Interpretation (3) 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 Acting (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Upper Division: (42 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of 
Shakespeare (3) 

Theatre 364 Seminar in Playwriting (3) 
Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 388 Historical Styles for Scene 
Design (3) 

Theatre 476A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (15) 
Theatre 477A.B Seminar in Critical 
Techniques (6) 

Electives (3) 

Production /Performance Concentration 
Acting Emphasis — 

Lower Division: (23 units required) 

Theatre 1 10 Introduction to Oral 
Interpretation (3) 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 24 1 Voice Production for the 
Performer (2) 

Theatre 261 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 
Theatre 263 Acting (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Upper Division: (35 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of 
Shakespeare (3) 

Theatre 341 Advanced Voice Production for 
the Performer (2) 

Theatre 363A,B Acting (6) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 463A,B Advanced Acting (6) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D World Theatre (12) 
Theatre 482 Acting for Film and Television (3) 


Theatre and Dance 


MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 
(TECHNICAL THEATRE/DESIGN, ACTING AND 
DIRECTING) 

This degree Is for students who wish professionally 
oriented education and training in design /technical 
theatre, acting, and directing. It is the objective of 
the department to educate and train highly skilled, 
motivated individuals for careers in professional the- 
atre (including television and film) or for careers as 
artist-teachers In college or university theatre. Only 
those who demonstrate an exceptional talent, a high 
degree of motivation, and a deep commitment to 
their education and training will be admitted into the 
program. The highest academic and creative stan- 
dards will be demanded throughout the program. A 
positive attitude and a rigid sense of theatre disci- 
pline are essential for success In the program. 

The degree requires 60 units of approved course 
work. Average length of time to complete the pro- 
gram is two years. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Classified 

Prerequisites for admission to the program and 
granting of classified standing are; 

1. B.A., B.F.A. or M.A. from an accredited college or 
university with a major in theatre; or a degree In 
a related field and extensive work In technical the- 
atre, acting, or directing. 

2. Completion of an oral interview and satisfactory 
review of the student’s portfolio or audition. 

3. Acceptance by the faculty. 

4. Minimum GPA of 3.0 in all upper-division under- 
graduate work in theatre. A minimum GPA of 2.75 
for the last half of the undergraduate program is 
also required. 

5. Completion of any additional prerequisites which 
may be required by the student’s Individual com- 
mittee prior to classification. 

6. Selection of a graduate adviser and committee. 
Total committee membership should be three or 
four faculty members, including the adviser. 

7. Submission of a formal M.F.A. study program ap- 
proved by the individual committee, the depart- 
ment graduate adviser and the dean of graduate 
studies. 

8. Must meet the Graduate Writing Requirement. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally 
Classified 

Students who do not meet certain prerequisites may 
be considered for admission in conditionally classi- 
fied graduate standing. Consult the graduate pro- 
gram adviser. 

M.F.A. Project 

The M.F.A. program shall be culminated by two cre- 
ative projects which, by their nature, are of sufficient 
challenge and complexity to be accepted as worthy 
completion of the two-year period of study. These 
projects, which shall be comparable to a profession- 
al undertaking, are determined by the individual 
committee and shall be design, acting or directing 


assignments for major productions. Each project 
shall be reviewed by the individual committee within 
two weeks after completion. If accepted, the student 
shall submit a project book on one of these assign- 
ments within a specified time. Before the degree is 
granted, each student will pass an oral examination 


over the project book. 

Study Plan — Acting 

Course Requirements* Units 

Take all of the following: 39 


Theatre 443 Audition and Rehearsal 
Processes (3) 

Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical 
Techniques (3) 

Theatre 500 Intro to Graduate Studies (3) 
Theatre 563 Acting Studio (24) 

Theatre 575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 
Theatre 583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 
Take one of the following: 3 

Theatre 436A Musical Theatre 
Workshop (3) 

Theatre 436B Musical Theatre 
Workshop (3) 

Theatre 482 Acting for Film and 
Television (3) 

Theatre 483 Advanced Acting Workshop (3) 


Take dance elective (3) 3 

Take 9 units adviser-approved electives 9 

Complete two creative projects: 

Theatre 597 Project (6) 6 

Total 60 

Study Plan — Directing 

Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: ^8 

Theatre 436A Musical Theatre 
Workshop (3) 


Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 
Theatre 470B Advanced Directing (3) 
Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Tech (3) 
Theatre 484 Television Dramatic Tech (3) 
Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate 
Studies (3) 

Theatre 563 Acting Studio (6) 

Theatre 570A,B Styles of Directing (12) 
Theatre 575 Seminar: Theatre History (3) 
Theatre 597 Graduate Project (6) 

Theatre 599 Independent Research (3) 


Take 12 units adviser-approved electives ^2 

Total 60 


Study Plan — Technical Theatre/Design 
Students should concentrate their activities in two of 
the following four technical theatre areas during 
their two year course of study: scene design, cos- 
tume design-makeup, lighting-sound, and technical 


production. 

Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 9 


Theatre 477A Senior Seminar in Critical 
Techniques (3) 

Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate 
Study (3) 

Theatre 575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 


Theatre and Dance 


Take nine units in the following: 9 

Theatre 566 Graduate Senninar: 

Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 577 Graduate Seminar: 

Costuming (3) 

Theatre 578 Graduate Seminar: Scene 
Design (3) 

Theatre 586 Graduate Seminar: Lighting (3) 
Take the following four times: 24 

Theatre 588 Design and Tech Theatre (6) 
Choose 12 adviser-approved units from tech- 
nical courses in theatre, art or engineering 12 
Complete a creative project in two of the four 


technical areas: Theatre 597 Project (3) 6 

_Total 60 


* Based on a student's previous undergraduate or professional experience, 
substitutions or revisions in the study plan might be appropriate. 


Dance Courses 

101 Introduction to Dance (3) (Formerly Theatre 101) 

Historical and contemporary dance forms. Experiences in 
various dance forms such as ballet, modern, jazz, folk, Afro, 
mime. Recommended for non -majors. 

112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) (Formerly Theatre 112) 
The fundamental structure and technique of classical ballet. 
May be repeated once for credit. (4 hours activity) 

122A,B Beginning Modern Dance (2,2) 

(Formerly Theatre 122A,B) 

Prerequisites: A is prerequisite to B. A— Exploration and 
manipulation of the Instrument and materials of dance; de- 
velopment of aesthetic judgment. (4 hours activity) 

B— Expansion of A via more complex technique and 
composition studies; development of performance quality. 
May be repeated once for credit. (4 hours activity) 

126 Dance Improvisation (2) (Formerly Theatre 126) 

Theory and practice of improvisation In movement. Practical 
use of improvisation in expressing imagery, developing cho- 
reographic concepts, and enhancing performance. (4 hours 
activity) 

132 Beginning Jazz Dance (2) (Formerly Theatre 132) 

Modern jazz danc echniques and basic jazz choreogra- 
phy. (4 hours activity) 

142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) (Formerly Theatre 142) 

Structure and technique of tap dance and tap choreography. 
(4 hours activity) 

212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) (Formerly Theatre 212) 
Prerequisites: Dance 112 and audition. Intermediate level 
technique of classical ballet. May be repeated once for 
credit. (4 hours activity) 

222 Intermediate Modern Dance (3) (Formerly Theatre 222) 
Prerequisites: Dance 122 and audition. Intermediate modern 
dance and movement vocabulary In terms of composition 
and communication. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours 
activity) 

226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) (Formerly Theatre 226) 

Musical form and structure; musically notating dance 
rhythms and percussion accompaniment. 

232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (2) (Formerly Theatre 232) 
Prerequisites: Dance 132 and consent of Instructor. Interme- 
diate level skills In jazz technique and choreography. 
(4 hours activity) 


242 Intermediate Tap Dance (2) (Formerly Theatre 242) 
Prerequisite: Dance 142 or consent of instructor. Intermedi- 
ate skills in tap technique and choreography. (4 hours activi- 
ty) 

301 Dance and Cultural Diversity (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101 or consent of instructor. Impact of 
various dance forms, from primitive time to modern, on di- 
verse cultures. Contributions of immigrants, minorities and 
women to dance as a personal, social and cultural expres- 
sion. 

312 Advanced Classical Ballet (3) (Formerly Theatre 312) 
Prerequisites: Dance 212 and audition. Stylization and 
performance of classical ballet. May be repeated once for 
credit. (6 hours activity) 

322 Partnering Techniques (3) (Formerly Theatre 322) 

Prerequisites: Intermediate level in dance technique and 
consent of the Instructor. The application of professional 
theories and principles of interrelationships in modern dance 
and ballet. Including concepts of balance, counterweight 
and lifting. May be repeated once for credit. 

(6 hours activity) 

323A,B Dance Composition (3,3) (Formerly Theatre 323A,B) 
A— Prerequisites: Dance 122, 126, or equivalents. Study of 
basic elements and forms of dance composition. 
B— Prerequisite: Dance 323A or consent of instructor. 
Problem solving studies in space, time, and energy, using 
choreographic devices in solo and group situations. Final 
project required. (6 hours activity) 

324 Forces and Figures in Dance (3) (Formerly Theatre 324) 
Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. A history of dance from 
primitive times to the present. 

332 Advanced Jazz Dance (3) (Formerly Theatre 332) 

Prerequisites: Dance 232 and consent of instructor. Ad- 
vanced jazz techniques and choreography through grade 
three of professional jazz dance. The relation of jazz to other 
forms of dance. (6 hours activity) 

336A,B Dance for Musical Theatre (3,3) 

(Formerly Theatre 336A,B) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112, 132, and audition, or consent of 
instructor. 336A is prerequisite to 336B. Dance utilized in 
musical theatre. A— Ensemble and individual approaches to 
the style. B— Choreography for musical theatre. (6 hours 
activity) 

372 Dance Kinesiology (3) (Formerly Theatre 372) 

Structural aspects of the human body and factors that affect 
movement in dance. 

412 Classical Pointe (3) (Formerly Theatre 412) 

Prerequisites: Dance 312 and consent of instructor. Tech- 
niques for performance of classical pointe. May be repeated 
once for credit. (6 hours activity) 

422 Advanced Modern Dance (3) (Formerly Theatre 422) 
Prerequisites: Dance 222 and audition. Advanced level skills 
in modern dance. Emphasis on individual techniques. May be 
repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 

(Formerly Theatre 423) 

Prerequisite: Dance 323A,B or equivalent. Elements and 
forms In dance composition. The choreographing of dances 
of concert quality. (6 hours activity) 


Theatre and Dance 


424 Fundamentals of Dance Instruction (3) 

(Formerly Theatre 424) 

Prerequisites: Dance 1 12, 222, 226, 323A, 372, and consent 
of instructor. Philosophies, techniques and methods for de- 
veloping progressions in dance instruction. 

471 Creative Dance for Children (3) (Formerly Theatre 471) 
Methods and materials for teaching creative dance/ 
movement to children. Interrelated arts techniques (move- 
ment, music, drama, visual art) for teaching in the classroom 
and the dance class. (6 hours activity) 

493 Dance Repertory and Performance (3) 

(Formerly Theatre 493) 

Prerequisites: Dance 212 and 322. Learning and rehearsing 
choreography of established and/or new dance works with 
performance intent. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours ac- 
tivity) 

497 Production and Performance Projects in Dance (1-3) 
Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of in- 
structor; application form with appropriate signatures must 
be on file in department office prior to registration. Projects 
which culminate in production or performance. May be re- 
peated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of in- 
structor; application form with appropriate signatures must 
be on file in department office prior to registration. Under- 
graduate research projects. May be repeated for credit. 

523 Graduate Projects in Choreography (3) 

(Formerly Theatre 523) 

Prerequisite: Dance 423 or consent of Instructor. Experi- 
ments in choreography using improvisation and innovative 
composition techniques. Environmental and sensorial expe- 
riences and studies In creativity and perception. 


Theatre Courses 

100 Introduction to the Theatre (3) 

For the general student leading to an appreciation and un- 
derstanding of the theatre as an entertainment medium and 
as an art form. Recommended for non majors. 

110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

The analysis and performance of literature by the interpret- 
er. 

163 Beginning Acting (3) 

The form and content of acting: improvisation, action, 
motivation, and behavior. Recommended for non majors. 
(6 hours activity) 

175 History of Western Theatre (3) 

A survey of theatre and Western civilization from the classi- 
cal Greeks to the moderns. Recommended for non majors. 

180 Great Moments in Radio and TV (3) 

Presentation and analysis of radio and television programs 
from 1926 to the present, including guest artists from the ra- 
dio and television industry. 

184 introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

The broadcasting industry and its Impact and influence on 
our society. Broadcasting practices, audiences, production 
and programming. 


200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre as an art form, involving the interrelated processes 
of playwriting, directing, acting, design and theatre manage- 
ment. Study of plays, films and television with emphasis on 
dramatic analysis and cultural significance. Required of all 
theatre majors. 

206, AB Mime and Pantomime (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 206A is prerequisite for 206B. 
Individual development of creative skill in mime and 
pantomime. (6 hours activity) 

241 Voice Production for the Performer (2) 

Use of voice in the theatre. Correction of speech faults 
and regional accents. Study of basic interpretive material. 
(4 hours activity) 

251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 

The body as an expressive Instrument; acquiring of strength, 
flexibility, relaxation, control. The relationship of the body to 
the creative project. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours 
activity) 

263 Acting (3) 

Improvisations, exercises, and techniques of acting for the 
stage. Motivation and behavior in characterization. (6 hours 
activity) 

276A,B Beginning Stagecraft (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 276A is prerequisite to 276B. A— Planning and 
construction of stage and television scenery. Use of tools 
and stage equipment. B— Drafting and reading of technical 
drawings. Work in the scene shop for department produc- 
tions is required for A and B. May be repeated for credit. 
(6 hours activity) 

277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Costuming theatrical and television productions. Construc- 
tion techniques, organization and duties of the costume 
crew. (6 hours activity) 

284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

The fundamentals of production for television. (6 hours activ- 
ity) 

285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Makeup for stage and television. Individual skill in character 
analysis, application in pigment, plastic, hair, makeup, and 
selection and use of makeup equipment. (6 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Scene design, including script analysis, formation of visual 
concepts, floor plan development and model building for 
stage and television. (6 hours activity) 

310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. Development of tech- 
niques for oral interpretation of Shakespeare with special 
emphasis on the problems of verse. 

341 Advanced Voice Production for the Performer (2) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 241. Intensive individual voice and 
speech training for the actor and oral Interpreter. Projects 
involving theatrical material will focus on specific problems. 
May be repeated for credit. (4 hours activity) 

343 Dialects for Actors (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 241 or consent of instructor. Dialects 
and accents for theatrical performance. Source materials, 
analysis, and application to scripted material. (6 hours activ- 
ity) 


Theatre and Dance 


350 Stage Management (2) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 370A. Backstage management, in- 
cluding interrelationships of production personnel for stage 
and television. 

363A,B Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 241, 251, 263 and audition. Charac- 
terization; roles, special problems, and application of acting 
techniques through exercises and two-character scenes 
from the contemporary theatre. (6 hours activity) 

364 Seminar in Playwriting (3) 

Prerequisites: evidence of interest in creative writing and 
consent of instructor. Study of superior models, develop- 
ment of style, and group criticism and evaluation of indepen- 
dent work, as it relates to playwriting. May be repeated for 
credit. 

365 Television/Fiim Writing (3) 

The writing of scripts and other forms of continuity for televi- 
sion/film. May be repeated for credit. 

370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 263, or consent of instructor. 370A is 
prerequisite to B. Prerehearsal problems and procedures, 
structural analysis of plays, composition, picturization, pan- 
tomimic dramatization, movement and rhythm on stage and 
in television. Practice in directing scenes. (6 hours activity) 

377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Fashions and textiles of major historical periods, methods 
of research; interpretation and communication of historical 
dress for theatrical statement. 

379 Rendering for the Theatre (3) 

Scenic and costume sketching and rendering for communi- 
cation between production director and designers. Full 
scale costume and scenic painting required. Theoretical and 
actual production idea presentation and execution. (6 hours 
activity) 

381 Radio and Television Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 1 10. Control room operation, including 
practice in microphone and camera techniques. (6 hours ac- 
tivity) 

384 Television Production and Direction (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 284. Theory and practice in the pro- 
duction of television programs and announcements: the 
planning, organizing, directing, rehearsing, performing, re- 
cording and editing of television programs and announce- 
ments. (6 hours activity) 

385 Advanced Theatre Makeup (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 285. Problems in makeup including 
special techniques and materials: prosthetics, hairpieces, 
and masks for stage and television productions. (6 hours ac- 
tivity) 

386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theories of lighting for stage and television productions. 
(6 hours activity) 

387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Practice necessary to integrate live and recorded sound into 
performing arts productions. Recording, reproduction and 
studio techniques. (6 hours activity) 

388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 

Visual survey through lecture and slides of architecture, in- 


terior design and furniture from ancient to modern times. Pro- 
vides necessary basis for advanced design course. 

400 Theatre Internship (3) 

Consent of appropriate faculty supervisor. Supervised work 
experience in all areas of theatre to expand the dimensions 
of the classroom by Integrating the formal academic training 
with direct application. Periodic seminar meetings to dis- 
cuss work. 

402A,B Dramatic Activities for Children (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Creative dramatics as a 
tool for building and developing creative and socialized pro- 
cesses in children. A— Sense memory, movement/ mime, 
dialogue, characterization, dramatization. B— Teaching 
techniques including concentration, imagination, dramatiza- 
tion, and Improvisation for older children. (6 hours activity) 

403A,B Theatre for Children (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 403A prerequisite for 403B or consent of In- 
structor. Theatrical production for an audience of children. 
A— Philosophy, theory and practice; B— Application of pro- 
duction principles. (6 hours activity) 

410A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and perfor- 
mance in the oral interpretation of prose literature. 

410B Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and perfor- 
mance In the oral interpretation of poetry. 

4 IOC Oral interpretation of Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and perfor- 
mance in the oral Interpretation of drama. 

411 Oral Interpretation of Children’s Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Oral presentation of 
children’s literature in classroom, recreation and home situ- 
ations including individual and group performance of fiction, 
non-fiction, fantasy and poetry. 

414 Readers Theatre (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 1 10 or consent of instructor. The inter- 
pretation of literature in the medium of readers theatre. May 
be repeated for credit. 

436A,B Musical Theatre Workshop (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363B, Dance 336A,B, and audition. 
Theatre 436A prerequisite to B. Roles and excerpts from 
musical theatre: the musical, dramatic, language and dance 
techniques. Scenes and musical numbers in workshop. A— 
Large group and solo work. B— Small group and audition 
material preparation. (6 hours activity) 

443 Audition and Rehearsal Processes (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363A,B. Auditioning and rehearsal 
processes for professional work In theatre, television and 
film. Includes techniques for selecting material and perfor- 
mance preparation. (6 hours activity) 

450 Theatre Management (3) 

Organizational principles of front-of-house and box office 
operation. Participation in School of the Arts public presen- 
tations. (3 hours lecture, 6 hours activity) 

463A,B Advanced Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 310, Theatre 363A,B and audition. 
Historical theories and techniques of styles of acting. A— 
Greek through renaissance periods. B— The neoclassic pe- 
riods to contemporary styles. (6 hours activity) 


Theatre and Dance 


470A,B Advanced Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 288, 350, and 370A,B, or consent of 
instructor. Readings in theory, analysis of scripts and prac* 
tice in directing plays for their oral and visual value as the- 
atre. A— Each student directs a one-act play. B— Each stu- 
dent directs two one-act plays or equivalent. (6 hours 
activity) 

475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (3, 3, 3, 3, 3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The historical and dra- 
matic evolution of world theatre. A— Ancient Greece and 
Rome, Middle Ages; Italian renaissance; B— England from 
1558-1790; 16th- and 17th-century Spain and France; C— 
18th- and 19th-century Europe and Russia; 19th-century En- 
gland; D— 18th- and 19th-century America; the Orient; the 
modern world; E— Historical background and contemporary 
view of the musical theatre. 

477A,B Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (3,3) 

Theatre 477A or consent of instructor prerequisite to 477B. 
A— Major critical theories in theatre. B— Application of crit- 
ical theories to local dramatic productions. Theatre 477B 
fulfills the course requirement of the university upper- 
division oaccalaureate writing requirement for theatre arts 
majors. 

478A,B Production and Performance (2,2) 

A—Acting in stage or television performances. 
B— Technical crew work on stage or television performances. 
One section of 478B per semester required of all theatre 
majors as well as non-majors cast in theatre department 
productions. (More than 6 hours activity) 

482 Acting for Film and Television (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363A,B. The adaptation of stage 
techniques for the camera; audition, rehearsal, and final per- 
formance, utilizing videotape and studio equipment. (6 hours 
activity) 

483 Advanced Acting Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463A,B and audition. Extensive 
scene study, based on particular needs and problem areas 
of the advanced acting student. (6 hours activity) 

484 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 and consent of instructor. Tech- 
niques of production for the director, actor and designer in 
televised drama. (6 hours activity) 

486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 386 or consent of Instructor. Design 
and technology of lighting for the stage and television. 
(6 hours activity) May be repeated for credit. 

487 Advanced Audio Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 387 or consent of instructor. 
Advanced problems in the design and technology of live and 
recorded sound used in the performing arts. (6 hours 
activity) 

488 Advanced Design and Technology (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A,B, 277, 288 and consent of In- 
structor. Advanced design, coordination of scenery and/or 
costume design projects for various types of theatres and 
television. May be repeated for credit. 

490 Television /Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 or consent of Instructor. The na- 
ture of film and television; aesthetic and theoretical and criti- 
cal bases for film and television evaluation and understand- 
ing. 


494 Cable Television Production Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: six units of television production and consent 
of instructor. Practical experience in the creation of full- 
length television dramatic productions for cable broadcast- 
ing. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

497 Production and Performance Projects in Theatre (1*3) 
Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of In- 
structor; application form with appropriate signatures must 
be on file in department office prior to registration. Projects 
which culminate In production or performance. May be re- 
peated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of In- 
structor; application form with appropriate signatures must 
be on file in department office prior to registration. Under- 
graduate research projects. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Theatre (3) 
Methodological problems in graduate research. Location of 
source materials, including library and original data; inter- 
pretation of research and practice in scholarly writing. Must 
be taken the first semester after admission to graduate 
study. 

501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory (3) 
Prerequisite: Theatre 500. Directed research; the relation- 
ship between historical backgrounds and developments in 
the theatre and the student’s area of concentration. 

503 Graduate Seminar: Theatre for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 403A or consent of instructor. Philoso- 
phies, theories, techniques and trends of the art of theatre 
for children. Problems related to the use of materials in edu- 
cational, community and professional children’s theatres. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Oral Interpretation (3) 

Historical and philosophical development of oral Interpreta- 
tion and its relationship to contemporary theory and prac- 
tice. 

550 Production Planning in Theatre Arts (3) 

Production problems in theatre arts. Planning the production 
within the limitations of budgets and physical facilities. 

563 Acting Studio (6) 

Prerequisite: audition. Re-creation and interpretation of 
roles utilizing period and contemporary dramatic literature, 
interrelating voice, movement, characterization and period 
style acting. Enrollment limited to M.F.A. students. 

566 Graduate Seminar: Stagecraft (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Advanced theories In the 
preparation and installation of scenery for theatrical produc- 
tion; engineering drawings, exploration of materials, and re- 
search into new methods of theatre technology. May be re- 
peated for credit up to six units. 

570A,B Styles of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 470A,B or consent of instructor. Re- 
search in the theories of directing styles and practice In di- 
recting period plays. A— Staging problems from Greek trag- 
edy through the Restoration. B— Staging problems from 
recent classical work (Ibsen, Strinberg, Chekhov) to pres- 
ent. May be repeated once for credit. 

573 Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of contri- 
butions of major dramatists or dramatic genres. Emphasis 


Theatre and Dance 


on dramatic analysis. Topic will vary from semester to se- 
mester. May be repeated for credit. 

575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of a sig- 
nificant historical period or movement in theatre history. 
Topic will vary from semester to semester. May be repeated 
for credit. 

577 Graduate Seminar: Costuming (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Costume production 
problems and their solutions. Examination of specific de- 
signers, past and present. Research in practical methods of 
interpreting the designer’s sketch. May be repeated for 
credit up to six units. 

578 Graduate Seminar: Scene Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Scenic design projects 
involving in-depth production style and scheme develop- 
ment. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463A,B. Investigation and delineation 
of current acting methods as techniques for solving prob- 
lems presented by popular dramatic literature. Development 
of a personal acting philosophy and methodology. May be 
repeated once for credit. 

586 Graduate Seminar: Lighting Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced theoretical 
lighting design projects. Production problems and their solu- 
tions. Examination of specific designers, past and present. 
May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

588 Graduate Projects in Design and Technical Theatre (6) 
Theoretical projects and designs for productions prior to fi- 
nal projects. Faculty and student critiques. Tailored to indi- 
vidual student needs. Enrollment limited to M.F.A. students. 


597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, student’s graduate 
committee and department executive committee. Develop- 
ment and presentation of a creative project beyond regularly 
offered coursework. May be repeated for credit up to six 
units. Student must complete course application form by the 
end of the seventh week of the semester preceding that in 
which the work is to be done. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student’s graduate committee; ap- 
plication form with appropriate signatures must be on file in 
department office prior to registration. Development and 
presentation of a thesis in the student’s area of concentra- 
tion. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student's graduate committee and 
instructor; application form with appropriate signatures must 
be on file in department office prior to registration. Research 
in theatre. May be repeated for credit. 


Theatre Education Courses 

442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, 
methods and materials for teaching In the secondary school. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 


Theatre and Dance 




' ■' ■-'‘’v,- ‘ '‘♦t-: < -■••:>■.■ '^•' .- 

'f r.;v'''‘'' '-H ■ ‘•'■!i)T;-“ GO. ;■.• ■ ' - ••■ 'Vu >’ - 

■ f-y \, ■'' ■' ■" Titoov 

. io ' ' •" 

m, o"-": V ' /r, •; v ••■-^‘ v-/ •,/ ■ - -<■ - 

r . r '^0^-'' ' - A:;-v\ .■-• 

r.. * --i- ()-V 

...I'Oi'C'-iMiktJbr ;’ - .. ' . /3;.-.:cj..-.>i''ii»p^]!iv5. 

,v ■ ri'-, »:<, w-ivi " ■ ■' v.'. ';^\)^Cip’ Vi :fi a'ijjlj'r '> 0 ""^ ' 

;;nE.» ! ■' '' ,• ■•’•; ‘-^Vu '.,, 

,.:o 7 • ”. ,:e\- ''. *. o 

:■'■■' :■•■•••»>• . ■ : ■••' , , • f ; ,'y 

‘‘f'l'?- ; ’it •' c'.- 1 *' ’• ’I’.'* ‘.' ' ilTVii' : ' '.'' ’ ' • I 


-■’p.'v,v r:g^p^'W0<.J' .'■ ■■- ■'u i 

" • ^ ,' , :-r. ' 0 -’ ■ ■ :> y /-^n 


•;’■ "vi^.' '0‘ ^ Ty.’f-’O'iV'i^. i'‘'iO > 

,^. : ' • .< *:' 1. 

-.'I,;?; .■:^v ^ vC 

-*' V ’’■'- ' ■'■‘M'/ i' ‘Ttoo 

^;4^it|»ft, m V- .0 ‘>00 '^: o-o o :3:-’ _ 

y .* * 

■‘ 'VA: -V 

'■^•; ^r^ci^u!C/^ ■ ■rio'd-.y. 

‘ .’■' ,•• 'W-'-.f- '''^v 

, ' ' / • ' V . ': -r-: . ■ 

h VIA";- ^ ^ ^ ' : .v - 7 : ’Ai\.AeTA';^ 

■ ;!h’:>* ^ • vO. 000, v; ' • 

. ;.n -■'.r.r;, V ■>••'• A '' '•■-^ ' 



■; V, y.'o'/- -J -. ,.i . .■ ■■! • '••• ^ ' ■ ; . - ■ -i 

' ' zvyv-A' I’D’il; '■’ '■ 

•:* u-v.. 

'(?»' y v‘V'' -vvA''’ ,> 

; v 'Vi * 'o. >o‘''c.' '^" . 

(&>>»:■• '■'' .X. . .' *- ' ■■ ■■ .v;^o;t> ^A;:>^^rv;T :4.-.A o.rv *>^-3 

^ a :- :. ■ 

'\v- : V. • -v ^‘- 4 ;^ 


'■•‘•-V^ ?4 


■ . A*\' 

:> . ■ '- ' 


School of Business 
Administration and 

Economics 

Dean: Thomas L. Brown 
Associate Deans: 
Ken Goldin, Undergraduate Programs 
Paul Hugstad, Graduate Programs 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentrations In; 

Accounting 
Business Economics 
Finance 
Management 

Management information Systems 
Management Science 
Marketing 

Bachelor of Arts in Economics 
Bachelor of Arts in International Business 
Concentrations In: 

French 

German 

Japanese 

Portuguese 

Spanish 

Other Languages 

Minor in Business Administration 
Minor in Economics 

Minor in Management Information Systems 
Master of Science in Accountancy 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentrations in: 

Accounting 
Business Economics 
Finance 

International Business 
Management 
Management Science 
Marketing 

Master of Arts in Economics 

Master of Science in Management Science 

Concentrations In: 

Management Information Systems 
Operations Research 
Statistics 

Master of Science in Taxation 


189 


INTRODUCTION 

Programs of study in the School of Business Admin- 
istration and Economics equip men and women with 
the intellectual and professional tools needed to as- 
sume responsible positions in business, industry, 
education, government, and social service. The 
school offers a broad exposure to business adminis- 
tration and economics. Behavioral and quantitative 
sciences are studied in both theoretical and applied 
contexts. Mathematics is used as a key tool in the 
analysis of complex problems and In the interpreta- 
tion of data. Emphasis Is placed on effective oral 
and written communication. Students are made 
aware of the need for imaginative. Innovative solu- 
tions to business problems that encompass human 
needs and ethical objectives. 

The school also offers the opportunity to develop 
technical expertise in a chosen discipline at a begin- 
ning professional level acceptable to prospective 
employers. Seven concentrations are offered within 
the business administration major as well as an eco- 
nomics major, an international business major and a 
business education credential program. 

The School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics offers the only programs In Orange County ac- 
credited by the American Assembly of Collegiate 
Schools of Business. Accreditation assures a rigor- 
ous course of study covering the full spectrum of 
business administration. It also indicates a well- 
qualified faculty, high standards for students, and 
access to an extensive library system. 

Preparation for Undergraduate Degree Programs 

Algebra and geometry are necessary for many re- 
quired business courses. The equivalent of three 
years of high school mathematics, including a sec- 
ond course in algebra, is the prerequisite for the re- 
quired Math 135, Business Calculus. Students with- 
out the necessary background should enroll In Math 
100, Precalculus Mathematics. 

Proficiency in written English is necessary to pass 
the Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Profi- 
ciency (EWP) and the required course Business Ad- 
ministration 301, Business Writing. Students without 
adequate writing skills should enroll In Communica- 
tions 103, Applied Writing; English 101, Beginning 
College Writing; English 106, Writing for ESL Stu- 
dents; Foreign Language Education 105A,B, English 
as a Second Language; or Business Administration 
301, Business Writing. 

Business students are encouraged to take courses 
in sociology, psychology, anthropology, speech 
communication, political science, history, philoso- 
phy, geography and foreign languages. Many 
courses in these fields may be used to meet the gen- 
eral education requirement. For the international 
business degree, intermediate level competency in 
a foreign language, equivalent to Foreign Language 
204 courses. Is prerequisite to the required concen- 
tration courses. It is strongly recommended that stu- 
dents planning to major in international business 
complete a minimum of three years of foreign lan- 
guage study while in high school. 


Transfer Credit for Business and Economics 
Courses 

Students should see an adviser immediately regard- 
ing transfer credit. In order to meet the requirements 
of any major or minor in the School of Business Ad- 
ministration and Economics, each transfer course 
must have a minimum C grade. Lower-division 
courses taken at four-year institutions and all 
courses taken at two-year colleges may be used to 
satisfy only lower-division (i.e., 100 and 200 level) 
requirements at the university. Upper-division 
courses taken at four-year institutions may be used 
to satisfy upper division (i.e., 300 and 400 level) re- 
quirements at the university. Lists of approved 
courses are available in the Business Advising Cen- 
ter; other courses are subject to approval by the de- 
partment chair concerned. In all cases, courses 
must be transferred from an appropriately accredit- 
ed institution. If the Institution Is located outside the 
Southern California area, the student should supply 
catalog descriptions, course outlines and textbook 
titles. In most cases, courses taken in the extension 
division of a university, or by correspondence, are 
not acceptable. 


Admission to the Business Administration Major 

Admission to the major involves two steps. Students 
who apply for the major are initially classified as 
Prebusiness. After completing lower division prereq- 
uisite requirements, students are advanced to the 
Business Administration major. Prebusiness stu- 
dents may take lower division business courses, but 
most upper division business courses are not open 
to Prebusiness students. 


Business Advising Center 
Langsdorf Hall, Room 700 

Undergraduate Program Advising 

The Business Advising Center serves business ad- 
ministration, economics and international business 
majors. Information is available on admissions, cur- 
riculum and graduation requirements, as well as on 
registration and grading procedures, residence and 
similar academic matters. Transfer students should 
see an adviser immediately regarding transfer cred- 
it. For information on general education, consult the 
Academic Advisement Center in the Humanities 
Building. 


Graduate Program Advising 

The graduate adviser (in the Business Advising Cen- 
ter) provides academic advising for the graduate 
programs in accountancy, business administration, 
economics, management science and taxation. In- 
formation is available on admissions, curriculum and 
graduation requirements, as well as on registration 
procedures, residence and similar academic mat- 
ters. Students also should consult the faculty coor- 
dinators for the programs in accountancy, econom- 
ics, management science and taxation. 


School of Business Administration and Economics 


Internships and Cooperative Education 

Students may earn academic credit, first-hand work 
experience and financial remuneration as well. Op- 
portunities exist in accounting and auditing; cost- 
benefit analysis and econometrics; finance and real 
estate; insurance and banking; management and in- 
dustrial relations; marketing, sales and advertising; 
and business data systems. For more Information, 
consult the internship adviser in your department or 
in the Center for Internships and Cooperative Educa- 
tion. 

Student Organizations 

Chapters of the following national honor societies 
have been established on campus with membership 
open to qualified students: Beta Alpha PsI (account- 
ing), Beta Gamma Sigma (business). Delta Sigma Pi 
(business), Financial Management Association Hon- 
or Society (finance), Omicron Delta Epsilon (eco- 
nomics), Phi Kappa Phi (all-campus). Pi Sigma Epsi- 
lon (marketing). In addition there are the following 
clubs which students are encouraged to join: Ac- 
counting Society, AIESEC, Black Business Students, 
Circle K (management). Data Processing Manage- 
ment Association, Economics Association, Finance 
Association, Inter-Club Council, Marketing Club, Per- 
sonnel and Industrial Relations Association, Person- 
nel Management Association of Aztian, Rho Epsilon 
(real estate-finance). Securities and Investment As- 
sociation, Society for the Advancement of Manage- 
ment and The Institute of Management Science. 

Prizes in Business Administration and Economics 
Stephen J. Barres Leadership Award 

Theodore H. Smith Outstanding Graduate Student 
Award 

Advisory Board Award: Outstanding Student 
Advisory Board Award: Outstanding Faculty 
R. C. Baker Foundation Scholarships 
Farmers Insurance Group Scholarships 


Friends of the School of Business Administration 
and Economics Scholarships 

Irvine Company Scholarship 

Council of Alumni MBA Student Scholarship 

See also awards listed under each department. 

Computer Facilities 

The CSUF Computer Center in McCarthy Hall and 
the SBAE Satellite Computer Laboratory In Langs- 
dorf Hall are available for student use. Facilities In- 
clude terminals (which access the campus’ main 
computers), microcomputers, and printers. Comput- 
er facilities are generally available evenings and 
weekends during the school year. 

Information on the Degree Requirements 

Accountancy, Master of Science 
See “Department of Accountings 

Business Administration, Bachelor of Arts 
Business Administration, Master of 

Business Administration, Minor 

See “Business Administration Degrees” 

Economics, Bachelor of Arts 
Economics, Master of Arts 

Economics, Minor 

See “Department of Economics” 

International Business, Bachelor of Arts 
See “International Business Program” 

Management Information Systems, Minor 
See “Management Information Systems” 

Management Science, Master of Science 
See “Department of Management Science” 

Taxation, Master of Science 

See “Department of Accounting” 



School of Business Administration and Economics 


Department of 
Accounting 

Department Chair: Trini Melcher 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 630 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Accounting 
Master of Science in Accountancy 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Accounting 
Master of Science in Taxation 

Faculty 

Gene Bennett, Hal Brand, Jack Coleman, 
Eugene Corman, Mary Fleming, Clyde Hardman, 
A. Jay Hirsch, Jodha Khalsa, K.J. Kim, 

Norbert Maler, Trini Melcher, Robert Miller, 
Nona Mooers, Shirish Seth, Randy Swad, 

Anita Tyra, Robert Vanasse, Dorsey Wiseman 


Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, 
provides information on admissions, curriculum and 
graduation requirements; registration and grading 
procedures; residence and similar academic mat- 
ters. In addition, the Accounting Department pro- 
vides advising on curriculum content and career op- 
portunities; 

Accounting Trini Melcher 

CPA Examination Robert Vanasse 

Taxation Clyde Hardman 


INTRODUCTION 

Accounting is often referred to as “the language of 
business.” Very generally, the accounting process 
is concerned with recording, classifying, reporting 
and interpreting the economic data of an organiza- 
tion. These data are important to users, who may in- 
clude managers, investors and other interested 
groups. Accounting helps In decision-making pro- 
cesses by showing how money has been spent and 
where commitments have been made, by judging 
performance and by showing the implications of fol- 
lowing different courses of action. Reliable informa- 
tion In a dynamic business environment is necessary 
for sound decisions concerning the allocation of 
scarce resources. Thus accounting plays a very sig- 
nificant part in our social and economic systems. 

Programs In accounting are designed for students 
who are Interested In careers in public accounting. 
Industry, government, or social accounting, and for 
students who intend to work for advanced degrees 
in accounting in preparation for teaching and re- 
search. 


Accounting 


Credential Information 

The Department of Accounting offers courses which 
may be included in the Single Subject Waiver Pro- 
gram in Business. Further information on the require- 
ments for teaching credentials Is contained in the 
Teacher Credential Programs section of this cata- 
log. 

Prizes in Accounting 

Outstanding Senior Award 
Amy Vanasse Memorial Award 
Arthur Andersen & Co. 

Arthur Young & Company 
Becker CPA Review 
Coopers & Lybrand 
CSUF CPA Review 
Dauberman CPA Review 
Deloitte Haskins & Sells 
Ernst & Whinney 
Grant Thornton Co. 

Kenneth Leventhal & Co. 

KMG Main Hurdman 

McGladrey Hendrickson & Pullen 

National Association of Accountants, O.C. Chapter 

Peat, Marwick, Mitchell & Co. 

Price Waterhouse 
Robert Half Co. 

Society of Accountants — O.C. Chapter 
Touche Ross & Co. 
use CPA Review 
Vilmure, Peeler & Boucher 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See "Business Administration Degrees, Accounting 
Concentration." 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ACCOUNTANCY 

The Master of Science in Accountancy program pro- 
vides the conceptual understanding and technical 
competence for a career in professional accounting. 
Employment opportunities Include public account- 
ing, industrial accounting and government. The pro- 
gram encompasses both a theoretical foundation 
and technical skills. Emphasis is placed on the de- 
velopment of a professional attitude and the capaci- 
ty to deal with issues of accounting policy and eth- 
ics. Graduates should be prepared for entry-level 
positions, and for potential advancement in the pro- 
fession. 

The M.S. in Accountancy program is scheduled es- 
pecially for students who are employed full time. 
Courses are offered during the late afternoon and 
evening. Most students enroll on a part-time basis, 
taking two courses (6 units) per semester. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an un- 
dergraduate degree in business administration with 
a concentration in accounting. The 10 courses (30 
units) may be completed In one year (full time) or 2 
1/2 years (part time). In addition to seven account- 
ing courses, there are two electives and a terminal, 
research-project course. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange 
County accredited by the American Assembly of 
Collegiate Schools of Business. This assures a rig- 


orous program, a well qualified faculty, high stan- 
dards for students, and access to an extensive li- 
brary system. The qualifications of the M.S. in 

Accountancy faculty include advanced degrees in 
taxation, accounting, and law; practical tax experi- 
ence; and professional standing as CPA’s and attor- 
neys. 

Most graduate courses require ''classified SBAE 
status" and are open only to students with classified 
standing in the M B. A., M.S. In Accountancy, M.S. in 
Taxation, M.S. in Management Science, or M.A. In 
Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be 
admitted to postbaccalaureate unclassified stand- 
ing. 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution 
accredited by a regional accrediting association, 
or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.6 in the last 60 
semester units attempted and in good standing at 
the last college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may 
enroll in undergraduate courses (100 through 400 le- 
vel) but generally are ineligible for graduate busi- 
ness courses (500 level). Such students may wish 
to take undergraduate courses which are necessary 
to meet the requirements for classified standing 
(see below). Upon completing the requirements, the 
student may file an "Application for Change of Aca- 
demic Objective — Graduate" requesting admission 
to the M.S. in Accountancy program. Admission as 
a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does not 
constitute admission to the M.S. in Accountancy pro- 
gram, does not confer priority, nor does it guarantee 
future admission. Students planning to apply for ad- 
mission to the M.S. in Accountancy program should 
confer with the graduate adviser in the School of 
Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments may be admitted to the M.S. in Accountancy 
program with conditionally classified standing: 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate 
Management Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to 
yield a score of at least 960 according to one of 
the following formulas. Due to limited facilities and 
resources in the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics, a higher score may be re- 
quired of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT Is at least 460, then score = (GPA x 200) 
4 - GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA Is below 2.5 or 
GMAT is below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
+ GMAT-60. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units 
of course work* then score = (GPA x 200) 4 - 
GMAT-100. 

* All work within any given quarter or semester must 
be included even though that will result in more than 
60 semester units. The units to be included in the 
last 60 semester units may come only from the fol- 


Accounting 


lowing: ( 1) work taken in postbaccalaureate status 
during the last seven years toward fulfilling M S. in 
Accountancy course work requirements: (2) units 
taken under a prescribed remedial program agreed 
to by the associate dean, School of Business Admin- 
istration and Economics: (3) units earned prior to the 
bachelor’s degree. 

Note: To be admitted as conditionally classified stu- 
dents, applicants must be within three courses (or 
10 units) of meeting the requirements for classified 
standing (see below). Such courses must be com- 
pleted within the first 12 months of study. Students 
who do not do so will not be allowed to continue in 
the program. Conditionally classified students may 
take a limited number of graduate courses (500 le- 
vel) subject to the approval of the graduate adviser 
of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Applicants with a bachelor’s degree in a 
field other than business administration (or whose 
deficiency is greater than three courses) should ap- 
ply for the Master of Business Administration pro- 
gram. Upon completion of the M.B.A. foundation 
courses and Business Administration 595 (or 596), 
an application for a change of objective may be filed 
for transfer to the M.S. in Accountancy program. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be advanced to classified standing. Such 
students are eligible to take graduate courses for 
which they qualify. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business ad- 
ministration and a concentration in accounting 
which meets the requirements stated in this cata- 
log for such degrees. The degree must Include 
calculus and computer programming equivalent to 
passing Mathematics 135, Business Calculus (3 
units), and Management Science 264, Introduction 
to Computer Programming (2 units), with a mini- 
mum C grade. Courses in the major are to be no 
more than seven years old, and courses in the ac- 
counting concentration no more than five years 
old. Courses in the major (including the account- 
ing concentration) must have at least a 3.0 (B) 
GPA. Courses with grades lower than C must be 
repeated. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course 
work beyond the baccalaureate degree. A GPA of 
3.0 (B) is required. Any study plan course in which 
a D Is received must be repeated and must receive 
at least a C grade regardless of the overall GPA of 
the student. 

Required Courses 

Accounting 502 Seminar In Accounting Theory (3) 
Accounting 503 Seminar In Contemporary 
Accounting Problems (3) 

Accounting 505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 
Accounting 506 Seminar in Professional 
Communications (3) 

Accounting 507 Seminar In Acctg. Information 
Systems (3) 

Accounting 521 Seminar In Admin. Accounting (3) 


Accounting 572 Seminar in Taxation of 
Corporations and Shareholders (3) 

Electives in Accounting or Related Business 
Fields 

Two courses (6 units) at the 400 or 500 level, to be 
selected In consultation with, and approved by, the 
program coordinator. 

Terminal Evaluation 
Accounting 597 Project (3) 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration Degrees, Accounting 
Concentration” 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN TAXATION 

The Master of Science In Taxation program provides 
the conceptual understanding and technical compe- 
tence for a career In taxation. Employment opportu- 
nities include the tax departments of CPA and law 
firms, as well as corporations and government tax 
agencies. For those already employed in this field, 
the M S. in Taxation program should meet the contin- 
uing education requirements of professional associ- 
ations and licensing boards. 

The M.S. in Taxation program is schedu/ed especial- 
ly for students who are employed full time. Courses 
are offered during the late afternoon and evening. 
Most students enroll on a part-time basis, taking two 
courses (6 units) per semester. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an un- 
dergraduate degree in business administration. The 
10 courses (30 units) may be completed in one year 
(full time) or 2 1/2 years (part time). In addition to 
six courses in the field of taxation, there are three 
electives and a terminal, research-project course. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange 
County accredited by the American Assembly of 
Collegiate Schools of Business. This assures a rig- 
orous program, a well qualified faculty, high stan- 
dards for students, and access to an extensive li- 
brary system. The qualifications of the M.S. In 
Taxation faculty include advanced degrees in taxa- 
tion, accounting, and law; practical tax experience; 
and professional standing as CPA’s and attorneys. 

Most graduate courses In the School of Business 
Administration and Economics require “classified 
SBAE status’’ and are open only to students with 
classified standing in the M.B.A., M.S. in Accountan- 
cy, M.S. in Taxation, M.S. In Management Science, 
or M.A. In Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be 
admitted to postbaccalaureate unclassified stand- 
ing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution 
accredited by a regional accrediting association, 
or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 
semester units attempted and in good standing at 
last college attended. 


194 


Accounting 


Note: Postbaccal^ureate unclassified students may 
enroll in undergraduate courses (100 thru 400 level) 
but are generally ineligible for graduate business 
courses (500 level). Such students may wish to take 
undergraduate courses which are necessary to 
meet the requirements for classified standing (see 
below). Upon completing the requirements, the stu- 
dent may file an “Application for Change of Academ- 
ic ObjectiveGraduate” requesting admission to the 
M.S. in Taxation program. Admission to the universi- 
ty as a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does 
nof constitute admission to the M.S. In Taxation pro- 
gram, does not confer priority, nor does it guarantee 
future admission. Students planning to apply for ad- 
mission to the M.S. in Taxation program should con- 
fer with the graduate adviser in the School of Busi- 
ness Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be admitted to the M.S. in Taxation pro- 
gram with conditionally classified standing: 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate 
Management Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to 
yield a score of at least 960 according to one of 
the following formulas. Due to limited facilities and 
resources in the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics, a higher score may be re- 
quired of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
+ GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or 
GMAT is below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
-I- GMAT - 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units 
of course work* then score = (GPA x 200) -I- 
GMAT - 100. 

* All work within any given quarter or semester must 
be included even though that will result in more than 
60 semester units. The units to be included in the 
last 60 semester units may come only from the fol- 
lowing: ( 1) work taken in postbaccalaureate status 
during the last seven years toward fulfilling M.S. in 
Taxation course work requirements: (2) units taken 
under a prescribed remedial program agreed to by 
the Associate Dean, School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics: (3) units earned prior to the 
bachelor’s degree. 

Note: To be admitted as conditionally classified stu- 
dents, applicants must be within three courses (or 
10 units) of meeting the requirements for classified 
standing (see below). Such courses must be com- 
pleted within the first 12 months of study. Students 
who do not do so will not be allowed to continue in 
the program. Conditionally classified students may 
take a limited number of graduate courses (500 le- 
vel) subject to the approval of the graduate adviser 
of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Applicants with a bachelor’s degree in a 
field other than business administration (or whose 
deficiency is greater than three courses) should ap- 
ply for the Master of Business Administration pro- 
gram. Upon completion of the M.B.A. foundation 
courses and Business Administration 695 (or 596), 
an application for a change of objective may be filed 
for transfer to the M.S. in Taxation program. 


(Note: The requirement of Business Administration 
695 or 596 does not apply to students admitted to 
the program in fall 1983 or earlier.) 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be advanced to classified standing. Such 
students are eligible to take graduate courses for 
which they qualify. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business ad- 
ministration which meets the requirements stated 
in this catalog for such degrees, and Accounting 
308, Concepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting 
(or an equivalent course or work experience). The 
degree must include calculus and computer pro- 
gramming equivalent to passing Mathematics 
135, Business Calculus (3 units), and Manage- 
ment Science 264, Introduction to Computer Pro- 
gramming (2 units), with grades of at least C. 
Courses in the major are to be no more than 
seven years old and must have at least a 3.0 (B) 
GPA. Courses with grades lower than C must be 
repeated. 

6. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course 
work beyond the baccalaureate degree. At least 21 
of the 30 units required for the degree must be at the 
graduate level. A GPA of 3.0 (B) is required. Any 
study plan course in which a D is received must be 
repeated and must receive at least a C grade re- 
gardless of the overall GPA of the student. 

Required Tax Course 

Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice and Pro- 
cedures (3) 

Electives in Taxation and Related Fields 

Five courses (15 units) to be selected in consulta- 
tion with, and approved by, the student’s adviser. 

Available courses include but are not limited to: 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 
Accounting 508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 
Accounting 672 Seminar in Taxation of 
Corporations and Shareholders (3) 
Accounting 673 Seminar in Taxation of 
Property Transactions (3) 

Accounting 674 Seminar In Taxation of 
International Business Operations (3) 
Accounting 576 Seminar in Estate, (31ft and 
Inheritance Taxes and Estate Planning (3) 
Accounting 576 Seminar In State & Local 
Taxation (3) 

Accounting 677 Seminar in Taxation of 
Employee Compensation (3) 

Accounting 578 Seminar in Taxation of 
Partnerships (3) 

Other Electives 

Courses are to be selected in consultation with, and 
approved by, the student’s adviser. 

One course (3 units) in either economics or political 
science and two courses (6 units) in either business 
or non-business fields. 


Accounting 


Note: recommended courses in economics and polit- 
ical science include Econ 617, Poli Sci 421, 519, 
628. 

Terminal Evaluation 

Accounting 597 Project (3) 


Accounting Courses 

201A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A must be taken before 20 IB. 
Accounting concepts and techniques essential to the admin- 
istration of a business enterprise; measuring and communi- 
cating economic information; analyzing and recording finan- 
cial transactions; preparation, analysis and interpretation of 
financial statements; introduction to managerial accounting; 
product costing; analysis and techniques for aiding manage- 
ment decisions; management control; interaction with fi- 
nance, management science, interpersonal relations, moti- 
vation, and data-information systems. (Not open to 
freshmen) 

301A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisites for 301 A: Accounting 20 1B, a passing score 
on the accounting qualifying examination, and completion of 
all lower division business administration core courses with 
grades of at least C In each course. Prerequisite for 30 IB: 
A grade of C or better in Accounting 301 A. Accounting theo- 
ry; preparation of income statements, balance sheets and 
statements of changes in financial position; present value 
and amount concepts; assets, liabilities and stockholders 
equity; price-level accounting; pensions; leases; earnings 
per share; financial statement analysis; accounting changes 
and error analysis. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB, a passing score on the ac- 
counting qualifying examination, and completion of ail lower 
division business administration core courses with grades of 
at least C in each course, ora grade of C or better In 301 A. 
Accounting information for management of manufacturing en- 
terprises; cost records; cost behavior and allocation; prod- 
uct costing and inventory valuation; flexible budgeting; stan- 
dard costs; responsibility accounting; cost planning and 
control; and operating decision analysis. 

308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB, a passing score on the ac- 
counting qualifying examination, and completion of ail lower 
division business administration core courses with grades of 
at least C In each course, ora grade of C or better in 301 A. 
Provisions, legislative history and implications of the federal 
income tax. 

401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 30 IB. Business combinations; 
meaning, usefulness and methodology of consolidated finan- 
cial statements; investments in non-subsidiary affiliates and 
corporate joint ventures; consolidated financial statements 
for overseas units of U.S. -based multinational companies; 
translations of foreign currencies. 

402 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 30 IB and 302. The auditing stan- 
dards and procedures used by financial and operational au- 
ditors. Management Information and computer systems, in- 
ternal control, audit evidence, professional responsibilities 


and legal liabilities, standards of reporting financial informa- 
tion. 

403 Accounting for Governmental & Nonprofit Entities (3) 
Prerequisite: Accounting 201B or 511. Fund accounting as 
applied to governmental and nonprofit entities; state and 
federal governments, municipalities, hospitals and universi- 
ties. Budgets, tax levies, revenues and appropriations, ex- 
penditures and encumbrances, various types of funds, and 
accounting statements. 

407 Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 A and 302 and Management 
Science 265 or equivalent. Alternative accounting systems 
used for the collection, organization and presentation of in- 
formation. Theory and practice of Information processing, 
organizational, behavioral and mechanical. 

408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Federal income tax as it ap- 
plies to corporations, partnerships, fiduciaries, and federal 
estate and gift taxes as they apply to taxable transfers. 

470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. The methodology of tax re- 
search including case studies; the management of a tax 
practice; administration procedures governing tax contro- 
versies; rights and obligations of taxpayers and tax practi- 
tioners. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 30 IB (may be taken concurrent- 
ly), Accounting 302, a major in accounting, consent of the 
department internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 
2.5 GPA and one semester In residence at the university. 
Planned and supervised work experience. May be repeated 
for credit up to a total of six units. Credit /No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval of department 
chair. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to 
pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for 
credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 30 IB, classified SBAE status and 
consent of instructor. The effects of professional, govern- 
mental, business, and social forces on the evolution of ac- 
counting theory. 

503 Seminar in Contemporary Accounting Problems (3) 
Prerequisite: classified M.S. in Accounting status or consent 
of instructor. Current issues in financial reporting including 
pronouncements by the Financial Accounting Star.dards 
Board and the Securities and Exchange Commission. Cover- 
age of topics will change as new issues in accounting 
emerge. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and classified SBAE status. 
Auditing theory and practices; professional ethics; auditing 
standards; Securities and Exchange Commission and stock 
exchange regulations; auditor’s legal liability; statement 
trends and techniques. 

506 Seminar in Professional Accounting Communications (3) 
Prerequisite: classified M.S. In Accounting status or consent 
of instructor. Compilation and composition of accounting re- 
ports and client presentations relating to accountants’ work- 
ing papers, client engagement letters, management adviso- 
ry reports and prospectuses. 


Accounting 


507 Seminar in Accounting Information Systems (3) 
Prerequisite: Accounting 407, or equivalent with consent of 
instructor. Case studies of computer based accounting sys- 
tems used by organizations such as universities, banks, in- 
dustrial corporations and CPA firms. Emphasis on account- 
ing information, reports and Internal controls. 

508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Substantive provisions of federal 
law; tax planning from a corporate viewpoint; case studies 
of the effect of federal tax law on business decisions. 

510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Accumulation, organi- 
zation, and interpretation of financial and quantitative data 
relevant to the activities of corporate business enterprise. 

51 1 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 1B or 510, consent of Instructor 
and classified SBAE status. Accounting information for man- 
agement decisions: elements of manufacturing, distribution 
and service costs; cost systems; standard costs; cost 
reports; cost analysis. 

518 Seminar in International Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201B or 51 1 and classified SBAE 
status. Comparative analysis of accounting principles and 
practices outside the United States; international financial 
accounting standards; current problems of international fi- 
nancial reporting, accounting planning and control for inter- 
national operations; multinational companies. 

521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302 or 51 1; classified SBAE sta- 
tus and consent of instructor. Integrative aspects of ac- 
counting, financial, and quantitative data for managerial de- 
cision-making; long-term, short-term profit planning; 
budgetary control; cost analysis; financial analysis and plan- 
ning; taxation; and transfer pricing. 

572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations and 
Shareholders (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of Instructor. Federal taxation relating to corpo- 
rations; organizing, distributions, liquidations and reorgani- 
zations. 


573 Seminar in Taxation of Property Transactions (3) 
Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to sales, 
exchanges and other transfers. 

574 Seminar in Taxation of International Business 
Operations (3) 

Prerequisites. Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to U.S. citi- 
zens and corporations with foreign source Income and of for- 
eign persons with U.S. source income; planning for foreign 
operations. 

575 Seminar in Estate, Gift, Inheritance Taxes and Estate 
Planning (3) 

Prerequisites; Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal and California death taxes 
and the planning of personal estates. 

576 Seminar in State and Local Taxation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Application of interstate income al- 
locations; multi-state tax compact; separate v. apportion- 
ment accounting; foreign country sourced Income. Also, Ca- 
lifornia taxes as applied to businesses and individuals. 

577 Seminar in Taxation of Employee Compensation (3) 
Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of Instructor. Federal taxation relating to employ- 
ee compensation including pensions and profit sharing, 
stock options, ESOP’s, IRA’s, Keogh’s, maximum tax 5-year 
averaging, death benefits, group term life, etc. 

578 Seminar in Taxation of Partnerships (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to partner- 
ships, estates, trusts and other special entities. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor 
and approval by department chair. May be repeated for 
credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


Accounting 


Business Administration 
Degrees 

INTRODUCTION 

This major prepares students for entry level posi- 
tions in business and administration in both the pri- 
vate and public sectors. Career opportunities range 
from accounting, cost analysis, marketing research 
and statistical forecasting to real estate, personnel, 
sales and information systems. This curriculum also 
provides a foundation for advanced study. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

All of the following requirements must be met for the 
degree. Students must earn a grade of at least C in 
each course listed below. However, a C average will 
be acceptable in the required concentration 
courses. For assistance in interpreting these re- 
quirements contact the Business Advising Center. 

Required Lower-Division Core Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

(Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (6), 
may be substituted for Economics 201 and Econom- 
ics 202.) 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course In Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 

Accounting 201A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 

Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Manag Sci 266 Introduction to Information Sys- 
tems and Computer Programming (3) 

Note: Manag Sci 264, Computer Programming (2), 
and Manag Sci 263, Introduction to Information Sys- 
tems and Micro-Computer Applications (2), may be 
substituted for Manag Sci 265. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination In Writing Proficien- 
cy (EWP) 

Business Administration 301 Business Writing (3) 

Note: Business Administration 301 Business Writing 
should be taken before registering for any 400-level 
SBAE courses. 

Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

Business administration majors shall not enroll in 
any required upper-division core course until they 
have completed all of the required lower-division 
core courses with a grade of at least C in each 
course. Students desiring to enroll in required upper- 
division core courses while concurrently completing 
the lastoi their required lower-division core courses 
may select only Business Administration 301, Busi- 
ness Writing, Economics 310, Intermediate Microe- 
conomic Analysis (or 320, Intermediate Macroeco- 


Business Administration 


nomic Analysis), and/or Management Science 361, 
Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and 
Economics. 

The following are required: 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis 
(3) 

or Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analy- 
sis (3) 

Note: Management concentration requires 
Econ 310. 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Management 339 Managing Business Operations 
and Organizations (3) 

Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 
Marketing 361 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods 
In Business and Economics (4) 

Manag Sci 362 Management Science Methods In 
Business and Economics (3) 
or Manag Sci 363 Management Science (3) 

Required Concentration Courses 

A minimum of 18 units of course work Is required in 
one concentration. See listing of concentration re- 
quirements below. 

Required Capstone Core Course 

After completing all lower and upper-division core 
courses, take: 

Management 449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 
Other Requirements, Grades and Residence 

Other subjects. Complete at least 60 units of 
courses in subjects other than business administra- 
tion or economics. Complete all university require- 
ments for the bachelor’s degree. 

Grade Point Average (GPA). Maintain at least a 2.0 
GPA (C average) In all university courses and in the 
concentration courses. Earn at least a C grade in 
each course required for the major (other than con- 
centration courses). 

Grade option. Take all required core courses and all 
required concentration courses in the School of 
Business Administration and Economics for a letter 
grade (A,B,C,D,F). The CredIt/No Credit grading op- 
tion may not be used for these courses, and a grade 
of CR (credit) will not satisfy the requirements for 
the degree. Exception: Courses in calculus may be 
taken under the Credit/No Credit grading option, al- 
though courses taken to meet general education re- 
quirements must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence. At least nine units of courses in the area 
of concentration and at least 16 of the last 24 units 
of courses must be taken in residence at the School 
of Business Administration and Economics. Students 
also must fulfill university residence requirements. 

Concentrations for the B.A. in Business 
Administration 

Business administration majors must complete the 


requirements of one concentration in addition to the 
degree requirements shown above. 

Accounting Concentration (21 units) 

All students with an accounting concentration are re- 
quired to take the courses shown below. Before tak- 
ing these courses, students must first complete all 
of the required lower division core courses with a 
grade of at least C in each course and must receive 
a passing score on the Accounting Qualifying Exam. 
The examination must be passed during the two se- 
mesters prior to the semester of class enrollment. 
Exceptions to the requirement of completing lower 
division business core courses may be granted to 
students with non-business majors. 

Accounting 301A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 
Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Accounting 308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax 
Accounting (3) 

Accounting 402 Auditing (3) 

Accounting 407 Accounting Info Systems (3) 

and one of the following courses: 

Accounting 401 Advanced Accounting (3) 
Accounting 403 Accounting for Governmental 
and Nonprofit Entitles (3) 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 
Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice 
and Procedures (3) 

Business Economics Concentration (18 units) 

All students with an economics concentration are re- 
quired to take: 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis 
(3) 

as part of their business administration core require- 
ments. In addition, the concentration requires: 

Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis 
(3) 

Econ 410 Government and Business (3) 

and 12 units of upper-division economics electives, 
3 units of which must be at the 400-level. 

Students interested in economics also should con- 
sider the Bachelor of Arts in Economics. 

Finance Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a finance concentration must 
choose one of the following emphases: 

Financial Institutions Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and 
Computer Applications (3) 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 
Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 
Finance 426 Commercial Bank and Financial 
Institution Management (3) 

Finance 440 Money and Capital Markets (3) 

and 3 units of upper division finance electives 
(other than Finance 310) 


Business Administration 


Financial Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3) 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 
Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 

and two of the following courses: 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 
Finance 432 Financial Forecasting and 
Budgeting (3) 

Finance 433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

and 3 units of upper division finance electives 
(other than Finance 310) 

Investments and Financial Planning Emphasis 
(18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3) 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 
Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 


Contract Management Emphasis (18 units) 
Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 347 Business Law (3) 
or Management 348 Business Law (3) 
Management 436 Government Contracts (3) 
and 6 units of elective course work to be determined 
in consultation with a departmental adviser. 

Entrepreneurial Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 345 Small Business Management (3) 
or Management 448 Seminar in Small Business 
Consulting (3) 

Management 349 Law for the Small Business (3) 
or Management 444 Project Management (3) 
and 6 units of elective course work to be determined 
in consultation with a departmental adviser. 


and three of the following courses: 

Finance 360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Finance 410 Theory and Practice of Personal 
Financial Planning (3) 

Finance 442 Advanced Investment Analysis (3) 
Finance 444 Options and Futures (3) 

Finance 450 Real Estate Investment Strategy (3) 
or Finance 455 Real Estate Investment 
Analysis (3) 

Notes: Finance 450 or Finance 455 (but not both) 
may be used to satisfy the requirements for this 
emphasis. Also, in addition to the requirements 
shown above, students are encouraged to take 
Accounting 308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax. 

Real Estate Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3) 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 
Finance 351 Real Estate and Urban Land 
Analysis (3) 

Finance 452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Finance 453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

and one of the following courses: 

Finance 450 Real Estate Investment Strategy (3) 
Finance 451 Real Estate/Land Use Law- Case 
Studies (3) 

Finance 454 Real Estate and Urban 
Development (3) 

Finance 455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 
Finance 456 Property Development and Real 
Estate Policy Analysis (3) 

Management Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a management concentration are 
required to take: 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

as part of their business administration core require- 
ments. In addition, students must choose one of the 
following emphases. 


General Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 347 Business Law (3) 
or Management 440 Emerging Issues In 
Management (3) 

Management 447 Management Decision Games (3) 
and 6 units of elective course work to be determined 
In consultation with a departmental adviser. 


Operations Management Emphasis (18 units) 


Management 342 
Management 421 
Management 422 
(3) 

Management 445 
(3) 


Production Operations (3) 
Operations Systems Design (3) 
Production and Inventory Control 

Operations Policy and Strategy 


and two 3 unit electives chosen in consultation with 
a departmental adviser. 


Human Resources Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 433 Advanced Topics in Human 
Resource Management (3) 

Management 441 Labor-Management Relations 
(3) 

and 6 units of elective course work to be determined 
In consultation with a departmental adviser. 


Organizational Behavior Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 439 Organizational Change and 
Development (3) 

Management 443 Individual, Interpersonal and 
Group Dynamics for Management (3) 
and 6 units of elective course work to be determined 
in consultation with a departmental adviser. 


Business Administration 


Management Information Systems Concentration 
(22 units) 

All students with a management information systems 
concentration are required to take: 

Management 344 Intro to Systems Concepts (3) 
Manag Sci 270 File Concepts and COBOL 
Programming (4) 

Manag Sci 300 Elements of Information Systems 
Design and Data Communication (3) 

Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Manag Sci 408 Data Base Manag Systems (3) 
Management 464 MIS Analysis and Design (3) 
and3 units of upper-division electives to be selected 
from the following courses: 

Comp Sci 423 Language Processor Tech (3) 
Comp Sci 469 Micro-Computer Software Sys (3) 
Management 444 Project Management (3) 
Management 494 Seminar in Management 
Information Systems (3) 

Manag Sci 302 Software Systems for Decision 
Support (3) 

Manag Sci 310 Adv COBOL Programming (3) 
Manag Sci 333 File Structures in BASIC 
Programming (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 
Manag Sci 411 Data Processing: Small 
Computers (3) 

Manag Sci 416 Computer Perform Evaluation (3) 
Manag Sci 418 Privacy, Security and Data Pro- 
cessing (3) 

Manag Sci 448 Computer Simulation in Business 
and Economics (3) 

Management Science Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a management science concentra- 
tion are required to take: 

Manag Sci 440 Deterministic Models in 
Management Science (4) 

Manag Sci 441 Probabilistic Models in 
Management Science (4) 

Manag Sci 461 Statistical Theory for Management 
Science (4) 

and 6 units of upper-division management science 
electives chosen from the following: 

Information Systems Courses 

Manag Sci 300 Elements of Information System 
Design and Data Communication (3) 

Manag Sci 302 Software Systems for Decision 
Support (3) 

Manag Sci 310 Advanced COBOL 
Programming (3) 

Manag Sci 404 Analysis of Information 
Systems (3) 

Manag Sci 408 Data Base Management 
Systems (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 
Manag Sci 411 Data Processing: Small 
Computers (3) 

Manag Sci 416 Computer Performance 
Evaluation (3) 

Manag Sci 418 Privacy, Security and Data Pro- 
cessing (3) 


Operations Research Course 

Manag Sci 448 Computer Simulation in Business 
and Economics (3) 

Statistics Courses 

Manag Sci 420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 
Manag Sci 422 Surveys and Sampling Design and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 
Marketing Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a marketing concentration must 
choose one of the following emphases: 

Advertising Management Emphasis (18 units) 


Marketing 364 
Marketing 370 
Marketing 379 
Marketing 464 
Marketing 469 
and 3 units of 


Principles of Advertising (3) 
Consumer Behavior (3) 

Marketing Research Methods (3) 
Advertising Management (3) 
Marketing Problems (3) 
upper-division marketing electives 


Marketing Management Emphasis (18 units re- 
quired) 


A 3-unlt behavioral course (Marketing 364, 366 or 
370) 

Marketing 369 Industrial Marketing (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 
or Marketing 467 Quantitative Marketing 
Analysis (3) 


Marketing 469 Marketing Problems (3) 

and 6 units of upper-division marketing electives 


Marketing Research Emphasis (18 units) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 
Marketing 469 Marketing Problems (3) 

Marketing 479 Research Problems in 
Marketing (3) 

and 6 units of upper-division marketing electives 


Industrial Marketing Emphasis (18 units) 


Marketing 366 
Marketing 369 
Marketing 379 
Marketing 469 
Marketing 469 
and one of the 
Marketing 368 
Marketing 466 
Marketing 467 
Marketing 468 
Marketing 460 


Professional Selling (3) 

Industrial Marketing (3) 

Marketing Research Methods (3) 
Marketing Problems (3) 

Industrial Marketing Strategy (3) 
following courses: 

Physical Distribution (3) 
Management of the Sales Force (3) 
Quantitative Marketing Analysis (3) 
International Marketing Policies (3) 
Marketing for Nonprofit Qrg (3) 


Retailing Emphasis (18 units) 


Principles of Retailing (3) 
Consumer Behavior (3) 

Marketing Research Methods (3) 
Retailing Management (3) 
Marketing Problems (3) 


Marketing 362 
Marketing 370 
Marketing 379 
Marketing 466 
Marketing 469 
and 3-unit upper-division marketing elective 


Sales Management Emphasis (18 units) 


Business Administration 


Marketing 356 Professional Selling (3) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 
Marketing 455 Management of the Sales Force (3) 
Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 
and 3-unlt upper-division marketing elective 

International Marketing Emphasis (18 units) 


A 3-unit behavioral course (Marketing 354, 356, or 
370) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 
Marketing 458 International Marketing Policies (3) 
Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 
and 6 units of upper-division marketing electives 


MINOR IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

The minor provides a basic understanding of the role 
of business in society and the methods used by busi- 
ness. This curriculum also provides a basis for ad- 
vanced study. A working knowledge of algebra is 
necessary for several of the required courses. 

Business administration minors shall not enroll in any 
required upper-division course (in the minor) until 
they have completed all of the required lower- 
division courses (In the minor) with a grade of at 
least C In each course. Students must earn a grade 
of at least C in each course listed below. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
or Economics 210 Principles of Economics (5) 
instead of Econ 201 and Econ 202 
Accounting 201A.B Elementary Accounting (3.3) 
Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Management Science 265 Intro to Information 
Systems and Computer Programing (3)* 
or Sociology 289 Computer Methods In the Social 
Sciences (3) 

•Recommended for students who plan on taking additional electives in 
Management Science 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Special Notice: Enrollment in these courses requires 
the completion of all lower-division minor require- 
ments with a grade of C or better In each course. 

Management 339 Managing Business Operations 
and Organizations (3) 

or Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 
Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Economics Majors Minoring in Business Administra^ 
tion: Economics Majors can complete a minor in 
business administration by taking Management 246, 
Finance 320, Management 339 or 340 and Market- 
ing 351. All other required courses for the minor are 
required for the major in Economics. 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE 

This is the only M.B.A. degree program in Orange 
County accredited by the American Assembly of 
Collegiate Schools of Business. This assures a rig- 
orous, in-depth program, covering the full spectrum 


of business administration. Accreditation also indi- 
cates a well-qualified faculty, high standards for stu- 
dents, and access to an extensive library system. 

Programs of Study 

The School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics offers two plans for the M.B.A. degree. 

The M.B.A. Generalist Plan is designed for students 
with little or no course work in business administra- 
tion. The curriculum surveys the entire field of busi- 
ness administration, preparing students for general 
management responsibilities. The plan is structured, 
keeping students together for most of their classes, 
and must be completed within three years. Courses 
may not be waived, although limited substitution of 
more advanced courses Is allowed. This format re- 
quires a substantial and sustained commitment from 
students over the three-year period. Students who 
do not complete the curriculum within three years 
may change to the M.B.A. Specialist Plan. 

The M.B.A. specialist Plan is designed for students 
with recent course work (or an undergraduate de- 
gree) in business administration; for those who wish 
to Include a specialized area of concentration in 
their curriculum; and/or for those unable to follow 
the structure of the M.B.A. Generalist Plan. Some 
courses may be waived on the basis of equivalent 
undergraduate course work. The program Is not 
structured, and five years are allowed for comple- 
tion. The areas of concentration are accounting, 
business economics, finance, international busi- 
ness, management, management science and mar- 
keting. 

The M.B.A. program is schedu/ed especially for stu- 
dents who are employed full time. Courses are of- 
fered during the late afternoon and evening. Most 
students enroll on a part-time basis, taking two 
courses (6-7 units) per semester. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business 
Administration and Economics require “classified 
SBAE status” and are open only to students with 
classified standing In the M.B.A., M.S. In Accountan- 
cy, M.S. in Management Science, M.S. in Taxation 
or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be 
admitted to postbaccalaureate-unclassified stand- 
ing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’^s degree from an appropri- 
ately accredited institution, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 In the last 60 
semester units attempted and in good standing at 
last college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate-unclassified students may 
enroll in undergraduate courses (100 thru 400 level) 
but are generally ineligible for graduate business 
courses (500 level). Such students may wish to take 
undergraduate courses which are necessary to 
meet the requirements for classified standing (see 
below). Upon completing the requirements, the stu- 
dent may file an “Application for Change of Academ- 
ic Objective-Graduate” requesting admission to the 
M.B.A. program. Admission to the university as a 


Business Administration 


postbaccalaureate-unclassified student does not 
constitute admission to the M.B.A. program, does 
not confer priority, nor does it guarantee future ad- 
mission. Students planning to apply for admission to 
the M.B.A. program should confer with the graduate 
adviser in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be admitted to the M.B.A. program with 
conditionally classified standing; 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate 
Management Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to 
yield a score of at least 950 according to one of 
the following formulas. Due to limited facilities and 
resources In the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics, a higher score may be re- 
quired of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.6 and 
GMAT is at least 460, then score = (GPA x 200) 
+ GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or 
GMAT is below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
+ GMAT - 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units 
of course work* then score = (GPA x 200) -I- 
GMAT - 100.* 

*AII work within any given quarter or semester must 
be included even though that will result in more than 
60 semester units. The units to be included in the 
last 60 semester units may come only from the fol- 
lowing: ( 1) Work taken in postbaccalaureate status 
during the last seven years towards fulfilling M.B.A. 
coursework requirements: (2) units taken under a 
prescribed remedial program agreed to by the Asso- 
ciate Dean and Director of Graduate Studies, School 
of Business Administration and Economics; (3) units 
earned prior to the bachelor's degree. 

Note: Conditionally classified students may take lim- 
ited number of graduate courses (500 level), subject 
to the approval of the graduate adviser of the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. 
Students are expected to advance promptly to clas- 
sified standing. In particular, any deficiencies In cal- 
culus or computer programming must be removed 
during the first 12 months of study. Students who do 
not do so will not be allowed to continue in the pro- 
gram. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be advanced to classified standing. Such 
students are eligible to take graduate courses for 
which they are qualified. 

4. Proficiency in calculus and computer program- 
ming equivalent to passing Mathematics 135, 
Business Calculus (3 units), and Management Sci- 
ence 264, Introduction to Computer Programming 
(2 units), with grades of at least C. Students with 
work experience In these fields may demonstrate 
proficiency by passing a challenge examination 
and should consult the chair of the Management 
Science Department for details. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum — M.B.A. /Generalist Plan 

The M.B.A. /Generalist curriculum includes 15 


courses (47 units). Two specified courses must be 
taken each spring and fall semester for six semes- 
ters. The remaining three courses may be taken at 
the student’s convenience, during summer school 
and/or regular semesters, and must be completed 
within the three years allowed. 

Any deficiencies in calculus or computer program- 
ming must be removed before starting the program. 
No courses may be waived, although limited substi- 
tutions of more advanced courses in the same field 
will be allowed. Any study plan course In which a D 
grade Is received must be repeated, and must re- 
ceive at least a C grade, regardless of the overall 
GPA of the student. 

Foundation Courses 

Accounting 610 Financial Accounting (3) 
Economics 515 The Price System and Resource 
Allocation (4) 

Finance 517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Management 516 Organizational Theory and 
Management of Operations (3) 

Management 618 Legal Environment of 
Business (2) 

Manag Scl 613 Statistical Analysis and 
Forecasting Techniques (4) 

Manag Sci 514 Business Modeling and Solution 
Techniques (4) 

Marketing 519 Marketing Management (3) 
Advanced Courses 

Accounting 51 1 Seminar in Managerial Accounting 
(3) 

Econ 521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 
or Econ 522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 
Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial 
Management (3) 

Management 524 Seminar in Organizational 
Behavior and Administration (3) 

Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Terminal Courses 

Business Admin 596 Seminar In Business 
Administration (3) 

Business Admin 596 Management Game (3) 
Terminal Evaluation 
Comprehensive Examination 

Students who are unable to complete the M.B.A./ 
Generalist Plan within three years may change to the 
M.B.A./ Specialist Plan. This change will result In 
deleting Business Administration 595 (3 units) from 
the study plan and adding an area of concentration 
(12 units), a net Increase of 9 units. 

Curriculum — M.B.A. /Specialist Plan 

The M.B.A. /Specialist curriculum includes a concen- 
tration in a specialized area and requires from 33 to 
56 units of graduate course work. Students with a 
bachelor’s degree in business administration may 
be able to complete the program with the minimum 
of 33 units, whereas those with little or no recent 
course work in business administration may require 


Business Administration 


the full 66 units. Any deficiencies in calculus or com- 
puter programming must be removed within one 
year. Any study plan course in which a D grade is re- 
ceived must be repeated, and must receive at least 
a C grade, regardless of the overall GPA of the stu- 
dent. 

Foundation Courses 

Foundation courses may be waived on the basis of 
equivalent undergraduate course work, providing 
that the equivalent courses are no more than seven 
years old, have grades of at least C, and a GPA of 
at least B. 

Accounting 510 Financial Accounting (3) 
Economics 616 The Price System and Resource 
Allocation (4) 

Finance 617 Managerial Finance (3) 

Management 616 Organizational Theory and 
Management of Operations (3) 

Management 618 Legal Environment of Business 
( 2 ) 

Manag Sci 613 Statistical Analysis and 
Forecasting Techniques (4) 

Manag Sci 614 Business Modeling and 
Solution Techniques (4) 

Marketing 519 Marketing Management (3) 

A list of equivalent undergraduate courses is avail- 
able from the graduate adviser. In most cases, stu- 
dents with a recent bachelor’s degree in business 
administration from an accredited university will be 
able to waive all foundation courses. 


Advanced Courses 


All seminars in this group must be taken at the grad- 
uate level. The management science seminar will be 
waived for students who have taken both Manag Sci 
613 and 514 (but not for students who have taken 
Manag Sci 361 and/or 362). Students with a con- 
centration in international business are required to 
take only five of the following courses: 

Accounting 511 Sem in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Note: Students who have satisfactorlally completed 
a course in cost accounting must substitute Ac- 
counting 521 Sem in Administrative Accounting (3). 

Econ 622 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 
or Econ 621 Macroeconomic Theory and 
Policy (3) 

(Note: Economics 621 is not open to students 
with credit In intermediate macroeconomics) 
Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Man- 
agement (3) 

Management 624 Seminar In Organizational Be- 
havior and Administration (3) 

Marketing 626 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 
Manag Sci 526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis, 
and Experimental Design (3) 
or Manag Sci 560 Special Topics on Information 
Systems Design and Data Communication (3) 
or Manag Sci 560 Adv Deterministic Models (3) 
or Manag Sci 661 Adv Probabilistic Models (3) 


Concentration Courses 
(except international business) 

12 units In one area of concentration: 

Accounting Management 

Business Economics Management Science 

Finance Marketing 

At least 6 units of the concentration courses must be 
taken at the 500-level. Concentration courses are to 
be approved by the department chair concerned, or 
designee within the department, and the Associate 
Dean, Graduate Programs, School of Business Ad- 
ministration and Economics. 

Note: Students choosing the accounting concentra- 
tion may have to take Accounting 301 A, B, Intermedi- 
ate Accounting, and/or Accounting 308, Concepts 
of Federal Income Tax Accounting, as prerequisites 
to their concentration courses. 

Concentration Courses — International Business 

Five of the following courses (16 units) are required, 
including at least 9 units at the graduate (500) level. 
(Note that students with an international business 
concentration take only five of the courses listed 
above under Advanced Courses.) 

Accounting 518 Seminar In International 
Accounting (3) 

Economics 41 1 International Trade (3) 

Finance 670 Seminar in International Financial 
Management (3) 

Management 547 Comparative Management (3) 
or Management 648 Seminar in International 
Management (3) 

Marketing 458 International Marketing Policies (3) 
orMarketing 568 Seminar In International 
Marketing (3) 

Elective (3 units) to be approved by the international 
business advisor. Recommended electives include 
selected courses In History, Political Science, Com- 
munications, Geography and Chicano Studies. 

Terminal Requirements 

Business Administration 696 Management Game (3) 
Comprehensive Examination 

Note: In exceptional cases, a thesis (Business Ad- 
ministration 598, Thesis) may be substituted for the 
comprehensive examination. See the graduate ad- 
viser for details. 


Business Administration 
Courses 

For Information about Business Administration 301, 
consult the Coordinator Business Writing Program In 
the Business Writing Office, LH-530. For information 
about Business Administration 696 and 696, consult 
the graduate adviser In the Business Advising Cen- 
ter, LH-700. 


Business Administration 


301 Business Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: English 101 or equivalent (with a grade of C 
or better). Principles of effective writing in business. Exten- 
sive practices in various forms of business writing. Case 
studies. Satisfies the classroom portion of the upper- 
division writing requirement for business and economics ma- 
jors. 

301W Business Writing Workshop (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent (with a grade of C or 
better). Principles of effective writing In business. Extensive 
practice in various forms of business writing. Case studies. 
Uses word processing facilities in computer lab. Satisfies 
the classroom portion of the upper-division writing require- 
ment for business and economic majors. (2 hours lecture: 2 
hours activity.) 

499 Independent Study 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified stu- 
dents desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 


595 Seminar in Business Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, within nine units of 
completing study plan. Business administration capstone 
course integrating functional areas to formulate business 
policy. Micro and macro current issues are explored in detail 
illustrating the complexities and broad responsibilities of 
business management. 

596 Management Game (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status and within six units of 
completion of the graduate study plan. Policy decisions us- 
ing the principles and practices of the several disciplines of 
business administration. Teams plan and execute strategies 
and analyze the impacts of their decisions under uncertain- 
ty. Not open to students on academic probation. 


598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisities: classified SBAE status and consent of asso- 
ciate dean. Individual research under supervision. See "The- 
ses and Projects" in this catalog for university requirements. 


Business Administration 


Department of 
Economics 

Department Chair: Jane Hall 

Director, Center for Economic Education: 

John Lafky 

Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 702 
Center for Economic Education — Langsdorf 
Hall 530 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration In Business Economics 
Bachelor of Arts in Economics 
Minor in Economics 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Business Economics 
Master of Arts in Economics 
Faculty 

Robert Ayanian, Kwang-wen Chu, James Dietz, 
Peter Formuzis, Andrew Gill, Ken Goldin, 

Jane Hall, Walter Hettich, Lionel Kalish, 

Sidney Klein, John Lafky, Maryanna Lanier, 

Stewart Long, Robert Michaels, Brian Moehring, 
Gary Pickersglll, Joyce PIckersgill, Anil Puri, 

Guy Schick, Eric Solberg, Murray Wolfson, 

David Wong 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center provides information 
on admission, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments; registration and grading procedures; resi- 
dence and similar academic matters. In addition, all 
economics majors should see a faculty adviser in 
the Department of Economics for Information on ca- 
reer opportunities and advanced study. Undergradu- 
ates should consult the department office for the 
name of their faculty adviser. Graduate students 
should consult the graduate coordinator, 
Eric Solberg. 

INTRODUCTION 

As a scholarly discipline, economics is over two 
centuries old, dating back to the French physiocrats 
and Adam Smith In the 18th century. The nature of 
economic analysis has been described by John 
Maynard Keynes as “...a method rather than a doc- 
trine, an apparatus of the mind, a technique of think- 
ing which helps its possessors to draw correct con- 
clusions.” 

Economic methods are used to study a basic ques- 
tion which faces all societies: how should limited re- 
sources be used to produce goods and how should 
that production be distributed? Not all wants can be 


Economics 


satisfied because resources and knowledge are lim- 
ited. Therefore, societies are faced with choices. 
These choices are made in different ways: by cus- 
tom; by command and centralized control; or by a 
system of markets and prices as in our mixed econo- 
my. Economists examine alternative solutions to the 
basic economic problem by analyzing costs and 
benefits of changing existing patterns of resource 
use. 

Economists work in many specialties including mon- 
ey and banking, international trade and finance, la- 
bpr, public finance, industrial policy, business cy- 
cles and forecasting. Social issues and problems 
such as poverty, crime, discrimination, immigration, 
aging, energy, pollution and education are typical 
subjects of faculty research. 

The faculty of the Economics Department partici- 
pates in programs leading to both undergraduate 
and graduate degrees. One undergraduate program 
leads to a bachelor of arts degree with a major in 
economics, which focuses on economics as a social 
science. Another undergraduate program leads to a 
bachelor of arts degree with a major in business ad- 
ministration and a concentration In business eco- 
nomics and requires a larger number of business 
courses. Both programs prepare the student for a 
variety of career opportunities In business and gov- 
ernment as well as advanced studies in economics, 
business, public administration and law. Graduate 
study is offered in economics, leading to a master 
of arts degree. Alternatively, students may follow 
the Master of Business Administration curriculum, 
with a concentration in business economics. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the 
Department of Economics offers courses which may 
be included in the Multiple Subjects Waiver Pro- 
gram; the Single Subject Waiver Program in Busi- 
ness; and in the Supplementary Authorization Pro- 
grams in Economics and In Economics and 
Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching 
credentials is found in the Teaching Credential Pro- 
grams section of this catalog and also is available 
from the Department Office for Elementary and Bilin- 
gual Education and for Secondary Education. Stu- 
dents interested in exploring careers In teaching at 
the elementary or secondary school levels should 
contact the Office of Admission to Teacher Educa- 
tion, Education Classroom 207. 

Prizes in Economics 

Wall Street Journal Student Achievement Award 
Outstanding Senior In Economics 
Outstanding Graduate Student in Economics 

bachelor of arts in economics 

All of the following requirements must be met for the 
degree. Students must earn a grade of at least C in 
each course listed below. However, a C average will 
be acceptable in the upper division economics elec- 
tives. For assistance in interpreting these require- 
ments contact the Business Advising Center, Langs- 
dorf Hall 700. Students also should contact their 


faculty adviser in the Economics Department prior to 
or during their first semester. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

(Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), 
may be substituted for Economics 201 and 202.) 

Accounting 201 A Elementary Accounting (3) 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Economics 440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 
or Math 160B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
or Accounting 20 IB Elementary Accounting (3) 
Manag Scl 265 Introduction to Information Sys- 
tems and Computer Programming (3) 

Note: Management Science 264, Computer Pro- 
gramming (2), and Management Science 263, Intro- 
duction to Information Systems and Micro-Computer 
Applications (2), may be substituted for Manage- 
ment Science 265. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination In Writing Proficien- 
cy (EWP). 

Bus Administration 301, Business Writing (3) 

Note: Bus Admin 301, Business Writing, should be 
taken before registering for any 400-level SBAE 
courses. 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Economics 310 Informed Microeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 320 Informed Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Manag Sci 36 1 Probability and Statistical Methods 
in Business and Economics (4) 

and 18 units of upper-division economics electives, 
6 units of which must be 400 level. No more than 3 
units of independent study may be used to meet the 
400 level electives requirement. 

Other Requirements, Grades and Residence 

Other Subjects. Complete at least 50 units of 
courses outside the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics. The department recommends 
that these courses be from the social sciences and 
mathematics. Students planning to do graduate 
work In economics are advised to take Math 150A,B; 
Economics 440 and Economics 441. Complete all 
university requirements for the bachelor’s degree. 

Grade-Point Average (GPA). Attain at least a 2.0 
GPA (C average) in all university courses and in the 
upper division economics electives. Earn at least a 
C grade In each course required for the major (other 
than the upper division economics electives). 

Grade Option. Take ail required courses in econom- 
ics, accounting and management science for a letter 
grade (A,B,C,D,F). The credit /no credit grading op- 
tion may not be used for these courses, and a grade 


Economics 


of CR (credit) will not satisfy the requirements for 
the degree. Exception: courses in calculus may be 
taken under the credit/no credit grading option, al- 
though courses taken to meet general education re- 
quirements must be taken for a letter grade. 
Residence. At least 15 units of courses must be tak- 
en in residence at the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics at Cal State Fullerton. Also 
fulfill university residence requirements. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Business Economics 
Concentration.” 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

The economics minor covers the basics in the disci- 
pline of economics and gives students the opportuni- 
ty to explore personal interests through electives. 
Note that a course in calculus (Math 136 or equiva- 
lent) is prerequisite to Economics 310 and 320. Stu- 
dents must earn a grade of at least C in each course 
listed below. 

Required Lower>Divislon Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (6), 
may be substituted for Economics 201 and Econom- 
ics 202. 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomics 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomics 
Analysis (3) 

and 9 units of upper division economics electives 

Note: Students with a major In business administra- 
tion and a concentration other than economics, who 
wish to minor In economics, must take Economics 
201 and 202 (or 210) and 310 as part of their major. 
For such students, these requirements in the minor 
will be waived and the minor will consist of Econom- 
ics 320 and nine units of upper-division economics 
electives. Students with a major in business adminis- 
tration and a concentration in business economics 
may not also minor In economics. 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Business Economics 
Concentration.” 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

This program provides preparation for professional 
careers In private Industry and government and pro- 
vides a foundation for further graduate work at the 
doctoral level. Full-time and part-time students can 
be accommodated. Most of the courses are sched- 
uled In the evening. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an un- 
dergraduate degree in business administration or 
economics, and consists of 10 courses (30 units). 
Provided that all prerequisites have been satisfied. 


the program may be completed in one year (full time) 
or 2 1/2 years (part time). 

The required courses progress from economic theo- 
ry through economic model building and forecasting 
to the seminar in which the student prepares a the- 
sis applying economic theory and econometric 
methods to a specific area of investigation. The cur- 
riculum also includes five courses (15 units) of elec- 
tives. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business 
Administration and Economics require “classified 
SBAE status” and are open only to students with 
classified standing in the M.A. In Economics, M.B.A., 
M.S. in Management Science, or M.S. in Taxation 
programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be 
admitted to postbaccalaureate-unclassified stand- 
ing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from appropriately 
accredited institution, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 In the last 60 
semester units attempted, and In good standing at 
last college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate — unclassified students 
may enroll In undergraduate courses (100 thru 400 
level) but are generally ineligible for graduate eco- 
nomics courses (500 level). Such students may wish 
to take undergraduate courses which are necessary 
to meet the requirements for classified standing 
(see below). Upon completing the requirements, the 
student may file an Application for Change of Aca- 
demic Objective — Graduate requesting admission 
to the M.A. in Economics program. Admission to the 
university as a postbaccalaureate — unclassified 
student does not constitute admission to the pro- 
gram, does not confer priority, nor does it guarantee 
future admission. Students planning to apply for ad- 
mission to the program should confer with the gradu- 
ate adviser in the Department of Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be admitted with conditionally classified 
standing: 

3. Overall undergraduate GPA of at least 2.6. 

4. An average score of 500 on the Graduate Record 
Examination (G.R.E.). 

Note: Conditionally classified students may take a 
limited number of courses at the graduate level, sub- 
ject to the approval of the graduate adviser of the 
Department of Economics. Students are expected to 
advance promptly to classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be advanced to classified standing. Such 
students are eligible to take graduate courses for 
which they are qualified. 

6. Completion of the following courses at Cal State 
Fullerton (or equivalent courses at other Institu- 
tions) with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 
(B average). The course in calculus must have a 
grade of at least C. 


Economics 


Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 420 Money and Banking (3) 
or three units of upper-division electives 
Manag Sci 36 1 Probability and Statistical Methods 
In Business and Economics (4) 

Mathematics 135 Business Calculus (3) 

6. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

Note: Students are urged to meet as soon as possi- 
ble with the graduate adviser In the Department of 
Economics to file a study plan and advance to clas- 
sified standing. 

Any study plan course In which a D grade is received 
must be repeated, and must receive at least a C 
grade, regardless of the overall grade-point average 
of the student. 


Required Courses 


Economics 440 
Economics 602 
Economics 603 
Economics 506 


Introduction to Econometrics (3) 
Adv Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
Adv Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 
Econ Models and Forecasting (3) 


Elective Courses 


16 units of elective courses in economics at the 400 
or 500 level. (Note: With the approval of the gradu- 
ate adviser of the Department of Economics, some 
of these courses may be in fields outside of, but re- 
lated to, economics.) At least six units of elective 
courses must be at the 600 level, and at least six 
units must be in economics. Economics 696 is spe- 
cifically designed to serve as an elective in this pro- 
gram. The topic of the course rotates every semes- 
ter and it may be repeated for credit. 

Terminal Evaluation: Thesis 

Economics 698 Thesis Research (3) 


Economic Courses 

100 The Economic Environment (3) 

The application of economics to the problems of unemploy- 
ment and Inflation, the distribution of income, competition 
and monopoly, the role of government in the economy, and 
other policy issues. Not open to prebusiness, business ad- 
ministration majors or minors, economics majors or minors, 
or international business majors. 

201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Principles of individual consumer and producer decision- 
making in various market structures: the price system; mar- 
ket performance and government policy. 


210 Principles of Economics (5) 

Prerequisite: Open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 201 
and 202.) Economic analysis and policy. The central prob- 
lem of scarcity, economic Institutions of the United States, 
resource allocation and Income distribution, economic sta- 
bility and growth, the role of public policy, and International 
applications. 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 (or 210) and Math 135. Ratio- 
nal decision-making behavior of consumers and firms and 
price and output determination in markets. 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 (or 210) and Math 135. The de- 
terminants of the level of national Income, employment and 
prices, and monetary and fiscal policies. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Alternative eco- 
nomic systems; their theoretical foundations, actual eco- 
nomic institutions, and achievements and failures. Contrast 
between socialist and capitalist systems. 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210; The structure 
and performance of the Soviet economy; the problems of al- 
locating scarce resources and sustaining economic growth 
in a planned economy. 

332 Economic Probiems of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The natural re- 
sources, population, agricultural, industrial, transportation, 
communications, monetary, banking, etc. probiems of Asia, 
(i.e., China. Japan, and the Asian subcontinent). The relation 
of non-economic problems to the economy. 

333 Economic Deveiopment: Anaiysis and Case Studies (3) 
Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The processes 
of economic growth with references to developing areas. 
Capital formation, resource allocation, relation to the world 
economy, economic planning and institutional factors, with 
case studies. 

334 Economics of Latin American and the Caribbean (3) 
Prerequisite: Economics 1(X) or 201 or 210. Examines re- 
gional economic problems within an international context: 
dependence, industrialization and the international corpora- 
tion; agriculture; regional cooperation; inflation; trade and 
debt problems. Major economic thinkers will be discussed. 

335 The International Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 1(X) or 201 or 210. The theory, 
practice and institutions of the international economy. Inter- 
national trade and investment; European economic commu- 
nity; balance of payments; foreign exchange rates; multina- 
tional enterprise; trade with developing countries; East- 
West trade; international economic policy. 

340 The Economics of Regulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The laws per- 
taining to regulation and the implications for each regulated 
industry. Industry studies; the effects of regulation on price, 
output, innovations, etc. 


202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 201. Principles of macroeconomic 
analysis and policy; unemployment and inflation; financial in- 
stitutions; International trade; economic growth; compara- 
tive systems. 


350 American Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The develop 
ment of American economic institutions; economic prob 
lems, economic growth and economic welfare. 


Economics 


351 European Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The evolution of 
European economic institutions and their relation to the de- 
velopment of industry, commerce, transportation and fi- 
nance in the principal European countries. 

361 Urban Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Theory and anal- 
ysis of the urban economy, urban economic problems and 
policy. 

362 Environmental and Resource Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210, or consent of in- 
structor. Economic analysis of environmental problems and 
related issues in resource development: externalities, prop- 
erty rights, social costs and benefits, user cost, rent and de- 
cisionmaking under uncertainty. 

363 The Economics of Energy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Economic theo- 
ry applied to energy problems, the Impact of energy devel- 
opment on economic structure, and the role of government 
in allocating energy resources and influencing their use. 

410 Government and Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. Business organization, conduct and 
performance; the rationale and impact of public policy on 
business and business activities, including the regulated in- 
dustries. sick industries and antitrust policy. 

411 International Trade (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. The theory of international trade and 
the means and significance of balance of payments adjust- 
ments; past and present developments In international, com- 
mercial and monetary policy. 

412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. Labor supply and demand, labor 
force participation, employment, unemployment, human cap- 
ital, wage differentials, disadvantaged labor market groups, 
discrimination and wage-related income transfers. 

416 Benefit Cost and Microeconomic Policy Analysis (3) 
Prerequisite: Economics 310 or consent of instructor. Busi- 
ness Administration 301 or the equivalent. Evaluation of ben- 
efit-cost studies prepared for government programs: educa- 
tional and water resources. Methods of estimating 
environmental, cultural, life-saving, and macroeconomic 
benefits and costs; handling future benefits and costs. 

417 Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 or consent of the instructor, 
Business Administration 301 or the equivalent. Government 
finance at the federal, state and local levels; the impact of 
taxation and spending on resource allocation, income distri- 
bution. stabilization and growth. 

420 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. The money supply process and the 
impact of monetary policy on economic activity. 

421 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. The techniques of monetary and fis- 
cal policy; of their relative roles in promoting economic sta- 
bility and growth. 


440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 (or 210), Manag Sci 361 and 
Business Administration 301 or the equivalents. Economic 
measurement: specification and estimation of econometric 
models; statistical methods in economic research. 

441 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 
Prerequisites: Economics 202 (or 210) and Math 135 or 
equivalent. Economic theory, from microeconomics and 
macroeconomics. Content varies; constrained optimization 
problems and rational decision-making. 

446 Managerial Economics (3) 

(Same as Management 446.) 

450 History of Economic Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 320 and Business Adminis- 
tration 301. Major schools of thought and of leading individu- 
al economists as they influenced economic thought and poli- 
cy. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major with Business Administra- 
tion 301, Manag Sci 361, Economics 310 (or 320) (or the 
equivalents) or international business major with Business 
Administration 301, Economics 202 and 335, Manag Sci 361 
(or the equivalents); and consent of the department intern- 
ship adviser, at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one se- 
mester In residence at the university. Planned and super- 
vised work experience. May be repeated to a total of six 
units credit. Credit /No Credit grading only. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorial (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration. Econom- 
ics 310 and 320, Business Administration 301, senior stand- 
ing, 3.0 GPA and consent of department chair. Student 
learns through teaching (tutoring) other students enrolled In 
principles and intermediate economics courses. Consult 
“Student-to-Student Tutorials” In this catalog for more infor- 
mation. May not be used to satisfy the elective requirements 
for the major or concentration In economics. Credit /No 
Credit grading only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration. Econom- 
ics 310 and 320, Business Administration 301 (or the equiva- 
lents), senior or graduate standing, and consent of instructor 
and department chair. Directed independent inquiry. May be 
repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic pro- 
bation. 

502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and classified SBAE status or 
consent of instructor. The determination of prices and out- 
puts in a market system. Deterministic and probabilistic 
models of demand, production, cost and investment. In- 
cludes behavioral, probabilistic, game theoretic and behav- 
ioral models of the firm. 

503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 320 and classified SBAE status or 
consent of instructor. The determination of employment, 
fluctuations of real and money income, and the forces under- 
lying economic growth. 

505 Economic Models and Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440 and classified SBAE status or 
consent of the Instructor. Statistical methods of economet- 
ric estimation and forecasting. Practical solutions to prob- 
lems in model specification, estimation by regression, time 
series analysis and forecasting. 


Economics 


515 The Price System and Resource Allocation (4) 
Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and Math 135 or the 
equivalent. Microeconomic analysis and policy under mixed 
capitalism. The economic environment and institutions, mar- 
kets, consumer choice, production and resource allocation. 
Monopoly power and government intervention. (Not open to 
M.A. Economic candidates.) 

516 Economics and Benefit-Cost Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 201 (or 210) and classified gradu- 
ate status in environmental studies or public administration. 
Economics and benefit-cost analysis of public projects. 
Consumer demand and the estimation of benefits; the nature 
of cost in a market economy; price controls, unemployment 
and inflation; and criteria for choice, for multi-year projects. 
For elective credit in the M.S. Environmental Studies or M. 
P.A. 

517 Economics of Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 515 (or 516) and classified gradu- 
ate status in environmental studies, public administration or 
taxation. Economics and federal, state and local govern- 
mental spending, taxation and borrowing. Major taxes, their 
effects on market prices, income distribution, employment 
and inflation and evaluation of reform proposals. (For elec- 
tive credit in the M.S. Environmental Studies, M.P.A. or M.S. 
Taxation.) 

521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 515 and classified SBAE 
status. National income determination and macroeconomic 
models. Inflation and unemployment. Monetary and fiscal 
policies. International trade and foreign exchange (Not open 
to M.A. Economics candidates or students with credit for 
Economics 320.) 


522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 515 or 310 and classified SBAE 
status. Analytical and prescriptive approaches to economic 
problems of scarcity, development, fiscal and monetary poli- 
cy, planning and poverty. (Not open to M.A. Economics can- 
didates.) 

596 Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) 
Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320; classified SBAE sta- 
tus or consent of instructor. Contemporary research in areas 
such as: resource economics; history of economic thought; 
international monetary systems; forecasting; economics of 
planning; human resource economics. May be repeated for 
credit. 

597 Project (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

598 Thesis Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503 and classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Corequisite: Economics 505. Selection and approval of 
topic; outline; methodology; literature survey; data collec- 
tion and analysis; presentation of results. Award of the 
grade is contingent upon the completion and acceptance of 
the thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440, 502 and 503; classified grad- 
uate status; and consent of Instructor and department chair 
(or designee). Directed advanced independent inquiry. May 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 


Economics 


211 


Department of Finance 

Department Chair: John Emery 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 556 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Finance 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Finance 
Faculty 

Hamdi Biiici, Albert Bueso, Donald Crane, 

John Erickson, Farzad Farsio, Albert J. Fredman, 

Peter Mlynaryk, Dennis O’Connor, 

P. James Stickels, Marco Tonietti, B. E. Tsagris 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, 
provides information on admissions, curriculum and 
graduation requirements, registration and grading 
procedures, residence and similar academic mat- 
ters. In addition, advising on curriculum content and 
career opportunities may be obtained from the chair 
of the Finance Department or from: 

Financial Management 
Insurance 

Personal Financial Planning 
Real Estate 

Securities and Investments 

INTRODUCTION 

Finance is the study of the methods by which a firm 
provides itself with cash to run Its daily operations 
and its long-range expansion. 

In choosing their course work students may elect 
one of five areas of emphasis within the finance con- 
centration of the major in business administration: fi- 
nancial management; securitles-Investments; real 
estate; personal financial planning; and insurance. A 
financial management emphasis can lead to posi- 
tions as financial analyst for industrial firms, banks 
or public utilities. A securlties-Investment emphasis 
may lead to stock brokerage firm opportunities. 

Financial analysts can work In real estate for devel- 
opers, appraisers or brokers. Professional financial 
planning for individuals may be a career choice with 
an emphasis in personal financial planning. Working 
with pensions or with life or health insurance Is an 
option for students who choose an insurance em- 
phasis. 


Marco Tonietti 
Marco Tonietti 
Donald Crane 
B. E. Tsagris 
Albert Fredman 


Finance 


Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the 
Department of Finance offers courses which may be 
included in the Single Subject Waiver Program in 
Business and in the Supplementary Authorization 
Program in Economics and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching 
credentials is found in the Teaching Credential Pro- 
grams section of this catalog and is also available 
from the Department Office for Secondary Educa- 
tion. Students interested in exploring careers in 
teaching at the elementary or secondary school le- 
vels should contact the Office of Admission to 
Teacher Education. 

Prizes In Finance 

The Wall Street Journal Award 
Edward D’Cunha Finance Award 
Financial Management Association Award 
Outstanding Finance Student Award 
Outstanding Service Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Finance Concentra- 
tion.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Finance Concentra- 
tion.” 

Finance Courses 

310 Personal Financial Management (3) 

Financial problems of the household in allocating resources 
and planning expenditures. Housing, insurance, installment 
buying, medical care, savings and investments. (May not be 
used to fulfill the concentration requirement in finance.) 

320 Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201B. Financing business enter- 
prises; financial planning and control; analysis of alternative 
sources and uses of combinations of short-, intermediate- 
and long-term debt and equity. Cost of capital. Study of capi- 
tal investment decisions; capital budget analysis and valua- 
tion; working capital and capital structure management; rel- 
ative impact on the international environment of financial 
decisions. 

331 Financial Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Fund statement analysis; cash 
budgeting and pro forma financial statements; traditional 
versus modern financial statement analysis; break-even 
analysis; cash, marketable securities, inventory and ac- 
counts receivable management models; short-term borrow- 
ing. 

332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 (may be taken concurrently). Risk 
and return analysis. An introduction to the capital asset and 
arbitrage pricing models. Analysis of capital budgeting, cap- 
ital structure, dividend policy, leasing, mergers and divesti- 
tures. 


340 Introduction to Investments (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 31 1 (may be taken concurrently). Insti- 
tutional characteristics of securities markets, security valu- 
ation and trading methods, fundamental and technical analy- 
sis, selection and management of securities, introduction to 
the capital asset pricing model, role of options and futures 
markets, portfolio analysis and mutual funds. 

351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Real es- 
tate principles, practices and investment decisions. Equity 
investment, finance, legal aspects, practices, principles, 
property development, real estate administration In the pub- 
lic sector, real estate market analysis, valuation. 

360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: junior or senior status. Life, casualty and liabili- 
ty insurance, individual and group insurance programs; 
methods of establishing risks and rates. 

370 International Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Financing 
problems of international business. The international finan- 
cial environment, taxation of foreign income, international 
capital and money markets, problems of risk in foreign in- 
vestments, and financial techniques for the operation of a 
multinational firm. 

410 Theory & Practice of Personal Financial Planning (3) 
Prerequisite: Finance 320. Developing, implementing and 
monitoring comprehensive personal financial plans. Includes 
risk management, investments, taxation, retirement and es- 
tate planning, as well as professional practices. 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution 
Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. The solution of financial institu- 
tion problems. Major financial intermediaries and the deci- 
sion-making problems they face. Regulation and its effect on 
management operations. Group problems and case studies. 

430 Computer-Aided Financial Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 or 332. Set-up and analysis of fi- 
nancial models using readily available software programs on 
campus computers. Introduces financial databases. Em- 
ploys financial modeling programs to test decision models 
dealing with financial valuation and planning. 

432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331. Forecasting In financial manage- 
ment; construction and Interpretation of economic forecasts 
for the economy. Industry and the firm; construction and In- 
terpretation of financial plans; evaluation of capital acquisi- 
tion decisions under certainty and uncertainty conditions. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 332. Case studies. Group problems of 
estimating funds requirements, long-term financial planning, 
controlling and evaluating cash flows, and financing acquisi- 
tions and mergers, capital budgeting, and cost of capital. 
Group problems and case studies. 

440 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Capital and money markets in the 
American economy: markets for new corporate and govern- 
ment issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial in- 
stitutions; factors Influencing yields and security prices. 


Finance 


442 Advanced Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 340 and Management Science 361. 
Securities markets and company analysis, security valuation 
models the CAPM and the APT option pricing, and portfolio 
models. Practical application of investment theory and re- 
cent literature will be emphasized. 

444 Options and Futures (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 340. Put and call options, option pric- 
ing theory and models. Financial futures pricing, hedging 
strategies and models. Institutional characteristics of fu- 
tures trading. Options and futures on stock indices. Options 
on futures, theoretical relationship between options and fu- 
rutes. 

450 Real Estate Investment Strategy (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 361 or consent of Instructor. Back- 
ground discussion of Investment risks, reasons for investing 
in real estate from the viewpoint of the Individual Investor. 
Preparation of personal real estate investment portfolio and 
analytical methods for real estate investment evaluation. 

451 Real Estate/Land Use Law—Case Studies (3) 
Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real estate law. Cases provide 
illustrations of specific legal situations; financial institutions, 
property rights, zoning, land use law and environmental im- 
pact requirements. 

452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Financial institutions and real es- 
tate credit. Sources and uses of capital (funds) in financing 
real estate transactions. Money and capital markets and 
their effect on credit availability. Instruments in real estate 
finance. Investment methods and decisions. Group problems 
and case studies. 

453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real property value, historical 
evolution of valuation principles, approaches in urban and 
real property appraisals, alternative methods and tech- 
niques for property valuation. 

454 Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Factors and influences of urban 
growth and development. Economic factors and real estate 
supply and demand. Location theory and urban growth pat- 
terns. Public policy as a factor in real estate development. 
Analysis of real estate markets. 

455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Alternative analytical techniques 
in evaluating real estate investments. Tax aspects, mea- 
surement of investment returns, application of computer 
models to investment decisions. Lecture, discussion and 
case analysis of major investment types— raw land, apart- 
ment houses, commercial and industrial uses. 

456 Property Development and Real Estate 
Policy Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Decision making process in the 
property development process— from raw land to retail mar- 
keting of completed product. Policy formulation and imple- 
mentation, project feasibility analysis, financial analysis, 
computer assisted analysis; case studies. 

461 Business Risk Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 360 or consent of instructor. Tech- 
niques and structures of risk management; risk planning, 
control and financing in the business enterprise. 

462 Life and Health Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 360 or consent of Instructor. Life and 
health insurance coverages, both individual and group poli- 
cies; the operation of insurance companies. Business and 
estate planning, pension plans, and government benefits. 


495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 331 or 332, a major in finance, con- 
sent of department Internship adviser, junior standing, 2.5 
GPA and one semester In residence at the university. Also 
open to international business majors. Planned and super- 
vised work experience. May be repeated for credit up to a 
total of six units. Credit /No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department 
chair. Open to undergraduate students desiring to pursue di- 
rected independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not 
open to students on academic probation. 

517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510 and classified SBAE status. 
The methodology of financial management. The primary 
tools for financial analysis, long-term investment decisions, 
valuation and working capital management. International ap- 
plications. 

523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 and classified SBAE status. The 
analysis of the financial decision-making process through 
case studies and seminar presentations. Current financial 
theory and models. International applications. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 523 and classified SBAE status. Op- 
timal financing and asset administration; advanced tech- 
niques of capital budgeting; application of analytical meth- 
ods to the administration of the finance function of the 
business firm. 

540 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified 
SBAE status. Structure and operation of major financial Insti- 
tutions; portfolio composition, price-cost problems, and mar- 
ket behavior; analysis of financial intermediation and interre- 
lation of financial institutions and markets. 

541 Seminar in Investment Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified 
SBAE status. Problems of investment and portfolio manage- 
ment; concepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; 
analysis of interest rate movements; Investment valuation 
and timing; regulation and administrative problems of the In- 
dustry. 

551 Seminar in Real Estate Investment (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified 
SBAE status. Problems of real estate investment; concepts 
of evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of real proper- 
ty values; real estate development and financing. Case 
studies. 

570 Seminar in international Financial Management (3) 
Prerequisites: Finance 517 or consent of instructor and clas- 
sified SBAE status. The financial problems of the multina- 
tional firm. International financing instruments, capital invest- 
ment decisions, and constraints on the profitability of 
multinational businesses. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor 
and approval by department chair. May be repeated for 
credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


Finance 


International Business 

Program 


Program Coordinator: Irene Lange 
Program Office: Langsdorf Hall 626 

Program Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in International Business 

Program Council 

Farouk Abdelwahed (Management) 
Linda Andersen-Fiala (French) 
Irene Lange (Marketing) 
Maryanna Lanier (Economics) 
Doris Merrifield (German) 
Dennis O’Connor (Finance) 
Marcial Prado (Spanish) 

Advisers 


The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 706, 
provides information on admissions, curriculum and 
graduation requirements, registration and grading 
procedures, residence and similar academic mat- 
ters. Additional advising on curriculum content and 
career opportunities is available from the Interna- 
tional Business Program: 


International Business: 
French: 

German: 

Japanese: 

Spanish: 

Other languages: 


Irene Lange 
Linda Andersen-Fiala 
Doris Merrifield 
Kenji Matsumoto 
Marcial Prado 
Jacqueline Kiraithe 


INTRODUCTION 


The international business curriculum covers the fun- 
damentals of business administration, with an em- 
phasis on international business. Foreign language 
courses are required and stress the use of the lan- 
guage in international business. The program also in- 
eludes an internship with an international business. 
This curriculum prepares students for entry level po- 
sitions in international business. Opportunities exist 
in contracts, distribution and sales and may lead to 
general management positions. Since Southern Cali- 
fornia is a major international business center, there 
are career opportunities with internationally oriented 
firms in this area. Other career opportunities may in- 
volve international travel or overseas assignments. 

Language concentrations are offered in French, Ger- 
man, Japanese, Portuguese, and Spanish. Other 
concentrations may be developed in the future. The 
program is offered jointly by the School of Business 
Administration and Economics and the Department 
of Foreign Languages and Literatures. 


International Business 


r 


Prize In International Business 
The Dennis Rippin-International Marketing Associa- 
tion Scholarship 
Preparation For The Major 

Students who expect to complete this program in 
the usual four-year period should realize that the to- 
tal requirements, including general education 
courses and prerequisites, can exceed 124 semes- 
ter units. Intermediate level competency in a foreign 
language, equivalent to courses numbered 204 in 
the Department of Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures, is prerequisite to the required concentration 
courses. It is therefore strongly recommended that 
students complete a minimum of three years of for- 
eign language study while In high school. Similarly, 
algebra and geometry are necessary for many re- 
quired business courses. The equivalent of three 
years of high school mathematics, including a sec- 
ond course In algebra, is the prerequisite for the re- 
quired Mathematics 135, Business Calculus. Stu- 
dents without the necessary background will need to 
enroll in Mathematics 100, Precalculus Mathemat- 
ics. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL 
BUSINESS 

All of the following requirements must be met for the 
degree. Students must earn a grade of at least C In 
each course listed below. However, a C average will 
be acceptable In the required concentration 
courses. For assistance in interpreting these re- 
quirements, contact the Business Advising Center, 
Langsdorf Hall 700. 

Required Lower-Division Core Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), 
may be substituted for Economics 201 and 202. 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Accounting 201A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 
Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information 
Systems and Computer Programming (3) 

Note: Intermediate competency In the appropriate 
foreign language Is prerequisite to the required con- 
centration courses. If necessary, students should 
enroll in French, German, Japanese or Spanish 101, 
102, 203 and/or 204, or, for students with previous 
study of a romance language, Portuguese 101 and/ 
or 102. Students may enroll at any point In this se- 
quence of courses for which their previous study 
and/or experience have prepared them. Normally, 
two or three years of high school language study are 
counted as the equivalent of 10 units of college lan- 
guage study. Students should consult an adviser in 
the Department of Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures before enrolling in their first foreign language 
course. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Univer. Fullerton Examination in Writing 

Proficiency (EWP) 


Business Administration 301 Business Writing (3) ( 

Note:Buslness Administration 301 should be taken 
before registering for any 400-level SBAE courses. 

Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

Note: International business majors shall not enroll 
in any required upper-division core course until they 
have completed all of the required lower-division 
core courses with a grade of at least “C” in each 
course. Students desiring to enroll in required upper- 1 
division core courses while concurrently completing j 
the /asf of their required lower-division core courses | 
may select only Business Administration 301, Eco- ■ 
nomics 335 and/or Manag Sci 361. 

Economics 335 International Economy (3) 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 
Management 339 Managing Business Operations 
and Organizations (3) 

Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Manag Sci 36 1 Probability and Statistical Methods 
in Business and Economics (4) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Marketing 458 International Marketing Policies (3) 

And a minimum of three units chosen from among the 
following electives. It is recommended that students 
take up to 12 units of electives, if possible. 


Anthropology 303 Economic Anthropology (3) 
Anthropology 308 Culture Change (3) 

Comp Lit 453 The Novel In France and Germany (3) 
Geography 333 Latin America (3) 

Geography 336 Europe (3) 

Geography 344 Africa (3) 

Geography 360 Economic Geography (3) 

History 350 History of Latin America Civilization 


(3) 

History 429 
History 432 
Century (3) 
History 453 
Philosophy 312 
Ethics (3) 


Europe Since 1914 (3) 

Modern Germany from the 18th 

Modern Mexico (3) 

Business and Professional 


Poll Sci 430 Government and Politics of a Selected 
Nation-State (3)* 

Poll Sci 431 Government and Politics of a Selected 
Area (3)* 

Poll Sci 457 Politics of International Economics (3) 
Speech Comm 320 Intercultural 
Communication (3) 


Required Concentration (choose one of the fol- 
lowing concentrations) 


Concentration in French: 


French 310 
French 31 1 
French 315 
French 325 


French in the Business World (3) 
French for International Business (3) 
Origins of Modern France (3) 
Contemporary French Civilization (3) 


Concentration in German: 


German 310 German in the Business World (3) 
German 31 1 German for International Business (3) 
German 315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 
German 325 Current Trends In Culture of German 
Sp eaking People (3) 

*When topic is appropriate. 


International Business 


Concentration in Japanese: 

Japanese 310 Japanese for Business (3) 
Japanese 3 1 1 Japanese for International 
Business (3) 

Japanese 315 Introduction to Japanese 
Civilization (3) 

Japanese 316 Modern Japan (3) 

Concentration in Portuguese: 

Portuguese 310 Portuguese in the Business 
World (3) 

Portuguese 3 1 7 Advanced Conversation and 
Composition (3) 

Portuguese 320 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian 
Culture and Civilization (3) 

Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian 
Civilization (3) 

Note: One of the following courses may be substitut- 
ed for Portuguese 320 or 325: 

Spanish 310 Spanish in the Business World (3) 
Spanish 31 1 Spanish for International Business (3) 

Concentration in Spanish: 

Spanish 310 Spanish In the Business World (3) 
Spanish 31 1 Spanish for International Business (3) 
Spanish 315 Introduction to Spanish 
Civilization (3) 

Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish-American 
Civilization (3) 

Note: Students may substitute one of the following 
for Spanish 315 or 316: 

Spanish 415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 
Spanish 416 Contemp Spanish-American 
Culture (3) 

Concentrations in Other Languages 

Upon review and recommendation of the Internation- 
al Business Program Council, students who have 
earned academic credit for courses equivalent to 
those in the language concentrations, but in lan- 
guages other than French, German, Japanese, Por- 
tuguese and Spanish, may be awarded a degree 


with a concentration in the relevant language. In 
cases where the student has completed some, but 
not all of the equivalents, the Program Council may 
recommend appropriate course work. 

Required Internships 

Foreign Languages 495 Internship (3) 
and one of the following: 

Economics 495 Internship (3) 

Finance 495 Internship (3) 

Management 495 Internship (3) 

Management Science 495 Internship (3) 

Marketing 495 Intership (3) 

Note: All students are required to spend a minimum 
of four months in full-time employment with a faculty- 
approved firm having international dealings and in 
which daily use of a foreign language is normal pro- 
cedure. (Highly qualified students, i.e., those having 
a 3.2 GPA in their upper-division core and concentra- 
tion courses, will be aided in finding six-month posi- 
tions abroad). Simultaneous enrollment In the two re- 
quired internships is therefore expected, and 
students normally will not take any other course 
work during this period. 

Other Requirements 

Grade Point Average (GPA): Attain at least a 2.0 
GPA (C average) in all university courses and in the 
concentration courses. Earn at least a C grade in 
each course required for the major (other than con- 
centration courses). 

Grade Options: Take all required core and concen- 
tration courses for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The 
credit /no credit grading option may not be used for 
these courses, and a grade of CR (credit) will not 
satisfy the requirements of the degree. Exceptions: 
Calculus (Math 130, 135 or 150A) and Internship 
may be taken under the credit/no credit option, al- 
though courses taken to meet general education re- 
quirements must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence: At least 12 units of upper-division core 
courses, 6 units of upper-division concentration 
courses and 6 units of internships must be taken in 
residence at CSUF. 


International Business 


Department of 
Management 

Department Chair: Thomas Johnson 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 640 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Management 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Management 
Faculty 

Farouk Abdelwahed, Michael Ames, Thomas Apke, 
Mel Liang Bickner, Robert Chapman, James Conant, 
Richard Gilman, GaminI Gunawardane, 

Ghasem Haj-Manoochehri, Dorothy Helde, 

Granville Hough, Richard Houston, 

Thomas Johnson, Geoffrey King, Brian Kleiner, 
Elliot Kushell, Thomas Maher, Thomas Mayes. 
Leland McCloud, Kent McKee, Tai Oh, 

Edgar Wiley, Edward Zllbert 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, 
provides information on admissions, curriculum and 
graduation requirements; registration and grading 
procedures; residence and similar academic mat- 
ters. In addition, the Management Department pro- 
vides advising on career opportunities and on the 
emphases within the Management Concentration: 

Contract Manag. Geoffrey King /Thomas Maher 
Entrepreneurial Manag. Michael Ames 

General Manag. Farouk Abdelwahed 

Human Resource Manag. Mei Bickner 

Law Thomas Apke 

Operations Manag. Michael Ames 

Organizational Behavior 

and Organizational Development Elliot Kushell 

INTRODUCTION 

Managers are necessary in a wide variety of differ- 
ent types of organizations — business and nonbusi- 
ness, large and small, foreign and domestic. Manag- 
ers in all of these organizations draw on 
“management” as a knowledge base to develop the 
essential skills (technical, human, conceptual) that 
allow them to Implement successfully the manage- 
ment functions (planning, organizing, leading and 
controlling) while fulfilling various roles (interacting 
with others, processing information, making deci- 
sions). The desired end result is high productivity for 
individuals, groups, and the organization as a whole. 

Management courses are designed to teach the fun- 
damental principles underlying organizations, to em- 
phasize education which will Improve students’ 


Management 


thought processes, to provide familiarity with the an- 
alytical tools of management, and to develop in the 
student an ability to use the techniques involved in 
analyzing and evaluating managerial problems and 
making sound decisions. 

Students may pursue a wide variety of academic and 
career interests through six different emphases. 
These emphases include: (1) contract management, 
(2) entrepreneurial management, (3) general man- 
agement, (4) human resource management, (6) pro- 
duction and operations management, and (6) organi- 
zational behavior. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the 
Management Department offers courses which may 
be Included in the Single Subject Waiver Program In 
Business and in the Supplementary Authorization 
Program in Economics and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching 
credentials Is found in the Teaching Credential Pro- 
grams section of this catalog and is also available 
from the Department of Secondary Education. Stu- 
dents interested in exploring careers In teaching at 
the elementary or secondary school levels should 
contact the Office of Admission to Teacher Educa- 
tion. 

Prizes in Management 

The H. Peter Guertin/ APICS Orange County Chapter 
Scholarship 

The Orange County Industrial Relations Research 
Association (OCIRRA) 

The Beach Cities Chapter of the National Contract 
Management Association Scholarship 
The Allan F. Long Scholarship 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Con- 
centration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Con- 
centration”. 

Management Courses 

245 Introduction to Legal Principles (3) 

The role of law as It affects the citizen in our society. Case 
studies relating to the legal principles that govern students, 
family members, motor vehicles, consumers, Insureds, real 
estate transactions, investments, employees and estate 
planning. 

246 Business Law (3) 

Philosophy, Institutions and role of law in business and soci- 
ety. Functions of courts and attorneys, case studies In areas 
of contracts and on the law relating to sale of goods. 

339 Managing Business Operations and Organizations (3) 
Prerequisites: all lower division business core courses or In- 
structor’s consent. Administrative processes In utility- 
creating business operations: decision-making; planning; 
controlling; organizing; staffing; supporting business infor- 
mation systems; measuring and Improving effectiveness; 


production processes, production operations and Institu- 
tions in American and worldwide business. Uses the Produc- 
tion Lab. Includes taking the Cal State Fullerton Examination 
In Writing Proficiency (fee charged). 

340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: general education in social sciences. Social 
and cultural environments of business. Business ethics. 
Communication, leadership, motivation, perception, person- 
ality development, group dynamics and group growth. Hu- 
man behavior and organizational design and management 
practice in American and world wide business. Uses the Be- 
havioral Lab. 

341 Service Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and Manag Sci 361. Sys- 
tems and quantitative procedures for services such as food 
service, entertainment, health care and government agen- 
cies. Processes for developing and testing new services. 
Uses Production Lab. Students may not receive credit for 
both Management 341 and 342. 

342 Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and Manag Sci 361. Pro- 
duction systems which combine materials, labor, and capital 
resources to produce goods. Systems, models and methods 
for management of production operations. Product and pro- 
cess development. Utilization of computer decision models. 
Uses the Production Lab. Students may not receive credit 
for both Management 341 and 342. 

343 Personnel Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339 or consent of instructor. The 
personnel function, Its activities, and its opportunities. Man- 
agement’s responsibilities for selection, development and 
effective utilization of personnel. Open to non-business ma- 
jors. 

344 Introduction to Systems Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Manag Sci 265. The role of Information sys- 
tems in organizations, general systems theory, information 
concepts, and the function of information in management de- 
cision making, includes a project which requires the applica- 
tion of word processing and spreadsheet programs. 

345 Small Business Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Acctg 20 IB, Manag 339, Marktg 351. Practi- 
cal applications of business administration techniques to 
the planning and operation of small businesses. Casework, 
research, and field work with selected local small business- 
es. 

347 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. Philosophy, In- 
stitutions and role of law in business relationships. Business 
ethics. Case studies in areas of agency, partnerships, cor- 
porations. bankruptcy, unfair competition and trade regula- 
tion. 

348 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. The philoso- 
phy, institutions and role of law in commercial and personal 
transactions, case studies in personal property, bailments, 
commercial paper, secured transactions, real property, 
mortgages, trusts, community property, wills, estate admin- 
istration and insurance. 

349 Law for Small Business (3) 

Prerequisite; Management 246. The philosophy, institutions, 
and role of law and their practical applications in the areas 


Management 


of interest to the small businessperson. Product liability, 
consumer rights, workman’s compensation and other topics. 

421 Operations Systems Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and Manag Sci 362. Mana- 
gerial problems associated with designing an operations 
system, including product and process design, facilities 
planning, capacity choice, job design, automation, quality 
management and maintenance. 

422 Production and Inventory Control (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and Manag Sci 362. Plan- 
ning and controlling of production activities and inventory le- 
vels. Identification of key problem areas. Presentation of ap- 
plicable techniques and systems, and organizational and 
managerial concepts. Utilization of computer decision mod- 
els. 

431 Women in Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340. (For men and women.) In- 
creasing participation in the management of organizations. 
Employment and earnings, affirmative action, understanding 
male-female and female-female work relationships, dual ca- 
reers, and learning how to Increase one’s effectiveness in 
organizations. 

433 Advanced Topics in Human Resource Management (3) 
Prerequisite: Management 343. Contemporary concepts and 
procedures In compensation and staffing. Current topics and 
controversial Issues In human resource management are 
also covered. 

436 Government Contracts (3) (Formerly 346) 

Prerequisite: Management 246. Advertised and negotiated 
procurement and the role of contract manager. Fiscal and 
regulatory limitations. The nature of changes, disputes and 
termination. Contract terms and conditions and administra- 
tion. 

439 Organizational Change and Development (3) 
Prerequisite: Management 340 or equivalent; senior or grad- 
uate status. Utilizing behavioral science knowledge to im- 
prove organizational effectiveness. Diagnosing organiza- 
tional problems; designing planned change; individual-, 
group- and organizational-level interventions; overcoming 
resistance to change and issues in the consultant-client re- 
lationship. 

440 Emerging Issues In Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and 340 or consent of In- 
structor. For upper-division and graduate students. Busi- 
ness and management in America. The interrelationships of 
technological, economic, political and social forces with the 
business enterprises and their ethical obligations to owners, 
employees, consumers and society at large. Open to non- 
business majors. 

441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339. Impact of labor- 
management relations upon labor, management, and the 
public. Proper grievance procedure, collective bargaining 
and settlement of disputes. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

442 Grievance Handling and Arbitration (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 441, or consent of Instructor, 
and Management 340. In-depth study of the grievance pro- 
cedures and the arbitration process and procedure in the 
private sector. Topics Include discipline, contract Interpre- 
tation, arbitrable issues, management right issues, such as 


subcontracting and employee rights. Uses cases and simu- 
lations. 

443 Individual, interpersonal and Group Dynamics for 
Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339, 340 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Case studies and current literature on human problems 
of work situations. Developing self-knowledge; manager mo- 
tivation; communicator strengths; improving interaction 
skills; and Improving interaction processes In groups. Uses 
the Behavioral Lab. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

444 Project Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management and management science core 
and other 300 level management courses In student’s con- 
centration. Technology for managing business and other en- 
terprises as cybernetic systems. The design and control of 
systems appropriate for product, project and program levels 
of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) Uses Produc- 
tion Lab. 

445 Operations Policy & Strategy (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 421, Management 422, and 
Manag Sci 362. Long term planning issues in operations and 
integrating operations strategy into corporate strategic 
planning. Covers planning facilities, processes, capacity, 
support and control systems. Case studies and projects. 
Uses production computer labs. 

446 Managerial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: management science core. Economics 310 
and Management 339. Management tools applied. Econom- 
ics and statistics in decision-making process; use of cases 
and group problems; cost, demand, supply, price, product 
and competition. 

447 Management Decision Games (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core less Manage- 
ment 449, or consent of instructor. A simulation of an oli- 
gopolistic industry. Statistics and other analytical tools to 
make managerial decisions in management. (2 hours lec- 
ture; 2 hours activity) 

448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB. Management 339, Market- 
ing 351 and senior standing. A seminar. Planning and work- 
ing in a consulting relationship with small local businesses. 
Lectures, research and field work. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours 
field work) 

449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: all other School of Business Administration 
and Economics core courses and departmental approval. In- 
tegrative cases from top management viewpoint. Adminis- 
trative processes, ethical-legal-economic implications of 
business decisions, international applications; organization 
theory and policy formulation, individual and team efforts. 
Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

453 Power and Politics in Business Organizations (3) 
Prerequisites: Management 339, 340 and senior standing. 
Power and influence models as alternatives to quantitative 
decision-making methods. Used in the organizational/ 
political setting of business to improve understanding of be- 
havior and managerial effectiveness. 

454 MIS Analysis and Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339, 340; Manag Sci 362, 408; 
Accounting 302. Strategies for developing I/S applications. 
Life cycle phases; feasibility studies; project management; 


Managemeni 


system requirements; system optimization; structured sys- 
tem design; conversion and maintenance. Seminar, case 
studies and laboratory supported projects. 

494 Seminar in Management Information Systems (3) 
Prerequisites: 300-level business core courses, Accounting 
302, Management 344, 444 (or 454), and Manag Sci 300. 
Senior seminar and applications in the design. Implementa- 
tion and use of management decision /information systems. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division management 
courses, including Management 339, major in management 
or international business, consent of department internship 
adviser and at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semes- 
ter in residence at the university. Planned and supervised 
work experience. May be repeated for credit up to a total of 
six units. CredIt/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, 
and approval by faculty sponsor and department chair of 
proposed statement of work. Open to qualified students de- 
siring to pursue directed Independent inquiry. May be re- 
peated for credit. Not open to students on academic proba- 
tion. 

516 Organizational Theory and Management of 
Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Manag Sci 514 (may 
be taken concurrently). Accounting 510, Economics 515. 
Modern organization theory and application in utility- 
creating operations. Interpersonal behavior, planning, con- 
trol, organizing, directing, communication, production and in- 
formation systems, and measures of effectiveness. Interna- 
tional applications. Business ethics and relationships to 
society and politics. Graduate discussion and research re- 
ports. 

518 Legal Environment of Business (2) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Philosophy, institu- 
tions and role of law in business. Legal implications inherent 


in business decisions. Business ethics. Case studies in ar- 
eas of agency, partnerships, corporations, product liability, 
employment and trade regulations. 

524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and 
Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 
518 or equivalent. Human behavior in organizations, studies 
in organizational theories, and administrative action. 

542 Seminar in Labor-Management Relations (3) 
Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 
518. A seminar that focuses on various aspects of the labor- 
management relationship, issues in collective bargaining, 
the laws governing the relationship, contract administration, 
grievance handling, dispute settlement and arbitration. Ne- 
gotiation simulation and case analyses. 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 
518, or equivalent. Cases, problems and significant person- 
nel administration literature in personnel administration and 
human relations. 

547 Comparative Management (3) 

Management practices and processes in five geographical 
areas; market-structures and management characteristics 
different from those in the United States. Constraints which 
vary between countries because of cultural, legal, economic 
and/or political differences. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
project. Student will select and have approved a project pro- 
posal. conduct the project and prepare a formal analysis 
and report. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor 
and consent of department chair. May be repeated for cred- 
it. Not open to students on academic probation. 


Management 


Management Information Systems 


Coordinator: Dorothy Heide 
Coordinator’s Office: Langsdorf Hall 661 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentration in Management Information 
Systems 

Minor in Management Information Systems 
Committee 

Eugene Corman (Accounting) 

Zvi Drezner (Management Science) 

Richard Gilman (Management) 

Dorothy Heide (Management) 

Jodha Khalsa (Accounting) 

Ram Singhania (Management Science) 

Robert Vanasse (Accounting) 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, 
provides information on admissions, curriculum and 
graduation requirements; registration and grading 
procedures: residence and similar academic mat- 
ters. In addition, advising about curriculum content 
and career opportunities is available from the coor- 
dinator and the committee members listed above. 

INTRODUCTION 

Management information systems are computer 
based information systems. These systems aid man- 
agement in making decisions and assist in imple- 
menting and controlling management policies. Man- 
agement Information systems are used In business, 
industry and government operations. Applications In- 
clude airline reservations, banking transactions, 
crime prevention networks, election returns, real es- 
tate assessment, tax records, newspaper data- 
bases, sports statistics and computer assisted 
learning. 

Management Information systems Incorporate the 
use of data processing equipment, such as comput- 
ers and their peripherals. Computer software Is used 
to create, maintain and retrieve information. Tech- 
niques include mathematical modeling and statis- 


tics, integrated with modern computer technology. 
These methods are applied to systems manage- 
ment, programming design, analysis of information 
flow, decision support, database organization, small 
business problems, data communication networking 
and distributed processing. 

Prizes in Management Information Systems 
Outstanding Management Information Systems 
Undergraduate Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Infor- 
mation Systems Concentration.” 

MINOR IN MANAGEMENT INFORMATION 
SYSTEMS * 

This minor surveys modern computer methods and 
the development of information-systems. Emphasis 
is placed on systems which aid management deci- 
sion-making. Students must earn a grade of at least 
C in each course listed below. 

Accounting 201 A Elementary Accounting (3) 
Management 344 Introduction to Systems 
Concepts (3) 

Management Science 266 Introduction to Informa- 
tion Systems & Computer Programming (3) 
Management Science 270 File Concepts 
and COBOL Programming (4) 

Management Science 300 Elements of Information 
Systems Design and Data Communication (3) 
Management Science 408 Data Base Management 
Systems (3) 

NOTE: Manag Sci 265, 270 and/or 408 may be 
waived for students who have taken these 
courses, or their equivalents, as part of their 
major. However, students must complete a 
minimum of 12 units for the minor, so that if 
all three courses are waived, 3 units of 
electives (to be approved by the MIS Program 
Coordinator), must be added. Recommended 
electives include Management Science 302, 
310, 404, 409, 411 and 418. 


* Students with a major in business administration may not minor in manage- 
ment information systems. Such students should consult the curriculum 
for concentration In management Information systems. 


Management Information Systems 


Department of 
Management Science 


Department Chair: Zvi Drezner 
Department Office: Langsdorf Mali 540 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Management Science 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Management Science 
Master of Science in Management Science 

Concentration in Management Information 
Systems 

Concentration in Operations Research 
Concentration in Statistics 

Faculty 

Lutchminia Bilici, Shu-Jen Chen, Steven Curl, 

Roger Dear, Zvi Drezner, Ben Edmondson, 

Nicholas Farnum, Daryoush Farsi, S. Hanizavareh, 
William Heitzman, Bhushan Kapoor, Mabel Kung, 
Bharpat Lakhanpal, Ram Lai, William Lau, 

John Lawrence, Dole Minh, Barry Pasternack, 

Sorel Reisman, Herbert Rutemiller, Joseph Sherif, 
Sohan Sihota, Ram Singhania, LaVerne Stanton, 
David Stoller, Ronald Suich, 

Viswanth Yegnanarayanan 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, 
provides information on admissions, curriculum and 
graduation requirements; registration and grading 
procedures; residence and similar academic mat- 
ters. In addition, the Management Science Depart- 
ment provides advising about curriculum content and 
career opportunities: 

Graduate Program: John Lawrence, David Stoller 

Statistics: Sohan Sihota, LaVerne Stanton, Ronald 
Suich 

Information Systems: Shu-Jen Chen, Mabel Kung, 
Ram Lai, William Lau, Ram Singhania 

Operations Research: Roger Dear, John Lawrence, 
David Stoller 

INTRODUCTION 

Management Science is the application of the scien- 
tific method to decision-making in business and gov- 
ernment. In practice, nearly all management science 
problems involve solutions using computers. Three 
of the major disciplines in management science are 
operations research, statistics and information sys- 
tems. Operations research uses mathematical and 
simulation models to provide decision-makers with 


Management Science 


quantitative information pertaining to complex busi- 
ness situations. Statistics assists decision-makers 
by using techniques designed to draw inferences 
from experimental and sampling data. Information 
systems focus on the application of modern comput- 
er technology to provide accurate and relevant data 
to aid decision-making. 

Situations that require operations research tech- 
niques arise in all areas of business: accounting, fi- 
nance, production, marketing, and research and de- 
velopment. Among the problems addressed by 
operations research techniques are the determina- 
tion of inventory strategies, the allocation of scarce 
resources and the design of service systems. Oth- 
ers include bidding in competitive environments, se- 
lection of equipment replacement strategies and 
scheduling the completion of large projects. 

The statistician Is often Involved In activities such as 
sales forecasting, quality control and financial anal- 
ysis. Statistics is also concerned with model build- 
ing and the design of experiments dealing with prod- 
uct testing, surveys and sampling. 

Information systems Is concerned with the manage- 
ment of large databases and the efficient reporting 
of timely information to decision makers. It relates 
to both the data processing hardware and the com- 
puter software. The hardware includes the computer 
and its peripheral equipment. The software is used 
to create, maintain and retrieve information. Informa- 
tion systems methods integrate mathematical mod- 
eling and statistics with modern information and 
computer technology. These methods are applied to 
systems management, analysis of information flow, 
and programming design. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the 
Department of Management Science offers courses 
which may be included In the Single Waiver Program 
in Business. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching 
credentials is found in the Teaching Credential Pro- 
grams section of this catalog and is also available 
from the Department of Secondary Education. Stu- 
dents interested In exploring careers in teaching at 
the elementary or secondary school levels should 
contact the Office of Admission to Teacher Educa- 
tion, Education Classroom 207. 

Prizes in Management Science 

Outstanding Management Science Undergraduate 
Award 

Outstanding Management Science Graduate Student 
Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management 
Science Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Sci- 
ence Concentration.” 


MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 

The Master of Science in Management Science pro- 
gram provides the conceptual understanding and 
technical competence for a career in management 
science. Emphasis is placed on the use of scientific 
method to allocate resources so as to maximize 
profit or minimize cost. Specializations include oper- 
ations research, management information systems 
and statistics. These techniques are widely used in 
both private business and public enterprise. Employ- 
ment opportunities Include positions such as man- 
agement analyst, data processing manager, statisti- 
cian and forecaster. 

The M.S. in Management Science program is sched- 
uled especially for students who are employed full 
time. Courses are offered during the late afternoon 
and evening. 

The curriculum should appeal to students with under- 
graduate degrees in business administration, com- 
puter science, mathematics, engineering or science. 
For students with an undergraduate degree In busi- 
ness administration, the 10-course (30-unlt) curricu- 
lum may be completed In one year (full time) or 2 1/2 
years (part time). In addition to a three-course sur- 
vey of management science methods, the curriculum 
includes management science applications, elec- 
tives, and a terminal research project. Students with 
a bachelor’s degree in a field other than business 
administration must first complete the eight M.B.A. 
Foundation Courses (26 units) or equivalent under- 
graduate courses. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university In Orange 
County accredited by the American Assembly of 
Collegiate Schools of Business. This assures a rig- 
orous program, a well-qualified faculty, high stan- 
dards for students, and access to an extensive li- 
brary system. The qualifications of the M.S. in 
Management Science faculty include advanced de- 
grees in operations research, statistics and applied 
mathematics; extensive computer experience; and 
practical experience In business, industry and gov- 
ernment. Cal State Fullerton is the only campus with- 
in The California State University offering an M.S. in 
Management Science. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business 
Administration and Economics require “classified 
SBAE status” and are open only to students with 
classified standing in the M.S. in Management Sci- 
ence, M.S. In Taxation, M.A. in Economics, M.B.A. or 
M.S. in Accountancy programs. 

Students meeting the following requirements will be 
admitted to postbaccalaureate unclassified stand- 
ing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution 
accredited by a regional accrediting association, 
or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.6 in the last 60 
semester units attempted and In good standing at 
last college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may 
enroll in undergraduate courses (100 through 400 le- 
vel) but are generally ineligible for graduate busi- 
ness courses (600 level). Such students may wish 


224 

Mi Management Science 


to take undergraduate courses which are necessary 
to meet the requirements for classified standing 
(see below). Upon completing the requirements, the 
student may file an “Application for Change of Aca- 
demic ObjectIveGraduate” requesting admission to 
the M.S. in Management Science program. Admis- 
sion to the university as a postbaccalaureate un- 
classified student does not constitute admission to 
the M.S. In Management Science program, does not 
confer priority, nor does It guarantee future admis- 
sion. Students planning to apply for admission to the 
M.S. in Management Science program should confer 
with the graduate adviser in the School of Business 
Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be admitted to the M.S. in Management 
Science program with conditionally classified stand- 
ing: 

3. Combination of grade-point average and score on 
the Graduate Management Admission Test 
(GMAT) sufficient to yield a score of at least 950 
according to one of the following formulas. Due to 
limited facilities and resources In the School of 
Business Administration and Economics, a higher 
score may be required of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA Is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
+ GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or 
GMAT is below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
+ GMAT - 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units 
of course work,* then score = (GPA x 200) -f 
GMAT - 100. 

Note: Conditionally classified students may take a 
limited number of graduate courses (500 level) sub- 
ject to the approval of the graduate adviser of the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. 
Students may take whatever courses are necessary 
to fulfill requirement 4 (below) while enrolled as con- 
ditionally classified students. In addition, a maximum 
of 9 units (three courses) from the M.S. in Manage- 
ment Science curriculum may be taken while in con- 
ditionally classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional require- 
ments will be advanced to classified standing. Such 
students are eligible to take graduate courses for 
which they are qualified. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business ad- 
ministration which meets the requirements stated 
in this catalog for such degrees. The degree must 
include calculus and computer programming 
equivalent to passing Mathematics 135, Business 
Calculus (3 units), and Management Science 264, 
Introduction to Computer Programming (2 units), 
with grades of at least C. Courses in the major are 
to be no more than seven years old, and must have 
at least a 3.0 (B) grade-point average. Courses 
with grades lower than C must be repeated. Ap- 
plicants with a bachelors's degree in a field other 
than Business Administration may meet this re- 
quirement by passing the courses in calculus and 
computer programming (above) with grades of at 
least C, and also the Foundation Courses within 


the curriculum of the Master of Business 
Administration (26 units, including Accounting 510; 
Economics 515; Finance 517; Management 
516, 518; Management Science 513, 514 and 
M arketing 519). 

•All work within any given quarter or semester must be included even 
though that will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to be 
included In the last 60 semester units may come only from the following: 
(1) work taken in postbaccalaureate status during the last seven years 
toward fulfilling M.S. in Management Science course work require- 
ments: (2) units taken under a prescribed remedial program agreed to 
by the Associate Dean, School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics; (3) units earned prior to the bachelor’s degree. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curflculum requires 30 semester units of course 
work beyond the baccalaureate degree. At least 18 
of the 30 units required for the degree must be at the 
graduate level. A grade-point average of 3.0 (B) is 
required. Any study plan course In which a D Is re- 
ceived must be repeated and must receive at least 
a C grade regardless of the overall GPA of the stu- 
dent. 

The requirement for a concentration is to satisfacto- 
rily complete at least 15 units of courses (required 
and/or elective) In a specified field: Management In- 
formation Systems, Operations Research or Statis- 
tics. A concentration is not required for the degree. 

Required Courses (9 units) 

Manag Scl 526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis 
and Experimental Design (3) 

Manag Sci 550 Special Topics on Information Sys- 
tems Design and Data Communication (3) 
and either hAanag Sci 560 Advanced Deterministic 
Models (3) 

or Manag Sci 561 Advanced Probabilistic 
Models (3) 

Management Science Applications and Electives 
(18 units) 

Courses to be selected in consultation with, and ap- 
proved by, the student’s adviser from the following: 

Applications in Business and Economics (3 units) 

Accounting 51 1 Seminar in Managerial 
Accounting (3) 

Note: Students with credit for cost accounting may 
substitute Accounting 521, Seminar In Administra- 
tive Accounting (3) 

Economics 502 Adv. Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial 
Management (3) 

Management 444 Project Management (3) 
or Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing 
Problems (3) 

Electives (15 units) 

Courses may be chosen from one or more of the fol- 
lowing fields: 

Operations Research: 

A general approach to decision-making based on 
scientific method. 


Management Science 


Manag Sci 560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 
Manag Sci 561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 
Manag Sci 580 Linear Programming (3) 

Manag Sci 585 Queueing and Stochastic 
Processes In Business and Economics (3) 

Management Information Systems: 

Computer methods for collecting, analyzing and re- 
porting data to aid in management decision making. 

Manag Sci 404 Analysis of Information 
Systems (3) 

Manag Sci 408 Data Base Management 
Systems (3) 

or Manag Sci 555 Data Structures and Data Base 
Management (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 
Manag Sci 41 1 Data Process with Small 
Computers (3) 

Manag Sci 416 Computer Performance 
Evaluation (3) 

Manag Sci 418 Privacy, Security and Data 
Process (3) 

Statistics: 

Collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data. 

Manag Sci 420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 
Manag Sci 422 Surveys and Sample Design and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 461 Statistical Theory for Management 
Science (4) 

Manag Sci 467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 
Manag Sci 572 Design of Experiments (3) 

Manag Sci 575 Multivariate Analysis (3) 


business data processing. Micro Computer applications and 
hands-on examples in a microcomputer classroom. 

265L Computer Programming Lab (1) 

Corequisite: Management Science 265. Hands-on computer 
programming experience for common business problems us- 
ing spread sheets, word processing, BASIC, data base man- 
agement and graphics software. 

270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (4) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 264 or 265 or Computer 
Science 1 12 or equivalent. Structured COBOL; multiple-level 
table handling, subscripting and indexing; file organization 
documentation; report generation; sequential file updating. 
(Same as Computer Science 270) 

300 Elements of Information System Design and Data 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 270. Search, sort; tape 
and disk; record format layouts, storage capacity, I/O tim- 
ings; structures; COBOL Illustrations; data communications 
fundamentals; computer networks. 

302 Software Systems for Decision Support (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 265 and Finance 320 
and Accounting 302. Roles and uses of computer supported 
decision modeling and analysis packages in the context of 
modern management. Formulation and implementation of 
models. Case studies and computer projects. 

310 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 270 or consent of the in- 
structor. Advanced COBOL features: indexed and direct file 
processing, report writer, sort feature, declarative and link- 
age sections, segmentation. Overlay structure, survey of job 
control language, libraries. Direct access. Hardware de- 
vices. 


Variable Topic: 

Manag Sci 590 Seminar in Management 
Science (3) 

Terminal Evaluation 

Manag Sci 576 Business Modeling and Simulation 
Comprehensive Exam 


Management Science Courses 

263 Introduction to Information Systems and Micro- 
computer Applications (2) 

Concepts of micro and mainframe computers and peripheral 
equipment; hardware and software concepts; representa- 
tion of Data; auxiliary storage and file organization; data 
communications. Hands-on examples of business applica- 
tions in micro-computer classroom. Students may not re- 
ceive credit for both Management Science 263 and 265. 

264 Introduction to Computer Programming (2) 

Computer programming in the BASIC language, including file 
processing and other applications to business data pro- 
cessing. 

265 Introduction to Information Systems and Computer 
Programming (3) 

Introduction to information systems; computer organization 
and problem-solving concepts; computer programming in the 
BASIC language, including file processing; applications to 


333 File Structures in Basic Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 265, Accounting 201 A, 
Accounting 20 IB, or consent of instructor. Advanced BASIC 
features: sequential and relative files, sorting and search- 
ing, error checking and business system design. 

361 Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and 
Economics (4) 

Prerequisites: Math 135 and Management Science 265 or 
equivalents. Probability concepts; expectations; descriptive 
statistics; discrete and continuous random variables; sam- 
pling; estimation; hypothesis testing; simple and multiple re- 
gression; time series; forecasting; nonparametric statistics. 

362 Management Science Methods in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 (may be taken con- 
currently). Mathematical methods and their application to 
business and economic problems, e.g., production control, 
scheduling, inventory control, PERT, decision and network 
analyses, simulation and queueing. Elementary mathemati- 
cal optimization and production models. 

363 Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 or both Math 335 
or 338 and Computer Science 112 or 121. The basic con- 
cepts of management science and its relationship to eco- 
nomics and decision theory. Optimization in continuous mod- 
els, linear programming, queueing and inventory models, 
network analysis and dynamic programming, and production 
scheduling and control. 


226 Management Science 


404 Analysis of Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300 or both Manage- 
ment Science 270 and Computer Science 331 or equivalent. 
Software feasibility studies; information processing sys- 
tems; data processing project organization; cost effective- 
ness and system optimization, hardware /software selec- 
tion; structured systems design; case studies and computer 
projects. 

408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 300 and Management 
344. (Prerequisite for computer science majors is Computer 
Science 331.) Integrated data base systems; logical organi- 
zation; data description language (DDL); data manipulation 
language (DML); data independence; relational data bases; 
selected data base management systems (DBMS). (Same 
as Computer Science 408). 

409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300. Hardware and soft- 
ware developments in transmission technology; distributed 
data bases; network architectures; ISO layered models; In- 
terface problems; distributed network design and cost anal- 
ysis; network topology and protocols, tradeoffs among dis- 
tributed and centralized processing systems, interface 
problems and case studies. 

411 Data Processing with Small Computers (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300. Small computer 
technology in data processing; selecting and designing busi- 
ness oriented small computer systems; implementing, main- 
taining, supporting and evaluating these systems. 

416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 

(Same as Computer Science 416) 

418 Privacy, Security and Data Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300. Security and priva- 
cy problems associated with the use of computer systems; 
ways to minimize risks and losses. 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Statistical methods 
applied to problems in business and industry; practical multi- 
ple regression models with computer solutions; basic tech- 
niques in time-series analysis of trend, cyclical and season- 
al components; correlation of time-series and forecasting 
with the computer. 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Principles for de- 
signing business and economic surveys. Applications in ac- 
counting, marketing research, economic statistics and the 
social sciences. Sampling; simple random, stratified and 
multistage design; construction of sampling frames; detect- 
ing and controlling non-sampling errors. 

440 Deterministic Models in Management Science (4) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 362. Deterministic math- 
ematical modeling and solution techniques, including inter- 
mediate linear programming, network models. Integer pro- 
gramming, dynamic programming. 

441 Probabilistics Models in Management Science (4) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 362. Probabilistic math- 
ematical modeling and solution techniques for business, in- 
cluding quality control and forecasting models, Markov pro- 
cesses, intermediate queueing theory, probabilistic 
inventory models. 


448 Computer Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 
Prerequisites: Management Science 264 and 361 (or equiv- 
alents) and Management Science 362 (or 363). Computer 
generation of discrete and continuous random variables, 
their use in computer simulation. Applications Include queue- 
ing, communications, computer systems, economics, gam- 
ing, inventory, scheduling and other management science 
topics. 

461 Statistical Theory for Management Science (4) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Review of mathe- 
matical topics needed for statistical theory. Distribution, 
theory, moment generating functions, central limit theorem. 
Estimation theory, maximum likelihood, least squares estl^ 
mation. Hypothesis testing, Neyman-Pearson Lemma. Likeli- 
hood ratio tests. Use of statistical software packages. 

467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Control charts for 
variables, percent defective and defects. Tolerances, pro- 
cess capacity; special control charts, acceptance sampling 
and batch processing problems. Bayesian aspects of pro- 
cess control. 

495 Internship (1>3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and 362, (or 363) 
and major in management science, or Management Science 
300 and major in management information systems or a ma- 
jor in international business, consent of department intern- 
ship adviser, and at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one 
semester in residence at the university. Planned and super- 
vised work experience. May be repeated for credit up to a 
total of six units. Credit/No Credit grading only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and either 362 or 
363, senior standing, and approval by the department chair. 
Open to qualified students desiring to pursue directed inde- 
pendent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open to stu- 
dents on academic probation. 

513 Statistical Analysis and Forecasting Techniques (4) 
Prerequisites: Math 135, Management Science 264 (or 
equivalents) and classified SBAE status. Basic probability 
and descriptive statistics; sampling techniques; estimation 
and hypothesis testing; simple and multiple regression, cor- 
relation analysis; forecasting; time series; computer pack- 
ages and other optional topics. 

514 Business Modeling and Solution Techniques (4) 
Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and classified 
SBAE status. Linear programming; Inventory; PERT-CPM; 
queueing; simulation, computer application and other option- 
al topics. 

526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis, and Experimental 
Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified 
SBAE status. Time Series Analysis. Trend, cyclical and sea- 
sonal components. Statistical decision theory. Fundamental 
principles of experimental design; interaction. Software 
packages. 

550 Special Topics on Information Systems Design and Data 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified 
SBAE standing. Information storage requirements; disk tim- 
ing considerations; file organization and processing charac- 
teristics; data structures; modern data communication sys- 
tems; computer networks. 


Management Science 


555 Data Structures and Data Base Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 550 and classified 
SBAE standing. File structures. Multiple-key retrieval file or- 
ganizations; Data Description Language (DDL) and Data Ma- 
nipulation Language (DML); Data independence; hierarchial, 
network and relational data bases. Students may not receive 
credit for both Management Science 408 and 555. 


560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified 
SBAE standing. Advanced linear programming, dynamic pro- 
gramming, integer programming, non-linear programming, 
business applications. Software packages and computer 
utilization. 


561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified 
SBAE standing. Stochastic processes, Markov processes, 
advanced queueing and inventory models. Reliability. Soft- 
ware packages and computer utilization. 


572 Design of Experiments (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 513. Experimental de- 
sign. Analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nested de- 
signs, confounding and factorial replications. 


575 Multivariate Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and 461. The least 
squares principle; estimation and hypothesis testing in lin- 
ear regression; multiple and curvilinear regression models; 
discriminant analysis; principle components analysis; appli- 
cation of multivariate analysis in business and industry. 


576 Business Modeling and Simulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 513 or equivalent. Theo- 
ry and application of modeling and simulation methodology. 
Probabilistic concepts In simulation; arrival pattern and ser- 
vice times; simulation languages and programming tech- 
niques; analysis of output; business applications. 

580 Linear Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 514. Theory and appli- 
cations of linear programming and extentions. Problem for- 
mulation and solution, simplex method, duality, sensitivity 
analyses, network, transportation and assignment models, 
and efficient computing techniques for specially structured 
problems. 

585 Queueing and Stochastic Processes in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and 514. Single 
and multichannel queueing systems of Markovian and gener- 
al arrival and departure streams; birth-death processes, 
cost models and optimization of queues; Markov analyses; 
introduction to renewal theory; reliability. 

590 Seminar in Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 526 and 560 and clas- 
sified SBAE status. Selected advanced topics and/or case 
studies in operations research, statistics, and/or manage- 
ment information systems, varying from semester to semes- 
ter. May be repeated for credit with consent of Instructor. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and consent of de- 
partment chair. May be repeated for credit. Not open to stu- 
dents on academic probation. 


228 Management Science 


Department of Marketing 


Department Chair: Irene Lange 

Business Writing Coordinator: John Brugaletta 

Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 626 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Marketing 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Marketing 
Faculty 

Robert Barath, William Bell, Grady Bruce, 

Scott Greene, Paul Hugstad, Robert Jones, 

Irene Lange, Ronald Long, Connie Pechmann, 
James Taylor, Robert Zimmer 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, 
provides information on admissions, curriculum and 
graduation requirements, registration and grading 
procedures, residence and similar academic mat- 
ters. In addition, the Marketing Department provides 
advising on curriculum content and career opportuni- 
ties: 

Advertising 
Industrial Marketing 
International Marketing 
Marketing Management 
Marketing Research 
Overall Career Advisement 


Retailing 

Sales Management 

INTRODUCTION 

Marketing is a basic 
wide range of activities. It includes studying mar- 
kets, planning products, pricing them, promoting 
them, selling them, and then delivering these prod- 
ucts to customers. People in wholesaling, retailing, 
advertising agencies, research firms and transpor- 
tation companies are all working in the marketing 
area. Any firm which is reviewing its product policies 
needs marketers to identify the market, choose the 
products, find where they can be sold and decide on 
a price for them. 

Seven program emphases are available to students 
which help to prepare for entry into the job market. 
They are designed to afford the opportunity to gain 
both quantitative and qualitative skills. At the same 
time, each emphasis retains sufficient flexibility to 
permit particular needs and interests to be pursued 
through elective course work. The emphases are 
advertising management, marketing management, 
marketing research, industrial marketing, retailing, 
sales management and international marketing. 


James Taylor 
Paul Hugstad 
Irene Lange 
William Beil 
Robert Barath 
Scott Greene 
Connie Pechmann 
Grady Bruce 
William Bell 
Robert Zimmer 


function, covering a 


Marketing 229 


Credential Information 

For students Interested in a teaching credential, the 
Department of Marketing offers courses which may 
be included In the Single Subject Waiver Program in 
Business. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching 
credentials is found In the Teaching Programs sec- 
tion of the catalog and is also available from the De- 
partment of Secondary Education. Students Interest- 
ed in exploring careers in teaching at the elementary 
or secondary school levels should contact the Of- 
fice of Admission to Teacher Education. 

Prizes in Marketing 

The Michael T. Ashton Memorial Scholarship for 
Outstanding Leadership. 

The Gordon S. Fyfe Memorial Award for Outstanding 
Academic Achievement. 

Outstanding Marketing Student Award. 

Sales and Marketing Executives, Inc. Orange County 
Award. 

American Marketing Association. Southern 
California Chapter Award. 

International Marketing Association Award. 

The Robert M. Olsen Scholarship Fund Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Marketing Concen- 
tration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
DEGREE 

See “Business Administration, Marketing Concen- 
tration.” 

Marketing Courses 

351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 or 210. How management mar- 
kets output of the enterprise and obtains revenue. Product 
management, pricing, promotion, distribution channels. Mar- 
keting’s role In socio-economic system from viewpoints of 
consumer, management, social responsibility and govern- 
ment in American and worldwide business. 

352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Structure, scope, and evalua- 
tion of retail institutions; introduction to retail accounting, 
pricing, and merchandise management; consumer behavior; 
identifying markets; defining and positioning the retail mix 
components to convey meaning and bring about differential 
response. 

354 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The management of the adver- 
tising function; the role of advertising in marketing strategy, 
budgetary considerations, allocation among media, mea- 
surement of effectiveness, administration and control, and 
its economic and social implications. Uses of Behavioral 
Lab. 

356 Professional Selling (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Salesmanship as an Interper- 
sonal Influence process. Selling using principles of human 
behavior. Selling skills and techniques. Uses the Behavioral 
Lab. 


358 Physical Distribution (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and Manag Sci 265. The physi- 
cal distribution system and its elements— packaging, trans- 
portation, warehousing and Inventory management. Physical 
distribution practices and problems leading to improved sys- 
tem design and effectiveness. 

359 Industrial Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Marketing of business goods 
and services to other businesses, government agencies, 
and social institutions by the manufacturer. Market analysis, 
sales forecasting, product strategy, effective use of sales 
force and industrial advertising media. 

370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Consumer buying patterns, mo- 
tivation and search behavior. The consumer decision- 
making process. Interdisciplinary concepts from economics, 
sociology, psychology, cultural anthropology and mass 
communications. Case analyses and research projects. 

379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and Manag Sci 361. Marketing 
research process: problem formulation, identifying data 
sources, selecting data collection and analysis techniques, 
preparing research reports. Selecting marketing problems 
for research. Lecture-discussion, cases. 

379L Marketing Research Lab (1) 

Corequisite: Marketing 379. Computer methods for solving 
marketing problems, including marketing planning and deci- 
sionmaking. Exercises using spreadsheet, statistical and 
database software. Exercises in data display. Uses comput- 
er lab. 

452 Advanced Salesmanship (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and 356. Negotiation style 
selling techniques; videotape, audio-tape, structured and 
unstructured role plays. Sales writing skills. Field case 
studies. 

454 Advertising Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 354. The Interrelationships of prod- 
uct planning, advertising management, sales management, 
financial management and corporate strategy in a competi- 
tive enrivonment. 

455 Management of the Sales Force (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The sales manager in organiza- 
tion; recruiting and selecting salesmen; sales training; for- 
mulating compensation and expense plans; supervising and 
stimulating sales activities; morale; sales planning; evaluat- 
ing salesmen; and distribution cost analysis. Uses the Be- 
havioral Lab. 

456 Retailing Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 352. Retail marketing and financial 
strategy planning; merchandise management, planning and 
control; the dynamics of change and the entrepreneurial 
function; opportunity analysis, strategy and planning. 

457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, Manag Sci 361 or consent of 
instructor. Marketing-management functions; scheduling, 
evaluating, control. The analysis of marketing processes 
and systems and the development of appropriate action rec- 
ommendations. 


Marketing 


458 International Marketing Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: at least one upper-division course in econom- 
ics, finance, management and marketing and senior stand- 
ing. Domestic marketing systems. Marketing problems 
across national boundaries and within various national mar- 
kets. Business policies, including ethical implications, for in- 
ternational business firms. Integrative cases. Individual and 
team efforts. 

459 Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing, two advanced marketing 
courses and marketing 379. Marketing problems of firm and 
society. Integrative interactions between marketing activi- 
ties and the Interfaces of marketing with finance and produc- 
tion. Case method and current readings. 

460 Marketing for Nonprofit Organizations (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Application of marketing tech- 
niques to the nonprofit sector. Use of marketing planning and 
research to develop effective marketing programs for orga- 
nizations in health care, education, the arts, public services 
and related fields. 

469 Industrial Marketing Strategy (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and 359 and Manag Sci 361. 
Specialized marketing techniques for industrial companies; 
marketing forecasting; industrial buying models; designing 
distribution networks; industrial pricing and industrial promo- 
tional programs. 

479 Research Problems in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 379. Marketing research practicum. 
Matching research methodologies to problems of market 
analysis, product planning, advertising, sales forecasting 
and other marketing activities. Alternative data collection 
and analysis techniques. Seminars, research projects. 

495 Internship (1*3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division marketing courses, 
including Marketing 351, major in marketing or international 
business, consent of department internship adviser, and at 
least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in resi- 
dence at the university. Planned and supervised work expe- 
rience. May be repeated for credit up to a total of six units. 
Credit /No Credit only. 


499 Independent Study (1*3) 

Prerequisites: marketing concentration, senior standing and 
approval by the department chair. Open to undergraduate 
students desiring to pursue directed independent Inquiry. 
May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on aca- 
demic probation. 


519 Marketing Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510, Economics 515, Manag Sci 
513, 514, Management 516, 518 (may be taken concurrent- 
ly) and classified SBAE status. Concepts, principles and 
techniques used in the administration of the marketing vari- 
ables. The role of marketing within the context of society 
and the business firm, social responsibility of business and 
international marketing. 


525 Seminar In Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 and classified SBAE status. 
Major marketing problems facing industry: definition of and 
organization for marketing task; demand analysis; decisions 
concerning product, price, promotion and trade channels. 
Use of case method and readings. 


558 Seminar in International Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 or equivalent and classified 
SBAE status. Comparative international marketing systems; 
managerial techniques and strategies in multinational and 
domestic firms engaged in export; and the impact of politi- 
cal, legal, social, economic and cultural forces upon the de- 
cision-making process. 


597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 


599 Independent Graduate Research (1*3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor 
and approval by department chair. May be repeated for 
credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


Marketing 


': ' ;• .; . '■ ■ .• ' on-?-’ ‘ ' 

' i'iv ' :■ .■ 

-...O ■. i-r. ^ : 

• :■; .' : . :0': -■ . r .•■■■. S >♦■: 

- ■• ■' ■ r,o . 

" ' , . ' . _ . ■ ;, , , ' ■ -■ V • /'Vj ; 

-v: ■;-‘J.'’' T, , . 0 y' j; ' / r ' 

•n - ->'■-••• , \' ‘ ^ i-‘ 

- (■••■,. \..r • ' f.‘' ’4^.' -^lo’ i?K>- ’ 

' iv":, ■ . ' ,■ '‘ylV.' '> ,.1 f - 0 • . .. 

^ 0 'f . '^ h 

■I- ■';■«?:: •. , ■ ': '■ :■ ' ■- M-n .■ ■: 

' . ,• ' -ir^V , •'■y o-mnr^e'i ■: 

'4jur^ '■■■. \ ■ ■ ' " . ' _ . i. 

'(y*':.';'^- •'■ ; » , •■■y n'i.' ■'; 

■ .' ■ . - yyC;-' . 

:'iO. 

■ ■ , IV. r 






■ ■■' ■ '■■'* ■' “■ ' 

; - ' • : fy ! '.lAyyy^y 


. ...i, ,. -b- '-. 

i> y»f:r.,.';r/'.i'v^V' U- '.- V • ,., .,.• .' . 

•;;....c n . •' ' 'y 'yi'.ur'i 

f.;j - ■p^v- ;i?. 


' 'it;' 1 noiti! h ^ b- ■ ; b . ; ; w :.• i 

■yoc; .^T .^yry',^ .6 .:4> ,b^.z 





' JniUii'v'/ •'.^♦v ■ ’.. .?L^ '••';■ SAS3 bybor:-:f. '.i '-by- 


' it/' v:: X. - f* > n’ .^e T<i ■ K”.-: ■' •. v ^’^ni 

ri ,r..-.r'''!y^'"‘’ m<^.rir: -• '.y-.-v . ■ 

' 'V ■ ■, ,, y r,: 





.. ,. V .... . .... -.. ■_ 

■ v->:. y:o .;:y«v.^ ;:v;v .yy-;'--,’; . 

- :. ".r^' .y^rvv r ^ ^ ,. '' - 

.4:*-.; ■ ..y;ro-'v' '; v:;:av 

•la v. 

•tv \y ..'-■•■i'ci -;- .; ' • ' 

h.-s -y'O.vilMi; ^ ^ iv- ■ , ' . ■- / 


- ,v.- yy-' -vv-. 

^ •■ •'■- :-/-r • •■:’• 

<'ii'iir.^vi ',- f>^' ;'-'^V-'f^ ^ : ■> '--j ti ' :•: - :. :J 

- c £’"■'■ by ’ •; 

•. ' v/. ... • 'ly U:'** 'Viy , .. ?^. :-t 

b, . V y" >;yy-' - . .• ., b ' : ■ ■■ .'‘t 

•■ ‘ . -y ; • ' '•- y . 

.'. .b'-:-. :-• ■; -•i'v.b .. .■ '. .■ ' •■■' 


by. -y ■.- ■•^.^ . ••-rr'-yv'-.-r'’' 

■ '■< ■! ■•^. v.. . y^i\h-0K \: '•' - 

' ■'>.■, <^b ■• ‘..•:-v1. r.-- y««'.v'V. . .v.r ' 

b ' rryb-* .b+’M- y‘ 

:*■•! . • ■■ - -.,• .;, -r V„ , - • ■ •• ■'' b:’ 

. Ir.;- ■ ■"■ b--*^' ■ : ; 

: ' ... ' . ’ "by.; . ■: '■ ^ ..A^ yboJ-O ; . 

^'y''2^y .■ ,. yb s^o i'V-- :.r 

■- bbz^b^<rivb;n.? 

'-.' .v-'V TO ;.b- 

y>:ibv;\ . • 'if' i: y"' ' 

■.■^: r-’ ; :'-'’&qy.b b' iri->?.y'OC y/; 

ogy rs. - b.'; ^ ,j^r’"bni>?o iccyi -iiyo; 

hf> . ^ ' . ,. a'H b\ .v^tn*; -yb? J? 

'"''bby ‘fb'. ' ■ y-'" • y. . b ■ ;, v.b;_;bb9’‘ Sti b’-'-' •-'■bb'b 

■ ,y'.--' bb'-^lb \i^' ':'b ’b 



^ ' ■ 


School of 
Engineering 
and Computer Science 

Dean: John C. Bilello 

Programs Offered 

Computer Science (B.S., Minor, M.S.) 
Engineering (B.S., M.S.) 

Option in Civil Engineering and Engineering 
Mechanics 

Option in Electrical Engineering 

Option in Mechanical Engineering 

Option in Engineering Science 

Option In Systems Engineering (M.S. only) 

The curricula of the School of Engineering and Com- 
puter Science are designed to prepare students for 
careers in engineering and other technical fields and 
for further study and specialization in advanced 
graduate work. The faculty of the school is actively 
involved not only In instruction and scholarship but 
also in the advisement of students in the school on 
topics relating to the planning of career and program 
goals. Cooperative education internship programs 
are available In each of the school’s departments. 

Special School Requirements 

Electrical Engineering: Because of current excess 
student demand, this option has been declared im- 
pacted. This means that students must meet sec- 
ondary admission criteria before being admitted to 
the program. For first-time freshmen, the eligibility 
index (see Admission Requirements) generally must 
be higher than for admission to the university. The 
exact level for admission varies from year to year 
depending on the applicant pool. For transfer stu- 
dents, a minimum of two semesters of calculus is 
generally required, along with a college G.P.A. 
higher than that required for general admission. 


233 


Recommended Preparation: For a career in comput- 
er science or engineering, sound preparation in 
mathematics and science is essential. High school 
preparation should include: 

• at least three, preferably four, years mathematics 

• chemistry and/or physics, preferably both 

• two or three years of foreign language. 

Community college preparation should include at the 
minimum: 

• college writing 

• calculus 

• college chemistry and/or physics 

• first course in the major. 

Qualifying Examinations: Enrollment in introductory 
courses is restricted to those who are adequately 
prepared, as shown by performance on qualifying 
examinations. In addition, the Entry Level Mathemat- 
ics (ELM) examination Is required of all students. 

Undergraduate Student Advisement 

Undergraduate students should call the department 
office of their major to arrange for advising and ap- 
proval of their study plan. University policy requires 
students to see an adviser each of their first two se- 
mesters and every year thereafter. Three critical 
times for advising are before registering for the first 
semester, when selecting electives for the study 
plan, and two semesters before graduation for a 
graduation check. Most departments prefer to ad- 
vise their majors more frequently. 


Students interested in programs in the school, but 
without a declared major should call the Office of the 
Dean for advisement. 

Graduate Student Advisement 

Graduate students should consult the graduate ad- 
viser in their major department before registering for 
the first semester. No more than nine units may be 
completed before an approved study plan Is filed. 

Program in General Education 

Because of high unit requirements for the Bachelor 
of Science in Engineering, these programs have 
modified requirements for general education. Stu- 
dents should consult the department for particulars. 

Majors in the School of Engineering and Computer 
Science should take mathematics and other 
courses in related fields early. General education 
courses normally should be scheduled throughout 
the study sequence. 

Minority Engineering Program (MEP) 

The school sponsors a Minority Engineering Pro- 
gram designed to provide special academic support 
for under represented minority students (Black, 
Mexican American, Puerto Rican and American Indi- 
an) who are majoring in engineering or computer sci- 
ence. A summer orientation program, scheduling as- 
sistance, a study center, student tutoring, and 
special faculty help are provided to students in the 
program. Interested students should contact the 
dean’s office for further information. 



School of Engineering and Computer Science 


Department of Computer 

Science 

Department Chair: Nick Mousouris 
Vice Chair: Demetrios Michaiopoulos 
Department Office: Engineering 100G 
Programs Offered 

Bacheior of Science in Computer Science 
Master of Science in Computer Science 
Minor in Computer Science 
Faculty 

Reza Ahmadnia, Morteza Anvarl, Carl Cagan, David 
Falconer, John Giese, Floyd Holliday, Martin Katz, 
Edward McCormick, Demetrios Michaiopoulos, 
Charles Mosmann, Nick Mousouris, Frank Pagan, 
Gene Rose, Edward Sowell, Melanie Wolf- Greenberg 

INTRODUCTION 

Computer science is the science of information. The 
computer scientist is Interested in: effective ways to 
represent and organize information; algorithms to 
transform information; languages in which to ex- 
press algorithms; the logical structures of devices 
which translate or interpret such languages; the the- 
oretical techniques for insuring the accuracy and 
minimizing the cost of such processes; and the 
philosophical foundations of such mechanical intelli- 
gence. 

The computer science major is designed to provide 
the student with the foundations of the discipline, as 
well as the opportunity for specialization. Six objec- 
tives are addressed: (1) development of the ability 
to write programs in a reasonable amount of time, 
that work correctly, are well documented and are 
readable; (2) identification of general types of prob- 
lems that are amenable to computer solutions, and 
the various tools necessary for solving such prob- 
lems; (3) development of the ability to work either as 
an individual or as a member of a software develop- 
ment team; (4) development of an understanding of 
basic computer architecture; (5) preparation to pur- 
sue in-depth training in one or more application ar- 
eas or further education in computer science; (6) de- 
velopment of the ability to write and speak 
effectively. 

As a result, the degree prepares students for ca- 
reers in applications programming, systems pro- 
gramming and systems analysis as well as entrance 
into graduate and professional schools. The curricu- 
lum emphasizes fundamental concepts exemplified 
by various types of programming languages, com- 
puter architectures, operating systems and data 
structures. 


Computer Science 


BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Each Computer Science major is required to com- 
plete a minimum of 66 units of coursework related to 
the major. The degree program assumes that the 
student has already obtained a working knowledge 
of at least one high level programming language 
such as Pascal or BASIC. Students without this 
knowledge may be required to take up to six addi- 
tional units of coursework beyond those normally re- 
quired by the major. 

No course taken as part of the major requirements 
can be taken on a Credit /No Credit basis, unless the 
course is offered only on a Credit /No Credit basis, 
or if the course is passed by a challenge examina- 
tion. Further, no class with a grade of “D” or lower 
will be counted toward the major. 

Computer Science Placement Examination 

Before entry into the first three courses required by 
the major (Computer Science 231, 241, and 245), 
the student is required to take a placement examina- 
tion or complete the required prerequisite courses 
offered by the Department. 

Computer Science Core (43 units) 
Lower-Division Core (25 units) 

Computer Scl 231 File System Concepts (3) 
Computer Sci 241 Low-level Language Systems (3) 
Computer Sci 245 Computer Logic and Architec- 
ture (3) 

Computer Scl 245L Computer Logic and Architec- 
ture Laboratory (2) 

Mathematics 150A,B Analytical Geometry and 
Calculus (4,4) 

Mathematics 270A,B Mathematical Structures (3,3) 
Upper-Division Core (18 units) 

Computer Sci 31 1 Concepts Software Documenta- 
tion (3) 

Computer Scl 321 High-level LanguageConcepts(3) 
Computer Scl 331 lnformationStructureConcepts(3) 
Computer Sci 351 Operating Systems Concepts (3) 
Computer Sci 373 Formal Method Concepts (3) 
Mathematics 338 Statistics Applied to Natural Sci- 
ences (3) 

Upper Division Writing Requirement 

Computer Science 311, which meets the University 
requirement for an upper division writing course, 
must be completed before the senior year. 

Programming Language Workshops (3 units) 

Three units of programming workshop classes must 
be selected from Computer Science 223A-Z (High- 
level Language Workshops), 270 (File Concepts 
and COBOL Programming), and 243A-Z (Low-level 
Language Workshops). Each section of Computer 
Science 223A-Z and 243A-Z is devoted to a different 
language and the student may choose any combina- 
tion of sections to meet the requirement. Course de- 
scriptions should be consulted for specific details. 


Technical Electives (20-22 units) 

Each Computer Science major must take 20-22 units 
of technical electives which must be approved in ad- 
vance by a departmental adviser. These electives 
shall constitute a coherent body of study consistent 
with the student’s professional and educational ob- 
jectives. No more than six units of course work may 
be selected from Computer Science courses num- 
bered 490 through 499. Also, Computer Science 495 
may not be repeated for credit. 

MINOR IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

A Computer Science minor shall consist of 21 units 
of course work which shall include Computer Sci- 
ence 131, 231, 241, 245 and six units of adviser- 
approved upper division computer science elective 
courses and 3 units of programming language work- 
shops (Computer Science 223A-Z, 243A-Z, 270). 
The upper division courses must be taken in resi- 
dence. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally 
Classified 

A bachelor’s degree from an accredited institution 
with a grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 
60 semester units attempted is required. Additional- 
ly, nine units of computer science course work with 
a grade-point average of at least 3.0 is required. Any 
deficiencies must be made up and will require six or 
more units of adviser-approved course work with at 
least a 3.0 average In addition to those required for 
the degree. The applicant must submit Graduate Re- 
cord Examination scores. Normally a combined Ver- 
bal and Quantitative score of 1 100 is required for 
admission. 

Classified Graduate Standing 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1. Approval of a formal study plan (see description 
below) by the Computer Science Graduate Com- 
mittee and the dean of graduate studies. 

2. Satisfactory completion of no more than nine units 
on the study plan. 

3. Satisfactory completion of the following courses 
or equivalents including prerequisites: Computer 
Science 223, 231, 241, 245, 245L, 321, 331, 351, 
373, 408, 423 and Mathematics 270A,B. 

4. Completion of requirements for meeting the Grad- 
uate Level Writing Requirement. 

Talented professional computer scientists have tra- 
ditionally come from a diversity of undergraduate 
preparations. The listed courses have been careful- 
ly selected to provide an adequate basis for gradu- 
ate work while not unfairly precluding admission of 
persons without a bachelor’s degree in computer 
science. It should be noted, however, that each of 
these courses has prerequisites and the student 
without preparation in a closely related degree may 
have considerable work to complete beyond the 
courses listed here. Reference should be made to 


236 Computer Science 


the catalog descriptions for prerequisites of each 
course deficiency. 

These courses and their prerequisites constitute 
program prerequisites. Students are advised not to 
enroll in courses for which they have prerequisite 
deficiencies. Students with experience equivalent to 
any or all of these prerequisite courses are encour- 
aged to satisfy such prerequisites by advanced 
placement examination. Consult the computer sci- 
ence graduate adviser for further information. 

Study Plan 

Prior to admission to classified graduate standing in 
computer science, the student with the aid of the 
computer science graduate adviser shall prepare 
and submit for approval by the computer science de- 
partment graduate committee a formal study plan 
consisting of a minimum of 30 units of 400 level and 
graduate course work. 

This shall include Computer Science 412, 461, 563, 
589, 597 or 598, and 15 units of electives (9 units 
must be at the 500-level). At least 15 units shall rep- 
resent courses offered by the Department of Com- 
puter Science. Courses offered by other disciplines, 
not listed here, and related to the students’ objec- 
tives in computer science may be approved by peti- 
tion to the Department of Computer Science. 

All course work In the study plan must be completed 
with a GPA of at least 3.0. 

Graduate Student Advisement 

The graduate program adviser provides overall su- 
pervision of the graduate program. The individual 
student chooses his adviser from the full-time facul- 
ty of the Computer Science Department on the basis 
of his particular interests and objectives. 


Computer Science Courses 

Prerequisites for computer science courses may be 

waived only by written consent of a departmental ad- 
viser. 

101 The Computing World (3) 

The Impact of computers on today’s society. Fundamental 
computer concepts and problem solving techniques. The 
role of computers in business, industry, education, govern- 
ment and our everyday lives. 

103 Introduction to Personal Computer Applications (3) 
Introduction to use and application of personal computers: 
word processing, spread-sheets, database systems, com- 
puter languages. Evaluation of personal computers and soft- 
ware. (2 hours lecture/ 2 hours activity per week) 

112 Introduction to Computer Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: three years of high school mathematics includ- 
ing two years of algebra. Provides programming experience 
in BASIC programming language. Problem solving and struc- 
tured programming are emphasized. (2 hours lecture. 2 
hours laboratory) 

121 Programming Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: three years high school mathematics including 
trigonometry. An Introduction to programming of digital com- 
puters using Pascal subroutines, functions, and structure of 


algorithms; elementary input /output; arrays; strings, and 
data types; recursion. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours laboratory). 

123 Programming Concepts Review (1) 

Prerequisites: three years high school mathematics includ- 
ing trigonometry and sufficient score on Computer Science 
Placement Exam. Accelerated coverage of Computer Sci- 
ence 121 for students who wish to take Computer Science 
131 but lack sufficient knowledge of Pascal. 

131 Data Structures Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 121, 123, or three years 
high school mathematics including trigonometry and suffi- 
cient score on the Computer Science Placement Exam. The 
application of simple data structures including linked lists, 
stacks, multi-dimensional arrays and sequential text files. 
Formatted input/output, text editing, and non-numeric pro- 
cessing. 

223 High-level Language Workshops (1-3) 

Workshops in the use of various high-level programming lan- 
guages. Offered Credit /No Credit only. Prerequisites and 
unit values vary. 

223A Workshop in ADA (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. 

223B Workshop in Advanced ADA (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 223A. 

223D Workshop in PROLOG (2) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 131 and Mathematics 
270A. Workshop In Prolog (2). 

223F Workshop in FORTRAN-77 (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. (Not open to students 
who have completed Engineering 205.) 

223G Workshop in BASIC-PLUS (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. (Not open to students 
who have completed other course work in BASIC). 

223K Workshop in LISP (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. 

223N Workshop in Non procedural Programming (2) 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. 

223P Workshop in PL/I (2) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 131 or 270. 

2230 Workshop in Advanced PL/I (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 223P. 

223R Workshop in Report Program Generator (1) 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. 

223S Workshop in SNOBOL (1) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. 

223T Workshop in Threaded Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. 

223U Workshop in C (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. 

223Z Workshop in APL (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131. 

231 File System Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131 or sufficient score on 
the Computer Science Placement Exam. Characteristics 


Computer Science 


and utilization of bulk storage devices. B-trees and plex 
structures. Sequential and random access. 

241 Low-level Language Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 131 or sufficient score on 
the Computer Science Placement Exam. The structure of 
low-level computer languages. Machine, assembly, and 
macro language programming. Principles of assembler oper- 
ation. (Same as Electrical Engineering 241) 

243 Low-level Language Workshops (1) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 241. Workshops in the use 
of specific low-level programming languages. See list follow- 
ing. Offered Credit /No Credit only. 

243A Workshop In 6502 Assembly Language 

243C Workshop In CDC COMPASS 

243E Workshop in 68(X) Assembly Language 

243F Workshop In 68000 Assembly Language 

243 J Workshop Jn IBM Basic Assembly Language 

243M Workshop in Advanced MACRO- 11 

243V Workshop in VAX Assembly Language 

243X Workshop in Z80/8080/8085 Assembly Language 

243Y Workshop in 8086/8088 Assembly Language 

243Z Workshop in Z8000 Assembly Language 

245 Computer Logic and Architecture (3) 

(Same as Electrical Engineering 245) 

245L Computer Logic and Architecture Laboratory (2) 

(Same as Electrical Engineering 245L) 

253 Operating System Workshops (2) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 241. Workshops in the use 
of specific operating systems. See list following. Offered 
Credit /No Credit only. 

253C Workshop in CP/M 
253D Workshop in MS-DOS 
253M Workshop in MP/M 
253N Workshop in NOS 
253P Workshop in UCSD P-System 
253R Workshop in RSTS 
253S Workshop in OS/370 
253U Workshop in UNIX 
253V Workshop in VMS 

270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (4) 

(Same as Management Science 270) 

311 Concepts of Software Documentation (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 231, 241, 245 and English 
101. Practice in developing documentation skills as used in 
the computer field. Informal and formal documents used in 
problem analysis, software development and maintenance 
activities. 

313 The Computer Impact (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Developing role of 
computers in today’s world. Effect of computers on environ- 
ments and public attitude affecting their use. Emphasis on 
impact of science and technology on human institutions, so- 
cial values, and human self-image. 

321 High-Level Language Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 231, 241 and 245. Lan- 
guage definition concepts. Data types and structures. Con- 
trol structures and data flow. Run-time considerations. Inter- 
pretive languages. Introduction to lexical analysis and 
parsing. 


331 Information Structure Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 231, 241, 245. Corequi- 
site: Mathematics 270B. Advanced data structures, sorting, 
searching and record oriented file concepts. Brief introduc- 
tion to database systems and query languages. 

351 Operating Systems Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 231, 241 and 245. Re- 
source management, memory organization, input /output, 
control process synchronization and other concepts as re- 
lated to the objectives of multi-user operating systems. 

371 Introduction to Combinatorics (3) 

(Same as Math 371) 

373 Formal Method Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 331. Algorithmic concepts; 
models of computation; foundations of programming lan- 
guages; unsolvable problems; context-free languages, ma- 
chines and grammars. 

381 Knowledge Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: Completion of Critical Thinking and Mathe- 
matical Concepts of General Education Program. Under- 
standing and intelligence within the context of knowledge 
engineering; knowledge structures; representative artificial 
intelligence programs; machine learning; effects of knowl- 
edge engineering. 

404 Introduction to Microprocessors and Microcomputers (3) 
(Same as Engineering 404) 

408 Database Management Techniques (3) 

(Same as Management Science 408) 

411 Computers and Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 311. The developing role of 
computers in today’s world. Effect of computers on the envi- 
ronments in which they are applied and public attitudes af- 
fecting computer use. Emphasis on ethical, legal and educa- 
tional responsibilities of the computer professional. 

412 Computer Architecture (3) 

(Same as Electrical Engineering 412) 

416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 351 or Management Sci- 
ence 310; Management Science 461 or Engineering 423 or 
Mathematics 435. The application of statistics, queuing the- 
ory and simulation to the evaluation of alternative strategies 
for computer system configuration. (Same as Management 
Science 416) 

423 Language Processor Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 321, 331 and 373. Con- 
cepts behind the design and implementation of programming 
language processors such as compilers and interpreters. 
The design of a small compiler from a software engineering 
perspective. 

433 Data Security and Encryption Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 331. System security and 
encryption. Current issues in security, encryption and priva- 
cy of computer based systems. 

457 Computer Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 351. An introduction to digi- 
tal data communications. Terminology, networks and their 
components, common-carrier services, telecommunication 
facilities, terminals, error control, multiplexing and concen- 
tration techniques. 


238 Computer Science 


459 Micro-Computer Software Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 351 or equivalent. The de- 
sign and implementation of software. Analysis of the soft- 
ware system of an existing microcomputer and work on a 
team to implement a significant programming assignment. 

461 Software Engineering Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 311, 321, 331 and 351. 
The design and development of large software systems. Or- 
ganization and control of the system development process. 
Students will implement and discuss large scale team proj- 
ects. 

465 Principles of Computer Graphics (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 331. Examination and anal- 
ysis of computer graphics; software structures, display pro- 
cessor organization, graphical input /output devices, display 
files. Algorithmic techniques for clipping, windowing, char- 
acter generation and viewpoint transformation. 

467 Interactive System Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 461. Methodologies for the 
communication of textual data between man and machine. 
Consideration of both the input and display of individual 
characters as well as large constructs. Student will imple- 
ment several projects. 

471 Formal Languages and Automata (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 373. Finite and Infinite lan- 
guages: the formal relation between generators and accep- 
tors; types of formal grammars; decidability and partial deci- 
dability. 

473 Theory of Computation (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 373. The formal theory of 
computation, the concepts of decidability, algorithms, pro- 
cedures and the theoretical foundations of computer sci- 
ence. 

475 Analysis of Algorithms (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 373. Analytic techniques for 
the determination of algorithm efficiency in time and memory 
requirements. NP-complete problems, complexity hierar- 
chies, and provably intractable problems. 

477 Cybernetics and Information Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 373 and Mathematics 
250B. Formal theories underlying artificial intelligence. Cy- 
bernetics, information theory, decision models. Shannon’s 
theorem, adaptive machines, search techniques, stochastic 
automata, time series analysis and reliability theory. 

481 Artificial Intelligence (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 223K and 331. Topics of 
current Interest from heuristic programming, pattern recogni- 
tion. learning systems, problem solving systems and formal 
symbol manipulating systems. 

483 Pattern Recognition Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 331 and Mathematics 
250B and 338. Classification techniques, discriminant func- 
tions, training algorithms, potential function theory, super- 
vised and unsupervised learning, feature selection, cluster- 
ing techniques, multidimensional rotations and rank ordering 
relations. 

495 Internship in Computer Science (1-3) 

Prerequisite: computer science or related major and con- 
sent of instructor. Practical experience relevant to computer 
science in government or private agencies. 


499 independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: approval by the undergraduate coordinator. 
Special topic in Computer Science, selected in consultation 
with and completed under the supervision of instructor. 

521 Compiler Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 373 and 423 or equivalents. 
Techniques for the design of compilers and their relations 
to formal automata and formal grammars. 

531 Design of Database Management Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 408. Implementation tech- 
niques for query analysis, data allocation, concurrency con- 
trol, data structures, and distributed databases. New data- 
base models and recent developments in database 
technology. Student projects directed to specific design 
problems. 

551 Operating Systems Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 351 or equivalent. Design 
and evaluation techniques for controlling automatic re- 
source allocation, providing efficient programming environ- 
ments and appropriate user access to the system, and shar- 
ing the problem solving facilities. 

557 Microprogramming and Emulation (3) 

(Same as Electrical Engineering 557) 

563 Topics in Software Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 461 and graduate standing 
in Computer Science. Current topics in software engineering 
such as verification and validation, configuration manage- 
ment, and software engineering economy. 

571 Formal Language and Automata (3) 

Prerequisite: Computer Science 471 or 473. Finite and Infi- 
nite languages; the formal relation between generators and 
acceptors; types of formal grammars; decidability and par- 
tial decidability. 

581 Applications of Artificial Intelligence (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 481 and graduate standing 
in Computer Science. Current applications in artificial intelli- 
gence such as expert systems, fuzzy systems, machine vi- 
sion and natural language processing. 

589 Seminar in Computer Science (3) 

Limited to students who have completed at least 6 units of 
500-level courses In Computer Science. Current topics, re- 
search advances, updating of concepts, and verification of 
principles of Computer Science. Possible topics include: 
Large-scale parallelism; design of user interface; computers 
in instruction. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified graduate standing and approval of 
the computer science graduate adviser. 

598 Thesis n-3) 

Prerequisites: classified graduate standing and approval of 
the computer science graduate adviser. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified graduate standing and approval by 
the computer science graduate adviser. Special topic in 
computer science, selected in consultation with and com- 
pleted under supervision of instructor. 


Computer Science mb 


Departments of 
Engineering 


Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Science in Engineering 

Option in Civil Engineering and Engineering 
Mechanics 

Option in Electrical Engineering 
Option in Mechanical Engineering 
Option in Engineering Science 

Master of Science in Engineering 

Option in Civil Engineering and Engineering 
Mechanics 

Option in Electrical Engineering 
Option in Mechanical Engineering 
Option in Systems Engineering 
Option in Engineering Science 

INTRODUCTION 

The undergraduate engineering program has a 
broad base of science, mathematics, social sci- 
ences, humanities and engineering science, coupled 
with a specialization in one of the options. Students 
are thus prepared to enter directly into engineering 
practice or to continue further education at the grad- 
uate level. The Bachelor of Science Degree in Engi- 
neering, with options in Civil, Electrical and Mechani- 
cal Engineering, Is accredited by the Accreditation 
Board for Engineering and Technology (ABET). 

Preparation 

The entering student should bring a high school 
preparation including two years of algebra, geome- 
try, trigonometry, and one year of physics or chemis- 
try. Students deficient in mathematics or chemistry 
must take special preparatory courses, i.e.. Mathe- 
matics 100 and Chemistry 1 16, which will not carry 
credit for the major. (See Mathematics Section for 
Entry Level Mathematics test and Math-Science 
Qualifying Examination requirements.) All courses 
taken in fulfillment of the requirements for the Bach- 
elor of Science In Engineering degree must be taken 
under Grade Option 1. 

Transfer Students 

A transfer student shall complete a minimum of 30 
units in residence of which at least 15 shall be taken 
in upper-division engineering courses. Work taken at 
another college or university on which a grade of D 
was earned may not be substituted for upper- 
division courses. 

A smooth transition from a community college into 
upper-division engineering is assured when the fol- 
lowing program, as a minimum, has been completed. 
Students deficient in any of these areas may look to 
the summer session bulletin for offerings that may 
make up any deficiencies: 


Engineering 


Minimum Number of 
Semester Units 


Analytic Geometry and Calculus 16 

Chemistry 

(for engineering and science majors): 6 or 8 

Physics 

(for engineering and science majors): 8 or 12 

Engineering graphics 3 

Computer programming (FORTRAN) 3 

Analytical mechanics (statics) 3 


Advisers 

Students should seek advisement upon entering the 
program and must meet with an adviser to prepare 
an approved study plan of technical electives prior 
to taking elective courses. Appointments are ar- 
ranged in the department office. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 

The programs consist of: (1) a foundation In mathe- 
matics and science (36 units), (2) a core of engi- 
neering courses (24 units), (3) a sequence of 
courses in one of the options (46 units) which in- 
clude both required courses and technical electives, 
and (4) courses in arts and humanities to fulfill the 
General Education Requirements. 

Note: Graduate courses are not open to undergradu- 
ate students without specific approval of the depart- 
ment chair. 


Math and Science Foundation Courses for All 
Engineering Students 


Mathematics 150A 
Calculus (4) 
Mathematics 160B 
Calculus (4) 
Mathematics 260A 
Mathematics 260B 


Analytic Geometry and 

Analytic Geometry and 

Intermediate Calculus (4) 
Intermediate Calculus (4) 


Biological Science 101 Elements of Biology (3) 


Chemistry 120A General Chemistry (6) 

Physics 226A, 226AL Fundamental Physics, 
Mechanics & Lab (4) 

Physics 225B, 225BL Fundamental Physics, 
Electricity & Magnetism & Lab (4) 

Physics 225C, 225CL Fundamental Physics, Mod- 
ern Physics & Lab (4) (required In the Electrical 
and Mechanical Engineering Option) or Chemistry 
126 (required in the Civil Engineering Option). 

Engineering Core Courses for All Engineering 
Students 


All undergraduate engineering students are required 
to complete the following 24 units of engineering 
core courses regardless of the particular Option se- 
lected by the student. 


EG-ME 102 Graphical Communications (3) 
EG-CE 201 Statics (3) 

EG-EE 203 Electrical Circuits (3) 

EG-GN 206 Digital Computation (3) 

EG-CE 302 Dynamics (3) 

EG-ME 304 Thermodynamics (3) 

EG-ME 306A Unified Laboratory (1) 

EG-GN 308 Engineering Analysis (3) 
EG-GN 314 Engineering Economy (2) 


Internships 

Internship in Engineering (EG-GN 490) provides 
practical work experience which integrates with the 
student’s classroom studies. 

General Education Program for B.S. in 
Engineering 

(Refer to current class schedule for specific 
courses) 


A. Communications Skills 12 units 

1. Written Communication, English 101 3 

2. Oral Communication 3 

3. Critical Thinking* 3 

4. Upper-Division Writing Requirement 3 

B. Science and Mathematical Concepts 16 units 

1 . Fundamentals of Physical Science 

a. Chemistry 120A 6 

b. Physics 226A, 226AL 4 

2. Fundamentals of Biological Science: 

Biological Science 101 3 

3. Mathematical Concepts 

Mathematics 160A 4 

C. Arts and Humanities 9-12 units 

1. Performing and Visual Arts* 3 

2. Participatory Experience 

EG-ME 102 Graphical Communications 3 

3. Cultural Diversity (either C.3 or D.3)* 0-3 

4. Literary/Language Arts and Humanities* 3 

D. ,E.,F. Social Science /History 

Institutions and Values 15-18 units 

D1 Fundamentals of Social Science* 3 

D2 implications and Explorations 

EG-GN 314 Engineering Economy (2) 

EG-EE 370, EG-ME 370 or EG-CE 496 
Seminar in Engineering (1) 3 

D3 Cultural Diversity in the 

Social Sciences (either D.3 or C.3)* 0-3 

E Lifelong Learning 0 

FI Political Science* 3 

F2 American Studies or American History 3 

F3 Western Civilization: 

History 1 10A or B 3 


Three units in addition to A4 and D2 must be upper 
division. 

•To meet the ABET accreditation requirement for some depth in Arts. Hu 
manities or Social Science. Engineering students must elect 2 courses 
from the same department among the requirements in categories A3. 
C1. C3. C4. Dt. D3 and FI. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 

The program is designed to increase the depth of un- 
derstanding of the student within one of the options 
(electrical engineering, mechanical engineering, civ- 
il engineering and engineering mechanics, systems 
engineering, or engineering science) without re- 
stricting the possibility of broadening the education 
outside of the immediate area. 

Admission Procedure 

1. Apply for admission to the university in graduate 
standing. 


Engineering 


2. Declare the objective to be a Master of Science 
in Engineering with an option in Civil and Engineer- 
ing Mechanics, Electrical, Systems, Mechanical, 
or Engineering Science. 

3. Request two official transcripts to be sent to the 
Admissions and Records office from all institu- 
tions attended. 

Prerequisites /Deficiencies 

An applicant must meet the university requirements 
for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate from an engineering pro- 
gram accredited by the Accreditation Board for En- 
gineering and Technology, and a grade-point aver- 
age of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester units 
attempted, with some options requiring a GPA great- 
er than 2.6 in the last 60 semester units. 

A student who does not have a B.S. in Engineering 
from an Accreditation Board for Engineering and 
Technology accredited program or who has a B.S. 
degree outside of engineering may need to make up 
deficiencies. 

Any deficiencies must be made up and will require 
a minimum of six units of adviser-approved courses 
prior to beginning coursework for the master’s de- 
gree. Deficiencies must be completed with at least 
a 3.0 average. 

Classified Standing 

To attain classified standing a student must: 

1 . Complete all courses specified to satisfy deficien- 
cies. 

2. Meet with an adviser to set up an approved study 
plan, prior to completing nine units of postgrad- 
uate course work. 

3. Receive approval of the study plan by the depart- 
ment chair and the dean of graduate studies. Any 
subsequent changes to the study plan must have 
prior written approval of the adviser and the de- 
partment chair. 

Graduate Writing Requirement 

Students who have degrees from outside the U.S.A. 
must pass the English Writing Proficiency (EWP) ex- 
amination or take and pass English 360 in their first 
semester. Students with degrees from U.S.A. univer- 
sities must show proof of meeting an upper division 
writing requirement, or take and pass the EWP or En- 
glish 360 at CSUF. 

Advancement to Candidacy 
To be advanced to candidacy: 

1. The student must request a graduation check. 

2. The graduate program adviser must submit a rec- 
ommendation to the dean of graduate studies. 

Graduation 

Final achievement of the Master of Science in Engi- 
neering requires that the classified student: 

1. Has advanced to candidacy, 

2. Has completed 30 units of approved courses with 
an overall GPA of not less than 3.0, 

3. Has completed all the course requirements for the 
specific option. 


4. Has satisfactorily passed a final comprehensive 
examination or oral defense of thesis or project, 

5. Has received approval of the faculty of the option 
department and the dean of graduate studies. 

General Requirements for All Options 

Qualification for the Master of Science in Engineer- 
ing requires the following: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 30 units of adviser- 
approved upper-division or graduate-level work in- 
cluding: 

A. EG-GN 403 and a minimum of three units of ap- 
proved upper-division or graduate courses in 
mathematics-oriented engineering. 

B. not less than one-half of the units required for 
the degree shall be in approved graduate (500- 
level) courses. 

C. A minimum of 15 units of 400-level or 500-level 
courses In a specific option. 

2. An overall GPA of 3.0. 

3. Satisfactory completion of a final oral comprehen- 
sive examination. 

The candidate for the Master of Science degree 
may, at his or her discretion and subject to the ap- 
proval of the adviser, make an oral defense of a proj- 
ect or thesis (3-6 units) Instead of taking the com- 
prehensive oral examination. In order to make this 
substitution the student must either prepare a the- 
sis, subject to the university’s requirements, or sub- 
mit a formal report of the project for review and ap- 
proval by a committee of two or three faculty 
members. Guidelines for formal reports are available 
in the Engineering office. A typed draft of the project 
report or thesis must be submitted to the reviewing 
committee for approval at least eight weeks prior to 
the last day of classes, and a final version submitted 
for final approval at least four weeks prior to the last 
day of the semester in which the oral defense is 
scheduled. 

A candidate for the Master of Science In Engineering 
may pursue one of five options currently offered by 
the Departments of Engineering: civil engineering 
and engineering mechanics, electrical engineering, 
mechanical engineering, systems engineering, engi- 
neering science. 

In addition to those courses offered In the specific 
options, the following courses apply to any option, 
though they are not necessarily required: 

EG-CE, EG-EE or EG-ME 597, Project (1-6); EG- 
CE, EG-EE or EG-ME 598, Thesis (1-6); EG-CE, 
EG-EE or EG-ME 599, Independent Graduate Re- 
search (1-3). 

For further Information, consult the departmental 
sections of this catalog. 

Option in Engineering Science 

The program in engineering science is to be select- 
ed by the student and his/her adviser and submitted 
for approval to a committee of an Engineering De- 
partment (supplemented, if appropriate, by mem- 
bers of the science and mathematics faculties). The 
courses selected are to meet a special and specific 


242 

MB ■ Engineering 


engineering science objective of the student, such 
as engineering physics. 


General Engineering Courses 

General engineering courses are those that are not 

specific for any of the engineering options. 

205 Digital Computation (3) 

Prerequisite: college algebra or three years of high school 
mathematics including a second course in algebra. Comput- 
ers and their numerical applications. Elementary FORTRAN 
programming language, digital computation methods in sta- 
tistics and solving algebraic equations. 

308 Engineering Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 225B, Math 260B or consent of in- 
structor. Fundamentals and engineering applications of Fou- 
rier series, Fourier transforms, Laplace transforms, complex 
analysis, vector analysis; engineering applications. 


314 Engineering Economy (2) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing in engineering. Devel- 
opment, evaluation and presentation of alternatives for engi- 
neering systems and projects using principles of engineering 
economy and cost benefit analysis. 

403 Computer Methods in Numerical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250B and EG-GN 205 or equivalent. The 
use of numerical methods and digital computers in the solu- 
tion of algebraic, transcendental, simultaneous, ordinary 
and partial differential equations. 

490 Professional Practice (1) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing in engineering program 
and consent of instructor. Professional engineering work In 
Industry or government. Written report required. May be re- 
peated for credit, for a maximum of eight units. Maximum of 
three units is applicable towards a B.S. in Engineering. Not 
for credit in the graduate program. 


Engineering 


Department 

Engineering 

Engineering 


of Civil 
and 

Mechanics 


Department Chair: Dindial Ramsamooj 
Department Office: Engineering 100C 

Faculty 

Richard Brock, Pinaki Chakrabarti, Mark Hing C. 
Chan, George Chiang, George Lin, Chandrasekhar 
Putcha, Dindial Ramsamooj, Mahadeva Venkatesan 

Advisers 

Undergraduate adviser: Richard Brock 
Graduate adviser: Dindial Ramsamooj 

INTRODUCTION 

The civil engineering program at CSUF includes the 
fields of structural, geotechnical and hydraulic engi- 
neering. Modern civil engineering practices rely 
heavily upon computer-aided analysis and design, 
and students at CSUF use both microcomputers and 
the mainframe computer (CDC Cyber 170). 

“Structural" engineers are designers of buildings, 
bridges, dams, power plants, offshore structures 
and many other kinds of projects. These engineers 
determine, usually by computer analysis, the forces 
that a structure must resist, the appropriate materi- 
als, and the possible structural types. Structural en- 
gineers usually work with a team that includes archi- 
tects, mechanical and electrical engineers, 
contractors, and the owner of the project. 

“Geotechnical” engineers analyze the properties of 
soils and rocks that affect the behavior of struc- 
tures. They evaluate the potential settlements of 
buildings, the stability of slopes and fills, and the ef- 
fects of earthquakes. They take part in the design 
and construction of foundations, including those of 
offshore platforms, tunnels and dams. 

“Hydraulic” engineers deal with all aspects of the 
physical control of water. They work to prevent 
floods, develop irrigation projects, design hydro- 
electric power systems, manage and train rivers, 
and predict water runoff. 

“Architectural” engineering is a subtle combination 
of the art of architecture and the science of engi- 
neering. The architect conceives of structures as an 


Civil Engineering and Engineering Mechanics 


art form, and relies upon the structural engineer to 
translate his concepts of beauty Into structural reali- 
ty. The architectural engineer has the training to in- 
teract with both architects and engineers or to work 
on his own in designing structures that combine both 
strength and beauty. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 
OPTION IN CIVIL ENGINEERING 

Mathematics and science foundation courses (36 
units) See information listed under “Departments of 
Engineering” section. 

Engineering core courses (24 units) 

See information listed under “Departments of Engi- 
neering” section. 

English Writing Proficiency Requirement 

In addition to the English Writing Proficiency Exami- 
nation which is to be taken as soon as 60 units are 
completed, these courses are required and must be 
passed with a grade of C or better. The laboratory 
reports are graded on English composition as well 
as content. 


EG-CE 493 Structural Systems for Buildings (3)* 
EG-CE 494 Design of Civil Engineering Structures 
(4)* 

ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING EMPHASIS 
Mathematics and Science Courses (35 units) 
Engineering Core Courses (24 units) 

Required Civil Engineering Core (19 units) 


EG-EE 203L Electric Circuits Laboratory (1) 
EG-CE 301 Mechanics of Materials (3) 

EG-CE 324 Soil Mechanics (3) 

EG-CE 324L Soil Mechanics Laboratory (1) 

EG-CE 325 Structural Analysis (3) 

EG-CE 325L Structural Analysis Laboratory (1) 
EG-CE 408 Reinforced Concrete Design (3) 

EG-CE 418 Foundation Design (3) 

EG-CE 495 Civil Engineering Professional 
Practice (1) 

Core Courses for the Emphasis in Architectural 
Engineering (24 units) 


EG-ME 306A 
EG-CE 324L 
EG-CE 325L 
EG-CE 377 
EG-CE 428L 
EG-CE 495 


Unified Laboratory (1) 

Soil Mechanics Laboratory (1) 
Structural Analysis Laboratory (1) 

Civil Engineering Materials Lab (1) 
Engineering Hydraulics Lab (1) 

Civil Engineering Professional Practice 
( 1 ) 


Required Courses for the Option in Civil 
Engineering (30 units) 


EG-EE 

203L 

EG-CE 

214 

EG-CE 

214L 

EG-CE 

301 

EG-CE 

324 

EG-CE 

324L 

EG-CE 

325 

EG-CE 

325L 

EG-CE 

330 

EG-CE 

377 

EG-CE 

408 

EG-CE 

418 

EG-CE 

428 

EG-CE 

428L 

EG-CE 

495 


Electric Circuits Laboratory (1) 
Engineering Surveying (2) 
Engineering Surveying Laboratory (1) 
Mechanics of Materials (3) 

Soil Mechanics (3) 

Soil Mechanics Laboratory (1) 
Structural Analysis (3) 

Structural Analysis Laboratory (1) 
Computer Applications in Civil 
Engineering (3) 

Civil Engineering Materials Lab (1) 
Reinforced Concrete Design (3) 
Foundation Design (3) 

Engineering Hydraulics (3) 
Engineering Hydraulics Lab (1) 

Civil Engineering Professional 
Practice (i) 


Art 213A Beginning Environmental Design (3) 

Art 213B Interior Space Planning and Design (3) 
Art 313A Environmental Design: Unit Concepts (3) 
EG-CE 430 Structural Steel Design (3) 

EG-CE 432 Computer-Alded-Design in Structural 
Engineering (3) 

EG-CE 493 Structural Systems for Buildings (3) 
EG-CE 494 Design of Civil Egrg. Structures (4) 
Adviser-approved Elective (2) 

Technical Electives for the Emphasis in Architec- 
tural Engineering (3 units) 

Art 303 Architectural & Interior Rendering (3) 

Art 313B Environmental Design: Systems Con- 
cepts (3) 

Art 420 History of Modern Architecture (3) 

Art 483B Special Studies in Environmental 
Design (3) 

EG-CE 468 Engineering Construction (3) 

EG-CE 497 Senior Project (3) 

Art 499 Independent Research (3) 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 
OPTION IN CIVIL ENGINEERING/ENGINEERING 
MECHANICS 


Technical Electives for Option in Civil 
Engineering (15 units) 


Please refer to the “Departments of Engineering” 
section for general information. 


Before enrolling in any elective course approval of 
the adviser must be obtained. At least nine units of 
design courses (identified with an *) are required. 


EG-CE 395 
EG-CE 411 
EG-CE 430 
EG-CE 432 

EG-CE 435 
EG-CE 436 
EG-CE 468 


Pavement Design and Construction (3) 
Structural Dynamics (3) 

Structural Steel Design (3)* 
Computer-Aided-Design In Structural 
Engineering (3)* 

Design of Hydraulic Structures (3)* 
Engineering Hydrology (3) 

Engineering Construction (3) 


After being admitted into the graduate program, 
each student must immediately contact the depart- 
ment chair to select an area of specialization (struc- 
tural, engineering mechanics, hydraulics /hydrology, 
or geotechnical). At this time, a graduate adviser will 
be assigned by the chair. The student must make an 
appointment with the graduate adviser to set up a 
formal study plan before taking any courses in the 
graduate area. Courses taken without prior approval 
of the graduate adviser or without a formal study 
plan approved by the dean of graduate studies may 
not be counted in the 30-units degree requirements. 


Civil Engineering and Engineering Mechanics 


Civil Engineering Courses 

201 Statics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 160B and Physics 225A. Vectorial treat- 
ment of statics of particles and rigid bodies. Freebody dia- 
grams. Applications to problems of equilibrium (two and 
three dimensions) of structural and mechanical force sys- 
tems. Centroids and moments of inertia. 

214 Engineering Surveying (2) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 102; corequisite: EG-CE 214L. Mea- 
surement of horizontal distance, difference in elevation, and 
angles. Analyses and adjustments for systematic and ran- 
dom measurement errors. Traverse surveys and computa- 
tions. Horizontal and vertical curves. Principles of stadia. 
Topographic surveys. Earthwork. 

214L Engineering Surveying Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: EG-CE 214. Field practice of measurement of 
distance with a chain and stadia, horizontal and vertical an- 
gles with a theodolite, closed traverse, differential leveling, 
horizontal and vertical curve layout and locating stakes for 
highway construction. (3 hours laboratory) 

301 Mechanics of Materials (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250A and EG-CE 201. Stress and defor- 
mation analysis for axial load, torsion, flexure, and combined 
forces. Analysis of simple statically indeterminate struc- 
tures. Stability of columns. Strain energy & ultimate resis- 
tance. Interactive relationships between analysis & design. 

302 Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250A and EG-CE 201. Kinematics and 
kinetics of particles and rigid bodies. Newton’s laws, work 
and energy, impulse and momentum. Solution of problems 
using vector approach. 

324 Soil Mechanics (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 301. Soil properties and soil action as 
related to problems encountered in engineering structures; 
consolidation, shear strength, stability and lateral earth 
pressures. 

32NL Soil Mechanics Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: EG-CE 324. Behavior and properties of soils. 
Application to foundation design, liquefaction and seepage. 

325 Structural Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 301. Analysis of forces and displace- 
ments in statically determinate and indeterminate elastic 
structures by force and displacement methods. Approxi- 
mate methods of analysis. Influence lines and applications. 
Matrix formulation of structural analysis and computer appli- 
cations. 

325L Structural Analysis Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: EG-CE 325. Principles of model analysis and si- 
militude. Influence lines for reactive and internal forces; gen- 
eralized displacements of statically indeterminate struc- 
tures. Nonprismatic members. (3 hours laboratory) 

330 Computer Applications in Civil Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 205. EG-CE 214, EG-CE 324 and EG- 
CE 325. Application of computer programming to the solu- 
tion of problems In various branches of Civil Engineering. 

377 Civil Engineering Materials Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: EG-CE 324. The behavior and properties of soil, 


cement, concrete and bituminous materials. (3 hours lab) 

395 Pavement Design and Construction (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 324. Corequisite: EG-CE 377. Design 
and construction of flexible and rigid pavements. Pavement 
distress, evaluation and strengthening. Maintenance and 
construction procedures. 

408 Reinforced Concrete Design (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 326 and 377. Design for bending, 
shear, axial forces, combined loading. Design of beams, col- 
umns, slabs for ultimate strength and serviceability require- 
ments; alternate design method. Prestressed concrete de- 
sign. Design project of buildings or bridges to standards of 
professional practice. 

411 Structural Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 325 and EG-GN 308. Free and forced 
vibrations of discrete and continuous systems. Matrix formu- 
lation and normal coordinates analysis. Response of struc- 
tures to impulse and earthquake loads. 

418 Foundation Design (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 324 and 408. Design of footings and 
retaining walls. Mat and piled foundations for structures. De- 
sign project to standards of professional practice. 

428 Engineering Hydraulics (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 302. incompressible fluid flow in closed 
circuits and open channels. Hydrostatics, energy, and hy- 
draulic grade lines. Momentum, friction formulas, pipelines, 
pumps, pipeline networks, uniform flow, critical flow, hydrau- 
lic jump. specific energy, nonuniform flow, and water surface 
profiles. 

428L Engineering Hydraulics Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite. EG-CE 428. Introduction to experimental hy- 
draulics in open channel and pipe flows including measure- 
ments of discharge, depth, velocity, force and friction coeffi- 
cients. Hydraulic model laws and report writing. (3 hours 
laboratory) 

430 Structural Steel Design (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 325. Design for bending, torsion, shear, 
axial forces, combined loadings. Design of built-up girders, 
composite construction. Design of shear and moment con- 
nections. Design project of buildings or bridges to standards 
of professional practice. 

432 Computer-Aided’Design in Structural Engineering (3) 
Prerequisites: EG-GN 206 and EG-CE 326. Application of 
computer-aided design techniques with automated graphics 
to the design of civil engineering structures. Design project 
to the standards of professional practice (2 hours lecture. 
3 hours laboratory). 

435 Design of Hydraulic Structures (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 428. Applications of hydraulic princi- 
ples to design of various structures including spillways, en- 
ergy dissipators, outlet works, storm drains, culverts and 
water distribution systems. Use of computers in design pro- 
cess. 

436 Engineering Hydrology (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 428. Hydrologic cycle with applications 
to hydrologic design of engineering structures. Rainfall, 
stream flow, ground water, surface runoff, hydrographs, 
flood routing, frequency distributions and design hydro- 
graphs. 


Civil Engineering and Engineering Mechanics 


468 Engineering Construction (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 408; Corequisite 418. Engineering 
construction planning equipment and methods. Construction 
management. Critical path method. Construction of build- 
ings, bridges, highways, foundations and dams. 

493 Structural Systems for Buildings (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 408 and 430. Corequisite: EG-CE 418. 
Building structural systems and their behavior under loads. 
Foundation systems. Roof, floor, wall systems. Construction 
and cost considerations. Design project to standards of pro- 
fessional practice. (2 hours lecture and 3 hours laboratory.) 

494 Design of Civil Engineering Structures (4) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 408 and 430. Corequisite: EG-CE 418. 
Timber, reinforced masonry, reinforced concrete and steel 
design. Uniform Building Code. Design of buildings and brid- 
ges. Design projects to standards of professional practice. 
(2 hours lecture and 6 hours laboratory) 

495 Civil Engineering Professional Practice (1) 

Prerequisite: senior standing. Discussion of civil engineering 
as a profession and the civil engineer as a professional. Ca- 
reer opportunities in private sectors and government. Office 
and field practice. Professional growth and development. 
Project management. Business management and opportuni- 
ties. 

497 Senior Projects (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing in engineering and formal ap- 
proval by adviser and department chair. Independent design 
projects. Formal report to be submitted after completion of 
project work. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing in engineering and formal ap- 
proval by adviser and department chair. Special topics in 
civil engineering. Formal report to be submitted after com- 
pletion of independent study. 

509 Theory of Plates and Shells (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 491. Theory of thin plates subjected to 
transverse loads. Analysis of plates of circular, rectangular 
and other shapes. Theory of thin shells. Shells of revolution. 
Shells of translation. 

510 The Finite Element Method (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 517 and 533. Formulation of finite ele- 
ments for analysis of plane stress and strain problems, ax- 
isymmetric bodies, plates and shells. Conforming and non- 
conforming shape functions. Computer applications to com- 
plex structural systems under static and dynamic loads. 

517 Theory of Elasticity (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 491. Analysis of stress and strain. 
Equations of elasticity. Extension, torsion and flexure of 
beams. Two-dimensional elastostatic problems. Variational 
methods and energy theorems. Elementary three- 
dimensional elastostatic problems. Introduction to therm- 
oelasticity and wave propagation. 

529 Open Channel Hydraulics (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 428. Theory of uniform and varied flow 
in open channels. Applications to analysis and design of 
open channels and control structures. 

532 Earthquake Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 411 and 533. Earthquake motions; re- 
sponse spectra; computational methods and computer ap- 
plications for response of structural systems. Energy ab- 
sorption capacity of materials and structural components. 
Soil structure interaction. Seismic design and evaluation of 
current building codes. 


533 Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 325 and EG-GN 403. Matrix formula- 
tion of structural analysis using the direct stiffness ap- 
proach. Computer aided analysis of complex structural sys- 
tems under static and dynamic loads. Stability analysis. 
Introduction to the finite element method. 

537 Groundwater and Seepage (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 436. Equations governing flow of liquid 
in porous media. Seepage through dams and under struc- 
tures, flow in confined and unconfined aquifers, steady and 
unsteady flow, well fields, flow nets, computer solutions, sea 
water intrusion, recharge, groundwater pollution. 

544 Advanced Foundation Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 418. Beam on elastic foundations. Raft 
foundations. Retaining walls. Pile groups and pier founda- 
tions. Soil structure interaction. Foundations on expensive 
soils. 

545 Coastal and Offshore Geotechnical Engineering (3) 
Prerequisite: EG-CE 418. Foundation dewatering. Deep ex- 
cavations. Geotechnical engineering of harbors, ports, ma- 
rine, and offshore structures. 

548 Soil Dynamics and Foundation Engineering (3) 
Prerequisites: EG-CE 41 1, 418, and EG-ME 491. Wave prop- 
agation in soils. Blast effects. Analysis and design of dynam- 
ically loaded foundations. Earthquake design of dams and 
foundations of structures. 

549 Theory of Elastic Stability (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-CE 509. Critical buckling loads of columns, 
beam-columns, frames, plates, and shells. Lateral stability 
of beams. Torsional buckling of open wall sections. 

563 Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures (3) 
Prerequisite: EG-CE 408. Structural behavior and design of 
prestressed concrete elements and systems— simple 
beams, continuous beams, frames, and slabs under com- 
bined axial loads and flexure. Design project to standards 
of professional practice. 

564 Design of Tail Concrete Buildings (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 408 and 533. Characteristics, design 
criteria, and safety provisions of tall concrete buildings. Se- 
lection and optimization of framing systems. Analysis and 
design of final configuration. Design project to standards of 
professional practice. 

565 Design of Tail Steel Buildings (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 430 and 533. Design standards, tech- 
nical and construction aspects, and seismic considerations 
of tali steel buildings. Elastic and plastic approaches to 
analysis and design. Computer aided analysis and auto- 
mated design. Design project to the standards of profes- 
sional practice. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified graduate status and formal approv- 
al of Civil Engineering Graduate Committee, graduate advis- 
er and department chair. 

598 Thesis (1-6) 

Prerequisites: classified graduate status and formal approv- 
al of Civil Engineering Graduate Committee, graduate advis- 
er, and department chair. (Max. of 3 units per semester.) 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified graduate status and formal approv- 
al of Civil Engineering Graduate Committee, graduate advis- 
er, and department chair. 


Civil Engineering and Engineering Mechanics 


Department 

Engineering 



Department Chair: Mohinder Grewal 
Associate Chair: John Clymer 
Department Office: Engineering 100A 

Faculty 

Farrokh Abrishamkar, Larry Canter, Maqsood 
Ahmed Chaudhry, David Cheng, John Clymer, 
George Cohn, Douglas Dethlefsen,Shahin 
Ghazanshahi, Mohinder Grewal, Karim Hamidian, 
Hassan Hamidi-Hashemi, Eugene Hunt, Jack 
Kemmerly, Zia Khawza, Young Kwon, 

Allan McDonald, Somapala Nanayakkara, 

Kenneth Nichols, L. Benjamin Patrick, 

M. Javad Peyrovlan, Chennareddy 
Reddy, Magdy Saeb, Charles Savant, Mostafa 
Shiva, Richard Shubert, Donald Snider, Fleur 
Tehran!, Jesus Tuazon, Min-Yen Wu 

Advisers 

Undergraduate program advisers: Eugene Hunt, 
Jesus Tuazon, David Cheng, Hassan 
Hamidi-Hashemi 

Graduate program adviser: M. S. Grewal 

All full-time faculty with the department are advisers; 
see Electrical Engineering bulletin board for names, 
office hours and room numbers. 

INTRODUCTION 

The electrical engineering program prepares the 
students to work in the area of design and analysis 
of digital and analog electronic circuits, design and 
analysis of computer architecture, microproces- 
sors, communication networks and control systems. 
This program develops an ability to apply this design 
and analysis knowledge to the practice of electrical 
engineering in an effective and professional manner. 
This knowledge can be applied to work in aero- 
space, computers, electrical utility and oil compa- 
nies. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 
OPTION IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 

Mathematics and science foundation courses 
(36 units) see “Departments of Engineering” 

Engineering core courses 

(24 units) see “Departments of Engineering” 


Electrical Engineering 


Upper-Division Writing Requirement 

In addition to the English Writing Proficiency Exami- 
nation, all of the following courses are required to 
fulfill the upper-division English writing requirement: 

EG-ME 306A Unified Laboratory (1) 

EG-EE 310L Electronic Circuits Laboratory 
( 2 ) 

EG-EE 313L Machine and Analog Computer 
Laboratory (1) 

EG-EE 384 Intro to Electronic Design (1) 
EG-EE 386 Electrical Engineering Design 
Projects Laboratory (2) 


EG-EE 445L Pulse and Digital Circuits Lab 
( 2 ) 

EG-EE 448 Digital Systems Design (3) 
Control Systems: 

EG-EE 404 Intro to Microprocessors and 
Microcomputers (3) 

EG-EE 416 Feedback Control Systems (3) 
EG-EE 416L Feedback Control Sys Lab (2) 
EG-EE 420 Introduction to Digital Filtering (3) 
EG-EE 424 Computer Simulation of 
Continuous Systems (3) 

EG-EE 425 Intro to Systems Engineering (3) 


Written work for these courses must meet profes- 
sional standards. 


Required Courses for Option in Electrical 
Engineering (38 units) 

Enrollment in these courses is limited to students 
who meet the prerequisites. 


EG-EE 203L 
EG-EE 245 
(3) 

EG-EE 245L 
( 2 ) 

EG-EE 303 
EG-EE 303L 
EG-EE 309 
EG-EE 310 
EG-EE 310L 
EG-EE 311 
Lines (3) 


Electric Circuits Lab (1) 
Computer Logic & Architecture 

Computer Logic and Arch Lab 

Electronics (3) 

Electronics Lab (1) 

Network Analysis (3) 

Electronic Circuits (3) 
Electronic Circuits Lab (2) 
Field Theory and Transmission 


EG-EE 313 
EG-EE 313L 
Lab (1) 
EG-EE 370 
EG-EE 384 
EG-EE 385 


Intro to Electromechanics (3) 
Machine and Analog Computer 


Sem In Electrical Engineering (1) 
Intro to Electronic Design (1) 
Electrical Engineer Design 
Projects Lab (2) 

EG-EE 409 Introduction to Linear Systems 


(3) 

EG-EE 423 Engineering Probability and 
Statistics (3) 

EG-EE 445 Digital Electronics (3) 


Technical Electives for Option in Electrical 
Engineering (7 units) 


Before enrolling in any elective course approval of 
the adviser must be obtained. At least one laborato- 
ry course must be included. 


Electronic Circuits: 


EG-EE 404 Intro to Microprocessors and 
Microcomputers (3) 

EG-EE 404L Microprocessor Laboratory (1) 
EG-EE 442 Electronic Circuits (3) 

EG-EE 445L Pulse and Digital Circuits Lab (2) 
EG-EE 448 Digital Systems Design (3) 

EG-EE 455 Solid State Electronics (3) 

Electronic Communications: 

EG-EE 420 introduction to Digital Filtering (3) 
EG-EE 442 Electronic Circuits ( 3 ) 

EG-EE 443 Electronic Communication 
Systems (3) 


Computer Engineering: 

EG-EE 307 Digital Computer Design & Org 
(3) 

EG-EE 307L Digital Computer Design Lab (3) 
EG-GN 403 Computer Meth in Numerical 
Analysis (3) 

EG-EE 404 Intro to Microprocessors and 
Microcomputers (3) 

EG-EE 404L Microprocessor Lab (1) 

Introduction to Digital Filtering (3) 
Intro to Systems Engineering (3) 
Electronic Circuits (3) 

Pulse and Digital Circuits Lab 


EG-EE 420 
EG-EE 426 
EG-EE 442 
EG-EE 445L 
( 2 ) 

EG-EE 448 
EG-EE 455 


Digital Systems Design (3) 
Solid State Electronics (3) 


MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 
OPTION IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 


Please refer to the “Departments of Engineering” 
section for general information. 

Option in Electrical Engineering 

In addition to university requirements, admission re- 
quires; 


1. A 2.75 GPA in the last 60 semester units. 

2. A minimum 3.0 in the last 15 units of electrical en- 
gineering courses attempted. 

3. Satisfactory score on the GRE aptitude test. 

A maximum of six units may be accepted for transfer 
from CSUF Extended Education or from an ABET ac- 
credited university. Each applicant file will be re- 
viewed by the Electrical Engineering Department 
Graduate Committee; the applicant will be inter- 
viewed and a graduate adviser assigned based on 
the student’s particular interests and objectives. 
Students with deficiencies will be conditionally ac- 
cepted until such time as they have completed, with 
a GPA of 3.0 or better, makeup courses approved by 
the E.E. Graduate Committee. Students choosing a 
thesis, project or independent study as part of their 
study plan must file an Independent Study Applica- 
tion form with a one page abstract of the proposed 
study. This must be submitted to, and approved by, 
the supervising faculty member, adviser, and chair 
of the department prior to the semester In which the 
work is begun. 

A student is required to select a minimum of 16 units 
within the option which may be 400-level and 500- 
level courses. 


Electrical Engineering 


There are various areas of specialization: Computer 
Engineering, Control Systems, Communications Sys- 
tems/Signal Processing, Electronics and Circuit 
Theory, Electromagnetic Field Theory and Applica- 
tion, Systems Engineering. 

Option in Systems Engineering 

Students seeking this option must meet the same re- 
quirements as the Option in Electrical Engineering. 
In addition students selecting the systems engineer- 
ing option will be required to include these five 
courses in their study plans: 


brators, analog-to-digital converters; transducers; electron- 
ic measurement systems. (For Mechanical Engineering ma- 
jors.) 

3CX)L Electronic Instrumentation Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: EG-EE 300. Measurements using analog elec- 
trical meters and oscilloscope; semiconductor devices and 
circuit application with emphasis on instrumentation meth- 
ods using common transducers; operational amplifier appli- 
cations: digital logic gates and flip-flops; analog-to-digital 
converters and displays. (3 hours laboratory) (For Mechani- 
cal Engineering majors.) 


EG-EE 680 Analysis of Random Signals (3) 
EG-EE 581 Theory of Linear Systems (3) 
EG-EE 582 Linear Estimation Theory (3) 
EG-EE 686 Optimization Techniques in 
Systems Engineering (3) 

EG-EE 587 Operational Analysis Techniques 
In Systems Engineering (3) 


The remainder of the systems engineering study 
plan will include other engineering courses with an 
emphasis in a particular field such as information 
systems, control theory, computer systems, or civil 
or mechanical engineering applications. Students 
possessing a Bachelor of Science In Engineering 
may elect to include up to nine units from approved 
subjects offered by the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics as a part of their study plan. 


Electrical Engineering Courses 

203 Electric Circuits (3) . 

Prerequisites: Physics 2258; Math 250A; EG-GN 205. Ohm’s 
and Kirchhoff's laws; mesh and nodal analysis; basic net- 
work theorems; RL and RC transients; phasore and steady- 
state sinusoidal analysis; current, voltage and power rela- 
tionshipa; polyphase circuits; magnetic eoupHnj^.'end ele- 
mentary transformer^. ^ ^ 

203L Electric Circuits Laboratory (1) v > 

Prerequisite or corequisite: EG-EE 203. Simple resistive rtL 
and RC circuits; electrical measurement techniques; verifi- 
cation of basic circuit laws. (3 hours laboratory) 

241 Low-Level Language Systems (3) 

(Same as Computer Science 241) 


303 Electronics (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 225C, EG-EE 203 and 203L; corequi- 
site: EG-EE 303L. Characteristics and elementary applica- 
tions of semiconductor diodes, the field-effect transistors 
and bipolar-junction transistors. 

303L Electronic Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: EG-EE 303. Semiconductor diodes, transistors, 
and elementary electronic circuits. (3 hours laboratory) 

307 Digital Computer Organization and Design (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 245. Organization and design of major 
components of a digital computer including arithmetic, mem- 
ory. input, output and control units. Integration of units into 
a system and simulation by a computer design language. 

307L Digital Computer Design Laboratory (3) (Formerly 
405L) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 303L. 245. 245L and 307. Design and 
implementation of a small digital computer; adders, arithme- 
tic unit, control unit, memory control unit, memory unit and 
program unit. May be taken in lieu of EG-EE 310L and 313L. 
(1 hour lecture. 6 hours laboratory) 

309 Network Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 203 and 203L; EG-GN 308. Perfor- 
mance of RLC circuits; complex frequency and the s-pjane; 
frequency response and resonance; network topology; two- 
port network characterization; classical fifTOf theory. 

310 Electronic Circuits (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 303 and 309 and EG-GN 308. Continu- 
ation of 303. multistage amplifiers and feedback; frequency 
characteristics of amplifiers, frequency charadteristics and 
stability of feedback amplifiers and operational amplifiers. 


245 Computer Logic and Architecture (3) 

Prerequisites: EG GN 205 or Computer Science 131. Logical 
design and organization of the major components of comput- 
er. analysis and synthesis of combinatorial and sequential 
logics, analysis of the arithmetic, memory control and I/O 
units, concepts in computer control. (Same as Computer 
Science 245) 

245L Computer Logic and Architecture Lab (2) 

Corequisite: EG-EE 245. Digital logic circuits; decoders, 
counters, serial and parallel adders, control circuits (1 hour 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory). (Same as Computer Science 
245L) 

300 Electronic Instrumentation (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 203: corequisite: EG-EE 300L. Charac- 
teristics of semiconductor diodes and transistors; opera- 
tional amplifiers, summers, integrators and analog filters; 
comparators and waveform generators; instrumentation am- 
plifiers. digital logic and memory circuits, counters, multivi- 


310L Electronic Circuits Lab (2) (Formerly 375B) 

Corequisite: EG-EE 310. Single or multistage and feedback 
amplifiers; linear and digital integrated circuits. ADC and 
DAC design project. (3 hours laboratory. 1 hour lecture.) 

311 Field Theory and Transmission Lines (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 2258 and Math 2508. Electrostatics 
and magnetostatics; boundary value problems; magnetic 
materials and the magnetic circuit; magnetic induction; Max- 
well's equations and the formulation of circuit concepts; 
transmission lines. 

313 Introduction to Eiectromechanics (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 309 and 311. Electromagnetic fields 
and circuits; transformers, saturation effects. Simple elec- 
tro-mechanical systems. Circuit models, terminal character- 
istics and applications of DC and AC machines. 

313L Machine & Analog Computer Lab (1) (Formerly 375A) 
Corequisite: EG-EE 313. Filter and dynamic systems Simula- 


Electrical Engineering 


tion using analog computer: transformers and AC and DC 
machines (3 hours laboratory). 

370 Seminar in Electrical Engineering (1) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. The engineering 
profession, professional ethics, and related topics. 

384 Introduction to Electronic Design (1) 

Corequisites: EG-EE 310L, 313L. The design of electronic 
circuits and subsystems. Each student will initiate a specific 
project which will be completed under the follow-on design 
projects course. 

385 Electrical Engineering Design Projects Laboratory (2) 
Prerequisite: EG-EE 384. The application of fundamental en- 
gineering principles to typical design problems in the field 
of electrical engineering. (6 hours laboratory) 

404 Introduction to Microprocessors and Microcomputers 
(3) 

Prerequisites; EG-EE 245 and 245L. Microprocessors: LSI 
technology forM processors, MSI circuits, u processor family 
chips, system organization, cpu, system controller, clock, 
timing diagrams, ROM, RAM, DART, and Input/Output sys- 
tem. (Same as Computer Science 404) 

404L Microprocessor Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 245 and 245L. Corequisite: EG-EE 
404. Hands-on experience on microprocessor systems: 
6502 family chips, Z-80ii processor system monitor, cross- 
assembler, assembly language programming, I/O interfac- 
ing. (3 hours laboratory) 

409 Introduction to Linear Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 203, EG-CE 302 and EG-GN 308. De- 
velopment of time and frequency domain models for physical 
systems. The linearization process and representation with 
block diagrams and signal flow graphs; discrete-time sys- 
tems and digital signals including use of Z-transforms: stabil- 
ity theory of continuous and discrete time systems. 

412 Computer Architecture (3) (Formerly 506 A) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 245 and 245L. Modern architectures 
from micro and mini computer to large scale systems, their 
CPU structures, memory hierarchies and I/O processors 
such as microprogramming cache and virtual memories. 
DMA, interrupts and priority. (Same as Computer Science 
412) 

416 Feedback Control Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 409. Feedback control system charac- 
teristics; analysis and design of continuous-time systems 
using root-locus and Bode plots; stability and compensation 
of discrete-time and continuous-time systems. 

416L Feedback Control Systems Lab (2) 

Corequisite: EG-EE 416; prerequisites: EG-EE 409 or EG-ME 
376A and 411. Time and frequency responses, effects of 
state variable feedback, stability analysis by Nyquist plot, 
design by root locus techniques and computer simulation are 
performed in the laboratory by the aid of an on-line comput- 
er. (6 hours laboratory) 

420 Introduction to Digital Filtering (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 409. Sampling and quantization of con- 
tinuous signals; discrete systems: recursive and nonrecur- 
sive filters: discrete and fast Fourier transforms. 

423 Engineering Probability and Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250A. Discrete and continuous random 
variables, probability distribution and density functions, sto- 


chastic processes, correlation functions and power spectral 
densities. 

424 Computer Simulation of Continuous Systems (3) 
Prerequisites: EG-GN 205 and 308. Use of the digital com- 
puter for simulation of physical systems modeled by ordinary 
differential equations: problem formulation, in -depth analy- 
sis of two Integration methods, and the use of a general pur- 
pose system simulation program such as CSSL. 

425 Introduction to Systems Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 307 or Computer Science 35 1 . Introduc- 
tion to systems analysis based on a two-dimensional graphi- 
cal language to represent system behavior; system analysis 
procedure including sensitivity analysis; introduction to op- 
timization and modelling; computer hardware, software 
trade offs. 

442 Electronic Circuits (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 310. Power amplifiers and tuned amplifi- 
ers; RF amplifiers; modulation and detection circuits; oscil- 
lators; and operational amplifier applications. 

443 Electronic Communication Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 310 and 423. Principles of amplitude, 
angular and pulse modulation, representative communica- 
tion systems, the effects of noise on system performance. 

445 Digital Electronics (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 303 and EG-GN 308. RC circuit, at- 
tenuator. compensation and scope probe. Logic circuits; 
DTL, TTL, STTL, LSTTL and ECL fanout. Noise immunity. 
Switching speed. Power consumption. Input output charac- 
teristics. MOS logic circuits; PMOS, NMOS and CMOS 
gates. Flip-flops, shift registers and memory circuits. 

445L Pulse and Digital Circuits Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 445 (may be taken concurrently). Logic 
circuits, switching circuits, gates, timing circuits and special 
waveform generating circuits. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours labo- 
ratory) 

448 Digital Systems Design (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 303, 303L, 245, 245L. Practical as- 
pect of digital system design. MSI and LSI chips; ROM, 
PROM and RAM memories; noise, loading and termination 
problems; logic design documentation, design of computer 
interface, servo controller or data logger system. 

455 Solid State Electronics (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 303 and 311. Quantum mechanical 
principles, atomic structure, crystal structure, crystal defect 
and diffusion, lattice vibration and phonons, energy band 
theory, charge transport phenomena, free electron theory of 
metal, intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, p-n junction 
theory, transistor theory. 

497 Senior Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser and instructor. Directed In- 
dependent design project. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite; approval of study plan by adviser. Specialized 
topics in engineering selected in consultation with and com- 
pleted under the supervision of the instructor. May be re- 
peated for credit. 

503 Information Theory and Coding (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 423. Information measures, probabllis- 


Electrical Engineering 


tic studies of the transmission and encoding of informaion, 
Shannon’s fundamental theorems, coding for noisy chan- 
nels. 

504A Linear Network Synthesis (3) 

Prerequisite; EG-EE 310. Synthesis of passive element driv- 
ing-point and transfer-functions with emphasis on RC net- 
works. Basic operational amplifier RC circuits and their per- 
formance limitations, Introduction to second-order RC active 
filters. Parameter sensitivity analysis. 

504B Linear Active Networks (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE504A. Cascade realizations of RC ac- 
tive filters utilizing low-gain and infinite-gain amplifiers; 
state-variable filter realizations of high-Q filters; gyrators 
and generalized impedance converters. RC filters using ac- 
tive feedforward and feedback circuits. 

505 Non-Linear Control 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 416. Design of compensators for contin- 
uous-time and discrete-time systems: introduction to nonlin- 
ear control systems; phase-plane analysis; applications of 
Lyapunov stability theory to design. 

507 Detection Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 580. Formulation of decision rules for 
the detection of signals In a noisy environment, optimum re- 
ceivers. Estimation of parameters of detected signals. Esti- 
mation theory. 

513 Optimal Control Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 681. Formulation of optimal control 
problems; the calculus of variations; the maximum principle; 
studies of minimum-time and minimum-energy problems; dy- 
namic programming. 

514 Introduction to Optical Electronics (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 311. Review of Maxwell’s equations. 
Propagation, optical resonators. Interaction of radiation and 
atomic systems, laser oscillations, laser systems, noise In 
optical systems, detection of optical radiation, optical com- 
munication systems, holography. 

515 Advanced Control Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 416. Pole-zero placement for closed- 
loop systems. State reconstruction with observer systems. 
Bode and root locus analysis of state variable feedback sys- 
tems. Optimal design with a quadratic performance index. 
Multiple-input multiple-output system eigen-structure. 

518A Digital Signal Processing I (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 420. Discrete-time signals, discrete- 
time random signals, spectral analysis, generation and 
shaping of pseudorandom signals, Fll and FIR realization, 
poser spectrum estimation. 

518B Digital Signal Processing II (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 420. Flow graph and matrix representa- 
tion of digital filters, finite word length effect in digital filters, 
two-dimensional signal processing, applications to speech 
processing, homomorphic signal processing. 

519 Multiprocessing and Computer Networks (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 412. Advanced topics in computer ar- 
chitecture design to increase computing through-put and ef- 
ficiency through multiprocessing, ditributed processing, ar- 
ray and pipeline processors, and computer networks. 

523A Solid State Devices and Integrated Circuits (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 455. Solid state fabrication technolo- 
gies: diffusion, epitaxy, metallization, photo-lithography. 


Solid state device design principles; diodes, transistors. 
FETS, linear integrated circuits, digital integrated circuits. 

523B Large Scale Integrated Circuits (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 245 and 523A. Design and analysis of 
large scale integrated circuits, p- and n-channel MOS cir- 
cuits; complementary MOS circuits; static and dynamic cir- 
cuits; integrated injection logic circuits; shift register de- 
sign; read-only memory and random access memory design; 
computer-aided and other logic circuit design. 

527 Fault Diagnosis and Finite Automata (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 307. Advanced logic design, threshold 
and quadded logic, asynchronous circuits, pulse and funda- 
mental modes, sequential machines, fault detection and di- 
agnosis of digital systems, and finite state recognizers. 

528 Computer Memories (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 307 and 445. Physics, design archi- 
tectures and applications of computer memories including 
semiconductors such as CCD, bi polar, MOS, CMOS, NMOS 
and ECL; and magnetic devices such as core, bubble, thin 
films and plated wire. 

531 Phase-Locked and Frequency Feedback Systems (3) 
Prerequisite: EG-EE 580 or consent of instructor. Theory of 
noise and linear systems. FM feedback principles. Theory 
and design of phase-locked loops and their applications in 
communication and control. 

557 Microprogramming and Emulation (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 307. An Introduction to microprogram- 
ming concepts and applications to the control unit of a com- 
puter. digital control systems, interpretations, translation 
and emulations. (Same as Computer Science 557) 

558A Microprocessors and System Applications I (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 404 and 404L. Microprocessors and 
microcomputers, their related software systems, system de- 
sign with microprocessors, applicants in peripheral control- 
lers, communication devices and multiprocessing systems. 

558B Microprocessors and Systems Applications II (3) 

Prerequisite /corequisite: EG-EE 558A. Architecture and 
appplication of 16-bit microprocessors, such as the Z8002, 
the 8086 and the 68000 including interfacing, data paths, 
busses, instruction sets. DMA, and I/O. 

559 Introduction to Robotics (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-EE 404. The science of robotics from an 
electrical engineering hardware standpoint, including ma- 
chine vision, mobility, sensing, control, arm manipulation, 
voice synthesis, and motions. 

559L Robotics Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: EE-EE 558B, Computer Science 471. Core- 
quisite: EG-EE 559. The design and construction of a pro- 
grammable manipulator and development of the necessary 
circuits to make "intelligent”. (3 hours laboratory) 

572 Topics In Control Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 581 and consent of Instructor. Offered 
once each year with course content varied. Topics: system 
identification, numerical methods for optimal control compu- 
tations. nonlinear system theory, and advanced digital con- 
trol. May be repeated for credit with consent of instructor. 

580 Analysis of Random Signals (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 409 and 423. Random processes per- 
tinent to communications, controls and other physical appli- 


Electrical Engineering 


cations, Markov sequences and processes, the orthogonali- 
ty principle. 

581 Theory of Linear Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 403 and EG-EE 416. State space anal- 
ysis, linear spaces, stability of systems; numerical methods 
of linear systems analysis and design. 

582 Linear Estimation Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 580 and 581. Mathematical models of 
continuous-time and discrete -time stochastic processes; 
the Kalman filter, smoothing and suboptimal filtering compu- 
tational studies. 

585 Optimization Techniques in Systems Engineering (3) 
Prerequisite: EG-GN 403. Calculus of variations, optimiza- 
tion of functions of several variables, Lagrange multipliers, 
gradient techniques, linear programming, and the simplex 
method, nonlinear and dynamic programming. 


587 Operational Analysis Techniques in Systems 
Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 423 and 585. Operational research 
models; applications of probability theory to reliability, qual- 
ity control, waiting line theory, Markov chains; Monte Carlo 
methods. 


597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser. Classified graduate stu- 
dents only. 


598 Thesis (1-6) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser. Classified graduate stu- 
dents only. 


599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 
Prerequisite: Consent of adviser. May 
credit. 


be repeated for 


Electrical Engineering 


Department of 
Mechanical Engineering 

Department Chair: Timothy W. Lancey 
Department Office: Engineering 100H 

Faculty 

Munir El-Saden, Krishna Kammula, Jesa Kreiner, 

Sundaram Krishnamurthy, Timothy Lancey, Peter 
Othmer, Alexander Pomerantsev, James Rizza, 

Hasan Sehitoglu, Edward Sowell, Floyd Thomas, 

Andrew Wortman. 

Advisers: 

Undergraduate program adviser: Jesa Kreiner 
Graduate program adviser: Timothy Lancey 

INTRODUCTiON 

Mechanical engineers are employed in a wide range 
of professional activities. At one end of the spectrum 
they are concerned with engineering science and re- 
search. As research engineers they encounter a 
wide variety of scientific and technical problems; 
therefore graduate study is recommended for this 
type of engineer. At the other end of the spectrum 
the mechanical engineer is concerned with hard- 
ware development, including the design of mechani- 
cal components and systems, fabrication, manufac- 
turing, reliability and testing. The work performed by 
mechanical engineers varies from general engineer- 
ing to highly specialized functions, e.g., design, 
product development, construction, maintenance, 
sales, research and management. Mechanical engi- 
neers need a firm understanding of science, mathe- 
matics and engineering to carry out these complex 
tasks which are so important to a modern technolog- 
ical society. 

The curriculum In mechanical engineering at the un- 
dergraduate level is intended to provide a broad 
base of science, mathematics and engineering sci- 
ence. coupled with a sufficient amount of concentra- 
tion in mechanical engineering courses to initiate a 
successful career in the mechanical engineering 
profession. This Is achieved by providing the correct 
balance among the many aspects of engineering ed- 
ucation. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 
OPTION IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 

Mathematics and science foundation courses 
(36 units) See “Departments of Engineering’* 

Engineering core courses 

(24 units) See “Departments of Engineering” 


254 


Mechanical Engineering 


Upper-Division Writing Requirement. 

In addition to the Examination in Writing Proficiency 
(EWP) the following courses are required by all me- 
chanical engineering majors: EG-ME 306A, 306B, 
376A and 376B. Written work for these courses must 
meet professional standards. 

Required Courses for Option in Mechanical 
Engineering (34 units) 

EG-ME 202 Material Science (3) 

EG-CE 301 Mechanics of Materials (3) 

EG-EE 300 Electronic Instrumentation (3) 

EG-EE 300L Electronics Instrumentation Lab (1) 
EG-ME 306B Unified Laboratory (2) 

EG-ME 333 Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics (3) 
EG-ME 335 Introduction to Mechanical Design (3) 
EG-ME 336L Mechanical Analysis Laboratory (1) 

EG-ME 370 Seminar in Engineering (1) 


Manufacturing (3) 

EG-ME 476 Acoustics and Noise Control (3) 
EG-ME 480 Human Factors In Design (3) 

Thermal and Fluids Engineering: 

EG-ME 316 Intermediate Thermodynamics (3) 
EG-ME 340L Microcomputers In Mechanical 
Engineering (2) 

EG-ME 415 Gas Dynamics (3) 

EG-ME 422 Applied Tribology (3) 

EG-ME 447 Piping Selection and Piping Network 
Design (3) 

EG-ME 451 Thermal Environmental Conditioning 
and Control (3) 

^G-ME 452 Fluid Machinery (3 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 
OPTION IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 


EG-ME 376A Mechanical Engineering Lab (2) 
EG-ME 376B Mechanical Engineering Lab (2) 
EG-ME 407 Heat Transfer (3) 

EG-ME 421 Mechanical Design (3) 

EG-ME 421L Mechanical Design Laboratory (1) 
EG-ME 431 Mechanical Vibrations (3) 

Technical Electives for Option in Mechanical 
Engineering (11 units) 

Before enrolling in any elective course approval of 
the adviser must be obtained. 

Power and Energy: 

EG-ME 316 Intermediate Thermodynamics (3) 
EG-ME 340L Microcomputers in Mechanical 
Engineering 

EG-ME 434 Energy Coaversion and Power (3) 
EG-ME 447 Piping Selection and Piping Network 
Design (3) 

EG-ME 449 Internal Combustion Engines (3) 
EG-ME 450 Power Plant Engineering (3) 

EG-ME 451 Thermal Environmental Conditioning 
and Control (3) 

EG-ME 452 Fluid Machinery (3) 

EG-ME 472 Solar Energy and Engineering 
Applications (3) 

EG-ME 473 Introduction to Nuclear Engineering (3) 


Design and Materials: 


EG-ME 320 Metallurgy (3) 

EG-ME 322L Intro to Computer Aided Design (2) 
EG-ME 331 Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3) 
EG-ME 340L Microcomputers in Mechanical 
Engineering (2) 

EG-ME 41 1 Mechanical Control Systems (3) 
EG-ME 469 Plastics and Other Non-Metalllcs (3) 
EG-ME 460 Failure of Engineering Materials (3) 
EG-ME 461 Fabrication Methods (3) 

EG-ME 462 Composite Materials (3) 

EG-ME 463 Robotics and Automated 


Please refer to the “Departments of Engineering” 
section for general information. The Master of Sci- 
ence program In Mechanical Engineering is intended 
to provide advanced knowledge In the field of Me- 
chanical Engineering. It is subdivided into three spe- 
cializations: Power and Energy, Design and Materi- 
als, Thermal and Fluids Engineering. A student may 
choose to specialize in one or more of these sub- 
jects depending on individual professional needs 
and goals. 

It is important the student meet with his/her aca- 
demic adviser prior to the completion of nine units 
of work in order to complete a plan of study. Failure 
to do so may result in additional unit requirements for 
the completion of the degree program. 

Mechanical Engineering 
Courses 

102 Graphical Communications (3) 

Graphics as a fundamental means of communication in de- 
sign. Development of spatial visualization. Freehand sketch- 
ing, shading, orthographic projection, oblique-isometric and 
perspective pictorials. Dimensioning, descriptive geometry, 
design procedure and design projects. (1 hour lecture. 6 
hours laboratory) 

202 Material Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Chem 120A and Physics 225A. Scientific and 
engineering principles important in selection of materials in 
design. Stress, strain, electrical and magnetic properties. 
Crystalline structure and imperfections, environmental ef- 
fects and other topics from material science. Metallic, or- 
ganic and ceramic substances. 

304 Thermodynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Chem 120A, Math 150B and Physics 225A: 
corequisite: EG-GN 205 or consent of Instructor. Energy and 
its transformation: heat and work; conservation of mass and 
energy, system properties irreversibility and availability. 
Ideal gases, heat engines and refrigeration (both ideal and 
actual). 

306A Unified Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 102, Physics 225A; corequisite: EG-GN 
205. Observations and measurements in the laboratory as 


Mechanical Engineering 


an introduction to the experimental method. Static and dy- 
namic measurements are made on simple engineering sys- 
tems (beams, columns, pendulums, gyroscopes) using me- 
chanical and electrical transducers. Report writing. (3 hours 
laboratory) 

306B Unified Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 333 and 306A. Corequisite: EG-ME 
407. Continuation of EG-ME 306A. Flow measurement tech- 
niques using orifice plates, venturlmeters. Pitot probes and 
nozzles. Temperature and pressure measurement. Experi- 
mental studies of fluid friction and heat exchanger perfor- 
mance. Role of the digital calculator and computer in data 
reduction and analysis. Formats for technical report writing. 
(1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

316 Intermediate Thermodynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 206 and EG-ME 304. Continuation of 
EG-ME 304, additional coverage of power and refrigeration 
cycles. Maxwell’s relations, mixtures of real and ideal fluids, 
chemical reactions (emphasis on combustion), phase and 
chemical equilibrium. 

320 Metallurgy (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 202. Structure and properties of metals 
and alloys, influences of mechanical and thermal treat- 
ments, plastic deformation, work hardening and recrystall- 
ization, grain growth, alloy diagrams, solution hardening, dif- 
fusion hardening, precipitation hardening, the iron-carbon 
system, composite materials, brittle, creep and fatigue fail- 
ures. 

322L Introduction to Computer Aided Design (2) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 206, EG-ME 102 and Math 260B. Com- 
mercial computer aided design systems; software to create, 
store and modify engineering drawings. Matrix transforma- 
tion techniques. Programming 2-D graphics display of sim- 
ple geometries. Economic and productivity issues. 

331 Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 202. Plastic deformation and hardening 
mechanisms, creep phenomena. Fatigue. Behavior at cryo- 
genic temperatures. Fabrication processes and their effects 
on properties. Testing of materials. 

333 Fluid Mechanics and Aerodynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 206 and EG-CE 201. Principles of fluid 
mechanics and their applications: fluid properties; statics; 
one-dimensional incompressible flow, concepts of multi- 
dimensional flows including conservation principles; simili- 
tude and dimensional analysis; elements of compressible 
flow; open channel flow. 

335 Introduction to Mechanical Design (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 205 and EG-CE 302; corequisite: EG- 
ME 335L. Kinematics and dynamics of mechanisms, design 
and analysis of linkage gears, cams, using analytical and 
graphical techniques, balancing. 

335L Mechanical Analysis Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 102; Corequisite: EG-ME 336. Analyti- 
cal and graphical techniques will be used in solving engi- 
neering type problems in mechanical design. (3 hours labo- 
ratory) 

340L Microcomputers in Mechanical Engineering (2) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 205, EG-EE 203 and upper division 
standing. Introduction to microcomputer systems— 
hardware and software components. Operating systems. 
Selected projects involving the use of design, analysis and 


data acquisition software for microcomputers. (1 hour lec- 
ture, 3 hours laboratory) 

370 Seminar in Engineering (1) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. The engineering 
profession, professional ethics, and related topics. May be 
repeated once for credit with the approval of the faculty 
chair. 

376A Mechanical Engineering Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 302, EG-EE 300, EG-ME 306A and EG- 
GN 308. Dynamic systems, vibration, acoustics and other 
mechanical subjects; analog and computer simulation of dy- 
namic systems; and automatic data acquisition. (6 hours 
laboratory) 

376B Mechanical Engineering Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 304 and 306B. Mass transfer, heat 
transfer, and thermodynamic phenomena and their interac- 
tion with mechanical systems. (6 hours laboratory) 

407 Heat Transfer (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-ME 333 and Math 260B. Principles of heat 
transfer and their applications: introduction to conductive, 
convective and radiative heat transfer; one-dimensional 
heat conduction; concepts of multi-dimensional conduction; 
convective heat transfer in conduits and external surfaces; 
radiation heat transfer; heat exchangers. 

411 Mechanical Control Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 205 and 308 and EG-CE 302. Mechan- 
ical control system design and analysis. Pneumatic, hydrau- 
lic, electromechanical actuators and devices. Stability 
criteria, root locus plots, transfer functions, introduction to 
feedback control and microprocessor applications. 

415 Gas Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-ME 304 and 333. Thermodynamics of 
compressible fluid flow, normal and oblique shocks, flow 
through converging-diverging passages, flow in ducts with 
heating or cooling, interaction of shocks and expansion 
waves. Linearized 2-D flows, supersonic wind tunnel testing. 

421 Mechanical Design (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-CE 301 and EG-ME 335; corequisite: EG- 
ME 42 1L. The application of the principles learned in me- 
chanics of rigid and deformable bodies to the proportioning 
of machine elements to engineering problems. 

421L Mechanical Design Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: EG-ME 421. Analysis, formulation and solution 
of engineering type problems encountered in mechanical de- 
sign. (3 hours laboratory) 

422 Applied Tribology (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 421 or consent of Instructor. Types of 
bearings. Rotor bearing dynamics. Bearing materials. Lubri- 
cant and bearing material selection. Fatigue and wear phe- 
nomena. 

431 Mechanical Vibrations (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 206 and 308 and EG-CE 302. Natural 
frequencies of single and multiple degrees of freedom sys- 
tems. Response to forcing functions. Vibrations of machine 
elements. Vibration isolation. Balancing of rotating ma- 
chines. 

434 Energy Conversion and Power (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-EE 3(X) and EG-ME 304. The direct con- 
version of heat to electrical energy, thermoelectric, therm- 


Mechanical Engineering 


ionic and magnetohydrodynamic devices, solar and fuel 
cells and exotic techniques. 

447 Piping Selection and Piping Network Design (3) 

Prerequisites: knowledge of fluid mechanics and strength of 
materials; consent of Instructor. Pressure losses In piping 
networks; selection of piping based upon fluid, temperature, 
pressure and economic considerations; piping connections, 
fittings and components; stress analysis; review of national 
piping codes. 

449 Internal Combustion Engines (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-ME 304 and 407. Thermodynamics of cy- 
cles for internal combustion engines, including fuels and 
combustion. Performance characteristics of various types of 
1C engines. Including the following engines: Otto, Wankel, 
Diesel and gas turbine. Exhaust analysis and pollution con- 
trol. 

450 Power Plant Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-ME 304 and 407. Engineering principles 
and design methods applicable to modern electrical power 
generation facilities. Economics, heat transfer, steam gen- 
eration. fuels and combustion, and equipment. Steam, gas. 
turbine, diesel, nuclear and hydroelectric plants are consid- 
ered. 

451 Thermal Environmental Conditioning and Control (3) 
Prerequisites: EG-ME 304 and 407. The fundamentals of 
controlling the thermal environment within enclosed spaces. 
Theory and analysis of fundamental thermodynamics relat- 
ing to thermal environmental engineering. Laboratory dem- 
onstrations of actual systems. 

452 Fluid Machinery (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-ME 304 and 333. The thermodynamics 
and fluid mechanics of flow through pumps, fans, turbines 
and compressors. Component selection and system perfor- 
mance evaluations. 

459 Plastics and Other Non-Metallics (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 202. Simplified chemistry of plastics. 
Applications. Manufacturing processes. Methods for pre- 
venting deterioration of nonmetallic materials. Composites. 
Ceramics. Refractories. Wood. Destructive and nondestruc- 
tive testing of nonmetallic materials. 

460 Failure of Engineering Materials (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 202. Imperfections In solids; fracture 
initiation and crack propagation; dislocations; yield point 
phenomenon; fatigue; creep; ultrasonic effects; radiation 
damage; stress corrosion; hydrogen embrittlement; com- 
posite materials. 

461 Fabrication Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 202. Manufacturing processes. Metal 
joining processes. Casting, forging, powder metallurgy, ma- 
chining and machining tools, finishing, coating, plating, non- 
metallic materials inspection and gaging, tolerances. 

462 Composite Materials (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-ME 202 and EG-CE 301. Application, me- 
chanical properties and fabrication studies of fiber rein- 
forced composite materials, stress analysis of laminated an- 
isotropic composite structures. Studies of special problems 
unique to composites. 

463 Robotics and Automated Manufacturing (3) 
Prerequisites: EG-ME 335 and 376A. Kinematic, dynamic, 
control and programming fundamentals associated with in- 


dustrial robots and programmable manipulators. Application 
of robotics in manufacturing, programming methods and 
sensing, artificial intelligence linkage, computer-aided de- 
sign/computer-aided manufacturing and integration of ro- 
bots into flexible manufacturing systems. 

472 Solar Energy and Engineering Applications (3) 
Prerequisites: EG-ME 304 and 407. Solar collectors, space 
heating and cooling, power production and energy storage; 
review of basic economic principles; quantification of techni- 
cal and economic performance of engineering solar sys- 
tems; mathematical analysis of system performance. 

473 Introduction to Nuclear Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in engineering. A 
review of atomic physics and nuclear fission; elementary re- 
actor theory and reactor design. 

475 Acoustics and Noise Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 226C. Basic phenomena on the propa- 
gation. absorption and generation of acoustic waves, speci- 
fication and measurement of noise, effects of noise on 
speech and behavior, legal aspects of industrial and build- 
ing noise, principles and application of noise control. 

480 Human Factors Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing In engineering. Design of prod- 
ucts and systems based on human engineering principles. 
Human capabilities and limitation of senses. Responses to 
sensory stimuli. Physiological, psychological and work fac- 
tors are evaluated for design of equipment, work methods, 
environments and standards. 

491 Analytical Methods in Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-GN 308 or consent of instructor. Differential 
equations with constant and variable coefficients; orthogo- 
nal functions; conformal mapping; potential theory; engineer- 
ing applications. 

497 Senior Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser and Instructor. Directed 
independent design project. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: approval of study plan by adviser. Specialized 
topics in engineering selected in consultation with and com- 
pleted under the supervision of the instructor. May be re- 
peated for credit. 

5(X) Nuclear Systems Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 473 or consent of Instructor. Nuclear 
systems design, analysis and operation, including: nuclear 
fuel cycle, nuclear reactor systems, safety and safeguards, 
the regulatory process fusion. 

508 Advanced Inviscid Fluid Flow (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 205 and 308 and EG-ME 333. Study of 
two- and three-dimensional potential flow theory. Sources, 
sinks, vortices, Rankine bodies, free jets, channel flow, air 
foils. Complex potential and various transformation tech- 
niques are used. 

511 Advanced Mechanical Vibrations (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-ME 431 or equivalent. Vibrations in rotat- 
ing and reciprocating machines; noise and vibration in fluid 
machinery; continuous systems; random vibrations; tran- 
sient and nonlinear vibration, computer applications. 

512 Advanced Mechanical Design (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 421. Advanced modern mechanisms. 
Analysis and synthesis of mechanisms. Computer aided de- 


Mechanical Engineering 


sign of mechanical, thermal and fluid systems. Optimization 
in design. Product producibility. 

516 Advanced Radiation Heat Transfer (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 407. Radiation heat transfer including 
the study of the geometric factor, black and real systems, 
and energy transfer In absorbing, scattering and emitting 
media, and radiation combined with other modes of energy 
transfer. 

520 Advanced Viscous Fluid Flow (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-ME 333 or equivalent. The fundamental 
equations of viscous fluid flow. Viscous drag estimation. 
Drag reduction methods. 

524 Advanced Thermodynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 316. Equilibrium and stability criteria, 
chemical thermodynamics, multiple reaction systems, ion- 
ization, equilibrium composition. Ideal gases, ideal solids, 
thermodynamic cycles. 

526 Advanced Convective Heat Transfer (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 407. Convective heat transfer; heat 
transfer in external and internal flow fields of both laminar 
and turbulent fluid flow. 

530 Advanced Strength of Materials (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 421 or consent of instructor. Energy 
methods. Castigliano’s Theorem: curved beams, beams on 
elastic support, thickwalled cylinders, shrink fits, localized 
stress, column instability, failure theories, three-dimensional 
Mohr’s circle. 

536 Advanced Conduction Heat Transfer (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 407. Conduction heat transfer; Bessel 
and Legendre functions, Fourier series solutions, heat 
sources and sinks, multidimensional problems, transient 
systems and numerical methods (finite difference and finite 
element methods). 


540 Computer Applications In Engineering Design (3) 
Prerequisite: Egr 403. Digital and analog computers in engi- 
neering design. Design methodology, model development, 
model use for parametric analysis, design optimization, per- 
formance prediction; use of existing generalized programs 
and simulation languages is emphasized. 

541 Finite Element Method for Mechanical Engineers (3) 
Prerequisites: EG-ME 407 and EG-GN 403. Matrix formula- 
tion of basic equations in steady state and transient heat 
conduction. Elements and interpolation functions. Non-linear 
problem formulation. Finite element computer programs in 
heat transfer, fluid dynamics and design. 

576 Advanced Dynamics & Control of Mechanical 
Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: EG-ME 411. Advanced study of the dynamics 
and control of mechanical systems, including: equations of 
motion, stability, solution techniques and case studies. 

592 Advanced Engineering Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: EG-GN 403 and 491 or equivalent. Partial dif- 
ferential equations in engineering, numerical techniques, in- 
tegral equations, engineering applications. 

597 Project (1-6) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser. 

598 Thesis (1-6) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: classified graduate status. Open to graduate 
students only by consent of Mechanical Engineering Gradu- 
ate Committee. May be repeated for credit only upon ap- 
proval of this committee. 


Mechanical Engineering 


Master of Science in 

Engineering 

The program is designed to increase the depth of un- 
derstanding of the student within one of the options 
(electrical engineering, mechanical engineering, civ- 
il engineering and engineering mechanics, systems 
engineering, or engineering science) without re- 
stricting the possibility of broadening the education 
outside of the immediate area. 

Admission Procedure 

1. Apply for admission to the university In graduate 
standing. 

2. Declare the objective to be a Master of Science 
in Engineering with an option In Civil and Engineer- 
ing Mechanics. Electrical, Systems, Mechanical, 
or Engineering Science. 

3. Request two official transcripts to be sent from all 
institutions attended to the Admissions and Re- 
cords office. 

Prerequisites/ Deficiencies 

An applicant must meet the university requirements 
for admission in conditionally classified graduate 
standing: a baccalaureate from an engineering 
program accredited by the Accreditation Board for 
Engineering and Technology, and a grade-point 
average of at least 2.6 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted, with some options requiring a GPA 
greater than 2.6 in the last 60 semester units. 

A student who does not have a B.S. In Engineering 
from an Accreditation Board for Engineering and 
Technology accredited program or who has a B.S. 
degree outside of engineering may need to make up 
deficiencies. 

Any deficiencies must be made up and will require 
a minimum of six units of adviser-approved courses 
prior to beginning coursework for the master’s de- 
gree. Deficiencies must be completed with at least 
a 3.0 average. 

Classified Standing 

To attain classified standing a student must: 

1. Complete all courses specified to satisfy deficien- 
cies. 

2. Meet with an adviser to set up an approved study 
plan, prior to completing nine units of postgradu- 
ate course work. 

3. Receive approval of the study plan by the depart- 
ment chair and the dean of graduate studies. Any 
subsequent changes to the study plan must have 
prior written approval of the adviser and the de- 
partment chair. 


M.S. in Engineering 


Graduate Writing Requirement 

Students who have degrees from outside the U.S.A. 
must pass the English Writing Proficiency (EWP) ex- 
amination or take and pass English 360 in their first 
semester. Students with degrees from U.S.A. univer- 
sities must show proof of meeting an upper division 
writing requirement, or take and pass the EWP or En- 
glish 360 at CSUF. 

Advancement to Candidacy 

To be advanced to candidacy: 

1. The student must request a graduation check. 

2. The graduate program adviser must submit a rec- 
ommendation to the dean of graduate studies. 

Graduation 

Final achievement of the Master of Science in Engi- 
neering requires that the classified student; 

1. Has been admitted to candidacy. 

2. Has completed 30 units of approved courses with 
an overall GPA of not less than 3.0, 

3. Has completed all the course requirements for the 
specific